Handbook of Algebra : Volume 2

HANDBOOK OF ALGEBRA VOLUME 2 Managing Editor M. H A Z E W l N K E L , Amsterdam Editorial Board M. ARTIN, Cambridge...

Author: M. Hazewinkel (Editor)

215 downloads 1898 Views 39MB Size Report

This content was uploaded by our users and we assume good faith they have the permission to share this book. If you own the copyright to this book and it is wrongfully on our website, we offer a simple DMCA procedure to remove your content from our site. Start by pressing the button below!
Report copyright / DMCA form

DOWNLOAD PDF

HANDBOOK OF ALGEBRA

VOLUME 2

Managing Editor M. H A Z E W l N K E L , Amsterdam

Editorial Board M. ARTIN, Cambridge M. NAGATA, Okayama C. PROCESI, Rome O. TAUSKY-TODD t, Pasadena R.G. SWAN, Chicago P.M. COHN, London A. DRESS, Bielefeld J. TITS, Paris N.J.A. SLOANE, Murray Hill C. FAITH, New Brunswick S.I. AD'YAN, Moscow Y. IHARA, Tokyo L. SMALL, San Diego E. MANES, Amherst I.G. M A C D O N A L D , Oxford M. MARCUS, Santa Barbara L.A. BOKUT, Novosibirsk

ELSEVIER AMSTERDAM 9LAUSANNE ~ NEW YORK 9OXFORD ~ SHANNON 9SINGAPORE ~ TOKYO

H A N D B O O K OF ALGEBRA Volume 2

edited by M. HAZEWINKEL CWI, Amsterdam

2000 ELSEVIER AMSTERDAM

9L A U S A N N E

~ NEW

YORK

~ OXFORD

~ SHANNON

9S I N G A P O R E

~ TOKYO

ELSEVIER SCIENCE B.V. Sara Burgerhartstraat 25 RO. Box 211, 1000 AE Amsterdam, The Netherlands 9 2000 Elsevier Science B.V. All rights reserved This work is protected under copyright by Elsevier Science, and the following terms and conditions apply to its use: Photocopying Single photocopies of single chapters may be made for personal use as allowed by national copyright laws. Permission of the Publisher and payment of a fee is required for all other photocopying, including multiple or systematic copying, copying for advertising or promotional purposes, resale, and all forms of document delivery. Special rates are available for educational institutions that wish to make photocopies for non-profit educational classroom use. Permissions may be sought directly from Elsevier Science Rights & Permissions Department, PO Box 800, Oxford OX5 1DX, UK; phone: (+44) 1865 843830, fax: (+44) 1865 853333, e-mail: [email protected]. You may also contact Rights & Permissions directly through Elsevier's home page (http://www.elsevier.nl), selecting first 'Customer Support', then 'General Information', then 'Permissions Query Form'. In the USA, users may clear permissions and make payments through the Copyright Clearance Center, Inc., 222 Rosewood Drive, Danvers, MA 01923, USA; phone: (978) 7508400, fax: (978) 7504744, and in the UK through the Copyright Licensing Agency Rapid Clearance Service (CLARCS), 90 Tottenham Court Road, London W 1P 0LP, UK; phone: (+44) 171 631 5555; fax: (+44) 171 631 5500. Other countries may have a local reprographic rights agency for payments. Derivative Works Tables of contents may be reproduced for internal circulation, but permission of Elsevier Science is required for external resale or distribution of such material. Permission of the Publisher is required for all other derivative works, including compilations and translations. Electronic Storage or Usage Permission of the Publisher is required to store or use electronically any material contained in this work, including any chapter or part of a chapter. Except as outlined above, no part of this work may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without prior written permission of the Publisher. Address permissions requests to: Elsevier Science Rights & Permissions Department, at the mail, fax and e-mail addresses noted above. Notice No responsibility is assumed by the Publisher for any injury and/or damage to persons or property as a matter of products liability, negligence or otherwise, or from any use or operation of any methods, products, instructions or ideas contained in the material herein. Because of rapid advances in the medical sciences, in particular, independent verification of diagnoses and drug dosages should be made. First edition 2000

Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data A catalog record from the Library of Congress has been applied for.

ISBN: 0 444 50396 X The paper used in this publication meets the requirements of ANSI/NISO Z39.48-1992 (Permanence of Paper). Printed in The Netherlands.

Preface

Basic philosophy

Algebra, as we know it today, consists of many different ideas, concepts and results. A reasonable estimate of the number of these different "items" would be somewhere between 50 000 and 200000. Many of these have been named and many more could (and perhaps should) have a "name" or a convenient designation. Even the nonspecialist is likely to encounter most of these, either somewhere in the literature, disguised as a definition or a theorem, or to hear about them and feel the need for more information. If this happens, one should be able to find at least something in this Handbook; and hopefully enough to judge if it is worthwile to pursue the quest. In addition to the primary information, references to relevant articles, books or lecture notes should help the reader to complete his understanding. To make this possible, we have provided an index which is more extensive than usual and not limited to definitions, theorems and the like. For the purpose of this Handbook, algebra has been defined, more or less arbitrarily as the union of the following areas of the Mathematics Subject Classification Scheme: - 20 (Group theory) - 19 (K-theory; will be treated at an intermediate level; a separate Handbook of K-theory which goes into far more detail than the section planned for this Handbook of Algebra is under consideration) - 18 (Category theory and homological algebra; including some of the uses of categories in computer science, often classified somewhere in section 68) - 17 (Nonassociative tings and algebras; especially Lie algebras) - 16 (Associative tings and algebras) - 15 (Linear and multilinear algebra, Matrix theory) - 13 (Commutative tings and algebras; here there is a fine line to tread between commutative algebras and algebraic geometry; algebraic geometry is not a topic that will be dealt with in this Handbook; a separate Handbook on that topic is under consideration) - 12 (Field theory and polynomials) - 11 (As far as it used to be classified under old 12 (Algebraic number theory)) - 0 8 (General algebraic systems) - 06 (Certain parts; but not topics specific to Boolean algebras as there is a separate threevolume Handbook of Boolean Algebras)

Preface

vi Planning

Originally, we hoped to cover the whole field in a systematic way. Volume 1 would be devoted to what we now call Section 1 (see below), Volume 2 to Section 2 and so on. A detailed and comprehensive plan was made in terms of topics which needed to be covered and authors to be invited. That turned out to be an inefficient approach. Different authors have different priorities and to wait for the last contribution to a volume, as planned originally, would have resulted in long delays. Therefore, we have opted for a dynamically evolving plan. This means that articles are published as they arrive and that the reader will find in this second volume articles from five different sections. The advantages of this scheme are two-fold: accepted articles will be published quickly and the outline of the series can be allowed to evolve as the various volumes are published. Suggestions from readers both as to topics to be covered and authors to be invited are most welcome and will be taken into serious consideration. The list of the sections now looks as follows: Section Section Section Section

1: 2: 3: 4:

Section Section Section Section Section

5: 6: 7: 8: 9:

Linear algebra. Fields. Algebraic number theory Category theory. Homological and homotopical algebra. Methods from logic Commutative and associative tings and algebras Other algebraic structures. Nonassociative tings and algebras. Commutative and associative tings and algebras with extra structure Groups and semigroups Representations and invariant theory Machine computation. Algorithms. Tables Applied algebra History of algebra

For a more detailed plan, the reader is referred to the Outline of the Series following the Preface.

The individual c h a p t e r s

It is not the intention that the handbook as a whole can also be a substitute undergraduate or even graduate, textbook. The treatment of the various topics will be much too dense and professional for that. Basically, the level is graduate and up, and such material as can be found in P.M. Cohn's three-volume textbook "Algebra" (Wiley) will, as a rule, be assumed. An important function of the articles in this Handbook is to provide professional mathematicians working in a different area with sufficient information on the topic in question if and when it is needed. Each chapter combines some of the features of both a graduate-level textbook and a research-level survey. Not all of the ingredients mentioned below will be appropriate in each case, but authors have been asked to include the following: - Introduction (including motivation and historical remarks)

- Outline of the chapter

Preface

vii

- Basic concepts, definitions, and results (proofs or ideas/sketches of the proofs are given when space permits) - Comments on the relevance of the results, relations to other results, and applications - Review of the relevant literature; possibly supplemented with the opinion of the author on recent developments and future directions - Extensive bibliography (several hundred items will not be exceptional)

The

present

Volume 1 appeared in December 1995 (copyright 1996). Volume 3 is scheduled for 2000. Thereafter, we aim at one volume per year.

The

future

Of course, ideally, a comprehensive series of books like this should be interactive and have a hypertext structure to make finding material and navigation through it immediate and intuitive. It should also incorporate the various algorithms in implemented form as well as permit a certain amount of dialogue with the reader. Plans for such an interactive, hypertext, CD-Rom-based version certainly exist but the realization is still a nontrivial number of years in the future.

Bussum, June 1999

Michiel Hazewinkel

Kaum nennt man die Dinge beim richtigen Namen, so verlieren sie ihren gef~ihrlichen Zauber (You have but to know an object by its proper name for it to lose its dangerous magic) E. Canetti

This Page Intentionally Left Blank

Outline of the Series (as of June 1999)

Philosophy and principles of the Handbook of Algebra Compared to the outline in Volume 1 this version differs in several aspects. First, there is a major shift in emphasis away from completeness as far as more elementary material is concerned and towards more emphasis on recent developments and active areas. Second, the plan is now more dynamic in that there is no longer a fixed list of topics to be covered, determined long in advance. Instead there is a more flexible nonrigid list that can change in response to new developments and availability of authors. The new policy is therefore to work with a dynamic list of topics that should be covered, to arrange these in sections and larger groups according to the major divisions into which algebra falls, and to publish collections of contributions as they become available from the invited authors. The coding by style below is as follows.

- Author(s) in bold, followed by the article title: chapters (articles) that have been received and are published or ready for publication; - italic: chapters (articles) that are being written. - plain text: topics that should be covered but for which no author has yet been definitely contracted. - chapters that are included in volume 1 or volume 2 have a (1; xx pp.) or (2; xx pp.) after them, where xx is the number of pages. Compared to the earlier outline the section on "Representation and invariant theory" has been thoroughly revised.

Section 1. Linear algebra. Fields. Algebraic number theory A. Linear Algebra G.P. Egorychev, Van der Waerden conjecture and applications (1; 22 pp.) u Girko, Random matrices (1; 52 pp.) A. N. Malyshev, Matrix equations. Factorization of matrices (1; 38 pp.) L. Rodman, Matrix functions (1; 38 pp.) Linear inequalities (also involving matrices) ix

x

Outline of the series Orderings (partial and total) on vectors and matrices Positive matrices Special kinds of matrices such as Toeplitz and Hankel Integral matrices. Matrices over other rings and fields

B. Linear (In)dependence

J.ES. Kung, Matroids (1; 28 pp.) C. Algebras Arising from Vector Spaces Clifford algebras, related algebras, and applications D. Fields, Galois Theory, and Algebraic Number Theory

(There is also an article on ordered fields in Section 4) J.K. Deveney and J.N. Mordeson, Higher derivation Galois theory of inseparable field extensions (1; 34 pp.) I. Fesenko, Complete discrete valuation fields. Abelian local class field theories (1; 48 pp.) M. Jarden, Infinite Galois theory (1; 52 pp.) R. Lidl and H. Niederreiter, Finite fields and their applications (1; 44 pp.) W. Narkiewicz, Global class field theory (1; 30 pp.) H. van Tilborg, Finite fields and error correcting codes (1; 28 pp.) Skew fields and division rings. Brauer group Topological and valued fields. Valuation theory Zeta and L-functions of fields and related topics Structure of Galois modules Constructive Galois theory (realizations of groups as Galois groups) E. Nonabelian Class Field Theory and the Langlands Program

(To be arranged in several chapters by Y. Ihara) F. Generalizations of Fields and Related Objects

U. Hebisch and H.J. Weinert, Semi-tings and semi-fields (1; 38 pp.) G. Pilz, Near rings and near fields (1; 36 pp.)

Section 2. Category theory. Homological and homotopical algebra. Methods from logic A. Category Theory

S. MacLane and I. Moerdijk, Topos theory (1; 28 pp.) R. Street, Categorical structures (1; 50 pp.) Algebraic theories B. Plotkin, Algebra, categories and databases (2; 68 pp.) P.J. Scott, Some aspects of categories in computer science (2; 73 pp.)

Outline of the series

xi

B. Homological Algebra. Cohomology. Cohomological Methods in Algebra. Homotopical Algebra J.E Carlson, The cohomology of groups (1; 30 pp.) A. Generalov, Relative homological algebra. Cohomology of categories, posets, and coalgebras (1; 28 pp.) J.E Jardine, Homotopy and homotopical algebra (1; 32 pp.) B. Keller, Derived categories and their uses (1; 32 pp.) A.Ya. I-Ielemsldi, Homology for the algebras of analysis (2; 122 pp.) Galois cohomology Cohomology of commutative and associative algebras Cohomology of Lie algebras Cohomology of group schemes

C. Algebraic K-theory Algebraic K-theory: the classical functors K0, K1, K2 Algebraic K-theory: the higher K-functors Grothendieck groups K2 and symbols K K-theory and EXT Hilbert C*-modules Index theory for elliptic operators over C* algebras Algebraic K-theory (including the higher Kn) Simplicial algebraic K-theory Chern character in algebraic K-theory Noncommutative differential geometry K-theory of noncommutative tings Algebraic L-theory Cyclic cohomology D. Model Theoretic Algebra Methods of logic in algebra (general) Logical properties of fields and applications Recursive algebras Logical properties of Boolean algebras E Wagner, Stable groups (2; 40 pp.) E. Rings up to Homotopy Rings up to homotopy

Section 3. Commutative and associative rings and algebras

A. Commutative Rings and Algebras J.E Lafon, Ideals and modules (1; 24 pp.)


xii

General theory. Radicals, prime ideals etc. Local rings (general). Finiteness and chain conditions Extensions. Galois theory of rings Modules with quadratic form Homological algebra and commutative tings. Ext, Tor, etc. Special properties (p.i.d., factorial, Gorenstein, Cohen-Macauley, Bezout, Fatou, Japanese, excellent, Ore, Prtifer, Dedekind . . . . and their interrelations) D. Popeseu, Artin approximation (2; 34 pp.) Finite commutative tings and algebras. (See also Section 3B) Localization. Local-global theory Rings associated to combinatorial and partial order structures (straightening laws, Hodge algebras, shellability . . . . ) Witt rings, real spectra

B. Associative Rings and Algebras P.M. Cohn, Polynomial and power series rings. Free algebras, firs and semifirs (1; 30 pp.) Classification of Artinian algebras and rings u Kharchenko, Simple, prime, and semi-prime tings (1; 52 pp.) A. van den Essen, Algebraic microlocalization and modules with regular singularities over filtered tings (1; 28 pp.) F. Van Oystaeyen, Separable algebras (2; 43 pp.) K. Yamagata, Frobenius tings (1; 48 pp.) V.K. Kharchenko, Fixed tings and noncommutative invariant theory (2; 38 pp.) General theory of associative rings and algebras Rings of quotients. Noncommutative localization. Torsion theories von Neumann regular rings Semi-regular and pi-regular rings Lattices of submodules A.A. Tuganbaev, Modules with distributive submodule lattice (2; 16 pp.) A.A. Tuganbaev, Serial and distributive modules and tings (2; 19 pp.) PI rings Generalized identities Endomorphism rings, tings of linear transformations, matrix tings Homological classification of (noncommutative) rings Group rings and algebras Dimension theory Duality. Morita-duality Commutants of differential operators Rings of differential operators Graded and filtered rings and modules (also commutative) Goldie's theorem, Noetherian tings and related rings Sheaves in ring theory A.A. Tuganbaev, Modules with the exchange property and exchange tings (2; 19 pp.)


xiii

Finite associative rings (see also Section 3A) C. Co-algebras D. Deformation Theory of Rings and Algebras (Including Lie Algebras)

Deformation theory of rings and algebras (general) Yu. Khakimdjanov, Varieties of Lie algebras (2; 31 pp.)

Section 4. Other algebraic structures. Nonassociative rings and algebras. Commutative and associative algebras with extra structure A. Lattices and Partially Ordered Sets

Lattices and partially ordered sets Frames, locales, quantales B. Boolean Algebras C. Universal Algebra D. Varieties of Algebras, Groups, ... (See also Section 3D)

V.A. Artamonov, Varieties of algebras (2; 29 pp.) Varieties of groups Quasi-varieties Varieties of semigroups E. Lie Algebras Yu.A. Bahturin, A.A. Mikhalev and M. Zaicev, Infinite-dimensional Lie superalgebras (2; 34 pp.) General structure theory Free Lie algebras Classification theory of semisimple Lie algebras over R and C The exceptional Lie algebras M. Goze and Yu. Khakimdjanov, Nilpotent and solvable Lie algebras (2; 47 pp.) Universal envelopping algebras Modular (ss) Lie algebras (including classification) Infinite-dimensional Lie algebras (general) Kac-Moody Lie algebras F. Jordan Algebras (Finite and infinite dimensional and including their cohomology theory) G. Other Nonassociative Algebras (Malcev, alternative, Lie admissable . . . . ) Mal'tsev algebras Alternative algebras

xiv


H. Rings and Algebras with Additional Structure Graded and super algebras (commutative, associative; for Lie superalgebras, see Section 4E) Topological tings Hopf algebras Quantum groups Formal groups )~-rings, V-tings . . . . Ordered and lattice-ordered groups, tings and algebras Rings and algebras with involution. C*-algebras Difference and differential algebra. Abstract (and p-adic) differential equations. Differential extensions Ordered fields L Witt Vectors Witt vectors and symmetric functions. Leibniz Hopf algebra and quasi-symmetic functions

Section 5. Groups and semigroups A. Groups A.u Mikhalev and A.P. Mishina, Infinite Abelian groups: Methods and results (2; 36 pp.) Simple groups, sporadic groups Abstract (finite) groups. Structure theory. Special subgroups. Extensions and decompositions Solvable groups, nilpotent groups, p-groups Infinite soluble groups Word problems Burnside problem Combinatorial group theory Free groups (including actions on trees) Formations Infinite groups. Local properties Algebraic groups. The classical groups. Chevalley groups Chevalley groups over rings The infinite dimensional classical groups Other groups of matrices. Discrete subgroups Reflection groups. Coxeter groups Groups with BN-pair, Tits buildings . . . . Groups and (finite combinatorial) geometry "Additive" group theory Probabilistic techniques and results in group theory Braid groups


xv

B. Semigroups Semigroup theory. Ideals, radicals, structure theory Semigroups and automata theory and linguistics

C. Algebraic Formal Language Theory. Combinatorics of Words D. Loops, Quasigroups, Heaps . . . . E. Combinatorial Group Theory and Topology Section 6. Representation and invariant theory

A. Representation Theory. General Representation theory of tings, groups, algebras (general) Modular representation theory (general) Representations of Lie groups and Lie algebras. General

B. Representation Theory of Finite and Discrete Groups and Algebras Representation theory of finite groups in characteristic zero Modular representation theory of finite groups. Blocks Representation theory of the symmetric groups (both in characteristic zero and modular) Representation theory of the finite Chevalley groups (both in characteristic zero and modular Modular representation theory of Lie algebras

C. Representation Theory of 'Continuous Groups' (Linear Algebraic Groups, Lie Groups, Loop Groups . . . . ) and the Corresponding Algebras Representation theory of compact topolgical groups Representation theory of locally compact topological groups Representation theory of SL2 (R) . . . . Representation theory of the classical groups. Classical invariant theory Classical and transcendental invariant theory Reductive groups and their representation theory Unitary representation theory of Lie groups Finite-dimensional representation theory of the ss Lie algebras (in characteristic zero); structure theory of semi-simple Lie algebras Infinite dimensional representation theory of ss Lie algebras. Verma modules Representation of Lie algebras. Analytic methods Representations of solvable and nilpotent Lie algebras. The Kirillov orbit method Orbit method, Dixmier map . . . . for ss Lie algebras Representation theory of the exceptional Lie groups and Lie algebras Representation theory of 'classical' quantum groups A.U. Klimyk, Infinite-dimensional representations of quantum algebras (2; 27 pp.) Duality in representation theory


xvi

Representation theory of loop groups and higher dimensional analogues, gauge groups, and current algebras Representation theory of Kac-Moody algebras Invariants of nonlinear representations of Lie groups Representation theory of infinite-dimensional groups like GLc~ Metaplectic representation theory

D. Representation Theory of Algebras Representations of tings and algebras by sections of sheafs Representation theory of algebras (Quivers, Auslander-Reiten sequences, almost split sequences . . . . )

E. Abstract and Functorial Representation Theory Abstract representation theory S. Bouc, Burnside tings (2; 64 pp.) P. Webb, A guide to Mackey functors (2; 30 pp.) E Representation Theory and Combinatorics G. Representations of Semigroups Representation of discrete semigroups Representations of Lie semigroups

Section 7. Machine computation. Algorithms. Tables Some notes on this volume: Besides some general article(s) on machine computation in algebra, this volume should contain specific articles on the computational aspects of the various larger topics occurring in the main volume, as well as the basic corresponding tables. There should also be a general survey on the various available symbolic algebra computation packages.

The CoCoA computer algebra system

Section 8. Applied algebra Section 9. History of algebra

Contents

Preface Outline of the Series

ix

List of Contributors

xix

1

Section 2A. Category Theory P.J. Scott, Some aspects of categories in computer science B. Plotkin, Algebra, categories and databases Section 2B. Homological Algebra. Cohomology. Cohomological Methods in Algebra. Homotopical Algebra A. Ya. Helemskii, Homology for the algebras of analysis Section 2D. Model Theoretic Algebra F. Wagner, Stable groups

3 79

149 151

275 277

Section 3A. Commutative Rings and Algebras D. Popescu, Artin approximation

319 321

Section 3B. Associative Rings and Algebras V.K. Kharchenko, Fixed tings and noncommutative invariant theory A.A. Tuganbaev, Modules with distributive submodule lattice A.A. Tuganbaev, Serial and semidistributive modules and tings A.A. Tuganbaev, Modules with the exchange property and exchange tings E Van Oystaeyen, Separable algebras Section 3D. Deformation Theory of Rings and Algebras Yu. Khakimdjanov, Varieties of Lie algebra laws xvii

357 359 399 417 439 461

507 509

Contents

xviii

Section 4D. Varieties of Algebras, Groups . . . . V.A. Artamonov, Varieties of algebras

543 545

Section 4E. Lie Algebras 577 Yu. Bahturin, A.A. Mikhalev and M. Zaicev, Infinite-dimensional Lie superalgebras

M. Goze and Yu. Khakimdjanov, Nilpotent and solvable Lie algebras

579 615

Section 5A. Groups and Semigroups 665 A.V. Mikhalev and A.P. Mishina, Infinite Abelian groups: Methods and results

667

Section 6C. Representation Theory of 'Continuous Groups' (Linear Algebraic Groups, Lie Groups, Loop Groups . . . . ) and the Corresponding Algebras 705 707 A.U. Klimyk, Infinite-dimensional representations of quantum algebras Section 6E. Abstract and Functorial Representation Theory S. Bouc, Burnside tings P. Webb, A guide to Mackey functors Subject Index

737 739 805

837

List of Contributors Artamonov, V.A., Moscow State University, Moscow Bahturin, Yu., Memorial University of Newfoundland, St. John's, NF, and Moscow State University, Moscow

Bouc, S., University Paris 7-Denis Diderot, Paris Goze, M., Universit~ de Haute Alsace, Mulhouse Helemskii, A.Ya., Moscow State University, Moscow Khakimdjanov, Yu., Universit~ de Haute Alsace, Mulhouse Kharchenko, V.K., Universidad Nacional Aut6noma de M~xico, M(xico, and Sobolev Institute of Mathematics, Novosibirsk

Klimyk, A.U., Institute for Theoretical Physics, Kiev Mikhalev, A.A., The University of Hong Kong, Pokfulam Road Mikhalev, A.V., Moscow State University, Moscow Mishina, A.E, Moscow State University, Moscow Plotkin, B., Hebrew University, Jerusalem Popescu, D., University of Bucharest, Bucharest Scott, EJ., University of Ottawa, Ottawa, ON Tuganbaev, A.A., Moscow State University, Moscow Van Oystaeyen, E, University of Antwerp, Wilrijk Wagner, E, University of Oxford, Oxford Webb, E, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, MN Zaicev, M., Moscow State University, Moscow

xix


Section 2A Category Theory


Some Aspects of Categories in Computer Science EJ. Scott Department of Mathematics, University of Ottawa, Ottawa, Ontario, Canada

Contents 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

2. Categories, l a m b d a calculi, and f o r m u l a s - a s - t y p e s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

2.1. Cartesian closed categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2. S i m p l y t y p e d l a m b d a calculi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5 10

2.3. F o r m u l a s - a s - t y p e s : T h e f u n d a m e n t a l equivalence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4. P o l y m o r p h i s m . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13 19

2.5. T h e u n t y p e d w o r l d

24

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.6. L o g i c a l relations and logical p e r m u t a t i o n s

...............................

2.7. E x a m p l e 1: R e d u c t i o n - f r e e n o r m a l i z a t i o n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.8. E x a m p l e 2: P C F . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Parametricity

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.1. Dinaturality

27 29 33 36

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37

3.2. R e y n o l d s parametricity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. L i n e a r logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

42 44

4.1. M o n o i d a l categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

44

4.2. G e n t z e n ' s p r o o f theory

47

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3. W h a t is a categorical m o d e l of L L ?

...................................

5. Full c o m p l e t e n e s s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1. R e p r e s e n t a t i o n t h e o r e m s

....................

5.2. Full c o m p l e t e n e s s t h e o r e m s

'.....................

52 54 54

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

55

6. F e e d b a c k and trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

58

6.1. T r a c e d m o n o i d a l categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.2. Partially additive categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

58 61

6.3. GoI categories . . . . . . . . . . . .

65

...................................

7. Literature notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

66

References

68

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H A N D B O O K OF A L G E B R A , VOL. 2 Edited by M. H a z e w i n k e l 9 2000 Elsevier S c i e n c e B.V. All rights r e s e r v e d


Some aspects of categories in computer science

5

1. Introduction Over the past 25 years, category theory has become an increasingly significant conceptual and practical tool in many areas of computer science. There are major conferences and journals devoted wholly or partially to applying categorical methods to computing. At the same time, the close connections of computer science to logic have seen categorical logic (developed in the 1970's) fruitfully applied in significant ways in both theory and practice. Given the rapid and enormous development of the subject and the availability of suitable graduate texts and specialized survey articles, we shall only examine a few of the areas that appear to the author to have conceptual and mathematical interest to the readers of this Handbook. Along with the many references in the text, the reader is urged to examine the final section (Literature Notes) where we reference omitted important areas, as well as the Bibliography. We shall begin by discussing the close connections of certain closed categories with typed lambda calculi on the one hand, and with the proof theory of various logics on the other. It cannot be overemphasized that modem computer science heavily uses formal syntax but we shall try to tread lightly. The so-called Curry-Howard isomorphism (which identifies formal proofs with lambda terms, hence with arrows in certain free categories) is the cornerstone of modem programming language semantics and simply cannot be overlooked. NOTATION. We often elide composition symbols, writing g f : A ~ C for g o f : A ~ C, whenever f :A --+ B and g : B ~ C. To save some space, we have omitted large numbers of routine diagrams, which the reader can find in the sources referenced.

2. Categories, lambda calculi, and formulas-as-types 2.1. Cartesian closed categories Cartesian closed categories (ccc's) were developed in the 1960's by F.W. Lawvere [Law66, Law69]. Both Lawvere and Lambek [L74] stressed their connections to Church's lambda calculus, as well as to intuitionistic proof theory. In the 1970's, work of Dana Scott and Gordon Plotkin established their fundamental role in the semantics of programming languages. A precise equivalence between these three notions (ccc's, typed lambda calculi, and intuitionistic proof theory) was published in Lambek and Scott [LS86]. We recall the appropriate definitions: DEFINITION 2.1. (i) A Cartesian category C is a category with distinguished finite products (equivalently, binary products and a terminal object 1). This says there are isomorphisms (natural in A, B, C) H o m c ( A , 1) ~ {.}, H o m e ( C , A x B) ~ H o m e ( C , A) x H o m c ( C , B).

(1) (2)

6

P.J. Scott

(ii) A Cartesian closed category C is a Cartesian category C such that, for each object A c C, the functor ( - ) • A :C --+ C has a specified fight adjoint, denoted (_)A. That is, there is an isomorphism (natural in B and C)

(3)

H o m c ( C x A , B) ~ H o m e ( C , B A ) .

For many purposes in computer science, it is often useful to have categories with explicitly given strict structure along with strict functors that preserve everything on the nose. We may present such ccc's equationally, in the spirit of multisorted universal algebra. The arrows and equations are summarized in Figure 1. These equations determine the isomorphisms (1), (2), and (3). In this presentation we say the structure is strict, meaning there is only one object representing each of the above constructs 1, A • B, BA. The exponential object B A is often called the f u n c t i o n space of A and B. In the computer science literaf* ture, the function space is often denoted A =, B, while the arrow C ~ B A is often called currying of f . REMARK 2.2. Following most categorical logic and computer science literature, we do not assume ccc's have finite limits [Law69,LS86,AC98,Mit96]), in order to keep the correspondence with simply typed lambda calculi, cf. Theorem 2.20 below. Earlier books (cf. [Mac71 ]) do not always follow this convention. Let us list some useful examples of Cartesian closed categories: for details see [LS86, Mit96,Mac71]

Objects Terminal 1

Distinguished Arrow(s) A

!A

~1

Equations

!A = f , f:A--+

Products A x B

Exponentials B A

A,B ~1 "A• z r A ' B . A x B---~ B

~TI 0 ( f ,

g)

l = f

:rr2 o (f, g ) = g

c J_La c ~_~8 c(f'~ A • B

(yrl oh, n'2 o h ) = h ,

eVA,B : IJ • A --+ B CxA f--~B f* B A C----~

ev o (f* o n'l, n'2) = f

Fig. 1. CCC's equationally.

h:C--+ A x B

(ev o (g o Zrl, 71"2))* = g, g : C --+ B a


7

EXAMPLE 2.3. The category Set of sets and functions. Here A x B is a chosen Cartesian product and BA is the set of functions from A to B. The map BA x A ev> B is the usual f* evaluation map, while currying C ~ B A is the map c ~-~ (a ~-~ f (c, a)). An important subfamily of examples are Henkin models which are ccc's in which the terminal object 1 is a generator ([Mit96], Theorem 7.2.41). More concretely, for a lambda calculus signature with freely generated types (cf. Section 2.13 below), a Henkin model r is a type-indexed family of sets ,4 = {A~ I cr a type} where A1 = {.}, A~ • r = A,r x A r, A ~ r ___AA~ which forms a ccc with respect to restriction of the usual ccc structure of Set. In the case of atomic base sorts b, r is some fixed but arbitrary set. A full type hierarchy is a Henkin model with full function spaces, i.e. Acr=,r -- A A~ 9 EXAMPLE 2.4. More generally, the functor category Set c~ of presheaves on C is Cartesian closed. Its objects are (contravariant) functors from C to Set, and its arrows are natural transformations between them. We sketch the ccc structure: given F, G E Set r176 define F x G pointwise on objects and arrows. Motivated by Yoneda's Lemma, define G F (A) = Nat(h A x F, G), where h A = H o m ( A , - ) . This easily extends to a functor. Fi0* nally if H x F 0 G, define H > G F by: 0~(a)c(h, c) = O c ( H ( h ) ( a ) , c). Functor categories have been used in studying problematic semantical issues in Algollike languages [Rey81,O185,OHT92,Ten94], as well as recently in concurrency theory and models of Jr-calculus [CSW,CaWi]. Special cases of presheaves have been studied extensively [Mit96,LS86]: 9 Let C be a poset (qua trivial category). Then Set C~ the category of Kripke models over C, may be identified with sets indexed (or graded) by the poset C. Such models are fundamental in intuitionistic logic [LS86,TrvD88] and also arise in Kripke Logical Relations, an important tool in semantics of programming languages [Mit96,OHT93, OHRi]. 9 Let C = O ( X ) , the poset of opens of the topological space X. The subcategory S h ( X ) of sheaves on X is Cartesian closed. 9 Let C be a monoid M (qua category with one object). Then Set c~ is the category of M-sets, i.e. sets X equipped with a left action; equivalently, a monoid homomorphism M ~ E n d ( X ) , where E n d ( X ) is the monoid of endomaps of X. Morphisms of M-sets X and Y are equivariant maps (i.e. functions commuting with the action.) A special case of this is when M is actually a group G (qua category with one object, where all maps are isos). In that case Set c~ is the category of G-sets, the category of permutational representations of G. Its objects are sets X equipped with left actions G --+ S y m ( X ) and whose morphisms are equivariant maps. We shall return to these examples when we speak of Latichli semantics and Full Completeness, Section 5.2 EXAMPLE 2.5. co-CPO. Objects are posets P such that countable ascending chains a0 ~< a l ~< a2 ~< -.. have suprema. Morphisms are maps which preserve suprema of countable ascending chains (in particular, are order preserving). This category is a ccc, with products P x Q ordered pointwise and QP = H o m ( P , Q), ordered pointwise. In this case, the categories are ~o-CPO-enriched- i.e. the hom-sets themselves form an co-CPO, com-

8

P.J. Scott

patible with composition. An important subccc is co-CPO_L, in which all objects have a distinguished minimal element _L (but morphisms need not preserve it). The category o9-CPO is the most basic example in a vast research area, domain theory, which has arisen since 1970. This area concerns the denotational semantics of programming languages and models of untyped lambda calculi (cf. Section 2.5 below). See also the survey article [AbJu94]. EXAMPLE 2.6. Coherent spaces and stable maps. A Coherent Space .A is a family of sets satisfying: (i) a 6 .A and b c a implies b 6 .A, and (ii) if B _ .A and if u c' ~ B(c t_Jc t c A) then U B 6 .A. In particular, 0 6 A. Morphisms are stable maps, i.e. monotone maps preserving pullbacks and filtered colimits. That is, f " .A ~ / 3 is a stable map if (i) b c a ~ .A implies f ( b ) c_ f ( a ) , (ii) f (Ui ~I ai) = LJi el f (ai), for I directed, and (iii) a U b ~ .,4 implies f (a fq b) = f (a) N f (b). This gives a category Stab. Every coherent space .A yields a reflexive-symmetric (undirected) graph (I.AI, ~ ) where I.AI = {al {a} 6 .A} and a ~ b iff {a,b} ~ .A. Moreover, there is a bijective correspondence between such graphs and coherent spaces. Given two coherent spaces .A,/3 their product .,4 • is defined via the associated graphs as follows: (IA x /31, ~A• with IA x/31 = IAI te 1131= ({1} x IAI) U ({2} x 1131) where (1, a) ~.A•

(1' a t) iff a ~ . a at, (2, b) v A• 3 (2, b') iff b ~t3 b', and (1, a) ~A•

(2, b)

for all a 6 I.AI, b ~ It31. The function space /3"A= Stab(A, 13) of stable maps can be given the structure of a coherent space, ordered by Berry's order: f -< g iff for all a, a t ~ .A, a t c a implies f ( a t) - f ( a ) N g(at). For details, see [GLT,Tr92]. This class of domains led to the discovery of linear logic (Section 4.2). EXAMPLE 2.7. Per models. A partial equivalence relation (per) is a symmetric, transitive relation ~'A ~ A2. Thus ~A is an equivalence relation on the subset DomA -- {x E A lx '~A X}. A P-set is a pair (A, ~ a ) where A is a set and "~a is a per on A. Given two P-sets (A, ~A) and (B, "~R) a morphism of Ta-sets is a function f :A ~ B such that a ~ A a t implies f ( a ) ~B f (a') for all a, a t 6 A. That is, f induces a map of quotients DomA / ~ A ~ Dom8 / ~ 8 which preserves the associated partitions. 79Set, the category of P-sets and morphisms is a ccc, with structure induced from Set: we define (A x B, --~Ax B), where (a, b) ~A x B ( at, bt) iff a "~A at and b ~ 8 b t and (B A, ~B A), where f " ~ n A g iff for all a, a' ~ A, a ~ A at implies f (a) "~8 g(a'). We shall discuss variants of the ccc structure of 7gSet in Section 2.7 below, with respect to reductionfree normalization. Other classes of Per models are obtained by considering pers on a fixed (functionally complete) partial combinatory algebra, for example built over a model of untyped lambda calculus (cf. Section 2.5 below). The prototypical example is the following category Per(N) of pers on the natural numbers. The objects are pers on N. Morphisms f R ~ S are (equivalence classes of) partial recursive functions ( = Turing-machine computable partial functions) N ----~N which induce a total map on the induced partitions, i.e. for all m , n 6N, mRn implies f ( m ) , f ( n ) are defined and f ( m ) S f ( n ) . Here we define equivalence of maps f, g: R --+ S by: f ,-~ g iff Vm, n, mRn implies f ( m ) , g(n) are de-


9

fined and f ( m ) S g ( n ) . The fact that Per(N) is a ccc uses some elementary recursion theory [BFSS90,Mit96,AL91]. (See also Section 2.4.1.) EXAMPLE 2.8. Free CCC's. Given a set of basic objects 2(, we can form 9t',v, the free ccc generated by 2(. Its objects are freely generated from 2( and 1 using x and ( - ) ( - ) , its arrows are freely generated using identities and composition plus the structure in Figure 1, and we impose the minimal equations required to have a ccc. More generally, we may build U t , the free ccc generated by a directed multigraph (or even a small category) G, by freely generating from the vertices (resp. objects) and edges (resp. arrows) of ~ and t h e n - in the case of categories G - imposing the appropriate equations. The sense that this is free is related to Definition 2.9 and discussed in Example 2.23. Cartesian closed categories can themselves be made into a category in many ways. This depends, to some extent, on how much 2 - , bi-, enriched-, etc. structure one wishes to impose. The following elementary notions have proved useful. We shall mention a comparison between strict and nonstrict ccc's with coproducts in Remark 2.28. More general notions of monoidal functors, etc. will be mentioned in Section 4.1. DEFINITION 2.9. C A R T s t is the category of strictly structured Cartesian closed categories with functors that preserve the structure on the nose. 2-CARTst is the 2-category whose 0-cells are Cartesian closed categories, whose 1-cells are strict Cartesian closed functors, and whose 2-cells are natural isomorphisms [Cu93]. As pointed out by Lambek [L74,LS86], given a ccc A, we may adjoin an indeterminate arrow 1 x ; A to A to form a polynomial Cartesian closed category A[x] over A, with the expected universal property in CART st. The objects of ~4[x] are the same as those of .A, while the arrows are "polynomials", i.e. formal expressions built from the symbol x using the arrow-forming operations of A. The key fact about such polynomial expressions is a normal form theorem, stated here for ccc's, although it applies more generally (see [LS86], p. 61): PROPOSITION 2.10 (Functional completeness). For

every polynomial r

determinate 1 - - ~ A over a ccc fit, there is a unique arrow 1 ev o (h, x) = ~0(x), where - is equality in A[x]. x

in an in-

h > c A ~ A such that

x

Looking ahead to lambda calculus notation in the next section, we write h _= Xx :A.qg(X), so the equation above becomes ev o (Xx :a.cp(x), x) = r The universal property of polyx

nomial algebras guarantees a notion of substitution o f constants 1 minates x in qg(x). We obtain the following:

a> A

COROLLARY 2.1 1 (The 13 rule). In the situation above, f o r any arrow I ev o (Xx :A holds in A.

" ~(X),

a) = r

6 A for indeter-

a

>A ~ A

(4)

10

PJ. Scott

The/3-rule is the foundation of the lambda calculus, fundamental in programming language theory. It says the following: we think of )~x :A.~(X) as the function x w-~ qg(x). Equation 4 says: evaluating the function ~.x :A.~0(x) at argument a is just substitution of the constant a for each occurrence of x in qg(x). However this process is far more sophisticated than simple polynomial substitution in algebra. In our situation, the argument a may itself be a lambda term, which in turn may contain other lambda terms applied to various arguments, etc. After substitution, the right hand side qg(a) of Eq. (4) may be far more complex than the left hand side, with many new possibilities for evaluations created by the substitution. Thus, if we think of computation as oriented rewriting from the LHS to the RHS, it is not at all obvious the process ever halts. The fact that it does is a basic theorem in the so-called Operational Semantics of typed lambda calculus. Indeed, the Strong Normalization Theorem (cf. [LS86], p. 81) says every sequence of ordered rewrites (from left to right) eventually halts at an irreducible term (cf. Remark 2.49 and Section 2.7 below). REMARK 2.12. We may also form polynomial ccc's A[Xl . . . . . Xn] by adjoining a finite set of indeterminates 1 xi > Ai. Using product types, one may show A[xl . . . . . Xn]

~4[Z],

for an indeterminate 1 z > A l x ... x An. Polynomial Cartesian or Cartesian closed categories A[x] may be constructed directly, showing they are the Kleisli category of an appropriate comonad on r (see [LS86], p. 56). Extensions of this technique to allow adjoining indeterminates to fibrations, using 2-categorical machinery are considered in [HJ95].

2.2. Simply typed lambda calculi Lambda Calculus is an abstract theory of functions developed by Alonzo Church in the 1930's. Originally arising in the foundations of logic and computability theory, more recently it has become an essential tool in the mathematical foundations of programming languages [Mit96]. The calculus itself, to be described below, encompasses the process of building functions from variables and constants, using application and functional abstraction. Actually, there are many "lambda calculi"- typed and u n t y p e d - with various elaborate structures of types, terms, and equations. Let us give the basic typed one. We shall follow an algebraic syntax as in [LS86]. DEFINITION 2.13 (Typed)~-calculus). Let Sorts be a set of sorts (or atomic types). The typed ~.-calculus generated by Sorts is a formal system consisting of three classes: Types, Terms and Equations between terms. We write a" A for "a is a term of type A". Types" This is the set obtained from the set of Sorts using the following rules" Sorts are types, 1 is a type, and if A and B are types then so are A x B and B A . We allow the possibility of other types or type-forming operations and possible identifications between types. (Set theorists may even use "classes" instead of "sets".) Terms: To every type A we assign a denumerable set of typed variables x A ' A , i = 0, l, 2 . . . . . We write x" A or x A for a typical variable x of type A. Terms are freely

Some aspects o f categories in computer science

11

generated from variables, constants, and term-forming operations. We require at least the following distinguished generators:

(1) ,:1, (2) I f a ' A ,

b" B, c" A • B, then (a, b) " A • B, reA'B (c) " A, zr#'B(c)" B,

(3) If a" A, f " B A, 99" B then e v A , B ( f , a) "B, )~x .A.99" B A. There may be additional constants and term-forming operations besides those specified. We shall abbreviate eVA,B(f, a) by f ' a , read " f o f a", omitting types when clear. Intuitively, eva,B denotes evaluation, ( , ) denotes pairing, and Xx :A.99 denotes the function x ~ 99, where 99 is some term expression possibly containing x. The operator Xx-a acts like a quantifier, so the variable x in )~x-a 999 is a bound (or dummy) variable, just like the x in Yx :a 99 or in f f (x) dx. We inductively define the sets of free and bound variables in a term t, denoted F V ( t ) , B V ( t ) , resp. (cf. [Bar84], p. 24). We shall always identify terms up to renaming of bound variables. The expression 99[a/x] denotes the result of substituting the term a : A for each occurrence o f x : A in 99, if necessary renaming bound variables in 99 so that no clashes occur (cf. [Bar84]). Terms without free variables are called closed; otherwise, open. Equations between terms: A context F is a finite set of (typed) variables. An equation in context F is an expression a - - a ' , where a, a' are terms of the same type A whose F free variables are contained in F.

The equality relation between terms (in context) of the same type is generated using (at least) the following axioms and closure under the following rules: (i) = is an equivalence relation. F

a=b (ii) F whenever F c A. a --b' A (iii) = must be a congruence relation with respect to all term-forming operations. r It suffices to consider closure under the following two rules (cf. [LS86]) a-b

9 =

f

f U { xA }

f'a-f'b

9I

l~x :A 999 7 ~.x :A " q91

7

(iv) The following specific axioms (we omit subscripts on terms, when the types are obvious): Products (a) a - - . forall a : l , F

(b) zrl ((a, b)) = a

for all a :A, b: B,

F

(c) zr2((a, b)) = b for all a :A, b : B , F

(d) (re1(c), zr2(c)) = c for all c: C, F

12

P.J. S c o t t

Lambda Calculus ~'Rule ()~x:A " ~ )

' a -7-

q)[a/x],

o-Rule Xx a " ( f ' x ) r f ' where f " BA and x is not a free variable of f . REMARK 2.14. There may be additional types, terms, or equations. Following standard conventions, we equate terms which only differ by change of bound variables- this is called or-conversion in the literature [Bar84]. Equations are in context- i.e. occur within a declared set of free variables. This allows the possibility of empty types, i.e. types without closed terms (of that type). This view is fundamental in recent approaches to functional languages [Mit96] and necessary for interpreting such theories in presheaf categories, for example. However, if there happen to be closed terms a : A of each type, we may omit the subscript F on equations, because of the following derivable rule (cf. [LS86], Prop. 10.1, p. 75): for x ~ F and if all free variables of a are contained in F ,

tP[a/X]r ~[a/x] EXAMPLE 2.15. Freely generated simply typed lambda calculi. These are freely generated from specified sorts, terms, and/or equations. In the minimal case (no additional assumptions) we obtain the simply typed lambda calculus with finite products freely generated by Sorts. Typically, however, we assume that among the Sorts are distinguished datatypes and associated terms, possibly with specified equations. For example, basic universal algebra would be modelled by sorts A with distinguished n-ary operations given by terms t : A n :=~ A and constants c: 1 ~ A. Any specified term equations are added to the theory as (nonlogical) axioms. EXAMPLE 2.16. The internal language of a ccc .A. Here the types are the objects of .A, where x, ( - ) ( - ) , 1 have the obvious meanings. Terms with free variables Xl :A1 . . . . . Xn "An are polynomials in .A[xl . . . . . xn], where 1 xi ~ A i is an indeterminate, lambda abstraction is given by functional completeness, as in Proposition 2.10, and we define a - - b x

to hold iff a = b as polynomials in A[X], where X = {xl . . . . . Xn }. x

REMARK 2.17. (i) Historically, typed lambda calculi were often presented with only exponential types B a (no products) and the associated machinery [Bar84,Bar92]. This permits certain simplifications in inductive arguments, athough it is categorically less "natural" (cf. also Remark 2.24). (ii) It is a fundamental property that lambda calculus is a higher-order functional language: terms of type BA can use an arbitrary term of type A as an argument, and A and B themselves may be very complex. Thus, typed lambda calculus is often referred to as a theory offunctionals of higher type.


13

2.3. Formulas-as-types: The fundamental equivalence Let us describe the third component of the trio: Cartesian closed categories, typed lambda calculi, and formulas-as-types. The Formulas-as-Types view, sometimes called the CurryHoward isomorphism, is playing an increasingly influential role in the logical foundations of computing, especially in the foundations of functional programming languages. Its historical roots lie in the so-called Brouwer-Heyting-Kolmogorov (BHK) interpretation of intuitionistic logic from the 1920's [GLT,TrvD88]. The idea is based on modelling proofs (which are programs) by functions, i.e. lambda terms. Since proofs can be modelled by lambda terms and the latter are themselves arrows in certain free categories, it follows that functional programs can be modelled categorically. In modern guise, the Curry-Howard analysis says the following. Proofs in a constructive logic s may be identified as terms of an appropriate typed lambda calculus ~z:, where: 9 types = formulas of/~, 9 lambda terms = proofs (i.e. annotations of Natural Deduction proof trees), 9 provable equality of lambda terms corresponds to the equivalence relation on proofs generated by Gentzen's normalization algorithm. Often researchers impose additional equations between lambda terms, motivated from categorical considerations (e.g., to force traditional datatypes to have a strong universal mapping property). REMARK 2.18 (formulas = specifications). More generally, the Curry-Howard view identifies types of a programming language with formulas of some logic, and programs of type A as proofs within the logic of formula A. Constructing proofs of formula A may then be interpreted as building programs that meet the specification A. For example, consider the intuitionistic {7-,/x, =~}-fragment of propositional calculus, as in Figure 2. This logic closely follows the presentation of ccc's in Definition 2.1 and Figure 1. We now identify (= Formulas-as-Types) the propositional symbols 7-, A, =~ with the type constructors 1, • =~, respectively. We assign lambda terms inductively. To a proof

Fot'mulas Provability

A ::-- -1-IAtoms[ A1/x A2IA1 =:~ A2 is a reflexive, transitive relation such that, for arbitrary formulas A, B, C Ab-]-, A A B F - A , AABF-B C~A/xB iff C F - A a n d C ~ B C /xA F- B iff C ~ A =~ B Fig. 2. Intuitionistic T, A, =~ logic.

14

P.J. Scott

of A F- B we assign s x : A ~ t (x) :B, where t (x) is a term of type B with at most the free variable x :A (i.e. in context {x :A}) as follows: x:AI-x:A, x :A ~,:T,

x : A b- s ( x ) : B y : B i-- t ( y ) : C x :A F- t [ s ( x ) / y ] : C x : A A B t- zrl (x) : A,

z:C AAF-t(z):B

x:CI-a:Ax:CF-b:B x : C ~ - (a,b) :A A B

x : A A B I- rr2(x) : B,

y : C F- ~ , x : A

"

t [ ( y , x ) / z ] : A :=~ B '

y : C t - - t ( y ) : A =, B z : C A A ~ t[Trl (z)/y]'rr2(z) : B

We can now refer to entire proof trees by the associated lambda terms. We wish to put an equivalence relation on proofs, according to the equations of typed lambda calculus. Given two proofs of an entailment A F- B, say x :A ~ s (x) : B and x :A ~ t (x) : B, we say they are equivalent if we can derive s -- t in the appropriate typed lambda calculus. {xl DEFINITION 2.19. Let )~-Calc denote the category whose objects are typed lambda calculi and whose morphisms are translations, i.e. maps q~ which send types to types, terms to terms (including mapping the ith variable of type A to the ith variable of type q~(A)), preserve all the specified operations on types and terms on the nose, and preserve equations. THEOREM 2.20. There are a pair o f functors C : s ~ Cartst and L : C a r t s t )~-Calc which set up an equivalence o f categories Cartst ~ ~,-Calc. The functor L associates to ccc A its internal language, while the functor C associates to any lambda calculus s a syntactically generated ccc C ( s whose objects are types of /~ and whose arrows A ~ B are denoted by (equivalence classes of) lambda terms t ( x ) representing proofs x : A F- t ( x ) : B as above (see [LS86]). This leads to a kind of Soundness Theorem for diagrammatic reasoning which is important in categorical logic.

COROLLARY 2.21. Verifying that a diagram commutes in a ccc C is equivalent to proving an equation in the internal language o f C. The above result includes allowing algebraic theories modelled in the Cartesian fragment [Mac82,Cr93], as well as extensions with categorical data types (like weak natural numbers objects, see Section 2.3.1). Theorem 2.20 also leads to concrete syntactic presentations of free ccc's [LS86,Tay98]. Let G r a p h be the category of directed multi-graphs [ST96]. COROLLARY 2.22. The forgezful functor L/:Cartst -+ Graph has a left adjoint F: Graph -+ Cartst. Let F G denote the image o f graph G under F . We call F G the free ccc generated by G.


15

EXAMPLE 2.23. Given a discrete graph Go considered as a a set, 9vG0 = the free ccc generated by the set of sorts Go. It has the following universal property: for any ccc C and for any graph morphism F :Go ~ C, there is a unique extension to a (strict) ccc-functor

~--]]F : ~-~0 ~ C. ~G0

~--]]F

///~

C

~o This says: given any interpretation F of basic atomic types ( = nodes of Go) as objects of C, there is a unique extension to an interpretation [[-llF in C of the entire simply typed lambda calculus generated by Go (identifying the free ccc FG0 with this lambda calculus). REMARK 2.24. A Pitts [Pi9?] has shown how to construct free ccc's syntactically, using lambda calculi without product types. The idea is to take objects to be sequences of types and arrows to be sequences of terms. The terminal object is the empty sequence, while products are given by concatenation of sequences. For a full discussion, see [CDS97]. This is useful in reduction-free normalization (see Section 2.7 below). REMARK 2.25. There are more advanced 2- and bi-categorical versions of the above results. We shall mention more structure in the case of Cartesian closed categories with coproducts, in the next section. 2.3.1. Some datatypes. Computing requires datatypes, for example natural numbers, lists, arrays, etc. The categorical development of such datatypes is an old and established area. The reader is referred to any of the standard texts for discussion of the basics, e.g., [MA86, BW95,Mit96,Ten94]. General categorical treatments of abstract datatypes abound in the literature. The standard treatment is to use initial T-algebras (cf. Section 2.4.2 below) or final T-coalgebras for "definable" or "polynomial" endofunctors T. There are interesting common generalizations to lambda calculi with functorial type constructors [Ha87, Wr89], categories with datatypes determined by strong monads [Mo91,CSp91], and using enriched categorical structures [K82]. There is recent discussion of datatypes in distributive categories [Co93,W92], and the use of the categorical theory of sketches [BW95,Bor94]. We shall merely illustrate a few elementary algebraic structures commonly added to a Cartesian or Cartesian closed category (or the associated term calculi). DEFINITION 2.26. A category C has finite coproducts (equivalently, binary coproducts and an initial object 0) if for every A, B 6 C there is a distinguished object A + B, together with isomorphisms (natural in A, B, C E C)

Homc(O,A) ~- {,}, Homg(A + B, C) -~ Home(A, C) • Home(B, C).

(5) (6)

16

PJ. Scott

Objects

Distinguished Arrow(s)

Initial 0

00a

Coproducts A + B

Equations

A

OA -- f , f :O---'> A

i n l ' B " a --+ a + B ina'B " B ---> A + B

[f, g] o inl -- f [f, g] o in2 = g

a f--~C B g--~C A+B~C

[h o inl, h o in2] = h, h ' A + B --+ C

Fig. 3. Coproducts.

We say C is bi-Cartesian closed (-- biccc) if it is a ccc with finite coproducts, l Just as in the case of products (cf. Figure 1), we may present coproducts equationally, as in Figure 3, and speak of strict structure, etc. In programming language semantics, coproducts correspond to variant types, set-theoretically they correspond to disjoint union, while from the logical viewpoint coproducts correspond to disjunction. Thus a biccc corresponds to intuitionistic {_L,T, A, v, =:~}-logic. We add to the logic of Figure 2 formulas _1_ and A1 v A2, together with the rules Z~A A v B F- C

iff

A ~ C and B t-- C

corresponding to Eqs. (5), (6). The associated typed lambda calculus with coproducts is rather subtle to formulate [Mit96,GLT]. The problem is with the copairing operator A + B [f'~ C

which in Sets corresponds to a definition-by-cases operator:

[f, g](x)

_If(x) /

g(x)

if x e A , ifxeB.

The correct lambda calculus formalism for coproduct types corresponds to the logicians' natural deduction rules for strong sums. The issue is not trivial, since the word problem for free biccc's (and the associated type isomorphism problem [DiCo95]) is among the most difficult of this type of question, and - at least for the current state of the art - depends heavily on technical subtleties of syntax for its solution (see [Gh96]). Just as for ccc's, we may introduce various 2-categories of biccc's (cf. [Cu93]). For example 1 Not to be confused with bicategories, cf. [Bor94].


1'/

DEFINITION 2.27. The 2-category 2-BiCARTst has 0-cells strict bi-Cartesian closed categories, 1-cells functors preserving the structure on the nose, and 2-cells natural isomorphisms. One may similarly define a non-strict version 2-BiCART. REMARK 2.28. Every bi-Cartesian closed category is equivalent to a strict one. Indeed, this is part of a general 2-categorical adjointness between the above 2-categories, from a theorem of Blackwell, Kelly, and Power. (See t~ubri6 [Cu93] for applications to lambda calculi.) DEFINITION 2.29. In a biccc, define B o o l e = 1 + 1, the type of Booleans. Boole's most salient feature is that it has two distinguished global elements (Boolean values) T, F : I ~ Boole, corresponding to the two injections in1, in2, together with the universal property of coproducts. In Set we interpret B o o l e as a set of cardinality 2; similarly, in typed lambda calculus, it corresponds to a type with two distinguished constants T, F : Boole and an appropriate notion of definition by cases. In any biccc, we can define all of the classical n-ary propositional logic connectives as arrows Boole n --+ B o o l e (see [LS86], 1.8). A weaker notion of Booleans in the category w-CPO_L is illustrated in Figure 4. 0 DEFINITION 2.30. A natural numbers object in a ccc C is an object N with arrows 1 > s N > N which is initial among diagrams of that shape. That is, for any object A and arrows a

1 >A commute:

h

1

> A, there is a unique iterator Z-ah :N --+ A making the following diagram

0 ~N

A

N

h

>A

A weak natural numbers object is defined as above, but just assuming existence and not necessarily uniqueness of Zah.

f

.1-

1

t

\/

2

Nl_1_

_1_

Fig. 4. Flat datatypes in co-CPO_t_.

n

18

P.J. Scott

In the category Set, the natural numbers (N, 0, S) is a natural numbers object, where Sn=n+l. In functor categories Set c, a natural numbers object is given by the constant functor KN, where K N ( A ) = N, and K N ( f ) = idN, with obvious natural transformations 0 s 1 ~ KN ) KN. In co-CPO there are numerous weak natural numbers objects: for example the flat pointed natural numbers N_L = N ~ {_1_},ordered as follows: a ~< b iff a = b or a =_1_, where S(n) = n + 1 and S(_L) =_L, pictured in Figure 4. Natural numbers o b j e c t s - when they e x i s t - are unique up to isomorphism; however weak ones are far from unique. Typical programming languages and typed lambda calculi in logic assume only weak natural numbers objects. If a ccc C has a natural numbers object N, we can construct parametrized versions of iteration, using products and exponentiation in C [LS86,FrSc]. For example, in Set: given functions g : A --+ B and f : N x A • B --+ B, there exists a unique primitive recursor ~,gf :N x A --+ B satisfying: (i) ~gf(O, a ) = g(a) and (ii) 7"r a) -f ( n , a, 7-~gf(n, a)). These equations are easily represented in any ccc with N, or in the associated typed lambda calculus (e.g., the number n 6 N being identified with sno). In the case C has only a weak natural numbers object, we may prove the existence but not necessarily the uniqueness of ~ g f . An important datatype in Computer Science is the type of finite lists of elements of some type A. This is defined analogously to (weak) natural numbers objects: DEFINITION 2.31. Given an object A in a ccc C, we define the object gist(A) offinite lists on A with the following distinguished structure: arrows nil:l --+ g.ist(A), cons: A • gist(A) --~ gist(A) satisfying the following (weak) universal property: for any object B and arrows b : 1 -~ B and h : A x B --~ B, there exists an "iterator" Zbh : gist(A) -+ B satisfying (in the internal language):

~bh nil = b,

Zhh cons(a, w) = h (a, Iah w).

Here nil corresponds to the empty list, and cons takes an element of A and a list and concatenates the element onto the head of the list. Analogously to (weak) natural numbers objects N, we can use product types and exponentiation to extend iteration on gist(A) to primitive recursion with parameters (cf. [GLT], p. 92). What n-ary numerical Set functions are represented by arrows N n ~ N in a ccc? The answer, of course, depends on the ccc. In general, the best we could expect is the following (cf. [LS86], Part III, Section 2): PROPOSITION 2.32. Let UN be the free ccc with weak natural numbers object. The class of numerical total functions representable therein is properly contained between the primitive recursive and the Turing-machine computable functions. In general, such fast-growing functions as the Ackermann function are representable in any ccc with weak natural numbers object (see [LS86]). Analogous results hold for symmetric monoidal and monoidal closed categories, [PR89].


19

The question of strong versus weak datatypes is of some interest. For example, although we can define addition + :N x N ~ N by primitive recursion on a weak natural numbers type, commutativity of addition follows from having a strong natural numbers object; a weak parametrized primitive recursor would only allow us to derive x + n = n + x for each closed numeral n but we cannot then extend this to variables (cf. G6del's incompleteness theorem, cf. [LS86], p. 263). Notice that, on the face of it, the definition of a natural numbers object appears not to be equational: informally, uniqueness of the arrow Zah requires an implication: f o r all f :N ~ A (if f O = a and f S -- h f ) then f = Zah. Here we remark on a curious observation of Lambek [L88]. Let us recall from universal algebra that a Mal'cev operator on an algebra A is a function m A" A 3 --+ A satisfying m A x x z = Z and mAXZZ = x. For example, if A were a group, mA = x y - l z is such an operator. Similarly, the definition of a Mal'cev operator on an object A makes sense in any ccc (e.g., as an arrow A 3 mA A satisfying some diagrams) or, equivalently, in any typed lambda calculus (e.g., as a closed term m A" A3 =:~ A satisfying some equations). THEOREM 2.3 3 (Lambek). Let C be a ccc with weak natural numbers (N, 0, S) in which each object A has a Mal' cev operator m A. Then the f a c t that (N, O, S) is a natural numbers object is equationally definable using the family {ma ] A c C}. In particular, if C = ,TN, the free ccc with weak natural numbers object, there are a finite number o f additional equations (as schema) that, when added to the original data, guarantee that every type has a Mal'cev operator and N is a natural numbers object.

2.4. Polymorphism "The perplexing subject of polymorphism." C. Darwin, Life & Lett, 1887 Although Darwin was speaking of biology, he might very well have been discussing computer science 100 years later. Christopher Strachey in the 1960's introduced various notions of polymorphism into programming language design (see [Rey83,Mit96]). Perhaps the most influential was his notion of parametric polymorphism. Intuitively, a parametric polymorphic function is one which has a uniformly given algorithm at all types. Imagine a "generic" algorithm capable of being instantiated at any arbitrary type, but which is the "same algorithm" at each type instance. It is this idea of the "plurality of form" which inspired the biological metaphor. EXAMPLE 2.34 (Reverse). Consider a simple algorithm that takes a finite list and reverses it. Here "lists" could mean: lists of natural numbers, lists of reals, lists of arrays, indeed lists of lists of . . . . The point is, the types do not matter: we have a uniform algorithm for all types. Let list(a) denote the type of finite lists of entities of type a. We thus might type this algorithm rev~ " list(a) =:~ list(a)

where reva(al . . . . . an) -- (an . . . . . al).

P.J. Scott

20

A second example, discussed by Strachey, is EXAMPLE 2.35 (Map-list). This algorithm begins with a function of type u =~ fl and a finite u-list, applies the function to each element of the list, and then makes a r-list of the subsequent values. We might represent it as:

mapa,~ : (u =r fl) =:~ (list(u) =~ list(fl)) where map~,~(f)(al . . . . . an) = ( f ( a l ) . . . . . f (an)). Many recent programming languages (e.g., ML, Ada) support sophisticated uses of generic types and polymorphism. The mathematical foundations of such languages were a major challenge in the past decade and category theory played a fundamental role. We shall briefly recall the issues. 2.4.1. Polymorphic lambda calculi. The logician J.-Y. Girard [Gi71,Gi72] in a series of important works examined higher-order logic from the Curry-Howard viewpoint. He developed formal calculi of variable types, the so-called polymorphic lambda calculi, which correspond to proofs in higher-order logics. At the same time he developed the proof theory of such systems. J. Reynolds [Rey74] independently discovered the second-order fragment of Girard's system, and proposed it as a syntax representing Strachey's parametric polymorphism. Let us briefly examine Girard's System ~ , second order polymorphic lambda calculus. The underlying logical system is intuitionistic second order propositional calculus. The latter theory is similar to ordinary propositional calculus, except we can universally quantify over propositional variables. The syntax of second order propositional calculus is presented in Figure 5. The usual notions of free and bound variables in formulas are assumed. For example, in Vu(~ :=~ fl), u is a bound variable, while fl is free. A[B/u] denotes A with formula B substituted for free u, changing bound variables if necessary to avoid clashes. Notice in the quantifier rules that when we instantiate a universally quantified formula to obtain, say, F F- A[B/u], Formulas

Provability

A : : = v b l l A l =~ A2 IVu.A F is a relation between finite sets of formulas and formulas

F F - A if A ~ F FU{AIFB FFA AFA=~B FFA=~B ' FUAf-B F F- A(u) F F- VaA(u) F ~ VuA(u)' F F n[B/u] where u r FV(F)

for any formula B.

Fig. 5. Secondorder intuitionistic propositionalcalculus.


21

the formula B may be of arbitrary logical complexity. Thus inductive proof techniques based on the complexity of subformulas are not available in higher-order logic. This is the essence of the problem of impredicativity in polymorphism. We now introduce Girard's second order lambda calculus. We use the notation FV(t) and BV(t) for the set of free and bound variables of term t, respectively. We write FTV(A) and BTV(A) for the set of free type variables and bound type variables of formula A, respectively. DEFINITION 2.36 (Girard's System .~).

Types: Freely generated from type variables c~, fl . . . . by the rules: if A, B are types, so are A =:~ B and 'r Terms" Freely generated from variables x/A of every type A by (1) First-order lambda calculus rules: if f :A =~ B, a : A , r B then f ' a : B and ~,x :A .q9 : A :=~ B. (2) Specifically second-order rules: (a) If t : A(ot), then Au.t:VaA(ot) where c~ r FTV(FV(t)), (b) If t :'r (c~) then t[B] : A[B/~] for any type B. Equations: Equality is the smallest congruence relation closed under fl and 77 for both lambdas, that is: (3) (&x :A.qg)'a =ill tp[a/x] and )~x :A ( f ' x ) =,7' f ' where x ~ F V ( f ) . (4) (Ac~.~)[B] ----#2 ~[B/ot] and Aot.t[ot] =~2 t, where otr FTV(t). Eqs. (3) are the first order fir/equations, while Eqs. (4) are second order fir/. From the Curry-Howard viewpoint, the types of .T" are precisely the formulas of second order propositional calculus (Fig. 5), while terms denote proofs. For example, to annotate second order rules we have:

~'FF- t'A(a) ~" F ~ Aot . t ' u

'

2" F F- t 9VolA(u) ~" r F- t[B]" A[B/u]

The fl r/equations of course express equality of proof trees. What about polymorphism? Suppose we think of a term t : u as an algorithm of type A(ot) varying uniformly over all types c~. Then t [ B ] : A [ B / a ] is the instanfiafion of t at the specific type B. Moreover, B may be arbitrarily complex. Thus the type variable acts as a parameter. In System ,T we can internally represent common inductive data types within the syntax as weak T-algebras, for covariant definable functors T. Weakness refers to the categorical fact that these structures satisfy existence but not uniqueness of the mediating arrow in the universal mapping property. Thus, for any types A, B we are able to define the types 1, Nat, List(A), A x B, A + B, 3t~ . A, etc. (see [GLT] for a full treatment). Let us give two examples and at the same time illustrate polymorphic instantiation.

22

PJ. Scott

EXAMPLE 2.37. The type of Booleans is given by

Boole -- Vc~.(ot :=~ (or =~ c~)). It has two distinguished elements T, F: Boole given by T = Ac~.~.x :ot.lky:ot.X and F = Aot.)~x :~ .X y :~ . y , together with a Definition by Cases operator (for each type A) DA " A =~ (A =~ (Boole :=~ A)) defined by D A u v t = ( t [ A ] ' u ) ' v where u, v" A, t'Boole. One may easily verify that D z u v T =~ u and D A u v F =~ v (where/3 stands for/31 tO f12). EXAMPLE 2.38. The type of (Church) numerals

N a t - Vc~((~ ~ c~) =~ (c~ ~ c~)). The numeral n : N a t corresponds at each c~ to n-fold composition f ~ f n , where f n = f o f o . . . o f (n times) and f 0 = Ida = Xx~ 9x. Formally, it is the closed term n = Ao t . ) ~ f : a = , c ~ . f n :Nat. Thus for any type B we have a uniform algorithm: n[B] = ) ~ f : B = , B . f n : ( B :=~ B) =:~ (B =:~ B). Successor is given by S = ~.n:Nat.n q- 1, where n + 1 = Aot.)~f : a ~ o t . f n + l " - A o t . ~ . f : a ~ . f o f n = Aot.)~f : ~ = f o (n[c~]'f). Finally, iteration is given by: if a : A, h : A =r A, Zah = Lx :Nat.(x[A]'h)'a: Nat =~ A. The reader may easily calculate that ZahO =[~ a and Zah(n + 1) --/~ h'(Zahn) for numerals n. Let us illustrate the power of impredicativity in this situation. See the discussion of Church vs. Curry typing, Section 2.5.3. Notice that for any type B, n[ B =, B] 'n[B] makes perfectly good sense. In particular, let B = Nat, the type of n itself. This is a well-defined term and if we erase all its types we obtain the untyped expression n ' n -- ~.f. f n . This latter untyped term is not typable in simply typed lambda calculus. Formal systems describing far more powerful versions of polymorphism have been developed. For example, Girard's thesis described the typed lambda calculus corresponding to w-order intuitionist type theory, so-called .T'~o. Programming in the various levels of Girard's theories {.T'n}, n = 1,2 . . . . , w, is described in [PDM89]. Other systems include Coquand-Huet's Calculus of Constructions and its extensions [Luo94]. These theories include not only Girard's ~'~o but also Martin-L6f's dependent type theories [H97a]. Indeed, these theories are among the most powerful logics known, yet form the basis of various proof-development systems (e.g., LEGO and Coq) [LP92,D+93]. 2.4.2. What is a model o f System 5r? The problem of f i n d i n g - and indeed defining precisely - a model of System .T" was difficult. Cartesian closedness is not the issue. The problem, of course, is the universal quantifier: clearly in u the cr is to range over all the objects of the model, and at the same time u should be interpreted as some kind of product (over all objects). Such "large" products create havoc, as foreshadowed in the following theorem of Freyd (cf. [Mac71 ], Proposition 3, p. 110). THEOREM 2.39 (Freyd). A small category which is small complete is a preorder. Cartesian closed preorders (e.g., complete Heyting algebras) are of no interest for modelling proofs; we seek "nontrivial" categories.


23

Suppose instead we try to define a naive "set-theoretic" model of System Y, in which x, =~ have their usual meaning, and Vc~ is interpreted as a "large" product. Such models are defined in detail in [RP,Pi87]. John Reynolds proved the following THEOREM 2.40. There is no Set model for System Y. There is an elegant categorical proof in Reynolds and Plotkin [RP]. Let us sketch the proof, which applies to somewhat more general categories than Set. Let C be a category with an endofunctor T :C --+ C. A T-algebra is an object A together a with an arrow TA > A. A morphism of T-algebras is a commutative square:

TA

A

Tf

~ TB

~B

An initial T-algebra (resp. weakly initial T-algebra) is one for which there exists a unique morphism (resp. there exists a morphism) to any other T-algebra. We shall be interested in objects and arrows of the model category C which are "definable", i.e. denoted by types and terms of System Y. There are simple covariant endofunctors T on C whose action on objects is definable by types and whose actions on arrows is definable by terms (of System ,T'). For example, the identity functor T (or) = ol and the functor T (c0 -- (a =~ B) :=~ B, for any fixed B, have this property. Now it may be shown (see [RP]) that for any definable functor T, the System Y expression P = Vot.(T(ot) =:~ or) :=~ c~ is a weakly initial T-algebra. Suppose the ambient model category C has equalizers of all subsets of arrows (e.g., Set has this property). Essentially by taking a large equalizer (cf. the Solution Set Condition in Freyd's Adjoint Functor Theorem, [Mac71], p. 116) we could then construct a subalgebra of P which is an initial T-algebra. Call this initial T-algebra Z. We then use the following important observation of Lambek: PROPOSITION 2.41 (Lambek). If isomorphism.

T(Z)

f

> 2-

is an initial T-algebra, then f is an

Applying this to the definable functor T (or) = (or =~ B) :=~ B, we observe that T (2-) _--__2-. In particular, let C = Set and B -- Boole, and take the usual Set interpretation of x as Cartesian product and =:~ as the full function space. Notice card(B) ~> 2 (since there are always the two distinct closed terms T and F). Hence we obtain a bijection B Bz ~- Z, for some set 2-, which is impossible for cardinality reasons. The search for models of System Y led to some extraordinary phenomena that had considerable influence in semantics of programming languages. Let us just briefly mention the history. Notice that the Reynolds-Plotkin proof depends on a simple cardinality argument, which itself depends on classical set theory. Similarly, the proof of Freyd's result, Theorem 2.39, depends on using classical (i.e. non-intuitionistic) logical reasoning in the

24

PJ. Scott

metalanguage. This suggests that it is really the non-constructive nature of the category Sets that is at fault; if we were to work within a non-classical universe - say within a model of intuitionistic set theory - there is still a chance that we could escape the above problems but still have a "set-theoretical" model of System ~'. And, from one point of view, that is exactly what happened. These ambient categories, called toposes [LS86,MM92], are in general models of intuitionistic higher-order logic (or set-theory), and include such categories as functor categories and sheaves on a topological space, as well as Sets. Moggi suggested constructing models of System .T" based on an internally complete internal full subcategory of a suitable ambient topos. This ambient topos would serve as our constructive set-theory, and function types would still be interpreted as the full "set-theoretical" space of total functions. M. Hyland [Hy88] proved that the Realizability (or Effective) Topos had (non-trivial) such internal category objects. The difficult development and clarification of these internal models was undertaken by many researchers, e.g., D. Scott, M. Hyland, E. Robinson, P. Rosolini, A. Carboni, P. Freyd, A. Scedrov, A. Pitts et al. (e.g., [HRR,Rob89,Ros90,CPS88,Pi87]). In a separate development, R. Seely [See87] gave the first general categorical definition of a so-called external model of System .T', and more generally ~-o~. The definition was based on the theory of indexed or fibred categories. This view of logic was pioneered by Lawvere [Law69] who emphasized that quantifiers were interpretable as adjoint functors. Pitts [Pi87] clarified the relationship between Seely's models and internal-category models within ambient toposes of presheaves. Moreover, he showed that there are enough such internal models for a Completeness Theorem. It is worth remarking that Pitts' work uses properties of Yoneda embeddings. For general expositions see [AL91]. Extensions of "set-theoretical" models to cases where function spaces include partial functions (i.e. non-termination) is in [RR90]. One can externalize these internal category models [Hy88,AL91 ] to obtain ordinary categories. And one such internal category in the Realizability Topos, the modest sets, when externalized is precisely the ccc category Per(N) discussed in Section 2.1. PROPOSITION 2.42. Per(N) is a model of System J:. The idea is that in addition to the ccc structure of Per(N), we interpret V as a large intersection (the intersection of an arbitrary family of pers is again a per). We shall return to this example in Section 3.2. Ironically, in essence this model was already in Girard's original PhD thesis [Gi72]. Later, domain-theoretic models of System ~- were considered by Girard in [Gi86] and were instrumental in his development of linear logic

2.5. The untyped world The advantages of types in programming languages are familiar and well-documented (e.g., [Mit96]). Nonetheless, there is an underlying untyped aspect of computation, already going back to the original work on lambda calculus and combinatory logic in the 1930's, which often underlies concrete machine implementations. In this early view, developed


25

by Church, Curry, and Schrnfinkel, functions were understood in the old-fashioned (preCantor) sense of "rules", as a computational process of going from an argument to a value. Such a functional process could take anything, even itself, as an argument. Let us just briefly mention some key directions (see [Bar84,AGM]). 2.5.1. Models and denotational semantics. From the viewpoint of ccc's, untypedness amounts to finding a ccc C with an object D ~ 1 satisfying the isomorphism D D ~ D.

(7)

Thus function spaces and elements are "on the same level". It then makes sense to define formal application f ' g for constants f , g" D ~ by f ' g = e v ( f , ~o(g)), where ~0" D D =7 D is the isomorphism above. In particular, self-application f ' f makes perfectly good sense. Dana Scott found the first semantical (topological) models of the untyped lambda calculus in 1970 [Sc72]; i.e. non-trivial solutions D to "equations" of the form (7) in various ccc's, perhaps the simplest being in co-CPO. This was part of his general investigations (with Christopher Strachey) into the foundations of programming languages, culminating in the so-called Scott-Strachey approach to the semantics of programming languages. Arguably, this has been one of the major arenas in the use of category theory in Computer Science, with an enormous literature. For an introduction, see [AbJu94,Gun92,Ten94]. More generally, one seeks to find non-trivial domains D satisfying certain so-called "recursive domain equations", of the form D--~..-D...,

(8)

where .-. D . . . is some expression built from type constructors. The difficulty is that the variable D may appear both co- and contravariantly. Such recursive defining "equations" are used to specify the semantics of numerous notions in computer science, from datatypes in functional programming languages, to modelling nondeterminism, concurrency, etc. (cf. also [DiCo95]). The seminal early paper on categorical solutions of domain equations is the paper of Smyth and Plotkin [SP82]. More recent work has focussed on axiomatic and synthetic domain theory (e.g., [AbJu94,FiP196,ReSt97]) and use of bisimulations and relation-theoretic methods for reasoning about recursive domains [Pi96a]. These methods rely on fundamental work of Peter Freyd on recursive types (e.g., [Fre92]). 2.5.2. C-monoids and categorical combinators. On a more algebraic level, a model of untyped lambda calculus is a ccc with (up to isomorphism) one non-trivial object. That is, a ccc C with an object D ~ 1 satisfying the domain equations: D ~- D D ~ D x D.

(9)

An example of such a D in co-CPO is given in [LS86], using the constructions of D. Scott and Smyth-Plotkin mentioned above. An interesting axiomatization of such D's comes from simply considering H o m e ( D , D) ~- H o m e ( l , D ~ as an abstract monoid. It turns out

PJ. Scott

26

that the axioms are easy to obtain: take the axioms of a ccc, remove the terminal object, and erase all the types.t That is (following the treatment in [LS86], p. 93): DEFINITION 2.43. A C-monoid (C for Curry, Church, Combinatory, or CCC) is a monoid (A4, o, id) together with extra structure structure (Zrl, rr2, e, (-)*, ( - , - ) ) where zri, e are elements of ./k4, (-)* is a unary operation on .A/l, and ( , ) is a binary operation on .A//, satisfying untyped versions of the equations of a ccc (cf. Figure 1): tel (a, b) = a,

e(h*rrl, zr2) = h ,

:rr2(a, b) = b,

(e(krrl, re2))* = k,

(~lC, ~2C) = C

for any a, b, c, h, k 6 .A/[ (where we elide the monoid operation o). C-monoids were first discovered independently by D. Scott and J. Lambek around 1980. The elementary algebraic theory and connections with untyped lambda calculus were developed in [LS86] (and independently in [Cur93], where they were called categorical combinators). Obviously C-monoids form an equational class; thus, just like for general ccc's, we may form free algebras, polynomial algebras, prove Functional Completeness, etc. The associated internal language is untyped lambda calculus with pairing operators. As above, this language is obtained from simply typed lambda calculus by omitting the type 1 and erasing all the types from terms. The rewriting theory of categorical combinators has been discussed by Curien, Hardin et al. (e.g., see [Har93]). Categorical combinators form a particularly efficient mechanism for implementing functional languages; for example, the language CAML is a version of the functional language ML based on categorical combinators (see [Hu90], Part 1). The deepest mathematical results on the Cartesian fragment of C-monoids to date have been obtained by R. Statman [St96]. In particular, Statman characterizes the free Cartesian monoid F (in terms of a representation into certain continuous shift operators on Cantor space), as well as characterizing the finitely generated submonoids of F and the recursively enumerable subsets of F. The latter two results are based on projections of (suitably encoded) unification problems. 2.5.3. Church vs. Curry typing. The fundamental feature of the untyped lambda calculus is self-application. The/3-rule ~.x. tp(x)'a -- tp[a/x] is now totally unrestricted with respect to typing constraints. This permits non-halting computations: for example, the term S2 =def ()~x.x'x)'O~x.x'x) has no normal form and only/3-reduces to itself, while the fixed point combinator Y =aef )~f.O~x.f'(x'x))'()~x.f'(x'x)) satisfies f ' ( Y ' f ) =#,1 Y ' f , hence Y ' f is a fixed point of f , for any f . Hence we immediately obtain: all terms of the untyped lambda calculus have a fixed point. Untyped lambda calculus suggests a different approach to the typed world: "typing" untyped terms. The Church view (which we have adopted here) insists all terms be explicitly typed, starting with the variables. On the other hand Curry, the founder of the related but older subject of Combinatory Logic, had a different view: start with untyped terms, but add "type inference rules" to algorithmically infer appropriate types (when possible). Many modem typed programming languages (e.g., ML) essentially follow this Curry view


27

and use "typing rules" to assign appropriate type schema to untyped terms. This leads to the so-called Type Inference Problem: given an explicitly typed language L; and type erasure function 12 Eras>el/[ (where b/is untyped lambda calculus), decide if an untyped term t satisfies t -- Erase(M) for some M 6/2. It turns out that a problem of type inference is essentially equivalent to a so-called unification problem, familiar from logic programming (cf. [Mit96]). Fortunately in the case of ML and other typed programming languages there are known type inference algorithms; however in general (e.g., for System ~ , ,T'o~. . . . ) the problem is undecidable. To the best of our knowledge, the Church-vs-Curry view of typed languages has not yet been systematically analyzed categorically.

2.6. Logical relations and logical permutations Logical relations play an important role in the recent proof theory and semantics of typed lambda calculi [Mit96,Plo80,St85]. Recall the notion of Henkin model (Section 2.1) as a subccc of Set. DEFINITION 2.44. Given two Henkin models ,4 and/3, a logical relation from A to 13 is a family of binary relations 7~ = {Ra __ Aa x Ba I cr a type} satisfying (we write a r a b for (a, b) 6 Ra): (1) *RI* (2) (a, a f ) R a x r ( b , b f) ifand onlyif aRab andaIRrbl, forany (a,a ~) ~ Aa• (b,b ~) Ba • r, i.e. ordered pairs are related exactly when their components are. (3) For any f ~ A a ~ r , g c B a ~ r , f R a ~ r g if and only if for all a E Aa, b E Ba (a Rab implies f a Rr gb ), i.e. functions are related when they map related inputs to related outputs. For each (atomic) base type b, fix a binary relation Rb c_ Ab x Bb. Then: there is a smallest family of binary relations 7~ = {R~r _c Aa x Ba I o" a type} defined inductively from the Rb's by (1)-(3) above. That is, any property (relation) at base-types can be inductively lifted to a family ~ at all higher types, satisfying (1)-(3) above. We write a ~ b to denote a Ra b for some or. If A = 13 and ~ is a logical relation from A to itself, we say an element a E ,4 is invariant under T~ if aTC.a. The fundamental property of logical relations is the Soundness Theorem [Mit96,St85]. Let ~" F ~ M" cr denote that M is a term of type o- with free variables 2 in context F . Consider Henkin models ,4 with O.A an assignment function, assigning variables to elements in ,4. Let [[M]]o.a denote the meaning of term M in model ,4 w.r.t, the given variable assignment (following [Mit96], we only consider assignments r/ such that OA(xi) ~ A~ if xi :or ~ F). The following is proved by induction on the form of M: THEOREM 2.45 (Soundness). Let Tr c_ ,4 x 13 be a logical relation between Henkin models ,4, 13. Let ~" F F- M" ~r. Suppose assignments OA, tit3 of the variables are related, i.e. for all xi, ~(rl.4(xi), ~t3(xi)). Then 7"~([[M~o~t, [[M]]on). In particular, if , 4 - 13 and M is a closed term (i.e. contains no free variables), its meaning [[M]] in a model ,4 is invariant under all logical relations. This holds also for

28

PJ. Scott

languages which have constants at base types, by assuming [[c]] is invariant, for all such constants c. This result has been used by Plotkin, Statman, Sieber et al. [Plo80,Sie92,St85] to show certain elements (of models) are not lambda definable: it suffices to find some logical relation on A for which the element in question is not invariant. There is no reason to restrict ourselves to binary logical relations: one may speak of n-ary logical relations, which relate n Henkin models [St85]. Indeed, since Henkin models are closed under products, it suffices to consider unary logical relations, known as logical predicates. EXAMPLE 2.46 (Hereditary permutations). Consider a Henkin model .A, with a specified permutation rob :Ab ~ Ab at each base type b. We extend zr to all types as follows: (i) on product types we extend componentwise: zr~ • r = zr~ x zrr : A~ • r ~ A~r• r ; (ii) on function spaces, extend by conjugation: zrcr~ r ( f ) = zrr o f o zr~-l, where f ~ Act~ r . We build a logical relation R. on .A by letting R~ = the graph of permutation zr~ :A~ ~ A,r, i.e. R~ (a, b) r162zr,r (a) = b. Members of R will be called hereditary permutations. 7~-invariant elements a a A~ are simply fixed points of the permutation: zr~r(a) = a. Hereditary permutations and invariant elements also arise categorically by interpretation into SetZ: PROPOSITION 2.47. The category Set z of (left) Z-sets is equivalent to the category whose objects are sets equipped with a permutation and whose maps ( = equivariant maps) are functions commuting with the distinguished permutations. Invariant elements of A are arrows 1 -~ A E Set z. Alas, Set Z is not a Henkin model (1 is not a generator). In the next section we shall slightly generalize the notion of logical relation to work on a larger class of structures. 2.6.1. Logical relations and syntax. Logical predicates (also called computability predicates) originally arose in proof theory as a technique for proving normalization and other syntactical properties of typed lambda calculi [LS86,GLT]. Later, Plotkin, Statman, and Mitchell [Plo80,St85,Mit96] constructed logical relations on various kinds of structures more general than Henkin models. Following Statman and Mitchell, we extend the notion of logical relation to certain applicative typed structures .A for which (i) appropriate meaning functions on the syntax of typed lambda calculus, i[M]]o~t, are well-defined, and (ii) all logical relations R are (in a suitable sense) congruence relations with respect to the syntax. This guarantees that the meanings of lambda abstraction and application behave appropriately under these logical relations. Following [Mit96,St85] we call them admissible logical relations. The Soundness Theorem still holds in this more general setting, now using admissible logical relations on applicative typed structures (see [Mit96], Lemma 8.2.10).


29

EXAMPLE 2.48. Let A be the hereditary permutations in Example 2.46. Consider a free simply typed lambda calculus, without constants. Then as a corollary of Soundness we have: the meaning of any closed term M is invariant under all hereditary permutations. This conclusion is itself a consequence of the universal property of free Cartesian closed categories when interpreted in Set z (cf. Corollary 2.22 and L~iuchli's Theorem 5.4). REMARK 2.49. The rewriting theory of lambda calculi is a prototype for Operational Semantics of many programming languages (recall the discussion after the g-rule, Corollary 2.11). See also Section 2.8.1 below on PCF. Logical Predicates (so-called computability predicates) were first introduced to prove strong normalization for simply typed lambda calculi (with natural numbers types) by W. Tait in the 1960's. Highly sophisticated computability predicates for polymorphically typed systems like U and UoJ were first introduced by Girard in his thesis [Gi71,Gi72]. For a particularly clear presentation, see his book [GLT]. These techniques were later revisited by Statman and Mitchell- using more general logical relations - to also prove Church-Rosser and a host of other syntactic and semantic results for such calculi (see [Mit96]). For general categorical treatments of logical relations, see [Mit96,MitSce,MaRey] and references there. Uses of logical relations in operational semantics of typed lambda calculi are covered in [AC98,Mit96]. A categorical theory of logical relations applied to data refinement is in [KOPTT]. Use of operationally-based logical relations in programming language semantics is in [Pi96b,Pi97]. For techniques of categorical rewriting applied to lambda calculus, see [JGh95].

2.7. Example 1: Reduction-free normalization The operational semantics of )~-calculi have traditionally been based on rewriting theory or proof theory, e.g., normalization or cut-elimination, Church-Rosser, etc. More recently, Berger and Schwichtenberg [BS91] gave a model-theoretic extraction of normal forms a kind of "inverting" of the canonical set-theoretic interpretation used in Friedman's Completeness Theorem (cf. 5.2 below). In this section we sketch the use of categorical methods (essentially from Yoneda's Lemma, cf. Theorem 5.1) to obtain the Berger-Schwichtenberg analysis. A first version of this technique was developed by Altenkirch, Hoffman, and Streicher [AHS95,AHS96]. The analysis given here comes from the article [CDS97], which also mentions intriguing analogues to the Joyal-Gordon-Power-Street techniques for proving coherence in various structured (bi-)categories. The essential idea common to these coherence theorems is to use a version of Yoneda's lemma to embed into a "stricter" presheaf category. To actually extract a normalization algorithm from these observations requires us to constructively reinterpret the categorical setting in 79Set, as explained below. This leads to a non-trivial example of program extraction from a structured proof, in a manner advocated by Martin-LOf and his school [ML82,Dy95,H97a, CD97]. The reader is referred to [CDS97] for the fine details of the proof. In a certain sense, the results sketched below are "dual" to Lambek's original goal of categorical proof theory [L68,L69], in which he used cut-elimination to study categorical -

PJ. Scott

30

coherence problems. Here, we use a method inspired from categorical coherence proofs to normalize simply typed lambda terms (and thus intuitionistic proofs). 2.7.1. Categorical normal forms. L e t / 2 be a language, 7- the set of E-terms and ~ a congruence relation on 7". One way to decide whether two terms are ~-congruent is to find an abstract normal form function, i.e. a computable function n f : 7 - ~ 7- satisfying the following conditions for some (finer) congruence relation - : (NF1) n f ( f ) ~ f ,

(NF2) f ~ g ~ n f ( f ) --nf(g), (NF3) - - _ _ ~ , (NF4) ---- is decidable. From (NF1), (NF2) and (NF3) we see that f "~ g r162n f ( f ) -- nf(g). This clearly permits a decision procedure: to decide if two terms are ~-related, compute n f of each one, and see if they are -_--related, using (NF4). The normal form function nf essentially "reduces" the decision problem of "~ to that of --. This view is inspired from [CD97]. Here we l e t / 2 be typed lambda calculus, 7" the set of ~.-terms, ~ be fiT-conversion, and -- be a-congruence. Let us see heuristically how category theory can be used to give simply typed ~.-calculus a normal form function nf. Recall 2.22 that ~-terms modulo flr/-conversion ~t~0 determine the free ccc .T'x on the set of sorts (atoms) 2". 2 By the universal property 2.22, for any ccc C and any interpretation of the atoms 2" in ob(C), there is a unique (up to iso) ccc-functor ![-]] : ~ ' x --+ C freely extending this interpretation. Let C b e t h e p r e s h e a f c a t . .e_~gO~eS:t~,x" There are two obvious ccc-functors: (i) the Yoneda ,.,,~,,.,,,,,,, . , g3;: A" (cr. 5.1) and (ii) if we interpret the atoms by Yoneda, there is also the free extension to the cccfunctor [[-ll " ~ x ---> Set ~x'p. By the universal property, there is a natural isomorphism q : 3; ---> H-I1. By the Yoneda lemma we shall invert the interpretation l[-ll on each homset, according to the following commutative diagram: I1-11

.T'x ( A , B)

Set + x ([[A]], [[B]])

-- o q A I

--A( ,L-op

Set"-x ( y a , y B ) -I

That is, for any f 6 3cA, (A, B), we obtain natural transformations YA

qA

> [[A]]

[[f ]]

>

[[B]] qB> yB. Then evaluating these transformations at A gives the Set functions: -1

f'x(A, A) qA,~ [[AliA [I./nr UB]]A q""~ f'x(A, B). Hence starting with 1A 6 :'x(A, A), we can define an n f function by: n f ( f ) =def qB,A ([[f]lA (qA:A(1A))). 2 We actually use the free ccc of sequences of ~-terms as defined by Pitts [Pi9?].

(lO)


31

Clearly n f ( f ) ~ .T'x(A, B). But, alas, by Yoneda's Lemma, n f ( f ) = f ! Indeed, this is just a restatement of part of the Yoneda isomorphism. But all is not lost: recall NF1 says n f ( f ) ~ f . This suggests we should reinterpret the entire categorical argument, including the use of functor categories and Yoneda's Lemma, in a setting where " = " becomes " ~ " , a (partial) equivalence relation. Diagrams which previously commuted now should commute "up to ~ " . This viewpoint has a long history in constructive mathematics, where it is common to use sets (X, ~ ) equipped with explicit equivalence relations in place of quotients X / ~ (because of problems with the Axiom of Choice). Thus, along with specifying elements of a set, one must also say what it means for two elements to be "equal" (see [Bee85]). 2.7.2. P - c a t e g o r y theory a n d normalization algorithms. Motivated by enriched category theory [K82,Bor94], this view leads to the setting of 79-category theory in [CDS97]. In 79category theory (i) hom-sets are 79Sets, i.e. sets equipped with a partial equivalence relation (per) ~ , (ii) all operations on arrows are 79Set maps, i.e. preserve ~ , (iii) functors are H-versions of enriched functors, (iv) 79-functor categories and 79-natural transformations are --~-versions of appropriate enriched structure, etc. One then proves a 79-version of Yoneda's lemma. In essence, P-category theory is the development of ordinary (enriched) category theory in a constructive setting, where equality of arrows is systematically replaced by explicit pers, making sure every operation on arrows is a congruence with respect to the given pers. For an example, see Figure 6.

P-Products 9 c ~ c for any constant c ~ {!A, ~1, ~2}, 9 f ~ f ' for any f, f ' : A --+ 1, 9 fi "~ gi implies ( f l , f2) ~ (gl, g2), zri (fl, f2) ~ f / w h e r e j~, g i : C ~ 9 (re1k, rr2k) ~ k, for k : C --+ A 1 • A2 P-Exponentials 9 ev ~ ev for BA • A ev7 B, 9 h "~ h t implies h* ~ h ~* : C ~ 9 h ~ h t implies ev(h*rq, zr2) ~ 9 1 ~ l ~ implies (ev(lrcl, rr2))* ~ 79-Functo r 9 f "~ f ' implies F f ~ F f ' for 9 f ~ f ' , g ~ g' implies F ( g f ) 9 F ( i d A ) ~ idF(A),

B A, where h, h~: C • A --+ B h t, lt: C --+ B A.

all f, f ' , ,.~ F g ' F f ~ for all composable f, g and f ' , g',

9 Specified 79-isomorphisms 1 -7 F1, F A x F B ( F B ) FA

Ai,

- 7 F ( B A)

Fig. 6. 79-ccc's and 7~-ccc functors.

- 7 F ( A • B),

P.J. Scott

32

Now consider the free ccc (gt'x, ~ ) as a P-category, where the arrows are actually sequences of)~-terms and the per ~ on arrows is 130-equality =~0. Analogously to the above, freeness in the P-setting yields a unique 79-ccc functor [[-]]" (.T'x, ~ ) --+ 79Set (~vx'~)~ , where atoms X 6 2' are interpreted by 79-Yoneda, i.e. as H o m ~ ' x , _ ) ( - , X). Just as in the ordinary case, the 79-Yoneda functor 3; is a 79-ccc functor, so we have a P-natural isomorphism q 9[[-]] --+ 3 ~ of 79-ccc 79-functors 9

Ii,

(.T'x, ~ )

q $ T q-1

79Set(~-x,-)~ Ii,

Y In this setting nf as defined by Eq. (10) will be a per-preserving function on terms themselves and not just on t3 0-equivalence classes of terms (recall that, classically, a free ccc has for its arrows equivalence classes of terms modulo the appropriate equations). Arguing as before, but now using the 79-Yoneda isomorphism, it follows immediately that nf is an identity 79-function. But this means n f ( f ) ,-~ f , which is precisely the statement of NF1. Moreover, the part of P-category theory that we use is constructive in the sense that all functions we construct are algorithms. Therefore nf is computable. It remains to prove NF2: f ~ g =~ n f ( f ) = nf(g). This is the most subtle point. Here too the P-version of a general categorical fact will help us (cf. 2.4): the 79-presheaf category 79Set c~ is a 79-ccc for any 79-category C. In particular, let C be the 79-category (~-x, = ) of sequences of ),-terms up to "change of bound variable" = . This is a trivially decidable equivalence relation on terms (called u-congruence in the literature) and obviously = ___ =/~0. Note that this P-category has the same objects and arrows as ( f ' x , ~ ) , but the pers on arrows are different. By the freeness of ()Vx, ,~), we have another interpretation 79-functor [[-11-- (3vx, ,~) ~ 79Se(~-x,-) "p, where we interpret atoms X 6 2" by the 79-presheaf H o m ( y ' x _ ) ( - , X). The key fact is that this 79-functor U - l ] - has exactly the same set-theoretic effect on objects and arrows as [[-]]. That is, one proves by induction: LEMMA 2.50. For all objects C and arrows f in ( U x , "~), IHClll - IllCll~l and similarly I [ [ f ] ] l - - I ~ f l l - l , where [ - [ means taking the underlying set-theoretic structure. Hence, we can conclude that f ~ g implies [[fll = ~g]] (here = refers to the per on arrows in PSet('~x'-)~ We can show that q8 and q~l are ---natural, in particular qB,A -1 a n d ,as, a preserve --. It then follows that n f ( f ) _----nf(g), as desired.


33

REMARK 2.51. (i) The normal forms obtained by this method can be shown to coincide with the socalled long ~rl normal forms used in lambda calculus [CDS97]. (ii) The direct inductive proofs used above correspond more naturally to a moreinvolved bicategorical definition of freeness ([CDS97], Remark 3.17). Finally, in [CDS97] it is shown how to apply the method to the word problem for typed ~-calculi with additional axioms and operations, i.e. to freely-generated ccc's modulo certain theories. This employs appropriate free 79-ccc's (over a P-category, a 79-Cartesian category, etc). These are generated by various notions of )~-theory, which are determined not only by a set of atomic types, but also by a set of basic typed constants as well as a set of equations between terms. Although the Yoneda methods always yield an algorithm nf it does not necessarily satisfy NF4 (the decidability of =). What is obtained in these cases is a reduction of the word problems for such free ccc's to those of the underlying generating categories.

2.8. Example 2: P C F The language PCE due to Dana Scott in 1969, has deeply influenced recent programming language theory. Much of this influence arises from seminal work of Gordon Plotkin in the 1970's on operational and denotational semantics for PCF. We shall briefly outline the syntax and basic semantical issues of the language following from Plotkin's work. We follow the treatment in [AC98,Sie92], although the original paper [Plo77] is highly recommended. 2.8.1. P C E structure: Types:

The language PCF is an explicitly typed lambda calculus with the following

Generated from nat, boole by =~.

Lambda Terms:

generated from typed variables using the following specified constants:

n : n a t , for each n e N T : boole F :boole succ : nat =~ nat p red: nat =~ nat

zero? :nat =r boole condnat : boole =r (nat ==>(nat :=~ nat)) condboole : boole =~ (boole =:~ (boole =~ boole)) _1_~ :or Y~ : (or ~ or) :=~ or.

Categorical models. The standard model of PCF is defined in the ccc w-CPO• as follows: interpret the base types as in Figure 4 ~nat]] = N • ~boole]] = B • ~or =~ vii = [[or]] =~ [[vii (= function space in co-CPO). Interpret constants as follows (for clarity, we omit writing [[-]])" succ, pred" Nat• --+ Nat• zero?" N a t • --+ B• condo" boole x or2

34

P.J. Scott (~,x .qg)'a --+ qg[a/x]

zero?'(n+ 1) --+ f

u --+ f ' ( u succ'n --+ n + 1

cond tab --+ a cond fab --+ b

pred'(n + 1) --+ n f--+g

f--->g

f ' a --+ g'a

u' f --+ u' g

zero?'(O) --+ t

where u ~ {succ, pred, zero?}

f~g cond f ab --+ cond gab

where c o n d x y z = ((cond'x)' y ) ' z

Fig. 7. Operational semantics for PCE

~r, cr ~ {nat, boole} (cond is for conditional, sometimes called if then else), [IT1] = t, [[F]] = f, [In]] = n, s u c c ( x ) - / x + 1 if x # 2-, ifx --2_, / 2pred(x)

_ix-1 1 2-

zero?(x) -

if x # 2 _ , 0 , else,

t ifx =0, f if x -r 0, 2_, 2_ if x -_1_,

cond~ (p, y, z) -

y if p = t , z if p = f , 2- if p=_l_,

2-~ is the least element of [[~r]] (denoting "non-termination" or "divergent"). u is the least fixed point operator Y,,r( f ) = V { f n ( I c ~ ) l n >/0} (see Example 3.5).

More generally, a standard model of PCF is an o~-CPO-enriched ccc C, in which each homset C(A, B) has a smallest element lAB :A ---> B with the following properties: (i) pairing and currying are monotonic, (ii) 2_ o f = f and ev o (2-, f ) = _1_for all f of appropriate type, (iii) there are objects nat and boole whose sets of global elements satisfy C(1, nat) N• and C(1, boole) ~ B• and in which the constants are all interpreted in the internal language of C as in the standard model above (e.g., interpreting [[succ(x)]] by ev o (succ, x), etc.). A model is order-extensional if 1 is a generator and the order on hom-sets coincides with the pointwise ordering. The operational semantics of PCF is given by a set of rewriting rules, displayed in Figure 7. This is intended to describe the dynamic evaluation of a term, as a sequence of 1-step transitions. The fixed-point combinator u guarantees some computations may not terminate. It is important to emphasize that in operational semantics with partially-defined (i.e. possibly non-terminating) computations, different orders of evaluation (e.g., left-most outermost vs innermost) may lead to non-termination in some cases and may also effect efficiency, etc. (see [Mit96], Chapter 2). We have chosen a simple operational semantics for PCF, given by a deterministic evaluation relation, following [AC98].


2.8.2. Adequacy.

35

A P C F p r o g r a m is a closed term of base type (i.e. either nat or boole).

T h e o b s e r v a b l e b e h a v i o u r o f a P C F p r o g r a m P 9n a t i s t h e s e t B e h ( P ) = {n ~ N I P * ~ n}, and similarly for P :boole. The set B e h ( P ) is either empty if P diverges or a singleton if

P converges to a (necessarily unique) normal form. The following theorem is proved using a logical relations argument. THEOREM 2.52 (Computational adequacy). Let C be any standard model o f PCF. Then f o r all p r o g r a m s P : n a t a n d n ~ N, P

>n

iff

[[Pl]=n

a n d similarly f o r P : boole. Hence [[P]] = [[Q]] iff their sets o f behaviours are equal.

We are interested in a notion of"observational equivalence" arising from the operational semantics. A program (a closed term of base type) can be observed to converge to a specific numeral or boolean value. More generally, what can we observe about arbitrary terms of any type? The idea is to plug them into arbitrary program code, and observe the behaviour. More precisely, a p r o g r a m context C [ - ] is a program with a hole in it (the hole has a specified type) which is such that if we formally plug a PCF term M into (the hole of) C [ - ] (we don't care about possible clashes of bound variables) we obtain a program C[M]. We are looking at the convergence behaviour (with respect to the operational semantics) of the resulting program (cf. [AC98]). DEFINITION 2.53. Two PCF terms M, N of the same type are observationally equivalent (denoted M ~ N) iff B e h ( C [ M ] ) = B e h ( C [ N ] ) for every program context C [ - ] . That is, M ~ N means that for all program contexts C [ - ] , C[M] * > c iff C[N] ~ * c (for c either a Boolean value or a numeral). Thus, by the previous theorem, M ~ N iff ~C[M]]] = ~ C [ N ] ] . In order to prove observational equivalence of two PCF terms, R. Milner showed it suffices to pick applicative contexts, i.e. LEMMA 2.54 (Milner). Two closed P C F expressions M, N:0-1 :=6 (0"2 :=~ . . . ( . . . (0"n =~ n a t ) . . . ) are observationally equivalent iff [ I M P 1 . . . Pn]] = [[NP1. . . Pn]] f o r all closed Pi : 0-i, l A

/ AB

B

BB

~B

This says, using informal set-theoretic notation, if g: A B, f ( Y A ( g o f ) ) = YB(f o g). In particular, setting B -- A and letting g - idB, we have the fixed-point equation f ( Y A ( f ) ) -- YA ( f ) .

For example, consider co-CPO• - the subccc of co-CPO whose objects A have a least element -LA but the morphisms need not preserve it. It may be shown that the family given by YA ( f ) = the least fixed-point o f f = V { f n (_LA) I n ~ 0} is dinatural (see [BFSS90, Mu191,Si93]). There is a calculus of multivariant functors F, G : ( C ~ n x C n --+ C functors. For example basic type constructors may be defined (using products and exponentials in C) by

40

P.J. Scott

setting (F • G ) A B = F A B • G A B ,

(11)

( G V ) A B -- G A B FBA.

(12)

Here A is the list of n contravariant and B the list of n covariant arguments. Note the twist of the arguments in the definition of exponentiation. Much of the structure of Cartesian closedness (e.g., evaluation maps, currying, projections, pairing, etc.) exists within the world of dinatural transformations and there is a kind of abstract functorial calculus (cf. [BFSS90], Appendix A6, [Fre93]). Unfortunately, there is a serious problem: in general, dinaturals do not compose. That is, given dinatural families { F A A

OA)~ G A A

I A ~ C} and { G A A

l~ra) H A A

[ A c C},

the composite { F A A l[tA~ H A A [ A ~ C} does not always make the appropriate hexagon commute. However, with respect to the original question of closure of parametric functions under isomorphisms of types, we note that families dinatural with respect to isomorphisms f do in fact compose. But this class is too weak for a general modelling. Detailed studies of such phenomena have been done in [BFSS90,FRRa,FRRb]. Remarkably, there are certain categories C over which there are large classes of multivariant functors and dinatural transformation which provide a compositional semantics: 9 In [BFSS90] it is shown that if C = Per(N), that so-called realizable dinatural transformations between realizable functors compose. Realizable functors include almost any functors that arise in practice (e.g., those definable from the syntax of System .T') while realizable dinatural transformations are families of per morphisms whose action is given uniformly by a single Turing machine. This semantics also has a kind of universal quantifier modelling System ~'(see below). 9 In [GSS91 ] it is shown that the syntax of simply typed lambda calculus with type variables - i.e. C = a free ccc - admits a compositional dinatural semantics (between logically definable functors and dinatural families). This uses the cut-elimination theorem from proof theory. This work was extended to Linear Logic by R. Blute [Blu93]. 9 In [BS96] there is a compositional dinatural semantics for the multiplicative fragment of linear logic (generated by atoms). Here C = 74T);EC, a category of reflexive topological vector spaces first studied by Lefschetz [Lef63], with functors being syntactically definable. In [BS96b,BS98] this was extended to a compositional dinatural semantics for Yetter's noncommutative cyclic linear logic. In both cases, one demands certain uniformity conditions on dinatural families, involving equivariance w.r.t, continuous group (respectively Hopf-algebra) actions induced from actions on the atoms (see also Section 5.2 below). (For the non-cyclic fragment this is automatic.) Associated with dinaturality is a kind of "parametric" universal quantifier first described by Yoneda and which plays a fundamental role in modern category theory [Mac71]. DEFINITION 3.6. An end of a multivariant functor G on a category C is an object E - fa G A A and a dinatural transformation KE --+ G, universal among all such dinatural transformations.


41

In more elementary terms, there is a family of arrows

{fa~176

; GXXIX

~C

I f

making the main square in the following diagram commute, for any X ) Y, and such that given any other family u -- {ux I X ~ C} such that G X f o u x = G f Y o u r , there is a unique A u making the appropriate triangles commute: D

GXX

GXY

f a GAA

GYY

One may think of fA G A A as a subset of 17A G A A (note, this is a "large" product over all A ~ C, so C must have appropriate limits for this to exist) fAGAA

-- {g E 1 7 A G A A [ G X f

o

Ox -- G f Y o Oy,

f o r a l l X , Y, f : X --+ Y 6 C}. In [BFSS90] versions of such ends over Per(N) are discussed with respect to parametric modelling of System 9r. In a somewhat different direction, co-ends (dual to ends) are a kind of sum or existential quantifier. Their use in categorical computer science was strongly emphasized in early work of Bainbridge [B72,B76] on duality theory for machines in categories. A useful observation is that we may consider functors R : C x D --+ Set and S : D x g --+ Set as generalized relations, with relational composition being determined by the coend formula R; s(c, E) - fD (g(c, D) • S(D, E)). This view has recently been applied to relational semantics of datafiow languages in [HPW]. We should mention that dinaturality is also intimately connected with categorical coherence theorems and geometrical properties of proofs [Blu93,So87]. It also seems to be hidden in deeper aspects of Cut-Elimination [GSS91], although here there is still much to understand. We shall meet dinaturality again in several places (e.g., in Traced Monoidal Categories, Section 6.1).

42

P.J. Scott

3.2. R e y n o l d s p a r a m e t r i c i t y Reynolds [Rey83] analyzed Strachey's notion of parametric polymorphism using a relational model of types. Although his original idea of using a Set-based model was later shown by Reynolds himself to be untenable, the framework has greatly influenced subsequent studies. As a concrete illustration, following [BFSS90] we shall sketch a relational model over Per(N). Related results in more general frameworks were obtained by Hasegawa [RHas94,RHas95] and Ma and Reynolds [MaRey]. Although originally Reynolds' work was semantical, general logics for reasoning about formal parametricity, supported by such Per models, were developed in [BAC95,P1Ab93,ACC93]. Given pers A , A ! ~ P e r ( N ) , a saturated relation R" A--~A ! is a relation R C d o m A • d o m A , satisfying R = A; R; A !, where 9 denotes relational composition. For all pers A, A !, B, B !, saturated relations R" A--~A ! and S" B-/~B ! and elements a ~ d o m A , a ! c d o m A, , b ~ d o m B , b ! ~ d o m B, we define a relational S y s t e m .T" type structure as follows: 9 R x S" ( A x B ) - - ~ ( A ' x B ' ) , given componentwise by (a, b ) R x S(a', b') iff a R a ! and b S b 1. =, B)--/~(A ! =, B'), where f ( R =, S ) g iff f, g are (codes of) Turing computable functions satisfying a R a ' implies f a S g a ' for any a, a ! as above. 9 Vet 9r(et, S)'u 9r(et, B)--~u 9r(et, B !) is defined by a simultaneous inductive definition based on the formation of type expression r (et, 13). We shall omit the technical construction (see [BFSS90], p. 49) but the key idea is to redefine the Per-interpretation of Vet 9r(et) by triming down the intersection NA r(A) to only those elements invariant under all saturated relations, while Vet 9r (et, S) = ~ n r ( R , S), the intersection being over all pers A, At and saturated R" A--~A!. The somewhat involved construction of Yet 9r(et) ensures the type expressions r ( - ) act like functors with respect to saturated relations. More precisely, Reynolds' parametricity entails" 9 If R" A--/-~A ! is a saturated relation, then for any polymorphic type r, r ( R ) " r(A)--/-~r(A !) is a saturated relation. 9 Identity Extension L e m m a : r preserves identity relations, i.e. r ( i d A ) - idr(A), as saturated relations r ( A ) ~ r ( A ) (and similarly for r ( i d a l . . . . . idA,,)). One obtains a Soundness Theorem, essentially the interpretation of the free term model of System .7- into the relational Per model above. For simplicity, consider terms with only one variable. Let cr -- cr (etl . . . . . etn) and r -- r (etl . . . . . etn) denote polymorphic types with free type variables ___ {etl . . . . . etn}. Let x ' ~ r ~ t ' r denote term t'~r with free variable x'cr. Associated to every System 9v term t is a Turing computable numerical function f t , obtained by essentially erasing all types and considering the result as an untyped lambda term, qua computable partial function (see [BFSS90], Appendix A. 1). 9 R =, S ' ( A

!

THEOREM 3.7 (Soundness). Let Ai , A i be p e r s a n d Ri " Ai --~A !i saturated relations. Then if m ~ r ( R ) m ' then _.ft(m)'c(R) f t ( m ! ) . Also, if t -- t ! in S y s t e m .T', then ft -- ft' as Per(N) m a p s or(A) --+ r(A).


43

Thus terms (programs) become "relation transformers" o-(R) --~ r(R) (cf. [MitSce, Fre93]) of the form ft 9 r(A) a(A)

/

3

a(R)

...................

a(A')

--,

~ r(R)

-- v(A')

In particular this exemplifies Reynolds' interpretation of Strachey's parametricity: if one instantiates an element of polymorphic type at two related types, then the two values obtained must be related themselves. Reynolds parametricity has the following interesting consequence [BFSS90,RHas94]. Recall the category of T-algebras, for definable functors T (cf. the proof of Theorem 2.40). THEOREM 3.8. Let T be a System f-definable covariant functor. Then in the parametric Per model Vot . ((T~ ==~or) =~ ~) is the initial T-algebra. This property becomes a general theorem in the formal logics of parametricity (e.g., [P1Ab93,RHas95]), and hence would be true in any appropriate parametric model. Thus, although the syntax of second-order logic in general only guarantees weakly initial data types as in [GLT], in parametric models of System ~ the usual definitions actually yield strong data types. The reader might rightly enquire: do relational parametricity and dinaturality have anything in common? This is exactly the kind of question that requires a logic for reasoning about parametricity. Plotkin and Abadi's logic [P1Ab93] extends the equational theory of System ~" with quantification over functions and relations, together with a schema expressing Reynolds' relational parametricity. The dinaturality hexagon in Definition 3.1, for definable functors and families, is expressible as a quantified equation in this logic. PROPOSITION 3 . 9 .

In the formal system above, relational parametricity implies dinatu-

rality. Reynolds' work on parametricity continues to inspire fundamental research directions in programming language theory, even beyond polymorphism. For example, O'Hearn and Tennent [OHT92,OHT93] use relational parametricity to examine difficult problems in local-variable declarations in Algol-like languages. Their framework is particularly interesting. They use ccc's of functor categories and natural transformations, h la Oles and Reynolds, but internal to the category of reflexive directed multigraphs. The same framework, somewhat generalized, was then used by A. Pitts [Pi96a] in a general relational approach to reasoning about properties of recursively defined domains. Pitts work has led

44

k~J. Scott

to new approaches to induction and co-induction, etc. (see Section 2.5). The reader is referred to Pitts [Pi96a], p. 74, and O'Hearn and Tennent [OHT93] for many examples of these so-called relational structures over categories C.

4. Linear logic 4.1. Monoidal categories We briefly recall the relevant definitions. For details, the reader is referred to [Mac71, Bor94]. DEFINITION 4.1. A monoidal category is a category C equipped with a functor @" C x C ~ C, an object I, and specified natural isomorphisms" aABc " (A | B) | C ~A " I

| A -> A

-> A | (B | C)

and

rA" A | I

-> A

satisfying coherence equations: associativity coherence (Mac Lane's Pentagon) and the unit coherence. A symmetric monoidal category is a monoidal category with a natural symmetry isomorphism SAS " A | B > B @ A satisfying: SB,ASA,B subscripts) r -- ls, asa = (1 | s)a(s | 1).

--

idA|

for all A, B, and (omitting

Symmetric monoidal categories include Cartesian categories (with | = x) and coCartesian categories (with @ - +). However in the two latter cases, the structure is uniquely determined (up to isomorphism)- and similarly for the coherence isomorphisms - by the universal property of products (resp. coproducts). This is not true in the general case - there may be many symmetric monoidal structures on the same category. We now introduce the monoidal analog of ccc's: DEFINITION 4.2. A symmetric monoidal closed category ( = smcc) (C, | I,--o) is a symmetric monoidal category such that for each object A ~ C, the functor - | A ' C --~ C has a specified fight adjoint A --o - , i.e. for each A there is an isomorphism, natural in B,C: H o m c ( C @ A, B) ~ H o m e ( C , A ---o B).

(13)

As a consequence, in any smcc there are "evaluation" and "coevaluation" maps (A --o B) | A e v a ~ B and C > (A ---o (C | A)) determined by the adjointness (13). We shall try to keep close to our ccc notation, Section 2.1. In particular the analog of Currying f* arising from (13) is denoted C , (A ---o B). Moreover, this data actually determines a (bi)functor - ---o - 9C~ x C --+ C. No special coherences have to be supposed for - --o - : they follow from coherence for @ and adjointness.


45

For the purposes of studying linear logic below, we need (among other things) a notion of an smcc, equipped with an involutive negation or duality, reminiscent of finite dimensional vector spaces. The general theory of such categories, due to M. Barr [Barr79], was developed in the mid 1970's, some ten years before linear logic. Consider an smcc C, with a distinguished object _L. Consider the map evA.L o SA_L :A | (A ---o _1_) ~ _1_.By (13) this corresponds to a map/ZA :A --+ (A ---o 2_) ---o 2-. Let us write A'L for A ---o _1_.Thus we have a morphism/ZA :A ~ A'L'L. Objects A for which/ZA is an isomorphism are called reflexive, or more precisely reflexive with respect to 2-. DEFINITION 4.3. A ,-autonomous category (C, | I, ----o, _1_) is an smcc C with a distinguished object 2- such that all objects are reflexive, i.e. the canonical map ]~A :A ---+ A'L'L is an isomorphism for all A E C. The object _1_is called the dual• object. It may be shown that a , - a u t o n o m o u s category C has a contravariant dual• functor (-)'L:C~ --+ C, defined on objects by A ~ A -L. There is a natural isomorphism:

Home(A, B) ~ Homc(B "L, A'L). In any , - a u t o n o m o u s category C there are isomorphisms (A ---o B ) J- --~ A Q B "L

i~l

"L "

The reader is referred to [Barr79] for many examples. Let us mention the obvious one: EXAMPLE 4.4. The category Vecfd of finite-dimensional vector spaces over a field k is ,-autonomous. Here A ---o B = Lin(A, B), the space of linear maps from A to B and the dual• object _1_ - - k . In particular A "L = A* is the usual dual space. More generally, within the smcc category Vec of k-vector spaces (with _L = k), an object is reflexive iff it is finite-dimensional. In a , - a u t o n o m o u s category, we may define the cotensor ~ by de Morgan duality: A ~ B = (A "L | B-L) • The above example Vecfd is somewhat "degenerate" since @ and are identified (see Definition 4.10 of compact category). In a typical , - a u t o n o m o u s category this is not the case; indeed in linear logic one does not want to identify tensor and cotensor. To obtain more general , - a u t o n o m o u s categories of vector spaces, we add a topological structure, due to Lefschetz [Lef63]. The following discussion is primarily based on work of M. Barr [Barr79], following the treatment in Blute [Blu96]. DEFINITION 4.5. Let V be a vector space. A topology r on V is linear if it satisfies the following three properties: 9 Addition and scalar multiplication are continuous, when the field k is given the discrete topology. 9 r is Hausdorff. 9 0 ~ V has a neighborhood basis of open linear subspaces.

46

P.J. Scott

Let 7-]2~C denote the category whose objects are vector spaces equipped with linear topologies, and whose morphisms are linear continuous maps. Barr showed that 7-)2CC is a symmetric monoidal closed category, when V ~ W is defined to be the vector space of linear continuous maps, topologized with the topology of pointwise convergence. (It is shown in [Barr96] that the forgetful functor 7")2~C --+ ~;EC is tensor-preserving.) Let V • denote V ---o k. Lefschetz proved that the embedding V --+ V •177is always a bijection, but need not be an isomorphism. This is analogous to Dana Scott's method of solving domain equations in denotational semantics, using the topology to cut down the size of the function spaces. THEOREM 4.6 (Barr). R7-VEC, the full subcategory of reflexive objects in 7-Vs is a complete, cocomplete ,-autonomous category, with I • = I = k the dualizing object. Moreover, in 7"ZT"Vs | and ~ are not equated. More generally, other classes of , autonomous categories arise by taking a linear analog of G-sets, namely categories of group representations. DEFINITION 4.7. Let G be a group. A continuous G-module is a linear action of G on a space V in T V s such that for all g e G, the induced map g . ( ) : V ~ V is continuous. Let 7",MOD(G) denote the category of continuous G-modules and continuous equivariant maps. Let R T A 4 O D ( G ) denote the full subcategory of reflexive objects. We have the following result, which in fact holds in the more general context of Hopf algebras (see below). THEOREM 4.8. The category T.A4OD(G) is symmetric monoidal closed. The category R 7 - , ~ O D ( G ) is ,-autonomous, and a reflective subcategory of T.A4OD(G) via the functor ( )•177Furthermore the forgetful functor l 1: 7~7"./~079(G) --+ ~7")2CC preserves the ,-autonomous structure. Still more general classes of ,-autonomous categories may be obtained from categories of modules of cocommutative Hopf algebras. Given a Hopf algebra H, a module over H is a linear action p : H | V ~ V satisfying the appropriate diagrams, analogous to the notion of G-module. Let .A4OD(H) denote the category of H-modules and equivariant maps. Similarly, T M OD(H), the category of continuous H-modules, is the linearly topologized version of A 4 0 D ( H ) where I-I is given the discrete topology and all vector spaces and maps are in TI;gC. PROPOSITION 4.9. If H is a cocommutative Hopf algebra, ,A/IOD(H) and 7"MOD(H) are symmetric monoidal categories. We then obtain precisely the same statement as Theorem 4.8 by replacing the group G by a cocommutative Hopf algebra H. Later we shall mention noncommutative Hopf algebra models for linear logic, with respect to full completeness theorems, Section 5.2. The case where we do identify | and N is an important class of monoidal categories:


47

DEFINITION 4.10. A ,-autonomous category is c o m p a c t if (A @ B) • ~ A • @ B • (i.e. equivalently if A ---o B ~ A • | B). In addition to the obvious example of Vecfa, there are compact categories of relations, which have considerable importance in computer science. One such is: EXAMPLE 4.1 1. Relx is the category whose objects are sets and whose maps R" X --+ Y are (binary) relations R c X x Y. Composition is relational composition, etc. This is a compact category, with X @ Y -- X ---o Y =def X x Y, the ordinary set-theoretic Cartesian product. Define _1_ -- {,}, a one-element set; hence X • = X --o 4_ -- X. On maps we have R • -- R ~ where y R ~ iff x Ry. Given two smcc's C and 79 (we shall not distinguish the structure) what are the morphisms between them? DEFINITION 4.12. A symmetric m o n o i d a l f u n c t o r is a functor F : C --+ 79 together with two natural transformations m t : I --+ F ( I ) and m u v : F ( U ) | F ( V ) --+ F ( U @ V ) such that three coherence diagrams commute. In the case of the closed structure, we can define another natural transformation r h u v : F ( U --o V ) --+ ( F U ---o F V ) by r h u v = ( F ( e v u - o v , u ) o mu--ov, u)*. A symmetric monoidal functor is strong (resp. strict) if m1 and m u v are natural isomorphisms (resp. identities) for all U, V. A symmetric monoidal functor is strong closed (resp. strict closed) if m I and rh u v are natural isomorphisms (resp. identifies) for all U, V. Similarly, one defines , - a u t o n o m o u s functors. Finally, we need an appropriate notion of natural transformation for monoidal functors. DEFINITION 4.13. A natural transformation c~'F -+ G is m o n o i d a l if it is compatible with both m / a n d m u v , for all U, V, in the sense that the following equations hold: OlI o

m I -- m i ,

m u v o (o~u | o~v) -- o~u|

o muv.

4.2. Gentzen 's p r o o f theory Gentzen's proof theory [GLT], especially his sequent calculi and his fundamental theorem on Cut-Elimination, have had a profound influence not only in logic, but in category theory and computer science as well. In the case of category theory, J. Lambek [L68,L69] introduced Gentzen's techniques to study coherence theorems in various free monoidal and residuated categories. This logical approach to coherence for such categories was greatly extended by G. Mints, S. Soloviev, B. Jay et al. [Min81,So87,So95,J90]. For a comparison of Mints' work with more traditional Kelly-Mac Lane coherence theory see [Mac82]. More recently, coherence for large classes of structured monoidal categories arising in linear logic has been established in

48

PJ. Scott

a series of papers by Blute, Cockett, Seely et al. This is based on Girard's extensions of Gentzen's methods. (See [BCST96,BCS96,BCS97,CS91,CS96b].) Recent coherence theorems of Gordon-Power-Street, Joyal-Street et al. [GPS96,JS91, JS93] have made extensive use of higher dimensional category theory techniques and Yoneda methods, rather than logical methods. Related Yoneda techniques are now being introduced, in the reverse direction into proof theory, as we outlined in Section 2.7 above. In computer science, entire research areas: proof search (AI, Logic Programming), operational semantics, type inference algorithms, logical frameworks, etc. are a testimonial to Gentzen's work. Indeed, Gentzen's Natural Deduction and Sequent Calculi are fundamental methodological as well as mathematical tools. A profound and exciting analysis of Gentzen's work has arisen recently in the rapidly growing area of Linear Logic (= LL), developed by J.-Y. Girard in 1986. While classical logic is about universal truth, and intuitionistic logic is about constructive proofs, LL is a logic of resources and their management and reuse (e.g., see [Gi87,Gi89,GLR95,Sc93, Sc95,Tr92]). 4.2.1. Gentzen sequents. Gentzen's analysis of Hilbert's proof theory begins with a fundamental reformulation of the syntax. We follow the presentation in [GLT]. A sequent for a logical language E is an expression A l, A2 . . . . . Am ~ BI, B2 . . . . . Bn,

(14)

where A1, A2 . . . . . Am and Bi, B2 . . . . . Bn are finite lists (possibly empty) of formulas of E. Sequents are denoted F ~ A, for lists of formulas F and A. Gentzen introduced formal rules for generating sequents, the so-called derivable sequents. Gentzen's rules analyze the deep structure and implicit symmetries hidden in logical syntax. Computation in this setting arises from one of two methods: 9 The traditional method is Gentzen's Cut-Elimination Algorithm, which allows us to take a formal sequent calculus proof and reduce it to cut-free form. This is closely related to both normalization of lambda terms (cf. Sections 2.7) as well as the operational semantics of such programming languages as PROLOG. 9 More recent is the proof search paradigm, which is the bottom-up, goal-directed view of building sequent proofs and is the basis of the discipline of Logic Programming [MNPS, HM94,Mill]. Categorically, the cut elimination algorithm is at the heart of the proof-theoretic approach to coherence theorems previously mentioned. On the other hand, Logic Programming and the proof-search paradigm have only recently attracted the attention of categorists (cf. [FiFrL,PK96]). Lambek pointed out that Gentzen's sequent calculus was analogous to Bourbaki's method of bilinear maps. For example, given sequences F = A 1 . . - A m and A -Bl B2... Bn of R-R bimodules of a given ring R, there is a natural isomorphism M u l t ( F A B A , C) ~- Mult(FA | BA, D)

(15)

S o m e aspects o f categories in c o m p u t e r science

49

between m + n + 2-linear and m + n + l-linear maps. Bourbaki derived many aspects of tensor products just from this universal property. Such a formal bijection is at the heart of Linear Logic (e.g., [L93]). Traditional logicians think of sequent (14) as saying: the conjunction of the Ai entails the disjunction of the Bj. More generally, following Lambek and Lawvere (cf. Section 2.1), categorists interpret such sequents (modulo equivalence of proofs) as arrows in appropriate categories. For example, in the case of logics similar to linear logic [CS91], the sequent (14) determines an arrow of the form A1 Q A 2 Q . . . Q A m

> B l Z~B2 " " " ~ B n

(16)

in a symmetric monoidal category with a "cotensor" ~ (see Section 4.1 above). 4.2.2. Girard's analysis of the structural rules. Gentzen broke down the manipulations of logic into two classes of rules applied to sequents: structural rules and logical rules. All rules come in pairs (left/right) applying to the left (resp. right) side of a sequent. GENTZEN'S STRUCTURAL RULES (LEFT/RIGHT) Ft-A

Permutation

cr(F)F-A

Contraction

F,A,ADA F, ADA

Weakening

F~A

F, At-A

Ft-A F~r(A)

or, r permutations.

FDA,B,B FDA,B "

F~A

Ft-A,B 9

For simplicity, consider intuitionistic sequents, i.e. those of the form A1, A2 . . . . . Am B with one conclusion. So the right rules disappear and we consider the left rules above. We can give a Curry-Howard-style analysis to Gentzen's intuitionistic sequents (cf. Section 2.3), assigning lambda terms (qua functions) to sequents, e.g., Xl 9A 1 , . . . , Xm "Am t (:~)" B. The structural rules say the following: Permutation says that the class of functions is closed under permutations of arguments; Contraction says that the class of functions is closed under duplicating arguments- i.e. setting two input variables equal; and Weakening says the class of functions is closed under adding dummy arguments. In the absence of such rules, we obtain the so called linear lambda terms, terms where all variables occur exactly once (see [GSS91,Abr93,L89]). By removing these traditional structural rules, logic takes on a completely different character 3 (see Figure 8). Previously equivalent notions now split into subtle variants based on resource allocation. For example, the rules for Multiplicative connectives simply concatenate their input hypotheses F and F', whereas the rules for Additive connectives merge two input hypotheses F into one. The situation is analogous for outputs A and A ~ (see Figure 8). The resultant logical connectives can represent linguistic distinctions related to resource use which are simply impossible to formulate in traditional logic (see [Gi86, Abr93,Sc93,Sc95]). 3 Formulas of LL are generated from literals p, q, r . . . . . p • q• r • . . . . and constants I, J_, l, 0 using binary operations | ~', x, ~D and unary !, ?. Negation ( - ) • is defined inductively: I • = J_, J_• = I, 1 • = 0, 0 • -1, p_L_L=p, ( A | • - L ~ B -L, ( A ~ B ) • -L| • (AxB) -L=(A •177 (A~B) • -L • B -L, (!A) • = ? ( A • (?A) • =!(A-L). Also we define A ----oB = A -L ~ B.

50

PJ. Scott

FSA

Structural

Perm

Axiom&Cut

Axiom

a(r)~r(A) A~A FSA,A Ft,ASA ~ F,F%A,A t FSA,A F, A Z S A F,A,Bt-A F,A| F, A S A F ~ , B S A ~ F, F t , A W BF--A,A ~

Cut

Negation Multiplicatives

Tensor Par

_kS Implication

Product Coproduct Units

Exponentials

,-,

FF-A,B,A FF-A W B , A

FF-A, A F', BF-A ~

r,F',A--oB~A,A' F, AF-A F,A•

F,B~-A F, A x B ~ A

r,A~A r,B~za F,A+BF-A

FF-A FF-1,A F, A D B , A F~-A--o B , A FF-A,A F~-B,A FF-AxB,A Ft--A,A FF-B,A F~A+B,A FF-A+B,A

F, 0 ~- A

Weakening ~§

F,A~A F~A• F~--A,A F ' ~ B , A ~ F, F t F - A | t

FSA F, IF-A

Units

Additives

a, r permutations.

o,ora~;e

FbA

r, !A ~ A !F~-A

~r ~ !A

FDI, Contraction Dereliction

A F,!A,!AF-A F,!At-A

r,A~n

F,!A~A

Fig. 8. Rules for classical propositional LL.

REMARK 4.14. First we should remark that on the controversial subject of notation in LL, we have chosen a reasonable categorical notation, somewhere between [Gi87] and [See89]. Observe that in CLL, two-sided sequents can be replaced by one-sided sequents, since F F- A is equivalent to F- F • A, with F • the list A -L l . . . . . A~, where F is A i . . . . . An. Thus the key aspect of linear logic proofs is their resource sensitivity. We think of a linear entailment A l A m ~ B not as an ordinary function, but as an action - a kind of process that in a single step consumes the inputs Ai and produces output B. For example, this permits representing in a natural manner the step-by-step behaviour of various abstract machines, certain models of concurrency like Petri Nets, etc. Thus, linear logic permits us to describe the instantaneous state of a system, and its step-wise evolution, intrinsically within the logic itself (e.g., with no need for explicit time parameters, etc.). But linear logic is not about simply removing Gentzen's structural rules, but rather modulating their use. To this end, Girard introduces a new connective !A, which indicates that contraction and weakening may be applied to formula A. This yields the Exponential connectives in Figure 8. From a resource viewpoint, an hypothesis !A is one which can be reused arbitrarily. Moreover, this permits decomposing " = , " (categorically, the ccc func. . . . .


51

tion space) into more basic notions: A =:~ B = (!A) ---o B. Finally, nothing is lost: classical (as well as intuitionistic) logic can be faithfully translated into CLL ([Gi87,Tr92]). 4.2.3. Fragments and exotic extensions. The richness of LL permits many natural subtheories (cf. [Gi87,Gi95a]). For a survey of the surprisingly intricate complexity-theoretic structure of many of the fragments of LL see Lincoln [Li95]. These results often involve direct and natural simulation of various kinds of abstract computing machines within the logic [Sc95,Ka95]. Of course, there are specific fragments corresponding to various subcategories of categorical models, in the next section. There are also fragments directly connected with classifying complexity classes in computing [GSS92,Gi97] but these latter have not been the object of categorical analysis. More exotic "noncommutative" fragments of LL are obtained by eliminating or modifying the permutation rule; i.e. one no longer assumes | is symmetric. One such precursor to LL is the work of J. Lambek in the 1950's on categorial grammars in mathematical linguistics (for recent surveys, see [L93,L95]). Here the language becomes yet more involved, since there are two implications o - and ---o and two negations A • and • It has been proven by Pentus [Pen93] that Lambek grammars are equivalent to context-free grammars. In [L89] there is a formulation of Lambek grammars using the notion of multicategory, an idea currently of some interest in higher-dimensional category theory and higher dimensional rewriting theory [HMP98]. D. Yetter [Y90] considered cyclic linear logic, a version of LL in which the permutation rule is modified to only allow cyclic permutations. This will be discussed briefly below in Section 5.2 with respect to Full Completeness. A proposed classification of different fragments of LL, including braided versions, based on Hopf-algebraic models is in Blute [Blu96], see also Section 5.2. 4.2.4. Topology of proofs. Let us briefly mention one of the main novelties of linear logic. Traditional Gentzen proof theory writes proofs as trees. In order to give a CurryHoward isomorphism to arbitrary sequents F ~ A, Girard introduced multiple-conclusion graphical networks to interpret proofs. These proof nets use graph rewriting moves for their operational semantics. It is here that one sees the dynamic aspects of cut-elimination. In essense these networks are the "lambda terms" of linear logic. There are known mathematical criteria to classify which (among arbitrary) networks arise from Gentzen sequent proofs, i.e. in a sense which of these parallel networks are "sequentializable" into a Gentzen proof tree. Homological aspects of proof nets are studied in [Mrt94] The technology of proof nets has grown into an intricate subject. In addition to their uses in linear logic, proof nets are now used in category theory, as a technical tool in graphical approaches to coherence theorems for structured monoidal categories (e.g., [Blu93, BCST96,CS91,CS96b]). There are proof net theories for numerous non-commutative, cyclic, and braided linear logics, e.g., [Abru91,Blu93,F196,FR94,Y90].

52

P.J. Scott

The method of proof nets has been extended by Y. Lafont [Laf95] to a general graphical language of computation, his interaction nets. These latter provide a simple model of parallel computation with, at the same time, new insights into sequential computation.

4.3. What is a categorical model of LL? 4.3.1. General models. As in Section 2.1, we are interested in finding the categories appropriate to modelling linear logic proofs Oust as Cartesian closed categories modelled intuitionistic/x, =,, q- proofs). The basic equations we postulate arise from the operational semantics - that is normalization ofproofs. In the case of sequent calculi, this is Gentzen's Cut-Elimination process [GLT]. However, there are sometimes natural categorical equations which are not decided by traditional proof theory. The problem is further compounded in linear logic (and monoidal categories) in that there may be several (non-canonical) candidates for appropriate monoidal structure. The first categorical semantics of LL is in Seely's paper [See89], which is still perhaps the most readable account. Subsequent development of appropriate term calculi [Abr93, Bie95,BBPH,W94,BCST96,CS91,CS96b] have modified and enlarged the scope, but not essentially changed the original analysis for the case of classical linear logic (= CLL). We impose the following equations between CLL proofs, in order to form a category C, where sequents are interpreted as (equivalence classes of) arrows according to formula (16), based on the rules in Figure 8. 9 C is a symmetric monoidal closed category with products, coproducts, and units (from the rules: Axiom, Cut, Perm, the Multiplicatives and the Additives). 9 C is .-autonomous (from the Negation rule) with | and ~ related by de Morgan duality. 9 ! : C ~ C is an endofunctor, with associated monoidal transformations e:? ~ idc and 8:? --+ ?? satisfying: (1) (!, 8, e) forms a monoidal comonad on C. (2) There are natural isomorphisms I~

?1

and

!A|

making ?: (C, x, 1) --~ (C, |

-------!(AxB). I) a symmetric monoidal functor.

(3) In particular, I teA Ia dAy !A| is a cocommutative comonoid, for all A in C and the coalgebra maps eA : !A --~ A and 8A : ?A --+ ??A are comonoid maps. In fact, these conditions are a consequence of (2), but are required explicitly in weaker settings. For modifications appropriate to more general situations (e.g., various fragments of LL without products, linearly distributive categories, etc.) see [Bie95,BCS96]. The essence of Girard's translation of intuitionistic logic into LL is the following easy result (cf. [See89,Bie95]). PROPOSITION 4.15. If C is a categorical model of CLL, as above, then the Kleisli category 1CC of the comonad (!, 8, e) is a ccc. Moreover finite products in 1CC and C coincide, while exponentials in 1CC are given by: A =~ B = (!A) --o B.


53

We should mention one formal rule, MIX, which appears frequently in the literature. To express it, we use one-sided sequents: Mix

~ - F ~-A

r,a

Categorically, MIX entails there is a map A | B --+ A~eB. This rule seems to be valid in most models, certainly so in ones based on R T ) ; C C . REMARK 4.16. The categorical comonad approach to models of linear logic has been put to use by Asperti in clarifying optimal graph reduction techniques in the untyped lambda calculus [Asp] (see also [GAL92]). 4.3.2. Concrete models. There are by now many categorical models of LL and its interesting fragments. Let us just mention a few [Gi95a, Tr92]: 9 Posetal Models or Girard's Phase semantics. These are ,-autonomous posets with additional structure. This gives an algebraic semantics analogous to Boolean or Heyting algebras for classical (resp. intuitionistic) logic. As categories they are trivial (each hom set has at most one element); hence they do not model proofs but rather provability. There is associated a traditional Tarski semantics, with Soundness and Completeness Theorems. Recently, these models have been applied in Linear Concurrent Constraint Programming, for proving "safety" properties of programs [FRS98]. 9 Domain-Theoretic Models. The category LIN -- coherent spaces and linear maps 4 gave the first non-trivial model of LL proofs. This model arose from Girard's analysis of the ccc STAB, realizing that there were many other logical operations available. Indeed, STAB is the Kleisli category of an approproate comonad (!, 3, e) on LIN (cf. Proposition 4.15). In the model LIN, !A is a minimal solution of the domain equation !A _--__I • A • (!A | !A), indeed is a cofree comonoid. 9 Relational Models. As discussed in Barr [Barr91], many compact categories are complete enough to interpret !A ~_L xA x E2(A) x . . - x E n ( A ) x . . . , where E n ( A ) is the equalizer of the n! permutations of the nth tensor power A | for n ~> 2. For example, Barr proves Relx has that property. More generally, Barr [Barr91] constructs models based on the Chu-space construction in [Barr79]. Chu spaces are themselves an interesting class of models of LL and have been the subject of intensive investigation by Michael Barr [Barr91,Barr95] and by Vaughan Pratt (e.g., [Pra95]). 9 Games Models. Categories of Games now provide some of the most exciting new semantics for LL and Programming Languages. This so-called intensional semantics provides a finer-grained analysis of computation than traditional (categorical) models, taking into account the dynamic or interactive aspects of computation. For example, such games can be used to model interactions between a System and its Environment and provided the first syntax-free fully abstract models of PCF, answering a long-standing open 4

A stable map is linear if it commutes with arbitrary unions.

54

PJ. Scott

problem. Games categories have been extended to handle programming languages with many additional properties, e.g., control features, call-by-value languages, languages with side-effects and store, etc. as well as modem logics like LL, System f', etc. For basic introductions, see [Abr97,Hy97]. For a small sample of more recent work, see [Mc97,AHMc98,AMc98,BDER97]. 9 GoI and Functional Analytic Models: The Geometry of Interaction Program (see, e.g., [Gi88,Gi90,Gi95b,DR95]) aims to model the dynamics of cut-elimination by interpreting proofs as objects of a certain C* algebra, with logical rules corresponding to certain 9-isomorphisms. The essence of Gentzen's cut-elimination theorem is summarized by the so-called execution formula. We shall look at an abstract form of the GoI program (in traced monoidal categories) in Section 6.1. The GoI program itself has influenced both game semantics and work on optimal reduction. 9 Finally, as the name suggests, linear logic is roughly inspired from linear algebra. Thus !A is analogous to the Grassmann algebra. Indeed, in categories of Hilbert or Banach spaces, one is reminded of the symmetric and antisymmetric Fock space construction [Ge85]. For a (non-categorical) Banach space interpretation of LL, see Girard [Gi96].

5. Full completeness 5.1. Representation theorems The most basic representation theorem of all is the Yoneda embedding: THEOREM 5.1 (Yoneda). If fit is locally small, the Yoneda functor 3;" fit --~ Set A~ where y (A) = H o m A ( - , A), is a fully faithful embedding. Indeed, Yoneda preserves limits as well as Cartesian closedness. We seek mathematical models which describe the behaviour of programs. From the viewpoint of the Curry-Howard isomorphism (which identifies proofs with programs) we seek representation theorems for proofs - i.e. mathematical models which fully and faithfully represent proofs. From the viewpoint of a logician, these are Completeness Theorems, but now at the level of proofs rather than provability. One of the first such theorems was proved by H. Friedman [Frie73]. Friedman showed completeness of typed lambda calculus with respect to ordinary set-theoretic reasoning. Consider the pure typed lambda calculus s whose types are generated from some base sorts by =~ only. We interpret ~ set-theoretically in a full type hierarchy A (see Example 2.3). THEOREM 5.2 (Friedman). Let ,,4 be a full type hierarchy with base sorts interpreted as infinite sets. Then for any pure typed lambda terms M, N, M = N is true in A iff M = N F

F

is provable using the rules of typed lambda calculus. Similar results but using instead full type hierarchies over ~o-CPO or Per-based models have been given by Plotkin and by Mitchell using logical relations (see [Mit96]). Fried-


55

man's original Set-based theorem has been extended by Cubri6 to the entire ccc language ==~, x, 1 [Cu93] to yield the following v

THEOREM 5.3 (Cubri6). Let C be a free ccc generated by a graph. Then there exists a faithful ccc functor F" C --+ Set. Alas this representation is not full. L e t / 3 G = the free ccc with binary coproducts generated by discrete graph G, given syntactically by types and terms of typed lambda calculus. For any group G, the functor category Set ~ is a ccc with coproducts. So according to the universal property, if F is an initial assignment of G-sets to atomic types then a proof of formula a , qua closed term M : a , qua ~G-arrow M : I ~ or, corresponds to a G-set (= equivariant) map [[MF~ : 1 HaF]]. Such maps are fixed points under the action. In particular, letting G = Z, we obtain the easy half of the following theorem, due to L~iuchli [Lau]: THEOREM 5.4 (L~iuchli). A {T, A, ::~, v}-formula a of intuitionistic propositional calculus is provable if and only if for every interpretation F of the base types, its Set zinterpretation [[aF]] has an invariant element. Indeed, Harnik and Makkai extend L~iuchli's theorem to a representation theorem. Recall, a functor q5 is weakly full if Horn(A, B) -- 0 implies Hom(~(A), qS(B)) -- 0. THEOREM 5.5 (Harnik, Makkai [HM92]). Let 13 be a countable free ccc with binary coproducts. There is a weakly full representation cI) of B into a countablepower of Set z. If in addition the terminal object 1 is indecomposable, then there is a weakly full representation into Set Z. A weakly full representation of/3 corresponds to completeness with respect to provability" i.e. HomsetZ(1, ~ ( B ) ) ~ 0 implies Horn13(1, B) ~ 0, so B is provable. We shall give stronger representation theorems still based on the idea of invariant elements.

5.2. Full completeness theorems A recent topic of considerable interest is full completeness theorems. Suppose we have a free category f , We shall say that a model category .A//is fully complete for ~ or that we have full completeness o f , T with respect to All if the unique free functor (with respect to any interpretation of the generators) [[-]] :,T --+ A/[ is full. It is even better to demand that [[-]] is a fully faithful representation. For example, suppose f is a free ccc generated by the typed lambda calculus (cf. Example 2.22). To say a ccc A/f is fully complete for .T means the following: given any interpretation of the generators as objects of M , any arrow [[A]] --+ [[B]] 6 A/[ between definable objects is itself definable, i.e. of the form [[fll for f : A --+ B. If the representation is fully faithful, f is unique. Thus, by Curry-Howard, any morphism in the model between definable objects is itself the image of a proof (or program); indeed of a unique proof if

56

PJ. Scott

the representation is fully faithful. Thus, such models A4, while being semantical, really capture aspects of the syntax of the language. Such results are mainly of interest when the models A4 are "genuine" mathematical models not apparently connected to the syntax. In that case Full Completeness results are more surprising (and interesting). For example, an explicit use of the Yoneda embedding 9 Cop Y : C --+ Set C~ is not what we want, since Set depends too much on C. Probably the first full completeness results for free ccc's were by Plotkin [Plo80], using categories of logical relations. In the case of simply typed lambda calculus generated from a fixed base type (-- the free ccc on one object), Plotkin proved the following result. Consider the Henkin model T8 = the full type hierarchy over a set B, i.e. the full sub-ccc of Sets generated by some set B. The Soundness Theorem for logical relations says that if a term f is lambda definable, it is invariant under all logical relations. We ask for the converse. The rank of a type is defined inductively: rank(b) = 0, where b is a base type, rank(or :=~ r) = max{rank(a) + 1, rank(r)}, rank(tr x r) = max{rank(a), rank(r)}. The rank of an element f ~ B~ in TB is the rank of the type or. THEOREM 5.6 (Plotkin [Plo80]). In the full type hierarchy T B over an infinite set B, all elements f of rank Y |

X,

9 Natural in Y, g Tr U, r ( f ) -- TrU. r' ((g @ 1u) f ) , where

f :XNU----> Y N U , g:Y--> Y', 9 Dinatural in U, Try, r((1 v @ g ) f ) -- TrUly(f(1 x | g)), where f :X @ U ---->Y @ U ', g: U ~~ U, 9 Vanishing, Trlx,r ( f ) - f and ~rx, u| ( g ) = Tr U, r (TrV|

(g))

for f :X @ I - + Y | I and g : X @ U @ V---> Y | U | V. 9 Superposing, g | T r U r ( f ) -- TrU| @ f) 9 Yanking, Tr U,u (su, u) -- 1 u . From a computer science viewpoint, the essential feature is to think of TrU, r ( f ) as "feedback along U", as in Figure 9. The axiomatization given here differs slightly from those in [Abr96,JSV96], although it can be shown to be equivalent. We shall leave it to the reader to draw the diagrams for the trace axioms. We note however that Vanishing


xj

59

Y

4

U

Fig. 9. The trace

TrU,y(f).

expresses trace along a tensor U | V in terms of iterated traces along U and V. This is related to the so-called Beki~ L e m m a in Domain Theory. The above notion is really a parametrized trace. The usual notion from linear algebra is when X = Y = I (see Example 6.3) below. EXAMPLE 6.2. Relx: The objects are sets, N = x (Cartesian product), and maps are binary relations. Composition means composition of relations, and x TrU, y y iff there exists a u such that (x, u) R (y, u). EXAMPLE 6.3. Veefd : Given f : X @ U -+ Y | U, define

TrU, y ( f ) ( x i ) -- Z olikjjYk, j,k

where f (Xi | Uj) = ~

Olkrn Yk @ Um,

k,m

where (Ui), (Xj), (Yk) are bases for U , X , Y , resp. In the case that X , Y are onedimensional, this reduces to the usual trace of a linear map f : U --+ U, i.e. the usual trace determines a function Tru :Horn(U, U) --+ H o m ( I , I), where I -- k. EXAMPLE 6.4. More generally, any compact category has a canonical trace

Trg, g( f ) -- X ~ X @ I id| > X | 1 7 4 Uj - f|

YNUNU

_L icl| Y |

Y,

where ev: = ev o s. EXAMPLE 6.5. co-CPO• with | = x, I = { l } . In this case the dinatural least-fixedpoint combinator Y_ : ( - ) ( - ) -+ ( - ) induces a trace, given as follows (using informal lambda calculus notation): for any f : X x U -+ Y x U,

= :, (x,u

:,(x,,,))),

where fl = 7rl o f ' X x U --+ Y, f2 = yt'2 o f " X x U ~ U. Hence TrU, r ( f ) ( x ) - f l (x, u:), where u: is the smallest element of U such that f 2 ( x , u ~) = u ~. A generalization of this idea to traced Cartesian categories is in [MHas97] and mentioned in Remark 6.16 in the next section. Unfortunately, these examples do not really illustrate the notion of feedback as data flow: the movement of tokens through a network. More natural examples of traced monoidal

60

P.J. Scott

x

r

Y

Z

f

=

z

X

f

>Y

g

~,Z

--L

Fig. 10. Generalized Yanking.

categories in the next section, given by partially additive and similar iterative categories, more fully illustrate this aspect. EXAMPLE 6.6. Bicategories of Processes: The paper of Katis, Sabadini, and Waiters [KSW95] develops a general theory of processes with feedback circuits in symmetric monoidal bicategories. They prove their bicategories Cite(C) have a parametrized trace operator. A small difference with the above treatment is that their feedback is given by a family of partially-defined functors fbU, r 9Circ(C)(X | U, Y | U) ~ Circ(C)(X, Y). REMARK 6.7. The paper [ABP97] develops a general theory of traced ideals in tensored ,-categories. The category 7-[Z~13, the tensored .-category of Hilbert spaces and bounded linear maps, illustrates the difficulty. In passing from the finite dimensional case (cf. Example 6.3 above) to the infinite dimensional one, not all endomorphisms have a trace; for example, the identity on an infinite dimensional space. However Try may be defined on traced ideals of maps, and this extends to parametrized traces. See [ABP97] for many examples. An amusing folklore about traced monoidal categories is that general composition is actually definable using traces of simple compositions: PROPOSITION 6.8 (Generalized Yanking). Let C be a traced symmetric monoidal category, with arrows f " X --+ Y and g" Y --+ Z. Then g o f = Trrx,z(SV, Z o ( f | g)). Although a fairly short algebraic proof is possible, the reader may wish to stare at the diagram in Figure 10, and do a "string-pulling" argument (cf. [JSV96]). Similar calculations are in [KSW95,Mi194] DEFINITION 6.9. Let C and D be traced symmetric monoidal categories. A strong monoidal functor F" C ~ D is traced if it is symmetric and satisfies TrFU -1 FA,Fe(4)8,u(F

f)4)A,U) - F(TrUA,8(f))

where A | U f> B | U and FA | F U 4)a,~ F ( A | U) F f F ( B | U) the case of strict monoidal functors, they are traced if they preserve the We define TraMon and TraMonst to be the 2-categories whose monoidal categories (resp. strict traced monoidal categories), whose

4)~,~ FB | FU. In trace on the nose. 0-cells are traced 1-cells are traced


61

monoidal functors (resp. strict traced monoidal functors), and whose 2-cells are monoidal natural transformations.

6.2. Partially additive categories We shall be interested in special kinds of traced monoidal categories: those whose homsets are enriched with certain partially-defined infinite sums, which permits canonical calculation of iteration and traces (see formulas (1 7) and (1 8) below). A useful example is Manes and Arbib's partially additive categories, which first arose in their categorical analysis of iterative and flowchart schema [MA86]. Categories with similar additive structure on the hom-sets had already been considered in the 1950's by Kuro~ [Ku63] with regards to categorical Krull-Schmidt-Remak theorems. DEFINITION 6.10. A partially additive monoid is a pair (M, 27), where M is a nonempty set and 27 is a partial function which maps countable families in M to elements of M (we say that (xi ] i E I) is summable if 27 (xi ] i ~ I) is defined) 6 subject to the following: 1. Partition-Associativity Axiom. If (xi [ i ~ I) is a countable family and if (Ij ] j ~ J) is a (countable) partition of I, then (xi l i ~ I) is summable if and only if (xi l i ~ Ij) is summable for every j E J and (27 (xi l i ~ Ij) [j ~ J) is summable. In that case,

27(Xi l i C I ) - -

27 (~ (xi l i ~ Ij) l j ~ J).

2. Unary Sum Axiom. Any family ( x i l i ~ I) in which I is a singleton is summable and 27 ( x i l i ~ I) - - x j if I = {j}. 3.* Limit Axiom. If ( x i l i ~ I) is a countable family and if ( x i l i ~ F) is summable for every finite subset F of I then (Xi l i c I) is summable. We observe the following facts about partially additive monoids: (i) Axioms 1 and 2 imply that the empty family is summable. We denote 27 (xi l i ~ 0) by 0, which is an additive identity for summation. (ii) Axiom 1 implies the obvious equations of commutativity and associativity for the sum (when defined). (iii) Although Manes and Arbib use the Limit Axiom to prove existence of Elgot-style iteration (see below), Kuro~ did not have it. And for many aspects of the theory below, it is not needed. DEFINITION 6.1 1. The category ofpartially additive monoids, PAMon, is defined as folf lows. Its objects are partially additive monoids (M, 27). Its arrows (M, 27M) > (N, 27N) are maps from M to N which preserve the sum, in the sense that: f ( 2 7 M ( x i l i c I)) = 27N ( f ( x i ) li ~ I) for all summable families ( x i l i ~ I) in M. Composition and identifies are inherited from Sets. We sometimes abbreviate 27(x i l i ~ I) by ~irlXi . Throughout, "countable" means finite or denumerable. All index sets are countable. Apartition {Ij Ij ~ J} of I satisfies: Ij ~ I, Ii NIj -- 0 if i ~: j, and U{Ij Ij ~ J} = I. But we also allow Ij = 0 for countably many j. 6

P.J. Scott

62

II

X

Fig. 11. Elgot dagger g t.

A PAMon-category C is a category enriched in PAMon. This means the hom-sets carry a PAMon-structure, compatible with composition. In particular, in each homset Home(X, Y) there is a zero morphism Oxv : X --+ Y, the sum of the empty family. REMARK 6.12. In a PAMon-category C (1) The family of zero morphisms {Oxv}x,v~r satisfies: gOwz = Owv = O x v f for any f : W--+ X and g:Z--+ Y. (2) If "~i6l fi = OXY then all summands f / = Oxv in Home(X, Y). DEFINITION 6.13. Let C be a PAMon-category with countable coproducts ~ i e l Xi. For any j 6 1 we define quasi projections PRj : Oi~I Xi ~ Xj as follows:

PRjink --

idxj Oxkxj

if k -- j, else.

DEFINITION 6.14. A partially additive category (pac) C is a PAMon-category with countable coproducts which satisfies the following axioms: (1) Compatible SumAxiom: If (j5 l i 6 I) is a countable family of morphisms in C(X, Y) .li and there exists f : X --+ HI Y such that P Ri f = fi X ) Y (we say the j~ are compatible), then ~ fi exists. Here l i t Y is t h e / - f o l d coproduct of Y (often denoted Y(t) in algebra). (2) Untying Axiom: If f + g : X --+ Y exists then so does inl f + in2g : X --+ Y + Y. The following facts about partially additive categories follow from Manes and Arbib [MA86]: 9 Matrix Representation ofmaps: For any map f : ~ i ~ l Xi ~ ~ j ~ j Yj there is a unique family {fij : Xi --+ Yj }i~lj~J with f = Y~iclj~J inj fij PRi and PRj fini = fij. Notation: we write fxi r~ for fij.

9 Elgot Iteration: Given X g ) Y + X, there exists X gt ) Y where g t _ ~--~,,=0 ~ gx Ygxx, n satisfying the fixed-point identity [1y, g t ] g - - g t.

(17)

This corresponds to the flowchart scheme in Figure 11. The proof of Elgot iteration ([MA86], p. 83) uses the Limit Axiom.


63

PROPOSITION 6.15. A partially additive category C is traced monoidal with | - coproduct and if f " X @ U -+ Y (9 U, OQ

(18) n--O

where f - [fl, f21 with f l " X --+ Y @ U, f2" U --+ Y @ U.

Formula (18) corresponds to the data flow interpretation of trace-as-feedback in Figure 9: see the examples below. We should also remark that Formula (18) corresponds closely to Girard's Execution Formula [Gi88,Abr96] and is related to a construction of Geometry of Interaction categories in the next section. REMARK 6.16. Conversely, a traced monoidal category where | is coproduct has an Elgot iterator gt = Tr~,y([g, g]), where g ' X --+ Y + X. An axiomatization of the opposite of such categories, which correspond to categories with a parametrized u combinator, is considered in Hasegawa [MHas97]. More generally, Hasegawa considers traced monoidal categories built over Cartesian categories and it is shown how various typed lambda calculi with cyclic sharing are Sound and Complete for such categorical models. Finally, we should mention the general notion of Iteration Theories. These general categorical theories of feedback and iteration, their axiomatization and equational logics have been studied in detail by S.L. Bloom and Z. l~sik in their book [BE93]. A more recent 2-categorical study of iteration theories is in [BELM]. We shall now give a few important examples of pac's: EXAMPLE 6.17. Rel+, the category of sets and relations. Objects are sets and maps are binary relations. Composition means relational composition. The identity is the identity relation, and the zero morphism 0xr" is the empty set 0 _c X x Y. Coproducts ( ~ i 6 I Xi are as in Set, i.e. disjoint union. All countable families are summable where w-z_,iri(gi) -Ui 61 Ri. Finally, let R* be the reflexive, transitive closure of a relation R. Suppose R" X + U - ~ Y + U. Then formula (18) becomes" (19) n~>0 = Rxr U Rut o Rug o Rxu.

EXAMPLE 6.1 8. Pfn, the category of sets and partial functions. The objects are sets, the maps are partial functions. Composition means the usual composition of partial functions. The zero map 0 x r is the empty partial function. A family {fi I i 6 I} is said to be summable iff Vi, j ~ I, i ~ j, Dora(ft.) f3 D o m ( f j) = 9t. 27i el fi is the partial function with domain Ui Dora(ft.) and where (~-~icl f i ) ( X )

"--

] fj(x) ! undefined

ifx eDom(fj), else.

64

P.J. Scott

The following example comes from Giry [Giry] (inspired from Lawvere) and is mentioned in [Abr96]. The fact that this is a pac follows from work of P. Panangaden and E. Haghverdi. EXAMPLE 6.19. SRel, the category of Stochastic Relations. Objects are measurable spaces (X, r x ) where X is a set and Z x is a a-algebra of subsets of X. An arrow f : (X, ,V,x) ~ (Y, r r ) is a transition probability, i.e. f : X • ,V,r ~ [0, 1] such that f ( . , B ) : X ~ [0, 1] is a measurable function for fixed B 6 Z r and f ( x , .): Z r ~ [0, 1] is a subprobability measure (i.e. a o'-additive set function satisfying f ( x , 0 ) = 0 and f (x, Y) B-

A-

A-

B+

c+

//

8+i I ......i.....L .............. i -I

g

i8-

c+ ..~..

Fig. 12. Composition in G(C).

66

PJ. Scott

9 Unit: (I, I). 9 Duality: The dual of (A+,A - ) is given by ( A + , A - ) • ( A - , A +) where the unit 7"(1, I) ~ (A +, A - ) | (A +, A - ) • =def O'A-,A+ and counit e " (A +, A - ) • @ (A +, A - ) -+ (I, I) : d e f O'A-,A+. 9 Internal Homs: As usual, (A +, A - ) --o (B +, B - ) = (A +, A - ) • | (B +, B - ) = (A- @ B +, A + | B - ) . REMARK 6.22. We have used a specific definition for a and 13 above; however, any other permutationsA + | 1 7 4 1 7 4

+

=> A + N B - |

+NC-andA-NB

+|174

C + => A - N C + N B - N B + for c~ and fl respectively will yield the same result for g o f due to coherence. Translating the work of [JSV96] in our setting we obtain that G(C) is a kind of "free compact closure" of C: PROPOSITION 6.23. Let C be a traced symmetric monoidal category 9 G(C) defined as in Definition 6.21 is a compact closed category. Moreover, FC:C --+ G(C) defined by Fc(A) -- (A, I) and F r = f is a full and faithful embedding. 9 The inclusion of2-categories CompC! ~ TraMon has a left biadjoint with unit having component at C given by Fr

Following Abramsky [Abr96], we interpret the objects of G(C) in a game-theoretic manner: A + is the type of "moves by Player (the System)" and A - is the type of"moves by Opponent (the Environment)". The composition of morphisms in G(C) is the key to Girard's Execution formula, especially for pac-like traces. In [Abr96] it is pointed out that G(Pinj) is essentially the original Girard formalism, while G(w-CPO) is the data-flow model of GoI given in [AJ94a]. This is studied in detail in E. Haghverdi [Hagh99].

7. Literature notes

In the above we have merely touched on the large and varied literature. The journals Mathematical Structures in Computer Science (Cambridge University Press) and Theoretical Computer Science (Elsevier) are standard venues for categorical computer science. Two recent graduate texts emphasizing categorical aspects are J. Mitchell [Mit96] and R. Amadio and P.-L. Curien [AC98]. Mitchell's book has an encyclopedic coverage of the major areas and recent results in programming language theory (for example subtyping, which we have not discussed at all). The Amadio and Curien book covers many recent topics in domain theory and lambda calculi, including full abstraction results, foundations of linear logic, and sequentiality. We regret that there are many important topics in categorical computer science which we barely mentioned. We particularly recommend the compendia [PD97,FJP,AGM]. Let us give a few pointers with sample papers: 9 Operational and Denotational Semantics: See the surveys in the Handbook [AGM]. The classical paper on solutions of domain equations is [SP82]. For some recent directions


67

in domain theory, see [FiP196,ReSt97]. For recent categorical aspects of Operational Semantics, see [Pi97,TP96]. Higher-dimensional category theory has also generated considerable theoretical interest (e.g., [Ba97,HMP98]). Coalgebraic and coinductive methods are a fundamental technique and have considerable influence (e.g., see [AbJu94, Pi96a,Mu191,CSp91,JR,Mi189]). 9 Fibrations and Indexed Category Models: This important area arising from categorical logic is fundamental in treating dependent types, System .T', ~-~o, 999models, and general variable-binding (quantifier-like) operations, for example "hiding" in certain process calculi. For fibred category models of dependent type-theories, see the survey by M. Hofmann [H97a] (cf. also [PowTh97,HJ95,Pi9?,See87]). Indexed category models for Concurrent Constraint Logic Programming are given in [PSSS,MPSS95] (see also [FRS98] for connections of this latter paradigm to LL). 9 Computational Monads: E. Moggi introduced the categorists' notion of monads and comonads [Mac71] as a structuring tool in semantics and logics of programming languages. Moggi's highly influential approach permits a modular treatment of such important programming features as: exceptions, side-effects, non-determinism, resumptions, dynamic allocation, etc. as well as their associated logics [Mo97,Mo91]. Practical uses of monads in functional programming languages are discussed in P. Wadler ([W92]). More recently, E. Manes ([M98]) showed how to use monads to implement collection classes in Object-Oriented languages. Alternative category-theoretic perspectives on Moggi's work are in Power and Robinson's [PowRob97]. 9 Categories in Concurrency Theory and Bisimulation: This large and important area is surveyed in Winskel and Nielsen [WN97]. In particular, the fundamental notion of bisimulation via open maps, is introduced in Joyal, Nielsen, and Winskel [JNW]. Presheaf models for Milner's zr-calculus ([Mi193a]) and other concurrent calculi are in [CaWi,CSW]. For categorical work on Milner's recent Action Calculi, see [GaHa, Mi193b,Mi194,P96]. 9 Complexity Theory: Characterizing feasible (e.g., polynomial-time) computation is a major area of theoretical computer science (e.g., [Cob64,Cook75]). Typed lambda calculi for feasible higher-order computation have recently been the subjects of intense work, e.g., [CoKa,CU93]. Versions of linear logic have been developed to analyze the fine structure of feasible computation ([GSS92,Gi97]). Although there are some known models ([KOS97]), general categorical treatments for these versions of LL are not yet known. Recently, M. Hofmann (e.g., [H97a]) has analyzed the work of Cook and Urquhart [CU93] as well as giving higher-order extensions of work of Bellantoni and Cook, using presheaf and sheaf categories. Three volumes [MR97,FJP,GS89] are conferences specializing in applications of categories in computer science (note [MR97] is the 7th Biennial such meeting). Similarly, see the biennial meetings of MFPS (Mathematical Foundations of Programming Semantics) - published in either Springer Lecture Notes in Computer Science or the journal Theoretical Computer Science. There is currently an electronic website of categorical logic and computer science, HYPATIA ( h t t p : / / h y p a t i a . d e s . qmw. a c . u k ) . Other books coveting categorical aspects of computer science and/or some of the topics covered here include [AL91,BW95,Cu93,DiCo95,Gun92,MA86,Tay98,Wa192]. In categorical logic and proof theory, we should mention our own book with J. Lambek [LS86]

68

PJ. Scott

which became popular in theoretical computer science. The category theory book of Freyd and Scedrov [FrSc] is a source book for Representation Theorems and categories of relations.

References [ACC93] M. Abadi, L. Cardelli and E-L. Curien, Formal parametric polymorphism, Theoretical Comp. Science 121 (1993), 9-58. [Abr93] S. Abramsky, Computational Interpretations of linear logic, Theoretical Comp. Science 111 (1993), 3-57. [AbJu94] S. Abramsky and A. Jung, Domain theory, in: [AGM], pp. 1-168. [Abr96] S. Abramsky, Retracing some paths in process algebra, CONCUR '96, U. Montanari and V. Sassone, eds, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1119 (1996), 1-17. [Abr97] S. Abramsky, Semantics of interaction: An introduction to game semantics, in: [PD97], pp. 1-31. [ABP97] S. Abramsky, R. Blute and E Panangaden, Nuclear and trace ideals in tensored .-categories, Preprint (1997). (To appear in Journal of Pure and Applied Algebra.) [AGM] S. Abramsky, D. Gabbay and T. Maibaum eds, Handbook of Logic in Computer Science, Vol. 3, Oxford (1994). [AGN] S. Abramsky, S. Gay and R. Nagarajan, A type-theoretic approach to deadlock-freedom of asynchronous systems, Theoretical Aspects of Computer Software, TACS'97, M. Abadi and T. Ito, eds, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1281 (1997). [AHMc98] S. Abramsky, K. Honda and G. McCusker, A fully abstract game semantics for general references, 13th Annual IEEE Symp. on Logic in Computer Science (LICS), IEEE Press (1998), 334-344. [AJ94a] S. Abramsky and R. Jagadeesan, New foundations for the geometry of interaction, Information and Computation 111 (1) (1994), 53-119. Preliminary version, in 7th Annual IEEE Symp. on Logic in Computer Science (LICS), IEEE Publications (1992), 211-222. [AJ94b] S. Abramsky and R. Jagadeesan, Games and full completeness theorem for multiplicative linear logic, J. Symbolic Logic 59 (2) (1994), 543-574. [AMc98] S. Abramsky and G. McCusker, Full abstraction for idealized Algol with passive expressions, to appear in Theoretical Computer Science. [Abru91] V.M. Abrusci, Phase semantics and sequent calculus for pure noncommutative classical linear propositional logic, J. Symbolic Logic 56 ( 1991 ), 1403-1456. [Ali95] M. Alimohamed, A characterization of lambda definability in categorical models of implicit polymorphism, Theoretical Comp. Science 146 (1995), 5-23. [AHS95] T. Altenkirch, M. Hofmann and T. Streicher, Categorical reconstruction of a reduction-free normalisation proof, Proc. CTCS '95, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 953, 182-199. [AHS96] T. Altenkirch, M. Hofmann and T. Streicher, Reduction-free normalisation for a polymorphic system, Proc. of the 1lth Annual IEEE Symposium of Logic in Computer Science (1996), 98-106. [AC98] R.M. Amadio and P.-L. Curien, Selected Domains and Lambda Calculi, Camb. Univ. Press (1998). [Asp] A. Asperti, Linear logic, comonads, and optimal reductions, to appear in Fund. lnformatica. [AL91] A. Asperti and G. Longo, Categories, Types, and Structures, MIT Press (1991). (Currently out of print but publicly available on the Web.) [Ba97] J.C. Baez, An introduction to n-categories, Category Theory and Computer Science, CTCS'97, E. Moggi and G. Rosolini, eds, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1290 (1997). [BDER97] E Baillot, V. Danos, T. Ehrhard and L. Regnier, Believe it or not: AJM games model is a model of classical linear logic, 12th Annual IEEE Symp. on Logic in Computer Science (LICS), IEEE Press (1997). [B72] E.S. Bainbridge, A unified minimal realization theory, with duality, Dissertation, Department of Computer & Communication Sciences, University of Michigan (1972). [B75] E.S. Bainbridge, Addressed machines and duality, Category theory applied to computation and control, E. Manes, ed., Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 25 (1975), 93-98.


69

[B76] E.S. Bainbridge, Feedback and generalized logic, Information and Control 31 (1976), 75-96. [B77] E.S. Bainbridge, The fundamental duality of system theory, Systems: Approaches, Theories, Applications, W.E. Hartnett, ed., D. Reidel (1977), 45--61. [BFSS90] E.S. Bainbridge, P. Freyd, A. Scedrov and P.J. Scott, Functorial polymorphism, Theoretical Computer Science 70 (1990), 35-64. [Bar84] H.P. Barendregt, The Lambda Calculus, Studies in Logic, Vol. 103, North-Holland (1984). [Bar92] H.P. Barendregt, Lambda calculus with types, Handbook of Logic in Computer Science, Vol. 2, S. Abramsky, D. Gabbay and T. Maibaum, eds, Oxford Univ. Press (1992). [Barr791 M. Barr, .-Autonomous Categories, Lecture Notes in Mathematics, Vol. 752 (1979). [Barr91] M. Barr, .-Autonomous categories and linear logic, Math. Structures in Computer Science 1 (1991), 159-178. [Barr95] M. Barr, Non-symmetric .-autonomous categories, Theoretical Comp. Science 139 (1995), 115130. [Barr96] M. Barr, Appendix to [Blu96] (1994). [BW95] M. Barr and C. Wells, Category Theory for Computing Science, 2nd ed., Prentice-Hall (1995). [Bee85] M. Beeson, Foundations of Constructive Mathematics, Springer, Berlin (1985). [BAC95] R. Bellucci, M. Abadi and P.-L. Curien, A model for formal parametric polymorphism: A PER interpretation for system 7~, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 902, TLCA'95 (1995), 3246. [Ben] D.B. Benson, Bialgebras: Some foundations for distributed and concurrent computation, Fundamenta Informaticae 12 (1989), 427--486. [BBPH] B.N. Benton, G. Bierman, V. de Paiva and M. Hyland, Term assignment for intuitionistic linear logic, Proceedings of the International Conference on Typed Lambda Calculi and Applications, M. Bezem and J.E Groote, eds, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 664 (1992), 75-90. [BS91] U. Berger and H. Schwichtenberg, An inverse to the evaluation functional f o r typed Z-calculus, Proc. of the 6th Annual IEEE Symposium of Logic in Computer Science (1991), 203-211. [BD95] I. Beylin and P. Dybjer, Extracting a proof of coherence for monoidal categories from a proof of normalization for monoids, Types for Proofs and Programs, TYPES'95, S. Berardi and M. Coppo, eds, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1158 (1995). [Bie95] G.M. Bierman, What is a categorical model of intuitionistic linear logic?, TLCA'95, M. DezaniCiancaglini and G. Plotkin, eds (1995), 78-93. [Bla92] A. Blass, A game semantics for linear logic, Annals of Pure and Applied Logic 56 (1992), 183-220. [BE93] S.L. Bloom and Z. l~sik, Iteration Theories; The Equational Logic of lterative Processes, Springer, Berlin (1993). [BELM] S.L. Bloom, Z. l~sik, A. Labella and E. Manes, Iteration 2-theories: Extended abstract, Algebraic Methodology and Software Technology, AMAST'97, M. Johnson, ed., Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1349 (1997), 30--44. [Blu93] R. Blute, Linear logic, coherence and dinaturality, Theoretical Computer Science 115 (1993), 3-41. [Blu96] R. Blute, Hopfalgebras and linear logic, Math. Structures in Computer Science 6 (1996), 189-217. [BCS96] R.F. Blute, J.R.B. Cockett and R.A.G. Seely, ! and ? : Storage as tensorial strength, Math. Structures in Computer Science 6 (1996), 313-351. [BCST96] R.E Blute, J.R.B. Cockett, R.A.G. Seely and T.H. Trimble, Natural deduction and coherence for weakly distributive categories, J. Pure and Applied Algebra 113 (1996), 229-296. [BCS97] R.F. Blute, J.R.B. Cockett and R.A.G. Seely, Categories for computation in context and unified logic, J. Pure and Applied Algebra 116 (1997), 49-98. [BCS98] R. Blute, J.R.B. Cockett and R.A.G. Seely, Feedback for linearly distributive categories: Traces and fixpoints, Preprint, McGill University (1998). [BS96] R.E Blute and P.J. Scott, Linear Liiuchli semantics, Annals of Pure and Applied Logic 77 (1996), 101-142. [BS96b] R.E Blute and P.J. Scott, A noncommutative full completeness theorem (Extended abstract), Electronic Notes in Theoretical Computer Science 3, Elsevier Science B.V. (1996). [BS98] R. Blute and P.J. Scott, The shuffle Hopf algebra and noncommutative full completeness, J. Symbolic Logic, to appear. [Bor94] E Borceux, Handbook of Categorical Algebra, Cambridge University Press (1994).

70

P.J. Scott

[Brea-T,G] V. Breazu-Tannen and J. Gallier, Polymorphic rewriting conserves algebraic normalization, Theoretical Comp. Science 83. [CPS88] A. Carboni, E Freyd and A. Scedrov, A categorical approach to realizability andpolymorphic types, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 298 (Proc. 3rd MFPS), 23-42. [CSW] G.L. Cattani, I. Stark and G. Winskel, Presheaf models for the re-calculus, Category Theory and Computer Science, CTCS'97, E. Moggi and G. Rosolini, eds, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1290 (1997). [CaWi] G.L. Cattani and G. Winskel, Presheaf models for concurrency, Computer Science Logic, CSL'96, D. van Dalen and M. Bezem, eds, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1258 (1996). [Cob64] A. Cobham, The intrinsic computational difficulty of functions, Proc. of the 1964 Internations Congress for Logic, Methodology and Philosophy of Science, Y. Bar-Hillel, ed., North-Holland, Amsterdam (1964), 24-30. [Co93] J.R.B. Cockett, Introduction to distributive categories, Math. Structures in Computer Science 3 (1993), 277-308. [CS91] J.R.B. Cockett and R.A.G. Seely, Weakly distributive categories, J. Pure and Applied Algebra 114 (1997), 133-173. (Preliminary version in [FJP], pp. 45-65.) [CS96a] J.R.B. Cockett and R.A.G. Seely, Linearly distributive functors, Preprint, McGill University, 1996. [CS96b] J.R.B. Cockett and R.A.G. Seely, Proof theory for full intuitionistic linear logic, bilinear logic, and MIX categories, Theory and Applications of Categories 3 (1997), 85-131. [CSp91] J.R.B. Cockett and D.L. Spencer, Strong categorical datatypes L Category Theory 1991, Montreal, R.A.G. Seely, ed., CMS Conference Proceedings, Vol. 13 (1991), 141-169. [Cook75] S.A. Cook, Feasibly constructive proofs and the propositional calculus, Proc. 7th Annual ACM Symp. on Theory of Computing (1975), 83-97. [CoKa] S.A. Cook and B.M. Kapron, Characterizations of the basic feasible functionals of finite type, Feasible Mathematics, S. Buss and P. Scott, eds, Birkh~iuser, 71-96. [CD97] T. Coquand and P. Dybjer, Intuitionistic model constructions and normalization proofs, Math. Structures in Computer Science 7 (1997), 75-94. [Coq90] T. Coquand, On the analogy between propositons and types, in: [Hu90], pp. 399-4 17. [CU93] S.A. Cook and A. Urquhart, Functional interpretations of feasibly constructive arithmetic, Ann. Pure & Applied Logic 63 (2) (1993), 103-200. [CoGa] A. Corradini and F. Gadducci, A 2-categorical presentation of term graph rewriting, Category Theory and Computer Science, CTCS'97, E. Moggi and G. Rosolini, eds, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1290 (1997). [Cr93] R. Crole, Categories for Types, Cambridge Mathematical Textbooks (1993). [Cu93] D. (~ubri6, Results in categorical proof theory, PhD thesis, Dept. of Mathematics, McGill University (1993). [CDS97] D. (~ubri6, P. Dybjer and P.J. Scott, Normalization and the Yoneda embedding, Math. Structures in Computer Science 8 (2) (1997), 153-192. [Cur93] P.-L. Curien, Categorical Combinators, Sequential Algorithms, and Functional Programming, Pitman (1986) (revised edition, Birkh~iuser, 1993). [D90] V. Danos, La logique linYaire appliqu~e hl'~tude de divers processus de normalisation et principalement du X-calcul, Th6se de doctorat, Univ. Paris VII, U.ER. de Math6matiques (1990). [DR95] V. Danos and L. Regnier, Proof-nets and the Hilbert space, in: [GLR95], pp. 307-328. [DR89] V. Danos and L. Regnier, The structure ofmultiplicatives, Arch. Math. Logic 28 (1989), 181-203. [DiCo95] R. Di Cosmo, Isomorphism of Types: From X-Calculus to Information Retrieval and Language Design, Birkhauser (1995). [D+93] G. Dowek et al., The Coq proof assistant user's guide, Version 5.8, Technical Report, INRIARocquencourt (Feb. 1993). [DuRe94] D. Duval and J.-C. Reynaud, Sketches and computation I: Basic definitions and static evaluation, Math. Structures in Computer Science 4 (2) (1994), 185-238. [Dy95] P. Dybjer, Internal type theory, Types for Proofs and Programs, TYPES'95, S. Berardi and M. Coppo, eds, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1158 (1995). [EK66] S. Eilenberg and G.M. Kelly, A generalization of the functorial calculus, J. Algebra 3 (1966), 366375.


71

[EsLa] Z. l~sik and A. Labella, Equational properties of iteration in algebraically complete categories, MFCS'96, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1113 (1996). [FRS98] E Fages, E Ruet and S. Soliman, Phase semantics and verification of concurrent constraint programs, 13th Annual IEEE Symp. on Logic in Computer Science (LICS), IEEE Press (1998), 141152. [FiFrL] S. Finkelstein, E Freyd and J. Lipton, A new framework for declarative programming, Th. Comp. Science (to appear). [FiP196] M.E Fiore and G.D. Plotkin, An extension of models of axiomatic domain theory to models of synthetic domain theory, CSL'96, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1258 (1996). [F196] A. Fleury, Thesis, Th6se de doctorat, Univ. Paris VII, U.ER. de Math6matiques (1996). [FR94] A. Fleury and C. R6tor6, The M I X rule, Math. Structures in Computer Science 4 (1994), 273-285. [FJP] M.P. Fourman, ET. Johnstone and A.M. Pitts (eds), Applications of Categories in Computer Science, London Math. Soc. Lecture Notes 177, Camb. Univ. Press (1992). [Fre92] E Freyd, Remarks on algebraically compact categories, in: [FJP], pp. 95-107. [Fre93] E Freyd, Structural polymorphism, Theoretical Comp. Science 115 (1993), 107-129. [FRRa] E Freyd, E. Robinson and G. Rosolini, Dinaturality for free, in: [FJP], pp. 107-118. [FRRb] E Freyd, E. Robinson and G. Rosolini, Functorial parametricity, Manuscript. [FrSc] E Freyd and A. Scedrov, Categories, Allegories, North-Holland (1990). [Frie73] H. Friedman, Equality between functionals, Logic Colloquium '73, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 453 (1975), 22-37. [GaHa] P. Gardner and M. Hasegawa, Types and models for higher-order action calculi, TACS'97, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1281 (1997). [Ge85] R. Geroch, Mathematical Physics, University of Chicago Press (1985). [Gh96] N. Ghani, ~rl-equality for coproducts, TLCA '95, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 902 (1995), 171-185. [Gi71] J.-Y. Girard, Une extension de l'interpr~tation de G6del a l'analyse, et son application a l'elimination des coupures dans l'analyse et la thgorie des types, J.E. Fenstad, ed., Proc. 2nd Scandinavian Logic Symposium, North-Holland (1971), 63-92. [Gi72] J.-Y. Girard, Interpretation fonctionnelle et elimination des coupures dans l'arithm~tique d'ordre supgrieur, Th6se de doctorat d' 6tat, Univ. Paris VII (1972). [Gi86] J.-Y. Girard, The system F of variables types, fifteen years later, Theoretical Comp. Science 45 (1986), 159-192. [Gi87] J.-Y. Girard, Linear logic, Theoretical Comp. Science 50 (1987), 1-102 [Gi88] J.-Y. Girard, Geometry of interaction I: Interpretation ofsystem F, Logic Colloquium '88, R. Ferro et al., eds, North-Holland (1989), 221-260. [Gi89] J.-Y. Girard, Towards a geometry of interaction, Categories in Computer Science and Logic, J.W. Gray and A. Scedrov, eds, Contemp. Math., Vol. 92, AMS (1989), 69-108. [Gi90] J.-Y. Girard, Geometry of interaction 2: Deadlock-free algorithms, COLOG-88, P. Martin-Lof and G. Mints, eds, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 417 (1990), 76-93. [Gi91] J.-Y. Girard, A new constructive logic: Classical logic, Math. Structures in Computer Science 1 (1991), 255-296. [Gi93] J.-Y. Girard, On the unity oflogic, Annals of Pure and Applied Logic 59 (1993), 201-217. [Gi95a] J.-Y. Girard, Linear logic: Its syntax and semantics, in: [GLR95], pp. 1-42. [Gi95b] J.-Y. Girard, Geometry of interaction III: Accommodating the additives, in: [GLR95], pp. 329-389. [Gi96] J.-Y. Girard, Coherent Banach spaces, Preprint (1996), and lectures delived at Keio University, Linear Logic '96 (April 1996). [Gi97] J.-Y. Girard, Light linear logic, Preprint (1995) (revised 1997). URL: ftp://lmd.univ-mrs.fr/pub/ girard/LL.ps.Z. [GLR95] J.-Y. Girard, Y. Lafont and L. Regnier (eds), Advances in Linear Logic, London Math. Soc. Series 222, Camb. Univ. Press (1995). [GLT] J.-Y. Girard, Y. Lafont and E Taylor, Proofs and Types, Cambridge Tracts in Theoretical Computer Science, Vol. 7 (1989).

PJ. Scott

72

[GSS91] J.-Y. Girard, A. Scedrov and E Scott, Normal forms and cut-free proofs as natural transformations, Logic From Computer Science, Mathematical Science Research Institute Publications, Vol. 21 (1991), 217-241. (Also available by anonymous ftp from:theory.doc.ic.ac uk, in: papers/Scott.) [GSS92] J.-Y. Girard, A. Scedrov and P.J. Scott, Bounded linear logic, Theoretical Comp. Science 97 (1992), 1-66.

[Giry] M. Giry, A categorical approach to probability theory, Proc. of a Conference on Categorical Aspects of Topology, Lecture Notes in Mathematics, Vol. 915, (1981), 68-85. [GAL92] G. Gonthier, M. Abadi and J.J. Levy, Linear logic without boxes, 7th Annual IEEE Symp. on Logic in Computer Science (LICS), IEEE Publications (1992), 223-234. [GPS96] R. Gordon, A. Power and R. Street, Coherence for tricategories, Memoirs of the American Mathematical Society (1996). [GS89] J. Gray and A. Scedrov (eds), Categories in Computer Science and Logic, Contemp. Math., Vol. 92, AMS (1989). [Gun92] C. Gunter, Semantics of Programming Languages, MIT Press (1992). [Gun94] C. Gunter, The semantics of types in programming languages, in: [AGM], pp. 395-475. [Ha87] T. Hagino, A typed lambda calculus with categorical type constructors, Category Theory and Computer Science, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 283 (1987), 140-157. [Hagh99] E. Haghverdi, Unique decomposition categories, geometry of interaction and combinatory logic, Math. Struct. in Comput. Sci. (to appear). [Ham99] M. Hamano, Pontrjagin duality and a full completeness of multiplicative linear logic without MIX, Math. Struct. in Comput. Sci. (to appear). [Har93] T. Hardin, How to get confluence for explicit substitutions, Term Graph Rewriting, M. Sleep, M. Plasmeijer and M. van Eekelen, eds, Wiley (1993), 31-45. [HM92] V. Harnik and M. Makkai, Lambek's categorical proof theory and IAuchli's abstract realizability, J. Symbolic Logic 57 (1992), 200-230. [MHas97] M. Hasegawa, Recursion from cyclic sharing: Traced monoidal categories and models of cyclic lambda calculi, TLCA '97, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1210 (1997), 196-213. [RHas94] R. Hasegawa, Categorical data types in parametric polymorphism, Math. Structures in Computer Science 4 ( 1) (1994), 71-109. [RHas95] R. Hasegawa, A logical aspect of parametric polymorphism, Computer Science Logic, CSL'95, H.K. Brining, ed., Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1092 (1995). [Haz] M. Hazewinkel, Introductory recommendations for the study of Hopf algebras in mathematics and physics, CWI Quarterly, Centre for Mathematics and Computer Science, Amsterdam 4 (1) (March 1991). [HJ95] C. Hermida and B. Jacobs, Fibrations with indeterminates: Contextual and functional completeness for polymorphic lambda calculi, Math. Structures in Computer Science 5 (4), 501-532. [HMP98] C. Hermida, M. Makkai and J. Power, Higher dimensional multigraphs, 13th Annual IEEE Symp. on Logic in Computer Science (LICS), IEEE (1998), 199-206. [Hi80] D. Higgs, Axiomatic Infinite Sums-An Algebraic Approach to Integration Theory, Contemporary Mathematics, Vol. 2 (1980). [HR89] D.A. Higgs and K.A. Rowe, Nuclearity in the category ofcomplete semilattices, J. Pure and Applied Algebra 5 (1989), 67-78. [HPW] T. Hildebrandt, P. Panangaden and G. Winskel, A relational model of non-deterministic dataflow, to appear in: Concur 98, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. ??. [HM94] J. Hodas and D. Miller, Logic programming in a fragment of intuitionistic linear logic, Inf. and Computation 110 (2) (1994), 327-365. [H97a] M. Hofmann, Syntax and semantics of dependent types, in: [PD97], pp. 79-130. [H97b] M. Hofmann, An application of category-theoretic semantics to the characterisation of complexity classes using higher-order function algebras, Bull. Symb. Logic 3 (4) (1997), 469-485. [HJ97] H. Hu and A. Joyal, Coherence completions of categories and their enriched softness, Proceedings, Mathematical Foundations of Programming Semantics, Thirteenth Annual Conference, S. Brookes and M. Mislove, eds, Electronic Notes in Theoretical Computer Science 6 (1997). [Hu90] G. Huet (ed.), Logical Foundations of Functional Programming, Addison-Wesley (1990). [Hy88] M. Hyland, A small complete category, Ann. Pure and Appl. Logic 40 (1988), 135-165.


73

[Hy97] M. Hyland, Game semantics, in: [PD97], pp. 131-184. [HRR] M. Hyland, E. Robinson and G. Rosolini, The discrete objects in the effective topos, Proc. Lond. Math. Soc. Ser. 60 (1990), 1-36. [HP93] M. Hyland and V. de Paiva, Full intuitionistic linear logic (Extended Abstract), Annals of Pure and Applied Logic 64 (3) (1993), 273-291. [JR] B. Jacobs and J. Rutten, A tutorial on (Co)Algebras and (Co)Induction, EATCS Bulletin 62 (1997), 222-259. [J90] C.B. Jay, The structure offree closed categories, J. Pure and Applied Algebra 66 (1990), 271-285. [JGh95] C.B. Jay and N. Ghani, The virtues ofeta expansion, Journal of Functional Programing 5 (2) (1995), 135-154. [JNW] A. Joyal, M. Nielsen and G. Winskel, Bisimulation from open maps, Inf. and Computation 127 (2) (1996), 164-185. [JS91b] A. Joyal and R. Street, An introduction to Tannaka duality and quantum groups, Category Theory, Proceedings, Como 1990, A. Carboni et al., eds, Lecture Notes in Mathematics, Vol. 1488 (1991), 411-492. [JS91] A. Joyal and R. Street, The geometry of tensor calculus L Advances in Mathematics 88 (1991), 55-112. [JS93] A. Joyal and R. Street, Braided tensor categories, Advances in Mathematics 102 (1) (1993), 20--79. [JSV96] A. Joyal, R. Street and D. Verity, Traced monoidal categories, Math. Proc. Camb. Phil. Soc. 119 (1996), 447-468. [JT93] A. Jung and J. Tiuryn, A new characterization of lambda definability, TLCA'93, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 664, 230-244. [Ka95] M. Kanovich, The direct simulation of Minksky machines in linear logic, in: [GLR95], pp. 123-146. [KOS97] M. Kanovich, M. Okada and A. Scedrov, Phase semantics for light linear logic, Proceedings, Mathematical Foundations of Programming Semantics, Thirteenth Annual Conference, S. Brookes and M. Mislove, eds, Electronic Notes in Theoretical Computer Science 6 (1997). [KSW95] P. Katis, N. Sabadini and R.F.C. Waiters, Bicategories of processes, Manuscript (1995). Dept. of Mathematics, Univ. Sydney. [KSWa] P. Katis, N. Sabadini and R.EC. Waiters, Span(Graph): A categorical algebra of transition systems, AMAST'97, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1349 (1997). [K77] G.M. Kelly, Many-variable functorial calculus. L Coherence in Categories, Lecture Notes in Mathematics, Vol. 281 (1977), 66-105. [K82] G.M. Kelly, Basic Concepts of Enriched Category Theory, London Math. Soc. Lecture Notes, Vol. 64, Camb. Univ. Press (1982). [KM71 ] G.M. Kelly and S. Mac Lane, Coherence in closed categories, J. Pure and Applied Algebra 1 (1971), 97-140. [KOPTT] Y. Kinoshita, P.W. O'Hearn, A.J. Power, M. Takeyama and R.D. Tennent, An axiomatic approach to binary logical relations with applications to data refinement, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1281, TACS '97 (1997), 191-212. [Ku63] A.G. Kurosh, Direct decomposition in algebraic categories, Amer. Math. Soc. Transl. Ser. 2, Vol. 27 (1963), 231-255. [Lac95] S.G. Lack, The algebra of distributive and extensive categories, PhD thesis, University of Cambridge (1995). [Laf88] Y. Lafont, Logiques, categories et machines, Th~se de doctorat, Universit6 Paris VII, U.ER. de Math6matiques (1988). [Laf95] Y. Lafont, From proof nets to interaction nets, in: [GLR95], pp. 225-247. [L68] J. Lambek, Deductive systems and categories L J. Math. Systems Theory 2, 278-318. [L69] J. Lambek, Deductive systems and categories II, Lecture Notes in Mathematics, Vol. 87, Springer, Berlin (1969). [L74] J. Lambek, Functional completeness of cartesian catgories, Ann. Math. Logic 6, 259-292. [L88] J. Lambek, On the unity of algebra and logic, Categorical Algebra and its Applications, E Borceux, ed., Lecture Notes in Mathematics, Vol. 1348, Springer (1988). [L89] J. Lambek, Multicategories revisited, Contemp. Math. 92, 217-239. [L90] J. Lambek, Logic without structural rules, Manuscript, Mcgill University (1990).

P.J. Scott

74

[L93] J. Lambek, From categorial grammar to bilinear logic, Substructural Logics, Studies in Logic and Computation, Vol. 2, K. Do~en and P. Schroeder-Heister, eds, Oxford Science Publications (1993). [L95] J. Lambek, Bilinear logic in algebra and linguistics, in: [GLR95]. [LS86] J. Lambek and P.J. Scott, Introduction to Higher Order Categorical Logic, Cambridge Studies in Advanced Mathematics, Vol. 7, Cambridge University Press (1986). [Lau] H. L~iuchli,An abstract notion of realizability for which intuitionistic predicate calculus is complete, Intuitionism and Proof Theory, North-Holland (1970), 227-234. [Law66] EW. Lawvere, The category of categories as a foundation for mathematics, Proc. Conf. on Categorical Algebra, S. Eilenberg et al., eds, Springer (1965). [Law69] EW. Lawvere, Adjointness in foundations, Dialectica 23, 281-296. [Lef63] S. Lefschetz, Algebraic Topology, Amer. Math. Soc. Colloq. Publ., Vol. 27 (1963). [Li95] E Lincoln, Deciding provability of linear logic formulas, in: [GLR95], pp. 109-122. [Luo94] Z. Luo, Computation and Reasoning: A Type Theory for Computer Science, Oxford Univ. Press (1994). [LP92] Z. Luo and R. Pollack, LEGO proof development system: User's manual, Technical Report ECSLFCS-92-211, Univ. Edinburgh (1992). [MaRey] Q. Ma and J.C. Reynolds, Types, abstraction, and parametric polymorphism, Part 2, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 598 (1991), 1-40. [Mac71 ] S. Mac Lane, Categories for the Working Mathematician, Springer (1971). [Mac82] S. Mac Lane, Why commutative diagrams coincide with equivalent proofs, Contemp. Math. 13 (1982), 387-401. [MM92] S. Mac Lane and I. Moerdijk, Sheaves in Geometry and Logic, Springer (1992). [MaRe91] E Malacaria and L. Regnier, Some results on the interpretation of X-calculus in operator algebras, 6th Annual IEEE Symp. on Logic in Computer Science (LICS), IEEE Press (1991), 63-72. [MA86] E. Manes and M. Arbib, Algebraic Approaches to Program Semantics, Springer (1986). [M98] E. Manes, Implementing collection classes with monads, Math. Structures in Computer Science 8 (3), 231-276. [ML73] E Martin-Lrf, An intuitionistic theory of types: Predicative part, Logic Colloquium '73, H.E. Rose and J.C. Shepherdson, eds, North-Holland (1975), 73-118. [ML82] E Martin-L6f, Constructive mathematics and computer programming, Proc. Sixth International Congress for Logic, Methodology and Philosophy of Science, North-Holland (1982). [Mc97] G. McCusker, Games and definability for FPC, Bull. Symb. Logic 3 (3) (1997), 347-362. [MPSS95] N. Mendler, P. Panangaden, P. Scott and R. Seely, The logical structure of concurrent constraint languages, Nordic Journal of Computing 2 (1995), 181-220. [Mrt94] E Mrtayer, Homology of proof nets, Arch. Math Logic 33 (1994) (see also [GLR95]). [Mill] D. Miller, Linear logic as logic programming: An abstract, Logical Aspects of Computational Linguistics, LACL'96, C. Retorr, ed., Lecture Notes in Artificial Intelligence, Vol. 1328 (1996). [MNPS] D. Miller, G. Nadathur, E Pfenning and A. Scedrov, Uniform proofs as a foundation for logic programming, Ann. Pure and Applied Logic 51 (1991), 125-157. [Mi189] R. Milner, Communication and Concurrency, Prentice-Hall (1989). [Mi177] R. Milner, Fully abstract models of typed lambda calculi, Theoretical Comp. Science 4 (1977), 1-22.

[Mi193a] R. Milner, The polyadic 7r-calculus: A tutorial, Logic and Algebra of Specification, EL. Bauer, W. Brauer and H. Schwichtenberg, eds, Springer (1993). [Mi193b] R. Milner, Action calculi, or concrete action structures, Mathematical Foundations of Computer Science, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 711 (1993), 105-121. [Mi194] R. Milner, Action calculi V." Reflexive molecular forms, Manuscript, University of Edinburgh (June, 1994). [Min81] G.E. Mints, Closed Categories and the theory ofproofs, J. Soviet Math. 15 (1981), 45-62. [Mit96] J.C. Mitchell, Foundations for Programming Languages, MIT Press (1996). [Mit90] J.C. Mitchell, Type systems for programming languages, Handbook of Theoretical Computer Science, Vol. B (Formal Models and Semantics), J. Van Leeuwen, ed., North-Holland (1990), 365-458. [MitSce] J.C. Mitchell and A. Scedrov, Notes on sconing and relators, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 702, CSL'92 (1992), 352-378.


75

[MS89] J.C. Mitchell and P.J. Scott, Typed lambda models and Cartesian closed categories, in: [GS89], pp. 301-316. [MiVi] J.C. Mitchell and R. Visvanathan, Effective models of polymorphism, subtyping and recursion (Extended abstract), Automata, Languages and Programming, ICALP'96, EM. auf der Heide and B. Monien, eds, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1099 (1996). [Mo91] E. Moggi, Notions of computation and monads, Inf. & Computation 93 (1) (1991), 55-92. [Mo97] E. Moggi, Metalanguages and applications, in: [PD97], pp. 185-239. [MR97] E. Moggi and G. Rosolini (eds), 7th International Conference on Category Theory and Computer Science, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1290 (1997). [Mul91] P. Mulry, Strong monads, algebras andfixed points, in: [FJP], pp. 202-216. [OHT92] E O'Heam and R.D. Tennent, Semantics of local variables, Applications of Categories in Computer Science, London Math. Soc. Lecture Series, Vol. 177, Camb. Univ. Press (1992), 217-236. [OHT93] E O'Hearn and R.D. Tennent, Relational parametricity and local variables, 20th Syrup. on Principles of Programming Languages, Assoc. Comp. Machinery (1993), 171-184. [OHRi] P. O'Hearn and J. Riecke, Kripke logical relations and PCF, to appear in Information and Computation. [O185] EJ. Oles, Type algebras, functor categories and block structure, Algebraic Methods in Semantics, M. Nivat and J. Reynolds, eds, Camb. Univ. Press (1985). [PSSS] P. Panangaden, V. Saraswat, P.J. Scott and R.A.G. Seely, A categorical view of concurrent constraint programming, Proceedings of REX Workshop, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 666 (1993), 457-476. [PR89] R. Par6 and L. Rom~in, Monoidal categories with natural numbers object, Studia Logica 48 (1989), 361-376. [P96] D. Pavlovi6, Categorical logic of names and abstraction in action calculi, Math. Structures in Computer Science 7 (6) (1997), 619-637. [PaAb] D. Pavlovi6 and S. Abramsky, Specifying interaction categories, CTCS'97, E. Moggi and G. Rosolini, eds, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1290 (1997). [Pen93] M. Pentus, Lambek grammars are context free, 8th Annual IEEE Syrup. on Logic in Computer Science (LICS), Montreal (1993), 429-433. [PDM89] B. Pierce, S. Dietzen and S. Michaylov, Programming in higher-order typed lambda-calculi, Reprint CMU-CS-89-111, Dept. of Computer Science, Carnegie-Mellon University (1989). [Pi87] A. Pitts, Polymorphism is set-theoretic, constructively, Category Theory and Computer Science, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 283, D.H. Pitt, ed. (1987), 12-39. [Pi96a] A. Pitts, Relational properties of domains, Inf. and Computation 127 (2) (1996), 66-90. [Pi96b] A. Pitts, Reasoning about local variables with operationally-based logical relations, 1 lth Annual IEEE Syrup. on Logic in Computer Science (LICS), IEEE Press (1996), 152-163. [Pi97] A. Pitts, Operationally-based theories ofprogram equivalence, in: [PD97], pp. 241-298. [Pi9?] A.M. Pitts, Categorical logic, Handbook of Logic in Computer Science, Vol. 6, S. Abramsky, D.M. Gabbay and T.S.E. Maibaum, eds, Oxford University Press (1996) (to appear). [PD97] A. Pitts and E Dybjer (eds), Semantics and Logics of Computation, Publications of the Newton Institute, Camb. Univ. Press (1997). [Plo77] G.D. Plotkin, LCF considered as programming language, Theoretical Comp. Science 5 (1977), 223-255. [Plo80] G.D. Plotkin, Lambda definability in the full type hierarchy, To H.B. Curry: Essays on Combinatory Logic, Lambda Calculus, and Formalism, Academic Press (1980), 363-373. [P1Ab93] G. Plotkin and M. Abadi, A logic for parametric polymorphism, TLCA'93, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 664 (1993), 361-375. [Pow89] J. Power, A general coherence result, J. Pure and Applied Algebra 57 (1989), 165-173. [PK96] J. Power and Y. Kinoshita, A new foundation for logic programming, Extensions of Logic Programming '96, Springer (1996). PowRob97] A.J. Power and E.P. Robinson, Premonoidal categories and notions of computation, Math. Structures in Computer Science 7 (5) (1997), 453-468. [PowTh97] J. Power and H. Thielecke, Environments, continuation semantics and indexed categories, TACS'97, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1281 (1997), 191-212.

76

PJ. Scott [Pra95] V. Pratt, Chu spaces and their interpretation as concurrent objects, Computer Science Today, J. van Leeuwen, ed., Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1000 (1995), 392-405. [Pra97] V. Pratt, Towards full completeness for the linear logic of Chu spaces, Proc. MFPS (MFPS'97), Electronic Notes of Theoretical Computer Science (1997). [Pr65] D. Prawitz, Natural Deduction, Almquist & Wilksell, Stockhom (1965). [Rgn92] L. Regnier, Lambda-calcul et r~seaux, Th~se de doctorat, Univ. Paris VII, U.ER. Math6matiques (1992). [ReSt97] B. Reus and Th. Streicher, General synthetic domain theory- A logical approach (Extended abstract), CTCS'97, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1290 (1997). [Rey74] J. Reynolds, Towards a theory of type structure, Programming Symposium, Lecture Notes inComputer Science, Vol. 19 (1974), 408-425. [Rey81] J.C. Reynolds, The essence of Algol, Algorithmic Languages, J.W. de Bakker and J.C. van Vliet, eds, North-Holland (1981), 345-372. [Rey83] J.C. Reynolds, Types, abstraction, and parametric polymorphism, Information Processing '83, R.E.A. Mason, ed., North-Holland (1983), 513-523. [RP] J. Reynolds and G. Plotkin, On functors expressible in the polymorphic typed lambda calculus, Inf. and Computation, reprinted in: [Hu90], pp. 127-152. [Rob89] E. Robinson, How complete is PER?, 4th Annual IEEE Symp. on Logic in Computer Science (LICS), IEEE Publications (1989), 106-111. [RR90] E. Robinson and G. Rosolini, Polymorphism, set theory, and call-by-value, 5th Annual IEEE Symp. on Logic in Computer Science (LICS), IEEE Publications (1990), 12-18. [Rom89] L. Roman, Cartesian categories with natural numbers object, J. Pure and Applied Algebra 58 (1989), 267-278. [Ros90] G. Rosolini, About modest sets, Int. J. Found. Comp. Sci. 1 (1990), 341-353. [Sc93] A. Scedrov, A brief guide to linear logic, Current Trends in Theoretical Computer Science, G. Rozenberg and A. Salomaa, eds, World Scientific Publishing Co. (1993), 377-394. [Sc95] A. Scedrov, Linear logic and computation: A survey, Proof and Computation, H. Schwichtenberg, ed., NATO Advanced Science Institutes, Series F, Vol. 139, Springer, Berlin (1995), 379-395. [Sc72] D. Scott, Continuous lattices, Lecture Notes in Mathematics, Vol. 274, 97-136. [See87] R.A.G. Seely, Categorical semantics for higher order polymorphic lambda calculus, J. Symb. Logic 52 (1987), 969-989. [See89] R.A.G. Seely, Linear logic, .-autonomous categories and cofree coalgebras, J. Gray and A. Scedrov, eds, Categories in Computer Science and Logic, Contemporary Mathematics, Vol. 92, Amer. Math. Soc. (1989). [Sie92] K. Sieber, Reasoning about sequential functions via logical relations, in: [FJP], pp. 258-269. [Si93] A.K. Simpson, A characterization of least-fixed-point operator by dinaturality, Theoretical Comp. Science 118 (1993), 301-314. [SP82] M.B. Smyth and G.D. Plotkin, The category-theoretic solution ofrecursive domain equations, SIAM J. Computing 11 (1982), 761-783. [So87] S. Soloviev, On natural transformations of distinguished functors and their superpositions in certain closed categories, J. Pure and Applied Algebra 47 (1987), 181-204. [So95] S. Soloviev, Proof of a S. Mac Lane conjecture (Extended abstract), CTCS'95, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 953, 59-80. [St96] R.E St~k, Call-by-value, call-by-name and the logic of values, Computer Science Logic, CSL'96, D. van Dalen and M. Bezem, eds, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1258 (1996). [St85] R. Statman, Logical relations and the typed lambda calculus, Inf. and Control 65 (1985), 85-97. [St96] R. Statman, On Cartesian monoids, CSL'96, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 1258 (1996). [ST96] R. Street, Categorical structures, Handbook of Algebra, Vol. 1, M. Hazewinkel, ed., Elsevier (1996). [Tay98] P. Taylor, Practical Foundations, Camb. Univ. Press (1998). [Ten94] R.D. Tennent, Denotational semantics, in: [AGM], pp. 169-322. [TP96] D. Turi and G. Plotkin, Towards a mathematical operational semantics, 12th Annual IEEE Symp. on Logic in Computer Science (LICS) (1996), 280-291. [Tr92] A. Troelstra, Lectures on Linear Logic, CSLI Lecture Notes, Vol. 29 (1992).


77

[TrvD88] A.S. Troelstra and D. van Dalen, Constructivism in Mathematics, Vols. I and II, North-Holland (1988). [W92] P. Wadler, The essence offunctional programming, Symp. on Principles of Programming Languages (POPL'92), ACM Press, 1-14. [W94] P. Wadler, A syntax for linear logic, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 802, Springer, Berlin (1994), 513-528. [WW86] K. Wagner and G. Wechsung, Computational Complexity, D. Reidel (1986). [Wa192] R.EC. Waiters, Categories and Computer Science, Camb. Univ. Press (1992). [WN97] G. Winskel and M. Nielsen, Categories in concurrency, in: [PD97], pp. 299-354. [Wr89] G. Wraith, A note on categorical datatypes, Category Theory in Computer Science, Lecture Notes in Computer Science, Vol. 389 (1989), 118-127. [Y90] D. Yetter, Quantales and (noncommutative) linear logic, Journal of Symbolic Logic 55 (1990), 4164.


Algebra, Categories and Databases B. Plotkin Institute of Mathematics, Hebrew University, Givat Ram, Jerusalem, Israel

Contents Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Algebra for databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1. Many-sorted algebra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2. Algebraic logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3. The categorical approach to algebraic logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............. 2. Algebraic model of databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1. Passive databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2. Active databases. The general definition of a database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3. Groups and databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Applications and other aspects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1. The problem of equivalence of databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2. Deductive approach in databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3. Categories and databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4. Monads and comonads in the category of databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conclusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H A N D B O O K O F A L G E B R A , VOL. 2 Edited by M. Hazewinkel 9 2000 Elsevier Science B.V. All rights reserved 79

81 84 84 86 93 96 96 104 112

113 113 120 128 133 144 145


Algebra, categories and databases

81

Introduction

1. This paper is in some sense, the survey of connections between algebra and databases. We will discuss mainly an algebraic model of DB's 1 and applications of this model. This paper is far from being a survey on DBs themselves. Speaking about algebra we mean universal algebra and model theory, and also logic, in particular, algebraic logic, and theory of categories. Groups which appear here as groups of automorphisms of DBs play a significant role and are used for solving specific problems. For example, Galois theory of DBs is used for solving the problem of equivalence of two DBss. We are interested in two sides of the relations considered. One side is the evaluation of the possibilities of algebra in the theory of DBs, and another deals with understanding of the fact, that algebra itself can profit much from these links. This survey is devoted only to the first side, however the second one is also visible to some extent. At last, it is clear, that modem algebra gets a lot of benefits from its various applications. 2. A database is an information system which allows to store and process information as well as to query its contents. It is possible to query either the data directly, stored in the DB, or some information which can be somehow derived from the basic data. It is assumed that the derived information is expressed in terms of basic data, through some algebraic means. It is customary to distinguish three main traditional approaches in DBs. These are hierarchical, network and relational approaches. We work with relational DBs, since in fact, up to now, they display the interaction between universal algebra, logic, category theory and databases in the best way. The relational approach was discovered by E. Codd in the early 70s [Co 1,Co2,Co3,Co4, Co5]. In this approach, information is stored in the form of relations, replies on queries are constructed in a special relational algebra, called algebra of relations. There is also queries language which is compatible with the operations of relational algebra. This efficient way of presenting queries and replies is one of the main advantages of the relational approach to DB organization. However, the language of queries in this theory is not sufficiently natural. It is adapted to the calculation of a reply to query, but it is not very convenient for the description of the query. We find that the traditional language of first-order logic is more natural for this purpose. The second problem of relational approach deals with the algebra of replies. The relational algebra is defined not axiomatically. This means that there is no good connection between queries and replies. Recently, J. Cirulis has found an axiomatic approach [Cil ] to Codd's algebras. Perhaps, the situation would change, if we proceed from the ideas of algebraic logic. In early 80's applications of algebraic logic in databases were outlined. In the paper [IL] transitions between Codd's relational algebras and cylindric Tarski algebras were studied, in [BPll,BP12] polyadic Halmos algebras were used. These transitions allow us to work on the level of modeling with machinery of algebraic logic, and then transfer to the language and algebras of Codd. 1

"DB"stands for "database".

82

B. Plotkin

3. In the theory of relational DBs there are two main directions, namely deductive approach and model-theoretic approach. In this survey we pay attention, mainly, to the modeltheoretic approach (some connections with the deductive one are sketched). In particular, a DB state is considered as a model in the sense of model theory. It has the form (D, ~, f ) , where D is a data algebra, ~ is a set of symbols of relations and f is a realization of this set q~ in D. Algebra, logic and model theory are applied in various specific problems of DBs theory, for instance, in problems related to the modeling of semantics, in the theory of functional dependences, in construction of normal forms. There are new algebraic approaches to the theory of computations, which are based on categorical ideas and notions of monad and comonad. Of course, algebra is used also as an algebra of relations. This survey is devoted, as it was already mentioned, to the development of a DB model. In this model a DB appears as an algebraic structure. Thus, we can speak about the category of DBs depending on some data type. In the framework of this category it is possible to treat many problems. Among them the problem of comparing of different DBs, the problem of equivalence of two DBs and so on. 4. In the theory and practice of DBs three big parts can be singled out. These are semantics modeling problems, computational problems and creation of various DBMSs. 2 Semantics modeling in DBs is described in the book of Tsalenko [Ts3]. In this book there is a complete survey of this topic, accompanied by a rich bibliography, which allows to follow the development of the direction. Besides, in the book there are algebraic results. In particular, a useful algebra of files is constructed. In this book can be found important algebraic results obtained by E. Beniaminov [Ben l,Ben2,Ben3,Ben4], V. Borschew and M. Khomjakov [BK]. Theory of computations has become a very significant branch of mathematics. Algebra and categories play a special role in this theory, see papers of D. Scott [Sc,GS], G. Plotkin [GP11,GP12,GPI3] and many others. An important series of works in this field with applications to DBs was carried out by J. Gurevich [Gurl,Gur2]. In these works all DBs are finite and investigations are combined with the theory of finite models. There are collections of papers [Cat,Appl] dedicated to applications of categorical theory in computer science, in particular, in DBs. See also [AN,BN,GB 1,GB2,Go,GoTWW,GoTW,GS,Ja,Ka,MG, O1]. There exists an almost boundless bibliography on various DBMSs. See, for example, the book [Sy] and references included. The set of textbooks on DBs is well known. There are the books of J. Ullman [Ulm], C. Date [Da], J. Martin [Ma], D. Maier [Ma] and others. We would like to mention in particular the book of P. Gray "Logic, Algebra and Databases" [Gr]. See also [AL,LS]. 5. Let us sketch the main ideas, which lie at the base of the algebraic model of DB. We assume that a query is expressed as formula of first-order logic. In a query there are also functional symbols, which are connected with operations in data algebras. These operations satisfy some identities, which are used for the verifying of correctness of operations fulfillment. The identities determine some data type, [Ag,Za], whose algebraic equivalent 2

"DBMS"stands for database managementsystem.


83

is a variety O, [BP13]. Thus, we use not necessarily only pure logic of first-order but also some O-logic, which is associated with data type O. To this logic corresponds a variety of algebras Lo. This Lo may be a variety of cylindric algebras [HMT], or polyadic algebras [Hal,BP13]. For each algebra D 6 0 there is an algebra VD from the variety Lo, which serves as an algebra of replies to queries. It plays the role of Codd's relational algebra. Each query is written by means of O-logic, however one should distinguish a query and its notation. It is clear that one and the same query can be expressed in different ways. This means that a query must be considered as a class of equivalent notations. The set of such classes form an universal algebra of queries U, which also belongs to the variety Lo. Elements from U are also formulas, but considered up to a certain equivalence. U and VD are the objects of algebraic logic. To each state (D, 45, f ) , D 6 O of a DB corresponds a canonical homomorphism f ' U ~ VD. The reply to a query u in the state f is f(u). This idea lies at the base of DB model construction. In a first approximation, a DB is considered as a triple (F, Q, R) where F is a set of feasible states, and Q and R are algebras of queries and replies respectively, which belong to one and the same variety Lo. There is an operation , : F x Q --+ R, such that f 9 q, f ~ F, q ~ Q is a reply to a query q in the state f . Let f ' Q -+ R be a map, defined by the formula f ( q ) = f 9q. We assume that this map is a homomorphism of algebras in Lo. The last means that the structure of a reply is well-coordinated with the structure of a query. The triple (F, Q, R) has to be compatible with the data algebra D. In particular, R is a subalgebra in VD, and, besides that, the algebra Q is a result of compression of the query algebra U, depending on the choice of the set F. The set F can be given by a set of axioms T C U. It also can be defined in other ways. This is the model-theoretic approach to DBs. Its combination with deductive ideas allows to realize a reply by deductive means. This, in its turn, gives connection with syntax and computations based on it. DB model construction can be grounded also on the categorical approach of E Lawvere to first-order logic [Lawl,Law2,Law3]. Observe here, that DB models uses complicated structures of algebra, algebraic logic and category theory. We will see, that results obtained with the help of this model may serve as a tool for quite practical applications in real DBs. This survey consists of three sections. The first section describes necessary algebraic machinery, in the second one the DB model is constructed. The last section is devoted to applications and other questions. In particular, applications of monads and comonads in DBs are considered. Monads are used for enrichment of DB structure, while comonads work in the model of computations. We essentially use the book [BP13]. The results taken from it are given without proofs. New results are provided, as a rule, by proofs. Not only relational DBs use the theory of categories. During the last decade a plenitude of works on this topic appeared (see [ABCD] and bibliography included). In preparation of this survey I obtained significant help from J. Cirulis, Z. Diskin, E. & T. Plotkin. I wish to thank also L. Bokut and B. Trakhtenbrot for their useful remarks. A

84

B. Plotkin

1. Algebra for databases 1.1. M a n y - s o r t e d algebra 1.1.1. The m a i n notions 9 In DBs m a n y - s o r t e d sets and m a n y - s o r t e d algebras are considered. "Many-sorted" means not necessarily one-sorted. Systems of data sets or data algebras are usually many-sorted. Algebraic operations on data appear when we deals with characteristics of objects. These characteristics are computed by formulas, using other, possibly observable, characteristics. This is the typical situation. Many-sorted algebras are met frequently in algebra. For instance, affine space is a twosorted algebra, a group together with its action on some linear space is also a two-sorted algebra. An automaton gives an example of three-sorted algebra, and so on. The general point of view on algebra as many-sorted algebra was suggested by A. Mal' cev, P. Higgins, G. Birkhoff and others (see [Mall,Hig,BL,BW]). G. Birkhoff has called such algebras heterogeneous. Let us pass to general definitions. First of all, fix a set of sorts F . Correspondingly, we consider the many-sorted set D -(Di, i ~ F ) . Each Di is a domain of the sort i. Denote by S2 a set of symbols of operations. Each o9 6 12 has a definite type r = r ( w ) = (il . . . . . in; j ) , where i, j 6 F . Such a symbol o9 is realized in D as an operation, i.e. a map og : Dil x . . . • Din ~

Dj.

In each algebra D all symbols o9 6 1"2 are assumed to be realized as operations 9 So, D is an 12-algebra. Given/-" and S2, m o r p h i s m s of algebras D --+ D ~ have the form 11~

"

-

(ls

i ~ F ) " D = (Di, i E F ) ~

D' = (D:, i ~ F ) ,

where each I ~ i ' D i ~ D~ is a map of sets. H o m o m o r p h i s m s of algebras are morphisms, which preserve operations. F o r / z = (#i, i ~ F ) and o9 e 1"2 this means that if r(og) = (il . . . . . in; j ) and a l e Dil . . . . . an ~- Din, then (al ...anog) lAj -- a l i

!

- lain . . .Un o9.

The multiplication of such many-sorted maps is defined componentwise, and the product of homomorphisms is a homomorphism. Sometimes instead of a #i we write alA. If all/zi are surjections (injections), then # is also surjection (injection). If all/Zi are bijections, then/~ is a bijection and # - l = (#j-1, i e / - ' ) . A bijective h o m o m o r p h i s m / z is an isomorphism. The kernel of a h o m o m o r p h i s m / z : D --+ D t has the form p = (/9i, i e F ) , where each t Pi is the kernel equivalence of the map lzi " D i ~ D i . A m a n y - s o r t e d equivalence p is a c o n g r u e n c e if it preserves all operations o9 e ~2. This means that if r(og) = (il . . . . . in; J), a l , a ~1 E Dil . . . . . an, a n E Din then !

alpilal,

!

9

anPi,,a n =:~ (al

.

a. n w. ) p.j ( a ~ l . .

a n 'o 9 )_ .


85

If p is a congruence in D, then one can consider the factor algebra D / p = ( D i / P i , i ~ F ) . The notions of subalgebra and Cartesian product of algebras are defined in a natural way. If, for example, D ~ = (D~, i 6 F ) are X2-algebras, c~ ~ I, then

I-I D~ = ( I-I D~, i ~ F) Ot

and for each r(og) = (il . . . .

in" j ) , if al 6 [-L D'~ ~1

an E I-I~ D ~. then

(al...anog)(ot) = a! (or)...an(ot)w. 1.1.2. Varieties. Varieties of algebras are defined by identities. Let us consider the manysorted case in more detail. Let X --- ( X i , i ~ F ) be a many-sorted set with the countable sets Xi. Starting from the set of symbols of operations S'2 we can construct terms over X. Denote the system of such terms by W -- (Wi, i ~ F ) . The inductive definition of W is as follows. All the sets Xi are contained in Wi, whose elements are terms of the sort i. If o9 ~ $2, r(og) = (il . . . . , in; j ) and Wl . . . . . Wn are terms of the sorts il . . . . . in, then wl . . . Who9 is the term of the sort j . If in S2 there are symbols of nullary operations (n = 0) of the sort i, then they also belong to Wi. The algebra W is, naturally, an S2-algebra, and it is called the absolutely free ,Q-algebra. Identities are formulas of the kind w = w ~, where w and w' are terms from W of the same sort, say i. Such a formula is fulfilled in an O - a l g e b r a D = (Di , i ~ F ) (holds in D), if for any h o m o m o r p h i s m / z : W --+ D there holds w m = w ~m . A set of identifies defines a variety of,Q-algebras, the class o f a l l algebras satisfying all identities o f a given set. In every variety 69 the set X = ( X i , i ~ F ) defines a free algebra, which is a factor algebra of the absolutely free algebra W. Birkhoff's theorem takes place also in the many-sorted case. A class O) is a variety, if and only if it is closed under Cartesian products, subalgebras a n d h o m o m o r p h i c images. Some variety 69 can be taken as an initial variety and one can classify various subvarieties and other axiomatizable classes in 69. If X = ( X i , i ~ F ) is a many-sorted set, then a free algebra in 69, associated with this X, is also denoted by W = ( W i, i ~ F ) . Subvarieties in 69 are defined by the identifies of the form w ---- w ~, where w and w I are terms of the same sort in this new W. Fully characteristic congruences in W correspond to closed sets of identifies. For an arbitrary algebra D = (Di, i ~ F ) from the variety 69, we can consider the set of homomorphisms Hom(W, D). We regard h o m o m o r p h i s m s / z : W --+ D as rows. Let us explain this idea. First, take a map /Z - -

(/Zi,

i ~ F) :X

=

( X i , i ~ F ) --~ D = ( D i , i ~ F ) .

Each map of such kind can be viewed as a row X Xk / z = ( / . z l . . . . . IZk ) c D 1 • . . . x D k ,

86

B. Plotkin

where k - IFI. In turn, each ll, i G D Xi is also a row. To a row /z corresponds homom o r p h i s m / z : W --~ D, which is an element from the set Horn(W, D). Elements from Horn(W, D) can be also regarded as rows. Each r o w / z first defines values of variables in algebra D, and then it calculates values of terms for the given values of variables. 1.1.3. Group o f a u t o m o r p h i s m s a n d semigroup o f e n d o m o r p h i s m s . For each algebra D = (Di, i ~ F ) there is a group Aut D and a semigroup End D. In order to construct Aut D we denote by Si the group of all substitutions (permutations) of the set Di and let S be the Cartesian product of all Si, i ~ F . Aut D is a subgroup in S, consisting of all g = (gi, i gi I

gin

F ) 6 S, which preserve operations of the set 12, i.e. (al ...anw)gJ = a 1 . . . a n w. The semigroup End D is built in a similar way. We pay particular attention to the semigroup End W. Its elements are determined by maps S = (Si, i ~ F ) : X = ( X i ,

i ~ F ) -+ W = (Wi, i ~ F )

which assign terms (O-terms) to variables.

1.2. Algebraic logic 1.2.1. First-order O-logic. We again consider the many-sorted case with a set of sorts F . Let X be a set of variables, with stratification map n : X -+ F . This map is surjective and divides X in sets Xi, i ~ F . Each Xi consists of the variables of the sort i, where n ( x ) = i is the sort of variable x. So, we have the many-sorted set X = (Xi, i ~ F ) . Let us fix a set of symbols of operations ~ ; to each w 6 $2 corresponds a F-type r, and we select the variety O of H-algebras. With this O we associate a logic, which is called Ologic. Let W = (Wi, i ~ F ) be the free over X algebra in O. We fix also a set of symbols of relations q~; each ~0 ~ q~ has a type r = r(qg) = ( i l . . . . . in). The symbol ~o is realized in the algebra D -- (Di, i ~ F ) as a subset in the Cartesian product Dil x . . . x Din. Now, we can construct the set of formulas of O-logic. First, we define elementary formulas. They have the form @(Wl . . . . . tOn)

where r(qg) = ( i l . . . . . in), wl ~ 1 ~ . . . . , Wn ~ Win. Denote the set of all elementary formulas by q~ W. Let L = {v, A,--,, 3x, x 6 X} be a signature of logical symbols and we construct the absolutely free algebra over q~ W of this signature. The corresponding algebra of formulas is denoted by L q~ W. Among the formulas of the set L q~ W there is a part, whose elements are logical axioms. These elements are the usual axioms for calculus with functional symbols. Terms in this calculus are O-terms. The rules of inference are standard: (1) M o d u s ponens: u and u ~ v imply v, (2) Generalization rule: u implies Y x u . Here u, v ~ L q~ W, u --~ v stands for -,u v v, and Y x u means - , 3 x - , u .


87

Formulas together with axioms and rules of inference constitute the O-logic of thefirstorder. In particular, we can speak about the logic of group theory, logic of ring theory, etc. A set of formulas is said to be closed if it contains all the axioms and is invariant with respect to the rules of inference. With each 9 E q0 of type r = (il . . . . . in) we associate some set of different variables x ~ , . . . , x.~ . Then we have a formula ~p(x~ , . . . , x~n )' which is called a basic one. All variables included into basic formulas are called attributes. The set of attributes is denoted by X0, the set of basic formulas is denoted by q~X0. This is a small part of the set of elementary formulas q0 W. In order to apply logic in DBs, we need the logic to be a logic with equalities. An equality is a formula of the kind w - w r, where w and w ~ have the same sort in W. Such a formula can be regarded either as an equality or as an identity. In a logic with equalities the axioms of equality are added to the set of axioms of the logic. Equalities are added to elementary formulas. In logic with equalities the absolutely free algebra of formulas also can be constructed. We denote it by the same abbreviation Lq0 W. 1.2.2. Axiomatic definition of quantifiers. Quantifiers are logical symbols, but they also can be defined as operations of Boolean algebra:

Given a Boolean algebra H, an existential quantifier 3 is a map 3: H ~ H subject to the following conditions: (1) 30 - 0, (2) a ~< _qa, (3) 3(a A 3b) -- 3a A 3b, where a, b 6 H , 0 is the zero element in H . Every quantifier is a closure operator in H . Different existential quantifiers can be nonpermutable. Besides, an existential quantifier is additive: 3(a v b) = 3a v 3b. The set of all a E H , such that 3a = a is a subalgebra of the Boolean algebra H . A universal quantifier u --+ H is defined dually: (1)'v'l - 1, (2)u ~a, (3) u v Yb) = 'v'a x/Vb. Analogously we have: u A b) = Ya A Yb. There is known correspondence between the existential and universal quantifiers, which allows to pass from one to another. 1.2.3. Halmos algebras. Algebraic logic constructs and studies algebraic structures of logic. For example, with the propositional calculus there are associated Boolean algebras, with the intuitionistic propositional calculus Heyting algebras are connected. There are three approaches to algebraization of the first-order logic, namely, cylindric Tarski algebras [HMT], polyadic Halmos algebras [Hall and categorical Lawvere's approach [Law 1,Law2]. These approaches are based on deep analysis of calculus. 3 There are also algebraic equivalents of nonclassical first-order logic [Ge]. Similar constructions are developed for other logics [Dis 1]. 3

As a rule, will use the word "calculus" for the first-order O-logic.

B. Plotkin

88

We consider corresponding algebraizations for the case of 69-logic. This generalization is necessary for DBs with data type 69, and for algebra itself. Let us proceed from a fixed scheme, consisting of a set X = (Xi, i ~ F), a variety 69, and of the algebra W free in 6) over X. We also take into account the semigroup End W, whose elements are considered as additional operations. DEFINITION 1.1. Given a scheme (X, 69), an algebra H is a Halmos algebra in this scheme, if: (1.1) H is a Boolean algebra. (1.2) The semigroup End W acts on H as a semigroup of Boolean endomorphisms. (1.3) The action of quantifiers of the form 3(Y), Y C X is defined. These actions are connected by the following conditions: (2.1) 3(0) acts trivially. (2.2) 3(Y1 U Y2) = 3(Y1):zi(Y2). (2.3) sl 3(Y) = s2:l(Y), if sl, s2 6 End W and sl (x) = sz(x) for x 6 X \ Y. (2.4) 3(Y)s = s 3 ( s - l y ) for s 6 End W, if the following conditions are fulfilled: (1) s(xl) = s(x2) 6 Y implies Xl = x2, (2) If x r s - l Y, then A s ( x ) N Y = 0. Here, s - l y = {x I s(x) ~ Y} and A s ( x ) is a support of the element w = s(x) E W, i.e. the set of all x ~ X, which is involved in the expression of the element w.

All Halmos algebras in the given scheme form a variety, denoted by HA~-). We will deal with such Halmos algebras and sometimes call them HAs specialized in 6). In the next three subsections we will introduce examples of Halmos algebras. 1.2.3.1. Given D 6 69, consider Hom(W, D). Denote by M o the set of all subsets in Hom(W, D), i.e. M o = Sub(Hom(W, D)). The set M o is a Boolean algebra. If A c MD, # 6 Hom(W, D), s 6 End W, then define # s by the rule # s ( x ) = ~ ( s ( x ) ) . An action of the semigroup End W in M o is defined by

lz E s A C~ lzs E A. For Y C X we define/z 6 3(Y)A, if there is v: W ~ D, v ~ A, such that/z(x) = v(x) for every x 6 X \ Y. This defines the action of quantifiers in Mo. It can be checked that all the axioms of Halmos algebra are fulfilled in M o and it is the first example of HAt0. For h from a Halmos algebra H, denote its support by Ah.

Ah = {x E X, 3xh C h}. If Ah is finite, then the element h is called an element of finite support. In the previous subsection we used supports of elements of the algebra W, while here we regard supports of elements of Halmos algebra. In every Halmos algebra H all its elements with finite support constitute a subalgebra. This subalgebra is called a locally finite part of H. A Halmos algebra H is locally finite, if all its elements have finite support.


89

1.2.3.2. Denote by Vo the locally finite part of the Halmos algebra M o . Here A ~ V o if for some finite subset Y C X and elements/z, v ~ Hom(W, D), the equality/z(x) = v ( x ) for every x 6 Y implies that lz 6 A C~ v 6 A .

In other words, belonging of a row to the set A is checked on a finite part of X. 1.2.3.3. Now let us consider the main example: the H A o - a l g e b r a of the first order calculus. Suppose that all Xi from the set X = ( X i , i ~ F ) are infinite. Besides that, the symbols of relations q~ are added to the scheme and we have the algebra of formulas L q~ W. Variables occur in the formulas. These occurrences can be free or bound. Let us define the action of elements s 6 End W on the set L q~ W. If u is a formula and Xl . . . . . Xn occur free in it, then we substitute them by SXl . . . . . SXn, and we do it for all free occurrences of variables. So we get su. For example, it follows from this definition that if u = qg(wl . . . . . Wn) is an elementary formula, then su = qg(swl . . . . . SWn). However, the definition doesn't give a representation of the semigroup End W on the set L ~ W. Simple examples show that the condition ( s l s z ) u = sl (szu) need not be fulfilled. Let us define equivalence p on the set Lq5 W by the rule: u p v if u and v differ only by the names of bound variables. Take the quotient set L ~ W / p -- L ~ W , and call this transition quotienting by renaming o f b o u n d variables. Elements of L q~ W we also call formulas, but these formulas are regarded up to renaming of bound variables. It is easy to see that the equivalence p is compatible with the signature, but it is not compatible with the action of elements from End W. Therefore all operations of the set L -- {v, A,--,, 3x, x 6 X} are defined on Lq~ X, but the action of elements from End W has to be defined separately. It is done as follows. Let u be a formula, Xl . . . . . Xn are all its free variables, and take SXl . . . . . SXn, s ~ End W. We say that u is open for s if there are no bound variables which occur in the sets A s x l , . . . , A s x n . For each u we denote by 17 the corresponding class of equivalent elements. For s 6 End W we always can find some formula u t in the class 17 which is open for s. Then we set s17 = su I. It is easy to see that if we have another formula u ft in 17 which is opened for s, then su rpsu" and su t = s u " . Hence the definition of s17 is correct. This rule gives the representation of the semigroup End W as a semigroup of transformations of the set of formulas Lq~ W. From now on we work with the set of formulas L q~ W. Axioms and rules of inference are related to this set too. They are standard, as before. Now we pass to the L i n d e n b a u m - T a r s k i algebra. We have an equivalence r which is defined as follows: firfi ifthe formula (17 ~ fi) A (fi ~ 17) is derivable. It can be verified that r is congruence on L ~ W, and this r is also compatible with the action of the semigroup End W. Denote by U the result of the quotienting of L q~ W by r. Define an equivalence r / o n Lq~ W by the rule: urlv r 17rfi. Since p C r/, the set U = L ~ W / r can be identified with L 9 W / 7 . It is important to emphasize that the equivalence 77 can also be defined by means of the Lindenbaum-Tarski scheme and U is the L i n d e n b a u m - T a r s k i algebra. It can be proved that:

90

B. Plotkin (1) U is a Boolean algebra for the operations v , A, --,; (2) The semigroup End W acts on U as a semigroup of endomorphisms of this algebra; (3) All 3x for different x commute. This allows to define in U quantifiers 3(Y) over all YCX. All the above gives the following result:

THEOREM 1.2. The algebra U with the given operations is an algebra in HAco. This is the syntactical approach to the definition of the Halmos algebra of first-order 69logic. This approach is due to Z. Diskin [Dis 1]. There is also semantical approach, which is described in [BP13]. Both approaches give one and the same result. Finally, we can use the verbal congruence of the variety HAt-), and obtain once more the same algebra U. 1.2.4. Homomorphisms of Halmos algebras. We start from a very important feature of the algebra U, and note first of all, that this algebra is locally finite. Take the basic set 9 X0 in the algebra of formulas L q~ W, and let U0 be a corresponding basic set in U. The set U0 generates the algebra U. THEOREM 1.3. Let H be an arbitrary Halmos algebra, and let ~ ' ~ Xo --+ H be a map, such thatfor every u -- tp(Xl . . . . . Xn) ~ ~ X o we have A~(u) C {Xl . . . . . Xn}. Such ~ gives a map ~ 9Uo ~ H and the last map uniquely extends up to a homomorphism ~ 9U --+ H. Given a model (D, q~, f ) , D 6 0 , take the special case, when H = Vo. Define ~" = f " ~ X o ~ VD by the rule: if u - qg(xl . . . . . Xn) ~ ~ X o , then" f ( u ) - - {#, # e Hom(W, D), ( # ( x l ) . . . . . #(xn)) e f(~0)}. Then A f ( u ) = {xl . . . . . x,} and we have a homomorphism

f.u

v,,.

From this definition follows, that if u = tp(wl . . . . . w,,) is an elementary formula, then f ( u ) - - {#, # e Hom(W, D), ( # ( w , ) . . . . . #(wn)) e fOP)}So, for every model (D, q~, f ) , D ~ O), we have a canonical homomorphism f " U -+ VD, and it can be proved that every homomorphism U -+ VD is, in fact, some f . Now we can say that f ( u ) for every u ~ U is the value of u in the model D. If f (u) -- 1, it means that u holds in D. Now some words about kernels of homomorphisms in the variety HA(-). If a : H -+ H ' is a homomorphism in HAt.), then we have two kernels, viz. the coimage of zero and the coimage of the unit. The coimage of zero is an ideal, the coimage of the unit is a filter. A subset T of H is a filter if (1) a/~ b ~ T if a and b belongs to T. (2) From a ~ T and b ~ H follows a v b c T.


91

(3) V(Y)a ~ T if a ~ T, Y C X. The definition of ideal is dual. For every filter T we can consider a quotient algebra H~ T, which is simultaneously H / F , where F is the ideal defined by the rule: h 6 T if and only if h 6 F. If T is a subset of H , then the filter in H , generated by T, consists of elements of the form V(X)al A . . - A V(X)an V b,

ai ~ T, b E H.

Every filter is closed under existential quantifiers, while every ideal is closed under universal quantifiers. Besides, it can be proved that every ideal and every filter is closed under the action of the semigroup End W. THEOREM 1.4 (see, e.g., [BP13]). A set T C H is a filter in H, if and only if it satisfies the conditions: (1) 1 E T (2) I f a ~ T, a ---~ b ~ T, then b c T. (3) I f a c T, then u ~ T, Y C X. Here, a --+ b -- --,a v b. We will consider two rules of inference in HAs: (1) From a and a --+ b follows b. (2) From a follows V(Y)a, Y C X. If H is locally finite, then the second rule can be replaced by (2') From a follows Vxa, x c X. For every set T, one can consider the set of elements which are derived from T. THEOREM 1.5. If T is a set in H, which contains a unit, then the filter, generated by T, is a set of all h ~ H, which are derived from T. The notion of derivability in HAs agrees with the notion of derivability of formulas in logic. The notion of filter in HAs corresflonds to the notion of closed set of formulas. Given a model (D, q~, f ) , we have f " U ~ VD. The corresponding filter K e r f we can consider as the elementary theory (O-theory) of the given model. THEOREM 1.6. Let T be a subset in U, let T ~ = K be the axiomatizable class of models defined by the set T (not empty), and let T" = K' be all axioms o f K in U (a closure of T). Then T" is the filter in U generated by T. 1.2.5. Equalities in Halmos algebras. Cylindric algebras. An equality in Halmos algebra H is not a formula, but an element in H of the form w -- w t, where w, w t 6 W and have the same sort. DEFINITION 1.7. H ~ H A o is an algebra with equalities, when all w ---- w t are defined as elements in H and the following axioms hold:

92

B. Plotkin

(1) s ( w -- w t) = ( s w -- s w ' ) , s ~ End W, (2) (w ------w) = l, w ~ W, I I ! (3) ( w l -- w~) /x . . . A (Wn -- w u) < Wl . . . WnO9 =- Wl . . . ww~o if 09 ~ I2 is of the appropriate type, (4) s X a A ( w -- w ~) < s xw,a, a ~ H , s wx transforms x into w of the same sort and leaves y ~ x fixed. In the algebra VD the equality is defined by the rule: w -- w' is the set of all/x: W --+ D, for which w u = w tu is satisfied in D. In the algebra U with equalities, the symbol - is added to the set O, and the standard axioms of equality are added to the initial axioms of t0-1ogic. In this case the set 9 can be empty. Such an algebra U arises from to-logic with equalities. Each equality w ---- w' in H is considered as a new nullary operation, therefore a subalgebra of an algebra with equalities should contain all the elements w -- w t. The same remark is valid for homomorphisms of algebras with equalities. If H is an algebra with equalities, then so is H ~ T , where T is a filter. DEFINITION 1.8. A Boolean algebra H is a cylindric algebra in the scheme (X, 69) if: (1) To every x 6 X an existential quantifier 3x of the Boolean algebra H is assigned, and all these quantifiers commute. (2) The nullary operations dw,w,, where w, w ' ~ W , which are called diagonals, lie in H. (3) The following conditions hold: (a) dw,w = 1. (b) If x ~ Aw, x ~ A w ' , then 3 x ( d x , w A dx,w,) = dw,w,. (c) If x ~ A w and h is arbitrary element in H, then 3 x ( h A dx,w) A 3 x ( - , h m dx,w) ~0.

There is also a condition (d) in which transformations of variables are hidden, (see [Ci2] for the details). The Halmos algebras with equalities U , M D and VD can also be viewed as cylindric algebras. The following theorem holds THEOREM 1.9. G i v e n X = ( X i , i ~ F'), all Xi b e i n g infinite, the c a t e g o r y o f l o c a l l y f i n i t e H Ae) with e q u a l i t i e s a n d the c a t e g o r y o f locally f i n i t e cylindric a l g e b r a s with the s a m e X a n d tO are e q u i v a l e n t categories.

This theorem for pure first-order logic was proved in [Ga]. The proof for the O-logic requires insignificant modifications. Along with HAs, cylindrical algebras can be used in databases. However, an important role is played by the semigroup End W in the signature, and therefore we place the emphasis on Halmos algebras. See [Ci2,Fe].


93

1.3. The categorical approach to algebraic logic 1.3.1. Algebraic theories. In this subsection we consider another approach to the algebraization of first-order logic, specialized in some variety 69. We will speak about relational algebras, which are tied with the idea of doctrines in categorical logic of Lawvere [Law 1, Law2,Law3], see also [Benl] and [BPll]. We start from the notion of algebraic theory. It is a special kind of category T. The objects of this category are of the type r -- (il, . . . , in), is E F , where F , as before, is a set of sorts. The arity n can be also zero. It is assumed that the set of morphisms contains projectors S s" r --+ is, which allow to represent every object r = (il . . . . . in) as a product r -- il x "'" x in in the category T. An algebra D in the theory T is a covariant functor D : T ~ Set, which is compatible with products in T. For each i 6 F , taken as an object, we have D ( i ) = Di, and so we can take D = (Di, i F ) . If further o9: r --+ j is a morphism in T, then we have: D(o9) : D(z')--- Dil •

x Din --+ D j .

This is an operation in D of the type (il . . . . . in, j ) . All algebras in the theory T form a variety 69 = Alg T, which depends on T. On the other hand, for every variety 69 there can be constructed a theory T, leading to the given 69. 1.3.2. Relational algebras. We denote by Bool the category of Boolean algebras, and let S u b : S e t --+ Bool be the functor, that assigns to every set M the Boolean algebra of all subsets of M. This is a contravariant functor. Consider the composition of functors D : T --+ Set and Sub: Set --+ Bool. Then we have the contravariant functor (Sub o D ) : T --+ Bool. For every r = (il . . . . . in) the algebra (Subo D ) ( r ) is the Boolean algebra of all subsets in D i • "'" • D i n . The functor (Sub o D) is an example of a relational algebra, connected to the algebra D, and we denote this algebra by VD = (Sub o D). It plays the same role as VD in Halmos algebras. Let us turn now to the general definition. A relational algebra R in the theory T is defined as a contravariant functor

R : T --+ Bool, subject to some additional conditions. It is required that for every c~: r --+ r ~ in T along with the homomorphism of Boolean algebras or. = R(ot) : R ( r ~) --+ R ( r ) , there exists a conjugate map, which we denote by or* = R~(ot) : R ( r ) --+ R(r~). The map ct* is not a homomorphism of Boolean algebras, but it preserves zero element and addition. Taking R I (r) = R ( r ) , we consider R I as a covariant functor. If now we define 3(tr) = c~.c~* : R ( r ) --+ R ( r ) ,

B. Plotkin

94

then 3(o0 is an existential quantifier of the Boolean algebra R ( r ) . We define now some new operation. Let rl and r2 be two objects in T and let rl x r2 be the product in T. For every a E R ( r l ) and b c R(r2) we define an element a • b 6 R(rl • r2). We do it in the following way: let ~1 : Z'l x 772 ~ rl and ~2 : rl • z'2 ~ z'2 be the projectors, corresponding rl x r2. Then we have:

(~1),

: R ( r l ) --+ R(rl x r2),

(7/'2), : R(r2)

--+ R(rl x r2).

Define a x b = ( r r l ) , ( a ) A (Jr2),(b). ' then, for every a 6 R(r~) and It can be proved, that, given c~ 9r l --+ r 1' and # ' r 2 --+ r 2, b ~ R(r~) (or x f l ) , ( a x b ) = c~,(a) x / 3 , ( b ) . This is a property of the functor R. Such property for the functor R' need not always hold, and we include it into the definition o f relational algebra as an additional axiom. This axiom is as follows: for all a E R ( r l ) and b e R(r2) holds (c~ x/5)* (a x b) = c~*(a) x I3" (b).

(*)

All the above gives the definition of a relational algebra. It can be verified that Vo = (Sub o D) is an example of a relational algebra. Summarizing, we can say that a relational algebra is a contravariant functor R: T ---> Bool such that there exists an appropriate covariant functor R~ : T --+ Bool, satisfying the axiom (,). We can also speak about relational algebras of first-order calculus, i.e. algebras of the type U. The construction of such U can be accomplished with the help of the Theorem 1.1 0 of this section. We sketch here the approach to a proof of this result. As we know, for every variety O there exists an algebraic theory T, such that O = Alg (T). For the construction of T we must take X = (Xi, i ~ F ) , where all Xi are countable. Let W be the free algebra in 69 over the given X. On the basis of this W we construct the theory T. The algebra W can be considered as a functor W: T ---> Set. A special approach allows to take another functor T --+ 69 (contravariant one) for the same W, which we also denote by W. In this case W ( r ) is the subalgebra in W, generated by a set of variables connected with the object r. The additional condition requires that for every i E F in the set of operations s there exist nullary operations of the type i. This new W allows to consider an antiisomorphism of the semigroups End r and End W ( r ) . On the other hand, if R is a relational algebra, then for every c~:r --+ r we have c~, : R ( r ) ~ R ( r ) . This gives a representation of the semigroup End r as a semigroup of endomorphisms of Boolean algebra R ( r ) with contravariant action. Hence the semigroup End W ( r ) acts in R ( r ) in a usual way as a semigroup of endomorphisms.


95

The proof of the following result is based on the remarks above. THEOREM 1.1 0 [Vo2,Ro]. Given X = ( X i , i ~ F) and O, all Xi being infinite, the category of locally finite Halmos algebras with equalities and the category of relational algebras are equivalent. In particular, from the Halmos algebra U we can get a relational algebra of the type U. We see that all approaches to algebraization of first-order logic are equivalent. 1.3.3. Changing the variety O. We want to know what happens with H A o when the variety 69 is changed. In the case when O I is a subvariety of 69, every algebra in H A o , can be considered as an algebra in H A o . This gives an injection of the variety H A o , into H A o as a subvariety. The O-identities of O f can be transformed into identities of H A o , in H A o . On the other hand, if U is the algebra of calculus in H A o and U I is the algebra of calculus in H A o , , then we have a canonical epimorphism U ~ U I, and the kernel of this epimorphism can be well described if we consider algebras with equalities [BP13]. Let now T and T I be two algebraic theories. A functor ~ : T ~ T f is called a morphism of theories if ~p(r) = r f for every object r and there is compatibility with projectors. If D : T f --+ Set is an algebra in Alg T f, then D~p : T --+ Set is an algebra in Alg T. So we have a functor Alg T f ~ Alg T. Also, if Vo is (Sub o D) : T I --+ Bool, then Voo = VD ~P is (Sub o D ) ~ : T --+ Bool. Let now R : T f --+ Bool be an arbitrary relational algebra. It can be proved that R O : T --+ Bool is also relational algebra. So, a morphism ~p : T --+ T f gives a functor

lp* :Rel(T I) --+ RelT, where Rel(T) is the category of relational algebras in T. Let now O be a variety and O I be its subvariety. We can construct theories T and T f with a morphism ~ p : r --* r I. This morphism gives an injection O*:Rel(r I) --+ Rel(r), which is compatible with the injection H A o , --~ H A o , considered before. 1.3.4. Generalizations. There are two directions: the generalization of the notion of algebra on the one hand, and of logic on the other hand. First, we explore the notion of algebra. One of the approaches to its generalization, which uses the algebraic theory T, is based on the idea to take some arbitrary topos 3 instead of the category Set in the definition of algebra. A topos is a category, which is in some sense close to the category of sets [Jo,Gol, MacL,BP13]. We can, for example, consider the topos 2 of fuzzy sets, where fuzzy set is defined as a fuzzy quotient set of a usual set.

96

B. Plotkin

If O is a variety of algebras, then for O we take the theory T and consider functors D : T --+ ,~,. So we have fuzzy O-algebras. They may be fuzzy groups, fuzzy rings and so on.

Now we generalize the notion of relational algebra. For every object of the topos the system of its subobjects form a Heyting algebra which is a generalization of Boolean algebra, connected with intuitionistic logic [Gol]. This gives a contravariant functor Sub : ,~ Heyt, where Heyt is the category of Heyting algebras. Having at the same time an "algebra" D : T --+ ,~ we can construct the composition (Sub o D) : T --+ Heyt. It is an example of relational algebra, associated with intuitionistic logic. A relational algebra in intuitionistic logic is a functor R: T --->Heyt, satisfying some special conditions. The presence of the theory T here means that we consider relational algebras, specialized in the variety Alg T. Some yeas ago, see [BP13], a problem was stated concerning generalization of Theorem 1.9 for arbitrary, not only classical, logics. This problem is solved by Z. Diskin [Dis 1] in sufficiently general situation, including also modalities. Instead of categories Bool and Heyt, he takes an appropriate category L and defines relational algebras of the type R : T --+ L. This definition uses doctrines [KR] in categorical logic. Halmos algebras, associated with L and Alg T = O, are also defined. In these terms the solution of the problem is given. Besides, there is constructed some logical calculus, connected with L. For this calculus a Lindenbaum-Tarski algebra, which is a generalization of a Halmos algebra with given L, is built. See also [ANS,BP,Ne,Ni, WBT,Man].

2. Algebraic model of databases 2.1. Passive databases 2.1.1. Preliminaries. We distinguish passive and active DBs. To be more precise we speak about corresponding models of DBs. Passive DBs have poor algebraic structure, while the structure of active ones is sufficiently rich. Passive DBs are simpler and not so sophisticated; active DBs are much more complicated, but they are also much more interesting. There are natural transitions from passive DBs to active ones. We proceed from a definite database scheme. It includes permanent and varying parts. Permanentpart consists of a variety O, which serves as data type, and a system of variables X. In fact, this is the scheme of a HA. The varying part consists of the set of symbols of relations q~. We recall briefly the main notions, described in the first section. All algebras from O are S2-algebras where S2 is a set of symbols of operations. All algebras are generally speaking many-sorted as well as the set of variables X. The set of sorts F is simultaneously a set of names of domains. Each algebra D a 69 has the form D = (Di, i ~ F), where Di are domains of D. There is a map n :X ~ F and for each i a F the set Xi is the set of all variables of the sort i. Then X = (Xi, i ~ F). Let W = (Wi, i ~ F ) be the free Oalgebra, corresponding to X. This is the algebra of O-terms. For each operation co a 12 its type has the form r = r(w) = (il . . . . . in, j). The type of a relation ~p 6 9 has the form r = r(~0) = (il . . . . . in), all i, j ~/-'.


97

If D -- (Di, i ~ f') is an algebra in 69, then the set q~ can be realized in D. Let f be a function embodying this realization. If q9 ~ q~ and r(~o) = ( i l , . . . , in), then f(~0) is a subset in the Cartesian product Dil x ... • Din. This subset can be represented as a table. To a tuple (il . . . . . in) we assign a set of different variables- attributes (xi~ . . . . . xin). Here i~ and i~ may coincide, but the corresponding xi~ and xi~ are different. The table f(qg) consists of rows (functions) r, such that r(xi~) E Di~. If o9 6 12 and r(og) = (il . . . . . in, j ) , then the operation co is realized as a map co: Dil x ... • Din ~ Dj. All this was already mentioned in the previous section. Let us note that in the case of DBs a variety 69 is defined by identities, used for verification of correctness of operations execution in algebras from the data type 69. Recall that the set of symbols of operations ~ defines a Halmos algebra U in the given scheme. The algebra Lq~ W is built over the set of formulas of first-order O-logic. Elements of U are formulas as well, but they are considered up to a special equivalence (see 1.2.3.3). An algebra D 6 69 in the same scheme also determines a HA, denoted by VD. It is defined on the set of subsets of the set Hom(W, D). In turn Horn(W, D) can be regarded

I--[irf" Dixi or as 1-Ix~x Dx, Dx -- Dn(x). Thus, elements from VD can be treated as relations. In the previous section we defined the notion of support of a subset of Hom(W, D). All relations under consideration have finite supports. We are dealing with relational databases. Queries in a relational DB, connected with O-logic, are written by formulas from the language L q~ W. One and the same query may correspond to different formulas. Thus, a query should be viewed as a class of equivalent formulas. The equivalence arising here, is the same that appeared in the definition of the Halmos algebra U. Now it is clear, that the algebra U may be considered as an algebra of queries to a D B. It is the universal algebra of queries; in a sense it does not depend on data algebra D. Given D ~ 0 , the algebra VD is the universal algebra of replies to queries. Let FD be the set of all realizations f of the set 9 in D. FD is easily equipped with the structure of a Boolean algebra. We have a triple (FD, U, VD). A canonical homomorphism f " U --+ VD corresponds to every f ~ FD. It is easy to verify that the transition ^. FD --+ Hom(U, VD) is a bijection of sets. Let us define an operation , : F D • U ~ VD, setting f 9 u = f ( u ) . It leads to a 9-automaton (see 2.2.1) as

A t m D = ( FD , U, VD ), which is simultaneously treated as an universal active database f o r a given data algebra D. Elements from FD are called states of the database Atm D, and f 9 u is a reply to a query u in a state f . The transition from a query to a reply is realized by a homomorphism of HAs. We remark here, that the structure of Atm D depends on the algebra D and on the fixed scheme. In DBs this structure is used as the universal active DB. All the other active DBs are defined on the based of this universal one. Besides that, this structure has applications in some problems of algebra and model theory [BP15].

B. Plotkin

98

If u is considered as a formula in the language L q~W, then we also write f 9u, assuming f 9 u = f 9 t7 (fi is the corresponding element in the algebra U). An element f 9 u can be defined independently from the transition to the Halmos algebra U. A given a homomorphism of algebras 3 : D' --+ D defines a map ~ : Hom(W, D') ~ Hom(W, D) by the rule: if/x 6 Hom(W, D'), then 6(u) =/zS. The map 6 defines, in turn, a homomorphism of Boolean algebras

~, : VD-~ VD, by the rule: # 6 8,(A) if and only if #6 ~ A, A ~ VD. It is proved that if 6 : D ' ~ D is an epimorphism, then 8,: VD --~ VD, is a monomorphism of HAs. Let 6" D' --+ D be an epimorphism. For every f ~ FD we consider f ' U ~ VD and the composition of this homomorphism with 6," Vo --+ VD,. We have f 6 , " U ~ VD,. An element f'~* ~ FD' defined by the condition f~* - f s , corresponds to this homomorphism. The map 6" : Fo --~ FD, is a monomorphism of Boolean algebras. The pair of maps (6", 8,) determines a transition Atm D --~ Atm D', and the following condition is satisfied:

( f , u)~* = f** * u. We have here an embedding of universal DBs, which does not change the algebra of queries U. Let us consider now a situation when the algebra U is also changed. Given homomorphisms (" U' ~ U, f " U ---+ VD and 8," VD "-> VD', we can compose

vi ,. Once more we denote by f** the element of FD, which corresponds to this homomorphism. We preserve notation in this more general case. A triple (6", (, 8,) is associated with the transition Atm D --+ Atm D' according to the condition

f***u--(f

*ur ~*

ucU'

~

f ~FD

9

2.1.2. Passive databases. A database is a system which can accept, store and process information, and which allows as well as the querying of its contents. A DB contains initial information, which is used when constructing a reply to a query to the DB. This information can be formalized as a passive DB. An active DB reflects the processing of a query in order to get a reply to this query. It is possible to query either directly the data stored in the DB, or some information which can be somehow derived from the basic one represented by the source data.


99

Now we concentrate our attention on passive DBs. A passive DB assumes the presence of a data algebra. Operations of this algebra are used in data processing. It is also supposed, that in a passive DB there is a set of symbols (names) of relations and a set of possible states of this DB. States realize symbols of relations as relations in the data algebra. These states can be selected according to some conditions. DEFINITION 2.1. A passive database is a triple (D, q~, F) where D 9 tO is a data algebra, is a set of symbols of relations, F is a set of feasible states of a database. Recall that elements of F are realizations f of the set q~ in D. For each f e F there is a model (D, q~, f ) . A passive DB is the set of such models, D and ~ being fixed. It is clear that one can consider the case of empty set of operations I2. In this case D is not an algebra, but a many-sorted set. Recall that, if (D, 4~, f ) and (D', qs, f ' ) are two models with one and the same 4~, then a homomorphism of models (D ~, ~, f ' ) ~ (D, ~, f ) is a homomorphism 3 : D' --+ D of algebras from 69, which is compatible with all relations of the set 45 under the map f ' --+ f . This definition of a homomorphism of models is easily translated into the language of HAs. As we know, the algebra of formulas L 4~W contains the set of elementary formulas c/, W. Among the elementary formulas there is a set of basic formulas q~X0, where X0 is the set of attributes. Basic formulas have the form

where all attributes x~, . . . , x~ are distinct and compatible with the type of the formula q). Regarding basic formulas as elements of the algebra U we can state that these elements generate U. PROPOSITION 2.2. A homomorphism ~ : D' --+ D together with a transition f ' --+ f defines a homomorphism of models if and only if for every basic element u e U' there is an inclusion

f ' * u C ( f ' u ) ~*. Let us consider now homomorphisms of models with varying q~. We have (D, 4~, f ) and (D', 4~', f ' ) and, correspondingly, Halmos algebras U and U'. Take a homomorphism of algebras 6 : D ~ --+ D and a homomorphism of Halmos algebras ( :U'--+ U. DEFINITION 2.3. A pair (3, () defines a homomorphism of models (D ~, q~', f ' ) --+ (D, ~, f ) if for every basic element u c U ~ there is an inclusion f ' 9 u C ( f 9 ur ~*. It makes more sense to speak of epimorphisms 6 in this definitionl However, we need this restriction not always.

100

B. Plotkin

DEFINITION 2.4. Two models (D, q~, f ) and (D', q~', f l ) are called similar under the map f ' --+ f , if there is an isomorphism of algebras 6 : D ~ -+ D and homomorphisms : U' --+ U, ( ' : U --+ U', such that for any basic elements u E U', u' ~ U hold

(f' * u) C ( f * u~) a*"

I * .' c (f' 9

The notion of similarity of models generalizes the notion of isomorphism of models. We will use it in the sequel. In passive databases, D, q~ and F can be changed. It leads to a category of DBs. 2.1.3. Category of passive databases. Let us define a category whose objects are passive databases. If (D, q~, F ) and (D', ~ ' , F ' ) are two passive DBs, then a morphism of the first one into the second is a map ct : F --+ F ' , an epimorphism 6 : D' -+ D and a homomorphism : U' -+ U, such that for every f 6 F and u 6 U' f a 9 u = ( f 9 u~) a* . It is evident that a category really arises here, and besides that the pair (6, ( ) under the map f a --+ f always defines a homomorphism of models (D', q~', f ~ ) --+ (D, q~, f ) . We translate now the notion of morphism of passive databases to a language which is free from HAs. We proceed from the algebras L ~ ' W and Lq~ W of formulas, and for the first one we take a system of basic formulas q~' X o. ' Recall that a map v" 4 ' X 0' -+ L q~ W, is called correct, i f f o r e v e r y u -- qg(xl, . .., Xn) ~- 4 ' X 0' all free variables from the formulas v(u) lie in the set {Xl . . . . . Xn }. We know from the previous section that every correct map induces a homomorphism ( : U ' --+ U, and every ~ is induced by some correct v. Given (D, q~, F), (D', ~ ' , F'), c ~ ' F --+ F ' , 6" D' --+ D and a correct map v'q~ , X 0f --+ L q~ W, we assume that for any u E ~ 1 X 0, and f 6 F the following formula holds fa.

u -- ( f 9 uV) a* .

It is easy to check that the transition v --+ ~" leads to a morphism of DBs, and every morphism of DBs can be obtained in such a way. However, this possibility does not allow yet to get rid from HAs while defining a category of passive DBs. The reason is that we can not well define composition of correct maps. 2.1.4. Similarity ofpassive databases. The notion of similarity of passive DBs plays an essential role in the problem of DB equivalence. DEFINITION 2.5. Two passive databases (D, 4 , F) and (D', ~ ' , F') are called similar if there exist bijection c~:F --~ F ' , isomorphism 6 : D ' -+ D and homomorphisms ~" : U ' --~ U and ~": U f ~ U, such that the triple (or, ~', 6) defines a morphism (D, 4 , F) --~ (D ~, ~ ' , F ~) and the triple (c~-1 , ~.t, 6-1) defines a morphism (D ~, 4 ' , F ~) -+ (D, 4, F).


101

Taking into consideration the above remarks, we can say that if such similarity takes place, then for every f 6 F the models (D, q0, f ) and (D f, 4,1, f l = fc~) are similar. PROPOSITION 2.6. D a t a b a s e s (D, cb, F ) a n d ( D I, r F I) are similar if a n d only if there exist a bijection c~ " F -+ F t, an i s o m o r p h i s m 3" D I --+ D a n d h o m o m o r p h i s m s ~ 9U -+ U t a n d ~1: U I ~ U such that: f ,.

= (f~ , u~)a.' ,

( f l , u I) = (flot-' 9 uI~,)8.,

where u E U, u I E U I, f E F, f : E F I.

The proof of this proposition directly follows from the definitions. Our nearest goal is to free the definition of similarity of passive DBs from the use of HAs in it. THEOREM 2.7. Two d a ta b a s e s (D, q>, F ) a n d ( D f, cb f, F I) are similar if a n d only if there exists a bijection ~ " F ---> F I, an i s o m o r p h i s m 3 " D I ---> D a n d m a p s v" q~ X o --+ L cb l W

and

1

1

v I. cp X o --+ L cp W

such that

(f * U)= (fOr, I)(U))~.' f e F, f i e F

ft , UI

(ftot--l, l)t(U:))~.

I u E CPXo, u I E cI) X O.

PROOF. First of all let us emphasize that we do not need the maps v and v I to be correct. In order to prove the theorem, first prove the following remark. Let ot : H ---> H r be a homomorphism of locally finite HAs. As we know, the inclusion A a ( h ) C A h holds always. Let us show that there exists an hi E H with c~(h) = or(hi) and A ( h l ) = Ac~(hl). Let us take Y = Ah \ Ac~(h) and hi = 3 ( Y ) h . Since Y does not intersect with the support of the element or(h), we have c~(hl) -- 3 ( Y ) a ( h ) = c~(h). Finally, A ( h l ) = Ah \ Y = Ac~(h) = Aot(hl). The next remark is the most important one. Given an epimorphism c~ : H --> H I and a homomorphism fl : U ---->H I, we have y : U --> H with commutative diagram U

Y

>H

H: Let us take a basic set U0 in U. For every u 6 U0 we take fi (u). h is an element in H for which or(h) -- fl(u). We select hi for h so that c~(hl) = c~(h) = fi(u) and A ( h l ) = A a ( h l ) = A f t ( u ) C A(u). y ( u ) is defined as g ( u ) = hi, and this is done for every u Uo. The map y : U 0 --+ H agrees with supports and it can be extended to homomorphism

B. Plotkin

102

~, : U --+ H . For every u 6 U0 we have a y ( u ) = or(hi) = or(h) = / 3 ( u ) . Since U0 generates U, we really get a commutative diagram. Returning to the proof of the theorem, let us take the algebra L q~ W of formulas and the Halmos algebra U. For a given database (D, q~, F ) a filter T is picked out in U by the rule: u 6 T if f 9 u = 1 holds for every f 6 F. Consider the transitions

L clgW --+ U ~ Q -

U / T.

Denoting by t7 a corresponding element in U for each formula u 6 L 9 W, we have further _

m

u q 6 Q. For every q 6 Q we can select u such that u = q, and for f 6 F we have m m

f *u=f

*~--f

*u--f

* q ~ VD.

If f 9 q l = f 9 q2 holds for every f 6 F, then q l ----q2. Now let us take u 6 Lq~ W and denote by or(u) the union of the sets A ( f 9 u) for all f 6 F. It is clear that tr (u) lies in the set of free variables of the formula u. Besides that, since every f 6 F defines a h o m o m o r p h i s m Q --+ VD, transferring q into f 9 q = f 9 u, then A ( f 9 u) C A(q). This holds for each f 6 F, and or(u) C A(q). Let us show that this is not merely an inclusion, but equality or(u) = A(q). If x ~ A(q), then 3xq and q are different elements in Q. This means that f 9 3xq = 3 x ( f 9 q) ~ f 9 q for some f E F. Hence, x lies in the support of A ( f 9 q) = A ( f 9 u), and x ~ cr (u). For the second database (D', ~ ' , F') the transitions look like

L ~ ' W ~ U'--+ Q' and here also for every u' ~ Lcb:W we have cr (u') = A(q'). Assuming that the conditions of the theorem hold for (D, q~, F) and (D', 4,', F'), let us check that for every u 6 q~X0 the set o'(v(u)) lies in the set of free variables of the formula u. It is enough to verify that cr(u) = tr(v(u)). We have

cr(u) -- U A ( f * u). f

Since 8, is isomorphism, then A ( f , u) -- A ( f , u) 's* -- A ( f ~ , v(u)). According to the definition, 9

S~

Therefore, cr(u) -- tr(v(u)). Analogously, tr(u') -- o(v'(u')) for u' E q~X~. So, cr(v'(u')) lies in the set of free variables of a basic formula u I. Defining a map fi'q~ X0 --+ Q' by the rule fi(u) = v(u) - ql, we get A(q ~) -- tr(v(u)), and cr(v(u)) is among the attributes of the formula u. Now we know that the map ~ uniquely extends to a h o m o m o r p h i s m / z ' U ~ Q', and besides


103

! !

/z(tT) = fi(u). Similarly, we have a map fi" 45 X 0 --+ Q which extends to a homomorphism /z" U' --+ Q. So, we have got two diagrams U

U'

U'

Q'

U

Q

with natural homomorphisms 77 and rf. Both these diagrams can be converted to commutative diagrams"

! U

~ U'

Q

UI

/

~U

Q

!

It is left to verify, that ct, 3, ( and ( ' satisfy conditions of Proposition 2.6. We will first check it for the h o m o m o r p h i s m s / z a n d / z '. Since the set of all elements from U with the required property is a subalgebra in U and this set contains a basic set, then this set is the whole algebra U. The same holds for the elements from U ~. In order to verify that

holds for every u 6 U, we use that ( r f - - / z and ( ' r / = / z ' . We have

f * b/---(flY , U / Z ) ~ . I

(fly , (U~')r]t)~.l = (fly , b/~')~. 1 "

Similarly we can verify that f~,

u t-

(ftly -1

,

Ut(') & ,

and the theorem is proved in one direction 9Let us now prove the converse. Given ( and ( ' with the necessary properties, we must construct v and v '. Take u 6 45X0 and let fi be a corresponding element in U. Proceed to fi~ c U t, and let u' be an element in L45 W, for which t~~ = t~. Let u v = u t. Then

I 9 = i 9~ = (I ~ 9~)~:'

= (i ~ 9~')~:'-

(i ~ 9 .')~:' = (I ~ 9 .~)~:'.

The map v t 9@ , X 0, --+ L@ W is constructed in exactly the same way. The theorem is proved. Based on this theorem, we have the new definition of similarity of passive DBs which does not use HAs.

104

B. Plotkin

Let us repeat briefly what had been done. In order to define a category of passive DBs we had to pass to HAs. As for individual morphisms, they can be constructed in the language of formulas, but in this case we cannot compose these morphisms. We define naturally in categorical terms the notion of similarity of two passive bases. At last, we proved that the same notion can be defined in more simple way. c-1 2.1.5. Constructions. A product (D, 4 , F) of two passive databases ( D 1 , 4 1 , El) and (D2, 42,/72) is defined as follows. An algebra D is a Cartesian product DI • D2 -- (Dli • Dzi, i ~ F). The set 4 is a set of pairs q) = (q)l, r q)l 6 41, q92 E 42, with "c(qgl) : r (r Finally, F = F1 • F2. Elements f 6 F are written as fl • f2. For every q) = (q)l, r of type r = (il . . . . , in) we set (fl • fz)(q)) = fl (r • fz(q)2). This means that (fl x fz)(q)) is a subset of the Cartesian product Dil • " " • Din which is represented as (Dlil • "'" • D 1in) • (D2il • • O2in). There are other constructions for passive DBs, for example, cascade connections and wreath products of DBs (see [BP13]). Similar constructions are also defined for active DBs, and they are compatible if we pass from passive DBs to active ones. (See [BP13] for details.)

2.2. Active databases. The general definition o f a database 2.2.1. ,-automata. Recall, that the scheme of HAs is fixed. In a first approximation an active database is a triple (F, Q, R), where F is a set of states, Q is a query algebra and R is an algebra of replies to the queries. Both Q and R are Halmos algebras in the given scheme. It is assumed that there is an operation 9 : F • Q --+ R such that if f ~ F and q ~ Q, then f 9q is a reply to the query q in the state f . For every f E F we consider the map f " Q ---> R which is defined as f (q) = f 9 q, and assume that f is always homomorphism o f algebras. The triple (F, Q, R) with operation 9 is called also .-automaton. It is an automaton of input-output type [PGG]. In the definition of .-automaton need not necessarily be based on a variety of HAs but on an arbitrary variety s Let us give some examples of .-automata, connected with such generalization. 2.2.1.1. Given algebras Q and R in 12 and a subset F in H o m ( Q , R), consider the triple (F, Q, R) and the set f 9 q = f ( q ) . Then (F, Q, R) is .-automaton in s 2.2.1.2. Let F be a set and R 6 s Consider the triple (F, R F, R). R F is a Cartesian power of algebra R, which also lies in s For q 6 RF and f 6 F we have f 9 q = q ( f ) . So, we get a .-automaton in s For an arbitrary (F, Q, R) we have a homomorphism v: Q ---> R F, defined by q V ( f ) =

f .q=f *qV, q ~ Q , f ~F. Now let us define two kinds of homomorphisms for .-automata. Let (F, Q, R) and F', Q', R') be two .-automata. A homomorphism ofthefirst kindhas the form p -- (oe,/3, V) 9(F, Q, R) ----> (F', Q', R'),


105

with a map of sets c~: F ~ F', homomorphisms of algebras ~ : Q --+ Q' and g :R --+ R', and the condition: (f,q)•

= f ~ ,q/~,

f e F, q e Q.

In the definition of a homomorphism of the second kind we proceed from fl: Q' --~ Q and demand

( f * q~)• ._ f ~ , q.

PROPOSITION 2.8. Given a bijection t~ : F ~ F r and an isomorphism y : R ~ R r, a homomorphism of ,-automata p = (c~,/5, y) : (F, Q, R) --~ (F', Q', R')

is a homomorphism of the first (the second) kind if and only if

jot= (ct -1, fl, v-l) : (Ft, Q', R') ~ (F, Q, R) is a homomorphism of the second (the first) kind. From now on/2 is always a variety of HAs in the given scheme. 2.2.2. Definition ofan active database.

AtmD=

The universal DB (see 2.1.1)

(FD, U, VD)

is an example of ,-automaton. DEFINITION 2.9. An arbitrary active DB is a ,-automaton (F, Q, R) with a given representation (homomorphism of the second kind) p -- (c~,/5, y) : (F, Q, R) ~ Atm D.

This is an abstract DB. A concrete DB is a subautomaton in Atm D. It is formed in a following way. We take an arbitrary subset F in Fo and subalgebra R in VD, containing all elements f 9 u, f e F, u e U. Thus, we get an automaton (F, U, R). Take further in U some filter T with the condition f 9 u = 1 for every f e F and u e T. Passing to Q = U~ T with the natural homomorphism/5 : U --+ Q, we obtain a subautomaton (F, Q, R) in Atm D, which is defined by f 9 q = f 9 u, if u ~ = q. The corresponding representation p is defined by the identity embeddings F into FD, R into Vo and by the homomorphism 15 :U --+ Q. Usually we will deal with concrete DBs.

B. Plotkin

106 PROPOSITION 2.10. (1) Let

1) - - (1)1, 1)2, 1)3) : (F, Q, R) --+ (F', Q', R')

be a homomorphism of the first kind of concrete DBs. Then the maps 1)1 and v3 are injective. (2) If p is a homomorphism of the second kind and 1)2 : Q' ~ Q is a surjection, then 1)1 and 1)3 are injections. PROOF. As for 1)3, it is always an injection because algebra R is a simple one. So, we should concentrate on 1)1. Let 1) be a h o m o m o r p h i s m of the first kind, f ~ -- ff~, and the first DB is associated with the algebra U, for which we have a surjection fl : U --+ Q. For an arbitrary u E U (fl * u) v3 -- (fl * ufl) v3 -- fl u' * UflV2 - - f 2 1 *

U e V 2 --- ( f 2 *

U) p3.

Since 1)3 is injection, then fl * u = f2 * u. This is true for every u 6 U, hence f l - - f 2 . The proof of the second point can be found in [BP13]. It is evident that homomorphisms of databases connect in some sense evaluation of a reply to a query in these databases. Let, for example, 13 = (1)1, !)2, 1)2) : (F, Q, R) ~

( F ' , Q', R')

be a h o m o m o r p h i s m of the first kind. Then

( f , q)V3 __ fvl , qV2. Due to the fact that v3 is injection, we can say that a reply to a query in the first DB can obtained by means of the second one. The opposite is not true in general, because it can that f ' -r fvj for some f ' ~ F ' , or q' 6 Q' could be not equal to some qV2, q ~ Q. A homomorphism of databases v is an isomorphism if all the three maps vl, v2 and are bijections. If two DBs are isomorphic, then a reply to a query in each of them can obtained by the means of another one.

be be v3 be

A database (F, Q, R) is called faithful if for every pair of elements ql, q2 c Q the equalities f 9 ql = f * q2 for all f ~ F imply ql = q2. To every database (F, Q, R) corresponds a faithful database (F, Qo, R), where Qo is a result of squeezing (quotienting) the algebra Q. v1 DEFINITION 2.1 1. Let (F, Q, R) and (F', Q', R') be two active databases. A generalized isomorphism of these databases is a tuple (ct, r/, r/', y), where ct: F --~ F ' is a bijection, y : R --~ R ~ is an isomorphism and r/: Q -+ Q', r/': Q' -+ Q are homomorphisms, such that

( f * q)•

_

f a , qO

,

f ~ F, f ' E F', q ~ Q, q' ~ Q'.

f ' , q'

=

(f'~-'

, qtO')•


107

PROPOSITION 2.12. If there exists a generalized isomorphism (a, rl, rlt, y ) f o r databases (F, Q, R) and (F t, Qt, Rt), then the corresponding faithful databases are isomorphic. PROOF. Let (F, Qo, R) and (F', Q~, R') be the corresponding faithful DBs, f l ' Q --, Qo and fit. Q, __+ Q~ be the natural homomorphisms, and T and T' be the kernels of these homomorphisms. We want to verify that T C Ker 0fl ~. Take q 6 T and f 6 F. Then f ~ 9 qO~' = fc~. qO = ( f . q)• = 1• = 1. Since it holds for every f E F, then qO/~' -- 1, q E Ker qfl~. We can similarly check that T' C Ker r/'fi. So, r/" Q --~ Q' induces ~" Qo ~ Q~, and 7 t" Q' ~ Q induces ~" Q~ --+ Qo. If q E Q, then O(qt~) - qO~', and for qt 6 Q, we have Ot(qtt~') _ qtO'~. If, further, f ~ F, qo 6 Qo, qo --q~, then

( f , qo)• _ ( f , qt~)• _ ( f , q)y = f ~ , q0 = f a , qO/~' = f a , q~ and, similarly, f~ * q0, _ (S,:-'

* qo

9

It means that the tuple (c~, ~, ~, F) defines a generalized isomorphism of faithful databases (F, Qo, R) and ( U , Q~, R~). It is left to verify, that ~ and ~ are inverse to each other. Take f 6 F, qo 6 Qo, qo = qty. Then f,

q~O' = f , qt~OO' = f , qOr = f , qOO'~ = f , qOO' -1 = , (qO)O' 0)• -1 )•215 (f~)~-i _(fc~ .q =(f .q = f*q

-- f * q o .

Since it holds for every f 6 F, then q 0' --qo. Similarly, if qo 6 Qo, then q '0 --qo" Therefore, ~ and Ot are inverse to each other. So, a triple (or, ~, F) defines isomorphism of the databases (F, Qo, R) and ( U , Q~, R'). A database (F, Q, R) is called reduced, if it is faithful and the algebra R is generated by the elements of the kind f 9 q, f E F, q E Q. With each (F, Q, R) a certain reduced database can be associated. D DEFINITION 2.13. Databases (F, Q, R) and (F', Q', R') are Called similar, if the corresponding reduced ones are isomorphic. PROPOSITION 2.14. Let A t m D -- (FD, U, VD) be the universal database, and F be a subset in FD. Then all possible (F, Q, R) in Atm D, with the given F are similar pairwise. PROOF. Given F, let R F be a subalgebra in VD, generated by all elements of the kind f 9 u, f c F, u 6 U. We have (F, U, RE) and denote by (F, Q v, R F) the corresponding faithful DB. Then the latter DB is reduced, and each (F, Q, R) can be reduced to the base of such kind. How can the set F be described? One of the approaches is as follows: let T be some set of formulas in U. Define T ~ = F by the rule: f 6 F, if f 9 v -- 1 for every v 6 T. Let

B. Plotkin

108

T" = F ' be a set of all u 6 U, such that f 9u = 1 for every f 6 F. If Q = U~ T", and R is the subalgebra in VD, generated by all f 9 u, f 6 F, u 6 U, then (F, Q, R) is the reduced DB, defined by the set of axioms T. Consider now the elementary theories of models from the point of view of isomorphisms of DBs. [3 PROPOSITION 2.15. Let p = (ct, ~, y)" (F, U, R) --+ (F', U', R') be an isomorphism of databases, where (F, U, R) and (F', U', R') are associated with data algebras D and D' respectively. Then, for every f ~ F we have (Ker f)~ = Ker

fa.

This means that the elementary theories of the models (D, @, f ) and (D', q~', f a ) are compatible. In the next proposition all algebras of queries and algebras of replies are HAs with equalities. Denote by U0 a HA with equalities and with empty @. For every U there is a canonical embedding Jr : U0 -~ U.

PROPOSITION 2.16. Ifthere is an isomorphism v -- (Vl, V2, V3)" (F, Q, R) ~ (F', Q', R') of concrete databases with data algebras D and D', then the elementary theories of D and D' coincide. PROOF. Let us take the corresponding Halmos algebras U and Vo and U' and Vo,, with homomorphisms f l ' U --+ Q and ~'" U' -~ Q'. Consider homomorphisms

f u " Uo -+ VD

and

f u " Uo -+ VD'.

We have to verify that their kernels coincide. Let u e Ker f o . Then f o * u = f 9re(u) = 1 for an arbitrary f e F. We have (f,

rr(u))V3 = ( f ,

zr(u)/~)v3 = f v , , zr(u)/~v2 = 1.

Let now zr' 9U0 --+ U' be a canonical embedding of the algebra U0 into U'. Then zr(u)/~ve = Jr' (u) F, which leads to

f v l , Jr'(u) F = f v , , zr'(u) = fD' * u = 1. So, u ~ Ker fD'. Similarly, u e Ker f o ' implies u e Ker f o . Hence, Ker f o = Ker fD'. In particular we can say that if algebras D and D' are finite, then they are isomorphic, rq 2.2.3. Category of active databases. Let us start with the recalling that if A t m D - (FD, U, VD) and Atm D' = (Fo,, U', VD,) are two universal databases, 8 :D' -+ D is an epimorphism of data algebras, and ( : U' --+ U is a homomorphism of HAs, then the pair (8, () defines an embedding = (8*, (, 8,)" Atm D' -+ Atm D,


109

which is an injection of the second kind. Assume, that for ,-automata (F, Q, R) and (F', Q', R') the representations p = (c~,/3, V) : (F, Q, R) --->Atm D and p ' = (ct',/3', V') : (F', Q', R') --+ A t m D ' are given. Finally, suppose that there is a homomorphism of the second kind 1) = ( P l , 1)2, v3) : (F, Q, R) --+ (F', Q', R'). We consider now the problem: which conditions have to be fulfilled in order that one can speak about homomorphisms of the corresponding abstract DBs. First of all, it is natural to take the diagram P

(F, Q, R)

> Atm D

pl

(F', Q', R')

> AtmD'

Commutativity of this diagram means that there are the following three commutative diagrams ot

F

>FD

Q
VD

(*) F'

> FD,

Q'
VD,

These diagrams can be taken as a definition of a homomorphism of DBs. However, such a definition is too rigid since we need not be bound so tightly to the initial 77, which is based on the pair (6, (). Also it is not necessary that the homomorphism v3 is induced by the homomorphism 6,, and Vl is not necessarily rigidly tied up with 6*. Thus, we will only demand the presence of the second diagram which connects v2 and (, while in the first diagram we proceed from the following weakened form of commutativity: for every f 6 F f Vl Otf

U, and the condition

(f.u,r

u E ' U'.

The same condition means that the triple (ct, (, 6.) determines a homomorphism (of the second kind) (F, U, liD) ---> (F I, U ~, VD,) for active DBs. Thus there arises a functorfrom a category of passive DBs to a category of active ones. However, this functor does not allow to recover uniquely a passive DB from an active one. Basic information, which we must not forget, cannot be recovered. This leads us to a new view on the notion of DB. DEFINITION. A database is an object of the form

(D, cp, F) --+ (F, U, VD) ---> (F, Q, R) where the first arrow is associated with the transition from a passive to an active DB, and the second one is defined by the representation p : ( F , Q, R) ---->(F, U, VD) which is the identity on F. If, moreover, p is the identity on R, then it is a concrete DB. Now a passive DB is the passive part of a general construction of a DB, while an active DB is its active part. The passive part is source information while the active one reflects


111

the functioning of the system "Query-Reply". Morphisms in the category of DBs now look like

(D, 4, F)

> (F, U, VD)

> (F, Q, R)

(D', 4', F')

~ (F', U', VD,)

>

(F', Q', R')

with the first vertical arrow being defined by an epimorphism ~ : D' --+ D, by a homomorphism ~" : U ' -+ U and by a map c~:F --+ F'. It is a morphism in a category of passive DBs. The second vertical arrow is a triple (c~, ~', ~.), and the third one is v = (vl, v2, v3). The second and the third arrows have to be compatible with the corresponding representations p and p', described in the previous section 9The second and the third vertical arrows determine a morphism in the category of active DBs. The developed model of a DB agrees with the intuition of a DB could be: first a DB is defined on the level of basic, source information, then it generates a lot of information - the "world" of all associated information, and finally this very big world is reduced to some reasonable size. 2.2.5. Similarity ofpassive and active databases. We will somehow narrow the definition of similarity of active DBs. Now we call two databases (F, Q, R) and ( F , Q', R') similar, if for the corresponding reduced active data bases (F, Q0, R0) and (F', Q0, R~) there is an isomorphism p -- (c~, 13, g), in which y "R0 --+ R 0I is induced by an isomorphism a" D' --+ D of data algebras 9As we will see (2.3.1), this additional condition holds automatically in the natural situation of finite D and D' and presence of equalities in Q and R. THEOREM 2.17. Two passive databases (D, 4,, F) and (D', 4', F') are similar if and only if the corresponding active databases (F, U, VD) and (F', U', VD,) are similar. PROOF. We remind that passive databases (D, 4 , F) and (D', 4 ' , F') are similar if there exist a bijection or" F --+ F', an isomorphism a" D' --+ D and maps

v 94 X o - + L 4 ' W

and

v' 94 '

' Xo----> L4W,

for which hold S,

u = (S

9

,,(u))

,

9

f',u'

-

9

( f '~

v' ( u ' ) ) a, ,

where f 6 F, f ' e F', u e 4 X0, u' e 4 ' X 0 . Let all these conditions be fulfilled 9It follows from the definition of similarity that, given v and v', we can build homomorphisms ( ' U --+ U' and ~'" U' --+ U such that for every u 6 U and u' e U' hold :

9

=

9

:'

9 u'=

9

B. Plotkin

112

This means that the tuple (u, ~', ~", 6.) defines a generalized isomorphism of active databases (F, U, VD) and (F', U', VD,). This generalized isomorphism induces an ordinary isomorphism (c~, ~'0, 3.): (F, Q, VD)--+ (F', Q', VD,) for corresponding faithful DBs. This isomorphism is compatible with the homomorphism (~, ~, 6.) " (F, U, Vo) --+ (F', U', Vo,). The inverse one (c~-1 , ~o 1, 6,1) " ( F ', Q', Vo,) --+

(F, Q, Vo) is compatible with the h o m o m o r p h i s m ( c ~ - I , ( ' , 6 , 1 ) : ( F ' , U ', Vo,)--+ (F, U, Vo). It is also clear that (c~, ~0, 6.) is simultaneously an isomorphism of reduced DBs, and DBs (F, U, Vo) and (F', U', Vo,) are similar in the pointed above strengthened sense.

D

We omit the proof of the converse statement (see [TP12]).

2.3. Groups and databases 2.3.1. Galois theory of the algebra VD. Let G be the group of all automorphisms of a data algebra D, G = Aut D. Every g 6 G is an isomorphism g : D ~ D, which induces isomorphism g. : VD --+ VD. It gives a representation of the group G as a group of automorphisms of algebra VD: G = Aut D --+ Aut VD. THEOREM 2.18. The representation G ~ Aut VD is an isomorphism of groups Aut D and Aut VD. If A ~ VD, then we write gA instead of g. A for every g ~ G. Now let us consider Galois correspondence. Let R be a subset in the algebra VD. Denote by R' -- H the set of all g ~ G for which gA -- A holds for every A 6 R. H is a subgroup in G. If, further, H is a subset in G, then H ' = R denotes a set of all A ~ VD for which g A = A holds for every g ~ H. R is a subalgebra in VD. For a subset R C VD w e have R ' = H , H ' = R", R C R". The subalgebra R" is the Galois closure of the set R. This Galois closure is always a subalgebra in VD. The same holds for a subset H in G: we take its Galois closure H " , H C H " and H " is always a subgroup in G. We will consider the algebra VD as an algebra with equalities. The theorem also holds in this case, and each algebra of the form R = H ' is an algebra with equalities. Besides that, we will restrict ourselves with the case when all data algebras D are finite and all Xi in the set X -- (Xi, i ~ F) are countable. In Theorem 2.19 we assume that these conditions hold. THEOREM 2.19. For every H C G, its closure H" is a subgroup in G, generated by the set H. If R is a subset in Vo, then R" is a subalgebra (with equalities), generated by the set R.


113

If follows from this theorem, that there is a one-to-one correspondence between the subgroups in G and the subalgebras with equalities in VD. In particular, there is only finite number of different subalgebras in VD. Let us now consider two algebras D1 and D2 (in particular, they may coincide), and the corresponding algebras VD~ and VD2. We have G1 = Aut D1 and G2 : Aut D2. THEOREM 2.20. Let R1 be a subalgebra in VDI and R2 a subalgebra in VD2. Then (1) R1 and R2 are isomorphic if and only if the corresponding subgroups H1 = RI1 C G1

and H2 -- R 2I C G2 are conjugated by some isomorphism 3" D2 --+ D1. (2) If R1 and R2 are isomorphic and y : R1 --+ R2 is the isomorphism, then this isomorphism is induced by some isomorphism 6 : D2 --+ D1. t (3) If Rz = R~ = R ~, 1 , then R t1 = 3 - 1 Rer, that is Hl = 6 1H26. Here, if g 6 G2, g: D2 --+ D2 is an automorphism and 6 : D2 ---->D1 is an isomorphism, then 6-1gS is an automorphism of algebra D1, i.e. an element in G1.6 -1H26 is, as usual, a set of all 6-1g6, g ~ H2. 6, It is also obvious that for each isomorphism 6"D2 --+ D1 and each R1 C VD1, if R 1 -R2, then 3, gives the isomorphism between R1 and R2. These two useful theorems go back to theworks of M.I. Krasner [Kr] which describe pure relational algebras. E Bancillhon [Ban] and E. Beniaminov [Ben3] showed how to use them in databases. Beniaminov has constructed also an interesting categorical proof which allows to make generalizations. These results were extended to pure HAs by various authors. For HAs in some variety 69 see [BP13] and [BP14]. See also [Ts3,Dg,Bo,Maf, MSS]. 2.3.2. Additional remarks. There are three Galois theories with one and the same group G -- Aut D. One of them deals with subalgebras of VD, the second one is aimed at subbases of the universal DB, and the last one relates to subalgebras in the algebra D. The first theory was discussed in 2.3.1. In the book [BP13] Galois theory for a universal database ( F o, U, VD) is developed. It allows to classify concrete DBs with the given data algebra D. The group of automorphisms of a universal DB is treated in [MP]. Finally, the Galois correspondence between subgroups of G -- Aut D and subalgebras in D, is in some sense connected with the material of the above subsection (see [BP13] for details). In this book also some applications to DBs are given. In the next section we will present one more example of this kind.

3. Applications and other aspects 3.1. The problem of equivalence of databases 3.1.1. Statement of the problem. In this subsection we focus our attention on informational equivalence of DBs. Intuitively, the problem is to point out conditions, under which a reply to a query in one DB can be obtained by means of the second one, and vice versa.

114

B. Plotkin

Such a problem arises, for example, in the following situation. Let two forms keep a look-out for one and the same object in the same conditions, but the observations are organized differently. Data are stored in, possibly, different systems of relations. In which cases we can assert that the collected data are equivalent and, based on them, we can get well corresponding inferences? The problem is also in coordination of the corresponding means and, first of all, in recognition of the possibility of such coordination. As we know, a DB includes some source (basic) information and we can speak of derivative information which is derived from the basic information. The equivalence problem can be solved on the level of basic information, as well as on a higher level, taking into consideration all possible derived information. Intuitively it is clear that the solution of the problem on the level of basic information implies its solution on any desired high level. But we need precise constructions in order to obtain the necessary maps. The problem of DBs equivalence has attracted attention of specialists for many years (e.g., [BMSU,Ulm,BK,Ts3,Brl,TPPK,BN], etc.), and always the solution depends on the chosen approach to the definition of the notion of DB (i.e. on the chosen model of a DB). We will proceed from the model considered above, and limit ourselves to concrete DBs (see details in [TP12]). 3.1.2. Definition of the notion of database equivalence. DEFINITION 3.1. Two concrete databases

(D, cb, F) --+ (F, U, VD) --* (F, Q, R), (D', ~', F) ~ (F, U', VD') ~ (F', Q', R') are called equivalent, if one of the following conditions takes place: (1) The passive parts of these DBs are similar, (2) The active parts of these DBs are similar. Equivalence of these two conditions was considered in 2.2.5. It confirms the feeling that DBs' equivalence is recognized on the level of basic information. We want to check that this definition of equivalence reflects the intuition of the idea of f equivalence, as stated above. Let (F, Q0, R0) and (F' , Q'o, Ro) be reduced ,-automata for (F, Q, R) and ( U , Q~, R') respectively. If DBs are equivalent, then by the definition of similarity of active DBs, there is an isomorphism

p = (or, ,8, y ) ' ( F , Q o, Ro) ~ (F', Q~o,R~o), but here we do not require the isomorphism y to be induced by an isomorphism ~ : D I --+ D.


115

Let us consider also the natural homomorphisms rio" Q -+ Qo and fl~" Q' --+ Q~. Take f ~ F, q ~ Q, f ' E F', q' ~ Q'. Then -1

f , q - . f , q~0= ( f ~ , q/~Ot~)• f , , g, = f , , q,/~; _ (f,a-, *qtfl~fl-1)YHence, a reply to a query in the first DB can be obtained via the second one, and vice versa. In fact, the definition of equivalence is much more rigid than is required to realize the initial premise. It links too tightly the structures of the corresponding DBs. Therefore, we will weaken this definition. 3.1.3. Local isomorphism. Given a database (F, Q, R), consider a homomorphism f ' Q ~ R, f c F. Let R f be the image of this homomorphism and Tf be its kernel. Passing to O f -- Q / T f , we obtain a local database (f, Q f, R f ) with one state f , which, obviously, is reduced. DEFINITION 3.2. Two active databases (F, Q, R) and (F', Q~, R ~) are called locally isomorphic, if there is a bijection ot : F --~ F ~, such that for every f 6 F the algebras R f and R ~ are isomorphic. We will write R f~ instead of R~f~, Tf~ instead of T}~ and Q f~ instead of Q ) , , because the presence of fc~ indicates that the algebras belong to the second DB. Let yf "Rf ~ Rf~ be some isomorphism. Then we have a commutative diagram of isomorphisms

Qf

> Rf

Qf~

> Rf~

1

whose horizontal arrows are associated with f and fc~. Now for every q E Qf we have

( f . q)•

= f ~ . q~I,

which means that under the conditions above the local databases (f, Q f, R f) and (fc~, QUa, Rfo~) are also isomorphic. PROPOSITION 3.3. If two databases (F, Q, R) and (F, Q', R') are similar, then they are locally isomorphic. PROOF. Let us pass to corresponding reduced DBs with isomorphism (c~, 13, y)" (F, Qo, Ro) --+ (F', Q~, R~).

116

B. Plotkin

The homomorphism f " Q --+ R induces a homomorphism f " Q0 --+ R0 and the images of these homomorphisms coincide with R f. It is easy to understand that the isomorphism y induces an isomorphism y f : R f --+ R f~. We can also check that there is a commutative diagram with natural homomorphisms fl0 and fl~ and fly" Q f ~ Qfa as follows:

Q0

t~oI

Qf

~

Q0

lt~',

~ Qf~

On the other hand, reduced locally isomorphic DBs can be not isomorphic. Now, let us look at the notion of local isomorphism from the other point of view. We will proceed from the idea of generalized isomorphism, considered in Definition 2.11. A generalized isomorphism implies similarity and, hence, local isomorphism. Given (F, Q, R) and (F', Q', R'), consider a tuple (a, fl, fl', y) with a bijection ot : F F' and functions fl, fl', y. The function fl for every f ~ F gives a homomorphism f l f ' Q --~ Q'/T'f, where T~ C Ker fc~ is a filter in Q'. It follows from the definition of

flf, that an element f a 9qt~i is always determined. The function fl' acts similarly in the opposite direction, defining fl~f," Q' -+ Q / T f , . And finally, the function }, for every f ~ F gives an isomorphism yf : R f ~ Rfa. Suppose the following conditions hold: ( f . q)• -- f a . qtb;

f, ,q,_

(f,oe -I , q'tJ~,)•

with f ~ F, q ~ Q, q' ~ Q', f ' ~ F'. Under this condition a tuple (c~,fl, fl~, y) is called a crossed isomorphism of DBs. It is evident that an isomorphism and a generalized isomorphism are particular cases of a crossed isomorphism. In these cases the corresponding functions fl, fl~, y do not depend on f , they are constants, and all filters Tf, and Tf are trivial. It is also clear that if there is a crossed isomorphism between DBs, then the main premises of equivalence in the sense of evaluation of a reply to a query hold. D PROPOSITION 3.4. Two databases are locally isomorphic if and only if one can establish a crossed isomorphism between them. PROOF. It directly follows from the definition that if between DBs there is a crossed isomorphism, then they are locally isomorphic. Let us prove the opposite. Let the databases (F, Q, R) and ( U , Q~, R ~) be locally isomorphic. We have a bijection c~:F --+ F ~ and an isomorphism YL: Rf ~ Rf~ for every f E F. Fix this yf for each f , and take Tf -- Ker f and Tf, = Ker f ' for f ' ~ F'. ^


117

In the commutative diagrams

Q~ Tf

:

> Rf

Q/Tf

l/if I :, Iyf

"/I T

Q'IT:,

a'ITf.

> Rf.

f

~ Rf

f,

l Y/1 > Rf.

f , = f a , the isomorphism 1/rf was earlier denoted by flf,, and f is the isomorphism, induced by f . Let us now take the natural homomorphisms of'Q-.-> Q/Tf

and

r/f," Q'---~ Q ' / T f , .

Let flf r l f O f " Q ~ Q ' / T } , where T} -- Tf,, and/3), @ , ~ p f " Q' ~ Q / T f , , where T:, = Tf. We have a tuple (or, 13, 13', y) and we must check the relations between its components. Let f ~ F, f : = fc~ ~ F', q ~ Q and q: ~ Q'. Then =

=

( f , q)y: = ( f , qrl:)Y: = q~ff• = q,fT::f'= f o r , q/~f. Similarly we can check that f ' 9 q' = ( f 9 q'~':')•

The proposition is proved.

U

3.1.4. The general notion o f equivalence 9 As it was done before, we start from passive databases (D, q~, F) and (D', q/, F'). The modified definition of similarity, using the idea of localization, is as follows 9 DEFINITION. Two passive databases (D, q~, F) and (D', q~', F ' ) are similar, if there is a bijection c~: F --+ F', isomorphisms (~f " Dt ~ D for every f , and maps 1)f 9(I)Xo---'~ Lclo'W

and

LcloW v~, 9q / Xo--+ '

such that the equalities ( f 9 u)8: * = f a * v f (u),

:, , u , = (: ,

*

hold for f E F,

f : __ f a E F:,

u E cI)X0,

u: E q~:X 0.:

Let us now redefine the notion of similarity of active DBs. DEFINITION. Active databases (F, Q, R) and (F', Q', R') with data algebras D and D' are similar, if they are locally isomorphic and every yf : Rf ~ RU,~ under the corresponding ot : F ~ F ' is induced by some 3f : D ' ~ D.

118

B. Plotkin

THEOREM 3.5. Two passive databases (D, 49, F) and (D', cb', F') are similar if and only if the corresponding active databases (F, U, VD) and (F', U ~, VD,) are similar. PROOF. Let the passive DBs be similar and let the tuple (c~, v, v', 3) give the similarity. Here v, v' and 3 depend on f 6 F or f ' 6 F'. Let us pass to the active databases (F, U, VD) and (F', U', VD,) and prove that they are similar. We will show that for every f 6 F the isomorphism 3 f : D t --+ D induces an isomorphism between the corresponding R f and R f~ with R = VD and R' = Vo,. Denote the image of the set q~Xo in U by Uo and the image of q~' X o' in U ' by Uo. ' This Uo generates an algebra U, while Uo generates U' The algebra R f is generated by all f 9 u, u 6 9 Xo, and Rf~ is generated by all f ~ 9 u', l u' 6 q~X o. We have

( f * u)~f * = f ~ 9 I)f (u) E R f~,

u E cI)Xo.

Hence, (R f )~I * C R f,~. Analogously, (R fo, ) ~fl* C R f . Therefore, R ,~f* f = R fo, , and the databases (F, U, Vo) and (F', U', VD,) are similar. Now let us prove the converse. Let (F, U, I'D) and (F', U', Vo,) be similar. Then there is a crossed isomorphism

(or, fl, fl', y) " (F, U, VD) ~ (F', U', VD,), where every yf is induced by some 3f" D' ---> D. Let us construct a similarity for (D, q~, F) and (D', q~', F'). Since the maps c~ and 8 are already given, we must construct v and v'. Given f ~ F, we have f l f ' u ---> U'/Tj. and also fl).," U' ---> U/T/.,. In order to form vf and v), we use transitions Lr W --+ U and Lcl)'W ---> U'. If u 6 Lq~ W, then t7 c U, and the same for u' ~ LcI)'W. Let now u ~ q~X0. Take ~ r ~ U'/T}., and let ti/~r - (ti')~Y, where u' ~ L ~ ' W and Of is a natural homomorphism. Define v(u) = u'. We have

( f , u)a.l, = ( f , ti)a.l., _ fc~, ti,8.1. _ fc~, ti,,".r = f o r , fi,= f o r , u ' - - f o r , vf(u). Using fl}, one can construct v~, in a similar way and check the necessary second condition. t3 The theorem proved allows to introduce the following new definition of DBs' equivalence, which looks exactly like the previous one, but is based on the modified notion of similarity. DEFINITION 3.6. The concrete databases

(D, cI), F) ~ (F, U, VD) ~ (F, Q, R)


119

and

(D', ~', F 1) --+ (F', U', VD,)--+ (F', Q', R') are called equivalent, if one of the following conditions holds: (1) The passive parts are similar. (2) The active parts are similar. Note here that similarity between active DBs, standing in the middle, is equivalent to the similarity of the right parts. 3.1.5. Galois theory and the problem of equivalence. We use the definition of DBs equivalence given above, and consider an algorithm, based on Galois theory, which recognizes such equivalence. We assume, that all data algebras are finite, that in all X = (Xi, i c F) the sets Xi are countable, and that all Halmos algebras are algebras with equalities. Under these conditions, if R1 C VD~ and R2 C V o 2 , then each isomorphism y : R1 -+ R2 is induced by some isomorphism S:D2 --+ D1. The problem is how to recognize the local isomorphism of databases (F1, Q1, R1)

and

(F2, Q2, R2).

If the databases (F1, Q1, R1) and (F2, Q2, R2) are equivalent, i.e. they are locally isomorphic, then IF l[ -- IFz[ and the algebras D1 and D2 have to be isomorphic. In particular, if in the algebras D1 = (Di1, i 6 f') and D2 = (D/2, i c F ) for some i [D/~[ ~ IDZ[, then the DBs are not equivalent. An intermediate step in solving the equivalence problem is the following. Let f c F1 and f l 6 F2 and consider the algebras R f C VD1 and RU, C VD2. We want to find out, whether these algebras are isomorphic or not. For this purpose the Galois theory of the algebra VD is used. First of all, given D1 and D2, take the groups Aut D1 and Aut D2. These groups are isomorphic, if D1 and D2 are isomorphic. Let SD~ and So2 be the many-sorted symmetric groups, which are the direct products of the symmetric groups of the domains. Then G1 -Aut D1 and G2 = Aut D2 are subgroups in SD~ and SD2, consisting of the elements which preserve operations of the set $2. It means, that we can obtain these groups. Consider the algebra RU, which is generated by the elements of the form f 9u, where u 6 ~ Xo. Assume that the set q~ is finite, then q~X0 is also finite. Denote by M the finite set of all elements of the form f 9 u , u ~ 9 Xo. Then M I -- R f = H f C G 1. Here the symbol ~ comes from the Galois correspondence (see 2.3.1). We will describe explicitly the subgroup H i just defined. An element g 6 G1 belongs to H i if and only if g ( f 9 u) = f 9 u for every u 6 ~X0. Let u =- qg(Xl. . . . . Xn) and r(~0) = (il . . . . . in). Then, the relation f(~0) is a subset in the Cartesian product

Di~ • "'" • Din.

120

B. Plotkin

The group G1 acts o n Dil x . . . x Din by the rule ag=

gil

gin)

a1 ,...,an

,

where a = (al . . . . , an) ~ Dil x . . . x Din and g = ( g i , i ~ F) ~ G1. It is easy to check that the condition g ( f 9 u) = f 9 u is equivalent to that for each a 6 f(cp) the elements ag lie in f(cp). Thus, for each f 9 u the set of all corresponding g can be constructed, using tables, containing the original information. Since the group H f consists of elements g 6 G1, such that a g lies in f(~o) for all a 6 f(~o) and all ~p 6 q~, then we can compute H f . The group Hf, C G2 = Aut D2 is constructed in a similar way. Now, we use the fact that the algebras R f and R f, are isomorphic if and only if the groups H f and Hf, are conjugated by an isomorphism ~ f "D2 ~ D I. In particular, H f and H f, have to be isomorphic. So, if H f and H f, are not isomorphic for some reason, this means that R f and R f, are not isomorphic. Since D1 and D2 are finite, the existence of conjugation between H f and Hf, can be established in a finite number of steps. Thus, we can speak about an algorithm which checks whether R f and R f , are isomorphic. Let us take the Cartesian product F x F t and consider the relation r between elements from F and F t, defined by the rule: f r f ' if and only if R f and R f, are isomorphic. The relation r is computable and a certain subset in F x F' corresponds to it. Let now ~: F --> F' be a bijection. We say that c~ is compatible with the relation r if for each f 6 F there holds f r f ~. For a given r there is a simple algorithm recognizing whether there exists a bijection c~ compatible with r. If such bijection exists, then the DBs are locally isomorphic. In the opposite case the DBs are not equivalent. Let us consider an example: F = {fj . . . . . fs} and F ' = {f[ . . . . . f~}. Let r be given by the graph fl

f;

/r

f2

f3

f4

\r

f5

It is clear, that there is no bijection in this case. The above algorithm can be realized more effectively in specific cases. Besides, if we fix an isomorphism between D1 and D2, the groups G i and G2 can be identified. This also gives some simplification. Note in conclusion that other questions related to the problem of equivalence of DBs are considered in [Brl,Br2,TPll,TP12,BP13,BMSU]. The situation when the algebras D1 and D2 do not have nontrivial automorphisms can be easily considered separately.

3.2. Deductive approach in databases 3.2.1. Preliminaries. We proceed from a universal DB with the data algebra D 6 0 . It looks like Atm D = ( I n , U, Vo).


121

A reply to a query u ~ U in a state f ~ FD has the form f 9 u. It is an element in the algebra VD, and simultaneously it is a subset in the set Hom(W, D). To evaluate a reply to a query means to point out a rule, according to which an inclusion/z 6 f 9 u can be recognized for every/z : W ~ D.

Our goal is to reduce this problem of recognition to some syntactical problem, which is associated with application of deductive means. A query u is a syntactical object, while f and/z are not. Both/z and f are connected with the data algebra D, which is also a non-syntactical object. We want to describe f , / z and D syntactically. To a state f corresponds a homomorphism f " U ~ VD. Its kernel T = Ker A? is a filter in U, and this is an object of syntactical nature, which somehow describes the state. DEFINITION 3.7. A description of the state f is an arbitrary subset To of the set T = Ker f , generating the filter T. As we already noted in the first section, there is a notion of derivability in HAs, which is associated with the derivability in first-order logic. If ~P0 is a set of formulas in L q~W and To is the corresponding set of elements in U, then the formula ~ is derivable from q~0 if and only if the corresponding element u = lP 6 U is derivable from To. We know two rules of construction of a filter T over a given subset To. One of them is algebraic, and the second is deductive. According to the second rule, the filter T consists of all u 6 U which are derivable from the set To. So, if To is a description of a state f , then the filter Ker j~ consists of elements u ~ U, derivable form the description To. A description of a state belongs to the elementary theory of this state and generates it, but it determines the state not necessarily uniquely. 3.2.2. Categoricity and D-categoricity of a set of formulas. It is known that a set of formulas T C U is called a categorical, if any two models of the kind (D, q~, f ) , D 6 69, satisfying the set T, are isomorphic. The set of symbols of relations 9 is assumed to be fixed. It is included in the scheme along with the variety 69, and defines the algebra U. Let D be an algebra in 69. The set of formulas T C U will be called D-categorical, if for any its model (D1, ~, f ) , D1 6 69, the algebra D1 is isomorphic to D. Given an algebra D 6 69, take the database Atm D = (F D, U, VD), and let T be an arbitrary set of formulas in U. Denote by T ~ -- F the subset of all f ~ FD which satisfy every formula from T. Correspondingly, T" = F t is the set of all u ~ U which satisfy every f ~ F. The set T" is a closure of the set T. THEOREM 3.8 [BP13]. If T is a D-categorical set of formulas, then T I~ is the filter gener-

ated by the set T. THEOREM 3.9. A categorical set of formulas T in U gives a description of a state f for every model (D, ~, f ) ofT. This theorem follows directly from the previous one. Indeed, if (D, ~b, f ) is a model of a categorical set T, then T is also a D-categorical set. Hence, T generates the filter T ' .

122

B. Plotkin

But T" = F t is the intersection of all Ker f t , f~ 6 F. From the categoricity of the set T follows that all models (D, O, f~) are isomorphic to the model (D, O, f ) . Therefore, all Ker f ' coincide with Ker f . So, T " - - Ker f , and T generates Ker f . It is well known that for every finite algebra D the corresponding D-categorical sets can be constructed. Let us give a simple example of such kind, which is based on the idea of pseudoidentities. We assume that the algebras U and Vo are HAs with equalities. A pseudoidentity is a formula of the kind !

!

W l ~ 1101 V . . . V tOn ~ tOn"

Let us consider this formula as an element of algebra U. Pseudoidentities generalize identities, and they are associated with pseudovarieties. Let now D 6 0 be a finite algebra, and let 0 0 be the pseudovariety, generated by it. This pseudovariety is determined by some finite set To of pseudoidentities. Let ni be a power of every Di from D = (Di, i 6 F ) . Consider a formula i

((xl e 4)

(xl e 4)

e

i

We take for T any set of formulas, containing this formula u and a set To. Such set T is Dcategorical. Indeed, if a model (Dl, O, f ) satisfies the set T, then it also satisfies To, and the algebra Dl belongs to pseudovariety OD. It is known (see, for example, [Mal3]), that D1 is a homomorphic image of some subalgebra in D. Since D1 satisfies also the formula u, then the last is possible only when D1 and D are isomorphic. 3.2.3. Introduction o f an algebra D into the language and the algebra o f queries. Our next goal is to represent D as a syntactical object. It will allow (1) given a formula u and a row #, to construct a new formula u ~ such that the inclusion /z 6 f 9 u is equivalent to that of ut~ 6 Ker f . (2) given a state (D, O, f ) with a finite D, to construct a categorical set of formulas, which this state satisfies. We apply standard methods. Let D = (Di, i ~ F ) be determined by generators and defining relations. Fix the scheme of calculus, which includes a map n : X --+ F , a variety O with a set of symbols of operations S'2, and a set of symbols of relations 4,. A set of generators we denote by M = (Mi, i ~ F ) and let r be a set of defining relations. For each a 6 M we take a variable y -- Ya. The set Mi corresponds to the set of variables Yi and we have Y = (Yi, i ~ F). Let W o be the free algebra in O over the given Y. The correspondence Ya ~ a gives an epimorphism v: WD ~ D. The kernel Kerv = p is generated by r. Thus, we have an isomorphism W o / p ~ D. For every a ~ Mi, i ~ F , we add to the set I2 symbols for the nullary operations 09a for all i 6 F . Denote the new set by S2 t. Then O t is the variety of S21-algebras, defined by the identities of the variety O and by the defining relations of the algebra D. Here, if W(yal . . . . . Yah) = w~(Yal . . . . . Yan) is one of the defining relations, then we must write it in the form to(O)al . . . . .

O)an ) = W ' ( 0 ) a l . . . . .

O)an ).

123


We have no variables here, and this equality is an identity. Let W be the free algebra in O over X = ( X i , i ~ F ) , and let W ~ be the free algebra in O t over the same X. All O)a are elements in W f and let D f be the subalgebra in W I, generated by these COa. It can be proved that there exists a canonical i s o m o r p h i s m v : D ~ --+ D. It can be also proved that W f is a free product of W and D f in O, i.e. W I = W 9 D I. Here D f is a syntactical copy of the algebra D. It is easy to understand that an algebra D1 6 0 can be considered as an algebra in O ~ if and only if there is a h o m o m o r p h i s m h : D --+ D1. The h o m o m o r p h i s m h takes elements from D to constants in D1. Different h define different X?~-algebras over the given D1. In the old scheme we had a H a l m o s algebra U, and the new scheme gives rise to an algebra U I. There is the canonical injection U ~ U f. The kernel of this injection can be well determined in the case when D is finitely defined in O. The algebra D can be taken as the algebra in variety O ~ under trivial h, and we can identify the sets of h o m o m o r p h i s m s Horn(W, D) and H o m ( W ~, D). Simultaneously we can identify the algebras VD and V~. But Vo is considered in the old scheme with the semigroup E n d W, and V~ in the new scheme with the semigroup End W p. We now have two databases (FD, U, VD)

and

(FD, U', V ~ ) ,

where the second one is in the scheme with the semigroup E n d W I. In the second DB the algebra D is introduced into the query algebra U t. Thus, on the one hand, the query algebra now depends on D, but on the other hand, this new language has m a n y m o r e possibilities with respect to the given D. As for the syntactical description of D, in fact it is contained in generators and defining relations. 3.2.4. Reply to a query f r o m the deductive p o i n t o f view. We first m a k e some auxiliary remarks. Take a h o m o m o r p h i s m # ' W --+ D, which we identify with IX" W t --+ D, an i s o m o r p h i s m v" D r --+ D and let s -- v - l i x " W t --+ D t. Since D t is a subalgebra in W f, we have s c E n d W ~ and # ( x ) -- vv - 1 I x ( x ) = v s ( x ) . For every r" W ~ --+ D, we have r s ( x ) -- v s ( x ) , because s ( x ) E D I is a constant. So, Ix(x) = r s ( x ) . This is true for all x ~ X, and Ix -- r s for each r. Given a m o d e l (D, 45, f ) , where D 6 O, an algebra D being simultaneously an algebra in 0 f, we have a h o m o m o r p h i s m f " U I --+ 17o = V~. Every u c U we consider as an element in U f, and the value of u in D is f ( u ) -- f

9 u. We are c o n c e m e d with w h e n

IxE f , u . Together with the element u we take also an element u u -- su. This uu we can interpretate as the result of substitution of the row Ix in the formula u.

THEOREM 3.1 0. The inclusion # ~ f

9 u holds if a n d only if f

9 su -- 1.

PROOF. Let IX E f 9 u. Take an arbitrary r, r s = IX. Then r s 6 f 9 u and r 6 s ( f 9 u) = f 9 su. Since r is arbitrary, we have f 9 su = 1. N o w let f 9 su = 1. Then # ~ f 9 su = s ( f 9 u) and Ixs = IX ~ f 9 u. So we get that the set f 9 u is the set of all # , for which the f o r m u l a uu = su is derivable f r o m some description o f the state f . V]

B. Plotkin

124

3.2.5. Description of a state. Given a model (D, q~, f ) , D finite, we construct a categorical set of formulas, describing the set f . For this purpose we use O~-logic, associated with the algebra D, and pass to the Halmos algebra U ~. For two distinct elements a and b of an algebra D' C W' of the same sort, take an element a ~ b in U ~. The set of all such a ~ b is denoted by T1. It is evident that each state f ~ Fo satisfies the set Tl. As before we assume that D = (Di, i ~ F) and IDil = hi. Take D' = (D~, i ~ F) and let Cl, c2 . . . . . Cni be a list of all elements of D!l " For each i 6 F we consider the axiom

VX((X ~ Cl) V (X ~ 62) V . . . V (X = Cni)), where x is a variable of the sort i. Collect all these axioms for all i 6 F and denote the set of such axioms by T2. It is easy to prove, that if the set T C U' includes Tl and T2 then T is D-categorical. Take now the diagram of the model (D, q~, f ) [Mal3]. Consider formulas of the kind ~o(al . . . . . an) with ~o 6 q~ and constants al . . . . . an arranged accordingly to the type of ~0. We identify these formulas with the respective elements in U. The diagram 7"3 of the state f includes the set Tl and contains all formulas ~o(al . . . . . an) satisfied on the model (D, q~, f ) , as well as formulas ]~o(al . . . . . an] with ~o(al . . . . ,an) not satisfied in the state f . Denote by T the union of the sets T2 and T3. It easy to prove that the set T is categorical and so T is the description of the state f . It is clear, that the description of the state, just constructed, is directly connected with the source basic information, because the corresponding diagram is derived from the tables of the type f(~o), f E F, ~0 6 q~. In various specific situations also other descriptions of states can be used. Sometimes we deal with a n o t c o m p l e t e description of a state. This means, that one takes a subset To in the kernel Ker f which does not necessarily generate the whole elementary theory. In this case we cannot get the full reply to a query (i.e. not the full set f 9 u). We have connected the approach to DBs, based on model theory, and the deductive approach. In general, a deductive approach does not assume existence of the corresponding model of a database [TPIK]. 3.2.6. Deductive databases. Our goal is to construct a new model of a DB, which we call a deductive database. We consider an extended language U'. The data algebra D, which is introduced into the language, can be not finite. PROPOSITION 3.1 1. Two states fl and f2 coincide if and only if Ker fl = Ker f2. PROOF. Let Ker f l -- Ker f2. We have to check that fl * u - f2 * u holds for every u ~ U'. We can restrict ourselves to basic queries u, which lie in U. Take such a u and let/z ~ f l * u. Find s a End W ~ which is assigned to/x (see Theorem 3.10). Then su ~ Ker fl = Ker f2, and hence ~ ~ f2 * u. We have checked the inclusion f l * u C f2 * u, and similarly we can


125

get the opposite inclusion. Therefore, fl * u = f2 * u holds for all basic u. This means that fl - f2.

IN

It follows from this proposition, that the universal database Atm D -- (FD, U ~, VD) can be represented by means of the Halmos algebra U'. Let us denote by Spec U ~ the set of all maximal filters in U ~. The kernel K e r f is a maximal filter in U ~ for every f ~ F o , since the image of homomorphism f is a simple algebra. Hence, we have a map Ker 9FD Spec U t, which is injective according to Proposition 3.11. The rows lz" W ' ~ D can be identified with the corresponding s ~ End W ~. Given a query u e U ~, the reply f 9 u to this query is the set of all s, for which su ~ K e r f -- T. In this sense we represent replies to queries through the algebra U ~. Note that not the whole algebra VD, but only a part, i.e all possible f 9 u, f ~ FD, is represented in U ~. So, we describe the database by means of the single algebra U '. Indeed, queries are elements of U ~, states are elements of Spec U ~, and replies have just been defined. A database, constructed in such a way, we will consider as a d e d u c t i v e d a t a b a s e (compare [Sc]). The motivation for such a name is that all the components of a DB are described syntactically, and the reply is constructed by deductive means. Having in mind the idea of a category of these new DBs, let us make further observations. Now, we intend to introduce the category o f d e d u c t i v e DBs. As usual, we fix 69, X, W and ~ , and let U be a HA in this scheme. Take also D ~ 69 and extend the scheme with its help, passing to W ~ -- W D and U ~ -- U o . We have W o -W 9 D'. A homomorphism 3" D1 ~ D2 in 69, induces a homomorphism ~" W D1 --~ W D2 , which is the identity on W. A homomorphism 6 naturally induces a homomorphism of algebras of formulas L ~ W D~ --+ L @ W D2 . Let now s ~ End W D1 be given by the map s ' X --+ W DI . A map s$'X

--+ W D2 is defined by the rule s $ ( x ) -- s ( x ) ~. It gives a homomorphism of semi-

groups ~" End W D1 ~ End wD2. Simultaneously we get a homomorphism of Halmos algebras ~t. uD1 _~ uD2.

It is a homomorphism with varying semigroup, i.e. 3' (su) = 3(s)6' (u). The homomorphism ~' turns out to be an epimorphism if 3" D1 - + Dx is. Given homomorphisms S'D1 -+ D2 and (" U1 --~ U2 in the scheme of the variety 69, we have also the canonical embeddings U1 --~ U yl and U2 --~ U ~ 2 . The homomorphism 6" End W D1 --~ End W D2 allows us to consider an algebra U~ 2 as a HA in the scheme End wD1. Canonical embeddings give the opportunity to extend ( to ('" U yl -~ U~ 2 , with both algebras being considered in the scheme End W D1 . The same ( ' can be considered as

B. Plotkin

126

a homomorphism of algebras with varying semigroup, i.e. (su)C' a commutative diagram

U1

_

_

r s$u . This leads us to

> U2

with vertical arrows defined by the corresponding canonical embeddings. The homomorphism ~,I coincides with 61 for trivial ~'. Let now K be a category ofpairs (D, U), where D ~ O, and U is an algebra of calculus in H A o . In these U only the set of symbols of relations 4~ changes, while the variety O, the set of sorts F , and the set of variables X are permanent. Morphisms in K are pairs (6, ~'), where ~':U1 --+ U2 is a homomorphism of HAs and 6 : D l --+ D2 is a homomorphism of data algebras. Denote by K t the category of HAs of the kind U o, in which algebras are considered as algebras with varying semigroups End W ~ Morphisms in K' are pairs (6, ~'), with ~'" U( ~ --+ U~ 2 a homomorphism of the corresponding quantifier algebraS, and if u c U y ~ and s ~ End W ~ , then (su) ~ -- s$u ~ . By a quantifier algebra we mean a HA without action of the semigroup End W. As we know, objects in K I have some deductive meaning. The above diagram defines a functor K ~ K I. It assigns to an object (D, U) in K the object U D, and a morphism in K is transformed to (6, ~.i), defined by the diagram. This functor induces a functor for the corresponding categories of DBs, see Theorem 3.12. Along with a category of pairs (D, U) we can consider a category of triples (D, U, F) which is naturally correlated with the category of passive DBs in the sense that 4~ defines U. This category of triples we denote by DB~ The category of all u D with distinguished maximal filters is denoted by DB d (O). This category can be well defined, and it can be treated as a category o f deductive DBs. The transition K ~ K I leads to the following statement. THEOREM 3.12. There is a natural embedding functor for categories DB~ DB a (6)). Let us give a sketch of the proof. Morphisms in the category DB~ have the form (6, ~', c~) : (D2, U2, F2) --+ (Dl, Ul, Fl), where (6, ~'): (DI, Ul) ~ (D2, U2) is a morphism in K, and c~ : F2 ~ Fl is a map, such that

f~ ,u--(f

,ur

&

f E F2 u c UI

This condition means also, that/z ~ f c , , u r #6 c f 9 u ~, where/z c Hom(W, D1), ht6 ~ Hom(W, D2). ! ! ! Let us pass to the algebras W o~ _ W 9D 1 and W 02 _ W 9D 2, where D 1 is a syntactical ! ! copy of the algebra D1 with isomorphism V l ' D 1 ~ D1. The same for v z ' D 2 ~ D2. Simultaneously we pass to UD ~ and U 2 2.


127

The inclusion/x 6 f ~ 9 u is equivalent to the inclusion suu ~ Ker fc~, where stz -- v 1 1/x and the kernel is calculated in the algebra U ~ ~. Correspondingly, lz3 ~ f 9 u ~ r162susu ~ 6 Ker f. Here sus -- v21 (#3), and Ker f is evaluated in the algebra U 2 2 . So, we have s# u 6 Ker fc~ ~ slzs u ~ 6 Ker f. Let us now investigate the element s~sur First write down a commutative diagram --I 1)1

/

D1

~ D1

D2

v2-1~ D~

Here 3 f =

Pl

S P2 1. For every x c X

s,,(x)

= v 2 l ( " s ) ( x ) - v ; 1( s ( u ( x ) )

' Therefore, sus -- s , , sus u ~ = s~u ~ -- ( s , u ) r

~ (x). where ~i is constructed from ~ according to

the transition K --+ K I. Hence, stzu ~ Ker f ~ r (s#u) ~' 6 Ker f . Now we come to the point where we have to give the definition of the category DB d (69) in more detail. An object o f this category is a pair (M, u D ) , where M is a set o f maximal filters in u D , which are kernels of homomorphisms of the kind u D __+ VD. Elements of M are regarded as states of "databases", and the u 6 u o are considered to be queries. In order to speak of replies to queries, let us define a set End ~ consisting of s 6 End W D, such that s ( x ) is always contained in the corresponding D f. A reply to a query u in a state T ~ M is a set of all s 6 E n d ~ o, for which su ~ T. Let us recall once more, that the filter T can be replaced by the description To and we speak of those s, for which su is derivable from To. Comparing it with the standard approach in DBs, we see that everything returns to the starting point. Morphisms in DB a (69) have the form

where fi :M2 --+ M1 is a map of sets and (3, ( ) defines a h o m o m o r p h i s m of Halmos algebras U D1 ~ U~)2 with varying semigroup End W D. The h o m o m o r p h i s m 6"D1 --+ D2 defines ~" End W D1 --+ End W D2 . We assume also that fi, 6 and ~ are linked by the following condition: for every T 6/142, u 6 U D~ and s 6 E n d ~ D1 an inclusion su ~ T3 is

B. Plotkin

128 ~

equivalent to the inclusion (su)r -- s~u ~ ~ T. In other words, s belongs to the reply to a query u in the state T~ if and only if s ~ 6 E n d ~ D2 belongs to the reply to the query ur in the state T. This ends the precise description of the category of deductive databases. Finally, let us consider the transition DB~

---+DBd(O).

Let a database (D, U, F) be an object in DB ~ (69). Passing to the algebra U D, consider for every f 6 F the homomorphism f " u o ~ VD. Let T -- Ker f . The set of all such T for all f 6 F defines M = M(F). Thus, we have (M, uD). Let now a homomorphism of passive databases (3, (, ct) : (D2, U2, F2) --~ (D1, U1, Fl) be given. A map a : F 2 -+ FI naturally defines/3:M2 --+ M1, and (3, () defines a homomorphism (3, ( ' ) ' U y~ -+ U D2. Now (/~, 6, (')" (M2, UD2) -+ (MI, U DI ) is a morphism in the category DB d (69). So, we described the functor from DB ~ (69) to DB d (O). We have finished the sketch to the proof of Theorem 3.12. This theorem can be used when we constructing a model of computations in a DB (see also [CM]). Observe finally that we had already (2.2.4) the transition from passive databases to active ones. Now we have constructed the transition from passive databases to deductive ores.

3.3. Categories and databases 3.3.1. Preview. The study of DB problems from the point of view of categorical semantics has developed in numerous directions. There are categorical semantics of logic in DBs, categorical aspects in the theory of computations and programming, categorical understanding of various general problems in DBs. We draw attention on two special collection of papers [Cat,Appl], devoted to these topics, and also to the papers [Vi,Ge]. Nice research on categories in databases in general, were made by E. Beniaminov [Ben5]. Recall now the ties with categories already mentioned in this survey. First of all, this is the concept of an algebraic theory, as a category of special form. An algebra is regarded as a functor from this category into some other category, and homomorphisms of algebras are the natural transformations of such functors. An algebraic theory corresponds to a variety, which can be treated as a data type. In fact, algebraic theory itself can be regarded as a data type. Categorical definition of algebraic theory gives rise to the categorical description of first-order logic, which in its turn leads to the idea of relational algebra. In 3.3.2 we will consider DB models, based on this idea. Finally, DBs in some scheme constitute a category, depending on the given scheme. We will outline connections between the categories, which appear when the scheme is changed. 3.3.2. Databases from the point of view of relational algebras. As was pointed out, in algebraic logic there are three approaches to the algebraization of first-order logic. In this


129

paper we used the approach based on polyadic Halmos algebras. The second possibility is to proceed from cylindric algebras, but this approach is less convenient. Now we will apply a third approach. Let T be an algebraic theory, which is considered as a database scheme. Recall that (see 1.3.2) a data algebra D is an object in Alg T and a relational algebra is an object in Rel T. We consider ,-automata of the type (F, Q, R), where Q and R are relational algebras. To every state f E F corresponds a homomorphism f " Q --~ R, which is a natural transformation of functors. Each (F, Q, R) is a system of Boolean automata (F, Q(r), R ( r ) ) with one and the same F. Here Q ( r ) and R ( r ) are the Boolean algebras, r is an object of the category T. In every such automaton the operation is defined through the corresponding homomorphisms of the Boolean algebras f ( r ) : Q ( r ) --+ R(r). All these Boolean automata are compatible with the morphisms of the category T and with the corresponding operations in relational algebras. Let us define the universal automaton in the category of relational algebras Atm(D) = (FD, U, VD). We have to assume that to the scheme T the set of symbols of relations O and the set of variables X with n :X ~ F are added. Recall that the set of sorts/-" is used already in the definition of the category T. In fact, the set X -- (Xi, i c F) also sits in T, if take into account the correspondence between the category T and the variety tO = Alg(T). We need that all Xi have to be countable. An algebra D is a functor D: T --+ Set and the relational algebra Vo is defined by

VD -- (Sub o D ) ' T ~ Bool. The definition of the algebra U is more difficult. The algebra U is connected with the calculus and for the construction of the relational algebra U one has to get the "relational" analogue of the calculus. But we choose another way and use Theorem 1.10 from Section 1. Given a scheme, take first the Halmos algebra U specialized in the variety | By the theorem mentioned above, to the Halmos algebra U corresponds some relational algebra T --+ Bool, which is also denoted by U. For FD one can take the set Hom(U, VD), which appears as a set of natural transformations. Note here, that the relational algebra Vo could be also constructed proceeding from the Halmos algebra Vo and in this case the whole database (F o, U, Vo) is defined in the similar way using Theorem 1.10. Let us pay attention to one fact, connected with the application of Theorem 1.10. We speak about Boolean algebras U ( r ) and V(r). With the object r some finite set Y = (Yi, i ~ F) C X is associated. Let Y = X \ Y. Then U ( r ) = 3(Y)U and Vo(r) -- 3(Y) VD, where the U and Vo on fight-hand sides are HAs. The algebras 3(Y)U and 3(Y)Vo are also HAs, but in the scheme, where X is replaced by the set Y. If W(Y) is the free algebra over Y in O, then the semigroup End W(Y) acts on these algebras. The algebra 3(Y)Vo can be constructed as the algebra Vo in the new scheme. The same procedure for the algebra of calculus cannot be done. However, in the algebra 3(Y)U there is a subalgebra in the new scheme, generated by all elementary formulas. It is "similar" to U in the new scheme,

B. Plotkin

130

but it is less than the initial 3(Y)U. Thus, we avoid all the difficulties which are associated with infinity of the sets Xi. Let us return to the universal relational database Atm(D) = (FD, U, VD). It is a system of Boolean automata (FD, U ( r ) , VD(r)). An arbitrary relational DB is an automaton (F, Q, R), which is considered together with a representation p = (oe,/3, y) : (F, Q, R) ~ (FD, U, VD),

where c~ : F ~ FD is a mapping, ~ : U ~ Q and y : R --+ VD are homomorphisms, i.e. natural transformations of relational algebras. The definition of a DB in the language of relational algebras has some advantages in comparison with the approach based on HAs. One of them is that every possible query is in fact an element of some small Boolean algebra U ( r ) and the reply is calculated in the corresponding VD(r). In this case, notation of a query u 9 U ( r ) can be adjusted to manipulating in other similar Boolean algebras. Various c~, and c~* (see Section 1) are used along with Boolean operations. In practice, a query represented by more natural first-order language, should be rewritten by means of operations of relational algebra. The operations of relational algebra are easier in practical realization, and this is one more advantage of the approach based on relational algebras. For each given theory T one can consider a category of relational DBs, depending on T, and connected with the similar category of Halmos DBs. Denote this category by DB(T). On the other hand, if ~ : T ~ T' is a morphism of theories, then it links the categories of DBs: ~p* : DB(T') ~ DB(T). We will not consider this connection in more detail. Note only the particular case, when for the corresponding 6) and O' there is an inclusion O' C O and the morphism ~p is connected with this inclusion. 3.3.3. Changing the set of variables. In the scheme of a DB we will preserve the variety 6) and will change the set of variables X. Let us examine how this change influences the Halmos algebras U and Vo (see also 3.3.2). Let X be a set, Y a subset, W = W ( X ) be the free algebra over X in O, and W(Y) the analogous algebra over Y, W ( Y ) C W(X). We have Hom(W(X), D), Hom(W(Y), D), D e O. To every /z 9 Hom(W(X), D) corresponds its restriction to W(Y), denoted by #v = #~. It is clear that the map c~ :Hom(W(X), D) --+ Hom(W(Y), D) is a surjection. Let, further, MD(X) = Sub(Hom(W(X), D)). MD(Y) is defined similarly. A monomorphism of Boolean algebras oe, : MD(Y) ~ MD(X) corresponds to the surjection oe. For any X and Y these algebras are simultaneously algebras in the variety HA(u), but, generally, in different schemes, because X and Y are different. A direct verification shows that c~, is a homomorphism of HAs, considered in different schemes. It is also easily checked that A A = Ac~, A


131

holds for every A ~ M D ( Y ) , A A being the support of an element A. This implies that the homomorphism or. induces a homomorphism or, " VD(Y) ----> VD(X).

Let now Y -- X \ Y. Denote by 3(Y) V D ( X ) a set of all elements 3(Y)A, where A ~ VD(X). Then 3(Y)VD(X) is a subalgebra in VD(X), considered in the scheme of the set Y. It is straightforward that this subalgebra is the image of the homomorphism c~.. We have seen how changing the set of variables X influences the Halmos algebra VD. Now let us observe what happens with the algebra U of calculus. This algebra is constructed for X -- (Xi, i ~ I') with infinite Xi. If Y is a subset in X, then it is possible to pass from U to 3 ( Y ) U , which is a subalgebra of U, considered in the scheme of the set Y. We follow the methods used in the previous subsection. Consider a set U0 C U of basic elements with attributes from Y. Denote by U (Y) a subalgebra in U in the scheme of the set Y, generated by U0. It is evident that it is contained in 3 ( Y ) U and we can show that these subalgebras are different in general. It is also clear that the algebra U is a union of the various U (Y) with finite Y. 3.3.4. Generalizations. Generalizations can be carried out by taking instead of the category Set some topos, say the topos of fuzzy sets. Then we get DBs with fuzzy information. It is possible also to consider other categories L, which take into account, in particular, modalities, and to make generalizations in the spirit of the paper of Z. Diskin [Dis 1]. If in a DB there is changing of states, regulated by some semigroup, then such DB is a dynamical one (see [BP13] for details). 3.3.5. Computations in databases. Computation of a reply to a query is one of the main aims of databases, and therefore DBs are often considered as one of the directions of theoretical programming. Intending to link models and computations, we use ideas of constructive algebras [BP13], to which research of A. Malcev [Mal2], Ju. Ershov [Er], S. Goncharov [Gon], etc., are devoted. These ideas are also applicable in DBs, however up to the moment there is no stable definition of a constructive DB. We can distinguish in DBs two levels of constructivization. On one of them it is supposed that the main operations allow computable realization, while on the other level the corresponding procedures of computations are directly pointed out. The functioning of a DB assumes the second level. For example, finite DBs are obviously constructive, but they have to be provided with algorithms and programs. In the category of (finite) DBs we can use also the general abstract ideas of computability. One such abstract idea is based on the categorical notion of comonad, which is dual to that of monad. Let us give definitions ([Man,MacL,AL] et al.). Given a category C, a comonad over C is a triple (T, ~, 8), with an endofunctor T : C --+ C and natural transformations offunctors e : T ---> I and ~ : T --+ T 2, where I is the identity functor. For every object A from C, the object T ( A ) is an object o f computations in A, and the transition eA" T ( A ) --> A

132

B. Plotkin

connects computations with their results. The functor T 2 represents computations over computations, 6 connects T and T 2. These three components of a comonad have to satisfy the commutative diagrams:

T(A)
T ( A ) T(A) ~A T2 > (a) /dT(a)'a I 1ST(A)

IdT(A)~TsA T(A)

T2(A) T(SA)>T3(A)

Monads (T, r/,/z) are defined dually. The natural transformations in monads are r/: I ~ T a n d / z : T 2 --+ T. The definition of comonad is given here in the semantics of an abstract theory of computations (for details and references see in [BG,E1,RB]). A monad in C allows us to speak of algebras over objects from C. If for C we take the category Set or a category of/-'-sort sets Set r , then we obtain another interpretation of the notion of algebra and another view on varieties of algebras (see details in [MacL]). Monads and comonads are closely related to composition of adjoint functors. The use of the notion of comonad as an abstract idea of computations has an essential peculiarity. For every object A from C the corresponding object of computations T ( A ) is also an object in C, or else we cannot speak of T 2, T 3, etc. Not every category C is well adapted to this abstract concept of computations and not every abstract idea of computations leads to specific calculations. In the last section we will consider how to construct monads and comonads in the category of databases. As we have mentioned, our main goal is to connect a DB model with a model of computations. The problem is reduced, in particular, to the question how to organize an object of computations in the given DB in such a way that procedures of computations in the DB become in some sense, elements of the given object, or they become morphisms which are associated with this object. It would be nice if computations in a DB could be represented as some other DB. There is another approach to computations in a DB. We can consider a category C, which is also connected with the notion of DBs, such that there exists a canonical functor T from the category of DBs under consideration into C. As for the category C, we assume that computations in the form of comonad T1 are well organized in it. The composition of functors T T1, hopefully, constructs objects of computations in DBs. It is not clear yet how it can be realized, and this problem is still open. Probably for the category C we can take the category of deductive databases DB d(O), considered in 3.2.6 (see Theorem 3.12). The main tool in deductive databases is logical programming. It would be beautiful to associate logical programming with some comonad in the category DB d (69).

3.3.6. Computations infinite databases. In 3.3.3 the union of the algebras U (Y), with finite Y. Here and assume that the data algebra D and the set of the set of states Fo is also finite. Take a query u 6

we saw that the algebra U of calculus is we consider computations in finite DBs symbols or relations 9 are finite. Then U and choose a finite set Y, containing


133

all attributes, such that u 6 U (Y). To this Y corresponds a finite Halmos algebra Vo (Y) in the scheme of the set Y. Besides that, for every f there holds f 9 u = f ( u ) ~ VD(Y). A query u is expressed explicitly by basic queries u0 6 U0. A value f ( u 0 ) is known for every u0. Hence, we can compute f ( u ) , using the fact that VD(Y) is finite. There is another approach to the computation of a reply to a query, based on deductive methods. In order to use them, let us note that for a finite model (D, q~, f ) in an extended scheme U', a finite description can be constructed. Such a description can be reduced to one element v 6 U t with empty support. As we know, an inclusion # 6 f 9 u holds if and only if the element su is derivable from the description v. But this is equivalent to the inequality v F ' is a map. The arrow v has the same direction as v2, while v~ and v3 have the opposite direction. Besides that, we assume that for each f 6 F the following commutative diagram holds

Q

!

V2

> Q

I

Rt

l-'

RI

There are two other possibilities for arranging of directions of the arrows. In each of them we get different categories DB(C). 3.4.3. Comonads in C and in DB(C). Let us consider DB(C) with morphisms of the second kind. For some /3:Q' ---> Q and a database (F, Q, R) let us construct a special morphism of such kind. For every f 6 F we take f u = f l f : Q ' ~ R, where f u Horn(Q:, R). We have a map t ~ : F --+ Hom(Q', R). Let F ' = Imc~, F ' C Hom(Q', R). Then, there is a database (F', Q', R). Consider the triple (ct,/3, 1), where u is considered as a map F --+ F ~. The commutative diagram holds

Q,

t~ > Q

:~:=:~I l I: R ~.

R

Thus, the morphism fl: Q' --+ Q gives the database (F', Q', R) and defines the morphism (ct,/3, 1) : (F', Q', R) ~ (F, Q, R). Note, that if/3 is an epimorphism then ct: F --+ F: is a bijection. Suppose now that in the category C there is a comonad (T, e, 6), such that for each object Q the morphism eQ : T ( Q ) ~ Q is an epimorphism. Now we want to construct a comonad (T, ~, $) in the category DB(C). Given a database (F, Q, R), define

T(F,Q,R)-(FT,

T(Q),R).

Here, we start with the epimorphism EQ" T(Q) --+ Q and using EQ - - fl we get F r = F t. The corresponding or: F ~ F' is denoted by ~Q and then there is an epimorphism

(~Q, eQ, 1 ) ' ( F T, T(Q), R) ~ (F, Q, R). This epimorphism is taken as E ( F , Q , R ) . We have ~" T --+ I. Now we should define T as a functor. For every V = (Vl, 192,193) : (F', Q', R') ~ (F, Q, R),


137

one needs to define ;r(v) -- ;r(F', Q', R') --+ T(F, Q, R). We set 7~(v) = (v (, T(v2), v3), where v~r is determined by the diagram

FT

Q, 1)3 "R' ~ R, with the commutative diagram

Q

l

Rt

>R

Let (T, s, 8) be a comonad in C. Let us construct a comonad over (T, s, 8) in the category DB(C). As earlier, denote it by (T, g, ~). Take a database (F, Q, R). Given Q and R, consider the map TQ,R "Hom(Q, R) --+ H o m ( T Q , TR) defined by T Q , R ( f ) = T ( f ) if f 6 Horn(Q, R). Let To be the restriction of the map TQ,R to F, T(F) -- ImT0, T ( F ) C H o m ( T Q , TR). We have To" F --+ T(F), and also a DB

T(F, Q, R) -- (T(F), TQ, TR). From now on we assume that the functor T has the following property. If fl " Q --+ R and f2" Q --+ R are different morphisms, then T (fl)" T Q ~ T R and T (f2)" T Q --+ T R are also different. This property gives a bijection T (F) --+ F. Let us define 7~ as a functor. Given a morphism of the third kind 1) = (Vl, 1)2, 1)3) " (F', Q', R') --+ (F, Q, R), we have to define

~(v) - (v~, v;, v;). (T(F'), TQ', TR') -+ (T(F), TQ, TR). We define v' according to the commutative diagram

F

To > T(F) T I

f~

o

1

T(F')

B. Plotkin

140

' Setting 7~ (v) = (v~, 1)2' -- T (1)2), 1)3' -where To and T~ are bijections, and v I' -- To 1vl T0. T (1)3)), we get a functor 2?. Now, use the natural map e" T ~ I. For each f " Q --+ R there is a commutative diagram

TQ

ea

~Q

r~f)1 ~ TR

If ~R

In particular, this is true for f 6 F. We have the morphism of the third kind

(To, eQ, e R ) ' ( T ( F ) , T Q , TR) --+ (F, Q,R).

E(F,Q,R).

Denote it by We get a natural transformation ~" 7~ ~ I. The functor T can be applied also to T(F). We obtain TZ(F). The bijection TZ(F) --+ T (F), which is valid in this case, is denoted by Tl. 6"T --+ T 2 is a natural transformation by the definition of comonad, hence there is a commutative diagram

TQ

~Q

T(f) 1 TR

~ T2Q 1 T2(f)

~R

~ T2R

for every f " Q ~ R. If f 6 F, then T ( f ) ~ T(F), T 2 ( f ) E T2(F) and T l ( T 2 ( f ) ) -- T ( f ) . This diagram means also, that we have a morphism of the third kind

(TI,~Q,~R)" ( T ( F ) , TQ, TR) --+ (T2(F), T2Q, T2R), which could be rewritten as

~(F,Q,R)"7"(F, Q, R) --+ 7v'2(F, Q, R). It can be checked that 6" T ---> ~2 is a natural transformation of functors. This leads to the following result, which is valid under the restriction mentioned on T. THEOREM 3.1 4. The triple (T, ~, 6) is a comonad in the category of databases DB(C) with morphisms of the third kind. 3.4.6. Monads in C and DB(C). Now the category DB(C) is a category with morphisms of the first kind. Let (T, 77, tt) be a monad in C. Let us construct a monad (T, ~, 12) in the category DB(C) over (T, ~/, #). We assume that the functor T satisfies the same condition,


141

as in 3.4.5. If (F, Q, R) is an object in DB(C), then we have a bijection To" F --+ T(F). We set

J'(F, Q, R) = (T(F), T Q, TR). Given a morphism 1) =

(1)1,1)2, 1)3) " ( F ,

Q, R) ~ (F', Q' R')

we have 7~(v) = (v~, T(v2), T(v3))" T(F, Q, R) ---> 7~(F r, Q', R'), where v 1r is defined, as earlier, by a commutative diagram. For every f " Q --+ R

Q

fl R

oo.>TQ

1 T(f)=TO(f) OR> T R

This diagram means that, defining the first kind

O(F,Q,R)-- (To, ~IQ,OR), we get a homomorphism of

~(F,Q,R) " (F, Q, R) ---->it(F, Q, R) -- (T(F), T Q, TR).

The morphism ~" I ~ T is a natural transformation. We should also define/2" ~2 _.~ ~. As in the previous subsection, we take/'1" T 2 (F) --~ T (F). Let

fiZ(F,Q,R)-- (T1,/ZQ,/ZR)" T2(F,

Q, R) --> 7~(F, Q, R).

It is easily verified that 12 is a natural transformation. THEOREM 3.15. The triple (T, ~,/2) is a monad in the category of databases DB(C) with morphisms of the first kind. As we already know, comonads are associated with evaluations, while monads enrich objects of categories. In particular, monads in the category of DBs lead to enrichment of DB structure. Let us consider the connection between monads and algebras (see details in [MacL]), and then make some remarks on applications to DBs.

142

B. Plotkin

Let C be a category and (T,)7,/z) be a monad in C. A T-algebra in C is a pair (A, h), where A is an object in C and h : T A ~ A is some morphism, which is regarded as a representation. Besides that, two commutative diagrams should hold: rlA

A

TA

T2A

A

T(A)

T(h)

> T(A)

>A

A morphism f : ( A , h) --+ (A I, h t) is an arrow f : A diagram TA

TA t

h

~

A ~ in C with a commutative

~-A

~ Af

An adjunction, defining the source monad (T,)7,/z), is connected with the category C 7" of T-algebras and the category C. This construction can be applied, in particular, to Example 3.4.4. The product G F from this example gives a monad (T, r/,/z) in the category RSet. Then we have (RSet) T = IfHAr .

The precise meaning of this statement is the following. The category RSet r is equivalent to a subcategory in IfHAc.), and each locally finite algebra H from HAs-) up to an isomorphism can be realised in this subcategory. Let us now pass to the category DB(C) with the monad (i", ~,/2). Consider an "algebra" ((F, Q, R), h) for a DB (F, Q, R). Here h = (hi, h2, h3): ( T ( F ) , T Q, T R ) --> (F, Q, R) is a morphism of DBs, satisfying the necessary conditions. It follows from these conditions that the map h i : T ( F ) --> F is inverse to the bijection T o : F ---> T ( F ) . In particular, it means that h l is defined uniquely by the functor T and the map h l is one and the same for all h for the given (F, Q, R). The algebra ((F, Q, R), h) is an object of the category DB(C) ~. We want to represent it as a DB which is an object in the category DB(CT). For this aim let us give several propositions which can be checked directly. PROPOSITION 3.16. A morphism h - (hi -- T o l , h 2 , h 3 ) ' ( T ( F ) , T Q , T R ) --+ (F, Q, R)


143

defines an algebra over database (F, Q, R) if and only if the morphisms h2 " T Q ---> Q and h3 " T R --+ R define algebras over Q and R respectively.

Note that, given the algebra ((F, Q, R), h), the elements of the set F are simultaneously morphisms from Hom((Q, he), (R, h3)). Indeed, since h is a morphism of DBs, we have commutative diagrams for every 99 6 T (F)" TQ

h2>Q

h3

TR

~R

Let us take q9 = T ( f ) -- To(f). TQ

T h e n q9hi =

f and the diagram can be rewritten as

hZ>Q

h3

TR-----+R

But this means that f defines a morphism (Q, h 2 ) ~ (R, h3). Thus, the algebra ((F, Q, R), h) defines a DB (F, (Q, h2), (R, h3)). It is an object of the category DB(CT). PROPOSITION 3.17. Given a database (F, (Q, h2), (R, h3)), the triple h = (hi = To 1 h2, h3) is a morphism h" T(F, Q, R) --> (F, Q, R).

By the previous proposition, this morphism defines an algebra ((F, Q, R), h). PROPOSITION 3.18. A morphism V = ( V l , P2,

V3) " (F, Q, R) --+ (F', Q', R')

defines a morphism of algebras ((F, Q, R), h) --+ ((F', Q', R'), h'), with h - (hi, h2, h3), h' -- (h], hi2, h~3), if and only if this v defines a morphism of databases

(F, (Q, h2), (R, h3)) --+ (F', (Q', h~), (R', h;)). All this means that the following theorem holds. THEOREM 3.1 9. Transitions of the type ((F, Q, R), h) ~ (F, (Q, h2), (R, h3)) define an equivalence of categories DB(C) 7~and DB(CT).

144

B. Plotkin

The categories D B ( C T ) and DB(C)7~, where T and T are the corresponding comonads are similarly related. 3.4.7. Remarks. Let us first consider a special monad. Let C be a category in which the coproduct of every two objects is defined. For a fixed object B, let us define T (A) = A 9 B for every A, with 9 as a sign for the coproduct. T is an endofunctor of the category C. Given A and B, we have morphisms iA : A ~ T ( A ) and iB : B --+ T ( A ) . Setting r ] A : iA, we get that 7/: I ~ T is a natural transformation. Let us pass to T2(A) = (A 9 B) 9 B. Starting with the unity morphism e A , B and i8, define//,A : T 2 A ~ T A . We have here a natural transformation/z: T 2 ----> T. It is verified that the triple (T, r/,/z) is a monad in C. Let now a morphism h : A 9 B --+ A define a T-algebra (A, h). Then iA h = eA. Denote h 1 = iBh : B --+ A. Then h l and e A define the initial h. Given an arbitrary h l : B ~ A, take e A : A ~ A. We have h :A 9 B --+ A. It is checked that h defines T-algebra (A, h), which is defined also by the morphism h l : B ---> A. Hence, T-algebras in C are "algebras" A, considered together with some morphism h :B --+ A. Let, in particular, 69 be a variety of algebras, considered as the category C, and let D be an algebra in 69. D plays the role of the object B. In this case the category c T is the variety O', which was considered in Section 3.2 in the problem of introducing a data algebra into the logic of queries. Let us now turn to other questions. Note first of all, that if C is a category and (T, r/,/z) is a monad in C, then not always an object A from C allows T-enrichment. For example, a structure of Boolean algebra can not be defined on every set, and not each semigroup can be simultaneously considered as a ring. Not every HA can be regarded as an algebra with equalities. However, objects of the kind TA always allow the desired enrichment. One can proceed from h = / z A " T (T A) --+ T A. An algebra (T A, b/,A) is a T-algebra, which is free over A, like semigroup ring over some semigroup. Given T-algebra (A, h), the morphism h : TA ---> A defines a morphism (TA,/XA) ''> (A, h). If an object A doesn't allow Tenrichment, then one can put a question about embedding of A into some B, which allows T-structure. Embedding can be understood here as embedding as a subobject or quotientobject. Transition from A to TA is such an example. These ideas can be used when we want to embed a HA into a HA with equalities. The same considerations can be applied to DBs. Returning to the monad defined by TA -- A 9 B, we can note now that an object A 9 B is simultaneously a T-algebra, free over A. Recall in this connection that a free Or-algebra W', considered in Section 3.2, was represented as W' = W 9 D with the free O-algebra W.

Conclusion As we have seen, algebra and categories play a significant part in the theory of DBs. On the other hand, algebra itself is enriched by new substantial structures. The role of algebraic logic, associated with a variety 69, is outstanding. In this way it founds numerous application in algebra.


145

References [ABCD] S. Ageshin, I. Beylin, B. Cadish and Z. Diskin, Outline of AGO: Algebraic graph-oriented approach to specification and design of data management systems, Frame Inform Systems, Riga, Report FIS/DBDL 9401 (1994). [Ag] V.N. Agafonov, Abstract data types, Data in Programming Languages, Mir Publ., Moscow (1982) (in Russian). [AL] A. Asperti and G. Longo, Category Theory for the Working Computer Scientist, The MIT Press, Cambridge, MA (1991). [AN] H. Andreka and I. Nemeti, Importance of universal algebra for computer science, Universal Algebra and Links with Logic, Algebra, Combinatorics and Computer Science, Berlin (1984), 204-215. [ANSI H. Andreka, I. Nemeti and I. Sain, Abstract model theory approach to algebraic logic, Preprint (1992). [Appl] Applications of Categories in Computer Science, London Math. Soc. Lect. Notes Series, Vol. 177, Cambridge University Press (1991). [Ban] E Bancilhon, On the completeness of query language for relational databases, Lecture Notes in Comput. Sci., Vol. 64, Springer, Berlin (1978), 112-123. [BB] G. Birkhoff and T.C. Bartee, Modern Applied Algebra, McGraw-Hill (1974). [Benl] E.M. Beniaminov, The algebraic structure of relational models of databases, NTI (Ser. 2) 9 (1980), 23-25 (in Russian). [Ben2] E.M. Beniaminov, Galois theory of complete relational subalgebras of algebras of relations, logical structures, symmetry, NTI (Ser. 2) (1980) (in Russian). [Ben3] E.M. Beniaminov, On the role of symmetry in relational models of databases and in logical structures, NTI (Ser. 2) 5 (1984), 17-25 (in Russian). [Ben4] E.M. Beniaminov, An algebraic approach to models of relational databases, Semiotika i Informatika 14 (1979), 44-80 (in Russian). [Ben5] E.M. Beniaminov, Foundations of the categorical approach to knowledge representation, Izv. Akad. Nauk SSSR (Ser. Tekhn. Kibern.) (1988), 21-33 (in Russian). [BG] S. Brookes and S. Geva, Computational comonads and intensional semantics, Applications of Categories in Comp. Sci., Cambridge Univ. Press (1991), 1--44. [BK] V.B. Borschev and M.V. Khomyakov, On informational equivalence of databases, NTI (Ser. 2) 7 (1979), 14-21 (in Russian). [BL] G. Birkhoff and J. Lipson, Heterogeneous algebras, J. Comb. Theory 8 (1) (1970), 115-133. [BMSU] C. Beeri, A. Mendelzon, Y. Sagiv and J. Ullman, Equivalence of relational database schemes, ACM (1979), 319-329. [BN] H. Biller and E. Neuhold, Semantics of data bases: the semantics of data models, Information Systems 3 (1978), 11-30. [Bo] S.N. Bojko, Galois theory of databases, DBMS and Environment Package. Problems of Design and Application, Riga (1985), 43-45 (in Russian). [Bor] V.B. Borschev, A logical approach to description of relational databases, Semiotica i Informatica 16 (1980), 78-122 (in Russian). [BP] W.J. Blok and D. Pigozzi, Algebraizable logics, Memoirs Amer. Math. Soc. 77 (396) (1989). [BPll] B.I. Plotkin, Models and databases, Trudy VCAN Gruz. SSR 21 (2) (1982), 50-78 (in Russian). [BP12] B.I. Plotkin, Algebraic model of database, Latv. Math. Ezhegodnik 27 (1983), 216-232 (in Russian). [BP13] B.I. Plotkin, Universal Algebra Algebraic Logic and Databases, Kluwer Academic Publishers (1994). [BP14] B.I. Plotkin, Galois theory of databases, Lect. Notes in Math., Vol. 1352 (1988), 147-162. [BP15] B.I. Plotkin, Algebraic logic, varieties of algebras, and algebraic varieties, Jerusalem, Preprint (1995). [Brl] S.A. Borkin, Data model equivalence, Proc. of 4th Conf. on the Very Large Data Bases, IEEE, NJ (1978), 526-534. [Br2] S.A. Borkin, Data Models: A Semantic Approach for Database Systems, The MIT Press (1980). [BW] S.L. Bloom and E.G. Wagner, Many-sorted theories and their algebras with some applications to data tipes, Algebraic Methods in Semantics, Cambridge Univ. Press (1985), 133-168.

146

B. Plotkin

[Cat] Category Theory and Computer Programming, Lecture Notes in Comput. Sci., Vol. 240, Springer, Berlin (1986). [Cil] J. Cirulis, Manuscript, Riga, Latvian University (December, 1993). [Ci2] J. Cirulis, An algebraization offirst order logic with terms, Algebraic Logic (Proc. Conf. Budapest 1988), North-Holland, Amsterdam (1991), 125-146. [Ci3] J. Cirulis, Superdiagonals of universal algebras, Acta Univ. Latviensis 576 (1992), 29-36. [Ci4] J. Cirulis, Abstract algebras of finitary relations: several non-traditional axiomatizations, Acta Univ. Latviensis 595 (1994), 23-48. [CM] U. Clocksin and K. Mellish, Programming in PROLOG, Springer (1984). [Col] E.E Codd, A relational model of data for large shared data banks, Comm. ACM 13 (6) (1970), 377-387. [Co2] E.E Codd, Normalized data base structure: A brief tutorial, Proc. of 1971 ACM-SIGFIDET Workshop on Data Description. Access and Control, ACM, New York (1971), 1-17. [Co3] E.E Codd, A database sublanguage founded on the relational calculus, Proc. of 1971 ACMSIGFIDET Workshop on Data Description. Access and Control, ACM, New York (1971), 35-68. [Co4] E.E Codd, Further normalization of data base relational model, Data Base Systems, Prentice-Hall, New York (1972), 33-64. [Co5] E.E Codd, Relational database. A practical foundation for productivity, Comm. ACM 25 (1) (1982), 109-117. [D] Y. Kambayashi, Database. A Bibliography, Vols. 1, 2, Comp. Sci. Press (1981). [Da] C.J. Date, An Introduction to Database Systems, Vols. 1, 2, 2nd ed., Addison-Wesley (1983). [Dg] A. Diagneault, On automorphisms ofpolyadic algebras, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 112 (1964), 84130. [Dis 1] Z. Diskin, Poliadic algebras for the nonclassical logics, Riga, Manuscript (1991 ) (unpublished). [Dis2] Z. Diskin, Abstract queries, schema transformations and algebraic theories; An application of categorical algebra to database theory, Frame Inform. Systems, Riga, Report FIS/DBDL 9302 (1993). [Dis3] Z. Diskin, A unifying approach to algebraization of different logical systems, Frame Inform. Systems, Riga, Report FIS/DBDL 9403 (1994). [Dis4] Z. Diskin, When is a semantically defined logic algebraizable, Acta Univ. Latviensis 595 (1994), 57-82. [DC] Z. Diskin and B. Cadish, An application of categorical algebra to databases, Acta Univ. Latviensis 595 (1994), 83-97. [El] C.C. Elgot, Monadic computation and iterative algebraic theories, Proc. Logic Colloquim '73, North-Holland (1975). [Er] Ju.L. Ershov, Decision Problems and Constructive Models, Nauka, Moscow (1980). [Fe] N. Feldman, Cylindric algebras with terms, J. Symb. Logic 55 (1990), 854-866. [Ga] J. Galler, Cylindric and polyadic algebras, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 8 (1957), 176-183. [Ge] J. Georgescu, A categorical approach to knowledge-based systems, Comput. Artificial Int. (1) (1984), 105-113. [GB1] J.A. Goguen and R.M. Burstall, Introducing institutions, Lecture Notes in Comput. Sci., Vol. 164, Springer, Berlin (1984), 221-256. [GB2] J.A. Goguen and R.M. Burstall, Institutions: Abstract model theory for specification and programming, J. ACM 39 (1) (1992), 95-146. [Go] J.A. Goguen, A junction between computer science and category theory I, II, IBM Thomas J. Watson Res. Center, Report RC 6908 (1976). [GoTW] J.A. Goguen, J.W. Thatcher and E.G. Wagner, An initial algebra approach to the specification, correctness and implementation of absract data types, Current Trends in Programming Methology, Prentice-Hall (1978), 80-149. [GoTWW] J.A. Goguen, J.W. Thatcher, E.G. Wagner and J.B. Wright, Introduction to categories, algebraic theories and algebras, IBM Res. Report RC 5369 (1975). [Gol] R. Goldblatt, Topoi- The Categorical Analysis of Logic, North-Holland (1979). [Gon] S.S. Goncharov, Countable Boolean Algebras, Nauka, Novosibirsk (1988) (in Russian). [GPll] G.D. Plotkin, Call-by name, call-by value and s Theoretical Computer Science 1 (1975), 125-159.


147

[GP12] G.D. Plotkin, LCF considered as programming language, Theoretical Computer Science 5 (3) (1977), 223-256. [GP13] G.D. Plotkin, A structural approach to operational semantics, Tech. Dep. Aarchus University, Daimi FN-19 Report (1981). [Gr] P.M. Gray, Logic, Algebras and Databases, Halsted Press, Chichester (1984). [GS] C. Gunter and D. Scott, Semantic domains, Handbook of Theoretical Computer Science, Vol. B: Formal Models and Semantics, MIT Press/Elsevier (1990). [Gue] I. Guessarian, Algebraic Semantics, Lecture Notes in Comput. Sci., Vol. 99, Springer, Berlin (1981). [Gurl] Ju. Gurevich, Toward logic tailored for computational complexity, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 1104, Springer (1984), 175-216. [Gur2] Ju. Gurevich, Logic and the challenge of computer science, Trends in Theoretical Computer Science, Computer Science Press (1989), 1-57. [Hal] P.R. Halmos, Algebraic Logic, Chelsea, New York (1962). [Hig] P.I. Higgins, Algebras with a scheme of operators, Math. Nachr. 27 (1-2) (1963), 115-132. [HMT] L. Henkin, J.D. Monk and A. Tarski, Cylindric Algebras, North-Holland Publ. Co. (1971, 1985). [IL] T. Imielinski and W. Lipski, The relational model of data and cylindric algebras, J. Comput. Syst. Sci. 28 (1984), 80-102. [Ja] B.E. Jacobs, On database logic, J. ACM 29 (2) (1982), 310-332. [Jo] P.T. Johnstone, Topos Theory, Academic Press (1977). [Ka] P.C. Kanellakis, Elements of relational database theory, Handbook of Theoretical Computer Science, Vol. 2, Elsevier (1990), 1073-1156. [KI] H. Kleisli, Every standard consrtuction is induced by a pair of adjoint functors, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 16 (1965), 544-546. [KR] A. Kock and G. Reyes, Doctrines in cathegorical logic, Handbook of Mathematical Logic, NorthHolland (1977). [Kr] M.I. Krasner, Gdn(ralization et analoques de la thdorie de Galois, Comptes Rendus de congr6ss de la Victorie de l'Ass. Frac. pour I'Avancem. Sci. (1945), 54--58. [LS] J. Lambek and B. Scott, Introduction to Higher Order Categorical Logic, Cambridge Univ. Press, Cambridge, MA (1980). [Lawl] EW. Lawvere, Functorial semantics of algebraic theories, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 21 (1963), 1-23. [Law2] EW. Lawvere, Functorial semantics of algebraic theories, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 50 (1963), 869-872. [Law3] EW. Lawvere, Some algebraic problems in the context of functorial semantics of algebraic theories, Rep. Midwest Category Seminar II 13 (1968), 41-61. [MacL] S. MacLane, Categories for the Working Mathematician, Springer (1971). [MR] M. Makkai and G. Reyes, First Order Categorical Logic, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 611, Springer (1977). [Mall] A.I. Maltsev, Model correspondences, Izv. AN SSSR (Ser. Math.) 23 (3) (1959), 313-336 (in Russian). [Mal2] A.I. Maltsev, Constructive algebras, Russian Math. Surv. 16 (3) (1961), 3-60. [Mal3] A.I. Maltsev, Algebraic Systems, North-Holland (1973). [Man] E.G. Manes, Algebraic Theories, Springer (1976). [Mar] J. Martin, Computer Data-Base Organization, Prentice-Hall (1977). [MP] E.S. Maftsir and B.I. Plotkin, Automorphism group of database, Ukrainskii Mat. Zh. 40 (3) (1988), 335-345. [Maf] E.S. Maftsir, Galois connections in databases, Latv. Mat. Ezhegodnik 33 (1989), 90-100 (in Russian). [Ma] D. Maier, The Theory of Relational Databases, Comp. Sci. Press (1983). [MG] J. Meseguer and J.A. Goguen, Initiality, induction, and computability, Algebraic Methods in Semantics, Cambridge Univ. Press (1985), 459-541. [MSS] A. Melton, D. Schmidt and G. Strecker, Galois connections and computer science applications, Lecture Notes in Comput. Sci., Vol. 240, Springer, Berlin (1986), 299-312. [Ne] I. Nemeti, Algebraizations of quatifier logics (overwiew), Studia Logica 50 (3/4) (1991), 485-569. [Ner] A. Nerode, Some lectures on modal logic, Logic, Algebra and Computations, Springer (1991), 281335.

148

B. Plotkin

[Ni] M. Nivat, On the interpretation of recursive polyadic program schemes, Symp. Mathematica, Rome 15 (1975), 255-281. [O1] EJ. Oles, Type algebras, functor categories and block structure, Algebraic Methods in Semantics, Cambridge Univ. Press (1985), 543-573. [PGG] B. Plotkin, L. Greenglaz and A. Gvaramija, Algebraic Structures in Automata and Databases Theory, World Sci., Singapore (1992). [RB] D.E. Rydeheard and R.M. Burstall, Monads and theories: a survey for computation, Algebraic Methods in Semantics, Cambridge Univ. Press (1985), 575-605. [Ri] C. Ricardo, Database Systems, Maxwell Macmillan (1990). [Ro] S.M. Rosenberg, Specialized relational and Halmos algebras, Latv. Mat. Ezhegodnik 34 (1993), 219-229 (in Russian). [Sc] D. Scott, Domains for denominational semantics, Lecture Notes in Comput. Sci., Vol. 140, Springer, Berlin (1982), 577-613. [Sy] Database and Knowledge Base Management Systems, Moscow, Finansi i Statistika (1981) (in Russian). [TPll] T. Plotkin, Equivalent transformations of relational databases, Latv. Mat. Ezhegodnik 29 (1985), 137-150 (in Russian). [TP12] T. Plotkin, Algebraic logic in the problem of databases equivalence, Logic Colloquium '94, Clermont-Ferrand, France (1994), 104. [TP1K] T. Plotkin and S. Kraus, Categoricity of a set of axioms and databases' states description, Logic Colloquium '94, Clermont-Ferrand, France (1994), 105. [TPPK] T. Plotldn, S. Kraus and B. Plotkin, Problems of equivalence, categoricity of axioms and states description in databases, Studia Logica 61 (1998), 321-340. [Tsl] M.Sh. Tsalenko, Relational models of databases, Algoritmy Economicheskich Zadach (Moskow), Part 1 9 (1977), 18-36, Part II 10 (1977) 16-29 (in Russian). [Ts2] M.Sh. Tsalenko, The main tasks ofdatabase theory, NTI (Ser. 2) 3 (1983), 1-7 (in Russian). [Ts3] M.Sh. Tsalenko, Modeling Semantics in Data Bases, Moskow, Nauka (1989) (in Russian). [Ulm] J.D. Ullman, Principles of Database and Knowledge-Base Systems, Computer Science Press (1988). [Vi] S. Vickers, Geometric theories and databases, Applications of Categories, Cambridge Univ. Press (1991), 288-315. [Vol] N.D. Volkov, Transfer from relational algebras to Halmos algebras, Algebra and Discrete Math., Latv. Univ., Riga (1986), 43-53. [Vo2] N.D. Volkov, On equivalence between categories of Halmos algebras and of relational algebras, Latv. Mat. Ezhegodnik 34 (1993), 171-180. [WBT] E.G. Wagner, S.L. Bloom and J.W. Thatcher, Why algebraic theories?, Algebraic Methods in Semantics, Cambridge Univ. Press (1985), 607-634. [Za] A.V. Zamulin, Data Types in Programming Languages and Databases, Nauka, Novosibirsk (1987) (in Russian).

Section 2B

Homological Algebra. Cohomology. Cohomological Methods in Algebra. Homotopical Algebra


Homology for the Algebras of Analysis* A.Ya. Helemskii Department of Mechanics and Mathematics, Moscow State University, Moscow, 119899 GSP Russia

Contents Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0. Preparing the stage: Banach and topological modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.1. Initial definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.2. Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.3. Dual and normal modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.4. Constructions, involving morphism spaces and tensor products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. Homologically best modules and algebras ("one-dimensional theory") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1. The three pillars: Projectivity, injectivity, flatness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2. Derivations and module extensions: One-dimensional homology theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3. Amenable algebras and their species . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Derived functors and cohomology groups ("higher-dimensional theory") . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1. Complexes of topological modules and their (co)homology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2. Resolutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3. Derived functors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4. (Co)homology groups and their species . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5. Homological dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6. Cyclic and simplicial (co)homology (topological versions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

153 155 157 157 159 161 162 166 166 175 182 193 193 194 205 217 239 255 267

*This work was partially supported by the Grant 93-01-00156 from the Russian Foundation of Fundamental Investigations. H A N D B O O K OF ALGEBRA, VOL. 2 Edited by M. Hazewinkel 9 2000 Elsevier Science B.V. All rights reserved 151


Homology for the algebras of analysis

153

Preface

The area indicated by the title (another appellation is topological homology) deals with homological properties of various classes of topological, notably Banach and operator algebras. Of course, the important part of the subject concerns classes of algebras, described in general topologico-algebraic terms. But the main emphasis of the theory and, let us say, its real fun, lies in the study of homological characteristics of algebras, which are useful in diverse branches of modem analysis: operator theory, harmonic analysis, complex analysis, function spaces theory,... Hence the words "algebras of analysis". Topological homology arose from several independent explorations. Initially, it appeared as a result of the consideration, in the Banach algebraic context, of problems concerning extensions and derivations (=crossed homomorphisms); later the problems concerning perturbations (or deformations)joined. The work on these problems was stimulated by earlier investigations of similar problems in abstract algebra. However, it began in earnest only when the inner development of functional analysis made the study of these problems unavoidable. The pioneering work on topological homology is the paper of Kamowitz [ 127], who introduced cohomology groups of Banach algebras and applied them to extensions of these algebras; nevertheless, the need to study extensions in operator theory was demonstrated earlier in the Dunford theory of spectral operators [42]. The people who came to homology, starting from the study of derivations (notably Kadison and Ringrose [ 121,122]), certainly had in mind possible applications to automorphism groups of operator algebras, so important to quantum physics (cf. [13,21,142]). Some trends in the theory of operator algebras, also connected with the requirements of quantum physics (cf. [ 120]), eventually led to the investigation of perturbation problems [ 112,176,19]. A new source of homology, which had no predecessors in abstract algebra, was the multi-operator spectral theory, where long-standing problems in this area were solved by Taylor. It was he who showed that homology provides a proper language to define the "fight" concept of a joint spectrum of several commuting operators on a Banach space [206] and used homological methods to construct a holomorphic calculus of such a system of operators on this spectrum [208,207]. These achievements required the development of the homology theory of topological algebras outside the framework of Banach structures [209]. (In the Banach context the basic homological notions were already defined and studied [79]). Afterwards homological methods in the multioperator spectral theory received a further considerable development in the work of Putinar and Eschmeier and Putinar (see, e.g., [ 174,48] and their joint forthcoming book). 1 Finally, new facts came to light, which increased the interest in topological homology and accelerated its development. It was found that many basic notions in various branches of analysis and topology can be adequately expressed and sometimes better understood in homological terms. The first result of this kind was the interpretation of the topological concept of paracompactness in terms of the Banach version of projectivity [81 ]. But far greater resonance was caused by Johnson's discovery of the class of amenable Banach algebras [ 109] (which now, in retrospective view, appears to be the most important of the 1 Addedin proof: now it has appeared.

154

A. Ya. Helemskii

existing classes of "homologically best" algebras). It turned out, that the traditional, i.e. group-theoretic amenability, as well as certain important properties of operator algebras, can be treated as special cases of Johnson amenability, to the essential benefit to all areas concerned. At the moment, 2 a considerable number of analytic and topological concepts is known to be essentially homological. Perhaps, the reader would be interested to look at a part of this rather long list. It includes: 9 bounded approximate identity [102], 9 the property of a locally compact group to be compact [88]; amenable [109], 9 the property of a C*-algebra to be nuclear [29,75]; to have a discrete primitive spectrum and finite-dimensional irreducible representations [84,193], 9 the property of a v o n Neumann algebra to be hyperfinite [29,91 ]; atomic [ 100], 9 the property of a locally compact topological space to be discrete [89]; metrizable [190, 139]; paracompact [81 ], 9 the approximation property of a Banach space [195], 9 the property of a maximal ideal in a commutative Banach algebra to have a neighbourhood which is an analytic disk [ 171 ]; to belong to a fiber, which is such a disk (idem). To conclude our introductory remarks, let us say a few words of an informal character about the intrinsic contents of topological homology. Its principal concepts are, as a rule, suitable topological versions of well-known notions of abstract homological algebra. The novelty is that algebras and modules bear a Banach (or, say, polynormed) structure, and relevant maps, notably module morphisms, are required to be continuous. Rather innocent in appearance, these changes make so strong an impact on the theory, that they completely transform its. Now the values of homological invariants depend on those properties of objects which appearance belong to the synthetic language of functional analysis. Moreover, new phenomena arise, which have no analogue in abstract algebra and sometimes are even contrary to what algebraists could expect. Among these, we can indicate the existence of "forbidden values" for some homological characteristics: for example, the global dimension of a commutative and semisimple Banach algebra is never equal to one, unlike the case of an abstract algebra of the same class [85]. As another illustration, well-known topological algebras, like C M or the distribution algebra on a compact Lie group, can be infinitedimensional, and nevertheless have trivial cohomology [209,208]. On the other hand, homological invariants sometimes behave better (more regularly) in topological, rather than in "pure" homology. Examples are provided by so-called "additivity formulae" for homological dimensions of tensor products of Banach algebras. The most advanced of these is, at the moment, the recently proved identity w.db(A ~ B) -- w.db A + w.db B, for the weak (= flat) bidimension of unital Banach algebras (Selivanov). It is my pleasure to thank, on these pages, Yu.O. Golovin and Yu.V. Selivanov who read the manuscript and gave a lot of valuable comments.

2

Spring 1995.

Homologyfor the algebras of analysis

155

Introduction

Our presentation of the fundamentals of topological homology begins with a "Part 0", containing necessary preparatory material on Banach and more general topological modules. Then the bulk of the exposition follows, which is divided in two parts. Part 1 is concerned with various concepts of what is homologically best Banach (or topological) module and algebra, and also with the closely connected topics of derivations and module extensions. From the point of view of the principal homology functors, here only one-dimensional cohomology and one-dimensional Ext-spaces are involved. At the same time, it is the most developed part of the whole theory, especially in the section concerning amenability and its variations. The second part is devoted to cohomology and some other derived functors of arbitrary dimension, and also to closely connected numerical characteristics of modules and algebras - homological dimensions. In case we wish to state several parallel definitions or results in a single phrase, we use the brackets ( ) and the demarcation sign l; thus "( A ] B } is a (contractible I amenable) algebra" means that A is a contractible, and B is an amenable algebra. The reader, wishing to get a more detailed acquaintance with the area, is invited to consult the monographs [109,89], and also special chapters in the textbooks [11,96,159] (the latter book is to be published soon). The subject is also the main topic of the articles [86-88], and of the surveys [92,90,93,114,180,181]. Some special questions are reflected in the recent monograph [204].

Now we fix a number of terms and notation which we use throughout our exposition. To begin with, all the underlying linear spaces of objects (algebras, modules etc.) are always considered over the complex field C. Our algebras are not, generally speaking, assumed to have an identity. (Recall that in analysis the adjoining of an identity is often a rather painful operation, and many respectable algebras (e.g., C0(s and/C(E) below) do not have the luxury of being unital.) The abbreviation "b.a.i." always means "bounded approximate identity" (see the monograph [39] that is wholly dedicated to this extremely important concept). The symbol ( @ I @ ) denotes the complete (projectivel inductive) topological tensor product (cf. [71]). The projective tensor product of Banach spaces is always considered as a Banach space with respect to the projective tensor product of given norms. Certainly the reader knows what a Banach algebra is. A (general) topological algebra is a topological linear space equipped with a separately continuous multiplication. A ( @ I -@ )-algebra (cf. [209]) is a complete Hausdorff polynormed (= locally convex) algebra with a (jointly ] separately) continuous multiplication. A Frdchet algebra is a metrizable @- (or, which is now equivalent, @-) algebra. An Arens-Michael algebra is a locally multiplicatively-convex @-algebra (cf. [89]). For a given topological algebra A, A+ is its unitization algebra, and A ~ is its opposite (= reversed) algebra. For a ( @ I @ )-algebra A, A env is its enveloping ( @ I @ )-algebra, that is ( A+ @ A+ ]A+ @ A+ ) with the multiplication, well-defined by (a | b)(c @ d) =

156

A. Ya. Helemskii

ac | db. For the same A, the product map is the continuous operator Jr" ( A ~ A I A ~ A ) --+ A, well-defined by assigning ab to a | b. If A is a Banach algebra, the dual product map is the adjoint operator to Jr, that is Jr*" A* --+ (A ~ A)*. The similar operators, obtained by substituting A+ for A, are denoted by Jr+ and, respectively, zr_T_.

For a subset M in a topological algebra, its topological square M 2 is the closure of the linear span of the set {ab: a, b ~ M}. If A is a commutative Banach algebra, its (Gel'f and) spectrum is the set of modular maximal ideals of A, equipped with the Gel'fand topology. It is denoted by I2, or 12(A) if there is a danger of a misunderstanding. The value of the Gel' fand transform of an element a 6 A at a point s 6 ~2 is denoted by a (s). If S'2 is a ( compact I locally compact) topological space, (C(I'2) I C0(12) ) is the Banach algebra (or just space) of (alll all vanishing at infinity) continuous functions on I2. The symbol (c0 I clcb ) denotes the Banach algebra (or space) of all (converging to zero I converging Ibounded) sequences. The so-called disk-algebra, consisting of functions, defined and continuous in the closed unit disk D C C and holomorphic in its interior, is denoted by A(D). Its obvious multi-dimensional generalization, the polydisk- (or, to be precise, the n-disk-) algebra, is denoted by ,A(Dn). For Banach spaces E and F , / 3 ( E , F) is the Banach space of all continuous (= bounded) operators from E to F, with respect to the operator norm. For the same E, (13(E) I1C(E)IN(E) ) is the Banach algebra (or space) of all ( continuous I compact I nuclear ) operators on E with respect to the ( operator I operator I nuclear ) norm. For a locally compact group G, the group L I-algebra of G, that is the Banach space of Haar integrable functions on G with the convolution product, is denoted by L 1(G). For an ( infinitely smooth manifold .A4 I Stein manifold /-41 arbitrary set M ), (C ~ (.A4) I O(b/) I C M ) is the ( Fr6chet I Fr6chet I ~ - ) algebra of ( all infinitely smooth I all holomorphic I all ) functions on (.A4 l Ul M ) with pointwise multiplication; recall that the topology on ( C ~ (A/l) I O(L/) I C M ) is that of the ( uniform convergence of functions and their partial derivatives on compact subsets of .A4 I uniform convergence of functions on compact subsets of b/I pointwise convergence of functions ). If A is an operator algebra in a Hilbert space H (that is, subalgebra of t3(H)), then Lat A denotes the lattice of subspaces of H, invariant under all operators in A. Recall that A is said to be reflexive, if it consists of all operators, which leave all elements of Lat A invariant. The most venerable operator algebras, von Neumann algebras (defined as self-adjoint and closed in the weak operator topology operator algebras in H, containing the identity operator 1), can be characterized as those reflexive algebras, for which H0 E Lat A implies H~- 6 Lat A. Apart from that traditional case, we shall consider homological properties of another class of reflexive algebras, this time non-selfadjoint. (This class is more recent and not so widely known, but it is steadily gaining popularity.) These are CSLalgebras, defined as reflexive algebras with mutually commuting projections on the spaces in Lat A ("CSL" stands for "Commutative Subspace Lattice"). CSL-algebra A is called indecomposable, if (contrary to what was said about von Neumann algebras), H0 6 Lat A, H0 % H, {0}, implies H~- r Lat A. (Such algebras play for general CSL-algebras the role of "elementary bricks", similar to that of factors in the theory of von Neumann algebras.) A lattice of subspaces in H is called a nest if it is linearly ordered under inclusion. A reflexive algebra A, for which Lat A is a nest, is called a nest algebra (of the nest Lat A).


157

Nest algebras form the distinguished and historically first explored (by Ringrose [179]) class of indecomposable CSL-algebras; see, e.g., [37]. A reflexive algebra is said to be of finite width, if it is the intersection of a finite family of nest algebras (cf. [54]). Throughout all the text, the category of all (not necessarily Hausdorff) topological vector spaces and continuous linear operators is denoted by TVS. Its full subcategory, consisting of ( Banach I complete seminormed I Fr6chet ) spaces is denoted by ( Banl (Ban) I Fr). The category of linear spaces and linear operators is denoted by Lin. Note that almost all categories of our exposition, those just mentioned as well as more complicated categories which will appear later, have the following common feature: their objects are linear spaces and their morphisms are linear operators. Considering a diagram in such a category, we call it exact sequence (--exact complex), complex, morphism of complexes or, say, short exact sequence of complexes, if it satisfies the respective definitions as a diagram in Lin. A subspace E0 in a topological linear space E is called complementable, if E decomposes into a topological direct sum of E0 and some other subspace. A subspace E0 in a Banach space E is called weakly complementable, if the space {f c E*: f ( x ) = 0 for all x E0} is complementable as a subspace in E*. (Recall that ( co I/C(H) ), where H is a Hilbert space, is weakly complementable but not complementable in ( Cb IB(H) ).) Finally, outer multiplications in modules are always denoted by the dot "-".

O. Preparing the stage: Banach and topological modules 0.1. Initial definitions DEFINITION 0.1.1. Let A be a topological algebra. A topological linear space X, equipped with the structure of a ( left [ right [ two-sided ) A-module (in the pure algebraic sense) is called a topological ( left [ right [ two-sided ) A-module, if the outer multiplication/s is/are separately continuous. If, in addition, A is an | and X is a complete polynormed space, X is called a | over A (of a respective type). If, in addition to this, A is an ~-algebra, and the outer multiplication/s is/are jointly continuous, X is called a ~-module over A. Finally, if A is a ( Fr6chet I Banach ) algebra and X is a ( Fr6chet [ Banach )space, X is called a ( Frgchet [ Banach ) A-module. In what follows, two-sided modules are often called bimodules. The more general notion of a topological polymodule over several topological algebras is not considered here; see, e.g., [89]. Topological modules do not live in solitude; the following definition expresses their social relations. DEFINITION 0.1.2. Let X and Y be topological (left I right I two-sided) A-modules. A map ~0 : X --+ Y is called a morphism of topological ( left Iright Itwo-sided) A-modules if it is a morphism of respective modules in the pure algebraic sense (i.e. it is an operator, satisfying the identity/ies (~0(a. x) = a . ~0(x) I ~0(x 9a) = ~0(x) 9a) I both)), and it is

continuous.

158

A. Ya. Helemskii

Among all various notions of topological modules, that of a Banach module appears, at least at the moment, to be most important. In terms of representation theory, the notion of a Banach left A-module is equivalent to that of continuous representation of A in the underlying space of X. Indeed, we can pass from the former to the latter and vice versa, using the relation Tax = a . x where T 9a v-+ Ta ~ 13(X) is the relevant representation. Under this identification, the notion of morphism of left Banach modules corresponds to that of an intertwining operator. Bearing in mind such an identification, we shall speak later about the ( module ] representation) a s s o c i a t e d with a given (representation[ module). (Something similar could be said about more general topological modules; however, outside the class of Banach spaces, one should be careful with the words "continuous representation", cf. [96].) Topological modules, together with their morphisms, form a lot of various categories, depending on which algebraic type and which class of underlying spaces we wish to choose. Isomorphisms in these categories are called t o p o l o g i c a l i s o m o r p h i s m s ; thus the role of continuity is emphasized. (In the Banach context, an isometric i s o m o r p h i s m is an isomorphism, which is also an isometric map.) Most of categories, as is typical for functional analysis, are additive but not Abelian. In the present exposition, the categories of Banach ( left I right I two-sided ) A-modules are of a special importance; they are denoted by ( A-rnod I mod-A [ A-rood-A) (of course, 0-rood, where 0 is the zero algebra, is not other thing that Ban). Sometimes we shall use the same symbols for some larger categories of modules; say, A-rnod can denote the category of left @-modules over a @algebra A; but in these cases we shall give a special warning. Every topological right A-module can be considered as a topological left A~ in the obvious way. Every ( @ I@ )-bimodule over a ( @ I @ )-algebra A can be considered as a (unital) left ( @ [ | )-module over a respective version of the enveloping algebra A env (see Introduction); the outer multiplication in the left module is well defined by (a | a 9x 9b. Obviously, these identifications lead to identifications of respective categories; in particular, A-mod-A is isomorphic to the full subcategory of unital modules in Aenv-mod. Combining, in the obvious way, the appropriate concepts for modules in abstract algebra and for topological linear spaces, we are able to speak, in the context of topological modules, about submodules, quotient modules, Cartesian products and direct sums. Note that a closed submodule of a Banach module, the quotient module of a Banach module with respect to a closed submodule, and the direct sum of two Banach modules are again Banach modules; norms are provided by the respective constructions in Ban. REMARK. In the framework of Frrchet (in particular, Banach) algebras and modules, the outer multiplications are automatically jointly continuous whenever they are supposed to be separately continuous; see, e.g., [ 188]. In more general cases one must distinguish these two types of continuity, in particular, discern | and @-modules. As to other naturally arising continuity requirements concerning outer multiplications, the most interesting are, perhaps, hypocontinuity for general polynormed modules and so-called strict continuity for Banach modules (the latter, by definition, respects the injective tensor product "@"). We do not consider these types of modules here; see [209] for the former and [ 139] for the latter.


159

0.2. Examples We begin with several simple examples of a general character; they are just standard algebraic examples with the suitable topological modifications. Let A be a topological algebra. Then every topological algebra B, containing A, is a topological left, as well as right and two-sided, A-module; the only required thing is that the natural embedding A into B must be continuous. Further, every (leftl right I two-sided } ideal in B is a topological (left I right I two-sided ) A-module. Of course, in both statements we can everywhere replace the word "topological" by "N._.-...., ._.-~...., Frrchet" or "Banach"; the only obvious novelty is that ideals now are supposed to be closed. Most often, the role of B is played by A itself, by A+ or, in the Banach case, by the double centralizer algebra D(A) [107]. If A is a Banach operator algebra, acting on a Banach space E, we can fairly choose B as B(E); thus, in particular, we get the Banach A-bimodules 13(E) and/C(E). If, in addition, the norm in A is the operator norm, then .Af(E) is also a Banach A-bimodule. Apart from submodules of B, one can consider its quotient modules. The case of B -A+ is of a special interest. PROPOSITION 0.2.1. Let A be a Frgchet algebra. Then every cyclic (in the purely algebraic sense) Frgchet left A-module is topologically isomorphic to some quotient left A-module o f A+ (or just o f A, if our algebra and module are unital). The proof combines the well known algebraic argument with the open mapping theorem. As a particular case, the Frrchet A-bimodule A+, being considered as a left, obviously cyclic and unital, AenV-module (see above), can be identified with the quotient AenV-module Aenv/IA. Here 14 is the left ideal in A env, which is the kernel of the product map Jr+ 9 A+ | A+ --+ A+ (see Introduction); it is called the diagonal (or augmenting) ideal. As we shall show later, this module is extremely important in homology theory. The following class of modules also deserves special attention. DEFINITION 0.2.1. Let A be a Banach algebra, E be a Banach space. Then the Banach (left [ right [ two-sided ) A-module ( A+ @ E [ E @ A + [ A + @ E @ A+ ), with the outer multiplication/s, well-defined by ( a . (b | x) = ab | x [ (x @ a) . b = x @ ab [a . (b @ x @ c) = ab @ x | c and (a @ x @ b)- c = a @ x | bc ), is called a free Banach ( left[ right l two-sided) A-module with the basic space E. Free Frrchet, @- and @-modules are defined similarly. (In the latter case one should replace the symbol " ~ " by "@".) It could be shown that this is a proper topological version of a notion of a free module in abstract algebra. In particular, our free (bi)modules have a parallel characterization in categorical terms; see, e.g., [89]. For any algebra A, the complex plane can be considered as a left A-module with respect to zero outer multiplication. Such a module is denoted by Coo; obviously it is isomorphic to A + / A . Now we proceed to some concrete modules over algebras, serving in various areas of analysis. (In fact, analysis swarms with modules not less than algebras; one should only call things by their names.)

A. Ya. Helemskii

160

In the next two examples A is a commutative Banach algebra with Gel' fand spectrum 12. EXAMPLE 0.2.1. Let # be a probability measure on 12. Then the Banach space L p (12, lZ), 1 ~< p 0 such that, for any t ~ ~2 there exists a c I (i.e. a ~ A with a(s) -- O) such that a(t) = 1 and Ilall < C. (ii) If s q~ 352, then d i m l / l 2 = 1. Besides, there exists a neighbourhoodbl of s in (the Gel'fand topology of) ~ which is an analytic disc. (Recall, that the latter means that there is a homeomorphism o9 of D onto/g, where D is the open unit disc in C, such that for every a 6 A the function co" D --+ C: z ~ a(co(z)) is holomorphic.) REMARK. The inequality dim I / I 2 ~< 1 (but not the subsequent analytic assertion) can be extended from projective to flat modules which will soon appear (see Theorem 1.1.6 below). As to ideals of group algebras, the following can be mentioned.


169

PROPOSITION 1.1.3. For an arbitrary locally compact group G, L l(G) is a projective Banach left L 1(G)-module. If G is compact, then every closed left ideal in L ! (G) is projective. The proof of the first, more elementary, assertion is based on the Grothendieck isomorphism L I(G) ~ L I(G) ~ L I(G x G). The latter enables us to construct a right inverse to 7rL~(G~ as the map p" L I ( G ) --+ L I ( G x G) defined by [p(a)](s, t) = X ( t - 1 ) a ( s t ) , where X is the characteristic function of an arbitrary chosen compact set of the Haar measure 1 in G. At the same time, for a very wide class of non-compact groups (and, perhaps, for all such groups) the augmenting ideal (see Example 0.2.4) in L 1(G) is not projective. Some details will be given later, in 2.5.5; there it will be shown that this ideal is in fact homologically much worse than projective modules. From ideals we turn to cyclic and more general finitely generated modules. Let X be a cyclic module A + / I (cf. 0.2). If there exists another closed ideal, say J, in A+ with A+ = I (9 J (or, equivalently, I has a fight identity), then X is obviously projective. Whether the converse is always true ? In abstract algebra such a question, because of its triviality, would sound strange, but in the context of Banach modules it is, at the moment, an open problem. Of course, if we know beforehand, that I is, as a subspace, complementable, the very definition of the projectivity immediately implies the affirmative answer, but what if not? Fortunately, the result is still valid, if we assume another condition, this time in terms of some "good geometry" of X itself, which is, as a whole, much milder and can be effectively checked. This is the famous approximation property, discovered, in its numerous guises, by Grothendieck [71 ]. The following result can be considered as a suitable topological version of the known algebraic "dual basis lemma" (cf. [50]). THEOREM 1.1.3 (Selivanov [198]). Let X be a finitely generated (in the algebraic sense) Banach left A-module, possessing, as a Banach space, the approximation property. Then it is projective iff there exists a finite set of elements Yi E X, 1 n or oo if there is no such n. DEFINITION 2.2.1. A complex ( e : Y --~ X over X 17/: X --~ Y under X ) is called a ( resolution I coresolution ) of the module X if the complex (0 ~- X ~-- Y ] 0 - - ~ X --~ y ) is exact and admissible (see the beginning of Section 1.1.1). In the context of Banach structures, we similarly define a preresolution of the given module, replacing the condition of the admissibility of 0 +-- X +-- 3; by the more liberal condition of the preadmissibility (see idem). DEFINITION 2.2.2. A resolution e :79 --~ X of a module X is called a projective resolution if all the modules in 79 are projective. Similarly, according to the properties of the participating modules, we define injective

coresolutions, flat preresolutions, free and cofree (co)resolutions etc. It is clear that every projective module P has a projective resolution of length 0, namely

O~--P~P~---O (similarly, injective modules have injective resolutions of length 0, and so on). These are certainly the simplest examples of resolutions; the next degree of complexity can be illustrated as follows. EXAMPLE 2.2.1. Let S'2 be a metrizable compact space and A be a closed subset of it. Consider the Banach left C(S2)-module C(A) with the pointwise outer multiplication and take the complex 0 ~

C(A) (

r

C($2) .~

i

I (

0,

196

A. Ya. Helemskii

where I = {a 6 C(S2): a[4 = 0}, r sends functions to their restrictions to A, and i is the natural embedding. Since I is projective (Theorem 1.1.1) and complementable in C($2), this complex is a projective resolution of C(A) 6 C(S2)-mod, and its length is 1. More generally, let A be a Frrchet algebra, let X be a cyclic Frrchet left A-module with a cyclic vector x, and suppose that I = {a ~ A+: a- x = 0} is projective and complemented in A+. Then X has a projective resolution (in the category of Frrchet left modules) of length 1, namely, the complex 0
C n ( A , X )

where the "coboundary operator" 3n, n > 0, is defined by 8n f (a! . . . . . an+l) = a l . f ( a 2 . . . . ,an+l) 12

It has already appeared; cf. p. 153.

8n> . . .

(C(A, X>)

218

A. Ya. Helemskii F/

+ Z(-

1)/~f(al . . . . . alc-l,alcak+l . . . . . an+I)

k=l + ( - - l ) n + l f ( a l . . . . . an) "an+l,

al . . . . . a n + 1 6 A , f c C n ( A , X ) and6 ~ 1 7 6 a 6A, x 6X. One can easily verify that for all n we have 6 n + l 6 n - - 0, and thus C(A, X) is a complex; it is called the standard cohomology complex, or the Hochschild-Kamowitz complex for A and X. The following definition is a topological version of the classical algebraic definition of Hochschild [ 103]. DEFINITION 2.4.1 (cf. Kamowitz [ 127], and also Guichardet [72]). The n-th cohomology space of the complex C(A, X) is called continuous, or ordinary, n-dimensional cohomology group of a topological algebra A with coefficients in a topological A-bimodule X. It is denoted by 7-/n (A, X). Note, that the introduced "groups" are, of course, linear spaces. Nevertheless, for historical reasons the term "cohomology groups" is generally accepted. The spaces Ker~ n and Im6 n-l are denoted also by Zn(A, X) and Bn(A, X), respectively, and their elements are called n-dimensional cocycles and n-dimensional coboundaries, respectively. Thus 7-/n (A, X) -- Z n (A, X ) / B n (A, X). In the case of Banach structure Zn(A, X) is a closed subspace in C"(A, X) and Bn(A, X) is, generally speaking, not a closed subspace; thus in this case 7-/n(A, X) is considered as a complete prenormed space. The construction of cohomology groups is essentially functorial. Let us consider the category, whose objects are arbitrary pairs (A, X), where A is a topological algebra, and X is a topological A-bimodule. A morphism c~" (A, X) > (B, Y) between two such pairs is, by definition, a pair c~ -- ( x ' B > A, qg" XK > Y), consisting of a (continuous) homomorphism of algebras and a morphism of topological B-modules; here X~ is a topological B-module with the underlying space of X and outer multiplication, well defined by b - x -- x(b) 9x and x 9b -- x 9x(b). Denote this category by PTAB and denote its full subcategory, corresponding to the case of Banach structures, by PBAB. Let such an ot as above be given. Then every cochain f ~ C" (A, X), n - O, 1. . . . . gives rise to a cochain g ~ C n ( B , Y), defined by g(bl . . . . . b,,) --qg[f(x(bl) . . . . . tc(bn)] (if n -- 0, we just put g -- (pf ) . It is easy to observe_that, assigning g to f we generate a morphism between the complexes C(A, X) and C(B, Y) and hence, for every n, an operator between the respective cohomology spaces 7-/"(A, X) and ~ n ( B , Y). Thus the association (A, X) w-> 7-/n (A, X) between objects of PTAB and Lin can be extended to morphism of these categories, and we get a covariant functor 7-/n" PTAB --+ Lin. In the case of Banach structures we get a "more specialized" functor 7-/n" PBAB --+ (Ban). If A is a fixed ( topological I Banach ) algebra, we have a right to treat A-mod-A, the category of ( topological [ Banach ) A-bimodules, as a subcategory in ( PTAB [


219

PBAB ), consisting of all objects (A, X) and all morphisms (1A, qg), where A is our fixed algebra. The restriction of 7-/n to this subcategory provides a functor, denoted by ~./n (A, ? ) : A-mod-A --+ ( Lin[ ( Ban ) ) REMARK. In fact, the latter functor is but a special case of the covariant Ext functor, introduced in 2.3.2; cf. Theorem 2.4.19 below. Some other substantial functors, this time with "running" A, arise if we restrict ~ n on some other suitable categories in PTAB (or PBAB). One of them, the functor of simplicial cohomology, will be considered later, in 2.6.1. REMARK. If a subalgebra S of a topological algebra A is given, a reasonable "relative" version of the cohomology groups 7-/n(A, X) arises (cf. [ 118] and also [204]). A cochain f c C n (A, X), n > 0, is called S-relative, if it has the properties f (bal, a2 . . . . . an) = b . f (al . . . . . an), f (al . . . . . al~b, ak+l . . . . . an) -- f (al . . . . . ak, bak+l . . . . , an)

and f (al . . . . . anb) = f (al . . . . . an)" b

for all a l . . . . . an ~ A, b ~ S. It is easy to check that such cochains form a subcomplex in C(A, X), denoted by C ( A , , S; X) (the space in dimension 0 is taken as Z~ X)). The space H n ( C ( A , , S; X)) is called the S-relative n-dimensional cohomology group of A with coefficients in X; it is denoted by ~ n ( A , S; X) (or 7-In(A, X / S ) ) . Sometimes it is possible to establish relations between "relative" and "absolute" cohomology. In particular, if, in the context of Banach structures, S is amenable and X is dual, then the spaces 7-/n (A, S; X) and 7-/n(A, X) are isomorphic (L. Kadison [ 118]). Results of this kind provide means of computation of the absolute cohomology with the help of the relative version; see [ 118,204] for the details. N

For Banach algebras and bimodules, the vanishing of 7-/n(A, X) for ( all I all dual ) X and some n > 0 implies the vanishing of 7-/k(A, X) for ( all [ all dual ) X and all k > n. The part of this assertion, conceming all bimodules, remains to be true in more general context of Fr6chet, ~ - and ~-algebras and bimodules. These phenomena will be explained later, from the overview of homological dimension (see 2.5.1); as to the original proof, based on so-called reduction, see [ 103,109]. The second traditional invariant of topological algebras, the homology groups, has sense only for those cases, where there is a proper notion of the topological tensor product. To be definite, we consider the case when the tensor product " ~ " exists; the "~-case" can be treated similarly, with obvious modifications. So let A be a ~-algebra, and X be a ~-bimodule over A. For n = 1, 2 . . . . we put C~(A, X) = a~

. . . ~a rl

8 X

220

A. Ya. Helemskii

and, in addition, we put C0(A, X) = X; elements of C n ( A , X ) , n - - 0 , 1. . . . . are called n-dimensional chains. Further, consider so-called standard homological complex 0
2. At the moment, it is known that many, although by no means all, of the "popular" examples of algebras possess latter property. In particular, the class of such algebras includes: 9 C(S2), where S2 is a compact metrizable set [112], 9 /3(E), where E is an arbitrary Banach space [ 125] (this will be commented on later, in 2.4.5), 9 /C(H), where H is a Hilbert space [108], 9 A/'(E), where E is a Banach space with the approximation property ([85] and [191] with [ 195] combined; cf. Theorem 2.4.21 below), 9 L 1(G), where G is an amenable compact group [ 112]. Note that for the first two algebras from this list we have 7-/1(A, A) = 0 as well (see Theorems 2.4.4 and 1.2.9) whereas for the last three ones we have, generally speaking, 7-/1(A, A) --fi0 (see 1.2.1 and also [216]). Finally, 7-/2(.A/'(E), .N'(E)) = 0 for all E whereas 7-/3 (.N'(E), A/'(E)) = 0 iff E has the approximation property [195]. (The important question of the vanishing 7-/n (A, A) for von Neumann algebras and other operator algebras on Hilbert spaces, as well as some applications to stability type problems, will be discussed in two next subsections.) As the opposite end, the algebras lp, 1 < p < oo, with the coordinatewise multiplication, and also 11(F2), where F2 is the free group with two generators, are not stable [ 112]. Other examples of stable and not stable algebras see [112,113], and also the book [105]. REMARK. The conditions of Theorem 2.4.6 are not necessary for the stability. As an example, the disk-algebra ,A(D) is stable (Rochberg [182]); at the same time 7-/2(.A(D), A(D)) --fi0 [1091. One can speak not only about the stability of Banach algebras, but also about the stability of some of their maps. A unital continuous homomorphism tc :A --+ B between two unital Banach algebras is called stable if there exists e > 0 such that, for any homo-

228

A. Ya. Helemskii

morphism x t : A --+ B with Ilx t - x ll < e, there exists an invertible element b 6 B with x ' ( a ) = b - l t c ( a ) b , a E A. THEOREM 2.4.7 (Johnson [112], see also Raeburn and Taylor [176]). Let x be as above and B be considered as a Banach A-bimodule with the operations a . b = x (a)b and b .a -bx(a). Suppose that 7_/1(A, B ) ~ O, and 7-/2(A, B) is Hausdorff. Then x is stable. REMARK. Theorem 2.4.23 below will show that Proposition 2.3.6 is a particular case of this theorem, corresponding to B = 13(X). Note also that amenability is always a stable property of Banach algebras, and the same is true for commutativity provided that, for the given algebra, we have 7-/2(A, A) = 0 [112].

In the study of derivations, two-dimensional cohomology groups can also be useful. Let I be a closed two-sided ideal in topological algebra A and let D and D be derivations of A and A / I respectively. D is called a lifting of D if the diagram A

A/I

D

D

~-A

~ A/I

in which r is the natural projection, is commutative. PROPOSITION 2.4.6 (cf. Ringrose [180]). (i) Let I be complemented, as a subspace, in A and 7 - / 2 ( A , I) = 0. Then every continuous derivation o f A / I admits a continuous lifting. (ii) Let 7-/2(A, A) -- 0 and 12 = I. I f every continuous derivation o f A / I has a lifting, then 7-/2(A, I) --0. 2.4.4. Cohomology o f operator algebras: interplay o f different versions, and computation results. The continuous, or ordinary, cohomology is the earliest and best known of all topological modifications of Hochschild cohomology. However, there are versions which meet other topological conditions on cohains; most of these make sense for operator algebras and reflect their specific features. Let A be an operator algebra (so far arbitrary), acting on a Hilbert space H, and let X = (X.)* be a dual Banach A-bimodule. Recall the notions of a normal operator from A to X, and of the left normal, right normal and normal parts of X, introduced in 0.3. A cochain f ~ C n (A, X); n > 0 is called normal if this polylinear operator is normal in each argument. Denote by Cw(A n , Xw); n > 0 the (norm closed) subspace in C n ( A X ) consisting of normal cochains with values in Xw, the normal part of X, and put C~ Xw) - Xw.

229


Since the coboundary operators 3n in C ( A , X ) preserve the property of a cochain to be normal, this complex has a subcomplex 0

> C~

Xw)

>...

~ Cw(A, Xw)

> --.

(Cw(A, Xw))

which is called the standard normal cohomology complex (for A and X). DEFINITION 2.4.7. The n-th cohomology space of the complex Cw(A, Xw) is called normal n-dimensional cohomology group of the operator algebra A with coefficients in a (dual) A-bimodule X. This cohomology, for the most important case of normal X, was introduced by Kadison and Ringrose [ 121 ]. As to other interesting cases, it was noticed in [ 101 ] that for a v o n Neumann algebra A and X -- A* (and thus Xw = A.) we obtain the special spaces "Hff", considered by Christensen and Sinclair [24]. At the beginning, the normal cohomology was invented as a useful tool for computing the ordinary cohomology. The matter is that sometimes it is easier to deal with the normal, rather than the ordinary, cohomology, and then to pass from the former to the latter. This strategy is relied on the following result, which was established by Johnson, Kadison and Ringrose [ 116] for normal bimodules with some mild additional assumptions. THEOREM 2.4.8 (cf. [ 116,91 ]). Let A be an operator C*-algebra, and X be a dual Banach A-bimodule. Then, up to a topological isomorphism,

7-/w(A, Xw) = 7-[n (A, Xl) -- 7(n (A, Xr) f o r any n >/O. In particular, if X is normal, then normal and ordinary cohomology groups coincide in all dimensions.

The sketch of the proof will be given later; see 2.4.5 below. As to the original argument in [116], it essentially uses the following "averaging" principle, which has a considerable independent interest. PROPOSITION 2.4.7. Let A be an operator C*-algebra, and X be a normal A - - , and hence A-bimodule. Let, further, B is a closed amenable subalgebra o f A. Then, f o r any n >1 1, every cosetin 7-(n(A, X ) = Z n ( A , X ) / B n ( A , X ) contains a cochain g : A x . . . x A ~ X which vanishes whenever any of arguments lies in B. REMARK. This result can be interpreted as the coincidence of 7-/n(A, X) with the relative cohomology 7In(A, B; X ) mentioned in 2.4.1. See [204] for related results and details. The established relation between normal and ordinary cohomology, together with the n observation that 7-/w(A, X) = 7-/w(A , X) for any operator C*-algebra A and a normal A--bimodule X, enabled the authors of [ 116] to give the first proof of the vanishing of both varieties of cohomology for hyperfinite von Neumann algebras with normal coefficients in

230

A. Ya. Helemskii

positive dimensions (cf. Theorem 2.4.26 below). That meant, in particular, that to the list of algebras with ~ n (A, A) = 0 for n >~ 2, presented in the previous subsection, one should add all hyperfinite von Neumann algebras. And this, in its turn, leads to some stability type properties for closed subalgebras i n / 3 ( H ) in a framework of an approach, initiated by Kadison and Kastler [120] and Christensen [17]. Recall that the distance between two subspaces F and G of a Banach space E is the number d(F, G) = sup{d(a, $8), d(b, Sa); a E SA, b 6 $8 }, where (d(a, $8) I d(b, SA) ) denotes the distance between (a I b ) and the unit ball ( $8 I SA ) in ( B I A ). THEOREM 2.4.9 (Raeburn and Taylor [176]). Let A be a hyperfinite yon Neumann algebra on H. Then there exists 6 > 0 such that if B is another von Neumann algebra on H with d(A, B) < 6, then it is (necessary isometrically) *-isomorphic to A.

The year 1995 was the silver anniversary of the normal version of cohomology groups, but now we turn to a much more recent modification of these groups, the so-called completely bounded cohomology groups. Let E be a linear space. We denote by Mn (E) the space of all n • n matrices with entries in E, and for u ~ Mn (E), v ~ Mn (E) we denote by u @ v the element in Mm+n with ( u I v ) at the ( upper left I lower fight ) corner. DEFINITION 2.4.8 (Ruan [185]). The space E, equipped with the family II 9 IIn; n = 1, 2 . . . . . where II 9 IIn is a norm on Mn(E), is called an (abstract) operator space if it satisfies Ilu @ vllm+n = max{llullm, Ilvll,,} and IIc~o/31lm ~< IIc~llIloll,, II/~11for all u E Mm(E), v ~ Mn (E) and c~,/3 6 Mn (C). (Here otv/3 is defined by the obvious way via the pattern of the matrix multiplication, and the norm in Mn (C) is that i n / 3 ( c n ) , where C" has the usual Hilbert space structure.) The main example i s / 3 ( H ) , equipped with the operator norm in Mn(13(H)), naturally identified w i t h / 3 ( H @ . . . 9 H). If E is an operator space, then every subspace F of it is also an operator space with respect to norms in Mn(F) as in the subspace in Mn(E). Thus every subspace i n / 3 ( H ) is an operator space; such operator spaces are called concrete. DEFINITION 2.4.9. Let E and F be operator spaces. A linear operator 99 : E --+ F is called completely bounded if every operator ~0n :Mn(E) ~ Mn (F): [Xij] ~ [qg(Xij)] is bounded, and sup{ll~0nll: n = 1, 2 . . . . } < cx~. The latter number is called the cb-norm of ~o and is denoted by II~011cb. An operator ~0 is called a complete ( contraction I isometry ) if each ~pn is a ( contraction I isometry ). The name "operator space" is justified by the following principal result. THEOREM 2.4.10 (Ruan; idem). Every abstract operator space is completely isometric to some concrete operator space.


231

The crucial concept is DEFINITION 2.4.10 (Christensen and Sinclair [23]). Let Ek, 1 ~< k ~< m, and F be operator spaces. A polylinear operator f ' E 1 x . . . x Em --+ F is called completely bounded if, for any n ~> 1, the polylinear operator fn " Mn ( E l ) x . . . x Mn (Em) --~ Mn ( F ) , taking a tuple ([xlj] . . . . . [x~]) to [Yij] with

f (Xikl , Xklk2 . . . . . Xkm_l j )

Yij = kl ..... kin-1 =1

is bounded (relative to norms, included in the operator space structure), and the respective polylinear operator norms IIfn II have a finite upper bound. The latter is called cb-norm of f and is denoted by l]f ]lcb- (Thus, fn is constructed by the imitation of matrix multiplication). Now let A be an operator norm closed subalgebra of/3(H), Ax = 1.h.(A, 1H) and X be an operator space equipped with the structure of a unital A • DEFINITION 2.4.1 1. The bimodule X is called a completely bounded A-bimodule if the trilinear operator A • • X • A • --~ X: (a, x, b) w-~ a 9x 9b is completely bounded with respect to ( given I natural ) operator space structure on <X I A x ). Finally, if A is as above and X is a completely bounded A-bimodule, then a completely bounded n-linear operator from A x --. x A to X is called an n-dimensional completely bounded cochain. The spaces Ccnb(A, X), consisting of such cochains, together with the corresponding coboundary operators, form a subcomplex, denoted by Ccb(A, X), of the standard complex C (A, X). DEFINITION 2.4.12 (Christensen, Effros and Sinclair [20]). The n-th cohomology of Ccb (A, X) is called the n-dimensional completely bounded cohomology group of A with coefficients in the completely bounded A-bimodule X. It is denoted by 7-/cnb(A, X). If, in addition, a completely bounded A-bimodule X is also a dual Banach A-bimodule, we can speak of those completely bounded cochains.., which are also normal_ and have values in Xw. Thus a subcomplex Ccbw(A, Xw) of Ccb(A, X) (and of C w ( A , Xw) as well) appears, consisting of such cochains. Its cohomology, the "normal completely bounded" version of the continuous cohomology, is denoted by 7-/cnbw(A, X). Completely bounded cohomology, together with its normal version, helped to achieve considerable advances in the two following problems about ordinary cohomology that, in their full generality, are still open. PROBLEM 1 (raised by Kadison/Ringrose, cf. [180]). Let A be a v o n Neumann algebra. Is it true that 7-/n(A, A) -- 0 for all n > 0? (Recall Theorem 1.2.7 which gives the positive answer for n -- 1.)

232

A. Ya. Helemskii

PROBLEM 2 (raised by Christensen, Effros and Sinclair [20]). Let A be an operator C*algebra on H. Is it true that 7-[n (A, B ( H ) ) = 0 for all n > 0? (Recall that the answer is not known even for n = 1; cf. the problem of Christensen, discussed in 1.2.1.) Note that ~ n (A, B ( H ) ) = 0 implies ~ n (A, B) = 0 for any hyperfinite von Neumann algebra B, which contains A, and the same is true for other versions of cohomology groups. This follows from the existence of a B-bimodule projection, so-called conditional expectation, from B ( H ) onto B [212], and functorial properties of the cohomology functor 7-In(A, ?). As it was discovered, positive answers are ensured if we replace ordinary cohomology by its completely bounded version: THEOREM 2.4.1 1 (Christensen and Sinclair [26]). Let A be a yon Neumann algebra. Then 7-/nb(A, A) = ']'~cbwn (A , A) -- Of o r all n > O. THEOREM 2.4.12 (Christensen, Effros and Sinclair [20]). Let A be an operator C*algebra on H. Then, for all n > O, 7-[cb(A, B) = 7-Lcbw(A, n B) = Ofor B = 13(H) and hence f o r every hyperfinite yon Neumann algebra B, containing A. Fortunately, "in most cases" all versions of cohomology groups do coincide. In what follows, a v o n Neumann algebra is said to be good in its Ill summand if its canonical central direct summand of type Ill is *-isomorphic to its von Neumann tensor product with the (unique) hyperfinite type Ill factor (for example, it can have no summand of type 111 or have, in the presence of such a summand, this hyperfinite factor). THEOREM 2.4.13 (Christensen, Effros and Sinclair (idem)). Let A be an operator C*algebra such that A - is good in its type IIl summand, and let X be a normal completely bounded A - - b i m o d u l e (and hence an A-bimodule). Then, up to a topological isomorphism, 7-INCA' X) -- 7-/cb(A, n ,, X) = 7-/w(A, X)

n

-- ~-/cbw (A,

X) .

As to the proof, the normal versions of the cohomology play the central role. The principal step is to establish the equality 7-/w " (A , X) = 7-/cb " w(A , X)', the rest follows from the theorem of Johnson, Kadison and Ringrose (see Theorem 2.4.8) and its "completely bounded" version (which can be proved by an argument closely resembling that in [ 116]). When combined, the cited results immediately give THEOREM 2.4.14. (i) [26] Let A be a v o n Neumann algebra, which is good in its type Ill summand. Then 7-[n (A, A) = Of o r all n > O. (ii) [20] Let A be an operatorC*-algebra such that A - is good in its type IIl summand. Then, f o r all n > O, ~ n (A, B) = 0 for B = B ( H ) and hence for every hyperfinite yon Neumann algebra B, containing A.

Homologyfor the algebras of analysis

233

(Another condition, which gives a similar result, will be indicated in Theorem 2.4.23 below.) Thus, the only possible obstruction to the vanishing of the discussed cohomology lies in the existence of "bad" type 111 von Neumann algebras. However, something positive can be said even about these, if we content ourselves with the low dimensions. Recall that a maximal commutative selfadjoint subalgebra B of a v o n Neumann algebra A is called a Cartan subalgebra if the set of unitary elements u of A with the property u*Bu = B generates A as a von Neumann algebra. THEOREM 2.4.15 (Christensen, Pop, Sinclair and Smith [22]). Let A be afinite von Neumann algebra with a Cartan subalgebra. Then 7-/2(A, A) = 0. I f an addition, A has a separable predual, then 7-[3 (A, A) = O. Again the result is achieved by reducing to the completely bounded cohomology. REMARK. Most of known examples of finite von Neumann algebras have Cartan subalgebras (cf. [204]; in particular, it is the case for the first example of a non-hyperfinite von Neumann algebra A with 7-/2(A, A) = 0, due to Johnson [110]). However, quite recently Voiculescu has discovered that the group von Neumann algebra of F2, the free group on two generators, has no Cartan subalgebra.

We turn to the cohomology of non-selfadjoint operator algebras and begin with the most explored of these, nest algebras. Here, instead of the open problems 1 and 2 (see above), we have a positive result, generalising the "one-dimensional" Theorem 1.2.6 THEOREM 2.4.16 (Nielsen [153]; Lance [140]). Let A be a nest algebra, and X be an arbitrary ultraweakly closed sub-A-bimodule o f B ( H ) , containing A. Then 7[ n (A, X ) -- 0 f o r all n > O. This theorem was generalised to a certain class of CSL-algebras in [54]. (For another class of coefficients, providing the assertion of the cited theorem, see the next subsection.) The argument in [ 140] is based on the following observation, which has an independent interest. PROPOSITION 2.4.8 (compare Theorem 2.4.8). Let A be an ultraweakly closed operator algebra on H such that the ultraweak closure o f A f3 ~ ( H ) contains the identity operator. Then 7-[n (A, X ) -" 7-[w (A, X ) f o r any normal A-bimodule and n >~O. We have already seen (Example 1.2.1) that for general CSL-algebras, the assertion of Theorem 2.4.14 is not valid even for the one-dimensional cohomology of algebras of finite (linear) dimension. (And therefore the cohomology groups, in principle, provide substantial invariants for algebras of this class.) We proceed to a general important construction, giving examples of non-trivial cohomology.

A. Ya. Helemskii

234

DEFINITION 2.4.13 (Gilfeather and Smith [57]). Let (A[ B) be a norm closed unital operator algebra acting on a Hilbert space ( H [ K ). Then the join of A and B is the operator algebra on H G K consisting of operators represented by block-matrices

[b 0] C

a

where ( a l b l c ) runs over ( A [ B I B ( K , H) ). It is denoted by A#B. The join ( A g C I A g C 2 ) is called the ( cone [ suspension ) of A and is denoted by ( C ( A ) [ S ( A ) ). Note that, if A and B are CSL-algebras, then so is their join. Here is, apparently, the main result concerning cohomology groups of joins. In what follows, for any unital operator algebra A, acting on H, we denote the space ~'~ (A, B(H)); where n > 0, by ~ n ( a ) , and the space ~ ~ B(H))/I.h.{1} by 7~~ (we recall that the latter cohomology group is the commutant of A and thus contains the identity operator). THEOREM 2.4.17 (idem). Let A and B be as above and, in addition, either H or K is finite-dimensional. Then, up to a linear isomorphism, n--

I

~n(A#B ) _ ~

(~[k (A) | ,~,l-k-I (B))

k=0

for any n >~ 1. Moreover, for any A and B we have "~~

= O.

COROLLARY 2.4.4 [56]. Let A be any norm closed operator algebra. Then 7-[n(S(A))~ [ n - l ( A ) f o r n >/1 a n d ' ~ ~ --0. Besides, ~ n ( C ( A ) ) --O f o r a l l n ~ 0. (As we shall see, the part, concerning cones, is also a corollary of Theorem 2.4.23 below.) The cited result explains the terminology: operator suspensions and cones behave exactly as their prototypes in topology. EXAMPLE 2.4.3. Take A as Sn(Ck+l), where S '~ is the suspension repeated n times. Then -- 0 for any m ~ n .

~[n(a) - C k, and ~[m(a)

This example generalises and, to some extent, explains Example 1.2.1 (at least for B -B(H))" one must only observe that the algebra, considered there, is just S(C2). Using such suspensions, one can construct CSL-algebras with arbitrary prescribed cohomology" THEOREM 2.4.18 (Gilfeather and Smith [55]). Let nk, k = 0, l, 2 . . . . . be a sequence of non-negative integers or cx~. Then there exists a CSL-algebra with dim T~k (A) -- n~ for all k.


235

The main technical tool, which helped the authors mentioned to construct the desired algebras from the "bricks" like s n ( c k+l) is PROPOSITION 2.4.9 (idem). Let Ad be the smallest class of operator algebras, containing commutative unital C*-algebras and closed under the operation of taking suspensions. Further, let Ak, k -- 1,2 . . . . . be in All, and let A be the l~-direct sum of these algebras. Then O0

~n(A)

" ~~n(Ak)

f o r any n >~ 1.

k=l

REMARK. As is mentioned in the cited papers, the ideas and results, connected with operator-theoretic suspensions and joins, were much influenced by the algebraic exploration of Kraus and Shack (alas, still not published). They discovered a relationship between the (Hochschild) cohomology of certain finite-dimensional operator algebras and the (topological) cohomology of certain simplicial complexes, naturally related to these algebras.

We spoke about cohomology with coefficients in /3(H); much less is known, if we replace the latter bimodule by /C(H). In particular, it is an open problem, whether 7-In(A,/C(H)) = 0 for an arbitrary von Neumann algebra, acting on H, and n > 1 (in other words, whether the "one-dimensional" result of Popa, cited in Subsection 1.2.1, can be extended to higher dimensions). The strongest result in this direction is, as far as we know, due to Radulescu [ 175], who proved that 7-t2 (A,/C(H)) -- 0 for a finite countably decomposable von Neumann algebra A on H not containing a certain "bad" type 111 factor as a direct summand. (The subscript w indicates that we mean the cohomology of the subcomplex in C(A, 13(H)), consisting of normal cochains, taking values in/C(H).) 2.4.5. (Co)homology as derived functors: principal facts and applications. Many of the results already presented on the computation of cohomology groups were obtained by methods working with cocycles in a suitable version of the standard complex. Now we turn to results, which were mostly obtained in the framework of another approach. This approach has its origin in the work of the founding fathers of homological algebra - Cartan, Eilenberg, MacLane [16,149], and also Hochschild [104]. It is based on the treating cohomology, as well as homology, groups of algebraic systems as particular cases of the unifying notion of a derived functor. Such an approach, properly carried over to "algebras of analysis", saves one from being tied to standard complexes. Instead, one can use suitable chosen (co)resolutions and the machinery of long exact sequences. The key fact is

236

A. Ya. Helemskii

THEOREM 2.4.19. Let A be a Banach algebra, and X be a Banach A-bimodule. Then, up to a topological isomorphism, 7-/n (A, X)

- - A Ext~

(A+, X)

and

7-In(A, X)

=

A

Tor A(X, A+)

for all n ~ O. I f in addition, A and X are unital, then we have also 7-[n(A,X) = AEXtnA(A,X)

and

7-[n(A,X)--ATorA(X,A).

A similar assertion ia valid for ~ - and ~ - (in particular, Fr6chet) algebras and respective classes of coefficients; the only difference is that the sign of equality should be understood in these cases as linear isomorphism. To prove the first two identities, one must just compute the mentioned (ExtlTor) by means of the normalised bimodule bar-resolution 0 ~ A+ ~--B(A+), introduced in 2.2.1" the emerging complex ( Aha (B(A+), X) IX ~ a B(A+) ) turns out to be isomorplic to the standard complex C (A, X) I C (A, X) ). The remaining identities can be established by the similar use of the unital version of B(A +), also mentioned in 2.2.1. As the first application, this theorem provides a characterization of contractible and (Johnson) amenable algebras, extending that in Theorem 1.3.1 and 1.3.4. Indeed, combining Theorem 2.4.19 with just mentioned results and with Theorem 2.3.6 and 2.3.10, we have THEOREM 2.4.20. Let A be a Banach algebra. Then (i) A is contractible iff T-tn(A, X) = Ofor all Banach A-bimodules X and any n > O, (ii) A is amenable iffT-[ n (A, X) = Ofor all dual Banach A-bimodules X and any n > O, (iii) A is amenable iffT-[n(A, X) = Ofor all Banach A-bimodules X and any n > O, and the space 7-~o(A, X) is Hausdorff. The assertions (i) and (iii) remain true in the wider context of ~ - and ~-algebras, and respective classes of coefficients. The second major application is based on employing, for the computation of derived functors, the entwining bimodule resolution of A+ (see again 2.2.1). Since this resolution has the length 2, Theorem 2.4.19, combined with Propositions 2.2.6 and 2.3.3, immediately implies THEOREM 2.4.21 cf. [85]. (i) If A is a biprojective ~-algebra, then ~ n (A, X) = 0 f o r all Banach A-bimodules X and n >~ 3.

(ii) If A is a biflat Banach algebra, then 7-In(A, X) = 0 for all dual Banach Abimodules X and n >/3. Moreover, 7-In(A, X) = 0 f o r all Banach A-bimodules X and n ~ 3, and the space 7-/2(A, X) is Hausdorff

We see, in particular, that such algebras as ll, L I(G) for a compact G, A/(E) for E with the approximation property, and E ~ E* for any E (see 1.3.3) have the vanishing cohomology groups with arbitrary coefficients, beginning with the dimension 3.


237

In some important cases, the ( cohomology I homology ) groups coincide with certain one-sided, and not only with two-sided, as above, ( Ext I Tor ) spaces: THEOREM 2.4.22. Let A be a Banach algebra. Then for any ( X ~ A-mod I mod-A) and Y E A-mod, we have, up to a topological isomorphism, (7-[n(A,13(X, Y)) = A Extn(x, Y)17-[n(A,X ~ Y ) = TorA (X, Y)) for all n >~O. The part, concerning homology and Tor, is valid for arbitrary ~-algebras and ~-modules (and also for ~-algebras and ~-modules, if we replace the symbol " ~ " by ~). The indicated identities become evident if we notice that the respective standard ( cohomology [ homology ) complex is isomorphic to the respective standard ( Ext[ Tor ) computing complex. As an immediate consequence, we get a "high-dimensional" extension of the criterion, presented in the Corollary 1.2.2: COROLLARY 2.4.5. Let A be a Banach algebra. A Banach left A-module ( X I Y I X ) is ( projective I injective Iflat ) iffT-[n(A,13(X, Y)) =O for ( any I any l any dual ) Banach left A-module ( Y I X I Y ) and any n > O. Furthermore, a Banach ( right I left ) A-module ( X I Y ) is fiat iff the space 7-/o(A, X ~ Y) is Hausdorff, and 7-In(A, X ~ Y) = 0 for any Banach ( lefi l right ) A-module (Y I X ) and any n > O. A particular case of this corollary deserves to be distinguished: THEOREM 2.4.23. Let A be a spatially ( projective [fiat ) operator algebra on a ( Banach [ reflexive Banach ) space E. Then 7-In(A, 13(E)) -- Ofor any n > 0 and, more generally, 7-In(A,/3(E, X)) = Ofor ( all[all dual ) left Banach A-modules X and any n > O. Combining this theorem with the information about spatially projective and spatially fiat Banach algebras presented in 1.1, we obtain examples of algebras with vanishing "spatial cohomology groups" 7-In(A, ~ ( E ) ) and their generalizations 7-/n(A,/3(E, X)) (for all or at least for all dual X 6 A-rood). The class of such operator algebras includes: 9 algebras, containing a column of rank-one operators (compare the "one-dimensional" case, presented as Theorem 1.3.7; among them we have 13(E), 1C(E), A/'(E) and, obviously, cones of arbitrary norm closed operator algebras on a Hilbert space (cf. Corollary 2.4.4); 9 Connes (= hyperfinite von Neumann) algebras; 9 nest algebras (as well as their generalizations in [54]). Here is one more EXAMPLE 2.4.4. Let A be an operator C*-algebra on H such that A+ has an algebraically cyclic vector. That means (see Proposision 0.2.1) that the A-module H is isomorphic to some A + / I where I is a closed left ideal in A+. Since left ideals in C*-algebras have fight

238

A. Ya. Helemskii

bounded approximate identities, A + / I and hence H are flat (Theorem 1.1.5(ii)). Thus 7-/n (A, ~(H, X)) -- 0 for all dual X ~ A-mod.

The case of dual bimodules provides additional possibilities for computing cohomology groups. Combining Theorem 2.4.19 with Proposition 2.3.4, we obtain THEOREM 2.4.24. Let A be a Banach algebra, and X -- (X.)* be a dual Banach Abimodule. Then, up to a topological isomorphism, ?'In(A, X) -- A E x t , ( X . , A*+). Moreover, in the case o f unital A and X, 7-In(A, X) -- a Ext~ (X., A*), n ~>0. What is, perhaps, more interesting is that the normal cohomology groups of operator C*-algebras, although defined in terms of non-normed topology, can also be expressed in the language of the standard ("Banach") Ext spaces, but with somewhat different variables: THEOREM 2.4.25 (cf. [91]). Let A be an operatorC*-algebra, and X - (X.)* be a dual Banach A-bimodule. Then, up to a topological isomorphism, 7-/n(A, Xw)

-- A

Ext,(X., A.),

n ~> O.

We recall that Xw is the normal part of X whereas A , is the predual bimodule to A-, the ultraweak closure of A (see 0.3). The proof is based on the computation of the indicated Ext by means of the injective coresolution 0 > A , Jr.> /~.(A) (see Proposition 2.2.5). The emerging complex A h A ( X , , ] ~ , ( A ) ) turns out to be isomorphic to Cw(A, Xw), and the theorem follows. (Similarly, Theorem 2.4.24 could also be obtained by means of the coresolution 0

> A* Jr*>/~*(A); mentioned in Proposition 2.2.4.) But what if we compute the same Ext with the help of other coresolutions mentioned in the same Proposition 2.2.4? Then we get complexes A h a ( X , , ~k(A)), k -- 1,2, which, as one can show, are isomorphic respectively to the complexes C'(A, XI) and (?(A, Xr). Thus Theorem 2.4.25 implies Theorem 2.4.8, formulated earlier. Theorem 2.4.25 also plays the principal role in the proving Theorem 1.3.9 (about the equivalence of two approaches to the notion of a Connes amenable algebra). Since the injectivity of the second argument implies the vanishing of respective Ext n for all n > 0, the latter theorem can now be presented in the following extended form: THEOREM 2.4.26. Let A be an operator C*-algebra. Then the following properties are equivalent (and hence, any of them can be taken as a definition of a Connes amenable algebra): (i) 7-{l (A, X) = Of o r all normal A-bimodules X, (ia) 7-/1(A, X) -- 0 f o r all normal A-bimodules X, (ib) 7-/lw(A, Xw) = Of o r all dual A-bimodules X, (ii) 7-In(A, X) = Of o r all normal A-bimodules X and n > O,


239

(iia) 7-t~v(A, X) -- 0 for all normal A-bimodules X and n > O, (iib) 7-/n(A, Xw) = Ofor all dual A-bimodules X and n > O, (iii) the Banach A-dimodule A , is injective. By virtue of Theorem 1.3.10, the indicated properties exactly mean, in intrinsic of operator-algebraic terms, that A - is hyperfinite (or, equivalently, "Connes injective"). We mention that the implication "hyperfiniteness ==~ (ii), (iia)" was originally proved in [ 116], and "(i) =r Connes injectivity" in [29]. As to completely bounded cohomology groups, they still wait to be interpreted in terms of a suitable derived functor.13 It seems probable that the recent modification of these groups, mentioned by Effros and Ruan [46] as "matricially bounded cohomology" will happen to be fairly tractable, and that the necessary ingredients (free modules, bar-resolution etc.) will be defined with the help of so-called "operator projective tensor product". This very promising type of the tensor product of operator spaces was recently introduced by Effros and Ruan (idem) and, independently, Blecher and Paulsen [ 10].

2.5. Homological dimensions 2.5.1. General definitions and properties. To speak informally, the homological dimension of a module is an integer (or cx~) which measures how far this module is "homologically bad". There are several versions of this notion, depending on which modules we want to consider as best. The most explored characteristic arises if we start from the class of projective modules.

DEFINITION 2.5.1. Let X be a ( left I right I two-sided ) ~ - m o d u l e over an ~ - a l g e b r a A; then the length of its shortest projective resolution is called its projective homological dimension and is denoted by ( A p.dh X ] p.dh A X I A p.dhA X ). When there is no danger of confusion, we say just "homological dimension" and omit "p." in the respective notation. In more traditional language, the homological dimension of X is obviously the least n for which X can be represented as P o / ( P 1 / . . . / (Pn- 1/ Pn)...) where all modules are projective and every Pk is complemented as a subspace of P~_ 1. In particular, it is equal to

0 just when X is projective. In fact, projective homological dimension can be similarly defined in any category of topological modules such that its objects have projective resolutions. Thus, we could replace the symbol " ~ " by " ~ " or to restrict ourselves to Banach or Fr6chet modules. In the next and subsequent propositions of this subsection we consider, to be definite, the case of left modules; these propositions have obvious analogues for other types of modules. 13 These lines were written in Spring of 1995 in Moscow. As it turned out, by that time the following discovery was already made on the opposite side of the globe. Vern Paulsen has succeeded to express the spaces ~cnb(-, 9) in terms of a proper "completely bounded" version of the spaces Extn (., 9). The latter, however, were defined not by means of derived functors, but as the spaces of equivalence classes of n-multiple extensions in the spirit of Yoneda (cf. 2.3.2 above). The achieved overview enabled Paulsen to give a new elegant proof of Theorems 2.4.11 and 2.4.12. See these striking results in his forthcoming paper "Relative Yonedacohomology for operator spaces".

240

A. Ya. Helemskii

By virtue of Theorem 2.3.1, the given definition implies the following PROPOSITION 2.5.1. Let A dh X < k. Then f o r any additive functor F from the category of left ~-modules over a to TVS we have Fk(X) - - 0 (or, respectively, F k ( X ) --0). For one of derived functors, the indicated property provides alternative approaches to the notion of the homological dimension: PROPOSITION 2.5.2. The following properties of X are equivalent: (i) a dh X 2, and (hence) db A ~> 2. The part, concerning db, was already presented as Theorem 2.4.5, and thus it implies Corollary 2.4.3 (concerning the existence of non-splitting singular extensions for all infinite-dimensional Banach function algebras). Recall (see 2.4.2) that the indicated estimates are something definitely exotic from the point of view of pure homological algebra, and in that realm the class of completely segregated algebras (which now could be defined as those with db A ~< 1) contains quite a few infinite-dimensional commutative semisimple algebras. Note that for all three concrete pure algebras mentioned in 2.4.2 (the polynomial algebra, the group algebra of Z and coo) we have dg A = d b A = 1.


245

The proof of the global dimension theorem (see [86] and [169] for a detailed exposition) absorbs various bits of information about Banach structures. It relies on some specific features of Banach geometry (the possible absence of Banach complements and norm estimates of some elements in Varopoulos algebras) which were already mentioned in connection with Theorem 2.5.1. Apart from this, the existence of the Shilov boundary as the subset, to speak informally, of the "non-analycity" of Gel'fand transforms also plays an important role (suggested by Theorem 1.1.2(i) which is essentially used in the proof). Where to find X with A dh X ~> 2? The following statement provides, in fact, a detailed formulation of Theorem 2.5.2. THEOREM 2.5.3. Let A be as above, s be the spectrum of A+ and 3S2+ be the Shilov boundary of s Then at least one of the following two possibilities occurs: either (i) there is s ~ 3~+ such that s \ {s} is not paracompact, or (ii) there is a converging sequence s = {Sn} of pairwise differentpoints of OS-2+. If(i) holds, then A dhCs ~> 2 (cf. Example 0.2.1). If (ii) holds, then s has a subsequence t = {t~ } such that for the respective A-module Cb = cb(t) (cf. Example 0.2.2) we have A dh Cb ~> 2. The assertion in case (i) is an obvious corollary of Theorem 1.1.1. In case (ii), taking a sufficiently sparse subsequence t of s and using standard homological techniques, one can manage to show that A dh Cb(t) /> 2 provided B dh Cb(t) f> 2 where B is the quotient algebra A + / I with I = {a: a ( t n ) = 0, for all n = 1, 2 . . . . }. Finally, continuing the lacunization, one ensures that B behaves, to speak informally, "either as co or as 1i" and reduces the desired estimate to the consideration of the two model examples, presented in Theorem 2.5.1. It turned out that phenomena, similar to the global dimension theorem, frequently happen in other "natural" classes of Banach algebras. In particular, the estimate dg A >~ 2 is valid for all infinite-dimensional CCR-algebras (Lykova [148]). The next result actually claims that the same estimate occurs for "the majority" of separable C*-algebras. Let I be a two-sided ideal in an algebra A. Recall that it is called complementable as a subalgebra if there exists another two-sided ideal J in A such that A -- I @ J. THEOREM 2.5.4 (Aristov [4]). Let A be a separable C*-algebra without an identity, or, more generally, such that there exists in A+ a closed two-sided ideal of finite codimension, which is not complementable as a subalgebra. Then dg A/> 2, and hence db A ~> 2. As a corollary, both estimates are valid for all separable infinite-dimensional tame (--postliminal, or GCR-) algebras and for all group C*-algebras of amenable infinite group with a countable base. In process of the proof, the concrete A-module X with A dh X = 2 is displayed. Namely, one can always extend I to a larger two-sided ideal 11 which is again noncomplementable as a subalgebra and also such that A + / I ~_ Mn, the algebra of all n x n matrices, for some n. Then X = .A4(I1), the multiplier algebra of I1, has the desired property. However, it is an open question, whether the global dimension theorem is valid for all infinite-dimensional C*-algebras, even if they are separable. As to the latter, the following conditional result of Aristov (idem) is worth of notice: if we have dg A ~> 2 for all simple

246

A. Ya. Helemskii

unital separable infinite-dimensional C*-algebras, then the same is true for all separable infinite-dimensional C*-algebras. Note that the respective parts of the cited theorems could be reformulated as follows: the number 1 is a forbidden value for dg, as well as for db, in the class of function Banach algebras and in the class of separable tame C*-algebras. Later we shall see that the same is true for group algebras of amenable groups (Theorem 2.5.13) and for A/(E), where E is an arbitrary Banach space (Theorem 2.5.12). All these results, combined with other available information about various homological dimensions (see the remaining subsections), provoke to state the following aggregative "problem of forbidden values". PROBLEM. (i) Is it true that dg A and~or db A are never equal to 1 in the class of semisimple Banach algebras ? Or at least C*-algebras ? Or all commutative Banach algebras ? (ii) The same, with "w.dg A and~or w.db A " instead "dg A and~or db A ". 15 (iii) Is it true that n.dbA is never equal to 1 in the class of operator C*-algebras ? Or at least von Neumann algebras ? Such a problem, modulo some nuances in formulation, was referred as "one of the most intriguing unanswered questions in functional analysis" by E. Effros and A. Kishimoto [45] (cf. also [ 163]) - and, in our humble opinion, quite deservedly. As a part of it, let us distinguish a "triple" question, which appears to be most urgent: 9 Do there exist non-contractible ( = infinite-dimensional) C*-algebras A with 7-/2(A, X) = 0 for all X 6 A-rnod-A? 9 Do there exist non-Johnson-amenable ( = non-nuclear) C*-algebras A with 7-/2(A, X) = 0 for all dual X ~ A-rnod-A? 9 Do there exist non-Connes-amenable ( = non-hyperfinite) von Neumann algebras A with 7-/2 (A, X) = 0 for all normal X ~ A - m o d - A ? As to the third question, a very recent result of Christensen and Sinclair [25] gives the impression that, most probably, it will be answered in negative. They have assigned to every von Neumann algebra A an A-bimodule X and, moreover, a cocycle f ~ Z2(A, X) such that f is a coboundary iff A is hyperfinite. However, this bimodule is not dual (although, in a sense, it is "rather near" to dual bimodules). Here is a partial result on behalf of the conjecture, concerning the commutative case. THEOREM 2.5.5 (Selivanov [197]). Let A be a commutative Banach algebra without a bounded approximate identity. If in addition, A has the bounded approximation property, 16 then dg A ~> 2 and hence db A ~> 2. Now we want to emphasize that, stating questions about forbidden values, we deliberately considered specific classes of Banach algebras, and not all Banach algebras. The thing is that Banach, and even finite-dimensional algebras A with dg A = db A - w.dg A -15 Selivanov has shown that w.dbK;(N'(H))= 1 (cf. p. 191). It is a strengthened version of the "usual" approximation property; see, e.g., [143].

16


247

w.db A -- 1 exist; the simplest example is the algebra consisting of 2 • 2 matrixes of the form

Ia b] 0

0

'

a, b r C

([ 16]; see also [ 189]). Also it is known that for the algebra of upper triangular n • n matrixes all the four dimensions are again equal to 1 (two different proofs are given by Smith [ 164] and Selivanov). At the moment, however, all Banach algebras occurring in known examples of that kind, are non-semisimple and at the same time non-commutative. REMARK. We do not consider in our exposition the so-called strict homological theory of Banach algebras and modules, based on the injective ("~-") instead of projective ("~-") tensor product. The behavior of homological characteristics in this theory essentially differs from that in the "standard" Banach homology and more resembles to the known facts of abstract homological algebra. In particular, the problem of forbidden values does not arise. For example, both "strict" dimensions, global and bi-, of C($2) in the case of infinite metrizable space 12 are equal to 1 (Kurmakaeva [ 139]).

The homological dimensions of Banach algebras have one more peculiarity: they behave "too regularly" under the operation of projective tensor product of algebras. A recent 17 result of Selivanov claims the following" if Ak, 1 0, would imply w dh Caug ~< n - 1 and eventually w dh Caug ---0. However, the latter equality is impossible because Z is not compact (see Proposition 1.1.10(i)). It is an open question, whether the assertion of the Sheinberg's theorem is valid for an arbitrary non-compact group G. It is true that the great majority of known groups satisfy the condition of the theorem. However, this condition is not ubiquitous. For example, there are discrete groups of Ol'shanskii [ 157] which are not amenable, but all their proper subgroups are finite. Similar exotic groups certainly require some specific treatment.

We have a rather scant knowledge about the behaviour of dimensions in the class of radical Banach algebras. For all algebras of that class with explicitly computed dimensions we have invariably a dh C ~ = dg A = db A = cx~. This is the case for all nilpotent Banach algebras [196] and for weighted convolution algebras l l (09) with a very rapidly decreasing wheight co = co(n), e.g., for co(n) = e x p ( - n l + ~ ) , e > 0 (Gumerov [73]). For somewhat larger classes of radical algebras it is established that 3 ~< dg A, db A: this is the case for all uniformly radical commutative Banach algebras, that is, A with l i m n ~ ~ = 0,


255

where rn sup{llr~ll: r ~ A, Ilrll ~ 1} [196,197]. (In particular, this applies to the algebra C,[0, 1] with underlying space C[0, 1], but with convolution multiplication.) Finally, many radical algebras satisfy the conditions of Theorem 2.5.5 and hence have 2 ~< dg A, db A; the same estimate is valid for all radical commutative Banach algebras A =

such that ~2 ~ A [86,73]. Both classes obviously include 11(co) with an arbitrary radical weight co. As to radical algebras, possessing a bounded approximate identity, such an estimate is given for the Volterra algebra L 1[0, 1] [ 197] and for L 1(R +, co) with a measurable radical weight co = co(t) (this is a very recent result of Ghahramani and Selivanov). 18

Despite rather a lot of results presented in this section, we feel obliged to end it with some kind of complaint. The challenging thing is that the dimensions of quite a few wellknown concrete algebras are still not exactly computed. Indeed, the "strong" dimensions (dg and db) of such time-honoured algebras as C[0, 1], Cb, /C(H) are unknown, and the same is true of the strong, as well as weak, dimensions of A(Dn), n - 1, 2 . . . . . /3(H), LI[0, 1]. Where is the difficulty? To get the estimate, say, (db A ~ n [ db A > n ) we must show that in some projective resolution 0
1, and put t~-- 1" C~ --+ C~ We shall write t instead of t~- if there is no danger of misunderstanding.


259

A simplicial cochain f is called cyclic if t f = f . We let CC n (A) denote the subspace of Cn(A) formed by the cyclic cochains. (In particular, CC~ = C~ = A*.) Note that for a Banach algebra A, c C n ( A ) is obviously closed in Cn(A). It is easy to see that the spaces C C n (A) form a subcomplex in C (A) denoted by C C (A); it is called the cyclic cochain complex (for A ). On the other hand, consider the operators tn : Cn (A) --+ Cn (A), well-defined by tn(ao |

"" |

= (-1)nan+l

|

@ ... @an;

and put to -- 1" Co(A) --+ Co(A). Let CCn (A) denote the quotient space of Cn (A) modulo the closure of the linear span of elements of the form x - tnX, n = 0, 1 . . . . (Thus CCo(A) -Co(A).) It is easy to see that differentials in C(A) induce, for all n, operators between

CCn+I and CCn(A). We obtain a quotient complex C C(A) of C(A), the so-called cyclic chain complex (for A). DEFINITION 2.6.4 (cf. [31,213]). The n-th ( cohomology I homology ) of the complex ( CC(A) I C C(A) ) is called the n-dimensional cyclic ( cohomology I homology ) group

of A, and is denoted by ( 7-[Cn (A) 17-[Cn(A) ). Observe that the complex, dual to C C(A), is isomorphic to CC(A) and hence, by virtue of Theorem 2.1.1, the vanishing of 7-[Cn(A) for all n ~> 0 is equivalent to that of 7-[Cn(A) for all n ~> 0. If x ' A --+ B is as in 2.6.1, then x n ' C n ( B ) --+ Cn(A), n - - 0 , 1 . . . . (see idem) obviously maps C C n (B) into C C n (A). Therefore~ a ~ m i l y of operators arises, which forms a morphism between the complexes CC(B) and CC(A), and hence generates, for any n, an operator between ~ C n ( B ) and ~ C n ( A ) . Thus, as in the case of the simplicial cohomology, we obtain a functor from the category of Banach algebras to (Ban) (or from that of topological algebras to Lin). It is called the cyclic cohomology functor and denoted by 7-[cn(?). In the similar way, for any n - 0 , 1 , . . . one can define the cyclic homology

functor 7-[Cn ( ? ). REMARK. We leave outside of our account a later and more sophisticated version of cyclic cohomology, entire cyclic cohomology of Banach algebras. See Connes [32], and also Kastler [ 131 ].

How to compute cyclic (co)homology? An objective difficulty is the absence, at least at the moment, of workable expressions of these spaces in terms of derived functors - contrary to the case of the simplicial ( cohomology I homology ), presented as (Z Ext%(A, A*)IATorA(A,A)) by virtue of Theorem 2.4.19. It is true, and in the next subsection we shall discuss that, that cyclic, as well as simplicial, (co)homology can be expressed in terms of Banach derived functors in some more sophisticated way; but so far

260

A. Ya. Helemskii

this interpretation does not help in computing the relevant groups for concrete topological algebras. Nevertheless, Connes [31 ] and Tzygan [213] discovered, in the context of (abstract) unital algebras, a powerful tool of another kind. This is a special exact sequence, connecting cyclic (co)homology with simplicial (co)homology. With its help, knowledge of the latter (co)homology (obtained, say, by means of the abovementioned Ext or Tor interpretations) gives valuable, and often exhaustive, information about the former (co)homology. We proceed to describe the Banach version of this "Connes-Tzygan exact sequence". As we shall see, such a sequence exists for all unital and for many, but not all, non-unital Banach algebras. The relevant class of algebras was described in [94], but the same class already was defined earlier [217], in connection with another problem (see Theorem 2.6.3 below). To introduce it, we need some preparations. Let A be a fixed Banach algebra. Consider the so-called reduced simplicial cochain complex 0

> CO(A) ~rO> ... ~

C n (A) 6rn> ...

(CR(A))

with the same spaces as in C (A), but with the operators defined by n

6r n f (ao . . . . . an+l) -" E ( - 1 )

k f (ao . . . . . akak+l . . . . . an+l)

k=O

(that is, differing from ~n by the absence of the last summand). Similarly, taking C(A) and replacing the boundary operator dn by drn, where the latter is well-defined by n

drn(ao |

|

= E (-1)kaO |

|

|

|

k=O

we obtain the so-called reduced symplicial chain complex, denoted by C R(A). Note that dro is just the product map for A, and 3r ~ is its adjoint operator. It is obvious that the complex, dual to C R ( A ) , is isomorphic to C R ( A ) . This, together

with the employment of the bar-resolution for the computing of the respective derived functors, easily gives PROPOSITION 2.6.3. The complex C R ( A ) is exact iff C R ( A ) is exact, and both properties are equivalent to each o f the properties

(A Extn (C, C ) 1 7 f ( A ,

C)I TorA (C, C)lT-[n(A, C ) ) - 0

for any n ~> 1. (Here and below we write C instead of C ~ , i.e. equip it with the zero outer multiplication/s.)

261


DEFINITION 2.6.5 (cf. Wodzicki [217]). A Banach algebra A is called homologically unital, or, briefly, H-unital, if it satisfies the mentioned equivalent properties. Of course, we could prolong the list of equivalent definitions of H-unitality, taking into account the relations

7-(n+l (A, C) = A Ext n+l (C, C) - Ext~ +1 (C, C) = A Ext n (C, A*) -- --

Ext~ (C A*) -- A Ext n (A, C) = Ext~ (A, C); ,

n -- 0, 1, 2 . . . . . and similar relations for the homology and Tor. Theorems 2.3.6 and 2.3.10, and the indicated relations easily imply the following sufficient condition. PROPOSITION 2.6.4. A B a n a c h algebra A is H - u n i t a l p r o v i d e d it is a flat left or right B a n a c h A-module, a n d A = ~2. In virtue of Proposition 1.1.9(ii), this happens rather frequently: COROLLARY 2.6.1. Suppose that A has a left or right b.a.i., or A is biflat. Then it is H-unital.

Thus the class of H-unital Banach algebras includes all C*-algebras, Ll-algebras of locally compact groups, and at the same time tensor algebras, generated by dualities, and hence algebras of nuclear operators in Banach spaces with the approximation property (cf. Proposition 1.3.8 and its corollary). On the other hand, 12 with coordinatewise multiplication and its "quantum version", the algebra s Hilbert-Schmidt operators on a Hilbert space H, are not H-unital: we have H I ( C R ( l l ) ) ~ le~/ll and H I ( C R ( E 2 ( H ) ) ~ 1 3 ( H ) / N ' ( H ) (see, e.g., [94]). We come to the central point of our discussion. THEOREM 2.6.1 (cf. [94]). Let A be an H - u n i t a l B a n a c h algebra. Then there exist, in the category ( B a n ) , exact sequences ... ~

7-[C n (A) --+ 7-[n (A) ~ 7-[C n-1 ( A ) --+ 7-[C n+l (A) --+ 7-[n+l ( A ) --+ . . .

(2.10) and 9.. +- 7-[Cn(A) +-- 7-In(A) +-- 7YCn-1 (A) +- 7-[Cn+l (A) +-- 7-/n+l (A) + - - - -

(2.11) These sequences are called the C o n n e s - T z y g a n exact sequences (for the cohomology or, respectively, homology of A). REMARK. As a matter of fact, in the pioneering papers [31,213], and later in [94], these sequences were constructed in a certain canonical way, with uniquely determined operators. So, to be precise, those constructed sequences are actually named after Connes and

262

A. Ya. Helemskii

Tzygan. For the existence of such "canonical" sequences the condition of H-unitality turns out not only sufficient, but also necessary [94]. Knowing when Connes-Tzygan exact sequences exist, we now show how they work. THEOREM 2.6.2 (cf. idem). Let A be an H - u n i t a l simplicially amenable Banach algebra (in particular, a biflat Banach algebra). Then, up to topological isomorphism, 7 - [ C n ( A ) - - A tr

and

7-[Cn(A):A/[A,A]

foranyevenn>/O,

and 7-[C n ( A ) -- 7-[Cn ( A ) = 0

f o r a n y o d d n ~ O.

(Here A tr is the space of bounded traces on A (cf. 2.4.1), and[A, A] is the closure of the linear span of {ab - ba; a, b E A}.) Indeed, the vanishing of 7-/n(A); n > 0 in (2.10) implies the "Bott periodicity" 7-[Cn(A) ~-- 7 - [ c n - 2 ( A ) . Thus, going to the left in (2.10), we see that the cyclic cohomology of A coincides with 7-[C~ that is with A tr, in even dimensions and vanishes in odd dimensions. The assertion concerning homology can be proved by a similar argument. EXAMPLE 2.6.1. Apart from biflat algebras, the conditions of this theorem are satisfied for C*-algebras "without bounded traces", that is, with A tr : 0 (cf. 2.5.1). Therefore for such algebras, in particular, for/C(H) and B ( H ) , we have 7-[Cn(A) = 7-[Cn(A) = 0 for all n = 0, 1, 2 . . . . (cf. [24,218]). EXAMPLE 2.6.2. For the biflat (moreover, biprojective) algebra A = ./V'(E), where E has the approximation property, we have Atr : C . Therefore 7-[Cn(A) -- 7-[Cn(A) =

C

0

for even n, for odd n.

There is another important tool, facilitating the computing of the cyclic homology for certain Banach algebras. It is the "excision theorem" of Wodzicki, which resembles the well known excision theorems in algebraic topology and algebraic K-theory. THEOREM 2.6.3 [217]. Let 0

>A

>B

>C

>0

be an extension o f B a n a c h algebras (cf. 2.4.2), which splits as a complex in Ban. I f in addition, A is H-unital, then there is an exact sequence (in Lin) 0
j + l .

(2.12)

Restricting ourselves to the generators 0/ and only taking, as relations, the first set of those in (2.1), we obtain a subcategory in A. The latter is called the standard presimplicial category and denoted by V. The next category we need is the standard cyclic category A, introduced by Connes [30]. It has the same countable set of objects, but more morphisms: a new set of formal generators r,, :n --+ n is added to those in A. The relations consists of those in (2.12) and a new family

for 1 ~ E 0 b~> . . .

En > E n-1 -bn-1 -~

__+...

(C (f)),

where E n = .7"(n), and 17

bn-l--

~(-

1)k~(O/).

k=O

It follows from the first family of relations in (2.12) that this is a (cochain) complex in Ban. If.7" is in fact (not only a cosimplicial, but) cocyclic Banach space, C (.7") has a subcomplex 0

> E C O bc~ 9 9 9

> E C n - 1 bc n-1> E c n - - - ~ . . .

(ec(f )

in which E C n -- {x ~ E n" x = ( - 1 ) n ~ ( r n ) x } . Since in these construction the degeneracy morphisms take no part, ( C(.73 1 CC(.7") } is meaningful also for the "merely" ( precosimplicial I precocyclic } Banach spaces. Similarly, if a ( simplicial I cyclic ), or "merely" ( presimplicial I precyclic ) Banach space .7" is given, one can define by an obvious analogy the chain complex (C(.Y) I C C ( ~ ) ) . Now, "forgetting" for a while the general Definition 2.6.6, we accept DEFINITION 2.6.7. Let .7" be a ( cosimplicial (or precosimplicial) I cocyclic ( ~ precocyclic) ) Banach space; then the n-th cohomology space of the complex ( C ( f ) [ CC(~') ) is called the n - d i m e n s i o n a l ( simplicial [ cyclic ) cohomology group of .7" and denoted by (7-/n(~-) 17-/cn(.~). Similarly, the n - d i m e n s i o n a l h o m o l o g y group of ( simplicial (presimplicial) I cyclic (precyclic)) Banach space .7" is defined as the n-th homology of ( C (.7")1 C C (.7") }; it is denoted by (7-/n (.7-) [ 7-[Cn (SF)). We single out the eminently important EXAMPLE 2.6.4. Let A be a Banach algebra, for which we suppose the multiplicative inequality Ilabll ~< Ilallllbll is satisfied. Let .7"'V --+ Banl be a covariant functor, well-defined by n w-> C n ( A ) , 0i ~ d i " C n-1 ( A ) ~ C n ( A ) , and rn w-> tn" C n ( A ) C n ( A ) , where d i f (ao . . . . . an) = f (ao, . . . , aiai+l . . . . . an) for i < n, dn f (ao . . . . , a n ) --

266

A. Ya. Helemskii

f (anao, al, . . . , a n - l ) and tn f (ao . . . . . an) = f (al . . . . , an, ao). If, in addition, A has an identity e, we. extend ? to a functor (again denoted by U) from A to Ban1, joining the assignments crJ ~ s J "Cn+I(A) ~ Cn(A), where sJ~f (ao . . . . . an) -- f (ao . . . . . a j , e , aj+l, . . . . an). It is obvious that 3t- is precosimplicial or, in the unital case, cosimplicial Banach space, and the restriction ~" to V (or, respectively, to A) is a precosimplicial (or cosimplicial) Banach space. One can easily check that the space (7-[n (U) 17-[Cn (U)) coincides with the "usual" n-dimensional ( simplicial I cyclic ) cohomology group (7-[n(A) IT-[Cn(A)). .

Similarly, the same Banach algebra A gives rise to a precyclic, and in the unital case a cyclic Banach space .T" with .T'(n) - A ~ . . - ~ A (n + 2 factors) and properly chosen operators, assigned to the generator morphisms; in particular, f ' ( r j ) takes ao | @ an+l into an+l | ao | | an. The ( simplicial I cyclic ) homology of this cyclic Banach space coincides with ( ~ n ( A ) I ~ C n ( A ) ). We now arrive at the main result which shows that cyclic, as well as simplicial (co)homology in the sense of Definition 2.6.7 is but a particular case of/C-categorical (co)homology in the sense of Definition 2.6.6. THEOREM 2.6.4 [95]. Let .T be a ( cosimplicial (or precosimplicial) I cocyclic (or precocyclic) ) Banach space; then, up to a topological isomorphism, 7-/n ( f ' ) -- K; Ext" (~_, E ( f ' ) ) ,

n -- O, 1 . . . . .

where 1C = ( A (or V)IA (or V) ). Similarly, if in the assumption o f the theorem we have contravariant, instead of covariant, functors (that is, "simplicial" instead of "cosimplicial" etc.), then, for the same respective 1C, we have the "twin "formula

7Yn (f') -- Toff~ (E (f'), ~_). The proof is based on the computing of the respective Ext (or Tor) spaces with the help of a special projective resolution of the/C-module ~. I f / C - { A I V ) , then the E___modules, participating in this resolution, are just the closed left ideals/C n in/C, generated by l n ' n ~ n as an (idempotent) element of/C. If/C -- A, the respective modules have the same underlying spaces as A__, and the A-module structure, extending in some suitable way the A__A_-modulestructure of __An. (The same holds f o r / C - V, if we replace A by V.) See [95] for the formulae for the differentials and other details. The Connes-Tzygan exact sequence has its proper generalization to the case of arbitrary (co)cyclic Banach spaces: THEOREM 2.6.5 (idem). Let ,~ be a cocyclic Banach space. Then there exists the exact sequence 9..--> ~ C ~ (.~) --> ~

(.F) --> ~ C ' - I ( . F ) --> ~ C ' + I ( . F ) --> ~ + ~ ( . ~ ) -->...


267

Moreover, if ~ is a precocyclic Banach space ("only"), then such a sequence exists provided v E x t n ( C , E ( f ) ) - - 0 where C is the left V-module associated with the functor, welldefined by the assignments 0 w-~ C and n w-~ {0} for n > O. A parallel statement is valid for cyclic Banach spaces, homology and Tor. In fact, the indicated Ext (or the respective Tor) space vanishes in the case when a given f " V ~ Banl can be extended to the larger category A; so the first assertion of the theorem can be obtain as a corollary of the second. Thus the mentioned condition on Ext (Tor) plays the same role as the condition of H-unitality does in the "usual" cyclic (co)homology. Moreover, as in the latter case, such a condition turns out to by not only sufficient but also necessary if we shall consider a certain canonical way of constructing the relevant exact sequences. Recently, some problems in topology and algebra led to the introduction, in the pure algebraic context, of the so-called dihedral (co)homology, based on the notion of the standard dihedral category ,~ (cf. [135]); the latter has the same objects as A but a larger set of morphisms. The Banach version of the dihedral cohomologies was studied by Mel'nikov [151 ]. He established that Banach dihedral cohomology, defined by means of some standard complex (cf. C ( f ) above), happens to be the particular case of a/C-categorical cohomology for/C - ,~. (Thus he extended Theorem 2.6.4 from the cases of A and A to that of ,E ) Besides, he has shown that the cyclic cohomology of a dihedral Banach space .T" decomposes into the direct sum of the dihedral cohomology of ~ and that of some "twin" dihedral Banach space .T"t.

References [ 1] C.A. Akemann, G.A. Elliott, G.K. Pedersen and J. Tomiyama, Derivations and multipliers of C*-algebras, Amer. J. Math. 98 (1976), 679-708. [2] C.A. Akemann and G.K. Pedersen, Central sequences and inner derivations of separable C*-algebras, Amer. J. Math. [3] O.Yu. Aristov, Non-vanishing of the second cohomology of certain weakly amenable Banach algebras, Vest. Mosk. Univ. Ser. Mat. Mekh. 4 (1993), 71-74 (in Russian). [4] O.Yu. Aristov, The global dimension theoremfor non-unital and some other separable C*-algebras, Mat. Sb. 186 (9) (1995), 3-18 (in Russian). [5] W.G. Bade, The Wedderburn decomposition for quotient algebras arising from sets of non-synthesis, Proceedings of the Centre for Math. Analysis, Australian National University, Vol. 21 (1989), 25-31. [6] W.G. Bade and P.C. Curtis, Homomorphisms of commutative Banach algebras, Amer. J. Math. 82 (1960), 589--608. [7] W.G. Bade and P.C. Curtis, The Wedderburn decomposition of commutative Banach algebras, Amer. J. Math. 82 (1960), 851-866. [8] W.G. Bade, P.C. Curtis and H.G. Dales, Amenability and weak amenability for Beurling and Lipschitz algebras, Proc. London Math. Soc. 55 (1987), 359-377. [9] B.Blackadar, K-theory for Operator Algebras, Springer, New York (1986). [10] D.P. Blecher and V.I. Paulsen, Tensorproducts ofoperator spaces, J. Funct. Anal. 99 (1991), 262-292. [ 11] E E Bonsall and J. Duncan, Complete Normed Algebras, Ergebnisse der Mathematik und ihrer Grenzgebiete, B. 80, Springer, New York (1973). [ 12] S. Bowling and J. Duncan, First order cohomology ofBanach semigroup algebras, Preprint. [ 13] O. Bratelli and D.W. Robinson, Operator Algebras and Quantum Statistical Mechanics, I, Springer, New York (1979).

268

A. Ya. Helemskii

[141 J.W. Bunce, Characterization ofamenable and strongly amenable C*-algebras, Pacific J. Math. 43 (1972), 563-572. [151 J.W. Bunce, Finite operators and amenable C*-algebras, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 56 (1976), 145-151. [161 H. Caftan and S. Eilenberg, Homological Algebra, Princeton Univ. Press, Princeton (1956). [17] E. Christensen, Perturbations of operator algebras, Part I, Invent. Math. 43 (1977), 1-13; Part II, Indiana Univ. Math. J. 26 (1977), 891-904. [18] E. Christensen, Derivations of nest algebras, Math. Ann. 229 (1977), 155-161. [191 E. Christensen, Derivations and their relation to perturbations of operator algebras, Operator Algebras and Applications, R.V. Kadison, ed., Proc. of Symp. in Pure Math., Vol. 38, Part 2, Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, RI (1982), 261-274. [20] E. Christensen, E.G. Effros and A.M. Sinclair, Completely bounded multilinear maps and C*-algebraic cohomology, Invent. Math. 90 (1987), 279-296. [21] E. Christensen and D.E. Evans, Cohomology of operator algebras and quantum dynamical semigroups, J. London Math. Soc. 20 (1979), 358-368. [22] E. Christensen, F. Pop, A.M. Sinclair, R.R. Smith: On the cohomology groups of certain finite yon Neumann algebras, Preprint. [23] E. Christensen and A.M. Sinclair, Representations of completely bounded multilinear operators, J. Funct. Anal. 72 (1987), 151-181. [24] E. Christensen and A.M. Sinclair, On the vanishing ofT-(n (A, A*) for certain C*-algebras, Pacific J. Math. 137 (1989), 55-63. [25] E. Christensen and A.M. Sinclair, A cohomological characterization of approximately finite dimensional von Neumann algebras, KCbenhavns Univ., Mat. Inst. Preprint Series, No. 11 (1994). [26] E. Christensen and A.M. Sinclair, On the Hochschild cohomology of yon Neumann algebras, K0benhavns Univ., Mat. Inst. Preprint Series, No. 32 (1988). [27] J. Cigler, V. Losert and P. Michor, Banach Modules and Functors on Categories of Banach Spaces, Marcel Dekker, New York (1979). [28] A. Connes, Classification of injective factors, Ann. of Math. 104 (1976), 73-115. [29] A. Connes, On the cohomology of operator algebras, J. Funct. Anal. 28 (1978), 248-253. [30] A. Connes, Cohomologie cyclique etfoncteurs Ext n, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris Srr I Math. 296 (1983), 953958. [31] A. Connes, Non-commutative differential geometry, Part I and II, Preprint IHES (1983); Publ. Math. 62 (1986), 44-144. [321 A. Connes, Entire cyclic cohomology of Banach algebras and characters of O-summable Fredholm modules, K-theory 1 (1988), 519-548. [33] J. Cuntz, Excision in periodic cyclic theory for topological algebras, Forschergruppe, Topologie und nichtkommutative geometrie, Preprint No. 127 (1994). [34] P.C. Curtis, Amenable and weakly amenable commutative Banach Algebras, Linear and Complex Analysis Problem Book, Part I, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 1573, Springer (1994), 83-84. [35] H.G. Dales, Automatic continuity, a survey, Bull. London Math. Soc. 10 (1978), 129-183. [36] H.G. Dales, Banach Algebras and Automatic Continuity, London Mathematical Society Monographs, Oxford University Press, to appear. [37] K.R. Davidson, Nest Algebras, Pitman Research Notes in Math. Series, No. 191, Longman, Harlow (Essex, UK). [38] M. Despic and E Ghahramani, Weak amenability of group algebras and non-amenability of measure algebras, Preprint. [39] R.S. Doran and J. Wichmann, Approximate Identities and Factorization in Banach Modules, Springer, Berlin (1979). [40] R.G. Douglas, C*-algebra Extensions and K-homology, Princeton Univ. Press, Princeton (1980). [411 S. Drury, On non-triangular sets in tensor algebras, Studia Math. 34 (1970), 253-263. [42] N. Dunford, Spectral operators, Pacific J. Math. 4 (1954), 321-354. [43] E.G. Effros, Advances in quantizedfunctional analysis, Proc. of the ICM, Berkeley (1986). [44] E.G. Effros, Amenability and virtual diagonals for von Neumann algebras, J. Funct. Anal. 78 (1988), 137-153.

Homology f o r the algebras of analysis

269

[45] E.G. Effros and A. Kishimoto, Module maps and Hochschild-Johnson cohomology, Indiana Univ. Math. J. 36 (1987), 257-276. [46] E.G. Effros and Z.-J. Ruan, A new approach to operator spaces, Canad. Math. Bull. 34 (1991), 329-337. [47] S. Eilenberg and J.C. Moore, Foundation of Relative Homological Algebra, Mem. Amer. Math. Soc., No. 55, 1965. [48] J. Eschmeier and M. Putinar, Spectral theory and sheaf theory, HI, J. Reine Angew. Math. 354 (1984), 150-163. [49] T. Fack, Finite sums of commutators in C*-algebras, Ann. Inst. Fourier (Grenoble), 32 (1) (1982), 129137. [50] C. Faith, Algebra, Rings, Modules and Categories I, Springer, New York (1973). [51] C. Feldman, The Wedderburn principal theorem in Banach algebras, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 2 (1951), 771-777. [52] P. Gabriel and M. Zisman, Calculus of Fractions and Homotopy Theory, Springer, Berlin (1967). [53] E Gilfeather, Derivations on certain CSL-algebras, J. Operator Theory 11 (1984), 145-156. [54] F. Gilfeather, A. Hopenwasser and D.R. Larson, Reflexive algebras with finite width lattices: tensor products, cohomology, compact perturbations, J. Funct. Anal. 55 (1984), 176-199. [55] E Gilfeather and R.R. Smith, Operator algebras with arbitrary Hochschild cohomology, Cont. Math. 121) (1991), 33-40. [56] F. Gilfeather and R.R. Smith, Cohomology for operator algebras: cones and suspensions, Proc. London Math. Soc. 65 (1992 ), 175-198. [57] F. Gilfeather and R.R. Smith, Cohomologyfor operator algebras: joins, Amer. J. Math. 116 (1994), 541561. [58] A.M. Gleason, Finitely generated ideals in Banach algebras, J. Math. Mech. 13 (1964), 125-132 (in English) = Matematika 9 (1965), 119-127 (in Russian). [59] Yu.O. Golovin, Homological properties of Hilbert modules over nest operator algebras, Mat. Zametki 41 (6) (1987), 769-775 (in Russian) = Math. Notes (1987), 433-437 (in English). [60] Yu.O. Golovin, A criterion for the spatial projectivity of an indecomposable CSL-algebra of operator, Uspekhi Mat. Nauk 49 (4) (1994), 161-162 (in Russian) = Russian Math. Surveys 49 (4) (1994), 161-162 (in English). [61] Yu.O. Golovin, Spatial homological dimension of operator-algebraic cones, suspensions and some joins, Commun. Algebra 23 (9) (1995), 3447-3455. [62] Yu.O. Golovin, The spatial flatness and injectivity for an indecomposable CSL-algebra, Preprint. [63] Yu.O. Golovin and A.Ya. Helemskii, The homological dimension of certain modules over a tensor product of Banach algebras, Vest. Mosk. Univ. Ser. Mat. Mekh. 1 (1977), 54-61 = Moscow Univ. Math. Bull. 32 (1977), 46-52. [64] N. GrCnbaek, Amenability of weighted convolution algebras on locally compact groups, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc., Preprint. [65] N. Gr~nbaek, Amenability of weighted discrete convolution algebras on cancellative semigroups, Proc. Royal Soc., Edinburgh ll1)A (1988), 351-360. [66] N. GrCnbaek, A characterization of weakly amenable Banach algebras, Studia Math. 94 (1989), 149-162. [67] N. GrOnbaek, Morita equivalence for Banach algebras, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 99 (1995), 183-219. [68] N. GrCnbaek, Morita equivalence for self-induced Banach algebras, KCbenhavns Univ., Mat. Inst. Preprint Series, No. 24 (1994). [69] N. GrCnbaek, Amenability and weak amenability of tensor algebras and algebras of nuclear operators, K~benhavns Univ., Mat. Inst. Preprint Series, No. 23 (1989). [70] N. Gr~nbaek, B.E. Johnson and G.A. Willis, Amenability of Banach algebras of compact operators, K~benhavns Univ. Mat. Inst. Preprint Series, No. 13 (1992). [71] A. Grothendieck, Produits Tensoriels Topologiques et Espaces Nucleaires, Mem. Amer. Math. Soc., No. 16 (1955). [72] A. Guichardet, Sur l'homologie et la cohomologie des algebres de Banach, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 262 (1966), A38-4 1. [73] R.N. Gumerov, Homological dimension of radical algebras of Beurling type with rapidly decreasing weight, Vest. Mosk. Univ. Ser. Mat. Mekh. 5 (1988), 18-22 (in Russian).

270

A. Ya. Helemskii

[74] R.C. Gunning and H. Rossi, Analytic Functions of Several Complex Variables, Prentice-Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ (1965). [75] U. Haagerup, All nuclear C*-algebras are amenable, Invent. Math. 74 (1983), 305-319. [76] E de la Harpe, Moyennabilit~ du groupe unitaire et propri~t~ P de Schwartz des alg~bres de von Neumann, Algebres d'Operateurs Seminaire, Les Plans-sur-Bex, Suisse, 1978, E de la Harpe, ed., Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 725, Springer, Berlin (1979), 220-227. [77] A.Ya. Helemskii, Annihilator extensions of commutative Banach algebras, Izv. Akad. Nauk SSSR Ser. Mat. 29 (1965), 945-956 (in Russian). [78] A.Ya. Helemskii, Strong decomposability of finite-dimensional extensions of C*-algebras, Vest. Mosk. Univ. Ser. Mat. Mekh. 4 (1967), 50-52 (in Russian). [79] A.Ya. Helemskii, The homological dimension of normed modules over Banach algebras, Mat. Sb. 81 (123) (1970), 430-444 (in Russian) = Math. USSR Sb. 10 (1970), 399-411 (in English). [80] A.Ya. Helemskii, The homological dimension of Banach algebras of analytic functions, Mat. Sb. 83 (125) (1970), 222-233 (in Russian) = Math. USSR Sb. 12 (1970), 221-233 (in English). [81] A.Ya. Helemskii, A description of relatively projective ideals in the algebra C(~), Doklad. Akad. Nauk SSSR 195 (1970), 1286-1289 (in Russian) = Soviet Math. Dokl. 1 (1970), 1680-1683 (in English). [82] A.Ya. Helemskii, The periodic product of modules over Banach algebras, Funct. Anal. i Pill. 5 (1971), 95-96 (in Russian) = Functional Anal. Appl. 5 (1971), 84-85 (in English). [83] A.Ya. Helemskii, A certain class of flat Banach modules and its applications, Vest. Mosk. Univ. Ser. Mat. Mekh. 27 (1) (1972), 29-36 (in Russian). [84] A.Ya. Helemskii, A certain method of computing and estimating the global homological dimension of Banach algebras, Mat. Sb. 87 (129) (1972), 122-135 (in Russian) = Math. USSR Sb. 16 (1972), 125-138 (in English). [85] A.Ya. Helemskii, The global dimension of a Banach function algebra is different from one, Funct. Anal. i Pill. 6 (1972), 95-96 (in Russian) = Functional Anal. Appl. 6 (1972), 166-168 (in English). [86] A.Ya. Helemskii, The lowest values taken by the global homological dimensions of functional Banach algebras, Trudy Sem. Petrovsk. 3 (1978), 223-242 (in Russian) - Amer. Math. Soc. Trans. 124 (1984), 75-96 (in English). [87] A.Ya. Helemskii, Homological methods in the holomorphic calculus of several operators in Banach space after Taylor, Uspekhi Matem. Nauk 36 (1981), 127-172 (in Russian) = Russian Math. Surveys 36 (1) (1981) (in English). [88] A.Ya. Helemskii, Flat Banach modules and amenable algebras, Trudy MMO 47 (1984), 179-218 (in Russian) - Trans. Moscow Math. Soc. (1985), 199-244 (in English). [89] A.Ya. Helemskii, The Homology of Banach and Topological Algebras, Kluwer, Dordrecht (1989). [90] A.Ya. Helemskii, Some remarks about ideas and results of topological homology, Proc. Centre for Math. Anal., Australian National University, Vol. 21 (1989), 203-238. [91] A.Ya. Helemskii, Homological algebra background of the "amenability after A. Connes": injectivity of the predual bimodule, Mat. Sb. 180 (1989), 1680-1690 (in Russian). [92] A.Ya. Helemskii, Homology in Banach and polynormed algebras: some results and problems, Operator Theory, Advances and Applications, Vol. 42, Birkh~iuser, Basel (1990), 195-208. [93] A.Ya. Helemskii, From the topological homology: algebras with various conditions of the homological triviality, Algebraic Problems of the Analysis and Topology, Voronezh University Press (1990), 77-96 (in Russian) - Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 1520, Springer (1992), 19-40 (in English). [94] A.Ya. Helemskii, Banach cyclic (co)homology and the Connes-Tzygan exact sequence, J. London Math. Soc. (2) 46 (1992), 449-462. [95] A.Ya. Helemskii, Banach cyclic (co)homology in terms of Banach derived functors, Algebra i Analiz 3 (1991), 213-228 (in Russian) = St. Petersburg Math. J. 3 (1992), 1149-1164 (in English). [96] A.Ya. Helemskii, Banach and Locally Convex Algebras, General Theory, Representations, Homology, Oxford University Press, Oxford (1993). [97] A.Ya. Helemskii, A description of spatially projective von Neumann algebras, J. Operator Theory 32 (1994), 381-398. [98] A.Ya. Helemskii, The spatial flatness and injectivity of Connes operator algebras, Extracta Math. 9 (1) (1994), 75-81.

Homology f o r the algebras o f analysis

271

[99] A.Ya. Helemskii, 31 problems on the homology of the algebras of analysis, Linear and Complex Analysis Problem Book, Part I, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 1573, Springer, Berlin (1994), 54-78. [lOO] A.Ya. Helemskii, A homological characterization of type I factors, Doklady RAN 344 (4) (1995). [lOl] A.Ya. Helemskii and Z.A. Lykova, On the normal version of the simplicial cohomology of operator algebras, Bull. Austral. Math. Soc. 48 (1993), 407-410. [lO2] A.Ya. Helemskii and M.V. Sheinberg, Amenable Banach algebras, Funct. Anal. i Pill. 13 (1979), 42-48 (in Russian) = Functional Anal. Appl. 13 (1979), 32-37 (in English). [103] G. Hochschild, On the cohomology groups ofan associative algebra, Ann. of Math. 46 (1945), 58-76. [104] G. Hochschild, Relative homological algebra, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 82 (1956), 246-249. [105] K. Jarosz, Perturbations of Banach Algebras, Springer, Berlin (1980). [106] B.E. Johnson, The Wedderburn decomposition of Banach algebras with finite-dimensional radical, Amer. J. Math. 90 (1968), 866-876. [107] B.E. Johnson, An introduction to the theory of centralizers, Proc. London Math. Soc. 14 (1964), 299-320. [108] B.E. Johnson, Approximate diagonals and cohomology of certain annihilator Banach algebras, Amer. J. Math. 94 (1972), 685-698. [109] B.E. Johnson, Cohomology in Banach Algebras, Mem. Amer. Math. Soc., No. 127 (1972). [110] B.E. Johnson, A class of l I1 factors without property P but with zero second cohomology, Arkiv frr Math. 12 (1974), 153-159. [111] B.E. Johnson, Introduction to cohomology in Banach algebras, Algebras in Analysis, J.H. Williamson, ed., Acad. Press, London (1975), 84-99. [112] B.E. Johnson, Perturbations of Banach algebras, Proc. London Math. Soc. 34 (1977), 439-458. [113] B.E. Johnson, Stability of Banach algebras, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 660, Springer (1978), 109-114. [114] B.E. Johnson, Low dimensional cohomology of Banach algebras, Operator Algebras and Applications, R.V. Kadison, ed., Proc. of Symp. in Pure Math., Providence, Amer. Math. Soc., Part 2 (1982), 253-259. [115] B.E. Johnson, Weak amenability of group algebras, Bull. London Math. Soc. 23 (1991), 281-284. [116] B.E. Johnson, R.V. Kadison and J.R. Ringrose, Cohomology ofoperator algebras, HI, Reduction to normal cohomology, Bull. Soc. Math. France 100 (1972), 73-96. [117] B.E. Johnson and S.K. Parrot, Operators commuting with avon Neumann algebra modulo the set of compact operators, J. Funct. Analysis 11 (1972), 39-61. [118] L. Kadison, On the cyclic cohomology of nest algebras and a spectral sequence induced by a subalgebra in HochschiM cohomology, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, Serie 1311 (1990), 247-252. [119] R.V. Kadison, Derivations of operator algebras, Ann. of Math. 83 (1966), 280-293. [120] R.V. Kadison and D. Kastler, Perturbations of von Neumann algebras I, Stability of type, Amer. J. Math. 94 (1972), 38-54. [121] R.V. Kadison and J.R. Ringrose, Cohomology of operator algebras I, Type Ivon Neumann algebras, Acta Math. 126 (1971), 227-243. [122] R.V. Kadison and J.R. Ringrose, Cohomology of operator algebras II, Extended cobounding and the hyperfinite case, Ark. Mat. 9 (1971), 55-453. [123] R.V. Kadison and J.R. Ringrose, Fundamentals of the Theory of Operator Algebras, Vol. II, Academic Press, London (1986). [124] J.P. Kahane, S~ries de Fourier Absolument Convergentes, Ergebnisse der Mathematik und ihrer Grenzgebiete, B. 50, Springer, Berlin (1970). [125] S.I. Kaliman and Yu.V. Selivanov, On the cohomology of operator algebras, Vest. Mosk. Univ. Ser. Mat. Mekh. 29 (5) (1974), 24-27 (in Russian) = Moscow Univ. Math. Bull. 29 (5) (1974), 20-22 (in English). [126] E. Kallin, A non-local function algebra, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. 49 (1963), 821-824. [127] H. Kamowitz, Cohomology groups of commutative Banach algebras, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 102 (1962), 352-372. [128] H. Kamowitz and S. Scheinberg, Derivations and automorphisms of L 1[0, 1], Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 135 (1969), 415-427. [129] I. Kaplansky, On the dimension of modules and algebras, X, Nagoya Math. J. 13 (1958), 85-88. [130] A.M. Karyaev and N.V. Yakovlev, On the automatic complementability of certain classes of annihilator ideals in Banach algebras, Vest. Mosk. Univ. Ser. Mat. Mekh. 3 (1990), 95-98 (in Russian). [131] D. Kastler, Entire cyclic cohomology ofZ/2-graded Banach Algebras, K-theory 1 (1989), 485-509.

272

A. Ya. Helemskii

[ 132] A.A. Kirillov and A.D. Gvishiani, Theorems and Problems in Functional Analysis, Nauka, Moscow (1979) (in Russian). [ 133] A.S. Kleshchev, The homological dimension of Banach algebras ofsmoothfunctions is infinity, Vest. Mosk. Univ. Ser. Mat. Mekh. 6 (1988), 57-60 (in Russian). [134] L. Koszul, Homologie et cohomology des alg~bres de Lie, Bull. Soc. Math. France 78 (1950), 65-127. [135] R.L. Krasauskas, S.V. Lapin and Yu.P. Solov'ev, Dihedral homology and cohomology. Basic concepts and constructions, Mat. Sb. 133 (175) (1987), 24--48 (in Russian) = Math. USSR Sb. 61 (1988) (in English). [136] A.N. Krichevets, On the connection of homological properties of some Banach modules and questions of the geometry of Banach spaces, Vest. Mosk. Univ. Ser. Mat. Mekh. 2 (1981), 55-58 (in Russian) = Moscow Univ. Math. Bull. 36 (1981), 68-72 (in English). [ 137] A.N. Krichevets, Calculation of the global dimension of tensor products of Banach algebras and a generalization of a theorem of Phillips, Mat. Zametki 31 (1982), 187-202 = Math. Notes 31 (1982), 95-104. [138] A.N. Krichevets, On the homological dimension ofC(I2), VINITI Preprint No. 9012-V86 (1986) (in Russian). [139] E.Sh. Kurmakaeva, The impact of the topology of I2 on the strict homological dimension of C(S2), Mat. Zametki 55 (3) (1994), 76-83 (in Russian). [140] E.C. Lance, Cohomology and perturbations of nest algebras, Proc. London Math. Soc. 43 (1981), 334356. [141] A.T. Lau, Characterizations ofamenable Banach algebras, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 70 (1978), 156-160. [142] G. Lindblad, Dissipative operators and cohomoly of operator algebras, Lett. Math. Phis. 1 (1976), 219224. [143] J. Lindenstrauss and L. Tzafriri, Classical Banach Spaces II, Sequences Spaces, Ergebnisse Math. 92, Springer, New York (1977). [144] J.-L. Loday, Cyclic Homology, Springer, Berlin (1992). [145] Z.A. Lykova, On homological characteristics of operator algebras, Vest. Mosk. Univ. Ser. Mat. Mekh. 1 (1986), 8-13 (in Russian). [146] Z.A. Lykova, Structure of Banach algebras with trivial central cohomology, J. Operator Theory 28 (1992), 147-165. [ 147] Z.A. Lykova, On non-zero values of the central homological dimension of C*-algebras, Glasgow Math. J. 34 (1992), 369-378. [148] Z.A. Lykova, The lower estimate of the global homological dimension of infinite-dimensional CCRalgebras, Operator Algebras and Topology, W.B. Arveson, A.S. Mishchenko, M. Putinar, M.A. Rieffel, S. Stratila, eds, Longman (1992), 93-129. [149] S. MacLane, Homology, Die Grundlehren der Mathematischen Wissenschaften 114, Springer, Berlin (1963). [ 150] A. Mallios, Topological Algebras, Selected Topics, North-Holland, Amsterdam (1986). [151] S.S. Mel'nikov, On dihedral Banach cohomologies, Uspekhi Mat. Nauk 48 (6) (1993), 161-162 (in Russian) = Russian Math. Surveys 48 (6) (1993), 171-172 (in English). [152] W. Moran, The global dimension ofC(X), J. London Math. Soc. (2) 17 (1978), 321-329. [ 153] J.P. Nielsen, Cohomology of some non-selfadjoint operator algebras, Math. Scand. 47 (1980), 150-156. [ 154] O.S. Ogneva, Coincidence of homological dimensions of Fr~chet algebra of smooth functions on a manifold with the dimension of the manifold, Funct. Anal i Pril. 20 (1986), 92-93 (in Russian). [155] O.S. Ogneva, On homological dimensions of certain algebras of test functions and distributions on Abelian compactly-generated Lie groups, VINITI, No. 4591-B.86 (1986) (in Russian). [156] O.S. Ogneva and A.Ya. Helemskii, Homological dimensions of certain algebras of fundamental (test) functions, Mat. Zametki 35 (1984), 177-187 (in Russian). [157] A.Yu. Ol'shanskii, On the question of the existence of an invariant mean on a group, Uspekhi Mat. Nauk 35 (1980), 199-200 (in Russian). [ 158] T.W. Palmer, Banach Algebras and the General Theory of *-Algebras, Vol. I, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (1994). [159] T.W. Palmer, Banach Algebras and the General Theory of*-Algebras, Vol. II, to appear. [160] A.L.T. Paterson, Amenability, AMS, Providence, RI (1988). [ 161 ] A.L.T. Paterson, Invariant mean characterizations of amenable operator algebras, Preprint. [162] A.L.T. Paterson, Nuclear C*-algebras have amenable unitary groups, Preprint.

Homology f o r the algebras o f analysis

273

[163] A.L.T. Paterson, Virtual diagonals and n-amenability for Banach algebras, Preprint. [164] A.L.T. Paterson and R.R. Smith, Higher-dimensional virtual diagonals and ideal cohomology for triangular algebras, Preprint. [165] G.K. Pedersen, C*-Algebras and Their Automorphism Groups, Academic Press, London (1979). [166] J. Phillips and I. Raeburn, Perturbations of C*-algebras, II, Proc. London Math. Soc. (3) 43 (1981), 46-72. [167] J. Phillips and I. Raeburn, Central cohomology ofC*-algebras, J. London Math. Soc. (2) 28 (1983), 363372. [168] S. Popa, The commutant modulo the set of compact operators of a von Neumann algebra, J. Funct. Anal. 71 (1987), 393-408. [169] S. Pott, An account on the Global Homological Dimension Theorem of A.Ya. Helemskii, The Univ. of Leeds, Preprint (1994). [170] LT Pugach, Flat ideals of Banach algebras, Vest. Mosk. Univ. Ser. Mat. Mekh. 1 (1981), 59-63 (in Russian) = Moscow Univ. Math. Bull. 36 (1981), 70-74 (in English). [171] L.I. Pugach, Projective and flat ideals of function algebras and their connection with analytic structure, Mat. Zametki 31 (1982), 239-245 (in Russian). [172] L.I. Pugach, Homological properties of functional algebras and analytic polydiscs in their maximal ideal spaces, Rev. Roumaine Math. Pure Appl. 31 (1986), 347-356 (in Russian). [173] LT Pugach, Projective ideals of function algebras, and the Shilov boundary, Problems of Group Theory and Homological Algebra, Yaroslavl Univ. Press (1987), 22-24 (in Russian). [174] M. Putinar, Functional calculus with sections of an analytic space, J. Operator Theory 4 (1980), 297-306. [175] E Radulescu, Vanishing of H 2 (M, K(H)) for certain finite von Neumann algebras, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 326 (1994), 569-584. [176] I. Raeburn and J.L. Taylor, HochschiM cohomology and perturbations of Banach algebras, J. Funct. Anal. 25 (1977), 258-266. [177] T.T. Read, The power of a maximal ideal in a Banach algebra and analytic structure, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 161 (1971), 235-248. [178] M.A. Rieffel, Induced Banach representations of Banach algebras and locally compact groups, J. Funct. Anal. 1 (1967), 443-491. [179] J.R. Ringrose, On some algebras of operators, Proc. London Math. Soc. 15 (3) (1965), 61-83. [180] J.R. Ringrose, Cohomology of operator algebras, Lectures in operator Algebras, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 247, Springer, Berlin (1972), 355-434. [181] J.R. Ringrose, Cohomology theory for operator algebras, Operator Algebras and Applications, R.V. Kadison, ed., Proc. of Symp. in Pure Math., Part 2, Providence, Amer. Math. Soc. (1982), 229-252. [182] R. Rochberg, The disc algebra is rigid, Proc. London Math. Soc. 39 (3) 1979, 93-118. [183] J. Rosenberg, Homological invariants of extensions of C*-algebras, Operator Algebras and Applications, R.V. Kadison, ed., Proc. of Symp. in Pure Math., Vol. 38, Part I, Amer. Math. Soc., Providence, RI (1982), 35-75. [184] J. Rosenberg, Algebraic K-Theory and its Applications, Springer, Berlin (1994). [185] Z.-J. Ruan, Subspaces ofC*-algebras, J. Funct. Anal. 76 (1988), 217-230. [186] V. Runde, A functorial approach to weak amenability for commutative Banach algebras, Glasgow Math. J. 34 (1992). [187] S. SakaJ, Derivations of W*-algebras, Ann. of Math. 83 (1966), 273-279. [188] H. Schaeffer, Topological Vector Spaces, Springer, New York (1971). [189] Yu. V. Selivanov, The values assumed by the global dimension in certain classes of Banach algebras, Vest. Mosk. Univ. Ser Mat. Mekh. 30 (1) (1975), 37-42 (in Russian) = Moskow Univ. Math. Bull. 30 (1) (1975), 30-34 (in English). [190] Yu.V. Selivanov, Homological dimension of cyclic Banach modules and homological characterization of metrizable compacta, Mat. Zametki 17 (1975), 301-305 (in Russian) = Math. Notes 17 (1975), 174-176 (in English). [191] Yu.V. Selivanov, Biprojective Banach algebras, their structure, cohomologies, and connection with nuclear operators, Funct. Anal. i Pril. 10 (1976), 89-90 (in Russian) = Functional Anal. Appl. 10 (1976), 78-79 (in English). [192] Yu.V. Selivanov, Banach algebras ofsmall global dimension zero, Uspekhi Mat. Nauk 31 (1976), 227-228 (in Russian).

274

A. Ya. Helemskii

[193] Yu.V. Selivanov, Biprojective Banach algebras, Izv. Akad. Nauk SSSR Ser. Mat. 43 (1979), 1159-1174 (in Russian) = Math. USSR Izvestija 15 (1980), 387-399 (in English). [ 194] Yu.V. Selivanov, Homological "additivity formulae" for Banach algebras, Int. Conf. on Algebra (Barnaul 20-25 Aug., 1991), Novosibirsk (1991), p. 78 (in Russian). [ 195] Yu.V. Selivanov, Homological characterizations of the approximation property for Banach spaces, Glasgow Math. J. 34 (1992), 229-239. [196] Yu.V. Selivanov, Computing and estimating the global dimension in certain classes of Banach algebras, Math. Scand. 72 (1993), 85-98. [197] Yu.V. Selivanov, Projective ideals and estimating the global dimension of commutative Banach algebras, Third Int. Conf. on Algebra in Honour of M. I. Kargopolov: Abstract of Reports, Krasnojarsk (1993), 297-298 (in Russian). [198] Yu.V. Selivanov, Projective Fr~chet modules with the approximation property, Uspekhi Mat. Nauk 50 (1) (1995), 209-210 (in Russian). [ 199] Yu.V. Selivanov, Fr~chet algebras ofglobal dimension zero, Algebra, Proc. of the 3rd Int. Conf. on Algebra held in Krasnoyarsk, Russia, 23-28 August, 1993, Walter de Gruyter (1996), 225-236. [200] Yu.V. Selivanov, Weak homological bidimension and its values in the class of biflat Banach algebras, Extracta Math. (to appear). [201] M.V. Sheinberg, Homological properties of closed ideals that have a bounded approximate unit, Vest. Mosk. Univ. Ser. Mat. Mekh. 27 (4) (1972), 39-45 (in Russian) = Moscow Univ. Math. Bull. 27 (1972), 103-108 (in English). [202] M.V. Sheinberg, On the relative homological dimension of group algebras of locally compact groups, Izv. Akad. Nauk SSSR Ser. Mat. 37 (1973), 308-318 (in Russian) = Math. USSR Izvestija 7 (1973), 307-317 (in English). [203] M.V. Sheinberg, A characterization of the algebra C(J2) in terms of cohomology groups, Uspekhi Mat. Nauk 32 (1977), 203-204 (in Russian). [204] A.M. Sinclair and R.R. Smith, Hochschild Cohomology of von Neumann Algebras, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (1995). [205] I.M. Singer and J. Wermer, Derivations on commutative normed algebras, Math. Ann. 129 (1955), 260264. [206] J.L. Taylor, A joint spectrum for several commuting operators, J. Funct. Anal. 6 (1970), 172-191. [207] J.L. Taylor, Analytic functional calculus for several commuting operators, Acta Math. 125 (1970), 1-40. [208] J.L. Taylor, A general framework for a multi-operator functional calculus, Adv. Math. 9 (1972), 183-252. [209] J.L. Taylor, Homology and cohomology for topological algebras, Adv. Math. 9 (1972), 137-182. [210] J.L. Taylor, Functions of several noncommuting variables, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 79 (1973), 1-34. [211 ] M.P. Thomas, The image of a derivation is contained in the radical, Ann. of Math. 128 (1988), 435-460. [212] J.Tomiyama, On the projection ofnorm one in W*-algebras, Proc. Japan. Acad. 33 (1957), 608-612. [213] B.L. Tzygan, Homology of matrix Lie algebras over rings and Hochschild homology, Uspekhi Mat. Nauk 38 (1983), 217-218 (in Russian). [214] N.Th. Varopoulos, Tensor algebras and harmonic analysis, Acta Math. 119 (1967), 51-112. [215] S.Wasserman, On tensor products of certain group C*-algebras, J. Funct. Anal. 23 (1976), 239-254. [216] J.G. Wendel, Left centralizers and isomorphisms of group algebras, Pacific J. Math. 2 (1952), 251-261. [217] M. Wodzicki, The long exact sequence in cyclic homology associated with an extension of algebras, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 306 (1988), 399-403. [218] M. Wodzicki, Vanishing of cyclic homology of stable C*-algebras, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 307 (1988), 329-334. [219] M. Wodzicki, Homological properties of rings of functional-analytic type, Proc. National Academy Science, USA, Preprint. [220] N.V. Yakovlev, Examples of Banach algebras with a radical that can not be complemented as a Banach space, Uspekhi Mat. Nauk 44 (5) (1989), 185-186 (in Russian) = Russian Math Surveys 44 (5) (1989), 224-225 (in English).

Section 2D

Model Theoretic Algebra


Stable Groups Frank Wagner* Mathematical Institute, University of Oxford, 24-29 St Giles', Oxford OX1 3LB, United Kingdom E-mail: [email protected]

Contents 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Model-theoretic preliminaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Chain conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Generic types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Superstable groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. Groups of finite Morley rank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. One-based groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. The group configuration and the binding group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. Final remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. Bibliographical remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

279 281 286 293 297 302 305 308 311 312 313

*Heisenberg-Stipendiat der Deutschen Forschungsgemeinschaft (Wa 899/2-1). Current address: Institut Girard Desargues, Universit6 Claude Bernard (Lyon-l), Mathtmatiques, b~timent 101, 43, boulevard d u l l novembre 1918, 69622 Villeurbanne-cedex, France. E-mail: [email protected]. H A N D B O O K OF A L G E B R A , VOL. 2 Edited by M. Hazewinkel 9 2000 Elsevier Science B.V. All rights reserved 277


Stable groups

279

1. Introduction Stability theory - or, as it was then called, classification theory - has been invented in the early 1970's by Shelah [ 165] as a tool for the classification of the models of a complete first-order theory. Through the work of Zil'ber [200], however, it soon became apparent that the notion has a distinctly algebro-geometric flavour, and that many of the methods and results from algebraic geometry should generalize to the wider setting of stable theories, and that algebraic objects, in particular groups and fields, would play a central part in the development of the theory. Roughly speaking, stability theory provides a notion of independence which generalizes algebraic independence; in nice cases (superstable structures) there also is a dimension, called rank, which takes ordinal values. Thus we may obtain a whole hierarchy of simultaneous finitely-valued dimension theories, one at each level cod , each coarser than the preceding one, allowing us to rank and compare definable sets of entirely different magnitude, and study their interactions. A structure is strongly minimal if every definable subset is either finite or cofinite, uniformly in parameters. These are the simplest stable structures; examples are (1) a set without structure (with only equality), (2) a vector space over a division ring D (with addition and unary functions for scalar multiplication by d, for every d 6 D), (3) an algebraically closed field (with addition and multiplication). If A is a subset of a structure 93l, the algebraic closure acl(A) of A is the set of elements of 9Jr which lie in some finite A-definable set; if 93/is strongly minimal, algebraic closure induces a combinatorial pre-geometry on 97t, a dependence relation (x depends on y over A if x E acl(A, y) - acl(A)), and a dimension. (In the examples above, this dependence relation is just equality, linear and algebraic dependence, respectively, and dimension is cardinality, vector space dimension, and transcendence degree.) 93t is locally modular if dim(A U B) + dim(A n B) -- dim(A) + dim(B) whenever A, B __c 93/are algebraically closed with A n B ~ 0. Zil'ber conjectured: TRICHOTOMY CONJECTURE. Every strongly minimal structure either has degenerate pre-geometry (if a depends on A U B, it depends on A or on B), or is bi-interpretable with a vector space over a division ring, or with an algebraically closed field.

He then proceeded to show that a locally finite locally modular strongly minimal set interprets a definable Abelian strongly minimal group (the group configuration theorem [205]), and that under some circumstances certain automorphism groups of a structure are interpretable in it (the binding groups [202]). Both of these theorems were generalized by Hrushovski to a much wider context [80]. As groups interpretable in a stable structure are again stable, this forged a link between abstract model theory and the study of stable groups. In 1988 Hrushovski [87] constructed a new kind of strongly minimal set which is neither locally modular (ruling out degenerate pre-geometries and vector spaces) nor interprets any group at all, thus refuting the Trichotomy Conjecture. However, the trichotomy was shown to hold for strongly minimal subsets of many algebraically interesting structures

280

F. Wagner

(algebraically closed fields, differentially closed fields, separably closed fields, existentially closed difference fields) [117,43]; in fact in [95,96] Hrushovski and Zil'ber created an abstract framework (called Zariski Geometries) in which the Trichotomy Conjecture is true, leading to applications in algebraic geometry and number theory (Hrushovski's proofs of the Mordell-Lang and Manin-Mumford conjectures, see Section 7). Let us call a structure 9Yt almost strongly minimal if it has a definable strongly minimal subset X such that 9Jr = acl(X). Then a particular consequence of the Trichotomy Conjecture would be CHERLIN'S CONJECTURE [56]. An almost strongly minimal simple group is an algebraic group over an algebraically closed field. This conjecture is still open; if true, it would mean that from the existence of a dimension function on the definable sets of a simple group one can recover the Zariski topology. In analysing a minimal counter-example to the conjecture [56,121,59,39], one quickly came up with two main obstacles: the possible existence of an almost strongly minimal simple group whose soluble subgroups are all nilpotent-by-finite (a bad group), and the possible existence of an almost strongly minimal field with a definable infinite proper multiplicative subgroup (a bad field). Recent results by Poizat [ 156] indicate that bad fields may exist; as for the existence of bad groups, it seems likely that they may be constructed using the methods of Olshanski'i [97] - but proving almost strong minimality for such a group would be very difficult. Struck by the similarity between almost strongly minimal simple groups and finite simple groups of Lie type, Borovik and Nesin [37] and their collaborators developed a programme to prove Cherlin's Conjecture under the additional assumption that there were no bad groups or fields interpretable, which proceeds in analogy (albeit on a much smaller scale) to the Lie case of the classification of finite simple groups. This has been quite successful; the cases of even characteristic and large groups in odd characteristic have almost been dealt with. However, a lot of work remains to be done in the case of small groups of odd characteristic. As I see it, the interest in stable groups is thus threefold. Firstly, they serve as a tool for the model-theoretic analysis of arbitrary structures, via the group configuration and the binding group. Secondly, they form an interesting class of infinite groups which is amenable to group-theoretic investigation. And thirdly, they encompass various important specific algebraic structures, whose detailed model-theoretic study has been very fruitful. After a quick review of model theory, we shall define model-theoretic stability in Section 2 and survey its main properties. In Section 3 we shall derive the various chain conditions on subgroups implied by stability, in particular the chain condition on centralizers, and study groups with chain conditions. Section 4 introduces generic types; we shall see that type-definable groups, or genetically given groups, are embedded into definable groups. Superstable groups and fields are dealt with in Section 5, which also contains Zil'ber's Indecomposability Theorem. In Section 6 we look at groups of finite Morley rank and Cherlin's Conjecture. One-based groups (satisfying a strong form of local modularity) are treated in Section 7, the group configuration and the binding group in Section 8. We discuss additional results and recent developments in Section 9.

Stable groups

281

2. Model-theoretic preliminaries In a model-theoretic analysis of a structure, it is important to specify the language used. For instance, the complex numbers in the ring language {0, 1, +, - , ,} will have very different properties to the complex numbers in the ring language enriched by the modulus function; less trivially, a vector space V over a field K in the module language {0, +, )~k: k 6 K} is very different from the two-sorted structure (V, K), where we have addition on V, addition and multiplication on K, and an application function (k, v) w-~ kv. As we shall be dealing with groups, our structures will usually have a symbol 9 for multiplication, but may carry additional constants, functions and relations. A structure for the language/2 is an s structure; given an/:-structure 9Y~ and a subset A of 9Y~, we can expand the language by adding constants for elements of A. This new language is denote by s the expansion is called inessential and is usually harmless. Having fixed the language s we can define the s recursively: any constant or variable is a term, and if tl . . . . . tn are terms, so is f ( q . . . . . tn), for any n-ary function f 6 s An atomic formula is one of the form R (tl . . . . . tn), where R is an n-ary relation symbol (for instance, equality is a binary relation), and tl . . . . . tn are again terms. More general formulas are obtained by means of Boolean combinations and quantification: if ~o and ~k are formulas, so are -,~o, ~b A 7t, 4~ v 7t, 3x~o and Yx~0. A sentence is a formula whose variables are all in the scope of some quantifier; we say that 93~ satisfies a sentence ~p (denoted 9Y~ ~ tp) if the natural interpretation of ~o in 9Y~holds. A theory is a collection of s an s 9Y~is a model for some theory T if every (p 6 T is satisfied by 9Y~. A theory is complete if it implies every sentence or its negation; given an s 9Y~ we obtain a complete theory Th(gY~) as the set of all/:-sentences satisfied by (or true in) 9Yr. Two s are elementarily equivalent if they have the same theory; a substructure 93~ of an s 92 is elementary, denoted 9Y~-< 92, if it is s equivalent to 9t. The theorem of L6wenheim-Skolem states that every infinite/~-structure 9Y~ has an elementary substructure in every infinite cardinality between Is and 193ql, and an elementary superstructure in every cardinality greater than [9Y~I.Hence the best one can hope for is that a theory describes its models up to cardinality. DEFINITION 1. A theory T is x-categorical if all its models of cardinality x are isomorphic; it is totally categorical if it is categorical in all infinite cardinalities. A famous theorem by Morley [120] states that a countable theory is Wl-categorical if and only if it is categorical in every uncountable cardinality. A dense linear order is wcategorical, a vector space over a finite field is totally categorical, and an algebraically closed field is uncountably categorical (as is any strongly minimal, or almost strongly minimal, set). If 93~ is an E-structure and n < oJ, a subset X __c ~)-)~n is definable if it is of the form ~0(s ~ = {~ a 93~n" 93~ ~ ~o(~)} for some E-formula tp(s Examples of definable subsets of a group are the centralizer of an element g (via the formula xg -- gx), the subset of elements of order dividing n (defined by the formula x , . - - 9x = 1, abbreviated to x n = 1), and the centre Z ( G ) (given by Yy x y = yx). Subsets not usually definable are those which involve a recursive process, like the group generated by a finite tuple, or the commutator

F. Wagner

282

subgroup (unless there is a bound on the length of a sum of commutators needed to express an element of G'). A set is definable over A if it can be expressed by a formula with parameters from A. A subset X g ~j'~n is type-definable if it is given by an infinite intersection of definable sets; some care is necessary when dealing with type-definable objects. For instance, the intersection of the definable subgroups nZ of Z (for n < w) is the identity {1 }. However, this is a particularity of the model Z: in every group G elementarily equivalent to Z, the subgroup given by An~ 2 ITI. If T is countable and 09-stable, it is stable for all infinite ~. (and in particular superstable). l f T is stable, then I,L satisfies: (1) Existence: l f p ~ S(A) and A c B, then there is an extension q ~ S(B) of p which does not fork over A. (2) Symmetry: A JJ~B C if and only if C I,~BA. (3) Transitivity" A ~.,B C and A ~Lsc D if and only if A I,J~8CD. (4) Finite Character: A .~B C if and only if there are finite h ~ A and ~ E C with (5) Local Character: For every p ~ S(A) there is Ao c_C_A with IAol ~< ITI, such that p does not fork over Ao. (6) Boundedness: If p ~ S(A) and A c B, then p has at most 2 ITI non-forking extensions to B. In fact, if 9X is a model of a stable theory, p ~ S(gX) and A D 9X, then p has a unique non-forking extension q 6 S(A)" it is characterized by 99(Y, h) ~ q iff ~ dpY 99(Yc,h) for any 99 ~ s and h 6 A. So q has the same 99-definition as p. T is superstable ifand only if it is stable and for every p ~ S(A) there is afinite Ao c__A such that p does not fork over Ao. By the existence axiom, given any type p e S(A) we can find an indiscernible sequence (hi" i < o9) of realizations of p such that ai ,.~a {t]j" j < i}. Such a sequence is called a Morley sequence for p; as it forms an indiscernible set, we have ai .J~a {h j: j # i }. All Morley sequences for p are isomorphic over A. Having defined independence, we now aim for dimensions. For convenience, denote by On + the collection of ordinals together with an additional symbol oo which is greater than all ordinals. DEFINITION 4. Let 99(Y, ~) be a formula. D(., 99, 09) is the smallest function from the collection of all partial types in Y to 09 satisfying: if re(Y) is a partial type over A, then D(re(Y), 99, 09) ~> n + 1 if there is an instance 99(Y,h) which forks over A, such that D(re(X-) U {9(Y, h)}, qg, o9) ~> n. The Shelah rank D is the smallest function from the collection of all partial types to On + satisfying for all ordinals a: if re(~) is a partial type over A, then D(re) ~> c~ + 1 if there is a formula 99(~) which forks over A, such that D(re U {99}) ~> a. The Morley rank R M is the smallest function from the collection of all partial types to On + which satisfies for all ordinals a" if re(~) is a partial type over A, then RM(re) >t ~ + 1 if there is B _ A and pairwise contradictory extensions qi for i < 09 of Jr to B, such that RM(qi) >~ot for all i < 09. The Lascar rank U is the smallest function from the collection of all complete types to On + satisfying for all ordinals ~" U(p) ~> c~ + 1 if p has a forking extension q with U(q) ~ .

Stable groups

285

If R is any rank, we shall abbreviate R (tp(a / B)) as R (a / B). It is clear from the definition that the Lascar, Shelah and Morley ranks are invariant under definable maps with finite fibres. If RM(rc) < cx~, we define the Morley degree DM(rc) to be the maximal number of pairwise inconsistent extensions of Jr of Morley rank RM(Jr); this is finite. It is easy to see that a set is strongly minimal if and only if it has Morley rank and degree 1. More generally, an almost strongly minimal set, or an col-categorical countable theory, have finite Morley rank. THEOREM 2.2. I f T is stable, then D(zr, qg, co) is finite f o r all Jr and qg. Moreover, if A c B and q ~ S(B) extends p ~ S(A), then q does not fork over A iff D(q, qg, co) -- D ( p , qg, co) f o r all q~. For any type p we have U(p) F ( G ) , then there is a G-invariant subgroup F H for all H < G. Recall that we can continue the ascending central series into the transfinite, by taking unions at the limit stages. A group G is hypercentral if G = Z ~ ( G ) for some ordinal c~; it is easy to see that a hypercentral group satisfies the normalizer condition. It follows from Bludov [32] that: THEOREM 3.1 7. I f G is an 93tc-group, the following are equivalent: (i) G is locally nilpotent. (ii) G is hypercentral. (iii) G satisfies the normalizer condition. In the periodic case, Bryant [44] has shown: THEOREM 3.18. A locally nilpotent periodic 92tc-group G is nilpotent-by-finite; if G / Z i ( G ) has finite exponent f o r some i < co, then G is nilpotent. For all d sufficiently large F ( G ) -- CG(gcl!: g ~ G), and this is also the maximal nilpotent subgroup o f finite index. PROOF. G is soluble by Lemma 3.9; if G / Z i ( G ) has finite exponent, G is uniformly locally nilpotent and hence nilpotent by Corollary 3.12. Using periodicity, an induction shows that there are ni < 09 such that gni ~ Z ( G ) for all g c Z i ( G ) . For the general case, use induction on centralizer chains, together with the identity

I-I

(gi -- gj) = det(g/) -- 0

O/cod. We say indecomposable instead of O-indecomposable. INDECOMPOSABILITY THEOREM [ 2 0 0 , 2 9 ] . If 5( is a family of type-definable c~-indecomposable subsets containing 1 in a superstable group G with U (G) < cod+1, then (~) = X~I 1. . . Xim 1for some X1 . . . . . Xm e ~. PROOF. Choose k < co maximal possible and X1 . . . . , Xn E X such that X1:]:1 -.-X~ 1 contains a type p with U ( p ) - codk. By L e m m a 5.1 a left translate of p is generic for s t a b ( p - 1); moreover s t a b ( p - 1 ) ___ p - 1p, and X ___s t a b ( p - 1 ) by ot-indecomposability for all X E X. Hence (SE) -- stab(p - i ) -- (X~ 1-.. X n Z k l ) - I ( X 1 d:l 9 9 9x ~ l ) . [-7 LEMMA 5.8. If G is superstable, H ~ G is type-definable connected with U(H) - codn, and g ~ G, then gH and [g, H] are a-indecomposable.

300

F. Wagner

PROOF. Suppose gH is non-trivial, with U (gH K / K ) < coa for some definable subgroup K < G. As N - - A h E H K h is equal to a finite subintersection, we get w a > U(g H / N ) - - U ( H / C H ( g / N ) ) . Hence C H ( g / N ) -- H by Lascar's inequalities and connectivity, and gH is contained in a single coset of N, whence of K. Thus g n is ct-indecomposable, as is g-1 g n = [g, H]. [3 COROLLARY 5.9. A superstable non-Abelian group G without definable normal subgroups is simple. PROOF. U(G) = wan for some ordinal ct and n < w by Theorem 5.2. Any non-trivial conjugacy class generates a definable normal subgroup by Lemma 5.8 and the Indecomposability Theorem. E] Baudisch [ 18] has used this result to show that any superstable connected group G has a normal series G -- Go t> GI t> G2 D ... t> Gn {1} such that Gi/Gi+l is either simple or Abelian, for all i < n. =

COROLLARY 5.10. In a superstable connected group G with U(G) = wan, the groups in the derived and descending central series are type-definable. PROOF. Use Lemma 5.8 and the Indecomposability Theorem, with H -- G.

[3

We shall now study the structure of soluble groups. DEFINITION 16. If a type-definable group M acts definably on an infinite definable group G, then G is M-minimal if it has no proper infinite type-definable M-invariant subgroup. PROPOSITION 5.1 1 [203]. Suppose a type-definable Abelian group M acts definably on an M-minimal type-definable Abelian group A in a superstable structure, such that U(A) < U ( M / C M ( A ) ) . w . Then there are a definable field K, a definable isomorphism K + ~ A, and a definable embedding M / C M ( A ) ~ K • PROOF. By Theorem 5.2 and M-minimality, A is connected and U (A) = wan for some c~ and n < w. If CM(A) -- Cg(ao . . . . . ak), then coa ~ K x by Proposition 5.11. Either K + or K x has an infinite 2-subgroup, which lifts to an infinite 2-subgroup of G by Corollary 3.25. IS] As for finite groups, there should be two cases: char(K) -- 2 and char(K) ~ 2. DEFINITION 17. A group is of even type if its Sylow 2-subgroups are of bounded exponent; it is of odd type if its Sylow 2-subgroups are divisible-by-finite. THEOREM 6.7 [100]. A simple K*-group o f finite Morley rank has even or odd type. Note that Theorem 6.7 does not use tameness (in our definition, finite Sylow 2-subgroups are both even and odd). Its proof uses the fact that in a K - g r o u p a divisible connected nilpotent subgroup and a nilpotent connected subgroup of bounded exponent commute. Assuming that G is a counterexample, it derives the existence of a weakly embedded subgroup M (i.e. M has infinite Sylow 2-subgroups, but M n Mg has finite Sylow 2-subgroups for all g 6 G - M). But such a group cannot be simple.

304

F. Wagner

Work on even type simple tame groups of finite Morley rank is proceeding well and the classification seems within reach of present methods [4]. In fact, there is even hope to eliminate tameness from the assumptions and prove: EVEN TYPE CONJECTURE. A simple group G of finite Morley rank without infinite degenerate definable sections is an algebraic group over an algebraically closed field. Here a group is degenerate if its Sylow 2-subgroups are finite. By contrast, the groups of odd type are less well understood. DEFINITION 18. The 2-rank m(G) of a group G is the maximal rank of an elementary Abelian 2-subgroup of G; the normal 2-rank n(G) is the maximal rank of a normal elementary Abelian subgroup of a Sylow 2-subgroup of G. The 2-generated core Fs,2(G) of a Sylow 2-subgroup S ~< G is the minimal definable subgroup of G containing NG(U) for all U ~< S with m(U) >~2. An involution i of G is classical if CG(i) has a subnormal subgroup A isomorphic to SL2(K) for some algebraically closed field K with i 6 Z(A); the component A is a classical subgroup of G. G satisfies the B-conjecture if CG(i) ~ = F(CG(i))~ for all involutions i c G, where E (H) is the product of all quasi-simple subnormal subgroups of H. In a group G of finite Morley rank ofodd type, n(H) and m ( H ) are finite for any H ~< G by Proposition 6.3. By definition Fs,2(G) is definable; moreover, by Corollary 3.2 there is a bound on the number of quasi-simple subnormal subgroups, and E (H) is definable as well [25,125,182]. THEOREM 6.8 [34]. lf G is a simple K*-group of finite Morley rank of odd type which is tame or locally finite, then either (i) n (G) ~< 2, (ii) G has a proper 2-generated core, or (iii) G satisfies the B-conjecture and contains a classical involution. CONJECTURE 1 [34]. If S is a Sylow 2-subgroup of a simple tame K*-group G of finite Morley rank, then Fs,2(G) = G. If K is a classical subgroup of G, let DK be the graph with vertex set {Kg: g ~ G} and edges {(K g, Kg') 9[K g, K g'] -- 1}. THEOREM 6.9 [28]. If G is a simple tame K*-group of finite Morley rank and odd type which satisfies the B-conjecture and contains a classical involution with connected graph 79K, then G is isomorphic to one of the following groups: PSLn(F) for n >~5, PSP2n(F) for n >~ 3, PSOn(F) for n/> 9, E6(F), E7(F), E8(F) or F4(F), for some algebraically closed field F with char(F) r 2. Groups not covered by this theorem are the small groups PSL2(F), PSL3(F), G2(F), PS05 ( F) ~- PSP4 ( F), PS06 ( F) ~- PSL4 ( F), PS07 ( F) and PS08 ( F).

Stable groups

305

CONJECTURE 2. If DK is disconnected but has an edge, then G ~- PSOn(F); if DK has no edge, then G ~- PSL3 (F), for some algebraically closed field F. In the absence of the tameness assumption (or just to study w-stable groups in general), it would be helpful to have some substitute for Sylow's theorems. In the soluble case, the theory of formations looks like a promising candidate. DEFINITION 19. The Frattini subgroup ~ ( G ) is the intersection of all proper maximal connected definable subgroups of G. A family ~ of connected soluble groups is a connected formation if (i) it is closed under homomorphic images; (ii) it is closed under direct products; (iii) if N ~ co~ contains an Abelian subgroup A with S U ( A ) >1 co~ SU-rank is the analogue of Lascar rank for simple theories. One does not even know that an infinite supersimple group contains an infinite Abelian subgroup. CONJECTURE 4. A supersimple field is perfect bounded pseudo-algebraically closed. Hrushovski [85] has shown that perfect bounded pseudo-algebraically closed fields are supersimple of rank 1.

312

F. Wagner

CONJECTURE 5. An co-categorical supersimple theory has finite rank.

An co-categorical superstable theory has finite rank [57]; it is shown in [70] that an cocategorical supersimple group is finite-by-Abelian-by-finite, of finite SU-rank (compare with Theorem 3.22). On aspect of stable groups which has only been touched on is the extensive model theory of modules (Abelian structures); for an introduction see [ 199,160]. As for other examples, as already mentioned in the introduction, certain theories of fields play an important r61e in the applications. Those include: 1. Algebraically closed fields in any characteristic; they are strongly minimal. 2. Differentially closed fields of characteristic 0; they are co-stable of rank co, the fixed field has rank 1 and is algebraically closed. 3. Separably closed fields of characteristic p > 0 and fixed Er~ov invariant; they are stable non-superstable. 4. Pseudofinite fields; they are unstable supersimple of SU-rank 1. 5. Existentially closed difference fields of characteristic 0; they are unstable supersimple of SU-rank co, the fixed field has SU-rank 1. Good references are [ 117,162,164,146,140,94,198,8,92,93,85,43,53,54]. Another source of examples comes from Hrushovski's generalization of Fra'fss6's universal-homogeneous model [73,86,109,87,181,13,15]; this has been adapted to the case of nilpotent goups of exponent p by Baudisch [20,19]. Fields of rank two are constructed by Poizat [157] and Baldwin and Holland, [10]. Recently, Hrushovski [89] has modified the construction to yield simple unstable structures. Finally, there is an intriguing relationship between structures of finite Morley rank and certain ordered structures. An ordered structure 9Y~is o-minimal if every definable subset is a finite union of open intervals (with endpoints in 99t U {q-c~ }) and points; this is an ordered analogue of a strongly minimal set. A real closed field is o-minimal; more generally, the ordered field ~ expanded by all Pfaffian functions (including exponentiation) is o-minimal [ 170,195-197]. The properties of an o-minimal structures are similar to those of a structure of finite Morley rank, although in general the proofs are quite different. In particular, the Trichotomy Theorem and some version of the Indecomposability Theorem hold in any ominimal structure [ 132]. A good reference is [169]; Groups definable in such a structure are classified in [ 136,129-131,133]. For attempts to find an ordered analogue to superstable structures see [26,27,149].

10. Bibliographical remarks The classic text on model theory is Chang and Keisler [51]; a more modem approach (with a focus on stability theory) is Poizat [152] or Hodges [79]. Textbooks on Stability theory include [134,110,111,48]; [139] leads up to research level. Of course, one may also consult the original work [165]. An introduction to the extension of stability theory to simple structures will appear in [193]. Groups of finite Morley rank are treated in [37], stable groups (with a certain emphasis on co-stable and superstable groups) in [153] and (in full generality) [ 186].

Stable groups

313

References [1] I. Aguzarov, R.E. Farey and J.B. Goode, An infinite superstable group has infinitely many conjugacy classes, J. Symbolic Logic 56 (1991), 618--623. [2] T. Altmel, Groups of finite Morley rank with strongly embedded subgroups, J. Algebra 180 (1996), 778807. [3] T. Altlnel, A.V. Borovik and G. Cherlin, Groups ofmixed type, J. Algebra 192 (1997), 524-571. [4] T. Altlnel, A.V. Borovik and G. Cherlin, Groups of finite Morley rank and even type with strongly closed Abelian subgroups, Preprint (1999). [51 T. Altlnel, A.V. Borovik and G. Cherlin, On groups offinite Morley rank with weakly embedded subgroups, J. Algebra 211 (1999), 409-456. [6] T. Altmel and G. Cherlin, On central extensions of algebraic groups, J. Symbolic Logic 64 (1999), 68-74. [7] T. Altmel, G. Cherlin, L.-J. Corredor and A. Nesin, A Hall theorem for w-stable groups, J. London Math. Soc. 57 (1998), 385-397. [8] J. Ax, The elementary theory offinite fields, Ann. Math. 88 (1968), 239-271. [91 J. Baldwin, Fundamentals of Stability Theory, Springer, Berlin (1988). [lO] J. Baldwin and K. Holland, Constructing co-stable structures: Fields of rank 2, J. Symbolic Logic (to appear). [11] J. Baldwin and J. Saxl, Logical stability in group theory, J. Austral. Math. Soc. 21 (1976), 267-276. [12] J.T. Baldwin, ed., Classification Theory: Proceedings of the US-Israel Binational Workshop on Model Theory in Mathematical Logic, Chicago, '85, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 1292, Springer, Berlin (1987). [13] J.T. Baldwin, An almost strongly minimal non-Desarguesian projective plane, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 342 (1994), 695-711. [14] J.T. Baldwin and A. Pillay, Semisimple stable and superstable groups, Ann. Pure Appl. Logic 45 (1989), 105-127. [151 J.T. Baldwin and N. Shi, Stable generic structures, Ann. Pure Appl. Logic 79 (1996), 1-35. [16] A. Baudisch, Decidability and stability of free nilpotent Lie algebras and free nilpotent p-groups of finite exponent, Ann. Math. Logic 23 (1982), 1-25. [17] A. Baudisch, On superstable groups, Seminarbericht Nr. 104, Humboldt Universit~it, Berlin (1989), 18-42. [18] A. Baudisch, On superstable groups, J. London Math. Soc. 42 (1990), 452-464. [19] A. Baudisch, Another stable group, Ann. Pure Appl. Logic 80 (1996), 109-138. [2o1 A. Baudisch, A new uncountably categorical group, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 348 (1996), 3889-3940. [21] A. Baudisch and J.S. Wilson, Stable actions of torsion groups and stable soluble groups, J. Algebra 153 (1991), 453-457. [22] W. Baur, Elimination of quantifiers for modules, Israel J. Math. 25 (1976), 64-70. [23] W. Baur, G. Cherlin and A. Macintyre, Totally categorical groups and rings, J. Algebra 57 (1979), 407440. [241 O.V. Belegradek, On almost categorical theories, Sibirsk. Mat. Zh. 14 (1973), 277-288 (in Russian). [25] O.V. Belegradek, On groups offinite Morley rank, Abstracts of the Eighth International Congress of Logic, Methodology and Philosophy of Science (Moscow 1987) (1987), 100-102. [26] O.V. Belegradek, Y. Peterzil and EO. Wagner, Quasi-o-minimal structures, J. Symbolic Logic (to appear). [27] O.V. Belegradek, E Point and F.O. Wagner, A quasi-o-minimal group without the exchange property, MSRI Preprint 98-051 (1998). [28] A. Berkman, The classical involution theorem for tame groups of finite Morley rank, Preprint (1998). [29] C. Berline, Superstable groups; a partial answer to conjectures of Cherlin and Zil'ber, Ann. Pure Appl. Logic 30 (1986), 45-61. [301 C. Berline and D. Lascar, Superstable groups, Ann. Pure Appl. Logic 30 (1986), 1-43. [311 C. Berline and D. Lascar, Des gros sous-groupes Ab~liens pour les groupes stables, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 305 (1987), 639-641. [32] V. Bludov, On locally nilpotent groups, Siberian Adv. Math. 8 (1998), 49-79. [33] M. Boffa and E Point, Identit~s de Engel g~n&alis~es, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris Ser. 1 313 (1991), 909-911. [34] A.V. Borovik, Simple locally finite groups of finite Morley rank and odd type, Finite and Locally Finite Groups, B. Hartley, G.M. Seitz, A.V. Borovik and R.M. Bryant, eds, Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht (1995), 247-284.

314

F. Wagner

[35] A.V. Borovik, G. Cherlin and L.-J. Corredor, Standard components in groups of even type, Preprint (1997). [36] A.V. Borovik and A. Nesin, On the Schur-Zassenhaus theorem for groups of finite Morley rank, J. Symbolic Logic 57 (1992), 1469-1477. [37] A.V. Borovik and A. Nesin, Groups of Finite Morley Rank, Oxford University Press, Oxford, UK (1994). [38] A.V. Borovik and A. Nesin, Schur-Zassenhaus theorem revisited, J. Symbolic Logic 59 (1994), 283-291. [39] A.V. Borovik and B.E Poizat, Simple groups of finite Morley rank without non-nilpotent connected subgroups (in Russian), Preprint mimeographed by VINITI, N2062-B (1990). [401 A.V. Borovik and B.E Poizat, Tores et p-groupes, J. Symbolic Logic 55 (1991), 478-491. [41] A.V. Borovik and S.R. Thomas, On generic normal subgroups, Automorphisms of First-Order Structures, R. Kaye and D. Macpherson, eds, Oxford University Press, Oxford, UK (1994), 319-324. [42] E. Bouscaren, The group configuration -after E. Hrushovski, in: Nesin and Pillay [ 127], 199-209. [43] E. Bouscaren, ed., Model Theory and Algebraic Geometry, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 1696, Springer, Berlin (1998). [441 R.M. Bryant, Groups with minimal condition on centralizers, J. Algebra 60 (1979), 371-383. [451 R.M. Bryant and B. Hartley, Periodic locally soluble groups with the minimal condition on centralizers, J. Algebra 61 (1979), 328-334. [46] S. Buechler, The geometry of weakly minimal types, J. Symbolic Logic 50 (1985), 1044-1053. [47] S. Buechler, Locally modular theories offinite rank, Ann. Pure Appl. Logic 30 (1986), 83-94. [48] S. Buechler, Essential Stability Theory, Springer, Berlin (1996). [49] S. Buechler, Lascar strong type in some simple theories, Preprint (1997). [50] S. Buechler, A. Pillay and EO. Wagner, Elimination of hyperimaginaries for supersimple theories, J. Amer. Math. Soc. (submitted). [511 C.C. Chang and J.H. Keisler, Model Theory, North-Holland, Amsterdam (1973). [52] O. Chapuis, Universal theory of certain solvable groups and bounded Ore group-rings, J. Algebra 176 (1995), 368-391. [53] Z. Chatzidakis, Groups definable in ACFA, in: Hart et al. [78], 25-52. [54] Z. Chatzidakis and E. Hrushovski, The model theory of difference fields, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 351 (8) (1999), 2997-3071. [55] G. Cherlin, Superstable division rings, Logic Colloquium '77, A. Macintyre, L. Pacholski and J. Paris, eds, North-Holland, Amsterdam (1978), 99-111. [56] G. Cherlin, Groups of small Morley rank, Ann. Math. Logic 17 (1979), 1-28. [57] G. Cherlin, L. Harrington and A. Lachlan, No-categorical b~o-stable structures, Ann. Pure Appl. Logic 28 (1985), 103-135. [58] G. Cherlin and S. Shelah, Superstable fields and groups, Ann. Math. Logic 18 (1980), 227-270. [59] L.J. Corredor, Bad groups offinite Morley rank, J. Symbolic Logic 54 (1989), 768-773. [60] M. Davis and A. Nesin, Suzuki 2-groups of finite Morley rank (or over quadratically closed fields), Comm. Algebra (submitted). [61] M. DeBonis and A. Nesin, BN-pairs offinite Morley rank, Comm. Algebra (submitted). [62] E Delon, Separably closed fields, in: Bouscaren [43]. [63] J. Derakhshan and EO. Wagner, Nilpotency in groups with chain conditions, Oxford Quarterly J. Math. 48 (1997), 453-468. [641 J.-L. Duret, Instabilit~ des corps formellement r~els, Canad. Math. Bull. 20 (1977), 385-387. [651 J.-L. Duret, Les corps pseudo-finis ont la propri~t~ d'ind~pendance, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 290 (1980), A981-A983. [66] J.-L. Duret, Sur la th~orie YlYmentaire des corps defonctions, J. Symbolic Logic 51 (1986), 948-956. [67] J. Ershov, Fields with solvable theory, Dokl. Akad. Nauk SSSR 174 (1967), 19-20 (in Russian). [68] D. Evans, ed., Model Theory of Groups and Automorphism Groups, LMS Lecture Notes, Vol. 244, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK (1997). [69] D. Evans and E. Hrushovski, Projective planes in algebraically closed fields, Proc. London Math. Soc. 62 (1991), 1-24. [70] D. Evans and EO. Wagner, Supersimple co-categorical groups, J. Symbolic Logic (to appear). [71] U. Felgner, b~o-categorical stable groups, Math. Z. 160 (1978), 27-49. [72] O. Fr6con, Sous-groupes anormaux dans les groupes de rang de Morley fini r(solubles, Preprint (1999).

Stable groups

315

[73] J. Goode, Hrushovski's geometries, Proceedings of 7th Easter Conference on Model Theory, B. Dahn and H. Wolter, eds (1989), 106-118. [74] K.W. Gruenberg, The Engel elements of a soluble group, Illinois J. Math. 3 (1959), 151-168. [75] C. Grunenwald and F Haug, On stable groups in some soluble group classes, Proceedings of the 10th Easter Conference on Model Theory, M. Weese and H. Wolter, eds, Humboldt Universit~it, Berlin (1993), 46-59. [76] C. Grtinenwald and E Haug, On stable torsion-free nilpotent groups, Arch. Math. Logic 32 (1993), 451462. [77] B. Hart, B. Kim and A. Pillay, Coordinatization and canonical bases in simple theories, J. Symbolic Logic (to appear). [78] B.T. Hart, A.H. Lachlan and M.A. Valeriote, eds, Algebraic Model Theory, Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht (1995). [79] W. Hodges, Model Theory, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK (1993). [80] E. Hrushovski, Contributions to Stable Model Theory, PhD thesis, University of California at Berkeley, Berkeley (1986). [81] E. Hrushovski, Locally modular regular types, in: Baldwin [ 12], 132-164. [82] E. Hrushovski, Almost orthogonal regular types, Ann. Pure Appl. Logic 45 (1989), 139-155. [83] E. Hrushovski, On superstable fields with automorphisms, in: Nesin and Pillay [127], 186-191. [84] E. Hnashovski, Unidimensional theories are superstable, Ann. Pure Appl. Logic 50 (1990), 117-138. [85] E. Hrushovski, Pseudo-finite fields and related structures, Preprint (1991). [86] E. Hrushovski, Strongly minimal expansions of algebraically closed fields, Israel J. Math. 79 (1992), 129151. [87] E. Hrushovski, A new strongly minimal set, Ann. Pure Appl. Logic 62 (1993), 147-166. [88] E. Hrushovski, The Mordell-Lang conjecture for function fields, J. Amer. Math. Soc. 9 (1996). [891 E. Hrushovski, Simplicity and the Lascar group, Preprint (1997). [90] E. Hrushovski, The Manin-Mumford conjecture and the model theory of difference fields, Ann. Pure Appl. Logic (submitted). [91] E. Hrushovski and A. Pillay, Weakly normal groups, Logic Colloquium '85, Ch. Berline, E. Bouscaren, M Dickmann, J.-L. Krivine, D. Lascar, M. Parigot, E. Pelz and G. Sabbagh, eds, North-Holland, Amsterdam (1987), 233-244. [92] E. Hrushovski and A. Pillay, Groups definable in local fields and pseudo-finite fields, Israel J. Math. 85 (1994), 203-262. [931 E. Hrushovski and A. Pillay, Definable subgroups of algebraic groups over finite fields, J. Reine Angew. Math. 462 (1995), 69-91. [94] E. Hrushovski and Z. Sokolovi6, Minimal subsets of differentially closed fields, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. (to appear). [95] E. Hrushovski and B. Zil'ber, Zariski geometries, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 28 (1993), 315-323. [96] E. Hrushovski and B. Zil'ber, Zariski geometries, J. Amer. Math. Soc. 9 (1996), 1-56. [97] S.V. Ivanov and A.Yu. Ol'shanskii, Some applications of graded diagrams in combinatorial group theory, Groups St Andrews 1989, Vol. 2, C.M. Campbell and E.E Robertson, eds, LMS Lecture Notes, Vol. 160, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK (1992), 258-308. [98] K. Jaber, Equations g~n~riques dans un groupe stable nilpotent, J. Symbolic Logic 64 (1999), 761-768. [99] K. Jaber and F.O. Wagner, Largeur et nilpotence, Comm. Algebra (to appear). [100] E. Jaligot, Groupes de type mixte, J. Algebra 212 (1999), 753-768. [101] O. Kegel, Four lectures on Sylow theory in locally finite groups, Group Theory (Singapore, 1987), K.N. Cheng and Y.K. Lerong, eds, Walter de Gruyter, Berlin (1989), 3-27. [102] B. ICdm, Simple First Order Theories, PhD thesis, University of Notre Dame, Notre Dame (1996). [103] B. I~m, Recent results on simple first-order theories, in: Evans [68], 202-212. [104] B. Kim, A note on Lascar strong types in simple theories, J. Symbolic Logic 63 (1998), 926-936. [105] B. Kim, Forking in simple unstable theories, J. London Math. Soc. 57 (1998), 257-267. [106] B. Kim and A. Pillay, Simple theories, Ann. Pure Appl. Logic 88 (1997), 149-164. [107] B. Kim and A. Pillay, From stability to simplicity, Bull. Symbolic Logic 4 (1998), 17-26. [108] L. Kramer, K. Tent and H. van Maldeghem, BN-pairs offinite Morley rank, Israel J. Math. (to appear).

316 [109] [110] [ 111 ] [112] [113] [114] [115] [ 116] [ 117] [118] [ 119] [120] [121] [122] [123] [124] [125] [126] [ 127] [128] [129] [130] [131] [132] [133] [134] [135] [ 136] [137] [138] [139] [140] [141] [142] [143] [144] [145] [146] [147]

F. Wagner D.W. Kueker and C. Laskowski, On generic structures, Notre Dame J. Formal Logic 33 (1992), 175-183. D. Lascar, Les groupes w-stables de rangfini, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 292 (1985), 451-462. D. Lascar, Stability in Model Theory, Longman, New York (1987). J.G. Loveys, Abelian groups with modular generic, J. Symbolic Logic 56 (1991), 250-259. J.G. Loveys and EO. Wagner, Le canada semi-dry, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 118 (1993), 217-221. A. Macintyre, On Wl-categorical theories of Abelian groups, Fund. Math. 7t)(1971), 253-270. A. Macintyre, On Wl-categorical theories offields, Fund. Math. 71 (1971), 1-25. A.I. Mal'cev, A correspondence between groups and rings, The Metamathematics of Algebraic Systems. Collected Papers: 1936-1967, North-Holland, Amsterdam (1971), 124-137. D. Marker, M. Messmer and A. Pillay, Model Theory of Fields, Lecture Notes in Logic, Vol. 5, Springer, Berlin (1996). A. Mekler, Stability of nilpotent groups of class 2 and prime exponent, J. Symbolic Logic 46 (1981), 781-788. M. Messmer, Groups and Fields Interpretable in Separably Closed Fields, PhD thesis, University of Illinois at Chicago, Chicago (1992). M. Morley, Categoricity in power, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 4 (1965), 514-538. A. Nesin, Nonsolvable groups of Morley rank 3, J. Algebra 124 (1989), 199-218. A. Nesin, Solvable groups offinite Morley rank, J. Algebra 121 (1989), 26-39. A. Nesin, On sharply n-transitive superstable groups, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 69 (1990), 73-88. A. Nesin, On solvable groups offinite Morley rank, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 321 (1990), 659-690. A. Nesin, Generalized Fitting subgroup of a group of finite Morley rank, J. Symbolic Logic 56 (1991), 1391-1399. A. Nesin, Poly-separated and w-stable nilpotent groups, J. Symbolic Logic 56 (1991), 694-699. A. Nesin and A. Pillay, eds, The Model Theory of Groups, University of Notre Dame Press, Notre Dame, USA (1989). L. Newelski, On type-definable subgroups of a stable group, Notre Dame J. Formal Logic 32 (1991), 173-187. M. Otero, Y. Peterzil and A. Pillay, Groups and rings definable in o-minimal expansions of real closed fields, Bull. London Math. Soc. 28 (1996), 7-14. Y. Peterzil, A. Pillay and S. Starchenko, Definably simple groups in o-minimal structures, Preprint (1999). Y. Peterzil, A. Pillay and S. Starchenko, Simple algebraic groups and semialgebraic groups over real closed fields, Preprint (1999). Y. Peterzil and S. Starchenko, Definable homomorphisms of Abelian groups in o-minimal structures, Preprint (1999). Y. Peterzil and C. Steinhorn, Definable compactness and definable subgroups of o-minimal groups, Preprint (1999). A. Pillay, An Introduction to Stability Theory, Clarendon Press, Oxford, UK (1983). A. Pillay, Simple superstable theories, in: Baldwin [12], 247-263. A. Pillay, Groups and fields definable in an o-minimal structure, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 53 (1988), 239-255. A. Pillay, ACFA and the Manin-Mumford conjecture, in: Hart et al. [78], 195-205. A. Pillay, The geometry of forking and groups of finite Morley rank, J. Symbolic Logic 6t)(1995), 12511259. A. Pillay, Geometric Stability Theory, Oxford University Press, Oxford, UK (1996). A. Pillay, Some foundational questions concerning differential algebraic groups, Pacific J. Math. 179 (1997), 179-200. A. Pillay, Definability and definable groups in simple theories, J. Symbolic Logic 63 (1998), 788-796. A. Pillay and B. Poizat, Pas d'imaginaires dans l'infini, J. Symbolic Logic 52 (1987), 40(0-403. A. Pillay and B. Poizat, Corps et chirurgie, J. Symbolic Logic 61)(1995), 528-533. A. Pillay, T. Scanlon and EO. Wagner, Supersimple division rings, Math. Res. Lett. (1998), 473-483. A. Pillay and Z. Sokolovi6, A remark on differential algebraic groups, Comm. Algebra 92 (1992), 30153026. A. Pillay and Z. Sokolovi6, Superstable differential fields, J. Symbolic Logic 57 (1992), 97-108. A. Pillay and C. Steinhorn, Definable sets in ordered structures, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 295 (1986), 565-592.

Stable groups

317

[148] E Point, Conditions of quasi-nilpotency in certain varieties of groups, Comm. Algebra 22 (1994), 365390. [149] E Point and EO. Wagner, Ultimately periodic groups, Ann. Pure Appl. Logic (to appear). [150] B.P. Poizat, Sous-groupes d~finissables d'un groupe stable, J. Symbolic Logic 46 (1981), 137-146. [151] B.E Poizat, Groupes stables, avec types g~n~riques r~guliers, J. Symbolic Logic 48 (1983), 339-355. [152] B.P. Poizat, Cours de th~orie des modOles, Nur A1-Mantiq Wal-Ma'rifah, Villeurbanne (1985). [153] B.P. Poizat, Groupes Stables, Nur A1-Mantiq Wal-Ma'rifah, Villeurbanne (1987). [1541 B.R Poizat, l~quations g~n~riques, Proc. of the 8th Easter Conference on Model Theory, B. Dahn and H. Wolter, eds, Humboldt Universitat, Berlin (1990). [155] B.P. Poizat, Corps de rang deux, The 3rd Barcelona Logic Meeting, Vol. 9, Centre de Recerca Matematica, Barcelona (1997), 31-44. [156] B.R Poizat, L'~galit~ au cube, J. Symbolic Logic (submitted). [157] B.R Poizat, Le carr~ de l'~galit~, J. Symbolic Logic (to appear). [158] B.P. Poizat and EO. Wagner, Sous-groupes p&iodiques d'un groupe stable, J. Symbolic Logic 58 (1993), 385-400. [159] B.P. Poizat and EO. Wagner, Lifiez les Sylows.t - Une suite & "Sous-groupes p~riodiques d'un groupe stable", J. Symbolic Logic (to appear). [160] M. Prest, Model Theory ofModules, LMS LN 130, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK (1988). [1611 J. Reineke, Minimale Gruppen, Z. Math. Logik 21 (1975), 357-359. [162] A. Seidenberg, An elimination theory for differential algebra, Univ. California Math. Publ. 3 (1956), 3165. [163] S. Shelah, Stable theories, Israel J. Math. 7 (1969), 187-202. [164] S. Shelah, Differentially closed fields, Israel J. Math. 16 (1973), 314-328. [165] S. Shelah, Classification Theory, North-Holland, Amsterdam (1978). [166] S. Shelah, Simple unstable theories, Ann. Pure Appl. Logic 19 (1980), 177-203. [167] S. Shelah, Toward classifying unstable theories, Ann. Pure Appl. Logic 80 (1996), 229-255. [168] L. van den Dries, Definable groups in characteristic 0 are algebraic groups, Abstr. Amer. Math. Soc. 3 (1982), 142. [169] L. van den Dries, Tame Topology and o-minimal Structures, LMS Lecture Notes, Vol. 248, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK (1998). [170] L. van den Dries, A. Macintyre and D. Marker, The elementary theory of restricted analytic fields with exponentiation, Ann. Math. 140 (1994), 183-205. [171] EO. Wagner, Stable Groups and Generic Types, PhD thesis, University of Oxford, Oxford, UK (1990). [172] F.O. Wagner, Subgroups of stable groups, J. Symbolic Logic 55 (1990), 151-156. [173] E O. Wagner, Small stable groups and generics, J. Symbolic Logic 56 (1991), 1026-1037. [1741 F.O. Wagner, Apropos d'~quations gdn~riques, J. Symbolic Logic 57 (1992), 548-554. [175] EO. Wagner, More on 9t, Notre Dame J. Formal Logic 33 (1992), 159-174. [1761 F.O. Wagner, Commutator conditions and splitting automorphisms for stable groups, Arch. Math. Logic 32 (1993), 223-228. [177] EO. Wagner, Quasi-endomorphisms in small stable groups, J. Symbolic Logic 58 (1993), 1044-1051. [178] EO. Wagner, Stable groups, mostly offinite exponent, Notre Dame J. Formal Logic 34 (1993), 183-192. [179] EO. Wagner, Nilpotent complements and Carter subgroups in stable 9t-groups, Arch. Math. Logic 33 (1994), 23-34. [180] EO. Wagner, A note on defining groups in stable structures, J. Symbolic Logic 59 (1994), 575-578. [1811 EO. Wagner, Relational structures and dimensions, Automorphism Groups of First-order Structures, R. Kaye and D. McPherson, eds, Oxford University Press, Oxford, UK (1994), 153-180. [182] EO. Wagner, The Fitting subgroup of a stable group, J. Algebra 174 (1995), 599-609. [183] EO. Wagner, Hyperstable theories, Logic: From Foundations to Applications (European Logic Colloquium 1993), W. Hodges, M. Hyland, C. Steinhorn and J. Truss, eds, Oxford University Press, Oxford, UK (1996), 483-514. [1841 F.O. Wagner, Stable groups (a survey), Algebra. Proc. of the IIIrd International Conference on Algebra, Krasnoyarsk, Russia, 1993, Yu.L. Ershov, E.I. Khukhro, V.M. Levchuk and N.D. Podufalov, eds, Walter de Gruyter, Berlin (1996), 273-285.

318

F. Wagner

[ 185] EO. Wagner, On the structure of stable groups, Ann. Pure Appl. Logic 89 (1997), 85-92. [186] F.O. Wagner, Stable Groups, LMS Lecture Notes, Vol. 240, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge, UK (1997). [187] EO. Wagner, CM-triviality and stable groups, J. Symbolic Logic 63 (1998), 1473-1495. [188] EO. Wagner, Smallfields, J. Symbolic Logic 63 (1998), 995-1002. [189] EO. Wagner, Groups in simple theories, J. Symbolic Logic (submitted). [ 190] EO. Wagner, Hyperdefinable groups in simple theories, J. Math. Logic (submitted). [191] EO. Wagner, Minimalfields, J. Symbolic Logic (to appear). [192] EO. Wagner, Nilpotency in groups with the minimal condition on centralizers, J. Algebra 217 (1999), 448-460. [193] EO. Wagner, Simple Theories, Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht (to appear). [194] A. Weil, On algebraic groups of transformations, Amer. J. Math. 77 (1955), 302-271. [ 195] A. Wilkie, Model completeness results for expansions of the ordered field of real numbers by restricted Pfaffian functions and the exponential function, J. Amer. Math. Soc. 9 (1996), 1051-1094. [196] A. Wilkie, A general theorem of the complement and some new o-minimal structures, Selecta Mathematica (to appear). [197] A. Wilkie, Model theory of analytic and smooth functions, Logic Colloquium '97, D. McPherson and J. Truss, eds (to appear). [198] C. Wood, Notes on the stability of separably closed fields, J. Symbolic Logic 44 (1979), 412-416. [199] M. Ziegler, Model theory ofmodules, Ann. Pure Appl. Logic 26 (1984), 149-213. [200] B. Zil'ber, Groups and rings whose theory is categorical, Fund. Math. 95 (1977), 173-188 (in Russian). [201] B. Zil'ber, Strongly minimal countably categorical theories, Sibirsk. Mat. Zh. 21 (1980), 98-112 (in Russian). [202] B. Zil'ber, Totally categorical theories; structural properties and the non-finite axiomatizability, Model Theory of Algebra and Arithmetic, L. Pacholski, J. Wierzejewski and A. Wilkie, eds, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 834, Springer, Berlin (1980), 381-4 10. [203] B. Zil'ber, Some model theory of simple algebraic groups over algebraically closed fields, Colloquium Mathematicum (1984), 173-180. [204] B. Zil'ber, Strongly minimal countably categorical theories H, Sibirsk. Mat. Zh. 25 (1984), 71-88 (in Russian). [205] B. Zil'ber, Strongly minimal countably categorical theories III, Sibirsk. Mat. Zh. 25 (1984), 63-77 (in Russian). [206] B. Zil'ber, w-stability of the field of complex numbers with a predicate distinguishing the roots of unity, Preprint (1994).

Section 3A Commutative Rings and Algebras


Artin Approximation Dorin Popescu Institute of Mathematics, University of Bucharest, P.O. Box 1-764, Bucharest 70700, Romania E-mail: dorin @stailow, imar. ro

Contents 1. Henselian tings and the property of Artin approximation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Ultraproducts and the strong approximation property . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. l~tale maps and approximation in nested subrings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Cohen Algebras and General N6ron Desingulatization in Artinian local tings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Jacobi-Zariski sequence and the smooth locus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. General N6ron desingularization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. Proof of the Main Lemma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H A N D B O O K OF ALGEBRA, VOL. 2 Edited by M. Hazewinkel 9 2000 Elsevier Science B.V. All tights reserved 321

323 328 335 340 342 346 350 355


Artin approximation

323

Artin approximation theory has many applications in algebraic geometry (for example to the algebraization of versal deformation and constructions of algebraic spaces (see [5-7])), in algebraic number theory, and in commutative algebra concerning questions of factoriality (see [5,23]). Here we present the main results of this theory with some applications in commutative algebra (see, e.g., 2.10, 2.13). Most of the proofs are based on the so-called General Nrron Desingularization. Its proof is given here only for tings containing Q with the idea of avoiding the difficulties of the nonseparable case; the interested reader is invited to examine the general case in a very nice exposition of Swan [38]. Another consequence of General Nrron Desingularization (we omit this here since it has not too much in common with Artin approximation theory) says that a regular local ring containing a field is a filtered inductive limit of regular local rings essentially of finite type over Z. This is a partial positive answer to a conjecture by Swan and proves the Bass-Quillen Conjecture in the equicharacteristic case using Lindel's result [24] (see also [32,38]). We require here a lot of results from the theory of Henselian tings, 6tale maps and Andrr-Quillen homology which we briefly present without proofs, since the reader can find them in some excellent books, such as, e.g., [34,21,1], or in the short exposition [38].

1. Henselian rings and the property of Artin approximation Let (A, m, k) be a local ring. A is a Henselian ring if it satisfies the Hensel Lemma, that is given a monic polynomial f in a variable Z over A and a factorization f -- f mod m = ~,/Tt of f in two monic polynomials ~, h 6 k[Z] having no common factors, there exist two monic polynomials g, h E A[Z] such that f -- gh and ~ -- g mod m,/t -- h mod m. If A is a Henselian local ring then every finite A-algebra is a product of Henselian local rings. For details concerning this theory see [ 19,34,21,22]. THEOREM 1.1 (Implicit function theorem). Let f = (fl . . . . . f r ) be a system o f polynomials in Y = (Y1 . . . . . Yn) over A, r ~ n, and A f Q A[Y] the ideal generated by the r • r-minors o f t h e Jacobian matrix ( S f i / S Y j ) . Suppose A is Henselian. I f ~ c A n satisfies f ( ~ ) ----0 mod m and A f ( f ) ~ m then there exists a solution y E A n o f f in A such that y ----~ mod m (y is unique if r = n). This theorem is the algebraic version of the well known Implicit Function Theorem from Differential or Analytic Geometry: THEOREM 1.2. Let gi(X1 . . . . . Xs, Y1 . . . . . Yn) = O, 1 A*. Similarly we may speak about the ultrapower M* of an A-module M which has also a structure of A*-module. As above we have a canonical map CM : M ~ M*. For details concerning this theory see [10,8,29, 311. PROPOSITION 2.1. Let A be a ring, D a nonprincipal ultrafilter on N and A* the ultrapower of A with respect to D. Then (i) A* is an integral domain (resp. field) if A is an integral domain (resp. field), (ii) If A is a domain, then Q(A)* ~- Q(A*), where Q(A), Q(A*) are the fraction fields o f A, resp. A*, (iii) (A*) q ~ (Aq) *, q ~ N, (iv) If A is a field then A* is a separable field extension of A, (v) If a C A is an ideal and a* is the ultrapower o f a with respect to D, then a* C A* is an ideal and ( A / a ) * ~- A*/a*, (vi) If p C A is a prime (resp. maximal) ideal then p* C A* is a prime (resp. maximal) ideal, (vii) If a C A is a finitely generated ideal, then a* -- CA (a)A*. PROOF. (i) If [(Xn)][(Yn)] = 0 in A* then r = {n E N I XnYn = 0} 6 D. If A is an integral domain then r = s tO t for s = {n 6 N I Xn = 0}, t = {n 6 N I Yn = 0}. As D is an ultrafilter

Artin approximation

329

it follows either s 6 D, or t 6 D (s U t E D!) and so either [ ( X n ) ] = 0, o r [ ( Y n ) ] = 0. N o w suppose that A is a field and let 0 r x -- [(Xn)] 6 A*. Then c = {n 6 1~ I Xn 5~ 0} ~ D and Yn = Xn 1 for n E c and 0 otherwise define an inverse [(Yn)] of x. (ii) If A is an integral d o m a i n then the inclusion A C Q ( A ) induces the inclusion A* C Q ( A ) * . By (i) Q ( A ) * is a field. If z -- [(Zn)] 6 Q ( A ) * then Zn = u n / v n , Vn ~ O, Un,Vn E A, and clearly z = [(Un)]/[(Vn)] ~ Q ( A * ) . Hence Q ( A ) * = Q ( A * ) . (iii) Let (ei) 1 Sets a covariant functor such that the canonical map

limi~lF(Bi) ~ F(limi~lBi) is surjective f o r every filtered inductive system o f local A-algebras (Bi, ~ij )i el, ~ij being local A-morphisms. Then f o r every ~ E F ( A ) and every positive integer c there exists a z E F ( A ) such that z -- ~ mod mC; that is, the canonical morphisms F ( A ) ---> F(A/mC,4) F ( A / m c) and F ( A ) ---> F ( A / m c) map ~, resp. z, in the same element of F ( A / m C ) . PROOF. The proof follows an idea of M. Artin [5]. We may express ,4 as a filtered inductive union of finite type sub-A-algebras of A, let us say A - U i 6 i D i . We have

-- ~ i ~ I Bi for Bi "-- (Di)mAnDi. Fix Z and c. By hypothesis we may find i ~ I such that s is in the image o f the canonical morphism F(goi)'F(Bi) --+ F(A), where q9i denotes the inclusion Bi ~ A. Let us say ~ -- F(qgi(zi)) for a zi E F ( B i ) . Since A has AP by Theorem 1.14, we find an A-morphism 7ti" Di --+ A which coincides with qgi ]Di modulo m c, that is the following diagram commutes

Di

A

>

Bi

99i

> Aim c

~--

> ~i

A/mCA

The left map is ~ i which extends clearly to a local A-morphism oti'Bi --+ A and z = F (Oli) (Zi) works. Vq PROPOSITION 3.5. Let ( A , m ) be an excellent Henselian local ring, A its completion, X - - ( X 1 . . . . , X r ) some indeterminates, A ( X ) (resp. A ( X ) ) the Henselization of A[X](m,X) (resp. A[X](m~,X)), f a system of polynomials over A[X] in Y = (Y1 . . . . . Yn), c a positive integer and y - ('Yl . . . . . ~n) a solution o f f in A ( X ) such that ~i E A(X1 . . . . , Xs), 1 (I/I2)q

i=1

the surjective map given by dYi --+ fi mod I 2. Then adq fl is an isomorphism (its determinant is M!) and so t , c~dq are also isomorphisms. Thus dq is a split monomorphism and so Bq is essentially smooth by Theorem 5.2. Conversely, if dq is a split monomorphism then (I/I2)q is free of a certain rank r ~< n. Let f be a system of r polynomials from I which lifts a basis in (I/I2)q. Then

(f)A[Y]q --qA[Y]q

D. Popescu

344

by Nakayama's Lemma and the matrix associated to dq in the basis (j5 mod 12) resp. dYj is (8fi/8 Yj). As dq splits we get A f ~ q. E] COROLLARY 5.4. Let s ~ B. Then Bs is smooth over A if and only if s E H B / A . PROOF. Bs is smooth over A if and only if (I-'B/A) s - - 0 and (~(2B/A) s is projective by Theorem 5.2. The last conditions hold exactly when (FB/A)q = 0 and (~QB/A)q is projective for all q 6 Spec B with s ~t q, that is when Bq is essentially smooth (in other words q 73 HB/A) for all q 6 Spec B with s r q. Hence Bs is smooth over A if and only if S E MqDHB/A q = H B / A .

[3

LEMMA 5.5. Let v: B --+ C be a morphism of finite presentation algebras over a ring A.

Then V(HB/A)C fq HC/B C HC/A. PROOF. If q 6 SpecC, q 75 v(HB/A)C 0 HC/B then v - l q 75 HB/A and q 75 Hc/8 and so Bw-1 q is essentially smooth over A and Cq is essentially smooth over B. Thus Cq is essentially smooth over A and so q 75 HC/A. [-1 LEMMA 5.6. Let A be a Noetherian ring u : B ~ A t a morphism of A-algebras and x ~ B an element. Suppose that B is of finite type over A and u (x) ~ v/u (Hs/A) A'. Then there exists a finite type A-algebra C such that u factors through C, let us say u = wv, v(x) E HC/A and v(HB/A)C C HC/B (in particular v(HB/A)C C nc/a). PROOF. Let t = (tl . . . . . ts) be a system of generators of HB/A. By hypothesis we have Y~i~=lU(ti)zi for some elements zi ~ C and a certain r 6 N. Put

u ( x ) r "-

ti)i Z -- ( Z 1 . . . . . Z r ) , and let w : C --+ A' be the map given by Z o z. Clearly Cti is a polynomial B-algebra and so v(ti) ~ Hc/B, v being the structure morphism of the B-algebra C. Thus V(HB/A) C HC/B and v(x) ~ o(HB/A)C. By Lemma 5.5 O(HB/A) C HC/A and

v(x) E HC/A. Let B be a finitely presented A-algebra and b ~ HB/A an element. We say that b is standard (resp. strictly standard) with respect to the presentation B = A [ Y ] / I if b lies in v/A f ( ( f ) : I ) B (resp. A f ( ( f ) : I ) B) for a finite system of polynomials f = (fl . . . . fr) of I.

[3

LEMMA 5.7 (Elkik [15,38]). If b ~ HB/A and (I/I2)b is free over B then b is standard

for the above presentation. PROOF. Let fl . . . . . fr be a base for (l/12)d and h ~ A[Y] representing b. Then

Ih - ( f ) A [ Y l h -k- I 2

Artin approximation

345

and we have (1 + c~)Ih C (f)A[Y]h for a certain a = g~ h s, g ~ I. Thus

h e(h s + g) E ( ( f ) ' I ) for a certain e 6 N and so b s+e E ((f)" I ) . B. Since the map

n i=l is a split m o n o m o r p h i s m the r • r-minors of its matrix (Ofi /O Yj) generate whole Bb. Thus a power of b lies in A f . [-I LEMMA 5.8. If b ~ HB/A and (S'2B/A)b is free then b is standard with respect to the presentation B -- A[Y, Z]/(I, Z) where Z -- (Z1 . . . . . Zn). PROOF. As Bb is smooth over A we have

BbdYi -- (I/I2)b G (,-C2B/A)b

i=1 by Theorem 5.2. Since ~)Bb/A = (~)B/A)b is free of rank ~< n we get (I/I2)b (9 B~ free. Now, let J -- (I, Z). We have

( + ) 0--~ ( J / J 2 ) b - ~

BbdYi

( n 9

i=1 and a surjective map

qg" (I/Ie)b @

(n

)

( ~ BbdZj

-+ Y2Bb/A

0

j=l

)

( ~ BbZj m o d Z 2 ~ (J/Je)b.

j=l But dj maps isomorphically q~((~]=l Bb(Zj m o d Z2)) on ( ~ = 1 BbdZj. After splitting this off from dj~o it remains di which is injective since Bb is smooth over A. Thus ~o must be an isomorphism and so ( J / J 2 ) b "~ (I/I2)b @ B~ which is free. Hence b is standard for the presentation B - A[Y, Z]/(I, Z) by L e m m a 5.7. U PROPOSITION 5.9. Let B = A[Y]/I, Y -- (Y1 . . . . . Yn) be a finitely presented A-algebra and C = S B ( I / I 2) be the symmetric algebra over A associated to 1/12. Then HB/AC C HC/A and $2Cb/A is free for each b ~ HB/A. Therefore C has a presentation such that the image in C of any b ~ HB/A is standard.

D. Popescu

346

PROOF. Let b ~ HB/A then n

db " (I/I2)b -+ ~

BbdYi

j=l is a split monomorphism and so (I/12)b is projective. Then Cb is locally isomorphic with a polynomial algebra over Bb and so it is smooth. Thus b ~ Hc/B, even b ~ HC/A by Lemma 5.5 and so HB/AC C HC/A. The Jacobi-Zariski sequence written for the A-morphism Bb ~ Cb:

0 = l~Cb/Bb -'->Cb (~Bb IQBb/A ~ ~"2Cb/A~ at-2Cb/Bb~ 0 splits because ff~)Cb/Bb ~ Cb I~)Bb ( l / I 2 ) b is projective. Then

ff2Cb/A ~ Cb ~Bb (ff2Bb/A (~) (l/12)b) ~" Cb (~Bb ( + BbdYi) i=l

which is free, the last isomorphism holds because db is a split monomorphism. Now it is enough to apply Lemma 5.8. FO COROLLARY 5 . 1 0 . Let A be a Noetherian ring, u : B ~ A' a morphism of A-algebras and b ~ B an element. Suppose that B is of finite type over A and u(b) ~ v/HB/AA ~. Then then exists a finite type A-algebra C such that (i) u factors through C, let us say u = wv, v: B ~ C, w : C --~ A', (ii) v(b) is standard f o r a certain presentation of C over A, (iii) V(HB/A) C HC/A.

PROOF. By Lemma 5.6 we may reduce to the case when b ~ HB/A. Applying Proposition 5.9 we get C as it is necessary except that we must show that there exists w : C ~ A ~ such that u -- wv. Since C is a symmetric algebra over B, the inclusion v : B ~ C has a canonical retraction t given by $ 8 ( I / I 2) ~ $ 8 ( I / 1 2 ) / ( I / I 2) ~- B. Thus w = ut works. []

6. General N~ron desingularization THEOREM 6.1 (N6ron [24]). Let R C R' be an unramified extension of discrete valuation rings which induces separable field extensions on the fraction and residue fields. Then R t is a filtered inductive union of its sub-R-algebras which are essentially smooth. Note that the hypothesis of N6ron's desingularization says in fact that the inclusion map R --+ R' is regular. Thus Theorem 1.15 on discrete valuation rings follows from Theorem 6.1. The following theorem is a stronger variant of Theorem 1.15:

A rtin approximation

347

THEOREM 6.2. Let u" A --+ A ~ be a morphism o f Noetherian rings. Then u is regular if and only if A ~ is a filtered inductive limit o f smooth A-algebras. The sufficiency is trivial because a filtered inductive limit of regular morphisms is regular, since a Noetherian ring, which is a filtered inductive limit of regular rings must be regular too. The necessity is equivalent with Theorem 1.15. Indeed, if Theorem 1.15 holds then for every finite A-algebra B and every morphism of A-algebras v: B --+ A ! there exists a smooth A-algebra C such that v factors through C. Thus A ! is a filtered inductive limit of smooth A-algebras by the following elementary lemma (a proof is given in [38]). LEMMA 6.3. Let S be a class o f finitely presented algebras over a ring A and A ! an Aalgebra. The following statements are equivalent: (1) A~ is a filtered inductive limit o f algebras in S, (2) I f B is a finitely presented A-algebra and v : B --+ A' is a morphism o f A-algebras then v factors through some C in S. Conversely, if the necessity in Theorem 6.2 holds then for every finite type A-algebra B and every v: B --+ A ! morphism of A-algebras there exists a smooth A-algebra D such that v factors through D, let us say v = wt, w: D ~ A!, t : B --+ D. Thus it is enough to apply the following LEMMA 6.4. Let v : B ~ A t be a morphism o f algebras over a Noetherian ring A. Suppose that B is o f finite type over A and v ( H B / A ) A ! = A'. Then v factors through an Aalgebra C = ( A [ Y ] / ( f ) ) g , Y -- (}11. . . . . Yn), where f -- ( f l . . . . . fr), r 0. If ht p = 0 then choose x in h8 which is mapped by v in a regular parameter of A qt / p A q . Consider u t ' A [ X ] ~ A t given by X ~ x B t - B[X] and v t" B t ~ A t extending v by X ~ x. The map A[X](p,x) ~ Aqt is flat by the local flatness criterion [25] since the map k(p)[X]~x~ ~ A qt / p A q is flat by [25, Th. 23.1]. By construction A qt / ( p , x ) A qt is still a regular local ring, even a geometrically regular k(p)algebra since chark(p) = 0 (A contains Q!). Clearly HB[X]/A[X] D HB/A " B[X] as above and it is enough to show that A[X] ~ B[X] ~ A' D q

Artin approximation

349

is resolvable. Thus we may suppose ht p > 0 too. Choose a in u - l ( h s ) such that a lies in no height 0 prime contained in p. We have ht p / a A < ht p and so ht q / a A t < ht q because ht q = ht p + d i m A q /l p A q by flatness of Ap --+ Aql (see [25, 15.1]). By Corollary 5.10 there exists a finite type A-algebra C such that (i) v factors through C, let us say v = wt, t" B --+ C, w ' C ~ A t, (ii) a is standard for a certain presentation of C over A, (iii) t(HB/A) C HC/A. Changing a to one of its powers we may suppose that a is strictly standard for the same presentation of C over A. Since the chain Anna (a) C A n n a (a 2) C --. stops by Noetherianity we may suppose A n n a (a 2) = A n n a (a) and similarly Anna,(u(a)) 2 = Anna,(u(a)), changing a to a power o f a . L e t / l -- A / ( a 8 ) , ~ t = A t / a 8 A t, ~; = C / a 8 C a n d ~ -- q / a 8 A t. By induction hypothesis (ht ~ < ht q !) we may suppose that ,4 --+ t~ ~ ~t D ~ is resolvable. Then by the Main L e m m a A ~ C ~ A t D q is resolvable too. [2 PROOF OF LEMMA 6.6. Let D be a finite type A p-algebra such that

vp" Bp :-- Ap QA B --+ Aqt factors through D, let us say Vp = ~ p O l p , Olp " Bp ~ D, tip" D --+ Aq' a n d flp(nD/Ap) -Aqt (by hypothesis Ap --+ Bp --+ Aqt 53 q Aqt is resolvable). Using L e m m a 6.4 we may suppose even D smooth over Ap. We claim that we can change D such that there exists a finite type B-algebra C such that v factors through C, let us say v = fla, fi :C --+ A t, ~ being canonically, D ~- Bp | C as B-algebras and Vp is induced by v. Indeed, let D ~- Bp[Z]/(g), Z -- (Z1 . . . . . Zs), g = (gl . . . . . ge), gi being supposed with coefficients in B and tip given by Z --+ y / t for y E A ts, t ~ A t \ q . Indeed, for large integer c ~> 1 we get homogeneous polynomials Gi (Y, T) = T cgi ( Y / T ) , Y = (Y1 . . . . , Ys), of positive degree such that G i ( y , t ) = 0 in Aq, t that is r G i ( y t ) - 0 for a certain r ~ A t \ q . Changing y to ry and t by rt we may suppose G i ( y , t ) = 0 in A t. Let C = B[Y, T ] / ( G ) and f l : C --+ A t be the extension of v by Y --+ y, T ~ t. The Bpmorphism y : D[T, T -1 ] ~ (Bp @B C)T given by Z ~ Y~ T, T --+ T is an isomorphism and the map fl" (Bp @B C)T ~ Aq induced by fl is such that fly extends tip. Thus we may change D to the smooth Ap-algebra D[T, T - l ] . Clearly fl(Hc/A) ~ q let us say fl(c) r q for a certain c ~ HC/A. Suppose C ~- A [ X ] / ( f ) , X -- (X1 . . . . . Xn), f = ( f l . . . . , fm). If hB C hc then C works. Otherwise, choose w ~ A t \ q and an integer k > 0 such that w ( h s ) k = 0 (ht q = 0!). Let bl, . . . , bz be a system of generators of HB/A,

E-

C[X, U, V, W]/

Ui Vij, WUi

fj i--1

i,j

where U = (U1 . . . . . Uz), V -" ( V / j ) , W are new indeterminantes and / ~ ' E --+ A' the map extending fl by Ui --~ v(bki ), V ~ O, W ~ w. Since EUi is a polynomial ring over

B[Ui, U/-1] it is smooth over B. Then Ebigi is smooth over A, thus biUi E HE/A and

D. Popescu

350

so hB C hE. But E w ~- C[V, W, W -1 ] is smooth over C and so Ecw is smooth over A. Hence/3 (c) w ~ h E \ q . []

7. Proof of the Main Lemma The main Lemma will follow from the following two lemmas: LEMMA 7.1 (Lifting Lemma). Let A --+ A' be a morphism of Noetherian rings, d c A, 5, .-A/(d2), j ' - A ' / ( d 2 ) , X : = A/(d), X' "= A'/(d), ?~ a finite type A-algebra and ~ " C; --+ A' a morphism of A-algebras. Suppose that Anna (d 2) -- Anna (d), Anna, (d 2) Anna,(d). Then there exist a finite type A-algebra D and a morphism w" D --+ A ~ of Aalgebras such that (i) A | fl factors through A @a W, (ii) rr -1 (hd) C ho, Jr being the surjection A' ~ A' and h d = v'/~(Hd/J)J'" LEMMA 7.2 (Desingularization Lemma). Let A --+ A' be a mor~ghism of Noetherian rings, B afinite type A-algebra, v" B ~ A' an A-morphism, d E A, A := A/(d4), A' "- A ' / ( d 4) and B "-- B / d 4 B. Suppose that d is strictly standard for a presentation of B over A, Anna (d e) = Anna (d) and Anna, (d 2) ...--AnnA,(d). Let D be a finite type A-algebra and w" D --+ A ~an A-morphism such that A (~A 1) factors through A @A 110. Then there exist a finite type A-algebra E and an A-morphism y" E --+ A' such that (i) v and w factor through y, (ii) HD/AE C HE/A (so hD C hE). Indeed, let a ~ A, B be as in the Main Lemma and set d -- a 4. Since

--+ B --+ A' D cl "-- q / d A ' is resolvable there exist a finite type ,4-algebra 6" and a morphism/~" 6" ~ ,4' of ,4-algebras such that h b C h~ ~ ~ and ~"/) --+ ,4' factors through/~. By Lemma 7.1 there exist a finite type A-a~ebra D and a morphism w ' D --+ A' of A-algebras such that ,7t | factors through A @A W and rr -! (h~) C hD. Now apply Lemma 7.2 for d -- a. Thus there exist a finite type A-algebra E and an A-morphism V" E --+ A' such that v and w factor through }, and hD C hE. Since HB/AB C Hi~/j by base change we get hB,4' C ht~ C h~ and so h O D h B. We have also h O ~ q because h ~. ~Z q. PROOF OF THE LIFTING LEMMA. Let

where Pi ~ A f(i) ( ( f ( i ) )

. [) for some presentation 6" -- J [ X ] / [ , X -- (X1 . . . . . Xn), where

each f(i) is a finite subset of/7. Let fl . . . . . fs be polynomials in A[X] such that f j

-

-

Artin approximation

351

f j mod d 2, 1 ~< j ~< s, generate [ and {jq . . . . . fs} contains all elements from f ( i ) . Set I = (fl . . . . . fs, d 2) and let/~ be given by X ~ 2 = x mod d 2 for a certain x ~ A 'n. Then f (x) -- dz, z ~ d A 'n. Set g j ( X , Z ) = f j - d Z j , 1 / ) "-- D / d a D such that /~ | tO "-" (/~ | tO)~. Then the m a p / 5 " C ~ / ) given by/~ | ~, --> f (/)) | ~, is clearly a retraction of D-algebras such that C @ c~ is the composite map

Artin approximation

355

Applying Lemma 7.4 to the case D --+ C --% A',/5 we find a finite type D-algebra E such that (1) ct factors through E (so v and w factor too), (2) the annihilator a in D of AnnD(d2)/AnnD(d) satisfies aE C HE/D. Let t ~ HD/A. Then Dt is smooth over A, in particular flat. Thus AnnD, (d 2) = AnnD, (d) and so a Dt = Dr. By 2) it follows Et smooth over Dr. Hence Et is smooth over A and so

HD/AE C HE/A.

D

References [1] M. Andrr, Homologie des Algkbres Commutatives, Springer, Berlin (1974). [2] M. Andrr, Localisation de la lissit(fonnelle, Manuscripta Math. 13 (1974), 297-307. [3] M. Andr6, Cinq exposes sur la desingularization, Handwritten manuscript, l~cole Polytechnique Frdrrale de Lausanne ( 1991). [4] M. Artin, On the solution of analytic equations, Invent. Math. 5 (1968), 277-291. [5] M. Artin, Algebraic approximation of structures over complete local rings, Publ. Math. IHES 36 (1969), 23-58. [6] M. Artin, Construction techniques for algebraic spaces, Actes Congres Intern. Math. 1 (1970), 419-423. [7] M. Artin, Versal deformations and algebraic stacks, Invent. Math. 27 (1974), 165-189. [8] S. Basarab, V. Nica and D. Popescu, Approximation properties and existential completeness for ring morphisms, Manuscripta Math. 33 (1981), 227-282. [9] J. Becker, A counterexample to Artin approximation with respect to subrings, Math. Ann. 230 (1977), 195196. [10] J. Becker, J. Denef, L. Lipshitz and L. van den Dries, Ultraproducts and approximation in local rings L Invent. Math. 51 (1979), 189-203. [11] A. Brezuleanu and N. Radu, Sur la localisation de la lissitd formelle, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, Srr. A 276 (1973), 439-441. [ 12] M.L. Brown, Artin approximation property, Thesis, Cambridge Peterhouse (August 1979). [13] M. Cipu and D. Popescu, Some extensions ofNdron's p-desingularization and approximation, Rev. Roum. Math. Pures Appl. 24 (10) (1981), 1299-1304. [14] J. Denef and L. Lipshitz, Ultraproducts and approximation in local rings II, Math. Ann. 253 (1980), 1-28. [15] R. Elkik, Solutions d'equations gt coefficients dans une anneau (!!) henselien, Ann. Sci. l~cole Norm. Sup. 4 e 6 (1973), 533-604. [16] A.M. Gabrielov, The formal relations between analytic functions, Funktsional. Anal. i Prilozhen. 5 (4) (1971), 64-65 (in Russian). [17] H. Grauert, (lber die Deformation isolierter Singularitiiten analytischer Mengen, Invent. Math. 15 (3) (1972), 171-198. [ 18] M. Greenberg, Rational points in Henselian discrete valuation rings, Publ. Math. IHES 31 (1966), 59-64. [ 19] A. Grothendieck and J. Dieudonnr, EMments de G~ometrie Alg(brique, IV, Parts 1 and 4, Publ. Math. IHES (1964). [20] A. Grothendieck, Technique de descente II, Srm. Bourbaki 195 (1959-1960). [21] B. Iversen, Generic Local Structure in Commutative Algebra, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 310, Springer, Berlin (1973). [22] H. Kurke, G. Pfister and M. Roczen, Henselsche Ringe and algebraische Geometry, VEB, Berlin (1975). [23] H. Kurke, T. Mostowski, G. Pfister, D. Popescu and M. Roczen, Die Approximationseigenschafi lokaler Ringe, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 634, Springer, Berlin (1978). [24] H. Lindel, On the Bass-Quillen conjecture concerning projective modules over polynomial rings, Invent. Math. 65 (1981), 319-323. [25] H. Matsumura, Commutative Ring Theory, Cambridge University Press (1986). [26] A. Nrron, Modkles Minimaux des Vari~t~s Ab~liennes sur les Corps Locaux et Globaux, Publ. Math. IHES 21 (1964).

356

D. Popescu

[27] T. Ogoma, General N~ron desingularization based on the idea of Popescu, J. Algebra 167 (1994), 57-84. [28] G. Pfister and D. Popescu, Die strenge Approximationseigenschafi lokaler Ringe, Invent. Math. 30 (1975), 145-174. [29] D. Popescu, Algebraically pure morphisms, Rev. Roum. Math. Pures Appl. 26 (6) (1979), 947-977. [30] D. Popescu, General N~ron desingularization, Nagoya Math. J. 100 (1985), 97-126. [31 ] D. Popescu, General N~ron desingularization and approximation, Nagoya Math. J. 104 (1986), 85-115. [32] D. Popescu, Polynomial rings and their projective modules, Nagoya Math. J. 113 (1989), 121-128. [33] D. Popescu, Letter to the Editor. General N~ron desingularization and approximation, Nagoya Math. J. 118 (1990), 45-53. [34] M. Raynaud, Anneaux Locaux Hens~liens, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 169, Springer, Berlin (1970). [35] C. Rotthaus, Rings with approximation property, Math. Ann. 287 (1990), 455-466. [36] M. Spivakovsky, Non-existence of the Artinfunction for Henselian pairs, Math. Ann. 299 (1994), 727-729. [37] M. Spivakovsky, A new proof of D. Popescu's theorem on smoothing of ring homomorphisms, J. Amer. Math. Soc. 294 (1999), 381--444. [38] R. Swan, N~ron-Popescu desingularization, Algebra and Geometry, National Taiwan University, 26-30 December 1995, Ming-chang Kang, ed., International Press, Cambridge (1998), 135-192. [39] B. Teissier, R~sultats r~cents sur l'approximation des morphisms en algObre commutative [d'aprOs Artin, Popescu, Andre, Spivakovsky], S6minaire Bourbaki 784 (1994), 1-15. [40] M. Van der Put, A problem on coefficient fields and equations over local rings, Compositio Math. 30 (3) (1975), 235-258. [41] J.J. Wavrik, A theorem on solutions of analytic equations with applications to deformations of complex structures, Math. Ann. 216 (2) (1975), 127-142.

Section 3B Associative Rings and Algebras


Fixed Rings and Noncommutative Invariant Theory V.K. Kharchenko* Universidad Nacional Aut6noma de Mdxico, FES Cuautitldn, and Sobolev Institute of Mathematics, Novosibirsk, Russia E-mail: vlad@ servidor.unam.mx

Contents 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.

Existence of fixed elements ......................................... Schelter integrality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shirshov finiteness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Goldie rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Noetherian rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Polynomial identities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radicals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M a x i m a l ring of quotients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prime spectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simple and subdirectly indecomposable rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modular lattices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Noncommutative invariant theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.1. Finite generation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.2. Relative freeness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12.3. Hilbert series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

*Supported by SNI, exp 18740 and CONACyT, 32130-E, M6xico. H A N D B O O K O F A L G E B R A , VOL. 2 Edited by M. Hazewinkel 9 2000 Elsevier Science B.V. All rights reserved 359

361 364 366 369 371 372 375 378 382 386 387 388 389 391 392 395


Fixed rings and noncommutative invariant theory

361

1. Existence of fixed elements

The theory of fixed rings deal with the relationships between a given ring R acted on by a finite group G of its automorphisms and the fixed ring R c = {r E R I Vg ~ G, r g = r}. The simplest (and very important) relation is given by the trace function t ( x ) = ~ g ~ G xg" It is easy to see that t is an RG-bimodule homomorphism from R to R G. The first question that arises is whether t is nonzero or, more generally, does there exists a nonzero fixed element at all? The modem development of the theory was inspired by a small paper by C. Faith [Fa72], where, using non-commutative Galois theory for skew fields, he had proved that the fixed ring of an Ore domain is an Ore domain, and by G. Bergman's paper [Be71] where the question answered by C. Faith was put. A fundamental result was obtained in the Bergman and Isaacs paper [BI73]. In this paper the existence problem was formulated as follows. Let R be a ring (without 1) and suppose that G is a finite group acting by automorphisms on R, such that R G -- {0}. I f R ~ {0}, must then R have zero-divisors?

G. Bergman and I. Isaacs answered this question in the case when R has no additive IG I-torsion. Their answer was much more than was expected. THEOREM 1.1. Let G be a finite group acting on the ring R without IGl-torsion. I f R G = {0} then e f(IGI) -- {0}. I f R G (or, more generally, t ( R ) ) is nilpotent, then R is nilpotent. Here

I1

1M can be extended to a homomorphism AA ~ M. A ring A is regular if for every a ~ A, there is b ~ A with a = aba. A semiregular ring is any ring A such that A / J ( A ) is a regular ring and idempotents of A / J ( A ) can be lifted modulo J(A). A ring A is an exchange ring if the following two equivalent conditions hold: (1) for any a, b ~ A with a + b = 1, there are idempotents e ~ a A and f ~ bA with e + f = 1; (2) for any a, b ~ A with a + b = 1, there are idempotents e' ~ Aa and f1 ~ Ab with e' + f ' = 1. All semiregular rings are exchange rings. A ring is normal if all its idempotents are central. A ring A is Abelian regular A is a regular normal ring. A ring without nonzero nilpotent elements is a reduced ring. A ring A is a p f-ring if given any m, n ~ A such that mn -- 0, there are a, b ~ A such that a + b -- 1, ma -- 0, and bn = O. A ring A with the centre C is integral (resp. algebraic) over C if for every a ~ A, there is a polynomial f (x) with coefficients in C whose leading coefficient is invertible (resp. is not a zero-divisor) in A. Let M be the rectangular m x n-matrix with elements in a ring A, k = min(m, n). We say that M admits a diagonal reduction if there are two invertible matrices U and V such that U M V = D, where D is a diagonal m • n-matrix and Adii N dii A D Adi+l,i+l for i -- 1 . . . . . k - 1. If every rectangular matrix over A admits a diagonal reduction, A is an elementary divisor ring. A ring A is right Hermitian if given any a, b ~ A, the row ( a , b) admits a diagonal reduction.

403

Modules with distributive submodule lattice

A topological space is a To-space if for any two its points, at least one of these points has an open neighborhood which does not contain the second point. 1.1 [112,146,32]. Let M be a fight module over a ring A. Then M is distributive r162 for any m, n E M, there is a E A such that m a A + n (1 - a ) A c_ m A N n A r for any m, n ~ M, there are a, b, c, d ~ A such that 1 -- a + b, m a -- nc, and nb - m d r162A -- (m 9 n A ) + (n " m A ) for all m, n ~ M r M has no subfactors S @ T, where T is a nonzero homomorphic image of S r162M has no subfactors which are isomorphic to T @ T, where T is a simple module r M has no 2-generated submodules which have quotient modules which are isomorphic to T • T, where T is a simple module. 1.2 [149,165]. Let M be a fight module over a ring A. Then M is distributive r162for any m, n ~ M, there is a right ideal B of A such that (m + n ) A -- m B + n B r for any subquotient M of M and for any m, n E M such that ~ A n ~A -- 0, there are a, b ~ A such that 1 = a + b and ~ a - ~b = 0. 1.3 [199]. M is a distributive module r the lattice Lat(M) of all submodules of M is isomorphic to the lattice of all open subsets of a topological T0-space. In addition, the lattice of all submodules of a finitely generated distributive module is isomorphic to the lattice of all open subsets of a compact topological T0-space. 1.4 [158,165,182]. M is a distributive right module over a ring A r for any indecomposable quasi-injective module EA, the left End(E)-module Hom(M, E) is uniserial r162 for any module E A which is a direct product of indecomposable quasi-injective right Amodules, the left End(E)-module Hom(M, E) is a distributive Bezout module r162for any injective module EA, the left End(E)-module Hom(M, E) is distributive r for any quasiinjective module EA, the left End(E)-module Hom(M, E) is distributive r for any module EA which is the injective hull of a direct sum of all representatives of classes of isomorphic simple fight A-modules, the left End(E)-module Hom(M, E) is distributive r for any direct summand of any direct product E A of quasi-injective fight A-modules, the left End(E)-module Hom(M, E) is distributive r for any module EA which is the injective hull of an arbitrary simple subfactor T of M, the left End(E)-module Hom(M, E) is distributive r for any module EA which is the injective hull of an arbitrary simple subfactor T of M, Hom(M, E) is a Bezout left module over the ring End(E) r for any module EA which is a direct product of injective hulls of nonisomorphic simple subfactors of M, Hom(M, E) is a left Bezout module over the ring End(E). 1.5 [168]. Let M be a fight module over a semiperfect ring A, and let e be a basis idempotent of A. (1) MA is distributive r MeeAe is a Bezout module. (2) If A is left perfect, then MA is distributive r Meeae is an Artinian Bezout module. (3) If A is fight perfect, then MA is distributive r162M e e a e is completely cyclic. (4) If A is perfect, then MA is distributive r M e e a e is a completely cyclic module with a composition series. 1.6 [68]. Let M be a fight module over a semiperfect ring A, and let 1 ~in=l ei be a decomposition of the identity element of A into a sum of local orthogonal idempotents. Then M is distributive r M e i is a fight uniserial ei A e i - m o d u l e for any ei. -

-

404

A.A. Tuganbaev

1.7 [165]. Let M be a fight module over a fight quasi-invariant ring A. Then M is distributive r any 2-generated semisimple quotient module H of an arbitrary 2-generated submodule N of M is cyclic j > k, then fj,1, jS,j = jS,k; (3) for any a ~ Gi and b E G j, their product ab in G coincides with fi,ij (a) f j,ij (b) ~ Gij. 2.21 [198]. (1) Let A be a ring and let G be a monoid which is a strong semilattice of monoids Gi. Then A[G] is right distributive (resp. fight Bezout ring) r all tings A[Gi] are fight distributive (resp. fight Bezout rings). (2) Let A be a ring and let G be a regular monoid. Then A[G] is fight distributive r G is a strong semilattice of groups Gi and all group tings A[Gi] are fight distributive.

Modules with distributive submodule lattice

409

2.22 [198]. Let A be a commutative ring, and let G be a regular monoid. Then A[G] is right distributive ~:~ G is a strong semilattice of groups G i, and for any pair (A, G i) one of the three conditions cited below holds. ( . ) A is regular, G i is an Abelian group, and each finitely generated subgroup H of G i is a direct product of a cyclic group and a finite group whose order is invertible in A. (**) A is a distributive algebra over the field of rational numbers Q, G i is a Hamiltonian group, and for any odd number n which is order of an element of Gi, the ring A | ( - 1, - 1/Q(en)) is fight distributive. (***) A is distributive, G i is a torsion Abelian group, and if M is any maximal ideal of A such that char(A/M) = p > 0 and the p-primary component Gi(p) of Gi is not equal to 1, then the ring of quotients AM is a field, and the group Gi (p) is either cyclic or quasi-cyclic. 2.23 [ 160,167]. Let A be a commutative ring and let G be a cancellative monoid. Then A[G] is right distributive ~=~ one of the following three conditions holds: ( . ) A is a distributive algebra over the field of the rational numbers Q, G is a Hamiltonian group, and for any odd number n that is an order of some element of G, the ring A| (--1,-1/Q(en)) is right distributive. (**) A is regular, G is a commutative cancellative monoid with the Abelian group of quotients Q, and each finitely generated subgroup H of Q is a direct product of a cyclic group and a finite group whose order is invertible in A. (***) A is distributive, G is a torsion Abelian group, and if M is any maximal ideal of A such that char(A/M) -- p > 0 and the p-primary component Gp of G is not equal to the identity, then the ring of quotients AM is a field, and the group G p is either cyclic or quasi-cyclic. 2.24 [167]. Let A be a commutative ring, and let G be a monoid which is a strong semilattice of cancellative monoids Gi (i E I). Then A[G] is distributive if and only if for any pair (A, G j) the conditions of 2.23 hold. 2.25 [ 167]. Let A be a ring, and let G be a cancellative monoid which is not a torsion Abelian group. Then A[G] is fight distributive 2 be an integer. Then there exists a serial ring A and n 2 pairwise non-isomorphic finitely presented uniserial A-modules mij (i, j = 1 . . . . . n) such that for any two permutations a , z of {1 . . . . . n }, Mll E) M22 ~)""" ~) mnn ~ Ma(1)r(1) G Ma(2)r(2) ED"" ~) Ma(n)r(n). 1.14 [89]. For every uniserial ring, a decomposition of a finitely presented module into a direct sum of uniserial modules is unique. 1.15 [30]. Let M be a nonzero uniserial fight module, E be the endomorphism ring of M, S be the subset of E consisting of all the endomorphisms of M that are not monomorphisms, and let T be the subset of E consisting of all the endomorphisms of M that are not epimorphisms. Then S and T are completely prime ideals of E, every fight (or left) proper ideal of E is contained either in S or in T, and either (a) the ideals S and T are comparable, E is a local ring, and S U T is the Jacobson radical of E, or

422

A.A. Tuganbaev

(b) the ideals S and T are not comparable, S N T is the Jacobson radical J (E) of E, and E / J (E) is canonically isomorphic to the direct product E / S x E / T of two division rings E / S and E / T . 1.16 [30]. Let M be a finite direct sum of uniserial modules, and let X, Y be two arbitrary modules. Then M @ X = M 9 Y implies X ~ Y. Let 1 = el 4- --- 4- en be a decomposition of the identity element of a semiperfect ring A into a sum of local orthogonal idempotents ei. The ring A is semi-invariant if either Aia q aAj or aAj c_ Aia for all i, j and any a E eiAej. 1.17 [87]. Let A be a serial ring. Then A is semi-invariant r

J(eiAei)a C__aejAej andaJ(ejAej) c eiAeia for any a c eiAej r162 (ei 4- J(eiAei))a c aU(ejAej) and a(ej + J(Aj)) c U(eiAei)a for any nonzero a eiAej. 1.18 [90]. Let A be a serial ring. Then every finitely presented indecomposable R-module has a local endomorphism ring r R is semi-invariant. 1.19 [131 ]. Every finitely generated nonsingular module over a serial ring is a serial projective module. A module M is pure-projective if M is a direct summand of direct sum of finitely presented modules. A right module X over a ring A is a pure-injective module if for every module M A and each pure submodule N of M, all homomorphisms N ~ X can be extended to homomorphisms M ~ X. A module M is E-pure-injective if for any index set I, the direct sum M (I) is a pure-injective module. 1.20 [29, p. 153-154]. Let e be a local idempotent of a serial ring A. (1) If M is a pure projective or pure-injective A-module, then Me is a distributive left End(M)-module. (2) If M is a pure-injective indecomposable A-module, then Me is a uniserial left End(M)-module. 1.21 [88]. Every pure-injective or pure-projective right module over a uniserial ring is a distributive left module over its endomorphism ring. Every indecomposable pure-injective right module over a uniserial ring is a uniserial left module over its endomorphism ring. 1.22 [32]. Every r-pure-injective module over a serial ring is serial. 1.23 [32]. Every indecomposable r-pure-injective right module M over a serial ring A is a r-injective uniserial A/r(M)-module and Artinian left End(M)-module. 1.24 [ 117]. (1) Every finitely generated module over a serial ring is a sum of a singular finitely generated module and a serial projective finitely generated module (the sum is not necessarily a direct sum). (2) For each nonsingular module M over a serial ring, all submodules of M are flat.

Serial and semidistributive modules and rings

423

1.25 [121]. Let MA be a finitely generated module over a serial ring A, and let the singular submodule of M be a superfluous submodule in M. Then M is a projective nonsingular serial module. 1.26 [104,105,111]. M is a distributive fight module over a ring A r162 for any indecomposable quasi-injective module E A, the left End(E)-module Hom(M, E) is uniserial r for any module E which is the injective hull of an arbitrary simple subfactor of M, the left End(E)-module Hom(M, E) is uniserial. 1.27 [ 104,105,111 ]. All indecomposable quasi-injective fight modules over a ring A are uniserial left modules over their endomorphism ring r162 the injective hull of each simple fight A-module is a uniserial left module over its endomorphism ring r A is fight distributive. 1.28 [39]. Let M be a right module over a semiperfect ring A, and let 1 - - ~in__l ei be a decomposition of the identity element of A into a sum of local orthogonal idempotents. Then Mei is a uniserial fight ei Aei-module for any ei r M is a distributive A-module. A module is a Bezout module if every finitely generated submodule of it is cyclic. 1.29 [105,101]. (1) Let all simple subfactors of a module MA be isomorphic (this is the case if A is a matrix-local ring). Then M is uniserial r162M is distributive. (2) Let M be a module over a local ring A. Then M is uniserial r162 M is a Bezout module r M is distributive. 1.30 [ 117]. Let M be a distributive fight module over a right serial ring A. (1) M is a finite direct sum of uniform modules, and M is a completely finitedimensional Bezout module. (2) If all cyclic submodules of M are serial, then M is a finite direct sum of uniserial modules. Therefore, the class of all semidistributive fight A-modules coincides with the class of all serial fight A-modules. A subset T in a ring A is a right denominator set in A if there are a ring A ~r and a ring homomorphism fT =-- f : A --+ A~ such that f (T) c_ U(A~), AT = { f (a) f (t) -1 l a A, t c T}, and K e r ( f ) = K ( T ) . In this case, A~r is called the right ring of quotients for A with respect to T, and fT is the natural homomorphism. The fight A T-module N | AT is the module of quotients for N with respect to T and is denoted by N~r. The A-module homomorphism g : N ~ Nv such that g(n) = n | 1 is denoted by g r . If A \ T _= M is a fight ideal of A, then we use fM, AM, and NM instead of f~, A t , and N~r. A right localizable ring is any ring A such that the right ring of quotients AM exists for each M 6 max(AA). Every commutative ring A is localizable.

424

A.A. Tuganbaev

1.31 [ 107]. Let N be a right module over a right localizable ring A. Then NM is a uniserial AM-module for all M 6 max(AA) r N is a distributive A-module.

2. Serial rings Let A be a semiperfect ring, P = ~ ) i = 1 ..... m ei A and Q = ~ ) j = l ..... n ej A be finitely generated projective fight A-modules, where ei and ej are local idempotents, and let f : P --+ Q be a homomorphism. Denote by Aij the Abelian group ei Aej. Since every homomorphism from ei A to ej A is given by left multiplication by an element of Aij, f can be written as left multiplication by the m x n matrix (fij), where f i j E A i j . From the case P = Q = AA, we obtain that every a 6 A can be written in the form a - - ~-~i,j aij, where aij -- eiaej E Aij. Hence a can be considered as the matrix M ( a ) = ( a i j ) , and M ( a b ) = M ( a ) . M(b) for all a, b r A . 2.1 [23]. Let A be a serial ring, and let P = ~[~i=1 ..... n ei A and Q -- ~ ) j = l ..... m ej A be two finitely generated projective fight A-modules, where ei and ej are local idempotents of A, and f = (j~j) : P ---> Q be a homomorphism with f i j E A i j . (1) There are automorphisms c~ : P --> P and 13 : Q --> Q such that c~ and 13 are given by matrices which are products of elementary matrices, and/3fc~ : P ---> Q is given by a matrix G = ( g i j ) such that G has at most one nonzero element in every row and every column. (2) For every a 6 A, there are u, v ~ U(A) such that all rows and columns of the matrix M ( u a v ) contain at most one nonzero element, and the matrices M ( u ) and M(v) are products of elementary matrices. In addition, for some positive integer m, the matrix M ( ( u a v ) m) is diagonal. 2.2 [46,117]. Let 1 = el + . . . + e n be a decomposition of the identity element of a serial ring A into a sum of local idempotents ei, Ti be the set of all regular elements in the ring ei Aei, and let T be the set of all elements t in A of the form t = tl + . . . + tn, where ti E 7~. (1) T is an Ore set in A, the ring of quotients Q of A with respect to T is a serial ring, all ei Q are uniserial Q-modules, all ei are local idempotents in Q, all the rings ei Aei and ei Oei are uniserial, ei Tei = 7~ is an Ore set in ei Aei, eQei is a classical ring of quotients of ei Aei, and eQei is the ring of quotients of ei Aei with respect to ei Tei for all i. (2) A has a classical ring of quotients Qcl(A) which is a serial ring and coincides with the ring of quotients Q. (3) Let each ring ei Aei be either a ring with the maximum condition on right annihilators or a ring with the maximum condition on left annihilators. Then A has the Artinian serial classical ring of quotients Qcl(A) which coincides with the ring of quotients Q with respect to the set T. It can happen that a serial ring has no Artinian classical ring of quotients. Let A be a uniserial prime ring with zero divisors (an example of such a ring is given, e.g., in [26]). Assume that A has a fight or left Artinian classical ring of quotients Q. Then Q is a uniserial ring. In addition, Q is isomorphic to a matrix ring over a division ring. Therefore, Q is a division ring, and A is a domain; this is a contradiction.

S e r i a l a n d s e m i d i s t r i b u t i v e m o d u l e s a n d rings

425

2.3 [ 132]. Let A be a serial ring. Then A is a ring with the maximum condition on right annihilators r A is a ring with the maximum condition on left annihilators r A has a serial Artinian classical ring of quotients. 2.4 [ 131 ]. Every indecomposable serial nonsingular ring is a two-sided order in a ring of block upper triangular matrices over a division ring. 2.5 [ 131,117]. (1) Let A be a right serial ring. Then A is right nonsingular r A is right semihereditary r A is left semihereditary. (2) Let A be a serial ring. Then A is right nonsingular r A is left nonsingular r A is semihereditary. 2.6 [21 ]. Let A be a right serial left Noetherian ring. Then A is right Noetherian r

Ane~=l( J ( A ) )

n - - O.

2.7 [21]. Let A be a right serial ring with ~n~__l( J ( A ) ) n - - O. Then the J (A)-adic completion of A is a fight serial fight Noetherian ring. 2.8 [95]. If A is an indecomposable serial right Noetherian ring which is not left Noetherian, then A has only one non-maximal prime ideal, and there exists a unique simple projective right A-module. 2.9 [ 117]. A is a semiprime right serial left Noetherian ring r A is a semiprime left serial right Noetherian ring r A is a finite direct product of serial Noetherian hereditary prime rings. 2.10 [46]. Any indecomposable serial semiprime ring is a finite direct product of prime rings. 2.11 [ 131 ]. Every serial basis indecomposable Noetherian non-Artinian ring is isomorphic to a ring V J nn(V)

.

.

. J

V V . J

... ...

V V

.

.

...

V

,

where V is a Noetherian uniserial non-Artinian domain and J = J (V). Let J be an ideal of a ring A. For any ordinal c~, let us define the ideal J~ of A as follows: Jo = J, Ja --= ~t~ FP(R)

END

> Az(R)

Then this induces the following commutative diagram of exact sequences:

Separable algebras

475

U ( R ) - K1Picg(R)

> K1FP g (R)

> K1Azg(R)

>

K1 Pie(R)

> K1 F P ( R )

> K1Az(R)

>

II

> Pic g (R) Koi~ ~ KoFP g (R)

> KoAz g (R)

> Br g (R)

> 1

> Pic(R)

> KoAz(R)

> Br(R)

> 1

> KoFP(R) KoI

where Br g (R) = KoEND, Ker(K1 I) -- U(R)tors, Ker(Kolg) -- Pie g (R)tors and K e r ( K o I ) = Pic(R)tors. In [99] we also obtained a relation between Brg (R) and Br(R) in terms of a graded version of the so-called Brauer-class group, denoted by GR(R), fitting in the exact sequence: Picg(R) --+ Pic(R) --+ GR(R) --->Brg(R) --+ Br(R). Avoiding too much detail we just mention the two graded versions of the " C h a s e Rosenberg Exact Sequence" in one theorem: THEOREM 4.7. Let S be a commutative graded R-algebra that is faithfully projective as an R-module. Then we have the following two exact sequences: (a) 1 ---> H ~

Uo) ~ Uo(R) --+ 1

H 1(S/R, Uo) ~ Picg(R) ~ H ~

Picg)

---> H 2 ( S / R , Uo) --->Brg(S/R) ~ H I ( S / R , Picg) --->H 3 ( S / R , Uo),

(b) 1 ---> Hg~

~

U) ---> U(R) ~ g(R)

H~r(S/R, U) ~ Picg(R) ~ H ~

Pic ~)

----> H2r(S/R, U) --+ Brg(S/R) --->H I (S/R, Pic g) ---->Hg3r(S/R, 0), where Hgr(S/R ' U) = H An2 (A1) and A1 ' resp. A2, is the Amitsur complex of the functor U, resp. g ( - ) . COROLLARY 4.8. (1) The crossed product theorems. Let S be a commutative graded Ralgebra that is faithfully projective as an R-module then" (a) IfPicg(S) -- Picg(S | S) -- 1, then Brg(S/R) "~ H Z ( S / R , Uo), (b) IfPicg(S) = Picg(S | S) ---- 1, then Brg(S/R) ~ H2r(S/R, U). (2) If R is reduced and S a graded Galois extension of R such that S has no nontrivial idempotent elements then, i f P i c g ( S ) - 1 then Ker(HZ(G, U(S)) ---> HZ(G, Z)) -Brg(S/R).

E Van Oystaeyen

476

For graded Brauer groups of particular rings we refer to [99]. Let us just mention the following characterization of perfect fields in terms of graded Brauer groups: THEOREM 4.9. Let k be a field. Then k is perfect if and only if Brk[T, T -1] = U

Brg k[T, T - I ] ,

deg T

where the latter means that for each choice ofdeg T ~ N we have identified Brg k[T, T -1 ] as a subgroup of Br k[T, T - 1 ]. It may also be mentioned that every graded Azumaya algebra over a gr-local ring is equivalent to a generalized crossed product (that is a strongly graded ring for the Galois group of some graded Galois extension S~ R splitting A). For n ~ N we may define a graded ring R (n) by putting Rn(n) = Ri for i ~ N, and as an extension of the techniques used in the proof of Theorem 4.9 we mention (because it has some use in the geometrical situation). THEOREM 4.10. Let R be a quasistrongly graded gr-local Krull domain containing afield of characteristic zero, then Br(R) = UnBrg(R(n)); in particular every Azumaya algebra over R may be split by a graded Galois extension. NOTE 4.1 1. For a graded Krull domain R, Brg(R) ~ Br(R) always holds. The quasistrongly graded property just means that R (a) is strongly graded for some d ~ N, or Rdn R-dn = Ro for all n for some d. As pointed out before, for a positive R = R0 ~ R I ~) ..., R+ = R l @ R2 ~)..., we have that Brg (R) = Brg(R/R+) ~- Brg(R0) -- Br(R0). For a treatment of 6tale cohomology of graded rings we refer to [99, Ch. V]. A very interesting class of graded commutative rings where the graded Brauer group could be of some use is the class of regular graded rings. Obviously at this point we enter again into a geometric framework so we embed the treatment of this class of graded domains in our next section.

5. Separable algebras over rings regular in codimension n In this section we restrict attention to Noetherian integrally closed domains R; when considering properties of a graded nature we assume that R is Z-graded. We say that R is regular in codimension n, n ~ N, if for all prime ideals P of R of height less than n, the ring Rp is a regular local ring. Put x(n)(R) = {P ~ Spec R, ht(P) Br(K)

f>~Iq g>QIZ-->O, q~S

where f -

~q Invq and g is the

"sum"-map.

This famous theorem may be restated as follows: the Brauer group of a number field is given by selecting Hasse invariants aq E ~ / Z such that their sum in Q / Z is zero, cf. Pierce [436, Ch. 17.18]. Now, taking R - - Q , then the Merkurjev-Suslin theorem states that the MerkurjevSuslin condition holds in this case, cf. van der Kallen [319, p. 148]. Moreover, by the Kronecker-Weber theorem every Abelian extension of Q is subcyclotomic and it is not hard to derive from this that Br(Q) - PS(~). In a similar way one establishes the following. PROPOSITION 6.5. For every numberfield K we have Br(K) -- PS(K).

E Van Oystaeyen

484

BOLD CONJECTURE 6.6. For any field of characteristic zero: Br(K) = PS(K). Note that the conjecture holds if K is such that we may apply the Merkurjev-Suslin theorem; could one obtain an independent non K-theoretic proof for that theorem by first establishing Br(K) = P S ( K ) in a completely algebraic (representation theoretic) way? The effect of the M-S-theorem is that algebras representing elements of the Brauer group are Brauer-equivalent to tensor products of cyclic crossed products. In this way generalized Clifford algebras enter the picture. Recall that an R-algebra A is said to be a generalized Clifford Algebra of rank m whenever there exist R-generators u 1. . . . . Um in A such that u n 6 R* and U i and l ) j - - WUjUi, where w is a fixed n-th root of unity. Now a 2-cocycle c representing [c] ~ H2(G, R*) where G is a finite Abelian group, defines a symplectic pairing fc : G • G ~ R*, by fc (g, h) = c(g, h)c(h, g ) - l , and a corresponding radical rad(G) = {or ~ G, fc(cr, r) = 1 for all r 6 G}. THEOREM 6.7 (Zmud [677]). (1) A non-degenerate symplectic pairing on an Abelian group is isometric to an orthogonal sum of hyperbolic planes. (2) A symplectic Abelian group with a cyclic radical is uniquely determined up to isometry by its invariants. A cocycle c on G = Cnm = Cn • "'" x Cn is said to determine a generalized Clifford representation if the radical rad(G) is minimal in the sense that it is trivial for even m and isomorphic to Cn when m is odd. A result by S. Caenepeel and the author relates generalized Clifford representations and algebras. THEOREM 6.8. The generalized Clifford algebras are exactly the twisted group rings (RCm) c where (C m , c) determines a generalized Clifford representation. Moreover, a generalized Clifford algebra of even rank is isomorphic to a tensor product of generalized quaternion algebras. Now look again at R = k, a field. To u,/3 6 k* we can associate the generalized quaternion algebra (c~,/3)n with generators x, y and relations x n = ~, yn = 13, ny = wyx for some n-th root of unity w. By Matsumito's theorem (cf. [], Theorem 11.1, p. 93) the group K2(k) is generated by the so-called Steinberg symbols {~,/3} and we may define a group morphism ~ n : K 2 ( k ) ~ Br(k), {c~,/3} w-~ [(c~,/3)n]. THEOREM 6.9. Let k be afield, then we have:

psab(k) - 1 ~

{~n(K2(k)), n such that Wn E k*}. 11

OBSERVATION 6.10. If k is a field such that the group of roots of unity of k has order n then PS ab (k) = Br(k)n ; if k contains arbitrary roots of unity then PS ab (k) = Br(k). Of course for a ring R containing n-th roots of unity the inclusion psab(R) C Br(R)n is still valid. However, take for example R to be the ring of integers of a number field K having at least two real embeddings, then PS ab (R) 5~ Br(R)n.

Separable algebras

485

If we write Br (e~ (R) for the p-subgroup of Br(R) then: THEOREM 6.1 1. With notation as before: (1) esab(R) C Br(R)m, (2) psnil(R) C 1-Ip/m Br(P)(R), (3) PS(P)(R) C Br(P)(R). If L is a cyclotomic Galois extension of Q and d a 2-cocycle of Gal(L/K), taking values in the group of roots of unity of L* then the crossed product algebra (L, Gal(L/K), d) is called a cyclotomic algebra. The following theorem determines S(k) in case of a number field: THEOREM 6.12 (Brauer-Witt). The subgroup S(k) is generated by the classes of cyclo-

tomic algebras. In [406] the relation between the existence of Schur algebras over a number ring and the existence of a certain positive definite unimodular Hermitian form is investigated. However in the case of a number ring R there is no equivalent of the Brauer-Witt theorem reducing the determination of S(R) to the study of a very particular class of algebras. Looking at the diagram of injective group morphisms:

S(R)

~ Br(R)

S(K)

>- B r ( g )

we may view S(R) as a subgroup of Br(R) n S(K). It is known that S(R) 7~ Br(R) n S(K) is possible but the following conjecture may be stated. THE SCHUR GROUP CONJECTURE 6.13. If R is the ring of integers of a numberfield contained in a cyclotomic numberfield, or if R is a localization of a ring as mentioned before, then S(R) = Br(R) n S(K). Since the Brauer group of rings R as in the conjecture is well-known the conjecture reduces the calculation of S(R) to the calculation of S(K) and the consideration of cyclotomic K-algebras. In more specific cases more precise description of Schur algebras becomes possible; using the classification of the finite subgroups of the quaternions over Q it is possible to list all number rings having a Schur algebra that is embeddable in a quaternion skew field. In quaternion skewfields one may even list all projective Schur algebras. For details we refer to [407], let us just mention one of the concrete results there. THEOREM 6.14. Let K be a number field having a real embedding. A non-trivial projec-

tive Schur algebra is realizable in a quaternion skewfield over K if and only if K satisfies one of the following properties.

486

F. Van Oystaeyen

(a) K has an imaginary unramified extension L of degree 2 such that its ring of integers S is a Kummer extension of R. (b) There is a lZ ~ R such that (2) - (/z) 2. (c) Q(~/-5) c K. In each case the corresponding Azumaya algebras are given by: (a) A ~ ( s ~ ), the quaternion ring determined by some fl ~ R*. (b) a ~ R{1, (1 + i)/z -1 , (1 + j ) # - l , (1 + i + j - k)/z -1} where (/z) 2 -- (2). (c) a ~ R{1, 1 ( - 1 + ~ + 2i + (1 + ~/-5)j), 1 ( - 1 - x/5 + (v/5 - 1)j + 2k), j}. The Azumaya algebras in case (b) were also constructed by L. Childs, [134], using smash products for Hopf algebras of rank 2 over R. It is possible to give now an example of a generalized Clifford algebra that is not a projective Schur algebras over R. EXAMPLE 6.15. Put R -- Z[x/]-0]. We know that CI(R) = Z / 2 Z and the fundamental unit of R is 3 + q/-i-0. Let P be the ideal (2, ~/10) in Z[~]--6]. Then p2 = (2) but P is not principal since X 2 - 10Y 2 = + 2 cannot be solved in Z (reduce modulo 5). Define A -- R @ (i + i ) P -1 @ (1 + j ) p - ! @ 89 + i + j + k)R. Putting L = Q ( ~ T 6 , ~z-1) we see that A is an Azumaya algebra (calculate the discriminant disc(A/R) = R) contained in the quaternion algebra: (L Q~vq-6) -l )" One can embed the binary octahedral group E48 into A and verify that A is a generalized Clifford algebra but it cannot be a projective Schur algebra because Q ( v ]--0) does not satisfy one of the conditions of Theorem 6.14.

References This list of references is an extension of the check-list on Brauer Groups compiled by A. Verschoren (RUCA, Antwerp). It is more up to date as far as separable algebras are being concerned but we did not strive to keep up to the completeness standard where publications about the Brauer group in its own right are concerned.

[ 1] A.A. Albert, Normal division algebras of degree four over an algebraic field, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 34 (1932), 363-372. [2] A.A. Albert, Non-cyclic algebras of degree and exponent four, Amer. Math. Soc. Transl., Vol. 35 (1933), 112-121. [3] A.A. Albert, Involutorial simple algebras and real Riemann matrices, Ann. of Math. 36 (1935), 886-964. [4] A.A. Albert, Normal division algebras of degree pe over F of characteristic p, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 39 (1936), 183-188. [5] A.A. Albert, Simple algebras of degree pe over a centrum of characteristic p, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 40 (1936), 112-126. [6] A.A. Albert, A note on normal division algebras of prime degree, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 44 (1938), 649-652. [7] A.A. Albert, Non-cyclic algebras with pure maximal subfields, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 44 (1938), 576579. [8] A.A. Albert, Structure of Algebras, Amer. Math. Soc. Coll. Publications, Vol. 24 (1939). [9] A.A. Albert, On p-adicfields and rational division algebras, Ann. of Math. 41 (1940), 674-693. [10] A.A. Albert, Division algebras over a function field, Duke Math. J. 8 (1941), 750--762. [11] A.A. Albert, Two element generation of a separable algebra, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 50 (1944), 786-788. [12] A.A. Albert, On associative division algebras ofprime degree, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 16 (1965), 799802.

Separable algebras

487

[13] A.A. Albert, New results on associative division algebras, J. Algebra 5 (1967), 110-132. [141 A.A. Albert, Tensor products of quaternion algebras, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 35 (1972), 65-66. [151 A.A. Albert and H. Hasse, A determination of all normal division algebras over an algebraic number field, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. (1932), 722-726. [161 S.A. Amitsur, La representation d'alg~bres centrales simples, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris S6r. A 230 (1950), 902-904. [17] S.A. Amitsur, Construction d'algbbres centrales simples, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris. S6r. A 230 (1950), 10261028. [18] S.A. Amitsur, Differential polynomial and division algebras, Ann. of Math. 59 (1954), 245-278. [19] S.A. Amitsur, On rings with identities, J. London Math. Soc. 30 (1955), 370-455. [20] S.A. Amitsur, Generic splitting fields of central simple algebras, Ann. of Math. 62 (1955), 8-43. [211 S.A. Amitsur, Finite subgroups of division rings, Amer. Math. Soc. (1955), 361-386. [22] S.A. Amitsur, Some results on central simple algebras, Ann. of Math. 63 (1956), 285-293. [23] S.A. Amitsur, Simple algebras and cohomology groups of arbitrary fields, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 90 (1959), 73-112. [24] S.A. Amitsur, Homology groups and double complexes for arbitrary fields, J. Math. Soc. Japan 14 (1962), 1-25. [25] S.A. Amitsur, Embeddings in matrix rings, Pacific J. Math. 36 (1971), 21-39. [26] S.A. Amitsur, On central division algebras, Israel J. Math. 12 (1972), 408-420. [27] S.A. Amitsur, Polynomial identities and Azumaya algebras, J. Algebra 27 (1973), 117-125. [28] S.A. Amitsur, Generic crossed product for arbitrary groups and their generic splitting fields, in preparation. [29] S.A. Amitsur, Extension of derivations and automorphisms, to appear. [30] S.A. Amitsur, L.H. Rowen and J.P. Tignol, Division algebras of degree 4 and 8 with involution, Israel J. Math. 33 (1979), 133-148. [311 S.A. Amitsur and D. Saltman, Generic Abelian crossed products and p-algebras, J. Algebra 51 (1978), 76-87. [321 D.D. Anderson and D.F. Anderson, Divisorial ideals and invertible ideals in a graded integral domain, J. Algebra 76 (1982), 549-569. [331 J.K. Mason, Cohomologische invarianten quadratischer Formen, J. Algebra 36 (1975), 448-491. [34] E. Artin and J. Tate, Class Field Theory, W.A. Benjamin (1967). [35] E. Artin, C. Nesbitt and R. Thrall, Rings with Minimum Condition, Univ. of Michigan Press, Ann Arbor (1943). [36] M. Artin, Grothendieck Topologies, Lecture Notes, Harvard University, Math. Dept., Cambridge, MA (1962). [371 M. Artin, Etale coverings ofschemes over Hensel rings, Amer. J. Math. 88 (1966), 915-934. [381 M. Artin, Azumaya algebras and finite dimensional representations of rings, J. Algebra l l (1969), 532563. [391 M. Artin, On the joins of Hensel rings, Adv. in Math. 7 (1971), 282-296. [40] M. Artin and B. Mazur, Etale Homotopy, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 100, Springer, Berlin (1969). [41] M. Artin and D. Mumford, Some elementary examples of unirational varieties which are not rational, Proc. London Math. Soc. 25 (1972), 75-95. [42] K. Asano, Arithmetische Idealtheorie in Nichtkommutativen Ringen, Japan J. Math. 16 (1936), 1-36. [43] K. Asano, Arithmetik in schiefringen L Osaka Math. J. 1 (1949), 98-134. [441 B. Auslander, Finitely generated reflexive modules over integrally closed Noetherian domains, PhD thesis, University of Michigan (1963). [45] B. Auslander, The Brauer group of a ringed space, J. Algebra 4 (1966), 220-273. [46] B. Auslander, Central separable algebras which are locally endomorphism rings of free modules, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 30 (1971), 395-404. [47] B. Auslander and A. Brumer, Brauer groups of discrete valuation rings, Nederl. Akad. Wetensch. Proc. Ser. A 71 (1968), 286-296. [48] M. Auslander and A. Brumer, The Brauer group and Galois cohomology of commutative rings, Preprint. [491 M. Auslander and D.A. Buchsbaum, On ramification theory in Noetherian rings, Amer. J. Math. 81 (1959), 749-765.

488

F. Van Oystaeyen

[50] M. Auslander and O. Goldman, The Brauer group of a commutative ring, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 97 (1960), 367-409. [51] M. Auslander and O. Goldman, Maximal orders, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 97 (1960), 1-24. [52] J. Ax, A field of cohomological dimension 1 which is not C1, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 71 (1965), 717. [53] J. Ax, Proof of some conjectures on cohomological dimension, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 16 (1965), 12141221. [54] G. Azumaya, On maximally central algebras, Nagoya Math. J. 2 (1951), 119-150. [55] G. Azumaya, The Brauer group ofan adOle ring, NSF Adv. Sci. Sem. Bourdoin College (1966). [56] G. Azumaya, Algebras with Hochschild dimension ~< 1, Ring Theory, Proc. of a Conference on Ring Theory, R. Gordon, ed., Park City, UT, 1971, Academic Press, New York (1972), 9-27. [57] G. Azumaya, Separable algebras, J. Algebra 63 (1980), 1-14. [58] M. Barr and M.-A. Knus, Extensions of derivations, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 28 (1971), 313-314. [59] H. Bass, K-Theory and Stable Algebra, Publ. Math. IHES 22 (1964). [60] H. Bass, Lectures on Topics in Algebraic K-Theory, Tata Institute for Fundamental Research, Bombay (1967). [61] H. Bass, Algebraic K-Theory, Benjamin, New York (1968). [62] M. Beattie, A direct sum decomposition for the Brauer group of H-module algebras, J. Algebra 43 (1976), 686-693. [63] M. Beattie, The Brauer group of central separable G-Azumaya algebras, J. Algebra 54 (1978), 516-525. [64] M. Beattie, Automorphisms of G-Azumaya algebras, Canad. J. Math. 37 (1985), 1047-1058. [65] M. Beattie, The subgroup structure of the Brauer group of RG-dimodule algebras, Ring Theory 1985, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 1197, Springer, Berlin (1987). [66] M. Beattie, Computing the Brauer group of graded Azumaya algebras from its subgroups, J. Algebra 101 (1986), 339-349. [67] M. Beattie and S. Caenepeel, The Brauer long group of Z/prZ-dimodule algebras, in preparation. [68] L. B6gueri, Schema d'automorphisms. Application ~ l'(tude d'extensions finies radicielles, Bull. Sci. Math. 93 (1969), 89-111. [69] M. Benard, Quaternion constituents ofgroup algebras, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 30 (1971), 217-219. [70] M. Benard, The Schur subgroup/, J. Algebra 22 (1972), 347-377. [71] M. Benard and M. Schacher, The Schur subgroup//, J. Algebra 22 (1972), 378-385. [72] H. Benz and H. Zassenhaus, Uber verschriinkte Produktordnungen, J. Number Theory 20 (1985), 282-298. [73] A.J. Berkson and A. McConnell, On inflation-restriction exact sequences in group and Amitsur cohomology, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 141 (1969), 403-413. [74] A. Blanchard, Les Corps Non Commutatifs, Presses Univ., France (1972). [75] S. Bloch, K 2 and algebraic cycles, Ann. of Math. 99 (1974), 349-379. [76] S. Bloch, Torsion algebraic cycles, K 2 and Brauer groups of function fields, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 80 (1974), 941-945. [77] S. Bloch, Torsion algebraic cycles, K2 and Brauer groups of function fields, Springer-Verlag, Berlin (1981), 75-102. [78] S. Bloch and A. Ogus, Gersten's conjecture and the cohomology of schemes, Ann. Sci. l~cole Norm. Sup. 7 (1974), 181-202. [79] Z. Borevitch and I. Safranevic, Number Theory, Pure and Appl. Math., Vol. 20, Academic Press, New York (1967). [80] N. Bourbaki, Alg~bre, El(ments de Math(matique, 4, 6, 7, 11, 14, 23, 24, Hermann, Paris (1947-1959). [81] N. Bourbaki, AlgObre Commutative, Elements de Math(matique, 27, 28, 30, 31, Hermann, Paris (19611965). [82] R. Brauer, Ober Systeme hyperkomplexer Zahlen, Math. Z. 30 (1929), 79-107. [83] R. Brauer, Uber der Index und der Exponenten von Divisionalgebren, Tohoku Math. J. 37 (1933), 77-87. [84] R. Brauer, On sets of matrices with coefficients in a divisionring, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 49 (1941), 502-548. [85] R. Brauer, On normal division algebras of index 5, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA 24, 243-246. [86] R. Brauer, Algebra der hyperkomplexen Zahlensystemen (Algebren), Math. J. Okayama Univ. 21 (1979), 53-89.

Separable algebras

489

[87] R. Braun, On M. Artin's theorem and Azumaya algebras, University of Haifa, Report 2 (1980). [88] J. Brezinski, Algebraic geometry of ternary quadratic forms and orders in quaternion algebras, Preprint (1980). [89] J. Brezinski, A characterization of Gorenstein orders in quaternion algebras, Preprint (1980). [90] A. Brumer, Remarques sur les couples de formes quadratiques, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, SEr. A 286 (1978), 679-681. [91] A. Brumer and M. Rosen, On the size of the Brauer group, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 19 (1968), 707-711. [92] I. Bucur and A. Deleanu, Introduction to the Theory of Categories and Functors, Wiley, London (1968). [93] R.T. Bumby and D.E. Dobbs, Amitsur cohomology of quadratic extensions: Formulas and numbertheoretic examples, Pacific J. Math. 60 (1975), 21-30. [941 S. Caenepeel, A cohomological interpretation of the graded Brauer group, I, Comm. Algebra 11 (1983), 2129-2149. [95] S. Caenepeel, A cohomological interpretation of the graded Brauer group, II, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 38 (1985), 19-38. [96] S. Caenepeel, Gr-complete and Gr-Henselian rings, Methods in Ring Theory, Reidel, Dordrecht (1984). [97] S. Caenepeel, On Brauer groups of graded Krull domains and positively graded rings, J. Algebra 99 (1986), 466-474. [98] S. Caenepeel, A graded version of Artin's refinement theorem, Ring Theory, 1985, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 1197, Springer, Berlin (1986). [991 S. Caenepeel and F. Van Oystaeyen, Brauer Groups and Cohomology of Graded Rings, Monographs, Vol. 121, Marcel Dekker, New York (1988). [lOO] S. Caenepeel, Cancellation theorems for projective graded modules, Ring Theory, Granada 1986, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 1324, Springer, Berlin (1989). [lOl] S. Caenepeel, M. Van den Bergh and F. Van Oystaeyen, Generalized crossed products applied to maximal orders, Brauer groups and related exact sequences, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 33 (1984), 213-149. [lO2] S. Caenepeel and F. Van Oystaeyen, Crossed products over graded local rings, Brauer Groups in Ring Theory and Algebraic Geometry, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 917, Springer, Berlin (1982). [lO3] S. Caenepeel and F. Van Oystaeyen, A note on generalized Clifford algebras, Comm. Algebra, to appear. [lO4] S. Caenepeel and A. Verschoren, A relative version of the Chase-Harrison-Rosenberg sequence, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 41 (1986), 149-168. [105] H. Cartan and S. Eilenberg, Homological Algebra, Princeton University Press, Princeton (1956). [106] J.W.S. Cassels and A. Fr61ich, Algebraic Number Theory, Academic Press, London and New York (1967). [107] P. Cartier, Questions de rationalit~ des diviseurs en g~om~trie alg~brique, Bull. Soc. Math. France 86 (1958), 177-251. [108] N.T. (~ebotarev, Introduction to the Theory of Algebras, OGIZ, Moscow (1949) (in Russian). [109] C.N. Chang, The Brauer group of an Amitsur field I. [110] C.N. Chang, The Brauer group ofan Amitsurfield II, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 39, 493--496. [111] C.N. Chang, The cohomology group of an Amitsurfield, Bull. Inst. Math. Acad. Sinica 5 (1977), 215-218. [112] S.U. Chase, On inseparable Galois theory, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 77 (1971), 413-417. [113] S.U. Chase, On the automorphism scheme of a purely inseparable field extension, Ring Theory, E. Gordon, ed., Academic Press, London (1972), 75-106. [114] S.U. Chase, Infinitesimal groupscheme actions on finite field extensions, Amer. J. Math. 98 (1976), 441480. [115] S.U. Chase, Some remarks on forms of algebra. [116] S.U. Chase, On a Variant of the Witt and Brauer group, Brauer Groups, Evanston 1975, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 549, Springer, Berlin (1976), 148-187. [117] S.U. Chase, P.K. Harrison and A. Rosenberg, Galois theory and cohomology of commutative rings, Mem. Amer. Math. Soc. 52 (1965), 1-19. [118] S.U. Chase and A. Rosenberg, Amitsur cohomology and the Brauer group, Mem. Amer. Math. Soc. 52 (1965), 20-45. [119] S.U. Chase and A. Rosenberg, A theorem of Harrison, Kummer theory and Galois algebras, Nagoya Math. J. (1966), 663-685. [12o] S.U. Chase and A. Rosenberg, Centralizers and Forms of Algebras.

490

E Van Oystaeyen

[1211 S.U. Chase and M.E. Sweedler, Hopf Algebras and Galois Theory, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 97, Springer, Berlin (1969). [122] F. Chatelet, Variations sur un thOme de H. Poincar~, Ann. l~cole Norm. Sup. 61 (1944), 249-300. [123] F. Chatelet, G~om~trie Diophantienne et th~orie des algkbres, Srm-Dubreil, Exp. 17 (1954-1955). [1241 L.N. Childs, On projective modules and automorphisms of central separable algebras, Canad. J. Math. 21 (1969), 44-53. [125] L.N. Childs, The exact sequence of low degree and normal algebras, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 76 (1970), 1121-1124. [126] L.N. Childs, Abelian extensions of rings containing roots of unity, Illinois J. Math. 15 (1971), 273-280. [1271 L.N. Childs, On normal Azumaya algebras and the Teichmiiller cocycle map, J. Algebra 13 (1972), 1-17. [1281 L.N. Childs, Brauer groups of affine rings, Ring Theory, Proceedings of the Oklahoma Conference, Lecture Notes in Pure and Appl. Math., Marcel Dekker, New York (1974), 83-93. [1291 L.N. Childs, Mayer-Vietories sequences and Brauer groups of non-normal domains, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 196 (1974), 51-67. [130] L.N. Childs, The full Brauer group and Cech cohomology, The Brauer Group of Commutative Rings, M. Orzech and C. Small, eds, Lecture Notes in Pure and Appl. Math., Marcel Dekker, New York (1975), 147-162. [1311 L.N. Childs, The Brauer group of graded Azumaya algebras II, graded Galois extensions, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 204 (1975), 137-160. [1321 L.N. Childs, On Brauer groups of some normal local rings, Brauer Groups, Evanston, 1975, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 549, Springer, Berlin (1976), 1-15. [133] L.N. Childs, The group of unramified Kummer extensions of prime degree, Proc. London Math. Soc. 35 (1977), 407-422. [134] L.N. Childs, Azumaya algebras over number rings as crossed products, Preprint, to appear. [135] L.N. Childs and F. De Meyer, On automorphisms of separable algebras, Pacific J. Math. (1967), 25-34. [1361 L.N. Childs, G. Garfinkel and M. Orzech, The Brauer group of graded Azumaya algebras, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 175 (1973), 299-326. [137] L.N. Childs, G. Garfinkel and M. Orzech, On the Brauer group andfactoriality of normal domains, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 6 (1975), 111-123. [138] M. Cipolla, Remarks on the lifting of algebras over Henselian pairs, Math. Z. 152 (1977), 253-257. [139] L. Claborn and R. Fossum, Generalization of the notion of class group, Illinois J. Math. 12 (1968), 228253. [140] C. Cliff and A. Weiss, Crossed product orders and wild ramification, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 1142, 96-104. [141] P.M. Cohn, Morita equivalence and duality, Queen Mary Coll. Math. Notes (1966). [142] P.M. Cohn, Algebra II, Wiley, New York (1977). [1431 C.M. Cordes, The Witt group and the equivalence of fields with respect to quadratic forms, J. Algebra 26 (1973), 400-421. [144] E.F. Cornelius, A sufficient condition for separability, J. Algebra 67 (1980), 476-478. [145] R.C. Courter, The dimension of maximal commutative subalgebras of Kn, Duke Math. J. 32 (1965), 225232. [146] C.W. Curtis, On commuting rings of endomorphisms, Canad. J. Math. 8 (1956), 271-291. [147] C.W. Curtis and I. Reiner, Representation Theory of Finite Groups and Associative Algebras, Wiley Interscience, New York (1962). [1481 C.W. Curtis and I. Reiner, Methods of Representation Theory with Applications to Finite Groups and Orders, Wiley, New York ( 1981 ). [149] E. Dade, The maximal finite subgroups of 4 x 4 matrices, Illinois J. Math. 9 (1965), 99-122. [150] E. Dade, Compounding Clifford's theory, Ann. of Math. 91 (2) (1970), 236-270. [151] J. Dauns, Noncyclic division algebras, Math. Z. 169 (1979), 195-204. [152] A.P. Deegan, A subgroup of the generalized Brauer group of F-Azumaya algebras, J. London Math. Soc. 23 (1981), 223-240. [153] J.P. Delale, Algbbre d'Azumaya 1, G~n~ralit~s, Srm. d'Alg. Non Commutative (1974), Deuxi~me Partie, exp. 8 et 10, 26 pp, Publ. Math. Orsay, Universit6 Paris XI, Orsay (1974), 107-7523.

Separable algebras

491

[154] E Deligne, Cohomologie ~tale, SGA 1, with J.F. Boutot, L. Illusie, J.L. Verdier, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 569, Springer, Berlin (1977). [155] ER. De Meyer, Some notes on the general Galois theory of rings, Osaka J. Math. 2 (1965), 117-127. [156] ER. De Meyer, The Brauer group of some separably closed rings, Osaka J. Math. 3 (1966), 201-204. [157] ER. De Meyer, The trace map and separable algebras, Osaka J. Math. 3 (1966), 7-11. [158] F.R. De Meyer, Projective modules over central separable algebras, Canad. J. Math. 21 (1969), 39-43. [159] ER. De Meyer, On automorphisms of separable algebras II, Pacific J. Math. 32 (1970), 621-631. [160] ER. De Meyer, Separable polynomials over a commutative ring, Rocky Mountain J. Math. 2 (1972), 299310. [161] ER. De Meyer, Separable polynomials over a commutative ring, Ring Theory, Proc. of the Oklahoma Conference, B.R. McDonald, A.R. Magid and K.C. Smith, eds, Marcel Dekker, New York (1974), 75-82. [162] F.R. De Meyer, The Brauer group of a polynomial ring, Pacific J. Math. 59 (1975), 391-398. [163] ER. De Meyer, The Brauer group of a ring modulo an ideal, Rocky Mountain J. Math. 6 (1976), 191-198. [164] F.R. De Meyer, The Brauer group of affine curves, Brauer Groups, Evanston, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 549, Springer, Berlin (1976), 16-24. [165] ER. De Meyer, The closed socle of an Azumaya algebra, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 78 (1980), 299-303. [166] ER. De Meyer and T.J. Ford, The Brauer group of a surface, Preprint (1981). [167] ER. De Meyer and T.J. Ford, Computing the Brauer-Long group of Z/2-dimodule algebras, J. Pure Appl. Algebra, to appear. [168] ER. De Meyer and E. Ingraham, Separable algebras over commutative rings, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 181, Springer, Berlin (1971). [169] ER. De Meyer and G. Janusz, Finite groups with an irreducible representation of a large degree, Math. Z. 108 (1969), 145-153. [17o] ER. De Meyer and M.A. Knus, The Brauer group of real curve, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 57 (1976), 227232. [171] ER. De Meyer and R. Mollin, The Schur group of a commutative ring, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 35 (1985), 117-122. [172] ER. De Meyer and R. Mollin, The Schur group, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 1142, 205-209. [173] M. Deuring, Einbettung von Algebren, in Algebren mit kleineren Zentrum, J. Reine Angew. Math. 175 (1936), 124-128. [1741 M. Deuring, Algebren, 2nd edn, Ergebnisse der mathematik und ihre Grenzgebiete, Springer, Berlin (1968). [175] L.E. Dickson, New division algebras, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 28 (1926), 207-234. [176] L.E. Dickson, Construction of division algebras, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 32 (1930), 319-334. [177] J. Dieudonn6, Compl~ments ~ trois articles ant~rieurs, Bull. Soc. Math. France 74 (1946), 59-68. [178] J. Dieudonn6, La th~orie de Galois des anneaux simples et semi-simples, Comment. Math. Helv. 21 (1948), 154-184. [1791 J. Dieudonn6, Les extensions quadratiques de corps non commutatifs et leurs applications, Acta Math. 87 (1952), 175-242. [18o] D.E. Dobbs, On inflation and torsion in Amitsur cohomology, Canad. J. Math. 24 (1972), 239-261. [181] D.E. Dobbs, Rings satisfying x n(x) -- x have trivial Brauer group, Bull. London Math. Soc. 5 (1973), 176-178. [182] E Donovan and M. Karoubi, Graded Brauer groups and K-theory with local coefficients, IHES Publ. 38 (1970), 5-25. [183] L. Dornhoff, Group Representation Theory, Pure and Appl. Math., Vol. 7, Marcel Dekker Inc. (1971). [184] A. Dress, On the localization of simple algebra, J. Algebra 11 (1969), 53-55. [185] M. Eichler, Bestimmung der Ideal Klassenzahl in gewissen Normalen einfachen Algebren, J. Reine Angew. Math. 176 (1937), 192-202. [186] M. Eichler, Ober die Idealklassenzahl total definiter Quaternion-Algebren, Math. Z. 43 (1937), 102-109. [187] M. Eichler, Uber die Idealklassenzahl hyperkomplexer Systeme, Math. Z. 43 (1937), 481-494. [188] S. Eilenberg and S. McLane, Cohomology and Galois theory 1, normality of algebras and Teichmiillers cocycle, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 64 (1948), 1-20. [189] R. Elman and T.Y. Lam, On the quaternion symbol homomorphism gF :k2 F --+ B(F), Algebraic KTheory II, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 342, Springer-Verlag (1973).

492

E Van Oystaeyen

[190] R. Elman and T.Y. Lam, Quadratic forms and the u-invariant L Math. Z. 131 (1973), 283-304. [191] R. Elman and T.Y. Lam, Quadratic forms under algebraic extensions, Math. Ann. 219 (1976), 21-42. [192] R. Elman, T.Y. Lam, J.-P. Tignol and A.R. Wadsworth, Witt rings and Brauer groups under multiquadratic extensions 1, Preprint. [193] R. Elman, T.Y. Lam and A.-R. Wadsworth, Quadratic forms under multiquadratic extensions, Nederl. Akad. Wetensch. Proc. Ser. A 83 (1980), 131-145. [194] S. Endo and Y. Watanabe, On separable algebras over a commutative ring, Osaka J. Math. 4 (1967), 233-242. [195] S. Endo and Y. Watanabe, The theory of algebras over a commutative ring, Sfigaku 21 (1969), 24-41. (Japanese). [1961 G. Epiney, Modules projectifs sur H[X, Y], travail de diplSme, E.P.E Ztirich. [1971 D.K. Faddeev, Simple algebras over afield of algebraic functions of one variable, Trudy Mat. Inst. Steklov. 38 (1951), 321-344; Amer. Math. Soc. Transl. Ser. II 3 (1956), 15-38. [198] C. Faith, Algebra I, Rings, Modules and Categories, Grundlehren der math. Wissenschaft., Springer, Berlin (1973). [199] C. Faith, Algebra II, Ring Theory, Grundlehren der math. Wissenschaft., B. 191, Springer, Berlin (1976). [200] D.R. Farkas and R.I. Snider, Commuting rings of simple A (k)-modules. [201] B. Fein, A note on Brauer-Speiser theorem, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 25 (1970), 620-621. [202] B. Fein and M.M. Schacher, Embedding finite groups in rational division algebras I, J. Algebra 17 (1971), 412-428. [203] B. Fein and M.M. Schacher, Embedding finite groups in rational division algebras II, J. Algebra 19 (1971), 131-139. [204] B. Fein and M.M. Schacher, Finite subgroups occuring in finite-dimensional division algebras, J. Algebra (1974), 332-338. [205] B. Fein and M.M. Schacher, Brauer groups offields algebraic over Q, J. Algebra 43 (1976), 328-337. [206] B. Fein and M.M. Schacher, Galois groups and division algebras, J. Algebra 38 (1976), 182-191. [207] B. Fein and M.M. Schacher, Ulm invariants of the Brauer group of a field, Math. Z. 154 (1977), 41-50. [208] B. Fein and M.M. Schacher, Ulm invariants of the Brauer group ofafield, II, Math. Z. 163 (1978), 1-3. [209] B. Fein and M.M. Schacher, Brauer groups and character groups offunction fields, J. Algebra 61 (1979), 249-255. [210] B. Fein and M.M. Schacher, Divisible groups that are Brauer groups, Comm. Algebra 7 (1979), 989-994. [211] B. Fein and M.M. Schacher, Strong crossed product division algebras, Comm. Algebra 8 (1980), 451-466. [212] B. Fein, M.M. Schacher and J. Sonn, Brauer groups of rational function fields, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 1, 766-768. [213] B. Fein, M.M. Schacher and A. Wadsworth, Division algebras and the square root o f - 1, J. Algebra 65 (1980), 340-346. [214] W. Feit, The computation of Schur indices, Israel J. Math. 46 (4) (1983), 275-300. [215] K.L. Fields, On the Brauer-Speiser theorem, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 77 (1971 ), 223. [216] K.L. Fields, On the Schur subgroup, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 77 (1971), 477-478. [217] K.L. Fields and I.N. Herstein, On the Schur subgroup of the Brauer group, J. Algebra 20 (1972), 70-71. [218] J. Fischer-Palmqvist, On the Brauer group of a closed category, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 50 (1975), 61-67. [219] J.M. Fontaine, Sur la d~composition des algObres de groupes, Ann. Sci. l~cole Norm. Sup. 4 (1971), 121180. [220] C. Ford, Pure, normal maximal subfields for division algebras in the Schur subgroup, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 78 (1972), 810-812. [221] N.S. Ford, Inertial subalgebras of central separable algebras, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 60 (1976), 39-44. [222] T.J. Ford, Every finite Abelian group is the Brauer group of a ring. [223] T.J. Ford, On the Brauer group of a Laurent polynomial ring, to appear. [224] E. Formanek, Central polynomials for matrix rings, J. Algebra 23 (1972), 129-132. [225] E. Formanek, The center of the ring of 3 x 3 generic matrices, Linear and Multilinear Algebra 7 (1979), 203-212. [226] E. Formanek, The center of the ring of 4 • 4 generic matrices, J. Algebra 62 (1980), 304-320. [227] R.M. Fossum, The Noetherian different of projective orders, PhD thesis, Univ. of Michigan (1965).

Separable algebras

493

[228] R.M. Fossum, Maximal orders over Krull domains, J. Algebra 10 (1968), 321-332. [229] R.M. Fossum, The Divisor Class Group of a Krull Domain, Ergebnisse der Mathematik, B. 74, Springer, Berlin (1973). [230] R.M. Fossum, P. Griffith and I. Reiten, The homological algebra of trivial extensions of Abelian categories with application to ring theory, Preprint. [231] T.V. Fossum, On symmetric orders and separable algebras. [232] A. Frrlich, The Picard group of non-commutative rings, in particular of orders, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 180 (1973), 1-45. [233] A. Fr61ich, I. Reiner and S. Ullom, Class groups and Picard groups of orders, Proc. London Math. Soc. 29 (1974), 405-434. [234] A. Fr61ich and C.T.C. Wall, Equivalent K-theory and algebraic number theory, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 108, Springer, Berlin (1969), 12-27. [235] A. Fr61ich and C.T.C. Wall, Equivariant Brauer groups in algebraic number theory, Bull. Soc. Math. France 25 (1971), 91-96. [2361 A. Fr61ich and C.T.C. Wall, Generalizations of the Brauer group, L Preprint. [237] O. Gabber, Some theorems on Azumaya algebras, PhD thesis, Harvard Univ. (1978); Groupe de Brauer, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 844, Springer, Berlin (1981), 129-209. [238] J. Gamst and K. Hoechsmann, Quaternions gyngralis~s, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 269 (1969), 560-562. [239] G.S. Garfinkel, Amitsur cohomology and an exact sequence involving pic and the Brauer group, PhD thesis, Cornell University (1968). [240] G.S. Garfinkel, A Torsion version of the Chase-Rosenberg exact sequence, Duke Math. J. 42 (1975), 195210. [241] G.S. Garfinkel, A module approach to the Chase-Rosenberg-Zelinski sequences, Brauer Groups, Evanston 1975, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 549, Springer, Berlin (1976), 50-62. [242] G.S. Garfinkel and M. Orzech, Galois extensions as modules over the group ring, J. Math. 22 (1970), 242-248. [243] M. Gerstenhaber, On finite inseparable extensions of exponent one, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 71 (1965), 878-881. [2441 M. Gerstenhaber and A. Zaromp, On the Galois theory of purely inseparable field extensions, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 76 (1970), 1011-1014. [245] G.T. Georgantas, Inseparable Galois cohomology, J. Algebra 38 (1976), 368-379. [246] G.T. Georgantas, Derivations in central separable algebra, Glasgow Math. J. 19 (1978), 75-77. [247] W.D. Geyer, Ein algebraischer Beweis des Satzes von Weichold iiber reelle algebraische FunktionenkO'rpen, Algebraische Zahlentheorie. Bericht Tagung Math. Forschungsint. Oberwolfach, Bibliographisches Institut Mannheim (1967), 83-98. [248] J. Giraud, Cohomologie Non Abglienne, Springer, Berlin (1971). [249] W. Glassmire, A note on noncrossed products, J. Algebra 31 (1974), 206--207. [250] A. Goldie, Azumaya algebras and rings with polynomial identity, Math. Proc. Cambridge Philos. Soc. (1976), 393-399. [251] A. Goldie, Addendum "Azumaya algebras and rings with polynomial identity" Math. Proc. Cambridge Philos. Soc. 80 (1976), 383-384. [2521 O. Goldman, Quasi-equality in maximum orders, J. Math. Soc. Japan 13 (1961), 371-376. [2531 M.J. Greenberg, Lectures on Forms in Many Variables, Benjamin, New York (1969). [254] P.A. Griffith, The Brauer group of A[T], Math. Z. 147 (1976), 79-86. [255] A. Grothendieck, M. Artin and J.L. Verdier, Thgorie des Topos et Cohomologie F,tale des Schgmas (196364), Lecture Notes in Math., Vols 269, 270, 305, Springer, Berlin (1972-73). [256] A. Grothendieck, Le groupe de Brauer L Algkbres d'Azumaya et interprgtations diverses, II. Thgorie cohomologique III. Examples et compMments, Dix Expos6s sur la Cohomologie des Sch6mas, NorthHolland, Amsterdam (1968), 46-188. [257] K. Grtinberg, Profinite groups, Algebraic Number Theory, Academic Press, New York (1967), 116-127. [258] D.E. Haille, On central simple algebras of given exponent L J. Algebra 57 (1979), 449-456. [2591 D.E. Haille, On central simple algebras of given exponent II, J. Algebra 66 (1980), 205-219. [260] D.E. Haille, Abelian extensions of arbitrary fields, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 52 (1963), 230-235. [261] M. Harada, Some criteria for hereditary of crossed product orders, Osaka J. Math. 1 (1964), 69-80.

494

E Van Oystaeyen

[262] D.K. Harrison, Abelian Extensions of Commutative Rings, Mem. Amer. Math. Soc. 52 (1977). [263] R. Hartshorne, Algebraic Geometry, Graduate Texts in Math., Springer, Berlin (1977). [264] A. Hattori, Certain cohomology associated with Galois extensions of commutative rings, Sci. Papers Coll. Gen. Educ. Univ. Tokyo 24 (1974), 79-91. [265] A. Hattori, On groups Hn(s, G) and the Brauer group of commutative rings, Sci. Papers Coll. Gen. Educ. Univ. Tokyo 28 (1978-79), 1-20. [266] A. Hattori, On groups H n ( s / R ) related to the Amitsur cohomology and the Brauer group of commutative rings, Preprint. [267] N. Heerema, Higher derivations and automorphisms of complete local rings, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 76 (1970), 1212-1225. [2681 N. Heerema, A Galois theory for inseparable fields extensions, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 154 (1971), 193200. [269] I.N. Herstein, Noncommutative Rings, Carus Math. Monographs, Vol. 15, Math. Ass. of America, Chicago (1968). [270] I.N. Herstein, On a theorem of A.A. Albert, Scripta Math. 29 (1973), 391-394. [271] A. Heuser, Ober den Funktionenk6rper der Normfliiche einer zentral einfachen Algeba, J. Reine Angew. Math. 301 (1978), 105-113. [272] D.G. Higman, On orders in separable algebras, Canad. J. Math. 7 (1955), 509-515. [273] K. Hirata, Some types of separable extensions of rings, Nagoya Math. J. 33 (1968), 108-115. [2741 K. Hirata, Separable extensions and centralizers in rings, Nagoya Math. J. 35 (1969), 31--45. [275] K. Hirata and K. Sugano, On semisimple extensions and separable extensions over non commutative rings, J. Math. Soc. Japan 18 (1966), 360-373. [276] G. Hochschild, Automorphisms of simple algebras, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 69 (1950), 292-301. [277] G. Hochschild, Restricted Lie algebras and simple associative algebras of characteristic p, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 80 (1955), 135-147. [278] G. Hochschild, Simple algebras with purely inseparable splitting fields of exponent one, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 79 (1955), 477-489. [279] K. Hoechsmann, Algebras split by a given purely inseparable field, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 14 (1963), 768-776. [280] K. Hoechsmann, Simple algebras and derivations, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 108 (1963), 1-12. [281] K. Hoechsmann, Ober nicht-kommutative abelsche Algebren, J. Reine Angew. Math. 218 (1965), 1-5. [282] A. Holleman, Inseparable algebras, J. Algebra 46 (1977), 415-229. [283] R. Hoobler, A generalization of the Brauer group and Amitsur cohomology, PhD thesis, University of California, Berkeley (1966). [284] R. Hoobler, Non-Abelian sheaf cohomology by derived functors, Category Theory, Homology and Their Applications III, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 99, Springer, Berlin (1969), 313-364. [285] R. Hoobler, Brauer groups of Abelian schemes, Ann. Sci. l~cole Norm. Sup. 5 (1972), 45-70. [286] R. Hoobler, Cohomology in the finite topology and Brauer groups, Pacific J. Math. 42 (1972), 667-679. [287] R. Hoobler, Cohomology ofpurely inseparable Galois coverings, J. Reine Angew. Math. 266 (1974), 183199. [288] R. Hoobler, Purely inseparable Galois theory, Ring Theory: Proceedings of the Oklahoma Conference, Lecture Notes in Pure and Appl. Math., Marcel Dekker, New York (1974), 207-240. [289] R. Hoobler, A cohomology interpretation of Brauer groups of rings, Pacific J. Math. 86 (1980), 89-92. [290] R. Hoobler, When is Br(X) -- Br~(X), Brauer Groups in Ring Theory and Algebraic Geometry, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 917, Springer, Berlin (1982). [291] R. Hoobler, Functors of graded rings, Methods in Ring Theory, Reidel, Dordrecht (1984). [292] J.M. Hood, Central simple p-algebras with purely inseparable subfields, J. Algebra 17 (1971), 299-301. [293] J. HiJbschmann, Group extensions, crossed pairs and an eight term exact sequence, J. Reine Angew. Math. 321 (1981), 150-172. [2941 W. Htirlimann, Sur le groupe de Brauer d'un anneau de polygones en caracteristique p e t la th~orie des invariants, Groupe de Brauer, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 844, Springer, Berlin (1981), 229-274. [295] E.C. Ingraham, Inertial subalgebras of algebras over commutative rings, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 124 (1966), 77-93. [296] E.C. Ingraham, Inertial subalgebras ofcomplete algebras, J. Algebra 15 (1970), 1-11.

Separable algebras [297] [298] [299] [300] [301] [302] [303] [304] [305] [306] [307] [308] [309] [310] [311] [312] [313] [314] [315] [316] [317] [318] [319] [320] [321] [322] [323] [324] [325] [326] [327] [328] [329] [330] [331] [332] [333] [334] [335] [336] [337] [338] [339]

495

E.C. Ingraham, On the existence and conjugacy of inertial subalgebras, J. Algebra 31 (1974), 547-556. B. Iversen, Brauer group of a linear algebraic group, J. Algebra 42 (1976), 295-301. N. Jacobson, Non commutative and cyclic algebras, Ann. of Math. (1933), 197-208. N. Jacobson, Abstract derivations and Lie algebras, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 42 (1937), 206-224. N. Jacobson, p-algebras of exponent p, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 43 (1967), 667-670. N. Jacobson, The Theory ofRings, Amer. Math. Soc., New York (1943). N. Jacobson, Construction of central simple associative algebras, Ann. of Math. 45 (1944), 658-666. N. Jacobson, Galois theory of purely inseparable fields of exponent one, Amer. J. Math. 66 (1944), 645648. N. Jacobson, Lectures in Abstract Algebra L Van Nostrand, Princeton (1951). N. Jacobson, Structure of Rings, Amer. Math. Soc., New York (1956). N. Jacobson, Generation of separable and central simple algebra, J. Math. Pure Appl. 36 (1957), 217-227. N. Jacobson, Lectures in Abstract Algebra, III, Van Norstrand, Princeton (1964). N. Jacobson, Abraham Adrian Albert, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 80 (1974), 1075-1100. N. Jacobson, P.L Algebras, an Introduction, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 441, Springer, Berlin (1975). V.I. Jancevskii, Fields with involution and symmetric elements, Dokl. Akad. Nauk SSSR 18 (1974), 104107 (in Russian). V.I. Jancevskii, Division algebras over a Henselian discrete valued field k, Dokl. Akad. Nauk SSSR 20 (1976), 971-974. G.J. Janusz, Separable algebras over commutative rings, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 122 (1966), 461-479. G.J. Janusz, The Schur index and roots of unity, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 35 (1972), 387-388. G.J. Janusz, Generators for the Schur group of local and global number fields, Pacific J. Math. 56 (1975), 525-546. G.J. Janusz, The Schur group ofcyclotomic fields, J. Number Theory 7 (1975), 345-352. G.J. Janusz, Simple components of Q[SI(2, q)], Comm. Algebra 1 (1974), 1-22. G.J. Janusz, The Schur group ofan algebraic number field, Ann. of Math. 103 (1976), 253-281. W. van der Kallen, The Mercurjev-Suslin theorem, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 1142, 157-168. T. Kanzaki, On commutator rings and Galois theory of separable algebra, Osaka J. Math. 1 (1964), 103115. T. Kanzaki, On Galois algebra over a commutative ring, Osaka J. Math. 2 (1965), 309-317. T. Kanzaki, A note on Abelian Galois algebra over a commutative ring, Osaka J. Math. 3 (1966), 1-6. T. Kanzaki, On generalized crossed products and Brauer group, Osaka J. Math. 5 (1968), 175-188. I. Kaplansky, Fr61ich's local quadratic forms, J. Reine Angew. Math. 74--77 (1969), 239-240. I. Kaplansky, Commutative Rings, Allyn and Bacon, Boston (1970). I. Kaplansky, Commutative Rings, University of Chicago Press, Chicago (1874). M. Kargapolov and I. Merzliakov, Elements de la th(orie des groupes, Mir, Moscow (1985). M. Karoubi, Algkbres de Clifford et K-th~orie, Ann. Sci. t~cole Norm. Sup. 1 (1968), 161-270. G. Karpilowski, Projective Representations of Finite Groups, Marcel Dekker Inc. (1985). V.J. Katz, The Brauer group of a regular local ring, PhD thesis, Brandeis Univ. (1968). I. Kersten, Zyklische p-Algebren, J. Reine Angew. Math. 297 (1978), 177-187. I. Kersten, Konstruktion yon zusammenhangende Galoisschen Algebren der characteristic pk zu vorgegebener Gruppe der Ordnung p f , J. Reine Angew. Math. 306 (1979), 177-184. M.A. Knus, Algebras graded by a group, Category Theory, Homology Theory and their Applications II, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 92, Springer, Berlin (1969), 117-133. M.A. Knus, Algbbres d'Azumaya et modules projectifs, Comm. Math. Helv. 45 (1970), 372-383. M.A. Knus, Sur le Th~orkme de Skolem-Noether et sur les D~rivations des algkbres d'Azumaya, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, S6r. A 270 (1970), 637-639. M.A. Knus, A Teichmiiller cocycle for finite extensions, Preprint. M.A. Knus and M. Ojanguren, A note on the automorphisms of maximal orders, J. Algebra 22 (1972), 573-577. M.A. Knus and M. Ojanguren, Sur le polynome caract~ristique et les automorphismes des algkbres d'Azumaya, Ann. Scuola Norm. Sup. Pisa 26 (1972), 225-231. M.A. Knus and M. Ojanguren, Sur quelques applications de la th~orie de la descente & l'~tude du group Brauer, Comm. Math. Helv. 47 (1972), 532-542.

496

E Van Oystaeyen

[340] M.A. Knus and M. Ojanguren, Th~orie de la descente et d'algkbres d'Azumaya, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 389, Springer, Berlin (1974). [3411 M.A. Knus and M. Ojanguren, A Mayer-Vietoris sequence for the Brauer group, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 5 (1974), 345-360. [3421 M.A. Knus and M. Ojanguren, Modules and quadratic forms over polynomial algebras, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 66 (1977), 223-226. [343] M.A. Knus and M. Ojanguren, Cohomologie ~tale et groupe de Brauer, Groupe de Brauer, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 844, Springer, Berlin (1981). [3441 M.A. Knus, M. Ojanguren and D.J. Saltman, On Brauer groups in characteristic p, Brauer Groups, Evanston 1975, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 549, Springer, Berlin (1976), 25-49. [3451 M.A. Knus, M. Ojanguren and R. Sridharan, Quadratic forms and Azumaya algebras, J. Reine Angew. Math. (1978), 231-248. [346] M.A. Knus and R. Parimala, Quadratic forms associated with projective modules over quaternion algebras, J. Reine Angew. Math. 318 (1980), 20--31. [347] H. Koch, Galoissche Theorie der p-Erweiterungen, Deutscher Verlag de Wissenschaften, Berlin (1970). [348] A. Kovacs, Homomorphisms of matrix rings into matrix rings, Pacific J. Math. 49 (1973), 161-170. [349] A. Kovacs, Generic splitting fields, Comm. Algebra 6 (1978), 1017-1035. [350] H.F. Kreimer, Abelian p-extensions and cohomology, Brauer Groups, Evanston 1975, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 549, Springer, Berlin (1976), 104-111. [351] H.F. Kreimer and P.M. Cook, Galois theories and normal bases, J. Algebra 43 (1976), 115-121. [352] W. Kuijk, Generic construction of non-cyclic division algebras, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 2 (1972), 121-130. [353] W. Kuijk, The construction of a large class of division algebras. [354] P. La Follette, Splitting of Azumaya algebras over number rings, Brauer Groups, Evanston 1975, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 549, Springer, Berlin (1976), 100-103. [355] T. Lam, Algebraic Theory of Quadratic Forms, Benjamin, Reading (1973). [356] T. Lam, Serre's Conjecture, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 635, Springer, Berlin (1973). [357] S. Lang, Algebra, Addison-Wesley, Reading, MA (1965). [358] S. Lang, Rapport sur la Cohomologie des Groupes, Benjamin, New York (1966). [359] L. Le Bruyn, A cohomological interpretation of the reflexive Brauer group, J. Algebra 105 (1987), 250254. [360] L. Le Bruyn and F. Van Oystaeyen, Generalized Rees rings and relative maximal orders satisfying polynomial identities, J. Algebra 83 (1983), 409-436. [361] L. Le Bruyn, Permutation modules and rationality questions 1, UIA preprint (1988). [362] L. Le Bruyn, M. Van den Bergh and F. Van Oystaeyen, Graded Orders, Birkh~iuser, Boston (1983). [363] F.W. Long, The Brauer group of dimodule algebras, J. Algebra 30 (1974), 559-601. [3641 F.W. Long, A generalization of the Brauer group of graded algebras, Proc. London Math. Soc. 29 (1974), 237-256. [365] F. Lorenz and H. Opolka, Einfache Algebren und Projektive Darstellungen iiber Zahlkb'rpern, Math. Z. (1978), 175-186. [366] A. Lue, Non-Abelian cohomology of associative algebras, Quart. J. Math. 19 (1968), 159-180. [367] H. Maass, Beweis des Normensatzes in einfachen Hyperkomplexen Systemen, Abh. Math. Sem. Univ. Hamburg 12 (1937), 64-69. [368] S. MacLane and O.F.G. Schilling, A formula for the direct product of crossed product algebras, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 48 (1942), 108-114. [369] A.R. Magid, Pierce's representation and separable algebras, Illinois J. Math. 15 (1971), 114-121. [370] A.R. Magid, The separable closure of some commutative rings, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 170 (1972), 109-124. [371] A.R. Magid, The Separable Galois Theory of Commutative Rings, Lecture Notes in Pure and Appl. Math., Vol. 27, Marcel Dekker, New York (1974). [372] A.R. Magid, The Picard sequence of a fibration, Brauer Groups, Evanston 1975, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 549, Springer, Berlin (1976), 71-85. [373] A.R. Magid, Brauer groups of linear algebraic groups with characters, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 71 (1978), 164-168.

Separable algebras

497

[374] K.I. Mandelberg, Amitsur cohomology for certain extensions of rings of algebraic integers, Pacific J. Math. 59 (1975), 161-197. [375] Yu.I. Manin, Cubic Forms, 2nd edn, North-Holland (1986). [376] Yu.I. Manin, Le Groupe de Brauer-Grothendieck en ggomgtrie diophantienne, Actes du Congr~s International des Mathrmaticiens, Vol. 1, Gauthier-Villars, Cubic Forms: Algebra, Geometry, Arithmetic, NorthHolland, Amsterdam (1974). [377] W. Massey, Homology and Cohomology Theory, Pure and Appl. Mathematics, Vol. 46, Marcel Dekker, New York. [378] R. Matsuda, On algebraic properties of infinite group rings, Bull. Fac. Sci. Ibaraki Univ. Series A, Math. 7 (1975), 29-37. [379] B. Mazur, Notes on etale cohomology of number fields, Ann. Sci. l~cole Norm. Sup. 6 (1973), 521-556. [380] A. Micali and O.E Villamayor, Sur les alg~bres de Clifford, Ann. Sci. l~cole Norm. Sup. 1 (1968), 271304. [381] A. Micali and O.E Villamayor, Sur les algObres de Clifford, II, J. Reine Angew. Math. 242 (1970), 61-90. [382] A. Micali and O.E Villamayor, Alg~bres de Clifford et groupe de Brauer, Ann. Sci. l~cole Norm. Sup. 4 (1971), 285-310. [383] J.S. Milne, The Brauer group of a rational surface, Invent. Math. 11 (1970), 304-307. [384] J.S. Milne, Etale Cohomology, Princeton University Press, Princeton, NJ (1980). [385] J. Milnor, Introduction to Algebraic K-Theory, Annals of Mathematics Studies, Princeton University Press, Princeton, NJ (1971). [386] Y. Miyashita, An exact sequence associated with a generalized crossed product, Nagoya Math. J. 49 (1973), 21-51. [387] R. Mollin, Herstein "s conjecture, automorphisms and the Schur group, Comm. Algebra 6 (1978), 237-248. [388] R. Mollin, Uniform distribution classified. [389] R. Mollin, Induced quaternion algebras in the Schur group, Canad J. Math. 6 (1981), 1370-1379. [390] S. Montgomery, Centralizers of separable subalgebras, Michigan Math. J. 22 (1975), 15-22. [391] R.A. Morris, On the Brauer group of Z, Pacific J. Math. 39 (1971), 619-630. [392] M. Nagata, Local Rings, Interscience Tracts in Pure and Appl. Math., Vol. 13, Wiley, New York (1962). [393] A. Nakajima, On a group of cyclic extensions over commutative rings, Math. J. Okayama Univ. 15 (1972), 163-172. [394] A. Nakajima, Some results on H-Azumaya algebras, Math. J. Okayama Univ. 19 (1976-77), 101-110. [395] T. Nakayama, Division Algebren iiber diskret bewerteten perfekten KOrpern, J. Reine Angew. Math. 178 (1937), 11-13. [396] C. Nfist~sescu, E. Nauwelaerts and E Van Oystaeyen, Arithmetically graded rings revisited, Comm. Algebra 14 (1986), 1991-2008. [397] E. NSst~sescu and E Van Oystaeyen, Graded and Filtered Rings and Modules, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 758, Springer, Berlin (1980). [398] C. Nhst~sescu and E Van Oystaeyen, Graded Ring Theory, Library of Math., Vol. 28, North-Holland, Amsterdam (1982). [399] C. Ngst~sescu and E Van Oystaeyen, On strongly graded rings and crossed products, Comm. Algebra 10 (1982), 2085-2106. [400] C. Nhstfisescu, E Van Oystaeyen and M. Van den Bergh, Separable functors, applied to graded rings, J. Algebra 123 (1989), 397-413. [401] E. Nauwelaerts and E Van Oystaeyen, The Brauer splitting theorem and projective representations of finite groups, J. Algebra 112 (1988), 49-57. [402] E. Nauwelaerts and F. Van Oystaeyen, Finite generalized crossed products over tame and maximal orders, J. Algebra 101 (1988), 61-68. [403] P. Nelis and E Van Oystaeyen, Ray symmetric projective representations and subgroups of the Brauergroup, Israel Math. Conf. Proc. 1 (1989), 262-279. [404] P. Nelis and E Van Oystaeyen, The projective Schur subgroup of the Brauer group and root group of finite groups, J. Algebra, to appear. [405] P. Nelis, Integral matrices spanned by finite groups, UIA Preprint 12 (1990). [406] P. Nelis, The Schur group conjecture for the ring of integers of a number field, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc., to appear.

498 [407] [408] [409] [410] [411 ] [412] [413] [414] [415] [416] [417] [418] [419] [420] [421] [422] [423] [424] [425] [426] [427] [428] [429] [430] [431] [432] [433] [434] [435] [436] [437] [438] [439] [440] [441] [442]

F. Van Oystaeyen P. Nelis, Schur and projective Schur groups of number rings, Canad. J. Math., to appear. E Nelis, On hereditary and Gorensteinness of crossed product orders, UIA Preprint 34 (1989). D. Northcott, A note on polynomial rings, J. London Math. Soc. 33 (1958), 36-39. D. Northcott, An Introduction to Homological Algebra, Cambridge University Press, Cambridge (1960). T. Nyman and G. Whaples, Hasse's principle for simple algebras over function fields of curves, I, algebras of index 2 and 3, curves of genus 0 and 1, J. Reine Angew. Math. 299/300 (1978), 396-405. T. Nyman and G. Whaples, Correction to the paper "Hasse's Principle ... ", J. Reine Angew. Math. 301 (1978), 211. M. Ojanguren, A non-trivial locally trivial algebra, J. Algebra 29 (1974), 510-512. M. Ojanguren, A remark on generic splitting rings, Arch. Math. 27 (1976), 369-371. M. Ojanguren, Formes quadratiques sur les algObres de polynomes, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 287 (1978), 695-698. M. Ojanguren and R.R. Sridharan, Cancellation of Azumaya algebras, J. Algebra 18 (1971), 501-505. T. Okado and R. Saito, A generalization ofP. Roquette's theorems, Hokkaido Math. J. 1 (1972), 197-205. S. Okubo and H.C. Myung, Some new classes ofdivision algebras, J. Algebra 67 (1980), 479-490. O. O'Meara, Introduction to Quadratic Forms, Academic Press, New York (1963). O. O'Meara, Introduction to Quadratic Forms, Die Grundlehren der Mathematischen Wissenschaften, B. 117, Springer, Berlin (1970). H. Opolka, Rationalitiitsfragen bei Projektiven Darstellungen endlicher Gruppen, Dissertation, Universit~it Mtinster (1987). M. Orzech, A cohomological description of Abelian Galois extensions, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 137 (1969), 481-499. M. Orzech, On the Brauer group of modules having a grading and an action, Canad. J. Math. 28 (1976), 533-552. M. Orzech, Brauer groups of graded algebras, Brauer Groups, Evanston 1975, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 549, Springer, Berlin (1976). M. Orzech and C. Small, The Brauer Group of Commutative Rings, Lecture Notes in Pure and Appl. Math., Vol. 11, Marcel Dekker, New York (1975). M. Orzech, Correction to "On the Brauer group of modules having a grading and an action", Canad. J. Math. 32 (1980), 1523-1524. B. Pareigis, Uber normale, zentrale, separabele Algebres und Amitsur Kohomologie, Math. Ann. 154 (1964), 330-340. B. Pareigis, Non-additive ring and module theory IV." The Brauer group of a symmetric monoidal category, Brauer Groups, Evanston 1975, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 549, Springer, Berlin (1976), 112-133. S. Parimala and R. Sridharan, Projective modules over polynomial rings over division rings, J. Math. Kyoto Univ. 15 (1975), 129-148. J.W. Pendergrass, The 2-part ofthe Schur group, J. Algebra 41 (1976), 422-438. J.W. Pendergrass, Calculations of the Schur group, Pacific J. Math. 69 (1977), 169-175. J.W. Pendergrass, The Schur subgroup of the Brauer group, Pacific J. Math. 69 (1977), 477-499. S. Perlis, Cyclicity ofdivision algebras ofprime degree, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 21 (1969), 409-411. D.J. Picco and M.I. Platzeck, Graded algebras and Galois extensions, Bol. Un. Math. Argentina 25 (1971), 401-415. G. Pickert, Eine Normalform fiir Endliche rein-inseparabele K6rpererweiterungen, Math. Z. 53 (1950), 133-135. R.S. Pierce, Associative Algebras, Graduate Texts in Mathematics, Vol. 88, Springer, New York (1982). W. Plesken and M. Pohlst, On maximal finite subgroups of GIn(Z), 1. The five and seven dimensional cases, 2. The six dimensional case, Math. Comp. 31 (1977), 138, 537-573. E.C. Posner, Prime rings satisfying a polynomial identity, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 11 (1960), 180-183. C. Procesi, On the identities of Azumaya algebras, Ring Theory, R. Gordon, ed., Academic Press, New York (1972), 287-295. C. Procesi, On a theorem ofM. Artin, J. Algebra 22 (1972), 309-315. C. Procesi, Rings with Polynomial Identities, Marcel Dekker, New York (1973). C. Procesi, Finite dimensional representations of algebras, Israel J. Math. 19 (1974), 109-182.

Separable algebras

499

[443] H.G. Quebbeman, Schiefk6rper als Endomorphismenringe einfache Modulen einer Weyl-Algebra, J. Algebra 59 (1979), 311-312. [4441 M.L. Racine, On maximal subalgebras, J. Algebra 30 (1974), 155-180. [4451 M.L. Racine, A simple proofofa theorem ofAlbert, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 43 (1974), 487-488. [4461 M.L. Racine, Maximal Subalgebras of Central Separable Algebras, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 68 (1978), 11-15. [4471 M. Ramras, Maximal orders over regular local rings of dimension two, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 142 (1969), 457-479. [448] M. Ramras, Maximal orders over regular local rings, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 155 (1971), 345-352. [4491 M. Ramras, Splitting fields and separability, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 38 (1973), 489--492. [4501 M. Ramras, The center of an order with finite global dimension, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 210 (1975), 249-257. [451] M.L. Ranga Rao, Azumaya, semisimple and ideal algebras, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 78 (1972), 588-592. [452] M.L. Ranga Rao, Semisimple algebras and a cancellation law, Comment. Math. Helv. 50 (1975), 123-128. [453] R. Rasala, Inseparable splitting theory, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 162 (1971), 411-448. [454] M. Raynaud, Anneaux Locaux Hens~liens, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 169, Springer, Berlin (1971). [455] M.B. Rege, A note on Azumaya algebras, J. Indian Math. (N.S.) 37 (1973), 217-225. [456] I. Reiner, Maximal Orders, LMS Monographs, Academic Press, New York (1975). [457] G. Renault, Algkbre Non Commutative, Gauthier-Villars, Paris (1975). [458] C. Riehm, Linear and quadratic Schur groups, Preprint (1988). [459] C. Riehm, The linear and quadratic Schur subgroups over the S-integers of a number field, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 107 (1) (1989), 83-87. [460] C. Pdehm, The Schur subgroup of the Brauer group of cyclotomic rings of integers, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 103 (1) (1989), 83-87. [461] D. Rim, An exact sequence in Galois cohomology, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 16 (1965), 837-840. [462] L.J. Risman, Stability: Index and order in the Brauer group, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 50 (1975), 33-39. [463] L.J. Risman, Zero divisors in tensorproducts of division algebras, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 51 (1975), 33-36. [4641 L.J. Risman, Cyclic algebras, complete fields and crossed products, Israel J. Math. 28 (1977), 113-128. [4651 L.J. Risman, Group rings and series, Ring Theory, Proceedings of the Antwerp Conference 1977, Marcel Dekker, New York (1977), 113-128. [466] L.J. Risman, Non-cyclic division algebras, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 11 (1977/1978), 199-215. [467] L.J. Risman, Twisted rational functions and series, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 12 (1978), 181-199. [468] P. Roquette, On the Galois cohomology of the projective linear group and its applications to the construction of generic splitting fields of algebras, Math. Ann. 150 (1962), 411-439. [469] P. Roquette, Isomorphisms of generic splitting fields of simple algebras, J. Reine Angew. Math. 214/215 (1964), 207-226. [470] P. Roquette, Splitting of algebras by function fields in one variable, Nagoya Math. J. 27 (1966), 625-642. [471] A. Rosenberg and D. Zelinski, On Amitsur's complex, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 97 (1960), 327-356. [472] A. Rosenberg and D. Zelinski, Automorphisms of separable algebras, Pacific J. Math. 11 (1961), 11071117. [473] A. Rosenberg and D. Zelinski, Amitsur's complex for inseparable fields, Osaka Math. 14 (1962), 219-240. [474] S. Rosset, Locally inner automorphisms of algebras, J. Algebra 29 (1974), 88-97. [475] S. Rosset, Generic matrices, K2 and unirationalfields, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 81 (1975), 707-708. [476] S. Rosset, A remark on the generation of the Brauer group. [477] S. Rosset, Abelian splitting of division algebras ofprime degrees, Comment. Math. Helv. 52 (1977), 519523. [4781 S. Rosset, Group extensions and division algebras, J. Algebra 53 (1978), 297-303. [4791 S. Rosset, The corestriction preserves symbols. [4801 L.H. Rowen, Identities in algebras with involution, Israel J. Math. (1975), 70-95. [481] L.H. Rowen, Central simple algebras with involution, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 83 (1977), 1031-1032. [482] L.H. Rowen, Central simple algebras, Israel J. Math. 29 (1978), 285-301. [483] L.H. Rowen, Division algebras, counterexample of degree 8, Israel J. Math., to appear.

500 [4841 [4851 [486] [4871 [488] [4891 [4901 [491] [4921 [4931 [494] [495] [496] [497] [498] [499] [500] [501] [502] [503] [504] [505] [506] [507] [508] [509] [510] [511] [512] [513] [514] [515] [516] [517] [518] [519] [520] [521] [522] [523] [524] [525]

E Van Oystaeyen L.H. Rowen, Cyclic division algebras. L.H. Rowen and D.J. Saltman, Dihedral algebras are cyclic, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. A. Roy and B. Sridharan, Derivations in Azumaya algebras, J. Math. Kyoto Univ. 7 (1967), 161-167. A. Roy and B. Sridharan, Higher derivations and central simple algebras, Nagoya Math. J. 32 (1968), 21-30. S. Ry~kov, Maximal finite groups of integral n x n matrices and full groups of integral automorphism of positive definite quadratic forms (Bravais models), Proc. Steklov. Inst. Math. 128 (1972), 217-250. D.J. Saltman, Azumaya algebras over rings of characteristics, PhD thesis, Yale University (1967). D.J. Saltman, Splitting of cyclic P-algebras, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 62 (1977), 223-228. D.J. Saltman, Azumaya algebras with involution, J. Algebra 52 (1978), 526-539. D.J. Saltman, Noncrossed product p-algebras and Galois p-extensions, J. Algebra 52 (1978), 302-314. D.J. Saltman, Noncrossed products of small exponent, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 68 (1978), 165-168. D.J. Saltman, Indecomposable division algebras, Comm. Algebra 7 (1979), 791-818. D.J. Saltman, On p-power central polynomial, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 78 (1980), 11-13. D.J. Saltman, Division algebras over discrete valued fields, Comm. Algebra 8 (1980), 1749-1774. D.J. Saltman, Norm polynomials and algebras, J. Algebra 62 (1980), 333-348. P. Samuel, Th~orie Alg~brique des Normes, Hermann, Paris (1967). P. Samuel, Algebraic Theory of Numbers, Kershaw Publishing Company Ltd, London (1970). D. Sanders, The dominion and separable subalgebra of finitely generated algebras, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 48 (1975), 1-7. N. Sankaran, Galois extensions of rings and generalized group extensions, J. Math. Sci. 8 (1974), 10-16. M. Schacher, Subfields of division rings, L J. Algebra 9 (1968), 451-477. M. Schacher, Subfields of division rings, II, J. Algebra 10 (1968), 240-245. M. Schacher, More on the Schur subgroup, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 31 (1972), 15-17. M. Schacher, The crossed product problem, Ring Theory II, Lecture Notes in Pure and Appl. Math., Vol. 26, Marcel Dekker, New York (1977), 237-245. M. Schacher, Non-uniqueness in crossed products, Representation Theory of Algebras, Lecture Notes in Pure and Appl. Math., Vol. 37, New York (1978), 447--449. M. Schacher, Cyclotomic splitting fields. M. Schacher and L.W. Small, Noncrossed products in characteristic p, J. Algebra 24 (1973), 100-103. W. Scharlau, [_)berdie Brauer-Gruppe einer algebraischen FunktionenkOrper in einer Variablen, J. Reine Angew. Math. 239/240 (1969), 1-6. W. Scharlau, Ober die Brauer Gruppe eines Hensel-KOrpers, Abh. Math. Sem. Univ. Hamburg 33 (1969), 243-249. W. Scharlau, Zur Existenz yon Involutionen aufeinfachen Algebren, Math. Z. 145 (1975), 29-32. W. Scharlau, Involutions on simple algebras and orders, Canad. Math. Soc. Proc. 4 (1984), 141-147. W. Schelter, Azumaya algebras and Artin's theorem, J. Algebra 46 (1977), 303-304. O.EG. Schelling, Arithmetic in a special class of algebras, Ann. of Math. 38 (1937), 116-119. O.EG. Schelling, The theory of valuations, Amer. Math. Surveys 4 (1950). I. Schur, Untersuchungen iiber die Darstellung der endlichen Gruppen durch gebrochene lineare Substitutionen, Gesammelte Abhandlungen, B. 1, Springer, Berlin (1973), 198-250. R. Schw/iling, Separable Algebra fiber Kommutativen Ringen, J. Reine Angew. Math. 262/263 (1973), 307-322. G. Seligman, Modular Lie Algebras, Ergebnisse der Mathematik, B. 40, Springer, Berlin (1967). J.-P. Serre, Applications alg~briques de la Cohomologie des groupes, Th~orie des algbbres simples, S6m. H. Cartan, Paris, expos6s 5-7 (1950/51). J.-P. Serre, Groupes Alg~briques et Corps de Classes, Hermann, Paris (1959). J.-P. Serre, Cohomologie Galoisienne, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 5, Springer, Berlin (1964). J.-P. Serre, Algbbre Locale: Multiplicit~s, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 11, Springer, Berlin (1965). J.-P. Serre, Algbbres de Lie S~mi-Simple Complexes, W.A. Benjamin Inc. (1966). J.-P. Serre, Local class field theory, Algebraic Number Theory, J.W.S. Cassels and A. Fr61ich, eds, Academic Press, New York (1967). J.-P. Serre, Corps Locaux, Hermann, Paris (1968).

Separable algebras

501

[526] J.-E Serre, Cours d'Arithm~tique, EU.E Le Math6maticien, Vol. 2 (1970). [527] J.-E Serre, Representations Lin~aires des Groupes Finis, Hermann, Paris, Collections M6thodes (1971). [528] D. Shapiro, J.-P. Tignol and A.R. Wadsworth, Witt rings and Brauer groups under multi-quadratic extensions, II, Preprint. [529] S. Shatz, Cohomology of Artinian group schemes over localfields, Ann. of Math. 79 (1964), 411--449. [530] S. Shatz, Galois theory, Category Theory, Homology Theory and their Applications I, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 86, Springer, Berlin (1969). [531] S. Shatz, Principal homogeneous spaces for finite group schemes, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 22 (1969), 678-680. [5321 S. Shatz, Profinite Groups, Arithmetic and Geometry, Princeton Studies 67 (1972). [533] L. Silver, Tame orders, Tame ramification and Galois cohomology, Illinois J. Math. 12 (1968), 7-34. [534] C. Small, The Brauer-Wall group of a commutative ring, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 156 (1971), 455-491. [5351 C. Small, The group of quadratic extensions, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 2 (1972), 83-105. [536] R. Snider, Is the Brauer group generated by cyclic algebras ?, Ring Theory, Waterloo, 1978, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 734, Springer, Berlin (1979), 279-301. [537] J. Sonn, Class groups and Brauer groups, Israel J. Math. 34 (1979), 97-106. [5381 Steinhausen, Gerade, positiv definite, unimoduliire Gitter. [539] H.J. Stolberg, Azumaya Algebras and Derivations. [540] R. Strano, Azumaya algebras overe Hensel rings, Pacific J. Math. (1975), 295-303. [541] K. Sugano, Note on semisimple extensions and separable extensions, Osaka J. Math. 4 (1967), 265-270. [5421 K. Sugano, Separable extensions and Frobenius extensions, Osaka J. Math. 7 (1970), 291-299. [543] K. Sugano, Note on separability ofendomorphism rings, J. Fac. Sci. Hokkaido Univ. 21 (1971), 126--208. [544] K. Sugano, On automorphisms in separable extensions of rings, Proc. of the 13th Symposium on Ring Theory, Okayama (1980), 44-55. [545] D. Suprenko and R. Tyshkevich, Commutative Matrices, Academic Press, New York (1968). [546] R. Swan, Projective modules over group rings and maximal orders, Ann. of Math. 76 (1) (1962), 55-61. [547] M. Sweedler, Structure of inseparable extensions, Ann. of Math. 87 (1968), 401 4 10. [548] M. Sweedler, Correction to: "Structure of inseparable extensions", Ann. of Math. 89 (1969), 206-207. [549] M. Sweedler, Multiplication alteration by 2-cocycles, Illinois J. Math. 15 (1971), 302-323. [550] M. Sweedler, Groups ofsimple algebras, Publ. Math. IHES 44 (1974), 79-190. [5511 M. Sweedler, Amitsur cohomology and the Brauer group, Intl. Congress of Math. (1974). [5521 M. Sweedler, Purely inseparable algebras, J. Algebra 35 (1975), 342-355. [5531 M. Sweedler, Something like the Brauer group, Proc. Intl. Congress of Math. Vancouver 1974, Vol. 1, Canad. Math. Congress, Montreal, Que. (1975), 337-341. [554] M. Sweedler, Complete separability, J. Algebra 61 (1979), 199-248. [555] G. Szeto, On a class of projective modules over central separable algebras, Canad. Math. Bull. 14 (1971), 415-417. [556] G. Szeto, On a class of projective modules over central separable algebras, Canad. Math. Bull. 15 (1972), 411-415. [557] G. Szeto, The Azumaya algebra of some polynomial closed rings, Indiana Univ. Math. J. 22 (1973), 731737. [5581 G. Szeto, On the Wedderburn theorem, Canad. J. Math. 25 (1973), 525-530. [5591 G. Szeto, A characterization of Azumaya algebras, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 9 (1976/77), 65-71. [560] G. Szeto, The Pierce representation of Azumaya algebras, Brauer Groups, Evanston 1975, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 549, Springer, Berlin (1976). [561] G. Szeto, A generalization of the Artin-procesi theorem, J. London Math. Soc. 15 (1977), 406-408. [562] M. Takeushi, On Long's H-Azumaya-algebra, Proc. 10th Symp. on Ring Theory, Dept. Math. Okayama Univ., Okayama (1978), 46-61. [563] S. Tanaka, Construction and classification of irreducible representations of special linear group of the second order over a finite field, Osaka J. Math. 4 (1967), 65-84. [564] A. Tannenbaum, The Brauer group and unirationality: An example of Artin-Mumford, Groupe de Brauer, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 844, Springer, Berlin (1981), 103-128. [5651 J. Tate, Global class fields theory, Algebraic Number Theory, J. Cassels and A. Fr6hlich, eds, Thompson Book Co. (1976).

502

F. Van Oystaeyen

[566] J. Tate, On the conjectures of Birch and Swinnerton-Dyer and a geometric analog, Dix expos6s sur la Cohomologie des sch6mas, S6m. Bourbaki 1965-66, expos6 306, North-Holland, Amsterdam (1968), 189214. [567] J. Tate, Relations between K 2 and Galois cohomology, Invent. Math. 36 (1976), 257-274. [568] O. TeichmUller, p-Algebren, Deutsche Math. 1 (1936), 362-388. [569] O. Teichmtiller, Verschriinkte Produkte mit Normalringen, Deutsche Math. 1 (1936), 92-102. [570] O. Teichmiiller, (lber die sogenannte nicht kommutative Galoissche Theorie und die Relationen, Deutsche Math. 5 (1940), 138-149. [571] J.G. Thompson, Finite groups and even lattices, J. Algebra 38 (1976), 523-524. [572] J.P. Tignol, Sur les corps gl involution de degr~ 8, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, S6r. A 284 (1977), 1349-1352. [573] J.P. Tignol, On p-torsion in ~tale cohomology, Notices Amer. Math. Soc. 24 A-6, Abstract 77 T-A 24 (1977). [574] J.P. Tignol, D~composition et descente de produits tensoriels d'algkbres de quaternions, Rapport S6m. Math. Pure UCL 76 (1978). [575] J.E Tignol, Sur les classes de similitude de corps gt involution de degr~ 8, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, S6r. A 286 (1978), 875-876. [576] J.P. Tignol, Reflexive modules, J. Algebra 54 (1978), 444-466. [577] J.P. Tignol, Central simple algebras with involution, Ring Theory, Proc. of the 1978 Antwerp Conference, Lecture Notes in Pure and Appl. Math., Marcel Dekker, New York (1979), 279-288. [578] J.P. Tignol, Corps g~involution de rang fini sur leur centre et de caract~ristique diffgrente de 2, PhD thesis, UCL Louvain-la-Neuve (1979). [579] J.P. Tignol, On p-torsion in etale cohomology and in the Brauer group, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 78 (1980), 189-192. [580] J.E Tignol, Corps g~ involution neutralists par une extension Abelienne el~mentaire, Groupe de Brauer, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 844, Springer, Berlin (1981), 1-34. [581 ] J.E Tignol, Produits Crois~s Ab~liens. [582] E Tilborghs, The Brauer group of R-algebras wich have compatible G-action and Z • G-grading, Preprint. [583] E Tilborghs and E Van Oystaeyen, Brauer-Wall algebras graded by Z 2 • Z, Comm. Algebra, to appear. [584] D. Trappers, Quadratic forms over graded arithmetical rings, PhD thesis, UIA (1990). [585] R. Treger, Reflexive modules, PhD thesis, University of Chicago (1976). [586] C. Tsen, Division Algebren iiber FunktionenkOrpern, Nachz. Ges. Wiss. G6ttingen I148 (1933), 335-339. [587] M. Van den Bergh, A note on graded Brauer groups, Bull. Soc. Math. Belg. 39 (1987), 177-179. [588] M. Van den Bergh, A note on graded K-theory, Comm. Algebra 14 (1986), 1561-1564. [589] J.-E Van Deuren, J. Van Geel and E Van Oystaeyen, Genus and a Riemann-Roch theorem for noncommutative function felds in one variable, S6m. Dubreil (1980). [590] J. Van Deuren and E Van Oystaeyen, Arithmetically graded rings, Ring Theory, Antwerp, 1980, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 825, Springer, Berlin (1981). [591] J. Van Geel, Primes in algebras and the arithmetic in central simple algebras, Comm. Algebra 8 (1980), 1015-1951. [592] J. Van Geel, Primes and value functions, PhD thesis, University of Antwerp, UIA (1980). [593] J. Van Geel and E Van Oystaeyen, About graded fields, Indag. Math. 43 (1981), 273-286. [594] E Van Oystaeyen, Pseudoplaces of algebras and the symmetric part of the Brauer group, PhD thesis, Univ. of Amsterdam (1972). [595] E Van Oystaeyen, Generic division algebras, Bull. Soc. Math. Belg. 25 (1973), 259-285. [596] E Van Oystaeyen, On pseudo-places of algebras, Bull. Soc. Math. Belg. 25 (1973), 139-159. [597] E Van Oystaeyen, The p-component of the Brauer group of a field of char. p, Nederl. Akad. Wet. Proc. Ser. A. 77 (1974), 67-76. [598] E Van Oystaeyen, Prime Spectra in Non-Commutative Algebra, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 444, Springer, Berlin (1975). [599] E Van Oystaeyen, Graded Azumaya algebras and Brauer groups, Ring Theory, Antwerp 1980, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 825, Springer, Berlin (1981), 158-171. [600] E Van Oystaeyen, On Brauer groups of arithmetically graded rings, Comm. Algebra 9 (1981), 1873-1892. [601] E Van Oystaeyen, Crossed products over arithmetically graded rings, J. Algebra 80 (1983), 537-551.

Separable algebras [602] [603] [604] [605] [606] [607] [608] [609] [610] [611] [612] [613] [614] [615] [616] [617] [6181 [619] [620] [621] [622] [623] [624] [625] [626] [627] [628] [629] [630] [631] [632] [633] [634] [635] [636] [637] [638]

503

E Van Oystaeyen, Some constructions of rings, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 31 (1984), 241-252. E Van Oystaeyen, Generalized Rees rings and arithmetically graded rings, J. Algebra 82 (1983), 185-193. E Van Oystaeyen, On Clifford systems and generalized crossed products, J. Algebra 87 (1984), 396--415. E Van Oystaeyen, Azumaya strongly graded rings and Ray classes, J. Algebra 103 (1986), 228-240. E Van Oystaeyen and A. Verschoren, The Brauer group of a projective variety. E Van Oystaeyen and A. Verschoren, On the Brauer group of a projective variety, Israel J. Math. 42 (1982), 37-59. E Van Oystaeyen and A. Verschoren, On the Brauer group of a projective curve, Israel J. Math. 42 (1982), 327-333. F. Van Oystaeyen and A. Verschoren, Relative Invariants of Rings, Part I and II, Marcel Dekker, New York (1983) and (1984). Van Rooij, Non-Archimedean Functional Analysis, Marcel Dekker, New York (1978). B. van der Waerden, Moderne Algebra, Springer, Berlin (1960). A. Verschoren, Separable couples, Azumaya couples and sheaves, Bull. Soc. Math. Belg. 32 (1980), 2947. A. Verschoren, Mayer-Vietoris sequences for Brauer groups of projective varieties. A. Verschoren, Mayer-Vietoris sequences for Brauer groups of graded rings, Comm. Algebra 10 (1982), 765-782. A. Verschoren, The cohomologcal Brauer group of a projective variety. M.E Vigneras, Arithm~tique des Alg~bres de Quaternions, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 800, Springer, Berlin (1980). O.E. Villamayor and D. Zelinski, Galois theory for rings with finitely many idempotents, Nagoya Math. J. 27 (1966), 721-731. O.E. Villamayor and D. Zelinski, Galois theory with infinitely many idempotents, Nagoya Math. J. 35 (1969), 83-98. O.E. Villamayor and D. Zelinski, Brauer groups and Amitsur cohomology for general commutative ring extensions, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 10 (1977), 19-55. C.T.C. Wall, Graded Brauer groups, J. Reine Angew. Math. 213 (1964), 187-199. C.T.C. Wall, Graded algebras, anti-evolutions, simple groups and symmetric spaces, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 74 (1968), 198-202. S.S.S. Wang, Splitting ring ofa monic separable polynomial, Pacific J. Math. 75 (1978), 293-296. L. Washington, Introduction to Cyclotomic Fields, Graduate Texts in Mathematics, Vol. 83, Springer, New York (1980). Y. Watanabe, Simple algebras over a complete local ring, Osaka J. Math. 3 (1966), 73-74. Y. Watanabe, On relatively separable subalgebras, Osaka J. Math. 14 (1977), 165-172. W.C. Waterhouse, A non-isiterion for central simple algebras, III, J. Math. 17 (1973), 73-74. C.A. Weibel, Homotopy in Algebraic K-Theory, University of Chicago (1977). C.A. Weibel, K-theory of Azumaya algebras, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 81 (1981), 1-7. M. Weisfeld, Purely inseparable extensions and higher derivations, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 116 (1965), 435-449. S. Williamson, Crossed products and hereditary orders, Nagoya Math. J. 23 (1963), 103-120. S. Williamson, Crossed products and maximal orders, Nagoya Math. J. 25 (1965), 165-174. R. Wisbauer, Separable Modulen von Algebren iiber Ringen, J. Reine. Angew. Math. 303-304 (1978), 221-230. R. Wisbauer, Zentrale Bimodulen and separabele Algebren, Arch. Math. 30 (1978), 129-137. E. Witt, Zerlegung reellen algebraischer Funktionen in Quadrata, SchiefkO'rper iiber reellen Funktionen Krrper, J. Reine Angew. Math. 171 (1934), 4-11. E. Witt, Uber ein Gegenbeispiel zum Normensatz, Math. Z. 39 (1935), 462-467. E. Witt, Schiefkrrper iiber diskret bewerteten Kiirper, J. Reine Angew. Math. 176 (1936), 153-156. E. Witt, Zyklische Ko'rper und Algebren der Charakteristik p vom Grade pn, j. Reine Angew. Math. 176 (1936), 126-140. E. Witt, Die algebraische Struktur des Gruppen Ringen einer endlichen Gruppe iiber einen Zahlko'rper, J. Reine Angew. Math. 190 (1952), 231-245.

504

E Van Oystaeyen

[639] P. Wolf, Algebraische Theorie der Galoisschen Algebren, Math. Forschungsberichte 3, Deutsche Verlag der Wissenschaften, Berlin (1956). [640] T. Wilrfel, Un critkre de liberty pour les pro-p-groupes et la structure du groupe de Brauer, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris, S6r. A. 288 (1979), 793-795. [641] T. Wtirfel, Ein Freiheitskriterium fiir pro-p-Gruppen mit Anwendung auf die Strukture der Brauer-Gruppe, Math. Z. 172 (1980), 81-88. [6421 T. Wtirfel, Ober die Brauer-Gruppe der Maximalen p-Erweiterung eines K6rpers ohne p-te Einheitswurzeln. [6431 T. Wtirfel, On the divisible part the Brauer group of afield. [6441 T. Yamada, On the group algebras of metacyclic groups over algebraic number fields, L J. Fac. Sci. Univ. Tokyo 15 (1968), 179-199. [645] T. Yamada, On the group algebras of metacyclic groups over algebraic number fields, II, J. Fac. Sci. Univ. Tokyo, Sect. 1 16 (1969), 83-90. [646] T. Yamada, On the group algebras of metabelian groups over algebraic number fields L Osaka J. Math. 6 (1969), 211-228. [647] T. Yamada, On the Schur index of a monomial representations, Proc. Japan. Acad. 45 (1969), 522-525. [648] T. Yamada, Characterization of the simple components of the group algebras over the p-adic number field, J. Math. Soc. Japan 23 (1971), 295-310. [649] T. Yamada, Central simple algebras over totally real fields which appear in Q[G], J. Algebra 23 (1972), 382-403. [650] T. Yamada, Cyclotomic algebras over a 2-adic field, Proc. Japan Acad. (1973), 438--442. [651] T. Yamada, Simple components of group algebras Q[G] central over real quadratic fields, J. Number Theory 5 (1973), 179-190. [652] T. Yamada, The Schur subgroup of the Brauer group/, J. Algebra 27 (1973), 579-589. [653] T. Yamada, The Schur subgroup of the Brauer group II, J. Algebra 27 (1973), 590-603. [654] T. Yamada, The Schur subgroup of the Brauer group, Proc. Conf. on Orders Group Rings and Rel. Top., Ohio State 1972, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 353, Springer, Berlin (1973), 187-203. [655] T. Yamada, The Schur subgroup of the Brauer group, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 397, Springer, Berlin (1974). [656] T. Yamada, On Schur subgroups, Sugaku 26 (1974), 109-120. (Japanese). [657] T. Yamada, The Schur subgroup of 2-adic fields, J. Math. Soc. Japan 26 (1974), 168-179. [658] T. Yamada, The Schur subgroup of Real Quadratic Field I, Symp. Math., Vol. XV, Academic Press, London (1975), 413-425. [659] T. Yamada, The Schur subgroup of real quadratic field II, J. Algebra 35 (1975), 190-204. [660] T. Yamada, The Schur subgroup of a p-adic field. [661] K. Yamazaki, On projective representations and ring extensions of finite groups, J. Fac. Sci. Univ. Tokyo, Sect. I 10 (1964), 147-195. [662] K. Yokogawa, Brauer group of algebraic function fields and their Adble rings, Osaka J. Math. 8 (1971), 271-280. [663] K. Yokogawa, On S | S-module structure of S/R-Azumaya algebras, Osaka J. Math. 12 (1975), 673690. [664] K. Yokogawa, An application of the theory of descent to the S @R S-module structure of S~ R-Azumaya algebras, Osaka J. Math. 15 (1978), 21-31. [665] K. Yokogawa, S - S-bimodule structure of S~ R-Azumaya algebra and 7-term exact sequence, Proc. of the 10th Symposium on Ring Theory, Dept. Math. Okayama Univ., Okayama (1978), 38-45. [666] S. Yuan, Differentially simple rings ofprime characteristic, Duke Math. J. 31 (1964), 623-630. [667] S. Yuan, The Brauer groups oflocalfields, Ann. of Math. 82 (1965), 434--444. [668] S. Yuan, On the p-algebras and the Amitsur groups for inseparable field extensions, J. Algebra 5 (1967), 280-304. [669] S. Yuan, Inseparable Galois-theory of exponent one, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 149 (1970), 163-170. [670] S. Yuan, Central separable algebras with purely inseparable splitting fields of exponent one, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 153 (1971), 427-450. [671] S. Yuan, p-algebras arbitrary exponents, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. USA 70 (1973), 533-534. [672] S. Yuan, Brauer-groupsfor inseparable fields, Ann. of Math. 96 (1974), 430-447.

Separable algebras

505

[673] S. Yuan, Reflexive modules and algebra class groups over Noetherian integrally closed domains, J. Algebra 32 (1974), 405-417. [674] D. Zelinski, Berkson's theorem, Israel J. Math. 2 (1964), 205-209. [675] D. Zelinski, Long exact sequence and the Brauer group, Brauer Groups, Evanston 1975, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 549, Springer, Berlin (1976), 63-70. [676] D. Zelinski, Brauer groups, Ring Theory II, Lecture Notes in Pure and Appl. Math., Vol. 26, Marcel Dekker, New York (1977), 69-101. [677] E.M. Zmud, Symplectic geometries offinite Abelian groups, Mat. Sbornik 68 (1), 128. English transl.: Math. USSR Sb., Amer. Math. Soc. (1971).


Section 3D

Deformation Theory of Rings and Algebras


Varieties of Lie Algebra Laws

Yu. Khakimdj anov Facultd des Sciences et Techniques, Universitd de Haute Alsace, 4, rue des Frkres Lumikre, 68093 Mulhouse cedex, France

Contents 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Varieties of laws of Lie algebras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1. Generalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2. Tangent space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3. Formal deformations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4. Deformations in the variety s ..................................... 2.5. Local study of the variety s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6. Contractions of Lie algebra laws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. The components of/~n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1. Rigid Lie algebras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2. The irreducible components of/~n and 7~n in the low-dimensional case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Subvarieties of nilpotent and solvable Lie algebra laws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1. The variety ~ n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2. The tangent space to .A/'ff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.3. Local study of the variety .N "n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Local study of .Afn for the filiform points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1. Some examples of filiform Lie algebras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2. Deformations of the filiform Lie algebra Ln . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3. On the irreducible components of A/n+ 1 meeting .T"n+ 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4. On the reducibility of the variety .A/n+ 1, n ~> 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.5. Description of an irreducible component of.A/"n+l containing the Lie algebra Rn . . . . . . . . . . 5.6. Description of an irreducible component o f . N "n+ 1 containing the Lie algebra Wn . . . . . . . . . 6. A bound on the number of irreducible components of Af n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. Characteristically nilpotent Lie algebras in the variety .A/"n . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. The irreducible components of A/"n in the low-dimensional case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H A N D B O O K OF ALGEBRA, VOL. 2 Edited by M. Hazewinkel 9 2000 Elsevier Science B.V. All rights reserved 509

511 511 511 513 513 515 515 516 517 517 518 522 522 523 524 525 525 526 528 529 531 534 535 537 538 540


Varieties of Lie algebra laws

511

1. Introduction The aim of this chapter is to put together all the results which were obtained recently in the study of Lie algebras from a geometrical point of view. Any Lie algebra law is considered as a point of an affine algebraic variety defined by the polynomial equations coming from the Jacobi identity for a given basis. This approach gives an explanation of the difficulties in classification problems concerning the classes of nilpotent and solvable Lie algebras and the relative facility of the classification of semisimple Lie algebras. Isomorphic Lie algebras correspond to the laws belonging to the same orbit relative to the action of the general linear group and classification problems (up to isomorphism) can be reduced to the classification of these orbits. An affine algebraic variety is a union of a finite number of irreducible components and the Zariski open orbits give interesting classes of Lie algebras to be classified. The Lie algebras of this class are called rigid. Any semisimple Lie algebra is rigid. There is also a sufficiently large class of solvable rigid Lie algebras. Now we do not have a complete description of rigid Lie algebras, but we have some results about their properties; and a description of some classes of such rigid ones. We also have lowdimensional results. The rigidity property can be considered as well in the varieties of nilpotent and solvable Lie algebra laws. Generally, rigidity in the variety of solvable Lie algebra laws is the same as rigidity in the variety of all Lie algebra laws. In the case of the variety of nilpotent Lie algebra laws the situation is very different. We do not know about the existence or not of rigid laws (excepting the low-dimensional case). In this paper we give a comprehensive account of the variety of nilpotent Lie algebra laws as recently elaborated. This study shows the reason of the difficulties in the classification problems and precises the place and role of different classes of such Lie algebras. We focus particularly on two classes of nilpotent Lie algebras, which are more or less models of nilpotent Lie algebras: those are filiform algebras (the least commutative ones) and the characteristically nilpotent Lie algebras (all derivations are nilpotent). The study of varieties of Lie algebra laws is essentially based on the cohomological study of Lie algebras and on deformation theory. We hope that this important and beautiful direction of research will continue to develop.

2. Varieties of laws of Lie algebras 2.1. Generalities Let V be a n-dimensional vector space over a field K and let B2(V) be the space of all bilinear applications V • V --> V. A Lie algebra law on V is an element/z of B Z(v) verifying the following relations /z(x, y) + / z ( y , x) = O,

z) +

+

y) - o

Yu. Khakimdjanov

512

for all elements x, y, z in V. In a given basis of V a Lie algebra law/z is defined by a set of structure constants {c~ } in the s p a c e K n3 verifying the following polynomial conditions

ckj + C~i --0, n Z CijCkm k 1 "]- Cjm k cli_.]., Cmi k r

(1)

k=l

One identifies the law lz with the set of its structure constants {ckij}. The subset ,~n of the Lie algebra laws in the space K n3 is defined by the system of polynomial equations (1); so /~n is a affine algebraic variety. The nilpotent Lie algebra laws of nilpotency class ~
. p. The Zariski tangent space to the scheme .Afq at the point ~j coincides with the space of cocycles tp E Z 2 (~t, ~I) such that their cohomology classes are in Fq_p H 2 (g, g). In the particular case when ~t is a filiform Lie algebra (that is p = n - 1) we have the following theorem. THEOREM 21. Let g be an n-dimensional filiform Lie algebra. The tangent space to the scheme A~TM at the point ~ coincides with the space of cocycles q9 ~ Z 2 (~, ~) such that their cohomology classes are in FoH2(~I, g).

4.3. Local study of the variety A~"n We suppose that K -- C. The local study of the variety ./~/rn at the point corresponding to a nilradical of a Borel subalgebra of a simple Lie algebra g gives THEOREM 22. Let n be the nilradical of the Borel subalgebra of a simple Lie algebra g of rank r >/1. Let n = dim n and let p be the nilpotency class of n. Then the scheme JV'p is smooth at the point n. If g is of type A2, A3 or B2, the orbit G(n) is a Zariski open set in A/'p. The dimension of these orbits is equal respectively to 3, 25, 9. If g is of type A4, C3, B3, D4 or G2, the dimension of A/'p at the point n is equal to m q- n 2 - n - 2r + l, where m is respectively one o f the numbers 7, 4, 4, 6, 1. In the other cases the dimension of./kf~ at the point n is equal to n 2 - n - 2r 4- 1 4- 89 (r 2 q- r - 2). THEOREM 23. Let n be the nilradical of the Borel subalgebra of a simple Lie algebra ~j. Then the tangent space to the scheme ff_n at the point n coincides with the tangent space to the scheme/~red at the same point. REMARK 2. Let C be the irreducible component of the variety .Af~ containing n, where n = dim n ~> 8, p is the nilpotency class of n. Then C contains a Zariski open set whose elements are characteristically nilpotent Lie algebras. The study of derivations of Lie algebras obtained by deformations of n, gives the following corollaries. For the definition and some properties of characteristically nilpotent Lie algebras see the chapter "Nilpotent and solvable Lie algebras" in this Handbook (Volume 2). Other largest families of this class of Lie algebras can be found in the subvariety y n of filiform Lie algebra laws. COROLLARY 24. The variety .Afn with n ~ 8 possesses a locally closed subset of dimension >>.n 2 + n2/16 + n / 4 consisting of characteristically nilpotent Lie algebras. COROLLARY 25. The pairwise nonisomorphic characteristically nilpotent Lie algebras of the component C depend on at least n 2 / 16 - 3 n / 4 + 1 parameters. References f o r this section: [3,10,15,16,22,25,26,28-33,35-37,40,44,54,55].


525

5. Local study of Af n for the filiform points We suppose that K = C. The local study of the variety ./V"n for the filiform points is sufficiently well developed. This study allows to describe some irreducible components of N TM.

5.1. Some examples of filiform Lie algebras An n-dimensional Lie algebra is called filiform if its nilpotency class is maximal, that is equal to n - 1. The set y n of filiform Lie algebra laws is a Zariski open set in the variety.A/"n and the Zariski closure of any irreducible component of y n gives an irreducible component of A/TM. In this subsection we suppose that n >~ 3. The simplest (n + 1)-dimensional filiform Lie algebra is defined on the basis (X0, X1, . . . . Xn) by the brackets: [Xo, Xi] = Xi+I,

i -- 1 . . . . . n -

1.

We denote this Lie algebra by Ln ; the corresponding law we denote by/z0. Some other remarkable filiform Lie algebras are the following ones: The Lie algebra Qn (n -- 2k + 1):

[X0,

X i ] "- X i + l , [Xi , X n - i ] = ( -

1)i X n ,

i=1 ..... n-l, i = 1 . . . . . k.

In the basis (Z0, Z1 . . . . . Zn), where Zo = Xo + X1, Zi -- Xi, i = 1 . . . . . n; this Lie algebra is defined by [Zo, Zi ] = Z i + 1, [Zi, Zn-i] = ( - 1 ) i z n ,

i=1 ..... n--2, i - - 1 . . . . ,k.

The Lie algebra Rn :

[Xo, X i ] = Xi+l, [X1,Xj]=Xj+2,

i -- 1 . . . . . n - 1, j =2 ..... n--2.

The Lie algebra Wn: [X0, Xi] = Xi+l, i = 1 . . . . . n - 1, 6 ( i - 1 ) ! ( j - 1 ) ! ( j - i)

[Xi,Xj]---

(i + j)!

Xi+j+l,

l~3 where the functions 0r i (/Z) are rational and defined on U. We put Xl (/Z) = 0r (/z)X0 -- X l , Xi+l (/z) -- (ad/z (X0)) i XI (/z),

The elements X0, XI (/s gebra/x and the mapping

X2(#) .....

//, -"> (Xo, X1 (/.z) , / 2 (/z) . . . . .

is a rational mapping. We have t, o

=

(t,o +

i>/1.

Xn(lZ) determine an adapted basis for the Lie al-

Xn(I.z))


529

where qg(/z) 6 G and/3(/z) E M. The mapping/z --+/5(/z) is rational. Thus,/5(U A C1) is an irreducible set containing C. This implies

#(unC~)-C and U f3 C1 C G(/zo + C). Then C1 = G (/*0 + C). Conversely, if C1 is an irreducible component of Af n+l meeting the open set of filiform laws, then C1 contains/zo. The same arguments show that if C is an irreducible component containing fi(U N C1), then G (/zo + C) = C1. Finally, if C is an irreducible component of M, we have dim (G(/xo + C)) - dimG(/zo) + dimC = (n + 1) 2 - dimDerLn + dimC = n 2 + dimC. This gives the theorem.

5.4. On the reducibility of the variety .A/ n+ 1, n >~ 11 In this subsection we also suppose n ~> 11. Consider the following closed subsets of M" (1) M1 is the closed subset of M defined by the relations a2,6

=

a3,8

--.-.

---ae_~,

n "-0

if n is even, and by the relations a2,6

--

a3,8

=

9 9 9=

a n---U- 3 ,n - - 0

if n is odd. (2) M2 is the closed subset of M defined by the relations

am

2m+2 '

=

(6t 4

+

m m

am+l,2m+4,

m=

1,2 .....

2

-4]

'

530

Yu. Khakimdjanov

if n is even, and by the relations am,2m+2--(4+6)am+

m=l,2

1,2m+4,

.....

2

'

a n~__~3,n -- 0

if n is odd. (3) M3 is the closed subset of M defined by the relations al,4

=

a2,6

=

-."

=

a nz_4, n - 2 - 0 2

if n is even, and by the relations al,4

=

a2,6

=

9 9 9=

a n~3 , n - 1 - - 0

if n is odd. (4) M4 is the closed subset of M defined by the relations 1

al,4

=

a2,6

=

9 9 9=

ak-3,n-3

-- 0,

ak-l,n -- ~ (k - 1) (k - 2)ak-2,n-2

if n -----2k ~> 14, and by the relations al ' 4 = a 2 ' 6 . . . .

= a n T- 5' n - 2

=0,

av_~ ,n = 0

if n is odd. The existence of the remarkable filiform Lie algebras of Section 5.1 shows, that the closed subsets Ml, M2, M3, M4 of M are nontrivial subsets, strictly contained in M. THEOREM 3 3. M = Ml tO Me tO/143 tO M4. PROOF. Let ~p ~ M. The equalities

(r o T~)(x~, xz, x3) =o, ( ~ o ~ ) ( x 2 , x3, x4)--o,

(1/r o 1 / t ) ( X I ,

X3,

X4)

=

0,

give the following polynomial relations --3a2,6 + a2,6a3,8 + 2al,4a3,8 = 0, 6a~, 8 - 4a2,6a3,8 - a3,8a4,10 + 2al,4a4, io - a2,6a4,10 -- O, -4a~, 8 + 3a3,sa4, lo + 3a2,6a4, lo = O. The solution of this system is the union of three straight-lines in the 4-dimensional space parametrized by (al,4, a2,6, a3,8, a4,10) whose parametrizations are (t, 0, 0, 0), (0, 0, 0, t) a n d ( t , ~o , ~o , 4~.0 t ).


531

By successively using the relations (l,/r o 1/f)(Xl, X4, X 5 ) -- O,

(~o~)(Xl,X5,

X6)--O,

oo.

(1/f o l / f ) ( X l , Xk, X k + l ) -- O,

where k - [~-~ ], and using an induction, we find the assertions: (a) If n -- 2k is even, the vector (al,4, a2,6 . . . . . ak-l,n) is equal to one of the following vectors: al,4(1, 0 . . . . . 0), a/~-l,n (0, 0 . . . . . 1), m

al,4(Otl, c~2 . . . . .

C~k-1), Oil : 1, Otm+l 4-N-g-~Otm, 2 ak-l,n(O, 0 . . . . . (k-1)(k-2) ' 1) (if n ~> 14)

l 11. We denote by U1 the Zariski open subset of M1, defined by the inequation al,4 7~ 0 (we use the previous notations). It is clear that Rn E U1. A cocycle !/J -- ~(q,r)EA,ak,r~k,r belonging to FoH2(Ln, Ln) is called nongenerated in layer qo, if aqo,s ~ 0 for some integer s. LEMMA 35. Let ! I~

Z aq,r~q,r E U1 (q,r)EA'

be a nongenerated cocycle in layer 2 and let so be the minimal value of the index s such that az,so 7~ O. Then

Yu. Khakimdjanov

532 (a) a3,1 -- 0, ifl < 2s0 -- 4;

(so-3)a2,so . (b) a 3 , 2 s o - 4 2al,4 ' (c) ak,2~+l+r = 0 , i f k > 3, 1 3 and r = 2so - 11. We consider the relation ( ~ o ~ ) ( X 1 , Xk-1, Xk) = 0. The assertion allows us to see that ak,2k+l+r = 0. [--I LEMMA 36. Let

y~

aq,r tltq,r ~- UI

(q,r)~A'

be a nongenerated cocycle in layers 2 and 3, and let so, to be the minimal values of the index s and t such that a2,so ~ 0, a3,to 5~ 0 (from the previous lemma, we have to = 2s0 - 4 ) . Then (a) a4,! = O, if l < 3so - 8; (2s~176176 if 3SO -- 8 ~< n. (b) a 4 . 3 s o - 8 -

4a24

The p r o o f of this l e m m a is a n a l o g o u s to the previous one. LEMMA 37. Let

Z aq,r~[tq,r E UI (q,r)EA' be a cocycle of U1. Then a2,s = 0, if s ~ 11. We denote by U2 the Zariski open set in M2 defined by al,4 :~ 0. LEMMA 44. Let be 2 M ( k , m), where M ( k , m) = 2k 3 + 7k 2 + i~ 13 l O k - !~m + N. Indeed, d i m O ( [ i n ) + dim~2 ~> M ( k , m ) . From the previous lemma, this number is a minimum for the number of nonorbital parameters of Co. LEMMA 53. Let g be a Lie algebra presented as a direct sum of its ideals: [i = il Gi2 Oi3. Let Xi ~ 0 Eii and suppose that X3 ~ Z 03), where Z (ii) is the center of ii . Then a bilinear alternated mapping go : [i • [i --+ [i satisfying go(X1, X2) = X3 does not belong to the space Z2 ([i, [i). In effect, consider Y3 e i3 such that/z(X3, Y) ~ 0, w h e r e / z is the law of [t. Then

~go(X1, X2, Y) ~: O. PROPOSITION 54. Let C be an irreducible component of A/"n containing [in. Then dimC ~< N(k, m),

where N(k, m) = 2k 3 + 36k 2 + 2m 2 + 14km - 3 1 k - 2m.

Indeed, for the filiform Lie algebra Ls the dimension of the space Z2(Ls, Ls) is ~ m. Then, for n sufficiently large, we have: N ( k - 7, m + 21) < M ( k , m). 11 If k varies between ~n and ~, we obtain a minoration of the number of (nonfiliform) components of A/"n. This bound is of the order ~ . Finally we have the following theorem.

THEOREM 5 5. For n sufficiently large, the number o f irreducible components o f the variety .]~n is at least o f order n. References for this section: [2,22].

7. Characteristically nilpotent Lie algebras in the variety Af n The definition, the first properties and some results about the characteristically nilpotent Lie algebras are given in the chapter "Nilpotent and solvable Lie algebras" of this Hand-

538

Yu. Khakimdjanov

book (Volume 2). Here we give a geometrical point of view of these results, by considering them as points of the variety A cn . THEOREM 56. Let n >~ 8. A n y irreducible component o f ~'n contains a nonempty Zariski open set, whose elements are characteristically nilpotent Lie algebra laws.

For some families of nonfiliform characteristically nilpotent Lie algebra laws see Section 4.3 "Local study of the variety ./~rn ,,. References f o r this section: [ 12,19,22,23,28,35-37].

8. The irreducible components of Af n in the low-dimensional case

THEOREM 57. The irreducible components o f .Afn, n >,2, then F is the free algebra in HSP(K) with basis {mx Ix ~ X}. DEFINITION 1 1. A variety V is locally finite if every finitely generated V-algebra is finite. A variety V is locally finite if and only if the free V-algebras of finite ranks are finite. It follows from Theorem 10 that if A is a finite algebra, then the variety generated by A is locally finite. Examples of locally finite varieties: (i) the variety of periodic nilpotent groups; (ii) the variety of Boolean algebras; (iii) the variety of distributive lattices. Note that the varieties of all (Abelian) group, and of all modular lattices are not locally finite [S]. DEFINITION 12. An algebra F in a variety V is relatively free if there exists a generating set X in F with the following property. Any map X --+ F can be extended to an endomorphism of F.

Varieties of algebras

551

THEOREM 13. For an algebra F in V the following are equivalent: (i) F is relatively free; (ii) F is a free algebra in the subvariety HSP(F); (iii) F ~_ F v ( X ) / c , where F v ( X ) is the free V-algebra with a base X, c is a completely invariant cogruence in Fv (X). There exists another approach to the notion of a variety of algebras. By a clone C we mean a family of sets {Cn, n >1 0} with a partial operation of superposition

C~ X

Cm x " "

x Cm->

Cm,

gl

(f, gl . . . . . gn) ~ f (gl . . . . . gn) e Cm,

f ECn, gi ECm,

and with fixed elements Pin ~- Cn, n >~ 1, i = 1 . . . . . n. The operation of superposition satisfies the super-associative law f (gl (hi . . . . . hm) . . . . . gn(hl . . . . . hm)) -- ( f ( g l . . . . . gn))(hl . . . . . hm), where f ~ Cn, gi C Cm, h j E Ck. The elements Pin, which are called projections, satisfy identifies f = f (Pln . . . . . Pnn),

Pin(gl, . . ., gn) = gi,

where f E Cn, gj E Cm. The main example of clones is the clone O ( X ) of all finitary operations on a set X. By definition O (X) is the family of sets On(X), where On(X) is a set of all maps (n-ary operations) X n ~ X. If f E On(X), gl . . . . . gn ~ Om(X) and x c X m, then by definition ( f (gl . . . . . gm))(x) - f (gl (x) . . . . . gm(X)). The element Pin is the i-th projection X n ~ X , that is Pin(Xl . . . . . Xn) = Xi,

where Xl . . . . . Xn E X . Given a clone C and a set A consider a homomorphism of clones f : C --+ O ( A ) . This is a collection of maps fn :Cn --+ On(A), n >~ O, commuting with superpositions and preserving projections. Then each element of Cn acts as an n-ary operation in A. Thus A becomes an algebra of a type C. A class of all these C-algebras A form a variety Vc. The clone C can be recovered from Vc as the clone of all term operations in Vc. More precisely, if F is a free Vc-algebra of a countable rank, then C is isomorphic to the subclone in O (F) generated by the basic operations. This subclone consists of all term operations of Vc. Moreover, a similar argument shows that every variety V can be presented as V = Vc for some C. For details see [S, Vol. II, Ch. VII, [P1,Sz]. This approach enables us to introduce the notions of rational equivalence and interpretations of varieties.

552

V.A. Artamonov

DEFINITION 14. Let V, U be varieties of algebras of types T and S. The varieties V and U are rationally equivalent (in the sense of A.I. Mal'cev) if their clones of term operations are isomorphic. For example, the variety of Boolean algebras is rationally equivalent to the variety of Boolean rings. THEOREM 15 [Mal2]. For two varieties U, V the following are equivalent: (i) V and U are rationally equivalent; (ii) there exists an equivalence of categories V --+ U preserving the underlying sets of algebras. DEFINITION 16. Let V, W be varieties of algebras of types T and S with clones of term operations C(V) and C(W) respectively. Then V is interpreted (presented) in W (notation V ~< W) if there exists a homomorphism of clones C(V) --~ C(W). THEOREM 17 [GT, p. 17]. Let V, W be as in Definition 16. The following, are equivalent: (i) V is interpreted in W; (ii) there exists a functor W --+ V which commutes with the underlying set functor (preserving underlying sets of algebras). EXAMPLE. Let LIE be the variety of all Lie algebras, ASS be the variety of all associative algebras, JORD be the variety of all Jordan algebras. Then LIE and JORD are interpreted in ASS. This follows from the fact that any associative algebra is a Lie (Jordan) algebra with respect to the multiplication [x, y] = xy - yx (respectively, x o y - xy + yx). For further details consult [A3, pp. 55-56], [GT, PI], [S, Vol. II, Ch. VI]. Finally it is worth it to mention a categorical approach to the definition of varieties due to E Lawvere [A 1,Man,Pl]. Let T be a category with direct products whose objects are the non-negative integers and whose morphisms are generated by U Hom(n, 1). n~>O

(,)

If n, m are objects of T, then it is assumed that the object n + m is the direct product of the objects n and m. By a T-algebra we shall mean a product-preserving functor F from T to the category of sets. It is clear that a T-algebra F is an algebra in the usual sense on the underlying set F (1) with (.) as set of basic operations. In fact, if f : n --+ 1 in T, then f induces a map

F ( f ) : F ( n ) = F(1) n --~ F(1). Morphisms of T-algebras are exactly the morphisms of functors. The category of Talgebras is actually a variety of (,)-algebras in the previous sense, since identifies correspond to the commutativity of suitable diagrams of morphisms in the category T. For further details see [Man,P1].


553

1.2. Mal'cev conditions. Congruences. Generation of varieties Let W be a variety of algebras of a type T and Fw (X) be the free W-algebra with countable basis X = {Xl, x2 . . . . }. By a strong Mal'cev condition we mean a formulae ( 3 p l ) . . . (3pn)((fl = gl)&""" &(fm -" gm)),

(**)

where j~, gi are elements of Fw(X) which contain only elements of X and functional symbols pl . . . . Pn. A class of subvarieties in W satisfying (**) forms a strong Mal'cev class of subvarieties. There is another equivalent definition of a strong Mal' cev class. Let K be a variety of a finite type S which is defined by a finite set of identities. Then a strong Mal'cev class in W consists of all subvarieties V in W such that K can be presented in V. A Mal'cev class in W is a class of subvarieties V in W such that there exists a chain K1/> K 2 / > ' - " with the following properties: (i) each Ki is of a finite type and is defined by a finite set of identities; (ii) Kn 1. Here "~ 1~2) ~> "'" is the derived series in A. An algebra A is nilpotent of class at most n if 1A -- 0 A An algebra A is soluble of class at most n if n+l 1A --0 A (n-k-l)

All nilpotent algebras (soluble algebras) of class at most n form a subvariety Vn (respectively V(n)) in V. Algebras in V1 -- V(1) are called Abelian: DEFINITION 28. An algebra B in V is affine if there exists a structure of an Abelian group on B with an addition + such that each n-ary term t, n ~> 0, induces an affine map t" B n --~ B, that is t (x + y) + t (0) = t (x) + t (y) for all x, y E B n. Note that in this situation the map x --+ t ( x ) - t(O) is a homomorphism of Abelian groups B n ~ B. THEOREM 29 [FM]. In a congruence-modularvariety an algebra is Abelian if and only if it is affine. EXAMPLES. In a group each congruence is determined by a normal subgroup. Hence, if the congruences c, c t correspond to normal subgroups N, N t, then [c, d] corresponds to

556

V.A. Artamonov

the normal subgroup [N, NI]. Thus Definition 27 can be considered as a generalization of the concepts of nilpotency and solvability in group theory. In rings congruences correspond to ideals. Therefore, if the congruences c, c I in a ring R correspond to ideals I, J, then [c, c t] corresponds to the ideal I J + J I. Hence, nilpotence and solvability in Definition 27 generalize corresponding notions in ring theory. For further details and results consult [A3,FM,HM,MMT,Pil ], [S, Vol. II, Ch. VI]. DEFINITION 30. An algebra A in an arbitrary variety V is subdirectly irreducible if Con A has a unique atom. For example, if p is a prime then the residue rings Z / p k Z are subdirectly irreducible. They are not simple, if k > 1. Note that any simple algebra is subdirectly irreducible. THEOREM 31 (G. Birkhoff [Gr]). Let A ~ V. Then A is a subdirect product of subdirectly irreducible algebras in V. In particular, every variety is generated by its subdirectly irreducible members, namely V = SP(VsI), where VsI is the class of subdirectly irreducible members. DEFINITION 32. A variety V is residually small if cardinalities of members in VSI are bounded. For example, the varieties of Abelian groups, semilattices, distributive lattices, and Boolean algebras are all residually small. THEOREM 3 3 ([Pil, Ch. 4], [BS]). A congruence-distributive variety generated by afinite algebra is residually small. THEOREM 34 [Gr, pp. 366-367]. A variety V is residually small if and only if every Valgebra is embeddable in an equationally compact algebra. Note that an algebra A is equationally compact if every infinite system of algebraic equations S over A in variables xi, i ~ I, is simultaneous solvable in A provided that every finite subset of S has a simultaneous solution. By an algebraic equation p = q over A we mean an equation where p, q are elements of the free product (coproduct) of A and the free algebra F with basis xi, i ~ I. There is a Mal'cev-type characterization of residually small varieties of semigroups, groups and rings (see, for example, [A3, p. 60]). DEFINITION 35. A variety V has definable principal congruences (in abbreviated DPC) if there exists a formulae F(x, y, z, t) in first order language such that for any algebra A in V and arbitrary elements a, b, c, d 6 A, a pair (a, b) is in the principal congruence generated by a pair (c, d) if and only if F (a, b, c, d) is satisfied in A. THEOREM 36 [HM]. A variety V has DPC if one of the following conditions is satisfied:


557

(i) V is directly presentable, that is V = HSP(A) for some finite algebra A and the set of directly indecomposable finite V-algebras is finite; (ii) V is locally finite and has CEP. Note that a variety V has congruence extension property (in abbreviated CEP) if for any subalgebra B in a V-algebra A the restriction morphism Con A ~ Con B is surjective. Varieties with CEP form a strong Mal' cev class. For locally finite varieties congruence distributivity is almost equivalent to the property DPC [Pi2, p. 62]. A directly representable variety V is congruence-permutable. Conversely, if a congruencepermutable variety V is generated by a finite algebra and Vsi contains only simple algebras, then V is directly representable [BS]. DEFINITION 37. A collection of varieties K 1 . . . . . Kn is independent if there exists a term p ( x l . . . . . Xn) such that p ( x l . . . . . Xn) = xi is an identity in Ki, i = 1 . . . . . n. THEOREM 38. Let K1 v . . . V Kn be congruence-modular, and let K1 . . . . . Kn be independent. Then every algebra A in K1 v . . . v Kn has a unique decomposition A ~_ A1 • ... • An, Ai E Ki. Conversely, if n = 2, K1 v K2 = K1 • K2 is congruencepermutable, and K1/x K2 = E, then K1, K2 are independent ([A3, p. 340], [S, Vol. II, Ch. VI]).

1.3. Lattices of varieties Let V be a variety and L ( V ) be a set of all subvarieties in V. Then L ( V ) is a partially ordered set with respect to inclusion. Moreover L ( V ) is a coalgebraic lattice which is dually isomorphic to the lattice of verbal congruences in the free V-algebra Fv (X), where X is a countable set X = {xl, x2 . . . . }. The lattice L ( V ) contains atoms, which are called minimal or equationally complete varieties. THEOREM 39 [Mall]. A variety of semigroups is minimal if and only if it is defined by one of the following sets of identities: (i) xy = yx, x 2 = x; (ii) x y = x; (iii) xy = y; (iv) x y = zt ; (v) x y = yx, x P y = y, p a prime. THEOREM 40 [Mall]. A variety of groups is minimal if and only if it is defined by identities x y = y x , x p = 1 f o r some prime p. THEOREM 41 [Mall]. A variety of power-associative rings is minimal if and only if it is defined by one of the following sets of identities (p is a prime): (i) x y = p x = 0;

558

V.A. Artamonov

(ii) ( x y ) z -- x ( y z ) , x p -- x. Several authors have studied varieties of algebras V for which the lattice L ( V ) has some nice properties. For example, (see [A2]) there exists in terms of identities, a characterization of varieties V of (power-)associative algebras in which L ( V ) has a unique atom. In a serie of papers (see, for example [A2]) the author has determined, in terms of identifies, varieties V of groups and (non-)associative k-algebras over a commutative associative Noetherian ground ring k such that L ( V ) is a chain. THEOREM 42. Let k be a field, char k = 0, and let V be a variety o f (non-)associative k-algebras. The lattice L ( V ) is a chain if and only if V satisfies one o f the following sets o f identities: (i) x y = y x , ( x y ) z = x ( y z ) ; (ii) x y + y x = ( x y ) z + x ( y z ) = 0; (iii) x 2 = ( x y ) z + ( y z ) x + ( z x ) y = ( x y ) ( z t ) = 0; (iv) x y -- y x , x 3 -- ( x y ) ( z t ) = 0; (v) x 2 = ( x y ) z + ( y z ) x + ( z x ) y = ( ( x y ) y ) y = 0; (vi) x y -- y x , x 3 --O, ( ( x y ) z ) t = ( ( x y ) t ) z . THEOREM 43. Let V be a non-Abelian variety o f groups such that L ( V ) is a chain, exp V :fi 4, and let the free V-group o f a rank 4 be residually solvable. Then exp V = p ~> 3 is prime, and V satisfies one o f the identities:

(i) [[x, y], [z, t]] = 1; (ii) [[[x, y], y], y] = 1. THEOREM 44. Let V be a variety o f groups, exp V = 4 and assume that L ( V ) is a chain. Then V satisfies one o f the following properties: (i) V c_c_A 2, that is each V-group is an extension o f a group o f exponent 2 by a group o f exponent 2; (ii) the identity (i)from Theorem 43 holds in V; (iii) the identity [[[y, x], z], t][[[z, x], y], t][[[t, x], y], z] -- 1 holds in V. Conversely, let V a variety of groups defined by one of the sets identities: (i) x y = y x , x p" = 1, p a prime; (ii) x p = 1, p >~ 3 a prime, and identity (ii) from Theorem 43; (iii) x p = 1, p ~> 3 a prime, and identity (i) from Theorem 43; (iv) V _c A22; (v) x 4 = 1 and identity (iii) from Theorem 44. Then L(V) is a chain. These varieties are locally nilpotent. A detailed survey of these results can be found in [A1,A2,A3], see also [Gr, w Note that V. Martirosyan obtained a characterization of varieties V of right alternative algebras over a field of characteristic zero whose lattice L ( V ) is distributive (see [A3]). These varieties V are defined by identities of degree three. A survey of results on varieties of groups V with a distributive lattice L ( V ) is presented in [S, Vol. I, p. 141]. Quite recently


559

M. Volkov has found all varieties of semigroups V with a modular lattice L ( V ) [I]. A survey on this topic is published in [S, Vol. II, pp. 161-165,283-292]. In 1967 A.I. Mal' cev [Mal2] introduced an operation of products of classes of algebras. Given two subclasses U, V in a clases K denote by UK V the class of all algebras A in K which have a congruence c such that A / c ~ V and each c-class in A that is a K-algebra belongs to U. If K is a pre-variety, then a class of all sub-pre-varieties in K is closed under products. THEOREM 45 (A.I. Mal'cev [Mal2]). Assume that K is a congruence-permutable variety of algebras with a unary term f such that K satisfies the identities f ( x ) - f (y), t ( f (x) . . . . . f (x)) = f (x) for any term t(Xl . . . . . Xn). Then the set of all subvarieties in K is closed under products. THEOREM 46 [BO, Ch. 3, w If K is the variety of all groups or of all Lie algebras over a field of characteristic zero. Then the set of all subvarieties in K with the respect to a Mal' cev product form a free semigroup with unity (a one-element variety) and with zero (a variety K). THEOREM 47. If K is the variety of all associative algebras (semigroups), then the Mal'cev product operation is not associative.

1.4. Finiteness conditions. Invariants of varieties. Constructions A subvariety V in a variety W is finitely based if it is defined in W by a finite set of identifies. A single algebra A 6 W is finitely based if the variety generated by A is finitely based. Any finite group (Oates, Powell, 1964), finite Lie algebra (Bahturin, Ol'shansky, 1974), finite alternative algebra (L'vov, 1977) is finitely based [BO, pp. 127-128, 199206, 217-221 ]. There exists a 64-element non-associative algebra with identity x (yz) = 0 which has no finite base (S.V. Polin). Each semigroup of an order less than 6 is finitely based. There exists a non-finitely based six-element semigroup (Perkins) [Gr, w If a finite algebra A generates a congruence-distributive variety, then A is finitely based (K.A. Baker [Gr, w Let f (n) be the number of all non-isomorphic algebras of order n, and l (n) the number of all finitely based non-isomorphic algebras of an order n. Then (V. Murskii [Gr, w lim (l(n)/f (n)) - 1. /7----> OO

A finite algebra generating a residually small variety is finitely based R. McKenzie [A3, p. 57]. A locally finite variety V is finitely based if VsI consists of a finite set of finite algebras and V has definable principal congruences (R. McKenzie ). In this situation the set of all finitely generated subvarieties in V is a sublattice in L ( V ) (W. Block, D. Pigozzi, [A3, p. 57]). If a variety V is inheritably finitely based (that is every subvariety in V is finitely based), then the lattice L(V) has DCC.

560

V.A. Artamonov

THEOREM 48 (A. Kemer [K]). Let k be afield, char k = 0. Then every variety ofassociative k-algebras is finitely based. THEOREM 49 (M. Vaughan-Lee, V. Drensky [BO]). Let k be a field, char k = p > 0. There exists a variety of Lie k-algebras which is not finitely based. THEOREM 50 (A.Yu. Ol'shansky, S.I. Adyan, M. Vaughan-Lee [BO]). There exists a variety of (soluble)groups which is not finitely based. A variety V of (non-associative) algebras is a Specht variety if V is hereditary finitely based, that is any subvariety in V is finitely based. THEOREM 51 (A. Iltyakov [I1]). Let V be a variety of Lie algebras generated by a finitedimensional Lie algebra. Then V a Specht variety. DEFINITION 52. Let V be a subvariety in a variety W. The axiomatic rank ra(V, W) is the least non-negative integer r such that V is defined in W be identities depending on r variables. If there is no such r we put ra (V, W) -- oo. DEFINITION 53. The basic rank rb(V) of a variety V is the least non-negative integer r such that V is generated by a free algebra of a rank r. If there is no such r then rb(V) = cx~. If a variety V is finitely based then ra (V, W) is finite. The basic rank of the varieties of all groups, semigroups, associative algebras, Lie algebras is equal to 2, since the free algebra of rank two in these varieties contains a free algebra of countable rank. In contrast, the basic rank, of the varieties of alternative and Mal'cev non-associative algebras is infinite (I. Shestakov, V. Philippov [S, Vol. I, Ch. III, w A detailed review of results on axiomatic and basic rank of varieties of groups, simigroups, algebras is presented in [S, v. II, Ch. IV, w [BO, w DEFINITION 54. The spectrum Spec V of a variety V is the set of orders of finite algebras in V. It is clear that Spec V is a multiplicative submonoid of positive integers N*. For any submonoid M in N* there exists a variety V such that M -- Spec V. For a finite algebra A the following are equivalent [S, Vol. II, p. 348]): (i) Spec(HSP(A)) is a cyclic monoid generated by A; (ii) A is a simple algebra, any proper subalgebra in A has order one, and HSP(A) is a congruence permutable variety. For example, let k -- ~Tq be a finite field and let V the variety of commutative, associative k-algebras generated by A = ]Fq. Then Spec V is the cyclic monoid generated by q. Another important invariant of a variety V is its fine spectrum. This is the function f v defined on the "set of cardinals" such that f v (a) is the cardinality of a set of nonisomorphic algebras in V of a cardinality a. For example, let A be a finite simple algebra


561

of order m as in (ii) above. Then the restriction of f v to N* coincides with one of the following functions [Pil, p. 69],

f (n) --

f(n)--

1 0

if n is a power of m, otherwise;

1 2 0

if n = 1, if n is a power of m, otherwise.

DEFINITION 55. A variety V has categoricity at the cardinal a, if f v ( a ) = 1. Varieties with categoricity at any infinite cardinal a were characterized by E. Palyutin and S. Givant [Gr, p. 393]. DEFINITION 56. A free spectrum of a locally finite variety V is the function s(n), where s (n) is the order of the free V-algebra of a rank n. THEOREM 57 [HM, p. 164]. Let A be a finite algebra and V = HSP(A). Then either s(n) /2 n-k f o r some k. Note that by Theorem 10 we have in Theorem 57 s(n) ~ [AI (lAIn).

If V is the variety of groups generated by the symmetric group $3, then s ( n ) = 2n32n(n-1)+l [HM]. A locally finite variety of groups is nilpotent if and only if ln(s(n)) is a polynomial in n. There exists distint locally finite varieties of groups with the same free spectrum (A.Yu. Ol'shansky, Yu. Kleiman, see Section 3.1). Let V be a variety of algebras and D be a diagram in the category V. THEOREM 58 [Gr, w

There exist in V a direct and inverse limits of any diagram D.

In particular, if all morphisms in D are identities, then the inverse limit of D is the direct product of objects in D and the direct limit is a free product (coproduct) of objects in D. A theory of direct decompositions in congruence-modular varietes was developed by A.G. Kurosh and O. Ore [Ku 1]. Let A be a finite simple algebra generating a congruence-permutable variety. Then any algebra in HSP(A) is a subdirect product of primal algebras (D. Clark, P.H. Krauss [KC], [A3, p. 58]). If V is a minimal locally finite permutable variety, then V = SP(A) t_J E, where A is a finite simple algebra (D. Clark [A3, p. 58]), and conversely. The Nielsen-Schreier theorem on subgroups of free groups and Kurosh's theorem of subgroups of free products of groups have inspired a series of papers on the structure of subalgebras of free algebras and free products of algebras in varieties. Detailed surveys on this topic can be found in [Bar,BB].

V.A. Artamonov

562

2. Varieties of (non-)associative algebras The theory of varieties of (non-)associative algebras is one of the most developed. It has some special methods and very interesting results. Therefore, we devote a separate section to the theory of these varieties.

2.1. Classification of identities Let k be a ground field of a characteristic p ~> 0 and V be a variety of (non-)associative k-algebras. Take the free V-algebra F = F v ( X ) over X and an identity f = 0 in some subvariety W in V, f 6 F. Then f as an element of F is a finite sum of monomials

g =axil...Xim

(***)

with some bracketing, where a ~ k, Xij E X. Let M be the additive monoid of all functions h : X --+ 1~ U 0 such that h (x) = 0 for almost all x in X. For a function h 6 M and a given element f E F denote by fh the sum of all monomials g in (***) such that for each element

xdEX h (Xd) -- ~d,il -4-... -Jr-~d,im,

where 5** is the Kroneker f-function. The number h(xd) is exactly the number of occurences of a variable Xd in a monomial g. Thus

f--~-'~fh. heM

If f = fh for some h 6 M, then f is called a multihomogeneous identity. THEOREM 59. Let k be an infinite field. Then any identity is equivalent to a system of

identities fh = O, h ~ M. COROLLARY 60. Let V be a variety over an infinite field k. If F is a f r e e V-algebra over a set X, then F is a graded algebra

F--~DFh, hEM

where each Fh is the linear span o f elements f = fh. Moreover, Fh Ft c Fh+t, for all h, t E M . Consider now an identity f = 0, where f is an element of the free V-algebra Fv (X) with the standard countable base X -- x l, x2 . . . . .

563

Varieties o f algebras

DEFINITION 61. An identity f -- 0 is multilinear of degree n if f -- fh, where h ( x l ) -. . . . h(xn) -- 1, h ( x j ) -- 0 for j > n. For instance, the Jacobi identity J ( x , y, z) -- x ( y z ) + y ( z x ) + z ( x y ) -- 0 and the associative law x ( y z ) - ( x y ) z -- 0 are examples of multilinear identities of a degree three. THEOREM 62 (A.I. Mal' cev). Let char k -- O. Then any identity is equivalent to a system o f multilinear identities. I f char k ~ O, then every identity implies a system o f multilinear identities. The proof of this theorem is based on a linearization process. Let f -- fh be a multihomogeneous element in the free V-algebra F v ( X ) . Assume for example, that h -- h ( x l ) >~ 1 . . . . . h (x j ) -- 0 for j > n. Then f -- f (xl . . . . . Xn), and for every monomial g in f(xl

+ X n + l , x2 . . . . .

Xn) -- f ( x l ,

x2 . . . . .

Xn) -- f ( x n + l ,

x2 . . . . .

Xn)

the number of occurences of x l, Xn+l are less than h, and the number of occurences of the other variables did not change. Repeating this process we can finally obtain multilinear consequences of f . If char k -- 0 then an identity f = 0 is equivalent to its multilinear consequences. Denote by Fn a subspace in F v ( X ) spanned by all monomials (***) such that h ( x l ) h(xn) -- 1, h ( x j ) - O, j > n. Then the symmetric group Sn has a natural representation in Fn. This group acts by permutation of the variables Xl . . . . , Xn. If W is a subvariety in V denote by W ( F ) a set of all elements f in F such that f - - 0 is an identity in W. Thus W(F) in this sense is the ideal associated to the verbal congruence in F associated to a subvariety W in the sense of Section 1.1 (see Theorem 9). Therefore, W ( F ) is an ideal in F -- F v ( X ) stable under all endomorphisms of F. The ideal W ( F ) is called a verbal ideal (or T-ideal) associated with W . According to Theorem 62 in characteristic zero the ideal W (F) is generated by a family of subspaces W (F) A Fn, n ~> 2. Each subspace W (F)/x Fn is invariant under permutation of variables, since W (F) is stable under all endomorphisms of F. Hence, each space W ( F ) / x Fn, n ~> 2, is a k S n - s u b m o d u l e in Fn. The lattice of subvarieties L ( V ) is embeddable in the direct product of lattices of kSn-submodules in ....

Fn, n ~ 2 . Each k S n - m o d u l e Fn has finite dimension. Thus instead of a free spectra s ( n ) in a theory of (non-)associative algebras it is necessary to study the behaviour of the function dim Fn

and properties of the generating series f (t) = E

(dim Fn)t n 9

n>~O

2.2. Varieties o f associative algebras The theory of associative algebra with a non-trivial identity (PI-algebras) is one of the most advanced. A systematic exposition of this theory can be found in [J,Pr, Ro], [S, Ch. III].

564

V.A. Artamonov

One of the most important identities in associative algebras is the standard identity Sn(Xl

. . . . .

X n ) - - ~-~"~,--1)SXsl ...Xsn. s6Sn

If A is an algebra of a finite dimension n then A satisfies

Sn+l

"-

O.

THEOREM 63 (Amitsur-Levitzki [Pr, p. 22]). Let R be a commutative algebra over a field k. Then a matrix algebra Mat(n, R) satisfies S2n = O. This is an identity o f a minimal degree in Mat(n, R). THEOREM 64 (Amitsur [Pr, p. 43]). Let A be a PI-algebra. Then there exists positive integers n, m such that A satisfies an identity Sn (Xl . . . . . Xn) m --O. In particular, if A is semiprime, then A satisfies an identity Sn (x I . . . . . Xn) = 0 f o r some n. An algebra in which every element is algebraic of a bounded degree is a PI-algebra [J, pp. 236-237]. THEOREM 65 [J, pp. 242-243]. Let A be an algebraic PI-algebra. Then A has a finite dimension.

In contrast we have THEOREM 66 (E. Golod). Let k be a field and d >1 2 an integer. There exists a nonnilpotent graded algebra A = ~)n>>.o An in which every (d - 1)-generated subalgebra is nilpotent.

Thus an assumption of a polynomial identity in Theorem 65 is essential. THEOREM 67 (Nagata-Higman [J, p. 274]). Let chark = p >~ 0 and let A be a k-algebra with an identity x n = O, where p > n provided p > O. Then A is nilpotent o f class at most 2 n - 1. THEOREM 68 (Yu.E Razmyslov). Let p = 0 in the Theorem 66. Then A is nilpotent o f a class at most n 2.

Note that lower bound for the class of nilpotency of an algebra A in Theorems 67, 68 ( p - 0) is l n ( n q- 1) [JSSS]. THEOREM 69 (I. Kaplansky). Let R be a primitive PI-algebra. Then R is a simple algebra o f a finite dimension over its center C. I f R satisfies an identity o f degree d, then dimc R ~< [d/2] 2.


565

DEFINITION 70. An element f (xl Xm) ~ 0 of the free associative algebra is a central polynomial in the matrix algebra Mat(n, k) if f ( x l . . . . ,Xm)Xm+l - X m + l f ( X l . . . . . Xm) = 0 is an identity in Mat(n,k) and f ( a l . . . . . am) ~ 0 for some elements al . . . . . am in Mat(n, k). . . . . .

THEOREM 71 (Yu. Razmyslov, E. Formanek [BO, pp. 159-160]). For every integern >~2 there exists a central multilinear polynomial of a degree 4n 2 - 2 in Mat(n, k). In order to present the explicit form of this polynomial consider the Capelli element Cn2(Xl . . . . . Xn2, yl . . . . , Yn2_l) = Z (--1)SXslYlXsZyZ'''Xs(nZ-1)YnZ-lXs(n2)" s ESn2

Consider the linear operator A on the set of multilinear polynomials defined by A (axn2b) -bxnza, where a, b are polynomials. Now, in A ( f n Z ( X l . . . . . Xne, Yl . . . . .

Yn2))

substitute for xi a commutator [Xi, X~], and for Yi a commutator [Yi, y~]. The polynomial obtained in this manner is a central polynomial in Mat(n, k) of a degree 4n e - 2. THEOREM 72 (Yu. Razmyslov, A. Kemer, Braun [BO]). Let A be a PI-algebra which is finitely generated over its central Noetherian subalgebra. Then the nil-radical N ( A ) of A is nilpotent. We have already mentioned the fundamental result of Kemer that in characteristic zero every variety of associative algebras is finitely based. The next theorem is also due to A. Kemer [K]. THEOREM 73. Let F be a finitely generated relatively free k-algebra, where k is an infinite field. Then F is embeddable in a matrix algebra Mat(n, C) for some n and for some commutative k-algebra C. Let k be an infinite field and A a finitely generated associative k-algebra. Then there exists a finite-dimensional k-algebra B such that HSP(A) -- HSP(B). In particular, A is finitely based (A. Kemer [K]). Some new interesting on the subject were recently obtained by young Moscow mathematicients A.Ya. Belov, V.V. Shchigolev and A.V. Grishin. THEOREM 74 (A.Ya. Belov [B 1]). Let A be a finitely generated PI-algebra over any commutative ring. Then A is embeddable in an algebra B which is a finitely generated module over its center. In particular, A is finitely based. THEOREM 7 5 (A.Ya. Belov [B2], V.V. Shchigolev [Shch2], A.V. Grishin [Gri]). Let k be a fieM of a positive characteristic. Then there exists a non-finitely based variety of associative k-algebras.

566

V.A. Artamonov

For the case of characteristic 2 Theorem 75 was proved in [Gri]. A subspace L in a free associative algebra F (X) with a base X is a T-space if L is closed under all endomorphisms of F ( X ) . Observe that if T-space is an ideal then it is a T-ideal. T-space L is finitely generated if there exist finitely many elements gl . . . . . gm E L such that L is the least T-space containing g l . . . . . gm. THEOREM 76 (V.V. Shchigolev [Shchl]). Let k be afield of characteristic zero. Then any T-space in a free associative k-algebra is finitely generated. THEOREM 77 (V.V. Shchigolev [Shch2], A.V. Grishin [Gri]). Let k be afield of a positive characteristic and F ( X ) a free associative k-algebra with a base X, IX[ >~ 2. Then there exists a non-finitely generated T-space in F(X). The case of characteristic 2 was considered in [Gri], an arbitrary case - in [Shch2]. Another aspect of the theory of PI-algebras is consedered in papers by A. Giambruno and M. Zaicev. These investigations are inspired by THEOREM 78 (A. Regev [R]). Let L be a T-ideal in a free associative algebra F ( X ) over a field k where X = {x l, x2 . . . . } is a countable base. Let Fn, n >/ l, be as in Theorem 59 and L n Fd :/: 0 for some d >>,1. Then for all n >~ l dim(Fn/(Fn N L)) O. The universal enveloping algebra U (L) is a PI-algebra if and only if L has an Abelian ideal I of a finite codimension, such that the adjoint representation of L is algebraic. THEOREM 82 (D. Passman). Let k be a field of a characteristic p ~ O. Then a group algebra kG is a PI-algebra if and only if G has a subgroup A of a finite index such that (i) A is Abelian if p = 0; (ii) [A, A] is a finite p-group if p > O.


567

A similar result for restricted enveloping algebras of Lie p-algebras was obtained by Passman and Petrogradsky [R, p. 72]. An important role in PI-algebras is played by a combinatorial theorem of Shirshov on heights. Let A be an algebra and X be a subset in A. If a 6 A and a m

bx~l

...Xin

mn ,

b E k,

Xij

E X, mi >~ 1 ,

then the height h (a) is equal to at most n with respect to a set X. THEOREM 83 (A. Shirshov [JSSS, pp. 128-129]). Let A be an algebra generated by elements a l . . . . . ad and satisfying a multilinear identity of degree n. Consider the subset X in A consisting of all monomials

ail ...air,

r < n, ij E {1 . . . . . d}.

Then there exists a positive integer h such that every element in A is a sum of monomials a in X as above with h(a) < h. This was a very brief review of the main result in the theory of PI-algebras. For further details consult [Pr, Ro,BO,BLH].

2.3. Varieties of non-associative algebras A theory of varieties of Lie algebras was influenced by the Burnside problem on local finiteness of groups with an identity x n = 1 (see [Ko]). The latest fundamental results on this topic were obtained by E. Zel' manov (Siberian Math. J. 30 (6) (1989)). THEOREM 84. Let k be afield. A Lie k-algebra with an identity (adx) n = 0 is nilpotent if char k -- 0 and is locally nilpotent if char k > 0. We have already mentioned that a finite-dimensional Lie algebra is finitely based. DEFINITION 85. A variety V of Lie algebras over a finite field is called a just-non-Cross variety if (i) V is not generated by a finite algebra; (ii) any proper subvariety in V is generated by a finite algebra. THEOREM 86 (Yu. Bahturin, A. Ol'shansky [BO], [Ba, Ch. 7]). There exists a unique soluble just-non-Cross variety of Lie algebras over a finite field. It is defined by the identities [[x, y], [z, t]] = (adx)P(ady)z = ( a d x ) p - l ( a d y ) P x --0,

where p -- char k.

568

V.A. Artamonov

This variety first appeared in [A2] as one of the varieties with a chain of subvarieties. Note that over an infinite field the lattice of subvarieties in the variety of all metabelian (i.e. satisfying an identity [[x, y], [z, t]] = 0) Lie algebras is distributive [Ba, Ch. 4.7]. There is a series of publications on special varieties of Lie algebras (see [Ba, Ch. 6]). Speciality of a variety V means that V is generated by a Lie algebra L such that there exists an associative PI-algebra A and an embedding of L into a Lie algebra A (-) which is defined on A by a multiplication [x, y] - - x y - yx. In connection with Theorem 86 it is necessary to mention THEOREM 87 (Yu. Razmyslov). There exists a non-soluble just-non-Cross variety of Lie algebras E p - 2 , p o v e r a field o f a characteristic p >~ 5. This variety is defined by the one identity ( a d x ) p - 2 y -- O. Note that by [A1] the lattice of subvarieties in E3,5 is a chain and any proper subvariety in E3,5 is nilpotent. THEOREM 88 (A. Krasil'nikov [BO]). Let k be a field o f a characteristic zero. Then any subvariety in Nc A is finitely based. Here Nc A is the product of the nilpotent variety Nc of all nilpotent Lie algebras of a degree ~< c and an Abelian variety A. Note that in the class of all Lie algebras the Mal'cev product U V of two subvarieties U, V consists of all Lie algebras L such that there exists an ideal I in L for which L / I ~ V and I ~ U. For a more detailed review on this topic consult [Ba,BO]. Free alternative algebras F have been mainly studied by I. Shestakov, K. Jevlakov, A. Philippov, A. II'tyakov, S. Pchelincev and others. For elements x, y, z in F put (x, y, z) = ( x y ) z - x ( y z ) . THEOREM 89 [S, Vol. I, pp. 403-404]. If x, y, z, t, u E F, then (i) ([x, y]4, z, t) = (z, Ix, y]4, t) -- (z, t, [x, y]4) = 0 (Kleinfeld); (ii) ((x, y, z) 4, t, u) = (t, (x, y, z) 4, u) = (t, u, (x, y, z) 4) -- (x, y, z) 4, t -- t, (x, y, z) 4 = 0. The quasiregular radical of F is locally nilpotent. It consists of all nil elements in F and coincides with the ideal of all identities in the Cayley-Dickson ring O (Z) that belong to the ideal in F generated by all elements (x, y, z), x, y, z 6 F. If the rank of a free alternative ring G is sufficiently large then G has elements whose additive order is equal to 3. THEOREM 90 [JSSS]. Let A be an alternative algebraic PI-algebra. Then A is locally finite dimensional. In particular, alternative algebras with an identity x n - 0 are locally nilpotent, and are soluble. THEOREM 91 (I. Shestakov). The quasiregular radical in a finitely generated alternative PI-algebra over a field is nilpotent (see Theorem 71).


569

THEOREM 92 (I. Shestakov). Let Alt(n) be the variety of alternative algebras generated by the free alternative algebra of rank n. Then Alt(n) 7~ Alt(2 n + 1). In particular, the variety of all alternative algebras has infinite basic rank. THEOREM 93 (S.V. Pcelincev [P]). A soluble alternative algebra over a field of characteristic 5~ 2, 3 belongs to a variety Nk A n N3Nm, where as above A is the variety of all algebras with zero multiplication, Nm is a variety of all nilpotent algebras of a class ~ m. THEOREM 94 (U.U. Umirbaev [Um]). Every variety N~ A n N3 Nm of alternative algebras is a Specht variety. Let J (X) be the free Jordan algebra over X. We shall assume that the characteristic of the base field k is not equal to 2. THEOREM 95 (A. Shirshov). /f IXI ~ 2, then J (X) is special that is J (X) is isomorphic to a Jordan subalgebra in a free associative algebra Ass(X) generated by X with the respect to the multiplication x o y = 1 (xy + yx). If IXI ~ 3, then J (X) is not special and contains zero divizors (Yu. Medvedev). It follows from Theorem 95 that any two-generated Jordan algebra is special (i.e. embeddable in an algebra A (+) defined in associative algebra A by the multiplication x o y = 89 + yx)) (P.M. Cohn). Denote by S J ( X ) the Jordan subalgebra in Ass(X) generated by X with the respect to the multiplication x o y as above. There exists a surjective homomorphism p : J (X) S J ( X ) . The elements of Kerp are called s-identities. The Glenny identity G(x, y , z ) = K (x, y, z) - K (y, x, z), where

K(x, y , z ) = 2 { { y { x z x } y } z ( x y ) } - { y { x { z ( x y ) z ] x } y ] , is an example of an s-identity. Here {abc} -- (ab)c + (cb)a - b(ac). DEFINITION 96. A Jordan algebra is a PI-algebra if it satisfies an identity which is not an s-identity. THEOREM 97 (E. Zel'manov). Jordan nil PI-algebras are locally nilpotent. THEOREM 98 (A. Veis, E. Zel'manov [I, pp. 42-51 ]). Let A be afinitely generated Jordan PI-algebra. Then any subvariety in HSP(A) is finitely based. A variety of Jordan algebras is special if all its members are special. Let Nm be the variety of Jordan nilpotent algebras of a class at most m and Mt the variety of Jordan algebras generated by the Jordan algebra of symmetric matrices in Mat (t, k). THEOREM 99 (A. Slin'ko). The variety Nm is special if and only if m 0, L n = [L (n-l) , L(n-1)]. Again there arises a descending series -

L-

-

L (~ D L (1) D . . - D L (n) D . . . .

(16)

A Lie superalgebra L with L(n~ = {0} is called solvable and the least 1 >~ 0 with L(l~ = {0} is called the solvability length of L. Being solvable is equivalent to being a finite extension of a sequence of Abelian superalgebras. Nilpotent superalgebras are obviously solvable. In every finite-dimensional superalgebra there exists a largest nilpotent ideal and a largest solvable ideal called its nilpotent and solvable radicals, respectively. A finite-dimensional ordinary Lie superalgebra L = L0 G L 1 is solvable if, and only if this is true for L0. Note that in the case of usual Lie algebras any finite-dimensional solvable Lie algebra over a field K of characteristic zero is isomorphic to a Lie subalgebra of an algebra of triangular matrices of some order over K. The structure of infinite-dimensional Lie superalgebras is far more difficult and some information will be given later in Section 5. There is a class of solvable Lie superalgebras, however, where the progress is more visible. These are solvable Lie superalgebras of solvability length 2, called metabelian. A c o m m o n way of obtaining such superalgebras is via semidirect products. Given two Lie superalgebras M and N and

588

Yu. Bahturin et al.

a homomorphism ~0 of M into the derivation algebra of N, one defines an operation on M @ N by setting

[m -Jr n, m' -t- n'] = [m, m'] + qg(m)(n') - e(g, h)qg(m')(n), where n ~ Ng, m' ~ Mh.

(17)

For instance, if M is a Lie superalgebra and N a module of it then considering N as an Abelian Lie superalgebra and q9 as the representation of M in End N we obtain a Lie algebra L = M)~N where M is a subalgebra and N is an Abelian ideal. Of special importance is the case where N is a free M-module with free generating set X. Denoting by A the Abelian Lie superalgebra with basis X we call the product as just above the wreath product of M and A which is denoted by A wr M. This terminology comes from group theory (see [Ne]). Wider classes of Lie superalgebras can be obtained by considering Lie superalgebras which are locally in one of the classes defined above. We say that a Lie superalgebra L is locally in a class/C if every finite set of elements of L lies in a subalgebra M 6/C. Thus, every Lie superalgebra has a locally nilpotent radical, i.e. the largest locally nilpotent ideal. Some other so called finiteness conditions will be considered in Section 5. A Lie superalgebra L is called semisimple if it has no non-zero solvable ideals (this is equivalent to having non-zero Abelian ideals). Obviously, any simple Lie superalgebra is semisiple. In the case of finite-dimensional Lie algebras it is true that any semisimple Lie algebra is the direct product of its simple ideals. This is not true already in the case of Lie algebras with positive characteristic, not mentioning Lie superalgebras where it is wrong already for finite-dimensional ordinary Lie superalgebras over a field of characteristic zero. Finally, we define free Lie algebras. Given a non-empty G-graded set X = UgEG Xg we define the free colour Lie superalgebra L(X) with free generating set X as a Lie superalgebra generated by X whose grading is compatible with that of X and such that any graded mapping qg" X ~ M = Y~g~G Mg extends to a homomorphism ~" L(X) ~ M such that ~ Ix= q). Every Lie superalgebra is isomorphic to a quotient algebra of a suitable free Lie superalgebra. If M ~ L ( X ) / I is such an isomorphism with the ideal I generated by a subset R of L then we write M = (X I R) and say that M is given in terms of generators and defining relations and that (X I R) its presentation. Effectively determining properties of a Lie superalgebra from its presentation is often impossible. For example, there is no algorithm to decide whether such a presentation determines the zero algebra (already in the case of ordinary Lie algebras).

1.7. Simple colour Lie superalgebras The classification problem of simple algebras is one of the most important tasks for any class of algebras. For Lie algebras and ordinary Lie superalgebras this classification is complete in the finite-dimensional case over any algebraically closed fields of characteristic zero (see, for example, [Kac3] or [Sc2] for Lie superalgebras). In the general case we illustrate this problem with one recent result.

Infinite-dimensional Lie superalgebras

589

THEOREM 1.2 [Pa2]. Suppose A is a color commutative G-graded K-algebra and let D be a nonzero color commutative G-graded K-vector space of color derivations of A. Let dim K D = 1 and assume that either char K -- 2 or c h a r - K --fi2 and D = D_. Then A | D = A D is a simple Lie color algebra if and only if A is graded D-simple and D(A)--A. Recall that V_ G: e ( x , x ) = - l } .

=

ZgEG_ gg for any G-graded vector space V and G_ = {x

2. Bases of colour Lie superalgebras The main sources of the theory of free Lie algebras are in the papers of E Hall [Hall E], W. Magnus [Mal,Ma2], and E. Witt [Wil] devoted to the study of free groups. The construction of linear basis for free Lie algebras has been suggested in the article [Hall M.] of M. Hall (so called "Hall basis"). Later A.I. Shirshov [Shi2,Shi5] has given some other constructions of free linear bases. Lyndon basis was introduced in [CFL] by K.T. Chen, R.H. Fox, and R.C. Lyndon. A.I. Shirshov [Shi3] also invented the composition method for Lie algebras which became an extremely useful tool in ring theory for solving quite a few algorithmic problems; he considered in [Shi4] free products of Lie algebras with amalgamated subalgebra.

2.1. Free colour Lie (p-)superalgebras Let X -- UgEG Xg be a G-graded set, i.e. Xg 0 X f = ~ for g :/: f , d(x) = g for x ~ Xg, let also/-'(X) be the groupoid of nonassociative monomials in the alphabet X, u o v -(u)(v) for u, v ~ F ( X ) , and S(X) be the free semigroup of associative words with the bracket removing homomorphism :/-'(X) --+ S(X); [u] being an arrangement of brackets on the word u ~ S(X). For u = Xl...Xn ~ S(X), xi ~ X we define the word length as l(u) = n ' and the degree as d(u) --" ~ i = 1n d(xi) E G. For z ~ F ( X ) we set l(z) = 1(2) and m

d(z)

= d(~).

Let K be a commutative associative ring with 1, A(X) and F(X) the free associative and nonassociative K-algebras, respectively,

S(X)g = {u E S(X), d(u) = g},

r ( X ) g = {v E F ( X ) , d(v) = g},

let A(X)g and F(X)g be the K-linear spans of the subsets S(X)g and F(X)g respectively, A(X) : ~gEG A(X)g and F ( X ) = ~]~gs6 F(X)g being the free G-graded associative and nonassociative algebras respectively. Let now I be the G-graded ideal of F (X) generated by the homogeneous elements of the form

a ob+e(a,b)boa and

(aob) oc-ao(boc)+e(a,b)bo(aoc),

eoe, f o(fo f),

Yu. Bahturin et al.

590

w h e r e a , b , c, e, f E F ( X ) , d(e) ~ G+, d ( f ) E G_; then L ( X ) -- F ( X ) / I is the free colour Lie K - s u p e r a l g e b r a (i.e. every G - m a p q) of degree zero from X into any colour Lie K - s u p e r a l g e b r a R with the same g r o u p G and form e (d(qg(x)) - d ( x ) , x E X ) can be u n i q u e l y extended to a colour Lie s u p e r a l g e b r a h o m o m o r p h i s m ~" L ( X ) ~ R). It is clear that this universal property defines the free colour Lie superalgebra L ( X ) uniquily up to a colour Lie superalgebra isomorphism. For u E. F ( X ) we set "ff = u + I ~ L ( X ) . S u p p o s e that the set X -- [,.Jgea Xg is totally ordered and the set S ( X ) is ordered lexicographically, i.e. for u -- xl ...Xr and v -- yl ... Ym where xi, yj E X we have u < v if either xi -- yi for i -- 0, 1 . . . . . t - 1 and xt < yt or xi -- yi for i -- 1, 2 . . . . . m and r > m. T h e n S ( X ) is linearly ordered. A word u ~_ S ( X ) is said to be regular if for any d e c o m p o s i t i o n u - ab, where a, b E S ( X ) , we have u > ha. The word w ~_ S ( X ) is said to be s-regular if either w is a regular w o r d or w = vv with v a regular word and d ( v ) ~_ G_. A m o n o m i a l u 6 F (X) is said to be regular if either u ~ X or: (a) from u = Ul o u2 if follows that Ul, u2 are regular m o n o m i a l s with g l > U-2; (b) from u = (Ul o u2) o u3 it follows that U2 ~ g3. Observe that if x ~ X, v is a regular m o n o m i a l and x > ~ then x ( v ) is a regular monomial. A m o n o m i a l u ~ F (X) is said to be s-regular if either u is a regular m o n o m i a l or u (v)(v) with v a regular m o n o m i a l and d ( v ) ~ G_. If u is an s-regular m o n o m i a l , then g is an s-regular word. Conversely, if u is an sregular word, then there is a unique a r r a n g e m e n t of brackets [u] on u such that [u] is an s-regular monomial. THEOREM 2.1 [Mikl]. Let K be a commutative ring with 1; 2 ~ K*, and let L ( X ) = F ( X ) / I be a free colour Lie superalgebra. Then the cosets in F ( X ) / I whose representatives are s-regular monomials give us a basis o f L ( X ) as a free G-graded K-module. Moreover, if [X] is the subalgebra o f [A(X)] generated by X and :rr : L ( X ) ~ [X] is an homomorphism such that rr(x + I) = x f o r all x E X, then rc is an isomorphism. COROLLARY 2.1.1 (An analogue of the Witt formula). Let 2 ~ K*, X -- U g e a Xg, X + -{Xl . . . . . xt}, X _ = {Xt+l . . . . . xt+s}, and let L ( X ) be the free colour Lie K-superalgebra, Ix(l) the MObius function, and W(C~l . . . . . oek) the rank o f the free module o f elements o f multidegree ~ - (al . . . . . ak) in the free Lie algebra o f rank k, then

W (of I .....

~

1 Z Ix(e) e[oti

-- -~[

(loci/e)!

(otl /e)! . . . ( o t k / e ) ! '

where loci - zki=l Oli (Witt formula). Let S W ( ~ I . . . . . Olt+s) be the rank o f the free module o f elements o f multidegree ~ - (al . . . . . at+s) in the free colour Lie superalgebra L ( X ) o f rank t + s. Then

SW(otl . . . . . oft+s) = W(otl . . . . . ott+s) + [3W

Oil Ott+s ) 2 ..... 2 '


591

where 0

~ = 1

if there exists an i such that Oti is odd, or if 89z..,i=t+l S -'t+s oti . d(oti) E G_; otherwise.

Some other analogues of the Witt formula can be found in the papers [Bab,Kang,Kant, MT,Ree]. For w ~ L ( X ) we define the length l x ( w ) as the greatest length of the s-regular monomials in the presentation of w as a linear combination of s-regular monomials. If re(~) - - ~-~k_ 10liUi where 0 ~ Oli E K, Ui E S ( S ) , ui ~ Uj for i -r j , then I x ( w ) -maxl R where R is any colour Lie p-superalgebra with the same G and e, can be extended to a homomorphism ~" LP (X) ---> R of colour Lie p-superalgebras). The number rankLP (X) = IXl is called the rank of the free colour Lie p-superalgebra. It is clear that the rank of L P (X) does not depend on the choice of a set of free generators.

2.2. Free metabelian colour Lie superalgebras The problem of finding linear bases is important not only in the case of free Lie algebras but also in the case of free algebras in varieties other than the variety of all Lie superalgebras. What results is a canonical form of the elements in the superalgebra via its generating set. However interesting may this be, a complete solution exists only exceptionally. Here we present the results in the case of metabelian Lie superalgebras. If in a colour Lie superalgebra L any two commutators commute, i.e. [[x, y], [z, t]] = 0 for any x, y, z, t ~ L, we say that L is a metabelian colour Lie superalgebra. The free metabelian colour Lie superalgebra with a set X of free generators is the algebra M ( X ) -- L ( X ) / L ( 2 ) ( X ) where L ( X ) is the free colour Lie superalgebra, L (2) = [L(1)(X), L(1)(X)], LC1)(X) = [L(X), L(X)]. THEOREM 2.2 [BD]. Let X = [-Jg~C Xg = X+ tO X_ be a G-graded set, M ( X ) the free metabelian colour Lie superalgebra in X over a field K, char K ~ 2, 3. Then a basis in M ( X ) is formed by all monomials of the form Xi E X + ,

yj E X_,

[Xil ,xi2 . . . . .

Xip, yj, . . . . .

[Yjl, Yj2 . . . . . Yjq], [Yjj,Xil .....

yjq],

il > i2 - j2 < " " < jq, q > 1,

Xip , YJ2 . . . . .

Yjq],

il ~ ' ' " ~ 1.

Using this theorem it is possible to compute the Hilbert series of M ( X ) (see Section 5).

2.3. Free products with amalgamated subalgebra Let K be a field, T a set, and H ~ Ha, ct 6 T, colour Lie K-superalgebras (with the same group G and skew symmetric bilinear form e), H ~ a G-homogeneous subalgebra of Ha, 3a : H ~ --+ H ~ an isomorphism of colour Lie superalgebras. We say that a colour Lie K-superalgebra Q (with the group G and the form e) is the free product of colour Lie superalgebras Ha, ot ~ T, with amalgamated homogeneous subalgebra H ~ (notation: Q = I-In 0 Ha) if the following conditions are satisfied: acT

(1) there are homogeneous subalgebras H~ in Q, isomorphisms ~ra : Ha ---> Hc~ of colour Lie superalgebras such that ~ra3a (h) = o't~3t~(h) for all or, f l ~ T and h ~ H~


593

(2) if M is a colour Lie K-superalgebra (with the same group G and form e), ga" Ha --+ M is a homomorphism of colour Lie superalgebras, ya6c~(h) = yt~8~(h) for all or, fl E T and h ~ H ~ then there is one and only one homomorphism

l-I* r/~T

of colour Lie superalgebras such that ~8c~ = Ya for all c~ ~ T. It is clear that the colour Lie superalgebra l-In0 Ha is defined uniquely (up to an isomoraET

phism of colour Lie superalgebras). Let B ~ = {f~, fl ~ T ~ be a G-homogeneous basis in H ~ B ~ -- {ea~, ea~ = 8a(ft~), oe ~ T, fl ~ TO}, and let Ba be a homogeneous basis in Ha, B ~ C Ba and Ba = {ea~, fl ~ Ta } for all ol ~ T. Then the multiplication in Ha for all c~ ~ T can be given using l" structure constants Pa~• ~ K"

[ea~, ea• =

pad•

fl, 9/~_ T,~.

T

For any a ~ r consider the G-graded set Xa = {xcr fl ~ Tc~, d(xa~) = d (ea~) }. Let X be the set obtained from [,.JaeTXa by the identification xc~y = x~• for 9/E T ~ Consider T o with a total order and a total order extension of T o to T~ for all c~ ~ T such that fl > 9/ for fl, 9/~ Ta, fl ~ T ~ 9/ ~ T ~ Let J be the ideal of the free colour Lie superalgebra L ( X ) generated by the following subset of G-homogeneous elements D = {d~•

= [ x ~ , x~•

p~•

-

o~ e T, [3, ?, e r~,

1"

where fi > 9/if xa~ ~ X+ and fl >~ 9/if xa~ ~ X_. It is easy to see that the quotent-algebra L ( X ) / J is isomorphic to the algebra 1--[H0 Ha. aET

Now we order X in the following way: for xa~ 7~ x• we set xa~ > x• if a > 9/ or c~ = 9/and fi > 8. We say that a regular monomial w ~ F (X) is special if the word N does not contain subwords xa~xa• fl > 9/, and also subwords xa~xa• where fl ~> 9/ for xa~ ~ X_. We say that a monomial w ~ F ( X ) is called s-special if either w is a special monomial or w = [v, v] where v is a special monomial, d(v) E G_, lx(v) > 1. THEOREM 2.3 [Mik2]. Let K be a field, char K r 2, 3. Then the cosets whose represen-

tatives are s-special monomials form a linear basis of the algebra L ( X ) / J = I-I*no Ha. a6T

If, in the definition of the free product of colour Lie superalgebras with amalgamated subalgebra, in place of colour Lie superalgebras we consider colour Lie p-superalgebras then we have the definition of the free product of colour Lie p-superalgebras with amalgamated homogeneous subalgebra. It is clear that such product is defined uniquely (up to an isomorphism of colour Lie p-superalgebras). Let J be the ideal of the free colour Lie p - ~ r qafl r Xar where p-superalgebra L p (X) generated by elements duty• and hu~ = xa~

594

Yu. Bahturin et al.

r c K, xa/~ c X+ and ea/~ p -- Y~r qa~ear r in Ha It is clear that the alc~ E T, 13, r c Ta, qur gebra LP ( X ) / J is the free product of colour Lie p-superalgebras Ha with amalgamated homogeneous subalgebra H ~ We say that a regular monomial w c / - ' (X) is p-special if the word ~ does not conP with tain subwords of the form x ~ x a • ~ > y," xa~x~• ~ >~ y with xa~ 6 X_; or xa~ xc~r 6 X+; or [xu~,xu~] p with xc~ 6 X_. A monomial w ~ F ( X ) is called ps-special if either w is a p-special monomial or w - [u, u] pt, t >t O, where u is a p-special monomial, d(u) ~ G_, lx(u) > 1, or w = o pt where t 6 N, v is a p-special monomial, d(v) ~ G+, Ix(v) > 1. THEOREM 2.4 [BMPZ]. Let K be a field, char K -- p > 3. Then the cosets, whose representatives are ps-special monomials, form a linear basis of L P (X) / J.

2.4. The composition lemma Consider a weight function qg" X --+ N, let qg(xl...Xn) "-- Y~i%l qg(Xi) for xz . . . . , xn ~ X and let fi" be the leading term in a ~ A (X) first relative to the weight ~o and then lexicographically. LEMMA 2.1. Let u, v be regular words. (1) Ifu = a v b (a, b ~ S(X)) then on u there is anarrangementofbrackets [u] = [a[v]b] such that [v] is a regular monomial, [ u ] - u in L(X). (2) Let u -- avvb, d(v) ~ G_, a, b ~ S(X). Then on u there is an arrangement of brackets [u] such that [u] = [a[v, v]b] where [v, v] is an s-regular monomial, [u] = 2u in L(X). THEOREM 2.5 [Mik5]. Any Lie superalgebra (Lie p-superalgebra) over a field with countable set of generators can be isomorphically embedded in a Lie superalgebra (in a Lie p-superalgebra) with two generators over the same field. The original Lie algebra version of this theorem is due to A.I. Shirshov [Shi2]. DEFINITION. Let a, b be two G-homogeneous elements in L ( X ) . Assume that their leading terms a0 and bo in the s-regular presentation (first relative to the weight 99 and then lexicographically) have coefficients which are equal to 1 and fi-~- ele2, b0 - e2e3 where el, ea, e3 E S(X). Then the word ele2e3 is regular. Now we define the element (a, b) ~ L ( X ) which is called the composition of the elements a, b c L ( X ) (relative to a subword ee): (1) in the case where ao ~ bo we set (a, b) - [(a)e3] - cg[el (b)] where [(a)e3] is obtained from the monomial [[ao]e3] with the arrangement of brackets described in L e m m a 2.1 by replacing a0 by a and analogously [el (b)] is obtained from [el [b0]] by replacing b0 by b; and c~ is such that [(a)e3] -- c~[el (b)]; (2) for a -- b, -d-6- uu, where u is a regular word and d(u) ~ G_ we set (a, a) [a, [u]] = [a - [u, u], [u]] where [u] is a regular monomial.


595

A G-homogeneous subset S ~ L ( X ) is called stable if the following conditions are satisfied: (a) the coefficients of the leading monomials in the s-regular presentation for all elements from S are equal to 1" (b) all words T, where s 6 S, are distinct and do not contain the other ones as subwords; (c) if a, b E S and the composition (a, b) does exist then either (a, b) E S (up to a coefficient from K) or after expressing the elements associatively we have (a, b) -- y~ OtiAi si Bi, where oti E K, si E S, Ai, Bi E S(X), Otl A j ~ B1 -- (a, b), Ai~ii Bi < A l ~ B1 (i :/: 1) for all i. THEOREM 2.6 (The Composition Lemma, [Mik4]). Let K be afield, char K r 2, 3, L ( X ) a free colour Lie superalgebra, S a stable set, id(S) the ideal in L ( X ) generated by S. Then for any element a E id(S) the word ~d contains a subword b, b E S. Furthermore, sregular monomials u such that "ff does not contain subwords b, b E S, form a linear basis of L ( X ) / i d ( S ) . An analogous theorem holds for colour Lie p-superalgebras (see [BMPZ]). As corollaries one can derive a number of algorithms to solve algorithmic problems in Lie superalgebras, for example, an algorithm for solving equality in colour Lie psuperalgebras with stable or ~0-homogeneous finite sets of defining relations (see [BMPZ, MZ3,MZ5]). Examples of symbolic computation in Lie superalgebras one may find in [GK1,GK2,MZ3,MZ5]. Also from the Composition Lemma one can deduce the theorems from Section 2.3. For any ideal I of L ( X ) (of L p (X)) there exists a stable system of relations. Such a system of generators of I can be called a complete system of relations. Furthermore, there exists such complete system S of relations of I that for any (p)s-regular monomial w in the (p)s-regular presentation of a 6 S the word ~ does not contain subwords b, b 6 S \ a. Such complete system of relations of I can be called the GrObner-Shirshov basis of the ideal I of L ( X ) (of L p (X)). EXAMPLE. Consider the case of L ( X ) . L e t a c L(X), fi'-- 2uu, where u is a regular word, d(u) E G_, a -- [u, u] + ~ OliOi where O/i E K, l)i is an s-regular monomial, v--7< uu, vl > v--7for i r 1 (first by weight q9 and then lexicographically), Vi- ~ bu for Vi- > u, vl :/: ub for u > vl, b ~ S(X). Then id(a) = id(S), S -- {a, (a, a)} where (a, a) is the composition, S is a stable set. Therefore, for id(a), we have an algorithmic solution of the equality problem. More information on Gr6bner-Shirshov bases of ideals of Lie superalgebras one may find in [BMPZ,BKLM,Mik8,MZ3,MZ5].

3. Subalgebras of free colour Lie (p-)superalgebras The theorem about freeness of subalgebras in free Lie algebras was proved by A.I. Shirshov [Shil] and in free Lie rings and p-algebras by E. Witt [Wi2]. The theorem on

596

Yu. Bahturin et al.

the finiteness of the rank for the intersection of two subalgebras of finite rank is due to G.P. Kukin [Ku]. We say that a subset M of G-homogeneous elements of L ( X ) is independent if M is a set of free generators of the subalgebra generated by M in L ( X ) . A subset M = {ai } of G-homogeneous elements in L ( X ) is called reduced if for any i the leading part a ~ of the element ai does not belong to the subalgebra generated by the set {a0, j -~i}. Let S = {s~, ot 6 I} be a G-homogeneous subset of L ( X ) . We say that a mapping w : S ~ L ( X ) is an elementary transformation if co(s~) = sc~ for all c~ 6 1 \/~, o)(st~) = )~s~ + o)(s~ 1. . . . . sat), where

0 # ~. E K, or1 . . . . . ott # / 3 , d(oo(su, . . . . . so~,)) - d(s~), o)(Yo~l. . . . . Yat) E L ( y l , Y2 . . . . ), d(yi) = d(si). Such elementary transformation is called triangular if lx(o)(s~ . . . . . s~,)) 1. If ]2 is a variety of Lie superalgebras over K then another numerical characteristic can be considered. Namely, denote by L0 @ L l a free Lie superalgebra over K with the same set X of even generators and the set Y = {yl, y2 . . . . } of odd generators. Let R be a nonhomogeneous subalgebra in L generated by zi = xi + Yi, n -- 1, 2 . . . . . and let Pn denote a subspace of all multilinear polynomials on Z l . . . . . Zn in R. Any map xi ~ ai E Ho, Yi bi E H1 with the image in some Lie superalgebra H = H0 @ Hi can be uniquelly extended to a Lie superalgebras h o m o m o r p h s m ~o" R ~ H. If H is a free algebra of countable rank of a variety 1; then an intersection J of kemels of all such ~o can also be considered as the ideal of identities of V, and codimension of P n N J in P n c a n be taken instead of Cn (]2). However, these characteristics coincide since 7rz( Pn ) -- -fin,

zr ( l ) = J,

Jr - l ( J ) = I

for the canonical epimorphism zr : F ~ R where zr ( x i ) - " z -[- i. The theory of codimension growth is well-developed in cases of associative and Lie algebras. For Lie superalgebras there is a description of varieties of relatively slow growth. Recall that .Mt.A means a variety of Lie superalgebras which satisfy a non-graded identity [Z l, Z2] . . . . .

[Z2t+l, Z2t] = O.

THEOREM 5.2 [ZM]. A variety )2 o f Lie superalgebras over a field o f characteristic zero has a p o l y n o m i a l codimension growth if a n d only if the f o l l o w i n g conditions hold: (1) V C A/cA; (2) there exist an integer k such that any multilinear p o l y n o m i a l containing at least k even and k odd variables is equal to zero identically in )2; (3) f o r any j = O, 1 . . . . . c identity o f the f o r m [ Z l , Z2, Xl . . . . .

XN], tl . . . . .

tr, [Z3, Z4, XN+I . . . . .

X2N]

aor [ Z l , Z 2 , X~r (1) . . . . . X~r (U)], t 1,. .., tr, [Z3, Z4, Xa(N+l) . . . . , X~(2N)]

= Z O ~

holds in )2 where the summation extends only over those permutations ainS2n f o r which o'({ 1 . . . . . N}) ~Z {1 . . . . . N}.

A sequence of integers an is said to be of intermediate growth if an is asymptotically less than d n for any d > 1 and asymptotically greater than n t for any integer t. As in an usual Lie or associative case we have


605

THEOREM 5.3 [ZM]. There are no varieties of intermediate growth in the class of Lie superalgebras.

5.3. Symmetric group action Let L(X), X = ~e,~G Xg, be a free colour Lie superalgebra over a field K, char K = 0, and each Xg is countable. For any function y : G --+ N which is zero almost everywhere denote by L• the multilinear component of L(X) of length y(x) in the variables Xg with this variable fixed. The Cartesian product of the symmetric groups S• = 1--Ig~GSym(y (g)) acts on L• by permuting variables of the same G-degree. If we denote by M (d) the irreducible Sym(m)-module associated with the Young diagram d then any irreducible S• in L• is isomorphic to M(dl) | M(d2) @ . . . | M(ds) where dl, d 2 , . . . , ds are partitions of the numbers y (g) which are different from zero. As an example of the uses of symmetric group techniques consider the free metabelian colour Lie superalgebra M (X). The action of the group S• on L• induces a similar action on the set P• of multilinear elements in the free metabelian superalgebra M(X). In order to describe P• as an S• we assume that the set of elements in G is totally ordered. THEOREM 5.4. Let y have the form Y -- ( Y ( g l ) . . . . .

Y ( g r ) , O, 0 . . . . .

y(hl) .....

~/(hs), O, 0 . . . . ),

where gl < "'" < gr, hi < "'" < hs, gi E G+, hj E G-, and Y(gi) 5/: O, y ( h j ) =/=O. Then Pz is the direct sum of the folowing irreducible S• (1) M1 ( f ) = M ( y ( f ) - 1, 1) | M ( y ( g ) ) | (~h M(l• , where f ~ G+, g ( f ) > 1, and the first factor in the tensorproduct corresponds to feG. (2) M 2 ( f ) -- M(2, 1z(f)-2) | ( ( ~ g M ( y ( g ) ) | ((~h#f M(1z(h))) , where f ~ G_, y ( f ) > 1, and the first factor in the tensor product corresponds to fEG. (3) r + s - 1 isomorphic copies of the module

(~g=/=f

g

5.4. Subvarieties of the metabelian variety Let K be a field of zero characteristic, G a finite group. THEOREM 5.5. Any proper subvariety ]2 of the metabelian variety of colour Lie superalgebras over K is multinilpotent, i.e. there exists y = (Yl . . . . . Yr) such that P~(V) = 0 as soon as the multidegree 3 = (81 . . . . . 3r) satisfies ~i >/ Yi, i = 1. . . . , r, where r = IGI.

Yu. Bahturin et al.

606

Here P~(V) is the multilinear component of multidegree 6 in the free superalgebra L(X,V). From the previous theorem it follows that any subvariety )2 in the metabelian variety can be defined by a finite set of its identities f l = 0 . . . . . fn -- O.

5.5. Let L

Grassmann envelopes =

(~g6GLg be

a colour Lie superalgebra defined by a form e : G x G --+ K*. Con-

sider a G-graded space V -- ( ~ g E G gg as an Abelian e - l - c o l o u r Lie superalgebra. Let P = U ( V ) be its universal enveloping algebra. Then the tensor product L | P is a nonassociative G-graded algebra. Its zero component G (L) is equal to direct sum of the subspaces Lg f~ P_g, g ~ G. Easy calculations show that (;(L) is a usual Lie algebra. If L is a Lie superalgebra over K, G = Z2, then e - l = e on G, V = V0 9 V1 and P = K [ V0] | A (V1), i.e. P is the tensor product of the polynomial ring P = K[V0] and the Grassmann algebra A (1/1). An important particular case is that of Vo - - 0 , V = V1, where P -- P0 @ P1 is the Grassmann algebra of the vector space V1. In this case G(L) = L0 | P0 @ L l | P1 is a Zzgraded Lie algebra. Moreover, if L = L0 ~ L i is some Zz-graded nonassociative algebra then G(L) will be a Lie algebra only if L is a Lie superalgebra. In all cases to follow we assume that for G = Z2, the space V is odd, i.e. V = Vl, and dim V = oo if K is a field.

5.6. Application of Lie superalgebras Recall that a variety V of Lie algebras over a field K is named a special one if V = var L where L is a special Lie algebra, i.e. it has an associative enveloping algebra with polynomial identity. Let char K -- 0. THEOREM 5.6 [Wa]. For any special variety V of Lie algebras there exists a certain .finitely generated special Lie superalgebra L = Lo ~ L! such that V = varY(L).

The basic rank rh(V) of a variety V is the least integer t such that V --- var R and the algebra R is generated by t elements, if such a number exists. Otherwise rh(V) = c~. THEOREM 5.7 [Za6]. Let V be a special variety of Lie algebras, V = var(~;(L)) where L = Lo G L1 is a specialfinitely generated Lie superalgebra. Suppose that W is the variety of Lie superalgebras generated by L. Then rb (F) < oe if and only if L satisfies a graded identity of the form (adx) n -- O, x ~ L l, and W does not contain any finite-dimensional simple Lie superalgebra H = 14o G Hi with H1 ~ O. THEOREM 5.8 [Za6]. The unique nonsolvable special variety of Lie algebras V such that rb(V) = oo and rb(Lt) < cx~f o r any proper subvariety Lt in V is var(G(osp(1,2))). Here osp(1, 2) = L0 @ L1 is the five-dimensional simple Lie superalgebra over K with even component L0 -~ sl(2, K), L l being the standard two-dimensional L0-module.


607

Generalizing the notion of basic rank of a Lie variety V one can define a superrank srb(V) as the least integer t such that V = var G(L) where L is a Lie superalgebra with t homogeneous generators. It was mentioned that any special Lie variety has a finite superrank. On the other hand, the superrank of almost every polynilpotent Lie variety is infinite. THEOREM 5.9 [Za8]. Let s ~ 2. Then the superrank of anyproduct A/'tl .. ".Arts of nilpotent Lie varieties is infinite except for the case s -- 2, t2 -- 1. In particular, any solvable Lie variety

e4 n , n

~> 3, is of infinite superrank.

6. F i n i t e n e s s c o n d i t i o n s

6.1. Types of finiteness conditions One of the most typical finiteness condition for a tings is being Noetherian. A colour Lie superalgebra is called Noetherian if any properly ascending chain of ideals H1 C H2 C .... in it has finite length. We shall consider also superalgebras with the Hopf property. A colour Lie superalgebra L possesses Hopf property if any epimorphism of L (i.e. surjective homomorphism) is an automorphism. In other words, if q9 is an endomorphism of L then the equality qg(L) -- L implies Ker q 9 - 0. Any Noetherian superalgebra possesses the Hopf property. The infinite-dimensional Abelian Lie algebra L with linear basis a l, a2 . . . . and endomorphism r ~ L such that 99(al) -- 0, qg(ai) = a i - 1 , i > 1, is an example of a superalgebra without Hopf's property. Note that any free colour Lie superalgebra L ( X ) over an infinite field K is not Noetherian but it satisfies the Hopf condition whenever 1 < IXI < c~.

Another type of finiteness condition is matrix representability. Let L -- ~ g ~ G Lg be a colour Lie superalgebra over a field K graded by a group G with a given bilinear form e. We say that L is a matrix representable ~ p e r a l g e b ~ if there existN an extension K of the ground field K and a finite-dimensional K-algebra L -- ~ g c G Lg with the same G and e such that L is embeddable in L as a K-algebra. A Lie superalgebra L over a field K is called residually finite if for any x ~ 0, x 6 L there exists a homomorphism qg"L --+ H onto a finite-dimensional over K superalgebra H such that qg(x) # 0. It is easy to see that L is residually finite if, and only if, it may be embedded in Cartesian product I-Ia L,~ where any Lc~ is of finite dimension. Residual finiteness and representability are closely related. THEOREM 6.1. Let K be an infinite field, A -- ~ g E G Ag be a G-graded K-algebra generated by a finite set of elements, G being a finite commutative semigroup. Then A is representable if and only if it can be embedded in Cartesian product 1--I~ A~ of n-dimensional G-graded K-algebras A~ for some n. The following examples illustrate the above definitions. Let G be an arbitrary Abelian group with alternating bilinear form e and let g, h be two elements of G (possibly not distinct). An example of a colour Lie superalgebra which is not residually finite is given by

608

Yu. Bahturin et al.

the Heisenberg superalgebra F = F(g, h) = ~ r E G f r. All components Fr, except Fg, Fh and Fg+h, are equal to zero. A basis of this superalgebra is formed by the set {ai, bi, c I i Z} where ai E f g, bi E l"h, c E f f g+h. The commutator is given by the formula [ai, bi ] ---e(g, h)[bi, ai] = c, i e Z, with all remaining commutators being zero. It is not residually finite since any ideal of finite codimension includes a nontrivial linear combination ~1al + "'"-~- ~,nan, thus also c. To obtain an example of a finitely generated colour Lie superalgebra it is necessary to adjoin to F (g, h) a binding derivation 3 : F (g, h) --+ F (g, h) and to place it into the zero component of the newly born algebra. As a result, we obtain a superalgebra B = B(g, h) all of whose components, except zero, are the same as in F(g, h) and B0 = F0 @ (6) with commutators given by [3, ai] = e ( g , h ) a i + l - e ( h , g ) a i - l ,

[6, bi] -- e(h, g)bi+l - e(g, h)bi-1. The superalgebra B(g, h) is not residually finite (and, as a concequence, is not representable) since it contains F (g, h).

6.2. Finiteness of irreducible representations The assertions of the two following theorems are similar to conditions of existence of polynomial identities in universal enveloping algebra. THEOREM 6.2. Let G be a finite group and L = ~)geG Lg a colour Lie superalgebra over an algebraically closed field K of zero characteristic. Then the dimensions of all irreducible L-representations are bounded by some finite number if and only if there exists a homogeneous L+-submodule M C L_ such that (1) d i m L _ / M < c~; (2) L+ is Abelian and [M, M] = 0; (3) dimx L+ < IKI. THEOREM 6.3. Let G be a finite group and L = ~[~g~G Lg be a colour Lie superalgebra over an algebraically closed field K of positive characteristic. Then the dimensions of all irreducible L-representations are bounded by some finite number if and only if there exists a homogeneous ideal R C L such that (1) d i m L / R < oo; (2) R 2 C R_; (3) all inner derivations adxlL+, x ~ Lg, g E G+, are algebraic of bounded degree; (4) dimx L+ < IKI.

6.3. Identities, maximality and Hopf conditions We present some sufficient conditions of maximality of Lie superalgebras in terms of their identities.


609

THEOREM 6.4. Let L -- (~geG Lg be a finitely generated solvable colour Lie superalgebra over a field K which is graded by a finite group G. l f for any gl, g2 ~ G, h ~ G+ an idenity of the form n

[x, y(n), Z ] - Z

~ J[ y(j)' x, y(n-j), Z],

(18)

j=l

d(x) = gl,

d(z) = g2,

d(y) = h,

Cr

9 9 Otn

~K

holds on L and Lr~ for some m >~ 1 acts on L as a nilpotent space of transformations then L is a Noetherian L-module. Here we use the notation [al,a2 . . . . . am,am+l] for the left-normed commutator [al, [a2 . . . . . [am, am+l]...]. In case of al = ... = am = b we write it as [b (m+l), am+l]. As usual, L~ denotes the m-th term of lower central series of algebra L+. Any colour Lie superalgebra satisfying the above conditions is Noetherian and possesses the Hopf property. An example of a colour Lie superalgebra satisfying all assertions of this theorem, in particular, identifies (18), is a metabelian algebra. Now let L be a usual Lie superalgebra, G = Z2, K an infinite field. Then only identifies of the form (18) guarantee the Noetherian and Hopf conditions provided that L is finitely generated and solvable. THEOREM 6.5. For a given locally soluble variety 12 o f Lie superalgebras over an infinite field K the following conditions are equivalent: (1) V is a locally Noetherian variety, (2) any finitely generated Lie superalgebra L = Lo @ L1 in 12 is a Noetherian Lomodule, (3) 12 is a locally H o p f variety, (4) 12 satisfies three identities

[x, y(n) , z] = ~

otji[y(j) ,x, y (n-j) , z]

(19)

j=l

with ~ ~ K, i = 1, 2, 3, where d(x) = d(z) -- 0 for i = 1, d(x) = O, d(z) = 1 for i = 2 and d(x) = d(z) = 1 if i = 3. The element y is even f o r all i = 1, 2, 3. We say that a variety 12 has some property locally if any finitely generated algebra from V possesses this property.

6.4. Residual finiteness and representability First note that residual finiteness of a colour Lie superalgebra L and its universal enveloping algebra U(L) are equivalent.

610

Yu. Bahturin et al.

THEOREM 6.6 [Mik6]. Let K be a field, char K r 2, 3, L a colour Lie superalgebra over K. Then L is residuallyfinite if and only if its universal enveloping algebra U ( L ) is residual finite. In the case char K = p > 3 let M be a colour Lie p-superalgebra and u ( M ) its restricted universal enveloping algebra. Then M is residuallyfinite if and only if u ( M ) is residually finite. In the case of Lie algebras this theorem is due to W. Michaelis [Mic 1,Mic2]. Sufficient conditions for residual finiteness or representability of formulated algebra L may be both in terms of its ideals and in terms of identities on L. THEOREM 6.7. Let L -- ~]~gEG Lg be a finitely generated colour Lie superalgebra over an infinite field K and G a finite group. Suppose that L contains an Abelian ideal A of finite codimension and, in addition, L 2 lies in A in case char K -- O. Then L is a representable algebra. THEOREM 6.8. Let L be a finitely generated soluble colour Lie superalgebra over an infinite field K graded by a finite group G. I f f o r any gl, g2 c G, h ~ G+, L satisfies an identity of the form (18), L~_ acts on L as a nilpotent space o f transformations and, in addition, m = 2 if char K - - 0 then L is representable. The claim IGI < oo is necessary in the previous theorems. It can be illustrated by the following example. Let L = P + M be a metabelian algebra where P is an Abelian algebra with basis {x, y, } and M is an Abelian ideal in L spanned by {zi l i ~ Z}. The multiplication in L is given by the following: [x, zi ] = zi-1, [y, zi ] = Zi+l, i ~ Z. So, L is a Z-graded algebra where L i - - (Zi) for i ~ + 1, L l = (Y, z), L_ I = (x, z-I ). If we define e(m, n) = 1 for all m, n ~ Z then L becomes a colour Lie superalgebra with nonzero least homogeneous ideal M. So, L is a 3-generator monolithic metabelian algebra of infinite dimension. Hence it is not residually finite. Now consider Lie superalgebras (G = Z2) over an infinite field field K. Then the sufficient conditions for residual finiteness and representability in terms of identities cannot be extended to a wider class of solvable varieties. THEOREM 6.9. Let 1; be a locally solvable variety of Lie superalgebras over an infinite fieM K, char K > 2. Then the following conditions are equivalent: (1) ]2 is locally representable; (2) "12 is locally residually finite; (3) ]2 satisfies three identities (19). Note that the nilpotency of the action of L't~ on L for some m is a consequence of the identities (19) for usual Lie superalgebras. If char K = 0, one can drop the restriction of locally solvability. THEOREM 6.10. For a variety of Lie superalgebras l; over afield K o f zero characteristic the following conditions are equivalent.

Infinite-dimensional Lie superal gebras

611

(1) V is locally representable; (2) V is locally residually finite; (3) V satisfies three identities (19) and, in addition, on any finitely generated Lie superalgebra in V the f o l l o w i n g identity holds:

[[xl, yll, ..., [Xm, Yy], z] = O, d ( x i ) -- d ( y i ) = O,

(20)

i = 1 . . . . . m,

f o r some m.

This result does not extend the class of locally representable varieties since the conditions of the theorem lead to locally solvability. The class of locally representable varieties of colour Lie superalgebras over an infinite field K is rather wide. To illustrate this, denote by Act the variety of all nilpotent K-superalgebras with nilpotency degree no greater than t, i.e. Art is defined by the nongraded identity [Xl . . . . . Xs+l] = 0. The product W V of two varieties consists of all superalgebras L such that for some ideal H in L one has: H ~ W , L / H ~ V. Then any variety ~ where Jt -- A/'l over an infinite field of positive characteristic is locally representable. Over a field of zero characteristic any variety .Ms A N A N t is locally representable. It is interesting that the identifies of the form (20) in all finitely generated algebras from V do not imply the same relation in an arbitrary algebra L E V. So, consider the variety V of Lie algebras over a field K, char K = 0, given by two identities: [[Xl, X2, X3], [Yl, Y2, Y3]] - - 0 , [[Xl, X2], [Xl, X3], [X2, X4]] - - 0 . It is known that V does not lie in ACt,A but any finitely generated Lie algebra from ~2 has a nilpotent commutant. This variety is also locally residually finite and locally representable. Another significant property of V is that it is the unique solvable variety of infinite basic rank such that rb ( W ) < oo whenever W C V, W ~ V.

References

[Ab] E. Abe, HopfAlgebras, Cambridge University Press (1980). [Bab] I.K. Babenko, Analytic properties of Poincar6 series of a loop space, Mat. Zametld 27 (1980), 751765. [Bahl] Yu.A. Bahturin, Approximations of Lie algebras, Mat. Zametki 12 (1972), 713-716. English transl. Math. Notes 12 (1972), 868-870. [Bah2] Yu.A. Bahturin, Identities in the universal envelopes of Lie algebras, J. Austral. Math. Soc. 18 (1974), 10-21. [Bah3] Yu.A. Bahturin, Lectures on Lie Algebras, Akademie-Verlag, Berlin (1978). [Bah4] Yu.A. Bahturin, A remark on irreducible representations of Lie algebras, J. Austral. Math. Soc. 27 (1979), 332-336. [Bah5] Yu.A. Bahturin, Identities in the universal enveloping algebra for a Lie superalgebra, Mat. Sb. 127 (1985), 384-397. English transl. Math. USSR-Sb. 55 (1986), 383-396. [Bah6] Yu.A. Bahturin, Identical Relations in Lie Algebras, VNU Science Press, Utrecht (1987). [Bah7] Yu.A.Bahturin, On degrees of irreducible representations ofLie superalgebras, C. R. Math. Acad. Sci. Canada 10 (1987), 19-24. [Bah8] Yu.A. Bahturin, Lie superalgebras with bounded degrees of irreducible representations, Mat. Sb. 180 (1989), 195-206. English transl. Math. USSR-Sb. 66 (1990), 199-209.

612

Yu. Bahturin et al.

[BD] Yu.A. Bahturin and V.S. Drensky, Identities of the soluble colour Lie superalgebras, Algebra i Logika 26 (1987), 403-418. English transl. Algebra and Logic 26 (1987) 229-240. [BMPZ] Yu.A. Bahturin, A.A. Mikhalev, M.V. Zaitsev and V.M. Petrogradsky, Infinite Dimensional Lie Superalgebras, Walter de Gruyter, Berlin (1992). [BMo] Yu. Bahturin and S. Montgomery, Pl-envelopes of Lie superalgebras, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 127 (1999), 2829-2839. [BZ1 ] Yu.A. Bahturin and M.V. Zaicev, Residual finiteness of colour Lie superalgebras, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 337 (1993), 159-180. [BZ2] Yu.A. Bahturin and M.V. Zaicev, Identities ofgraded algebras, J. Algebra 205 (1998), 1-12. [Beh] E.J. Behr, Enveloping algebras of Lie superalgebras, Pacif. J. Math. 130 (1987), 9-25. [Ber] EA. Berezin, Introduction to Algebra and Analysis with Anticommuting Variables, Izdat MGU, Moscow (1983). [BP] J. Bergen and D.S. Passman, Delta methods in enveloping rings, J. Algebra 133 (1990), 277-312. [Berg] G.M. Bergman, The diamond lemmafor ring theory, Adv. in Math. 29 (1978) 178-218. [Bo] L.A. Bokut', Embeddings into simple associative algebras, Algebra i Logika 15 (1976), 117-142. English transl. Algebra and Logic 15 (1976), 73-90. [BK] L.A. Bokut' and G.P. Kukin, Algorithmic and Combinatorial Algebra, Kluwer Academic Publishers, Dordrecht (1994). [BKLM] L.A. Bokut', S.-J. Kang, K.-H. Lee and E Malcolmson, Gr6bner-Shirshov bases for Lie superalgebras and their universal enveloping algebras, J. Algebra 217 (1999), 461-495. [Br] M.R. Bryant, On the fixed points of a finite group acting on a free Lie algebra, J. London Math. Soc. (2) 43 (1991), 215-224. [CFL] K.T. Chen, R.H. Fox and R.C. Lyndon, Free differential calculus IE. The quotient groups of the lower central series, Ann. Math. (2) 68 (1958), 81-95. [Co] EM. Cohn, Subalgebras offree associative algebras, Proc. London Math. Soc. 14 (1964), 618-632. [Di] J. Dixmier, Algebres Enveloppantes, Gauthier-Villars, Paris (1974). [Dr] V. Drensky, Fixed algebras of residually nilpotent Lie algebras, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 120 (1994), 1021-1028. [GK1] V.P. Gerdt and V.V. Kornyak, Construction of finitely presented Lie algebras and superalgebras, J. Symbolic Comput. 21 (1996), 337-349. [GK2] V.E Gerdt and V.V. Kornyak, A program for constructing a complete system of relations, basis elements and tables of commutators of finitely presented Lie algebras and superalgebras, Programmirovanie No. 3 (1997), 58-71. English transl. Program. Comput. Software 23 (3) (1997), 164-172. [Hall M.] M. Hall, A basis for free Lie algebras and higher commutators in free groups, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 1 (1950), 575-581. [Hall E] E Hall, A contribution to the theory of groups of a prime power order, Proc. London Math. Soc. 36 (1934), 29-95. [Han] K.C. Hannabuss, An obstruction to generalized superalgebras, J. Phys. A 20 (17) (1987), Ll135L1138. [He] I.N. Herstein, Noncommutative Rings, Carus Math. Monograph 15, MMA (1968). [Ja] N. Jacobson, Lie Algebras, Wiley-Interscience, New York (1962). [Kacl] V.G. Kac, Lie superalgebras, Adv. in Math. 26 (1977), 8-96. [Kac2] V.G. Kac, A sketch ofLie superalgebras theory, Comm. Math. Phys. 53 (1977), 31-64. [Kac3] V.G. Kac, Classification of simple Z-graded Lie superalgebras, Comm. Algebra 5 (1977), 1375-1400. [Kac4] V.G. Kac, Classification of infinite-dimensional simple linearly compact Lie superalgebras, Adv. Math. 139 (1998), 1-55. [Kang] S.-J. Kang, Graded Lie superalgebras and the superdimension formula, J. Algebra 204 (1998), 597655. [Kant] I.L. Kantor, An analogue of E. Witt'sformula for the dimensions of homogeneous components of free Lie superalgebras, Differential Geometry and Lie Algebras (Moscow Region Pedagogical Institute, 1983, in Russian), Deposited VINITI, 17th April 1984, No. 2384-84 Dep. [Ku] G.E Kukin, On subalgebras of free Lie p-algebras, Algebra i Logika 11 (1972), 535-550. English transl. Algebra and Logic 11 (1972), 33-50. [La] V.N. Latyshev, Two remarks on PI-algebras, Sibirsk. Mat. Zh. 4 (1963) 1120-1121.


613

[Le] D.A. Leites, Lie superalgebras, VINITI, Itogi Nauki i Tekhniki, Modern Problems of Math. Recent Progress, Vol. 25 (1984), 3-50. English transl. J. Soviet Math. 30 (1985), 2481-2512. [Mal] W. Magnus, Beziehungen zwischen Gruppen und Idealen in einem speziellen Ring, Math. Ann. 111 (1935), 259-280. [Ma2] W. Magnus, Ober Beziehungen zwischen h6heren Kommutatoren, J. Reine Angew. Math. 177 (1937), 105-115. [MR] J.C. McConnell and J.C. Robson, Noncommutative Noetherian Rings, Wiley, New York (1987). [Mic 1] W. Michaelis, Properness of Lie algebras and enveloping algebras, I, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 101 (1987), 17-23. [Mic2] W. Michaelis, Properness of Lie algebras and enveloping algebras, II, Lie algebras and related topics. Canad. Math. Soc. Conf. Proc. 5 (1986), 265-280. [Mikl] A.A. Mikhalev, Subalgebras offree colour Lie superalgebras, Mat. Zametki 37 (1985), 653-661. English transl. Math. Notes, 356-360. [Mik2] A.A. Mikhalev, Free colour Lie superalgebras, Dokl. Akad. Nauk SSSR 286 (1986), 551-554. English transl. Soviet Math. Dokl. 33 (1986), 136-139. [Mik3] A.A. Mikhalev, Subalgebras offree Lie p-superalgebras, Mat. Zametki 43 (1988), 178-191. English transl. Math. Notes, 99-106. [Mik4] A.A. Mikhalev, The junction lemma and the equality problem for colour Lie superalgebras, Vestnik Moskov. Univ. Ser. 1. Mat. Mekh., No. 5 (1989), 88-91. English transl. Moscow Univ. Math. Bull., 87-90. [Mik5] A.A. Mikhalev, Embedding of Lie superalgebras of countable rank into a two generated Lie superalgebras, Uspekhi Mat. Nauk SSSR 45 (1990), 139-140. English transl. Russian Math. Surveys 45 (1990), 162-163. [Mik6] A.A. Mikhalev, Ado-Iwasawa theorem, graded Hopf algebras and residual finiteness of colour Lie (p)superalgebras and their universal enveloping algebras, Vestnik. Moscov. Univ. Ser. 1. Mat. Mekh., No. 5 (1991), 72-74. English transl. Moscow Univ. Math. Bull. 46 (1991), No. 5, 51-53. [Mik7] A.A. Mikhalev, On fixed points of a free colour Lie superalgebra under the action of a finite group of linear automorphisms, Uspekhi Mat. Nauk 47 (1992), 205-207. English transl. Russian Math. Surveys. 47 (1992), No. 4, 220-221. [Mik8] A.A. Mikhalev, A.I. Shirshov' composition techniques in Lie superalgebras (non commutative Gr6bner bases), Trudy Sem. Petrovsk. 18 (1995), 277-289. Enlish transl. J. Math. Sci. 80 (1996), 2153-2160. [MY] A.A. Mikhalev and J.-T. Yu, Test elements, retracts and automorphic orbits of free algebras, Internat. J. Algebra Comput. 8 (1998), 295-310. [MZ1] A.A. Mikhalev and A.A. Zolotykh, Rank and primitivity of elements of free color Lie (p-)superalgebras, Intern. J. Algebra Comput. 4 (1994), 617-656. [MZ2] A.A. Mikhalev and A.A. Zolotykh,~Automorphisms and primitive elements of free Lie superalgebras, Comm. Algebra 22 (1994), 5889-5901. [MZ3] A.A. Mikhalev and A.A. Zolotykh, Combinatorial Aspects of Lie Superalgebras, CRC Press, Boca Raton, New York (1995). [MZA] A.A. Mikhalev and A.A. Zolotykh, Ranks of subalgebras of free Lie superalgebras, Vestnik Mosk. Univ. Ser. 1. Mat. Mekh, No. 2 (1996), 36-40. English transl. Moscow Univ. Math. Bull. 51 (2) (1996), 32-35. [MZ5] A.A. Mikhalev and A.A. Zolotykh, Complex of algorithms for computation in Lie superalgebras, Programmirovanie, No. 1 (1997), 12-23. English transl. Program. Comput. Software 23 (1) (1997), 8-16. [MT] A.I. Molev and L.M. Tsalenko, Representation of the symmetric group in the free Lie (super) algebra and in the space of harmonic polynomials, Funktsional. Anal. i Prilozhen. 20 (1986), 76-77. English transl. Funktional Anal. Appl. 20 (1986), 150-152. [Mo] S. Montgomery, Constructing simple Lie superalgebras from associative graded algebras, J. Algebra 195 (1997), 558-579. [Mu] I.M. Musson, Some Lie superalgebras associated to the Weyl algebras, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 127 (1999), 2821-2827. [Ne] H. Neumann, Varieties of Groups, Springer, Berlin (1967). [Pal] D.S. Passman, Enveloping algebras satisfying polynomial identity, J. Algebra 134 (1990), 469-490. [Pa2] D.S. Passman, Simple Lie color algebras of Witt type, J. Algebra 208 (1998), 698-721.

614

Yu. Bahturin et al.

[Pel ] V.M. Petrogradsky, On restricted enveloping algebras for Lie p-algebras, Proc. 5-th Siberian Conf. on Varieties of Algebraic Systems, Barnaul (1988), 52-55. [Pe2] V.M. Petrogradsky, On the existence of identity in restricted enveloping algebras, Mat. Zametki 49 (1991), 84-93. English transl. Math. Notes, 60-66. [Pe3] V.M. Petrogradsky, Identities in the enveloping algebras for modular Lie superalgebras, J. Algebra 145 (1992), 1-21. [Pe4] V.M. Petrogradsky, Exponential Schreier's formula for free Lie algebras and its applications, J. Math. Sci. 93 (1999), 939-950. [Ree] R. Ree, Generalized Lie elements, Canad. J. Math. 12 (1960), 493-502. [Re] G. Renault, Sur les anneaux de groups, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris 273 (1971), 84-87. [Reu] C. Reutenauer, Free Lie Algebras, Clavendon Press, Oxford (1993). [RW 1] V. Rittenberg and D. Wyler, Sequences of Z 2 ~ Z2-graded Lie algebras and superalgebras, J. Math. Phys. 19 (1978), 2193-2200. [RW2] V. Rittenberg and D. Wyler, Generalized superalgebras, Nuclear Phys. B 139 (1978), 189-202. [Scl] M. Scheunert, Generalized Lie algebras, J. Math. Phys. 20 (1979), 712-720. [Sc2] M. Scheunert, The Theory of Lie Superalgebras. An Introduction, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 716 (1979). [Shil] A.I. Shirshov, Subalgebras offree Lie algebras, Mat. Sb. 33 (1953), 441-452. [Shi2] AT Shirshov, On free Lie rings, Mat. Sb. 45 (1958), 113-122. [Shi3] A.I. Shirshov, Some algorithmic problems about Lie algebras, Sibirsk. Mat. Zh. 3 (1962), 292-296. [Shi4] AT Shirshov, About one conjecture in the theory of Lie algebras, Sibirsk. Mat. Zh. 3 (1962), 297-301. [Shi5] AT Shirshov, On bases offree Lie algebras, Algebra i Logika 1 (1962), 14-19. [Shi6] A.I. Shirshov, Collected Works. Rings and Algebras, Nauka, Moscow (1984). [Sht] A.S. Shtern, Free Lie superalgebras~ Sibirsk. Mat. Zh. 27 (1986), 170-174. [Sw] M.E. Sweedler, HopfAlgebras, Benjamin, New York (1969). [Um] U.U. Umirbaev, On the approximation of free Lie algebras with respect to entry, Sci. Notes of Tartu Univ. 878 (1990), 147-152. [Va] M.A. Vasiliev, De Sitter supergravity with positive cosmological constant and generalized Lie superalgebras, Class. and Quantum Gravity 2 (1985), 645-652. [Vi] O.E. Villamayor, On weak dimensions of algebras, Pasific J. Math. 9 (1959), 941-951. [Wa] A. Wais, On special varieties of Lie algebras, Algebra i Logika 28 (1988), 29-40. [Wil] M.C. Wilson, Bell's primeness criterion and the simple Lie superalgebras, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 133 (1998), 214-260. [Wil] E. Witt, Treu Darstellung Liescher Ringe, J. Reine Angew. Math. 177 (1937), 152-160. [Wi2] E. Witt, Die Unterringe derfreien Lieschen Ringe, Math. Z. 64 (1956), 195-216. [Zal] M.V. Zaicev, Locally residually finite varieties of Lie algebras, Mat. Zametki 44 (1988), 352-361. English transl. Math. Notes 44 (1988), 674--680. [Za2] M.V. Zaicev, Residual finiteness and the Noetherian property of finitely generated Lie algebras, Mat. Sb. 136 (1988), 500-509. English transl. Math. USSR-Sb. 64 (1989), 495-504. [Za3] M.V. Zaicev, Locally Hopf varieties of Lie algebras, Mat. Zametki 45 (1989), 56-61. English transl. Math. Notes 45 (1989), 469-472. [Za4] M.V. Zaicev, Locally representable varieties of Lie algebras, Mat. Sb. 180 (1989), 798-808. English transl. Math. USSR-Sb. 67 (1990), 249-259. [Za5] M.V. Zaicev, Locally representable varieties ofLie superalgebras, Mat. Zametki 52 (5) (1992), 33-41. English transl. Math. Notes 52 (1992), 1101-1106. [Za6] M.V. Zaicev, Basic rank of varieties of Lie algebras, Mat. Sb. 184 (9) (1993), 21-40. English transl. Sbornik: Math. 80 (1995), 15-31. [Za7] M.V. Zaicev, On an extremal variety of Lie superalgebras, Vestnik Moskov. Univ. Ser. 1 Mat. Mekh. No. 6 (1997), 18-20. English transl. Moscow Univ. Math. Bull. 52 (6) (1997), 11-14. [Za8] M.V. Zaicev, A superrank of varieties of Lie algebras, Algebra i Logika 37 (1998), 394-412. English transl. Algebra and Logic 37 (1998), 223-233. [ZM] M.V. Zaicev and S.P. Mishchenko, A criterion for the polynomial growth of varieties of Lie superalgebras, Izv. Ross. Akad. Nauk Ser. Mat. 62 (5) (1998), 103-116. English transl. Izv. Math. 62 (1998), 953-967.

Nilpotent and Solvable Lie Algebras Michel Goze and Yusupdjan Khakimdjanov University of Haute Alsace, Faculty of Sciences, 4, rue des Frkres Lumibre, 68093 Mulhouse C~dex, France

Contents 1. Generalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1. Derived series, central series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.2. Definition of solvable Lie algebras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.3. Definition of nilpotent Lie algebras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.4. The Engel Theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.5. Lie's theorem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6. Caftan criterion for a solvable Lie algebra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Invariants of nilpotent Lie algebras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1. The dimension of characteristic ideals and the nilindex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2. The characteristic sequence (K - - C ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3. The rank of a nilpotent Lie algebra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4. Other invariants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. Some classes of nilpotent and solvable Lie algebras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1. Filiform Lie algebras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.2. Description of Lie algebras whose nilradical is filiform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.3. Two-step nilpotent Lie algebras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.4. Characteristically nilpotent Lie algebras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.5. k-Abelian filiform Lie algebras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.6. Left-symmetric filiform Lie algebras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.7. Standard Lie algebras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. On the Classification of low-dimensional nilpotent and solvable Lie algebras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1. Classification of nilpotent Lie algebras of dimension less than 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2. On the classification of the low-dimensional filiform Lie algebras . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 . 3 . On the rigid solvable Lie algebras of dimension 1.

1.2. Definition of solvable Lie algebras DEFINITION 1. A Lie algebra ~ is called solvable if there exists an integer k such that Ok9 = {0}. EXAMPLES OF SOLVABLE LIE ALGEBRAS. (1) An Abelian Lie algebra. (2) The Lie algebra of the affine group of the straight line: it is generated by two independent vectors x and y satisfying: [x, y] -- x. (3) The subalgebra of gl(n, K) formed by the upper triangular matrices. (4) Let V be a vector space of dimension n and let D = (0 = V0 C VI C .-- C Vn) be a flag of V, that is a sequence of increasing vector subspaces such that lim V/-- i. Let b(D) = { f ~ End V: f ( V i ) C Vi for all i ~ 0}. Then b(D) is a solvable Lie algebra for the bracket:

[f, g l = f

og-go

f.

The matrices of the elements of b(D) relative to an adapted basis of the flag are triangular. PROPOSITION 1. A Lie algebra g is solvable if and only if there exists a descending series

of ideals of

g = l o D l l D.-.DIk={0} such that[I j, l j] C lj+l for 0 9,

~ -- (0o, 01 . . . . . 8 n - s - 3 ) ~ (C*, c n - ' ~ - 3 ) . "- /-ZO -'[-- q-/1,s -'[" 80t/-/2,s+2 "+- tI-'t2,k-["Sk-s-ltlt2,k+l -'F-''"

(7) #7,s,s+2(~)

-4- 8 n - s - 3 t/-/Z,n--1, where n--2s-1,

s+2 0 and ~ = v - ot = ~l + " " + ~m is in A. We each partial sum ~l + " " + ~r of ~ is in A. Let ~' = ~l + " " + ~m-1. Then v. F r o m L e m m a 47, one has v - ~' = v - ~1 . . . . . ~m-1 is a root. By a we can affirm that v - ~! ~ ,4. As ~1 ~ SV, this is impossible. V1

THEOREM 50. Let n be a standard nilpotent subalgebra associated to a set R of pairwise non-comparable roots. Then the normalizer N ( n ) of n (it is parabolic because n is standard) is defined by the subset S1 = U

Sfl C S.

tiER PROOF. Let t be a parabolic subalgebra associated to the system S1 and let n = ~otER1 ~[ot (R1 is defined above). By L e m m a 47, we can write t C N ( n ) . Suppose that t # N ( n ) . As A -- A 1 [,.J A2, there is an ct ~ A~- such that X_~ 6 N ( n ) . This shows that the decomposition of ct in simple roots contains one element v of S1 (by definition of Sl, v is an extremal element for a fl 6 R). But N ( n ) is a parabolic subalgebra. Then the vector X - v is in the normalizer N ( n ) . More, we have either fl - v 6 A or fl = v. If fi - v ~ A then [X/~, X - v ] = a.Xl3-v ~ n with a :/: O. If fl = v then [Xr X - v ] = [Xv, X-v] ~ n, but this vector is also in the Cartan subalgebra. These two jads form a contradiction. V] COROLLARY 51. Every system R C A + of pairwise noncomparable roots defines a nilpotent standard subalgebra:

n= E g ~ . otER1

Nilpotent and solvable Lie algebras

649

Its normalizer is the parabolic subalgebra associated to the subsystem S1 --

U S~" tiER

Conversely, every nilpotent standard subalgebra is conjugate to a subalgebra n associated to a subsystem R C A + o f pairwise noncomparable roots. 3.7.6. On nilpotent algebras o f maximal rank. Let ~I be a semi simple complex Lie algebra and let ~t+ -- Y~a~A+~t~ be its nilpotent part. If n is a standard nilpotent Lie algebra then the quotient ~t+ / n is also nilpotent. This process permits to construct a class of nilpotent Lie algebras. This class contains all nilpotent Lie algebras of maximal rank studied by G. Favre and L. Santharoubane. 3.7.7. Complete Standard Lie algebras DEFINITION 10. A standard nilpotent algebra n is called complete if it is the nilradical of its normalizer. It is easy to see that such an algebra is conjugate to a subalgebra associated to a subset of simple roots. THEOREM 5 2. Let n be a standard nilpotent Lie algebra associated to a system R C A + o f non-comparable roots. The following assertions are equivalent: (i) n is an intersection o f complete standard nilpotent subalgebras associated to some subsystems o f S, (ii) every element fl E R can be written under the f o r m fl = al + ... + am with al . . . . . am E S and ai ~ a j f o r i ~ j. PROOF. (ii) ==> (i) W e p u t R -- {ill . . . . . ilk} and qrR : {Uk=l{ai}: ai E S fli , i -- 1, . . . , k } . Every element S t of 4)R is a subset of S and defines a standard nilpotent complete subalgebra ns,. We easily show that ns, D n for all S t 6 ~bR. Then n t = (']SS4~Rns, satisfies the inclusion n t D n. Suppose that a 6 A +, X~ 6 n t and Xc~ ~ n. The decomposition of a in simple roots does not contain the roots of S fl when fl ~ R (if not we will have X~ 6 n, by L e m m a 47). If we consider the elements S t = (.J/k=1 {ai } of q~R, where a r ai for i = 1 . . . . . k (recall that ai G_ S fii ), then Xc~ r ns,; this is contrary to the choice of X~. (i) :=~ (ii) Let be n = Ain=l ni where ni is a complete nilpotent standard subalgebra associated to the system Si of simple roots. Consider a root fl in R. Suppose that its decomposition fl -- kial -Jr " " -Jr-kmam contains a coefficient ki strictly greater than 1. As X~ is in n = ["] hi, there is Yi in Si such that t3 >~ Yi for all i, 1 ~< i ~< n. Then for the root /~t __ 19/1 -~- "" 9-+- a m E R +, we shall have also fit ~> Yi for all i. Then the vector Xt~, is in each ni for all i and thus Xt~, is in n. It is impossible because fit < ft. V1

M. Goze and Yu. Khakimdjanov

650

REMARK 5. If the semisimple Lie algebra ~t is of type An, condition (ii) is necessary satisfied. The decomposition of n as intersection of complete subalgebra always is true. This result was already been proved by Gurevich. COMMENTS. It would be very interesting to consider the standard subalgebras of the affine K a c - M o o d y algebras.

References for this subsection: [ 17,21,25,31 ].

4. On the Classification of low-dimensional nilpotent and solvable Lie algebras 4.1. Classification of nilpotent Lie algebras of dimension less than 7 4.1.1. The classification in dimension less than 6. By convention, all not defined brackets are null. The classifications in dimensions ~< 5 are given for the nilpotent Lie algebras over a field of characteristic 0. In dimension 6 we give it in the cases K = C and K = I~.

Dimension I n I -- a l -- the Abelian Lie algebra of dimension 1.

Dimension 2 n 2 -- a 2 -- the Abelian algebra of dimension 2.

Dimension 3 n~ = ct~ -- the Abelian algebra of dimension 3, n23 = H 1 -- the Heisenberg algebra d e f n e d by [Xl, X2] = X3. From the dimension 4, we do not write down the decomposable Lie algebras, that is those Lie algebras which are direct sums of proper ideals.

Dimension 4 n 4" IX1, X2] -- X3; [Xl, X3] -- X4. This is a filiform law.

Dimension 5 1l5. [ X l , 2 2 ] - - X 3 ;

[Xl,X3]--X4; [X1,24]-'-X5,

n5: [Xl, X2] -- X3; [Xl, X3] -- X4; [Xl, X4] = X5; [X2, X3] = X5.


These two laws are the 5-dimensional filiform laws.

Dimension 6 ( K = C)

These laws are the filifonn laws.

65 1

M. Goze and Yu. Khakimdjanov

652

n~9" [X1, X3] -- X6; [X1, X3] -- X4; [X1, X3] "- X5, n620. [X1, X2] -- X3; [X1, X3] -- X4; [X1, X5] = X6. If K -- N, we have n~, n 2 . . . . . n 2~ and n 21" [X1, X3] = X5; [X1, X4] -- X6; [X2, X4] = X5; [X2, X3] = - X 6 , II22. 6 9 [X1,X2]'--X3; [X1,X3]--X5; [ X I , X 4 ] = X 6 ; [X2, X3] -- - X 6 ,

[X2, X 4 ] = X 5 ;

n23: [X1, X3] = S4; [Xl, X4] -- X6; [X2, X3] = X5; [X2, X5] = - X 6 , n~4: [XI, X2] = X3; [X1, X3] = X4; [XI, X4] -- X6; [X2, X3] = X5; [X2, X5] = - X 6 . 4.1.2. On the classification in dimension 7. The previous tables show that, for the dimension less than 6, there is a finite number of isomorphism classes of nilpotent Lie algebras. But, for the dimension 7 and more, we are going to find families with one or more parameters of nonisomorphic Lie algebras. It is the same to say that the variety of isomorphism classes has nonzero dimension. These one parameter families of isomorphic classes of 7-dimensional nilpotent algebra is not the only obstacle. There is, in the variety of isomorphism classes, a number of isolated points. So every table of dimension 7 is very difficult to establish. At this time we have 3 or 4 tables given by various authors. Unfortunately, it is very complicated to compare these lists because the techniques used and the invariants considered are very different (characteristic sequence, rank, extension). The links between the invariant used are not evident. Probably, all the classifications of 7-dimensional nilpotent Lie algebras contain some mistakes.

References for this subsection: [2,21,43,45,47,48]. 4.2. On the classification of the low-dimensional filiform Lie algebras We have a complete classification up to isomorphism of the complex filiform Lie algebras of dimension ~< 11 (see the references). Here we give the list for the dimensions ~< 9. We use the notations of Section 3.1.

Dimension 3 /x~: /xo.

Dimension 4 /z~: #o.

Dimension 5 ~1. /~0, #2: /zO -+- t//1,4.


Dimension 6

Dimension 7

Dimension 8

653

654

Dimension 9

M.Goze and Yu. Khakimdjanov


655

//36. /z 0 + t//1,7 ' #37. /z 0 + (//1,8, /z938" /2,0.

References for this subsection: [1,20].

4.3. On the rigid solvable Lie algebras of dimension 0 the equation a = p n x has a solution in A, we say that a is an element o f infinite p-height: h p (a) = oo. If a has infinite p-height for every prime p then the element a is divisible in A by any k > 0. If this property takes place for all elements of A the group A is called divisible. Every divisible group is a direct sum of groups isomorphic to Q and/or groups of type p ~ for some p ([7, Theorem 23.1 ]). Every group G contains a greatest divisible subgroup (the sum of all divisible subgroups of G, see Point 2). We call this subgroup the divisible part d G of G. If d G = 0 the group G is called reduced. Each divisible group is a direct summand in every group, containing it as a subgroup. Thus for any group G we have G = d G @ R, where R is a reduced group, which is uniquely determined up to isomorphism (R ~- G / d G ) (see [7, Section 21]). A subgroup H of G is called an absolute direct summand if G = H @ K for any subgroup K maximal with respect to H A K -- 0. Let us note that d G is an absolute direct summand of G. Each group G can be embedded as a subgroup in a divisible group D. Moreover, there exists a minimal divisible subgroup of D containing G. Any minimal divisible subgroup containing G, is uniquely determined up to isomorphism over G (this means that the isomorphism leaves invariant all the elements of G). Every such subgroup is called the divisible hull of G ([7, Section 24]). If G is a p-group then each of its elements has infinite q-height for all prime q ~ p. Note that a reduced p-group can also contain elements with infinite p-height. For example, we may take the so called Priifer group determined by generators ao, a l . . . . . a n . . . . and defining relations pao = O, pal = ao, peae = ao . . . . . pnan = ao . . . . ([7, Section 35]).

Infinite Abelian groups: Methods and results

673

For any group G let oo

p G = {g ~ G l h p ( g ) >~ 1}, p2G = p ( p G ) . . . . .

pC~ = [-1 pnG n=l

and in general p~+ 1G -- p(p~ G) for all ordinal numbers ot and

P E G = A p• ~,l)

ker Ct i + l , i = 0 . . . . . k - 2. An exact sequence of the form

O----> A--~ B ~-~ C--->O

(*)

is called a short exact sequence. The group G is called injective (projective) with respect to the given exact sequence (,) if for any homomorphism ~o: A --> G (for any homomorphism :G ---->C, respectively) there is a homomorphism v: B ~ G (homomorphism # : G ----> B, respectively), such that ~p = v c t (respectively, ~ = / ~ # ) .

2. Primary groups 1. L.Ya. Kulikov ([7, Theorem 17.1]) obtained a criterion for decomposability of a pgroup G into direct sum of cyclic groups, that gives as important corollaries (the first and the second Priifer theorems, see [7, Theorems 17.2, 17.3] and [ 1 l, Section 24]): (1) Any bounded group (Section 1, Point 3) is a direct sum of cyclic groups; (2) A countable p-group is a direct sum of cyclic groups if and only if it does not contain nonzero elements of infinite height (i.e. p-height, see Section l, Point 4). In the uncountable case a p-group without (nonzero) elements of infinite height can be not a direct sum of cyclic groups (see [ 1 l, Section 26]). But p-groups without elements of infinite height (and among p-groups only they) have the property that every finite system of elements of the group is contained in some direct summand of it which is a direct sum of cyclic groups (such p-groups are called separable, see [7, Section 65]).


675

2. One of the most useful tools for studying p-groups is the notion of a basic subgroup ([7, Section 33], [ 11, Section 26]) introduced by L.Ya. Kulikov. A subgroup B of a p-group G is called basic if it is pure in G (Section 1, Point 5), is a direct sum of cyclic groups and is such that G / B is a divisible group (Section 1, Point 4). Any p-group contains a basic subgroup, and all basic subgroups of any p-group are isomorphic to each other. Let a p-group G without elements of infinite height have a basic subgroup B -- ~ ) Bi, where Bi - ( ~ Z ( p i) (i is fixed). Then the group G is isomorphic to a pure subgroup containing B of the torsion part/3 of the group I-I Bi ; the converse is also true ([55], [ 11, Section 26]). But so far there are no criteria for two pure subgroups of the group/}, containing ( ~ Bi to be isomorphic to each other. H. Leptin (1960) has shown that if Bi -- Z ( p i) (i = 1, 2 . . . . ) then/} contains 2 s non-isomorphic pure subgroups which contain ( ~ Bi. The groups of type B = t (I-I Bi) (Bi -- ( ~ Z (pi)) are called torsion complete or closed p-groups ([7, Section 68], [ 11, Section D.30, Point 2]. Two torsion complete p-groups are isomorphic if and only if their basic subgroups are isomorphic. In such groups (and in the case of separable p-groups only those) every isomorphism between two basic subgroups can be extended to a (uniquely determined) automorphism of the whole group (see H. Leptin, 1960). A reduced p-group is a direct summand of every p-group which contains it as a pure subgroup if and only if it is a torsion complete p-group [7, Theorem 68.4]. 3. For countable p-groups containing elements of infinite height there is the Ulm theorem [11, Section 28]: if two countable reduced p-groups G and H have the same Ulm type r (Section 1, Point 4) and for all c~ < r the Ulm factors G,~ and Ha of the groups G and H (see ibid.) are isomorphic, then G ~ H. Since in this case all Ulm factors are countable p-groups without elements of infinite height, i.e. direct sums of cyclic groups (Point 1) that are completely characterized by the sets of orders of their cyclic summands, we see that countable p-groups are characterized by numerical invariants. L. Zippin proved the following existence theorem [ 11, Section 27]: if r is a given ordinal of at most countable cardinality and for each or, 0 0, D.O. Cutler (1987) has constructed an example of a separable p-group determined by its p~+l-socle in the class of all p-groups but not determined by its pn_ socle. 6. For other results concerning primary Abelian groups see [7, Ch. XI, XII] and Section 1 of the reviews [26-31].

3. Torsion-free groups 1. In the theory of torsion-free groups the notion of rank is essential. We define the rank, r(G), of a torsion-free group G as cardinality of a maximal linearly independent (over the ring of integers) system of elements of G. Torsion-free groups of rank 1 have the simplest structure theory. Each such group is isomorphic to some subgroup of the group Q (Section 0), and vice versa. Let R be a torsion-free group of rank 1. For 0 ~- a 6 R let us consider the sequence X (a) -- (kl . . . . . ki . . . . ) of pi-heights ki of the element a in the group R (Section 1, Point 4), where pi runs over all primes enumerated in a fixed order. We say that the sequence X (a) is the characteristic of a. Two characteristics are said to be equivalent, if they have symbol c~ at the same places and, moreover, these characteristics can differ at most at a finite number of positions (i.e. they coincide almost everywhere). The set of all characteristics equivalent to one of them is called a type. The characteristics of all nonzero elements of a torsion-free group R of rank 1 constitute a type called the type of R (notation: r(R)). Two torsion-free groups of rank 1 are isomorphic if and only if they have the same type. Let G be a torsion-free group and 0 7~ a 6 G. Then the set of all elements b ~ G depending on a (i.e. there exist nonzero integers k and I such that ka = lb) coincides with the set of all elements of the pure subgroup (a), of G generated by a. If A = (a), then r(A) = 1, and the type z (A) is called the type of the element a of G. One sais that rl ~> r2 for the types rl, r2 (or that r2 divides rl) if there exist characteristics X l - - (kl . . . . . ki . . . . ) 6 rl and X 2 = (/1 . . . . . li . . . . ) E "g2 such that ki >/li, i = 1, 2 . . . . . If G is a finite rank torsion-free group then the g.c.d, of the types of all its pure subgroups

678

A.V. Mikhalev and A.P. Mishina

of rank 1 is called the inner type of G (notation: I T ( G ) ) and 1.c.m. of the types of all rank 1 torsion-free quotients of G is called its outer type (notation: O T ( G ) ) . If I T ( G ) = OT(G) then G is a direct sum of rank 1 groups of type O T ( G ) ([63]). If G is a torsion-free group of infinite rank then always O T ( G ) = c~ (i.e. the type containing the characteristic (cx~, cx~. . . . )) and I T ( G ) can be not defined. 2.

If G is a direct sum of torsion-free rank 1 groups then G is called completely decomposable. Every two decompositions of such a group into direct sum of rank 1 groups

are isomorphic; any direct summand of a completely decomposable group is also completely decomposable ([7, Proposition 86.1 and Theorem 86.7]). A.A. Kravchenko (1982) has found necessary and sufficient conditions for a completely decomposable group G -- ~

Ru,

r ( R u ) -- l,

to have all its pure subgroups completely decomposable (the conditions are on the types of the groups Ra). This result completes a series of investigations on this topic (see L. Bican (1974), S.F. Kozhukhov (1974), M.I. Kushnir (1974)). For groups of finite rank see also L.G. Nongxa and C. Vinsonhaler (1995) (the conditions are on the types of all the elements of G). 3.

Pure subgroups of completely decomposable finite rank torsion-free groups are called

Butler groups. Equivalently: a torsion-free group is called a Butler group if it is an epimor-

phic image of a completely decomposable finite rank torsion-free group. These groups were introduced by M.C. Butler (1965). There exist several other definitions for them equivalent to the one given above, see [30, Sections 2, 5], [31, Section 6]. Some classes of Butler groups were described by invariants up to isomorphism (D. Arnold and C. Vinsonhaler (1992)) or up to quasi-isomorphism (Section 6), see D. Arnold and C. Vinsonhaler (1989, 1993), L. Fuchs and C. Metelli (1991). Additional information on Butler groups can be found in [30, Section 2], [31, Section 6], [15,17], A.V. Yakovlev (1995). A torsion-free group G (of arbitrary rank) is called Bl-group (and sometimes Butler group or B-group) if Bext(G, T) = 0 (Section 8, Part II, Point 7) for any torsion group T. A countable torsion-free group is a Bl-group if and only if all its pure subgroups of finite rank are Butler groups (L. Bican and L. Salce (1983)); groups with the last property are called finitely Butler. In particular, the class of all B l-groups of finite rank coincides with the class of all Butler groups of finite rank. A homogeneous torsion-free group (i.e. such that all its nonzero elements have the same type) is a Bl-group if and only if it is completely decomposable (L. Bican (1984)). A pure subgroup of a B1-group G may be not a B1-group (ibid), but it does have to be a Bl-group if the set of all different types of elements of G is countable (see [ 17]). For a survey of the results obtained for Bl-groups see [14,17,18] and [31, Section 6]. A torsion-free group G is called a B2-group (in some articles: a Butler group o f infinite rank) if there exists a well ordered increasing sequence of pure subgroups O-GoCG1

C " " c Got c " " C Gr -- G - U Ga,


679

where Ga -- [,.J~ 0 such that nG c__~ Ai c G, where the Ai are subgroups of rank 1. In this case if G has a finite rank then [G/nG[ < R0, and the subgroup ~ Ai has finite index in G. For more on almost completely decomposable groups see [24], Section 4 of [29], [30,31 ], E.A. Blagoveshchenskaya and A. Mader (1994), A.V. Yakovlev (1995). For torsion-free groups of finite rank S.E Kozhukhov (1980) obtained necessary and sufficient conditions for a group to be almost completely decomposable. 5. A torsion-free group is called separable if every finite system of elements of it is contained in a completely decomposable direct summand of the group. For information on such groups see [7, Sections 87, 96] and [31, Section 5]. Note that Theorem 96.6 from [7] does not hold (see A.P. Mishina (1962)). Many generalizations of the notion of a separable torsion-free group were given in Section 4 of [28], [29,30] and [31, Section 5]. Note that some authors call a torsion-free group separable if every finite system of elements is contained in a free direct summand. 6.

Let P0 be a direct product of a countable number of infinite cyclic groups: (x)

Po = l--I (ei ),

o(ei ) -- r

i=1 A torsion-flee group G is called slender if for every homomorphism 0:P0 -+ G we have rl(ei ) = 0 for almost all i (Section 3, Point 1). A torsion-free group is slender if and only if it does not contain subgroups isomorphic to the groups Q, P0, or Jp, for an arbitrary prime p ([7, Theorem 95.3]). If P = I-Ii el Ai where all the Ai a r e arbitrary torsion-flee groups, and G is a slender group then for every homomorphism 7: P --+ G for almost all i E I we have ~l(Ai) = O, moreover, if the cardinality ]II is non-measurable [7, Section 94] and ri(Ai) = 0 for all i ~ I then 7/= 0 ([7, Theorem 94.4], a result of J. Log)). Direct sums of slender groups ([7, Theorem 94.3]) are slender groups. For more about slender groups see also [30, Section 4], [31, Section 4], [7, Sections 94, 95]. In the literature one also finds the dual notions of coslender groups and dual slender groups ([31, Section 4]). 7. For any infinite cardinal m there exists 2 m non-isomorphic torsion-flee indecomposable groups of cardinality 92t (see S. Shelah (1974) and also [19, Section 8]). Note that the

680

A. V. Mikhalev and A.P Mishina

indecomposable torsion groups are only the groups Z (pk) (k k > 1 one can find a torsion-free group A of rank n such that for any partition of n into k parts, n -- rl + . . . + rk, ri >/1, i - 1 . . . . . k, there is a direct decomposition A = A1 @ -.. ~ Ak where every Ai is an indecomposable group of rank ri ([7, Theorem 90.2]). But every torsion-free group of finite rank may have only a finite number of non-isomorphic direct summands (E.L. Lady, 1974). This gives a solution of Problem 69 from [7, Ch. XIII]. Other examples of "bad decompositions" of a torsion-free group into direct sum of indecomposable subgroups can be found in: [7, Sections 90, 91 ], [ 11, Section D.31, Point 3]; V.A. Kakashkin (1984), E.A. Blagoveshchenskaya (1992) (two solutions to Problem 67 from [7, Ch. XIII]); E.A. Blagoveshchenskaya and A.V. Yakovlev (1989) (a solution to Problem 68 from [7, Ch. XIII]). But for torsion-free groups of finite rank, a theorem that replaces the theorem on isomorphism of direct decompositions can be obtained if instead of isomorphism of groups one considers on quasi-isomorphisms (see Section 6, Point 1). 8. For a description of torsion-free groups from some classes of groups by means of invariants, see Section 5, Points 2, 3, 4 of the present article. Some additional information on the topics mentioned above and on other questions from the theory of torsion-free groups can be found in [1,7, Ch. XIII], [11, Ch. 8 and Section D.31] and also [27, Sections 2, 6], [28, Sections 2, 4], [29, Sections 2, 4], [30, Sections 2, 4], [31, Sections 2, 4, 5, 6].

4. Mixed groups

1. If a mixed group G splits, i.e. G = t G @ H for some subgroup H, then the description of the structure of G can be in some sense reduced to the description of the torsion group t G and the torsion-free group H ~ G / t G . But, for example, the group G = I-I(ai) for ai of order pi and pi running over all distinct primes, has torsion part t G = @ ( a i ) and does not split (see [7, Section 100]). All groups G with the torsion part isomorphic to a given torsion group T split if and only if T is a direct sum of a bounded (Section 1, Point 3) group and a divisible one (Section 1, Point 4) group, see [7, Theorem 100.1 ], [ 11, Section 29]. All groups G with G~ t G ~- H for a given torsion-free group H split if and only if H is a free Abelian group (see [7, Section 101 ]). Different criteria for the splitting of mixed groups can be found in [11, Section D.32] and in Section 3 of the surveys [26-31 ]. 2. Some classes of nonsplittig mixed groups can be described by means of invariants. For example, let G be a group such that r ( G / t G ) = 1 ( r ( G / t G ) is called the torsion-free rank


681

of G). For an element g 6 G of infinite order one can introduce the notion of the height matrix H(g), the rows of this matrix are indexed by the primes p and the row with the index p consists of the generalized p-heights of the elements g, pg . . . . . pn g , . . . (see [7, Section 103]). A notion of equivalence of such matrices was determined and it was shown that two countable groups of torsion-free rank 1, are isomorphic if and only if their torsion parts are isomorphic and their height matrices are equivalent ([7, Theorem 104.3]). In the uncountable case this statement does not hold (Ch. Megibben, 1967). A theorem about the existence of a mixed group with a fixed torsion part T and r ( G / T ) = 1, and containing an infinite order element with a given height matrix also holds (the height matrices have to satisfy suitable necessary and sufficient conditions), see [7, Theorem 103.3] with a correction in R. Hunter, E. Walker (1981); see also T. Koyama (1978). For mixed groups of torsion-free rank 1 I. Kaplansky and G.W. Mackey obtained a result analogous to the Ulm theorem for p-groups (see [20]). A group G is called p-local (p a prime) if the multiplication by any prime q 7~ p is an automorphism of G, i.e. if G can be considered in a natural way as a Qp-module (Section 0). Any p-group is p-local. L.Ya. Kulikov [56] investigated mixed p-local groups that he called generalized primary groups. He considered cases in which Ulm theorem holds for such groups. 3. R.B. Warfield, Jr. suggested a new approach to investigation of mixed groups: instead of considering such a group as an extension (Section 8, Part II) of a torsion group by a torsion-free group he regarded it as an extension of a torsion-free group by a torsion group (see [36]). Namely, R.B. Warfield, Jr. (1972) called a p-local group G (Point 2) a ~-elementary KT-module O~ is a limit ordinal) if pZG ~- Qp and G/pZG is a totally projective pgroup (see Section 2, Point 3). The direct sum of a totally projective group and a set of )~-elementary K T-modules (for different ~.) is called a K T-module. For a K T-module M and an arbitrary limit ordinal /z let h(lz, M ) = dim~p(p~M/(p~+lM + t(p~M))) (R.B. Warfield, 1975). Two KT-modules M1 and M2 are isomorphic if and only if their Ulm-Kaplansky invariants are the same (i.e. f(ct, M1) = f(c~, M2), where f(t~, Mi) = dim?p((p~Mi)[p]/p~+lMi[p]),ot ~> 0) and h(/x, M1) --h(/z, M2) for any limit ordinal /z. The class of all K T-modules is a maximal, closed under finite direct sums, class of Qp-modules in which the above mentioned statement holds. There are also conditions for the functions f and h for which there exists a K T-module M such that f (ct, M) -- f (or) and h(/z, M) = h(/z) for arbitrary c~ and limit ordinal #. K T-modules are exactly the reduced p-local h-pure projective groups (see R.B. Warfield, Jr., 1972) (a group is called h-pure projective if it is projective (Section 1, Point 6) with respect to any exact sequence of Q p-modules 0 ~ A ~ B --+ C --+ 0 such that the sequence 0 --+ p~A ~ p~ B --+ p~C ~ 0 is exact for every ordinal or). A survey of new methods, as well as of basic results on classification of mixed groups, has been published by R.B. Warfield, Jr. [37]. There he has formulated also 27 problems; some of them have been already solved, see [38, Section 7] for problems 11, 13, 16, 17, 18, 19, 23, and A.A. Kravchenko (1984) for problems 6, 7.

682


4. For global (i.e. not necessary p-local) groups the next notion was introduced by J. Rotman (1960) (see also R.O. Stanton, 1977): a set X = {Xi}iEI of elements of an Abelian group A is called a decomposition basis for A if {Xi}iEI is a set of free generators of the subgroup (X), A / ( X ) is torsion and for arbitrary a = ~ r i x i E (X) and any p, hp(a)* -- min{hp*(rixi) } for generalized p-heights h *p (Section 1, Point 4) taken in A (compare the definition of direct sum of valuated groups in Section 10). The group A is called a Warfield group (see R. Hunter and E Richman, 1981) if it contains a decomposition basis X which generates a nice subgroup (X) (a subgroup B of a mixed group A is called nice in A if ( p ~ ( A / B ) / ( ( p a A + B)/B))[p] = 0 for any ordinal ct and prime p, see [22]), and, moreover, A/(X) is a simply presented group. Warfield groups are exactly the direct summands of simply presented groups. One can give a number of equivalent definitions of a Warfield group A (see [22]). In particular: A has a decomposition basis and satisfies the third axiom of countability (Section 2, Point 3) with respect to nice subgroups. These definitions generalize different characterizations of totally projective groups [7, Section 83]. R. Hunter and F. Richman (1981) introduced the notion of a global Warfield invariant. Two Warfield groups G and H are isomorphic if and only if their Warfield invariants are the same and their Ulm invariants are equal for any prime p. For an existence theorem for p-local Warfield groups see [29, Section 10]. 5. Ch. Megibben (1980) (see also K.M. Rangaswamy, 1984) calls an Abelian group completely decomposable if it is a direct sum of torsion-free groups of rank 1 and groups Z (p~), k ~< oo (compare Section 3, Point 2). A group is said to be separable if every finite set of its elements is contained in some completely decomposable (in the previous sense) direct summand of this group. One can prove (Ch. Megibben, 1980) that a mixed group G is separable if and only if tG and G / t G are separable (Section 2, Point 1 and Section 3, Point 5) and tG is a balanced subgroup in G (Section 8, Part II, Point 7). V.M. Misyakov (1991) gave a criterion for separability of direct products of arbitrary Abelian groups.

5. Classification theorems

The Ulm theorem (Section 2, Point 3) gives us a full description of all countable (and even all totally projective) p-groups by means of numerical invariants. Some other group classes also can be described in terms of invariants. However, a description of a class of groups by means of invariants is reasonable only if it helps to solve some problems concerning groups of this class. For example, the Ulm theorem for totally projective p-groups helps us to get a positive solution for the following two Kaplansky test problems (see [7, Section 83, ex. 11, 12]): (i) Do conditions G = G1 @ G2, H = H1 G H2, G = H1, H = G l imply G ~ H ? (ii) Is the condition G ~ H necessary for G @ G = H @ H ? 1. A.V. Ivanov [48] considered groups G = ~ ) i = 1 Gi, where the Gi a r e torsion-complete (Section 2, Point 2) p-groups. Let us associate to a group G the matrix (aik), where the


683

aik -- fk(Gi) are the Ulm invariants of the group Gi (which determine this group, see [7, Section 68, Point b] and [ 10, Section 11 ]). This matrix is called the decomposition matrix of the group G. In the class of such matrices one can introduce two equivalence relations: (aik) ~ (bik) and (aik) ~ (bik). We can prove that if G -- ~i~=l Gi = ~ i ~ 1 Hi are different decompositions of the group G into direct sums of torsion-complete p-groups, and (aik), (bik) are the associated decomposition matrices then (aik) ~ (bik) and (aik) ~ (bik). We say that the equivalence class with respect to + (to ,~) of matrices of decompositions of G into countable direct sums of torsion-complete p-groups is the first (the second) invariant of the group G. Two countable direct sums of torsion-complete p-groups are isomorphic if and only if their 1st and 2nd invariants and their Ulm invariants coincide. By means of this criterion we get a positive solution of the Kaplansky test problems for countable direct sums of torsion complete p-groups. One can show that therefore these problems have positive solutions also for arbitrary direct sums of torsion-complete groups (see A.V. Ivanov, [49]). The same theory (with the same results) can be developed for countable direct sums G -- ~ i = 1 G i of reduced algebraically compact groups, see [26, Section 5, Point 1]. Let us consider the class A of all countable direct sums of torsion-complete p-groups (respectively, of reduced algebraically compact groups) and let G, H 6 A. In terms of the invariants mentioned above we can formulate conditions for the group G to be isomorphic to a pure subgroup of the group H and also describe pure-correct groups G c A, i.e. such that if G and H 6 A are isomorphic to pure subgroups of each other then G ~ H. Moreover, we can obtain necessary and sufficient conditions on the decomposition matrix for the group G to be cancellable in +4 (this means that for all A, B 6 r from G @ A G G B it follows A ~- B), see [48]. 2. A.G. Kurosh (1937), D. Derry (1937) and A.I. Maltsev (1938) have described in terms of invariants all finite rank torsion-free groups. L. Fuchs has extended this theory to arbitrary countable torsion-free groups, see [7, Section 93]. The description was obtained in the following way. Let us fix a prime p. A countable torsion-free group A can be embedded into a group

A p - - Jp | A - - ~ ] 3 ]KpVn @ ~ n

~pWm,

m

where | means tensor product (see Section 9) and n, m run over index sets of cardinalities kp and lp respectively, kp -at- lp -- r(A). Let {ai} be a maximal independent system of elements of A. Then (Olim E K p , fiim E S p ) . n

m

Let Mp be the matrix with elements that are coefficients from the last equalities. We construct such a matrix Mp for each prime p. Let now the matrix sequence Mp~, mp2 . . . . corresponds to A (its terms depend on the choice of {ai } and {Vn, Wm}). Now determine the connection between matrices Mp and Mp, obtained by different systems {ai } and {Vn, Wm}.

684

A.V.

Mikhalev and A.P. Mishina

If the elements of matrix sequences (Mpl, Mp2 . . . . ) and (Mpl, Mp2 . . . . ) are related in the above mentioned way, then these sequences are called equivalent. The cardinalities kp, lp (for all p) and the class of equivalent matrix sequences are a complete set of invariants for countable torsion-free groups. This means that two groups of this type are isomorphic if and only if the corresponding invariants coincide ([7, Theorem 93.4]). Also the corresponding existence theorem holds ([7, Theorem 93.5]). This theory enabled A.G. Kurosh ([ 11, Section 32 c]) to prove the existence of indecomposable torsion-free groups of any finite rank. If A is a finite rank torsion-free group then the number k p for A coincides with the number of summands of type pOO in a decomposition into indecomposable summands of the divisible part of A / C , where C is a subgroup generated by a maximal independent set of elements of A (L. Proch~izka, 1962). M.N. O'Campbell (1960) obtained a description of countable torsion-free groups by means of invariants in which he used equivalence classes of sequences of special type integer valued square matrices (the order of matrices is equal to the rank of the group). Using this language he formulated necessary and sufficient conditions for a countable torsion-free group to be free. In the same terms M.I. Kushnir (1972) gave necessary and sufficient conditions for a torsion-free group of finite rank to be quotient divisible (a torsion-free group G is called quotient divisible if it contains a free subgroup F such that G~ F is a divisible torsion group). However, the above methods to describe countable torsion-free groups have not yet found a sufficiently large field of applications. A.V. Yakovlev (1976) has pointed out the complexity of the classification problem even for finite rank torsion-free groups. The I. Kaplansky test problems in the class of countable torsion-free groups have a negative answer (see L.S. Comer, 1964). 3.

A description of one class of torsion-free groups was given by A.A. Fomin. Let l i p INp be the direct product of the fields of p-adic numbers INp. The set of all sequences (Up), Up ~ INp, with almost all Up p-adic integers form a subring INp of l i p INp. The subring IN can be considered as a linear space over the field Q of rationals. A.A. Fomin [45] calls INp the ring of universal numbers and l i p ,lip (Jp is the ring of p-adic integers) the ring of universal integers. If (Up) is an universal integer then we denote by h e the greatest power of p dividing Up in ~p (if Up = 0, then hp - - cx)). The type determined by the characteristic (hp) is called the type of the universal integer (up). For an arbitrary universal number u there exists a non-zero integer m such that mu is a universal integer. Let type (u) = type (mu). It is easy to see that the type of u does not depend on the choice of m. The set of all universal numbers which types are greater or equal to a fixed type r, forms an ideal lit of the ring INp; Q ( r ) = IN/lit is called the ring ofr-adic numbers. If the type r is defined by the characteristic (mp), then

Q(r) = Q | Iqgpm,, p


685

where •pmp is the residue class ring modulo pmp if mp 5~ ~ , and ~_jpmp --- ~p, if mp = oo; here | denotes the tensor product (Section 9). If ot is an universal integer then we call ot + ]Ir an integer r-adic number. Let rl . . . . . rm be some types. A.A. Fomin considers certain finite dimensional subspaces of the linear space M = Q(rl) • . . . ~ Q(~'m) over Q which he calls (rl . . . . . rm)-spaces. For a torsion-free group A of finite rank n we define its Richman type as the class of quasi-isomorphisms (Section 6) of the quotient group A / F , where F is a free subgroup of rank n in A. Since

A/F ~ ~

(Z(p ilp) G " "0 Z(pi"p)),

0 /5) H. Leptin [58] has proved that if Aut(G) ~ Aut(H), then G ~ H. The same conclusion for any p / > 3 has been obtained later by W. Liebert [59]. But not every isomorphism between automorphism groups is induced by an isomorphism of the groups; example: G ~- Z(p), H ~- Z(p) (for any p ~> 5) due to A.V. Ivanov, see [26, Section 7, Part II, Point 2]. This provides a negative solution to the problem 89 f r o m Fuchs [7, Ch. XVI]. For reduced p-groups G, H (p ~> 3) with isomorphic groups of automorphisms W. Liebert (1989) gave a description

A. V..Mikhalev and A.P Mishina

690

of all isomorphisms between Aut(G) and Aut(H) which is analogous to the description of isomorphisms of the classical linear groups. 3. There are infinitely many non-isomorphic countable Abelian torsion-free groups G for which Aut(G) is a countable divisible Abelian group. But there is no such countable divisible Abelian group of finite torsion-free rank (Section 4, Point 2) that can be realized as an automorphism group for any group (not necessarily Abelian), see M.R. Dixon, M.J. Evans (1990). A survey of results on automorphism groups of Abelian torsion-free groups obtained in the last decades was given (with proofs) in the book by I.Kh. Bekker and S.E Kozhukhov

[3]. For automorphism groups of Abelian groups see also [7, Ch. XVI], Section 9 in [27], [31] and Section 7 in [28], [29,30].

8. Homomorphismgroups.Groupsof extensions I. Let us define the group Hom(A, B), of homomorphisms from an Abelian group A to an Abelian group B as the set of all homomorphisms ct : A ~ B, with addition according to the rule (ctl + c~2)a = ala + t~za, for any a ~ A. In particular, Hom(A, A) = EndA is the group of endomorphisms (Section 7, Part I, Point 4) of the group A. 1. Some introductory information on the groups Hom(A, B) can be found in [7, Section 43]. In particular, for any Abelian groups we have

Hom(A, I-IBi) ~ l-IHom(a, Bi), i~l

A group A is called

i~l

H o m ( ~ A i , B) "~ I-IHom(Ai,B). i~l

i~l

selfsmall if

.om(A, ~ A)~ ~.om(A, A) m

m

for any cardinal number m. Concerning these groups see D.M. Arnold and C.E. Murley (1975). In particular, any selfsmall torsion group is finite. 2. If A is a divisible group or B is a torsion-free group, then Hom(A, B) is torsion-free ([7, Section 43, F, C]). If A (or B) is a torsion-free divisible group then Hom(A, B) is also torsion-free divisible [7, Section 43, G, D]. If A is a torsion group then Hom(A, B) is a reduced algebraically compact group (Section 1, Point 5) for any group B ([7, Theorem 46.1]). If B is an algebraically compact group, then for any group A the group Hom(A, B) is also algebraically compact ([7, Theorem 47.7]). The structure of the group Hom(A, B) in some particular cases is considered in [7, Section 47], Section 8 in [28], [29,30] and [31, Section 10]. The group Hom(A, D/Z) where D is the additive group of all real numbers is called the character group of the group A [7, Section 47].


691

3. For the question when a given group is isomorphic to a group Hom(A,B), as well as when A -~ Hom(A, B) or A = Hom(B, A), see respectively R.B. Warfield, Jr. [63] and A.M. Sebel'din (1973, 1974), P. Grosse (1965). In particular, from the results ofP. Grosse it follows that Hom(A, Q / Z ) -~ A if and only if A is finite (see also F.R. Beyl and A. Hanna, 1976). 4. Note the following important result: there exist two non-isomorphic groups A and A f such that Hom(A, X) _--__Hom(A I, X) for any group X; examples: (i) A -- ~)2~0 B, A' -- ~2~0/~ with B -- ~)i Hom(G, A) ~ Hom(G, B) t~oc_gHom(G, C) E, ---->

Ext(G, A) -~ Ext(G, B) ~ Ext(G, C) --+ 0

and 0----> Hom(C, G) ~ Hom(B, G) ~ Hom(A, G) E,

/~*

~*

--~ Ext(C, G) ~ Ext(A, G) ~ Ext(A, G) --~ 0 ([7, Theorem 51.3]), where or., 13., c).,/~, and/3*, c~*,/~*, c)* are homomorphisms induced by homomorphisms ot and/3 respectively and E. and E* are the so called connecting homomorphisms (see [7, Section 51 ]). These exact sequences play an important role in the proofs of many statements in Abelian group theory. 2. For two arbitrary groups A and B the group Ext(B, A) is cotorsion (Section 1, Point 5; see [7, Theorem 54.6]). Moreover, for an arbitrary reduced group H the group Ext(Q/Z, H) is a cotorsion hull, i.e. a minimal cotorsion group which contains H ([7, Proof of the Theorem 58.1], K.M. Rangaswamy, 1964). If A is a torsion-free group or any algebraically compact group, then Ext(B, A) is an algebraically compact group for every group B ([7, Section 52, N, O]). The group Ext(B, A) is algebraically compact for every group A if and only if the torsion part of the group B is a direct sum of cyclic groups (M.J. Schoeman, 1973). Let us note that for a reduced torsion group G with G 1 r 0 the group Ext(Q/Z, G) is cotorsion but not algebraically compact, see [7, Lemma 55.3, Propositions 54.2 and 56.4]. On necessary and sufficient conditions for Ext(B, A) to be a divisible group or to be a reduced group for fixed A and any B or for fixed B and any A see K.M. Rangaswamy (1964). 3. A complete description of the structure of the group Ext(B, A) for torsion-free groups A and B of finite rank was obtained by R.B. Warfield, Jr. (1972). L.Ya. Kulikov (1976) has found a complete description of the groups Ext(T, A) when T is a torsion group, A a torsion-free group, and of the groups Ext(T, G) (1964), where T is a countable reduced primary group, G an arbitrary group. K.M. Rangaswamy (1964) described the structure of Ext(B, Z) for arbitrary B (this gives a solution to the first part of Problem 54 from [6, Ch. X]). Other results on the structure of concrete groups of extensions or for a given group to be isomorphic to a group of extensions can be found in [27, Section 3], Sections 8 of [28], [29], [30], [31, Section 10], [9, Section 52], [ 11, Section D.33, Points 1, 2].

694


4. P.J. Gr~ibe and G. Viljoen (two papers in 1970) investigated classes 9Jr of groups such that there is a group H with G "~ Ext(H, G) (respectively, G ~ Ext(G, H)) for every G 93t. A ~ Ext(A, Z) if and only if A is a finite group (ER. Beyl and A. Hanna, 1976). 5. If L1 and L2 are quasi-isomorphic (Section 6) torsion-free groups, then Ext(L1, G) Ext(L2, G) for any group G (L. Proch~izka, 1966). If L1, L2 are torsion-free groups of finite rank without infinite cyclic direct summands, then the converse statement also holds ([52, Theorem 1.7]). If A and B are reduced torsion-free groups of finite rank, then Ext(C, A) -------Ext(C, B) for any group C (for any torsion-free group C of finite rank) if and only if the groups A and B are quasi-isomorphic ([53]). This gives a solution to Problem 43 [7, Ch. IX] in the case of finite rank groups A and B. If Ext(X, C) ----Ext(Y, C) for fixed groups X and Y and an arbitrary group C, then Ext(tX, C) -~ Ext(tY, C) and Ext(Xp, C) ~ Ext(Yp, C) for every prime p (for the notations see Section 0). If X and Y are p-groups and X is a countable group of finite Ulm type (Section 1, Point 4), then assuming GCH we see that Ext(X, C) ------_Ext(Y, C) (u implies X ~ Y (A.I. Moskalenko, 1991). 6. We say that the group A is L-orthogonal to the group B and the group B is Rorthogonal to the group A if Ext(B, A) - - 0 (K.M. Rangaswamy, 1964). For the cases when Ext(B, A) = 0 see also [7, Section 52] and [57]. One says that for the classes X, ~ of groups the condition ~ _1_ ~ is satisfied if Ext(X, Y) = 0 for any X 6 3C, Y 6 if). Let 3~"L -- {Y I 3~ 2- Y}, "L3~= {Y I Y 2_ 3~}. The couple (X, ~ ) is said to be a cotorsion theory if ~ -- X -L, X = .L~. If (~, ~i) is a cotorsion theory and ~5 - X -L, ~ - • -L) for a class of groups 3~, then (~, ~ ) is said to be cogenerated by X. For cotorsion theories see R. G6bel and R. Prelle (1979), L. Salce (1979). A group G is called a Baer group if Ext(G, T) = 0 for all torsion groups T. Griffith has proved that every Baer group is free, see [7, Section 101 ]. A group W such that Ext(W, Z) = 0 is called a Whitehead group. Assuming ZFC + V = L, we see that every Whitehead group is free (this gives a positive solution in this case for Problem 79 [7, Ch. XIII]). But under ZFC + MA + --,CH we obtain that for all cardinals x ~> b~l there exists a non-free Whitehead group of cardinality ~, see P.C. Eklof, 1977 (a result of S. Shelah), and A.H. Mekler, 1983. 7. Some special subgroups of the group Ext(B, A) play important role in the theory of Abelian groups (in particular, Pext(B, A) and Bext(B, A)). The subgroup Pext(B, A) consists of all the elements of the group Ext(B, A) determined by those extensions G of A by B in which A is a pure subgroup. Note that

Pext(B, A) -- A n Ext(B, A) n=l

([7, Theorem 53.3]). Pext(B, A) - - 0 for any group B (for any group A) if and only if A is algebraically compact (B is the direct sum of cyclic groups, respectively), see [7, Proposition 53.4].


695

On the groups Pext(B, A) see also [7, Section 53], M.J. Schoeman (1973). Bext(B, A) is the subgroup of Ext(B, A) consisting of all its elements determined by extensions G in which A is a so called regular subgroup (for the definition of regular subgroups see C. Walker (1972) or Ch. Megibben (1980)). Bext(B, A) = 0 for all A if and only if B is completely decomposable (in the sense of Section 4, Point 5). In case G / H is torsion-free, H is a regular subgroup of G if and only if each coset g + H contains an element a for which XG(a) = XG/H(g + H ) where XG(a) is the characteristic of a in G, i.e. the sequence of generalized p-heights of the element a for all prime p (compare Section 3, Point 1). If this condition holds for H = t G then t G is called balanced in G (compare [7, Section 86]). If T is torsion and F torsion-free then Bext(F, T) D t E x t ( F , T). Bext(F, T ) = Ext(F, T) for all torsion groups T if and only if F is homogeneous of type r 9 (0, 0 . . . . ) (see Section 3, Point 3). Torsion-free groups F with the property Bext(F, T) = 0 for any torsion group T are called Bl-groups (Section 3, Point 3). 8. Some other questions concerning the group Ext(B, A) and its subgroups were touched on in the surveys [27-31] and in [7, Ch. IX].

9. Tensor product. Torsion product I. The tensor product A @ B of two Abelian groups A and B is the Abelian group determined by taking as generators all couples a | b (a 6 A, b 6 B), and as defining relations (al -k- a2) @ b = al | b W a2 @ b,

a @ ( b l + b2) -- a @ bl + a @ b2,

where a, al, a2 6 A, b, bl,b2 E B [7, Section 59], [11, Section D.33, Point 6]. The definition of tensor products was introduced by H. Whitney ([11, Section D.33, Point 6]). 1. Note that always A | B ~ B | A; (A | B) @ C ~ A | (B @ C); (~i6l Ai) @ ( ~ j E J Bj) ~ ~ i , j ( A i @ Bj) and Z @ B ~ B, Z ( m ) | B ~ B / m B for all groups B ([7, Section 59]). 2. If A or B is a divisible group, then A | B is also divisible. The tensor product of two algebraically compact torsion-free groups is an algebraically compact group (A.A. Fomin, 1981). For any group H the group G = Qp | H is p-local (Section 4, Point 2) and it is called the localisation of H at the prime p. If A or B is a p-group then A | B is a p-group. If A is a p-group and p B = B then A | B = 0 (therefore A | B = 0 if A is a p-group, B is a q-group for p ~ q). The tensor product of nonzero torsion-free groups A, B is a nonzero torsion-free group ([ 11, Section D.33, Point 6]). In this case for a ~ A, b ~ B and their types (Section 3, Point 1) we have r ( a | b) = r ( a ) + r(b) (see [7, Section 60, Ex. 9]). But the tensor product of two p-reduced (i.e. such that they do not contain nonzero subgroups C with C = p C ) torsion-free groups may be not a p-reduced group (A.A. Fomin, 1975).

696


If U and V are pure subgroups of the groups A and B respectively, then the elements u | v (u 6 U, v 6 V) generate a subgroup of A @ B isomorphic to the group U @ V. The same holds for any subgroups of A and B if A and B are torsion-free groups ([11, Section D.33, Point 6]), but in general it does not hold. For example, if Z ( p ) ~- U ~- A, Z ( p ) ~- V C B ~ Z ( p ~ ) , then U | V ~- Z ( p ) and A @ B = 0. If A, B are p-groups and A', B' are their basic subgroups (Section 2, Point 2) then A | B = A' | B' (see [7, Theorem 61.1 ]). Therefore, the tensor product of torsion groups is always the direct sum of finite cyclic groups ([7, Theorem 61.3]). The tensor product of a p-group A and a torsion-free group B is isomorphic to the direct sum of as many copies of the group A as is the p-rank (Section 0) of the group B (L. Fuchs, 1957). Concerning the torsion part of the tensor product we note that t ( A | B) ~ (tA | tB) @ (tA | B / t B ) @ ( A / t A | tB) ([7, Theorem 61.5]). 3. A.A. Fomin (1976) has obtained a description of the tensor product of two countable torsion-free groups based on the Kurosh-Derry-Maltsev description (Section 5, Point 2) of the factors (see [6, Ch. XI, Problem 57] and [7, Ch. X, Problem 47]), and also a description (by means of invariants) of the tensor product of algebraically compact torsion-free groups (see A.A. Fomin, 1981). Let G and K be countable groups of torsion-free rank one (see Section 4, Point 2) with reduced torsion parts. Then one can construct invariants of the group G | K using the invariants [7, Theorem 104.3] of the groups G and K, see Ch. Megibben and E. Toubassi (1976). In the class of torsion-free groups A with rp(A) ~< 1 for all p the tensor multiplication coincides up to the divisible part with multiplication in the ring of universal numbers (Section 5, Point 3; A.A. Fomin, 1981). 4. A necessary and sufficient condition for a torsion-free group of finite rank mn to be isomorphic to the tensor product of two torsion-free groups of ranks m and n respectively was obtained by H. Lausch (1983). H. Lausch (1985) also gave an example of a group A of rank r(A) = 8 such that A ~ Bl | B2 ~- C1 | C2 | C3, where r ( B l ) = 4, r(Ci) -- 2 (i = 1, 2, 3), but B l is not a tensor product of two rank 2 groups. If M is a torsion-free group and A is a torsion-free group of rank 1 then M ~ A @ G for some group G if and only if for any x 6 M there exists a homomorphism f 6 Hom (A, M) such that x ~ f ( A ) , and, moreover, in this case M ~ A | (A, M) (see [63]). Each homogeneous torsion-free group of type r is the tensor product of a rank 1 torsionfree group of type r and a homogeneous torsion-free group of zero type (i.e. type r (Z)) (see L.G. Nongxa, 1984). 5. If 0 ~ A --~ B ~ C --+ 0 is a short exact sequence such that c~(A) is a pure subgroup of B (such an exact sequence is called pure-exact), then for every group G and induced homomorphisms c~.,/~, the sequence O----~ A | G -~ B | G -~ C | G --+ O

is pure-exact; the converse statement holds also ([7, Theorem 60.4] and T.J. Head, 1967).


697

Some other results on the properties of tensor product can be found in [7, Ch. X] and in the surveys [27-31 ], where, in particular, some works concerning the question, when does the tensor product of the given groups split (Section 4, Point 1), are cited. II. The torsion product of Abelian groups A, B is the Abelian group Tor(A, B) given by taking as generators all triples (m, a, b), where m is an integer, a 6 A, b 6 B and ma = 0 = mb, and as defining relations all possible equalities of the form (m, al, b) + (m, a2, b) = (m, a! + a2, b), (m, a, bl) + (m, a, b2) -- (m, a, bl + b2),

(m, na, b) = (m, a, nb) = (mn, a, b) ([7, Section 62], [ 11, Section D.33, Point 8]). 1. In the group Tor(A, B) we have (m, 0, b) = 0 = (m, a, 0). If A or B is torsion-free, then Tor(A, B) = 0. For all groups A and B, Ai and Bj we have

Tor(A, B) ~ Tor(tA, tB) ~- Tor(tB, tA) ~- Tor(B, A), Tor(~ i~I

Ai , ~ j~J

Bj ) ~ ~

Tor(Ai , Bj ).

i,j

2. The group Tor(A, B) is torsion for any groups A and B. If A or B is a p-group then Tor(A, B) is a p-group. If A is a p-group and B a q-group for different primes p and q, then Tor(A, B) = 0. We have: Tor(Z(m), G) ~- G[m] for all groups G and all integers m > 0; Tor(Q/Z, G) ~tG; Tor(Z(pC~), G) -~ Gp [7, Section 62, H, I, J], If A and B are reduced p-groups, then Tor(A, B) is a reduced p-group of length min{L(A), L(B)} (R.J. Nunke, 1964). For p-groups A, B, P. Hill (1983) found conditions on Tor(A, B) to be a direct sum of cyclic groups. The structure of the group Tor(A, B) is considered in R.J. Nunke (1967), [30, Section 8], [31, Section 10]. 3. EW. Keef (1990) found necessary and sufficient conditions for a p-group G to be isomorphic to the group Tor(A, B) for some totally projective groups A and B (Section 2, Point 3). For a given group B the class 7-B of all p-groups A with the property A ~ Tor(A, B) is considered in another paper by EW. Keef, 1990. A p-group A is called Tor-idempotent if Tor(A, A) ~ A. There exist reduced Tor-idempotent groups of arbitrary length. 4. Problem 50 in [7, Ch. X] asks: how are two groups A and B related if Tor(A, C) Tor(B, C) for all reduced groups C? D.O. Curler (1982) constructed an example of non-isomorphic p-groups A and B with Tor(A, G) ~ Tor(B, G) for all reduced p-groups G.

698

A.V. Mikhalev and A.P Mishina

But if Tor(A, X) -~ Tor(B, X) for given torsion groups A, B and an arbitrary reduced torsion group X, then A and B have the same cardinality m, the same Ulm invariants (Section 2, Point 3), their maximal divisible subgroups are isomorphic, and ~)m A ~ ~)m B (P. Hill, 1971). If A, B, R, S are totally projective groups, then Tor(A, B) ~ Tor(R, S) if and only if the Ulm invariants of Tor(A, B) and Tor(R, S) coincide (see P.W. Keef, 1990). The Ulm invariants for Tor(A, B) were described by R.J. Nunke (1964). 5. If E: 0--+ A --% B ~ induced sequence

C ---->0 is a short exact sequence then for any group G the

ctt

fit

0 --+ Tor(A, G) --+ Tor(B, G) ~ Tor(C, G) --~ A | G --~ B |

C|

is exact ([7, Theorem 63.1]). If the subgroup c~(A) is pure in B then ct'(Tor(A, G)) is pure in Tor(B, G) and Im E. = 0 (see [7, Theorem 63.2]). Some additional information on the groups Tor(A, B) can be found in the surveys [2731 ] and also in [7, Ch. X].

10. Valuated groups A function v on a p-group G is called a p-valuation if it satisfies the following conditions: (1) vx is an ordinal or the symbol c~ (x ~ G); (2) vpx > vx (we assume that c~ < cx~ and ct < c~ for all ordinals c~); (3) v(x + y) ~ min(vx, vy); (4) vnx - vx if (n, p) = 1 (see [32,47]). A p-group G together with a p-valuation on it is called a valuated p-group. As an example of a p-valuation on a p-group G one can take the height function h* for which to every element x ~ G we let correspond its generalized p-height h* (x). By a p-valuation vp on an arbitrary Abelian group G we mean a function with the properties (1)-(4) of a p-valuation on a p-group. The group G is called a valuated group if a p valuation Vp is defined on G for every prime p (see [34]). Any valuated group A can be embedded into a group B in such a way that the restriction to A of the p-height function of B for every p is the p-valuation on A (see [32] and [34, Theorem 23]). By a homomorphism o f valuated groups f : A --+ A' we mean a homomorphism f such that Vp t f ( x ) ~ VpX for all x 6 A and p. If f is a monomorphism and Vp ' f (x) = VpX for all x E A and p then f is said to be an embedding of A into At. We say that the valuated group A is a (valuated) subgroup of the valuated group B if A is a subgroup of B and the natural embedding of A into B is an embedding of valuated groups. If A is a p-local (Section 4, Point 2) valuated group then by a subgroup of A we mean a Qp-submodule.


699

If A is a p-local valuated group and c~ is an ordinal or c~, then let A(ot) = {a 6 A I va >~ ct}. If ct ~ cx~ then the u-th Ulm invariant fA (c~) of A is defined to be the rank (i.e. the dimension of the corresponding vector space over ~p) of the p-bounded group FA (~) = {a C A (~) I pa c A (~ + 2) }/ A (c~ + 1). fA (c~) is the rank of the p-bounded group FA (cx~) = {a ~ A (cx~) I pa = 0}. If G is a valuated group (not necessary p-local) then the Ulm invariants fG (P, ~) of G are the Ulm invariants of the various localizations (Section 9, Part I, Point 2) of G (see [33]). The direct sum of a family of valuated groups is their group direct sum, the value of an element being the minimum of the values of its components. A free valuated group F is a direct sum of infinite cyclic valuated groups with the property v p p x -- VpX q- 1 for all x 6 F and p. A complete system of invariants with respect to isomorphism for direct sums of valuated infinite cyclic groups was obtained by D.M. Arnold, R. Hunter and E. Walker (1979). A direct summand of such a group is a direct sum of valuated infinite cyclic groups (R.O. Stanton, 1979). But there exists subgroups of direct sums of valuated prime order p cyclic groups which are not direct sums of valuated cyclic groups (see [34]). The validity for valuated groups of some results form Abelian group theory is discussed by R. Hunter, F. Richman and E. Walker (1984 and 1987). The Ulm theorem concerning simply presented p-groups ([7, Theorem 83.3]) holds for valuated simply presented pgroups. On valuated Warfield groups (Section 4, Point 3) and other questions connected with valuated groups see [29, Section 10], [30, Section 10], [31, Section 11], [20, p. 7], [36, p. 6], [23,33].

11. Other questions 1. Purity. For pure subgroups (Section 1, Point 5) of Abelian groups the following statements hold: (0) every direct summand of a group is a pure subgroup, (1) if A _c B c C and A is pure in B, B is pure in C then A is pure in C; (2) if A c_ B c_ C and A is pure in C then A is pure in B; (3) if A is pure in B then A / K is pure in B / K for any subgroup K ___A; (4) if K _ A ___B with K pure in B and A / K pure in B / K then A is pure in B. One says that in the class of all Abelian groups there is given an co-purity (a purity co) if in each group some subgroups (called co-pure) are fixed (notation: A c__o)B) so that for these subgroups the conditions (0)-(4) above are satisfied [ 12, Section 1], [26, Section 11, Part I]. An example of an co-purity (nearest to purity and called e-purity) is the following. For each prime p let us fix a set, possibly empty, of natural numbers Mp -- {kip, k2p . . . . }; by definition, A _ce B if and only if a - - pkip b with a E A, b 6 B implies a - - pkipa 1 for some a l C A (for every prime p and k i p E m p ) . The concept of e-purity was studied by V.S. Rokhlina, see [28, Section 5]. If each Mp is the set of all natural numbers we have purity, if Mp -- {1} for each p we have nearness ([6, Section 28]). Many other examples of co-purity can be found in [12, Section 1], Section 5 of [28], [29,30] and [31, Section 7]; in particular, see T. Kepka (1973), S.I. Komarov (1982), C.P. Walker (1966).

700

A. V. Mikhalev and A.P. Mishina

An w-purity is caled inductive if the union of an ascending chain of w-pure subgroups in any group is an w-pure subgroup. A.A. Manovcev (1975) gave a complete description of all inductive w-purities in the class of all Abelian groups: they are intersections of e-purities and Head's 0-purities (T.J. Head, 1967). The intersection of two purities wl and w2 is the purity wl Nw2 such that A C~OlnOJ2 B whenever A ---~Ol B and A c oj2 B. O-purity (originally called subpurity) is defined as follows: A c o B (or A ---oP B) if, for a fixed set P ofprimes, a = pkb (a ~ A , b ~ B, p E P , k natural)implies pla = pk+lal for some al e A and some integer I ~> 0. In another way this problem has been solved by V.I. Kuz' minov (1976), see also E.G. Sklyarenko (1981). The extensions G of the group A by the group B (Section 8, Part II) in which A is an w-pure subgroup of G determine elements of the group Ext(B, A) forming a subgroup wExt(B, A) ([12, Point (1.2)]). Concerning wExt(B, A) see [12, Points (1.3), (1.4)], [26, Section 11, Part I, Point 2]. If w Ext(B, A) = Ext(B, A) for fixed A and any B (respectively, for fixed B and any A) then A (respectively B) is called w-divisible (w-flat) ([12, p. 26]). A.V. Ivanov (1978) found necessary and sufficient conditions on two classes of groups 92 and ~ to be the class of all w-divisible and the class of all w-flat groups for an w-purity. The result is valid also for modules over arbitrary left hereditary tings. If w Ext(B, A) = 0 for a fixed group A and any group B (respectively, for fixed B and any A) then A is called w-injective (respectively, B is called w-projective), see [12, Point (1.6)]. This is equivalent to the group A (the group B) to be injective (projective) relative to all exact sequences 0 ---> K --~ G ---> L ~ 0 where ct(K) ___,oG, see [ 12, p. 24 and Point (1.6)]. We say that a group G is quasi-injective (quasi-projective) if it is injective (projective) with respect to any exact sequence 0 ~ H -~ G ~ G / H ~ 0 with a ( H ) c_,o G, see [29, Section 5], [30, Section 5], [31, Section 7], [16] and Problem 17 from [7, Ch. V]. Many other matters concerning w-purity are discussed in [ 12, Section 1], [26, Section 11, Part I], [27, Section 4], Section 5 of [28], [29,30], [31, Section 7] and [35].

2. Radicals of Abelian groups. A function R assigning to each group A a subgroup R(A) so that if f :A ---> B is a homomorphism then f ( R ( A ) ) C_b R(B) is called a subfunctor of the identity or subfunctor of the identity functor (R.J. Nunke, 1964). A subfunctor of the identity is also called a preradical (P. Hill and Ch. Megibben, 1968). If R is a preradical then the subgroup R(A) is called a preradical or afunctorial subgroup of the group A (B. Charles, 1968). R. Marty (1968) calls a subgroup R(G) (a subgroup S(G)) of the group G a radical (socle) if R (respectively S) is a preradical and, moreover, R ( G / R ( G ) ) = 0 (respectively, S(S(G)) = S(G)). A radical which is at the same time a socle is called idempotent radical by B.J. Gardner (1972). Let us note that in [ 12, Section 2] the word "radical" means idempotent radical. If R(A) = A or R(A) = 0 then the group A is called R-radical or R-semisimple, respectively. The idempotent radical R(G) of a group G is the greatest R-radical subgroup of the group G and at the same time is the intersection of all its subgroups H such that G / H is R-semisimple ([ 12, Point (2.8)]). It is always the case that R(A) is a pure subgroup in A (B.J. Gardner, 1972).


701

A radical R such that A = R (A) @ A I for some subgroup A' in any group A is called splitting. A non-trivial radical R (i.e. not such that R(A) = A, VA or R(A) = O, YA) is splitting if and only if the class of all R-radical groups coincides with the class of all divisible groups or with one of the classes of all groups of the form (~)pen G p where G p is a divisible p-group, Jr is a fixed set of primes (B.J. Gardner, ibid). Let ,4 be an arbitrary class of Abelian groups and

R.A(G) = N { ker f l f ~ Hom(G, X), X a A} for any group G. Then R.A is a radical (in the sense of Marty, see above) and {G I R.A (G) = 0} is the least class of groups containing .,4 and closed under formation of subgroups and direct products (a class of groups with the last two properties is called an annihilator class). If R is an arbitrary radical in the class of all Abelian groups then R = Rr with .,4 = {G [ R(G) = 0}. This gives a bijective correspondence between annihilator classes and radicals (M. Dugas, T.H. Fay, S. Shelah, 1987). If A is the class of all b~l-free groups (Section 1, Point 3) then the radical R.A is called the Chase radical. The Chase radical of a group G is the sum of its countable subgroups that have no free direct summands (see K. Eda, 1987). Additional information on radicals in Abelian groups can be found in [12, Section 2] and [28, Section 9], [29, Section 10], [30, Section 11], [31, Section 11]. On the relations between radicals and purities see [ 12, Point (2.47)] and A.V. Ivanov, 1978.

3. N-high subgroups. If N is a subgroup of the group A then the subgroup B of A is called N-high if it is maximal with respect to the property N N B = 0. Concerning various properties of such subgroups see [27, Section 5], [28, Section 9], [29, Section 6], [30, Section 6], [31, Introduction]. Subgroups N with all N-high subgroups being e-pure (Point 1 above) for a given e-purity were described by V.S. Rokhlina (1971). 4. Transitive and fully transitive groups. A torsion-free group G is called transitive (respectively fully transitive or fully invariant) if for any a, b ~ G with characteristics (Section 3, Point 1) X (a) = X (b) (X (a) -fl is valid for the transform (30). Let us note that the integral in (31) corresponds to the representations of the principal unitary series of Uq (SUl,1) and the sum contains matrix elements of representations of the strange series.

Infinite-dimensional representations of quantum algebras

723

5. Representations of the quantum algebras Uq (SUr,s) 5.1. The quantum algebras Uq (SUr,s) The quantum algebra Uq (sln) is generated by elements [26] ki = qhi/4, k~l _ q-hi~4 ei fi

i -- 1 2

n - 1

satisfying the relations ki k 71 _ kZ 1ki - 1,

ki kj -- kj ki,

(32)

k i e j k ~ 1 - qaiy/4ej,

ki f j k ~ 1 -- q-aij/4 f j,

(33)

-k? [ei, f j] -- 6ij q

1/2

-q

-1/2

[ei, e j] -- [fi, f j ] -- O,

~ij[hi],

(34)

li - j l > 1,

(35)

-=

e2ei+l _ (ql/2 -k- q - 1 /2 ) e ie i+ le i -}- ei+le 2 -- O,

(36)

f/Zj~• __ (ql/2 _k_q-1/2)j~j~il j~ q_ f/•

(37)

= O,

where aii : 2, ai,i+l - - - 1 and aij : 0 for li -- jl > 1. The last two relations are called the q-Serre relations. The structure of a Hopf algebra is introduced on Uq (Sin). The coalgebra structure allows us the composition of representations whereas the universal R-matrix is an intertwiner between the switched tensor products. We shall only deal with representations of Uq(sln) considered as an associative algebra generated by ki, ki -1 ei fi i - - 1,2 . . . . . n - 1 . We can equip Uq (Sin) with *-structures. Different *-structures define different real forms of Uq (sln). The *-structure

(k/~ 1) * -k/~1 , ei* - - f i , fi 9 - - e i gives the compact real form Uq (SUn) of the quantum algebra Uq (sin). The *-structure (k/:t:l) * - k / i l , ep* _ --fp, f p 9- - - e p ,

(38)

e* = f i , f i* - - e i , i =/=p,

(39)

defines the noncompact real form Uq (SUp,n-p). There are other real forms of Uq (sln). They will not be considered below. The irreducible finite-dimensional representations of the quantum algebra Uq (SUn) (q is not a root of unity) are deformations of the corresponding irreducible finite-dimensional representations of the Lie algebra SUn. These representations of Uq (SUn) can be given by explicit formulas for the representation operators with respect to the q-analogue of the Gel'fand-Tsetlin basis. These formulas are obtained from the corresponding Gel'f and-

A. U. Klimyk

724

Tsetlin formulas for representations of SUn by replacement of all expressions of the type (mik -- mjs -4- a) by [mik -- mjs • a] respectively, where [b] is a q-number. We are interested in representations of the quantum algebra Uq (SUr,s) with q not coinciding with a root of unity. The operators of these representations must satisfy relations (38) and (39). These representations will be called infinitesimal unitary (we shall omit the word "infinitesimal"). Along with them we shall consider representations of the associative algebra Uq(sUr,s) for which conditions (38) and (39) may be violated. They are not representations of the *-algebra Uq (SUr,s). But we need them to separate irreducible unitary representations of Uq (SUr,s). Therefore, we give the following definition of representations of Uq (SUr,s). A representation T of the associative algebra Uq (SUr,s) is an algebraic homomorphism from Uq (SUr,s) into an algebra of linear (bounded or unbounded) operators on a Hilbert space H for which the following conditions are fulfilled: (a) the restriction of T onto the subalgebra Uq (Ur + Us) decomposes into a direct sum of finite-dimensional irreducible representations (given by integral highest weights) with finite multiplicities; (b) operators of a representation T are defined on everywhere dense subspace V of H, containing all subspaces which are carrier spaces of irreducible finite-dimensional representations of Uq (Ur + Us) from the restriction of T to this subalgebra. In other words, our representations T of Uq(sUr,s) are Harish-Chandra modules of Uq (SUr,s) with respect to Uq (Ur + Us). A representation T of Uq (SUr,s) on H is called irreducible if H has no non-trivial invariant subspaces with closure coinciding with H. If the operators of a representation T satisfy relations (38) and (39) on the common domain V of definition, then T is called a unitary representation. To define a representation T of Uq (SUr,s) it is sufficient to give the operators T(k+l), T(ei), T(fi), i = 1,2 . . . . . n - 1, satisfying relations (32)-(37).

5.2. Representations of Uq (SUn, 1) We consider representations of Uq (SUn,l) when q is not a root of unity. Let Cl and c2 be complex numbers such that cl + c2 - mo is an integer, and let In = (m l, m2 ..... mn-1) be a highest weight of an irreducible representation of the subalgebra Uq (Un-l ). The numbers In, cl, c2 determine a representation T(m, cl, c2) of the quantum algebra Uq(sUn,1). The restriction of T (in, c l, c2) to Uq (Un) decomposes into the orthogonal sum of all irreducible representations Tmn with highest weights Inn = (m In mnn) such that . . . . .

mln >/ml >1m2n >/m2 >/... >/mn-1 >1 mnn.

Every one of these representations of Uq(un) is contained in T(m, cl, c2) exactly once. This restriction determines the Hilbert space Vm on which T (in, c l, c2) acts. We choose in Vm the orthonormal basis consisting of the Gel'fand-Tsetlin bases of the carrier subspaces of irreducible representations Tmn of Uq(u n). These basis elements are denoted by Iron, ct), where ct are the corresponding Gel'fand-Tsetlin patterns of the representation Tmn. The operators T(en), T(fn) of the representation T(m, Cl, ca) act upon IInn, ct) by

725

Infinite-dimensional representations o f q u a n t u m algebras

the formulas

n T(en)[mn,

or) -- Z [ l s n

--

Cl]Ogs(m, llln, c0[m n+s , 0~),

s--1 n

Z(fn)]mn,Ot)---

~[--lsn

-[-c2-~-

1]ws(m, mn s, cQ [mnS, or),

s=l where

Ogs(m, ran, or) -- (- I-Ij-][lj'n-l-lsn-1][lj-lsn]) 1/2 Ur~s[lsn

m

lj--mj--j-1, +s n -- ( m l n . . . . .

The operator

j=l,2 ms-l,n,

-- lrn -'[- 1][lsn -- lrn]

..... n--I;

'

lsk=msk--s, s = l , 2 . . . . . k,

m s n -4- 1, m s + l , n . . . . .

mnn).

T (hn) is given by the formula n-1 Cl + C2 + n + 2 + ~ m j j=l

T(hn)[mn, Ol)

n-1 ~ ) + ~mj,n-l - 2 mjn 9 j=l j=l

The other generators ei, fj, hk belong to the subalgebra Uq(un) and the operators T(fj), T(h~) act upon the basis elements Imp, c~) by Jimbo's formulas [14]. Because of periodicity of the function w(z) = [z] the representations T(m, C1,6"2) and

T(m, C1 -[- 4rcik/h, r --

4rcik/h),

k 6 Z,

2rcik/h),

k 6 Z,

coincide and the representations T(m, r

r

and

T(m, r -'[-2rcik/h, r --

are equivalent when q -- exp h, h 6 R. If q = exp ih, h 6 R, then the representations

T(m, cl,c2)

and

+4rck/h, c2-4zck/h),

k 6Z,

T(m, c l + 2 r c k / h , c 2 - 2 z c k / h ) ,

kEZ,

T(m, cl

coincide and the representations

T(m, cl,c2)

and

are equivalent. Therefore, we suppose that 0 ~< Im cl < 2zr/h if q -- exp h, h 6 R, and 0 ~< Re Cl < 2Zt'/h if q -- exp ih, h ~ R.

T(ei),

726

A. U. Klimyk

THEOREM [17]. The representation T(m, Cl, C2) is irreducible if and only if cl and C2 are not integers or cl and c2 coincide with some of the numbers ll, 12. . . . . ln-1. The irreducible representations T (m, cl, c2) and T (m, c2, Cl ) are equivalent. The intertwining operator for these representations is constructed in the same way as in the classical case [16]. Reducible representations T(rn, Cl, c2) and T ( m , c2, cl) contain equivalent irreducible representations of Uq (SUn, 1). A reducible representation T (m, cl, c2) contains a finite number of irreducible components. Reducible representations T(m, cl, c2) of Uq (SUn, l) have exactly the same structure as the corresponding representations of the group SU(n, 1) [ 16]. Moreover, there is the one-to-one correspondence between irreducible components of a representation T (In, Cl, c2) of Uq (SUn, l) and irreducible components of a representation T (m, Cl, c2) of SU(n, 1).

5.3. Unitary irreducible representations of Uq (SUn, 1) If q = exph, h 6 R, then the following irreducible representations T(m, cl, C2) of Uq (SUn, l ) are unitary [ 17]: (a) the representations T (m, Cl, c2), Cl = ~ (the principal unitary series); (b) the representations T (m, cl, c2), Im Cl -- - Im c2 = Jr/h (the strange series); (c) the representations T (m, cl, c2), where Cl and c2 are real numbers for which there exist numbers lk -- mk -- k - 1, Is -- ms - s - 1, k, s -- 1,2 . . . . . n - 1, such that Ilk--cll < 1, I l s - c 2 l < 1 andmk = m k + l = " " = m s (for cl > c2) Orms = m s + l = 9" = mk (for cl < c2) (the supplementary series). Along with these unitary representations there are unitary irreducible representations of Uq (SUn, 1) which are irreducible components of reducible representations T (m, Cl, c2). There is the one-to-one correspondence between nonequivalent unitary irreducible representations of Uq (SUn, i) which are irreducible components of T (m, cl, c2) and nonequivalent unitary irreducible representations of the same type of the group SU(n, 1). The list of the last representations can be found in [ 16]. If q = exp ih, h 6 R, and q is not a root of unity, then the following irreducible representations of Uq(SUn, 1) are unitary: (a) the representations T (m, Cl, c2), c2 = ~-T (the principal unitary series); (b) the representations T ( m , ci, c2), Recl = -- Rec2 = Jr/h (the strange series). These representations and the zero representation exhaust all irreducible unitary representations of Uq (SUn, l) in this case. Remark that the strange series of representations disappears when q ~ 1.

5.4. Representations of the degenerate series of the quantum algebra Uq (SUr,s) Representations of the principal degenerate series of Uq (sur, s) are given by two complex numbers ,kl and ~2 such that ~,1 + )~2 is an integer, or by the numbers /Z = (--~,1 -~- ~,2)/2

and

A = ~,1 + ~,2.


727

We denote the corresponding representations by TAI,. The space VAu of the representation TAu is the orthogonal sum of the subspaces V ( m l r , O, mrr; m l s , O, mss) which are the carrier spaces of the finite-dimensional irreducible representations of Uq (Ur + Us) with highest weights (m lr, O, mrr; m ls, O, mss) such that (40)

m lr -Jr-mrr "]- m ls "}- mss = A.

Here (mlr, O, mrr) and (mls, O, mss), m l r >/0 >/mrr, mls >~0 ~ mss, are highest weights of irreducible representations of the subalgebras Uq (Ur) and Uq (Us), respectively, and 0 denotes a set of zero coordinates. If r = 2 then instead of (m lr, O, mrr) w e have the highest weights (m 12, m22), m I2 ~> m22, and here m 12 and m22 may be both positive or both negative. The same remark is valid for the highest weights (mls, O, mss) if s = 2. We choose in the subspaces V ( m l r , O, mrr', m ls, O, mss) orthonormal bases which are products of the Gel' fand-Tsetlin bases corresponding to irreducible representations of the quantum subalgebras Uq (Ur) and Uq (Us). Elements of such bases are labelled by double Gel' fand-Tsetlin patterns

mlr IM)-

0 mrr j 0 jt a 0 at

mls

0 mss k 0 k' b 0 bt

"

(41)

If r = 2 or s = 2 then the corresponding Gel' fand-Tsetlin pattern is replaced by m12

m22

j

)

It is clear that the numbers from pattern (41) satisfy the conditions m lr ~ j >~a ~ " " " >~a' >~j' >~mrr,

(42)

m Is ~ k >/b >/... >/b t >~k' >/mss

(43)

or the condition m 12 ~ j >~ m 2 2 if r = 2 or s = 2. Thus, elements of the orthonormal basis of the carrier space of the representation TA~ are labelled by all patterns (41) satisfying the betweenness conditions (42), (43) and equality (40). The operators corresponding to elements of the subalgebras Uq (Ur) and Uq (Us) act upon basis elements by Jimbo's formulas [ 14]. To define completely the representation TAu we have to give the operators TA#(er), TA#(fr). They are of the form, [18]:

TA#(er)IM)

=

[),2 - -

mrr -- mls -- s + 1]A(mlr, mrr)B(mls,mss)

x IM(m+rl,ml~))+ I-Z1 + mlr + mls]a(mlr,mrr) x D(mls, mss)lM(m +1if m~sl)) ,

-k-[L2- m l r - - m l s - - r - - s

-+-2]C(mlr,mrr)

728

A. U. Klimyk x B(mls, mss)lM{m +1 , mlsl)) ~. rr

-I- [X1 -I- mrr + m l s -- r + 1 ] C ( m l r , m r r ) D ( m l s , mss) x IM{m+m , r r , m s s-l ) l , TA#(fr)]M)

(44)

= I-X1 + m r r + m l s - - r

+ 1]A(mlT,mrr)B(m+sl,mss)

X [ M ( m l r 1 , m + s l ) ) + [X2 -- m l r -- m l s - - r - - s + 2] x A(mlrl,mrr)D(mls,m+ssl)[M(mlrl,m+ssl))

+ [--~.1 + m l r + m l s ] C ( m l r , mrr 1) • B(m+sl,mss)lM(m~l,m+sl))+

[~.2- m r r -

mls-s

+ 1]

(45)

• C(mlr,mrrllD(mls,m+sl)lM(mrrl,m+l)),

where M(miZl:rl, m jq:l s ) is the pattern obtained from pattern (41) by replacement of mir and m j s respectively by mir -4- 1 and m j s :{: 1. For r > 2 and s > 2 the coefficients A, B, C, D are given by the formulas _[mlr -- j' + r -- l][mlr -- j + 1]

,~ 1/2

)

A(mlr, mrr) =

t m l r - mrr + r -- 1 ] [ - m i r - mrr + r]

B(mls,mss)

[m,s ---mss 7q-s ~ i i [ m , s -- m s s + s -- 2]

[m Is - k ] [ m Is

=

.

-

)i/2

k' + s - 2]

m r r l [ j - mrr -t- r - 21

[j'.

-

.

.

.

.

) I/2

.

mrr + r - 2]

C(mlr,mrr)

=

[mlr - mrr + r -- l i i m i r -

D(mls,mss)

=

[mls - mss + s - 1][mls - mss + s ]

[k - mss + s - 1][k' - mss + 1]

) 1/2

- -

where the [b] are q-numbers. The formula for A(m-(r I , m r r ) is obtained from the formula for A (m lr, mrr) by replacement of m lr by m lr 1. The corresponding notations for B, C and D from formulas (44) and (45) are of the analogous meaning. For r = 2 the expressions for A ( m l r , m r r ) and C ( m l r , m r r ) are o f t h e form -

-

A(m 12, m22) =

[m12 - j + 1] ) 1/2 [m 12 - m22 + 1][m 12 - m22 + 2] '

C ( m 12, m22) =

[m 12 - m22 -+- 1][m 12 - m22]

[j - m22]

)1/2 "

If s = 2 then we have

B ( m 1 2 , m22) --

[m 12 -- k] ) 1/2 [m 12 - m22 --[- 1][m12 - m22] '


[ k - m 2 2 + 1]

( D(m 12, m22) =

[m12 - m22 -+- 1][m12 - m22 -+- 2]

729

)1/2 "

THEOREM. If q is not a root of unity, then the representation TAu is irreducible if and only if 21z is not an integer such that 21z -~ A (mod 2). The structure of reducible representations TAu is described in paper [ 18]. The irreducible representations TAu

and

TA,-lz+r+s-1

are equivalent. If these representations are reducible, then they consist of the same irreducible components. The periodicity of the function w(z) = [z] leads to the equivalence relation TAlz ~ TA,lz+2rrik/h,

k ~ Z,

if q = exp h, h 6 R, and to the relation TAtz ~ TA,lz+27rk/h,

k ~ Z,

if q = exp ih, h 6 R. The following irreducible representations TAu are unitary: (a) the representations TAu, lz = ip + (r + s -- 1)/2, 0 < p < 2Jr/h (the principal degenerate unitary series); (b) the representations TAu for which A = (r + s) (mod2), (r + s - 1)/2 < / z < (r + s)/2 (the supplementary degenerate series); (c) the representations TAu, Im/z = zr/h, Re/z ~< (r + s - 1)/2 (the strange series). There are unitary irreducible representations of Uq (SUr,s) which are irreducible components of reducible representations TA# [ 18].

6. Representations of the q-deformed algebras Uq (SOn,1 ) 6.1. Representations of Uq (so2,1) We define the q-deformed algebra Uq(so(3, C)) as the associative algebra generated by elements 11, I2, 13 satisfying the commutation relations [I1, I2]q =- ql/4II12 -- q-1/41211 -- 13,

[13, I1 ]q

=

I2,

[I2, I3 ]q

= I1.

The first relation shows that Uq (so(3, C)) is generated by two elements 11 and 12 satisfying the relations 1212 -- (q 1/2 -'1-q -1/2) I112 I1 -+- 1212 = -- 12, Il I2 -- (q e/2 + q -1/2)121112+1211----11 .

730

A. U. Klimyk

The q-deformed algebra Uq(so2,1) is obtained from Uq (so(3, C)) by introducing the involution determined uniquely by the formulas I{ = -11, I~ -- I2. The involution relations I~ = - 11, I~ = - I2 determine the q-deformed algebra Uq (so3). REMARK. The Lie groups SU(1, 1) and SO0(2, 1) are locally isomorphic and their Lie algebras are isomorphic. The q-deformed algebras Uq (su i, l) and Uq (so2,1) are not isomorphic. Moreover, they have distinct sets of unitary irreducible representations. Let E be a fixed complex number and let Ve be the complex Hilbert space with orthonormal basis {Im), m = e + n, n = 0, 4-1, 4-2 . . . . }. With every complex number cr we associate the representation T,,e of the algebra Uq (so2,1) on the Hilbert space Ve acting by the formulas [ 11 ]

T~e(I1)lm) =

i[m]lm),

Tae(I2)lm) = d ( m ) [ a - m]lm + 1) + d ( m - 1 ) [ - a - m]lm - 1), where [b] is a q-number and

d(m) = ([m][m + 1])l/2([2m][2m + 2]) -1/2

(46)

If q 4:1 then the operator T,r E(12) is bounded. In the set of representations T,r e there exist equivalence relations. First of all, one can see that the matrices of the representations T~e and T,~,~+k, k ~ Z, coincide. For this reason we assume below that 0~ 1

(they follow from the commutation relations for the generators Iij of the Lie algebra

so(n, C)). In our approach to the q-deformation of orthogonal algebras we define q-deformed associative algebras Uq(so(n, C)) by deforming relations (49)-(51) for generators Ii,i-1, i = 2, 3 . . . . . n. The q-deformed relations are of the form

_ (ql/2 + q - 1/2) Ii,i- 1 Ii+ 1,i Ii,i-1 + I t,t2. 11i+l,i - - - I i + 1 ,i , Ii,i-112+l,i -- (ql/2 + q - 1 / 2 ) i i + l , i Ii,i-11i+l,i + I2+l,i Ii,i-1 -- - - I i , i - 1 ,

i i + l , i i 2 t,1-1 .

(52)

[li,i-1, I j , j - 1 ] - O,

(53) (54)

li - jl > 1,

where [., .] denotes the usual commutator. Obviously, in the limit q ---> 1 formulas (52)(54) give relations (49)-(51). Note also that relations (52) and (53) differ completely from the q-deformed Serre relations in the approach of Jimbo [ 13] and Drinfeld [8] to quantum orthogonal algebras by presence of a nonzero fight hand side and by the possibility of the reduction Uq (so(n, C)) ~ Uq (so(n - 1, C)).

732

A. U. Klimyk

Recall that in the standard Jimbo-Drinfeld approach the quantum algebras Uq (so(2m, C)) and the quantum algebras Uq (so(2m + 1, C)) are separate series of quantum algebras of the types Dm and Bm respectively which are constructed independently from each other. In this chapter, by the algebra Uq (so(n, C)) we mean the q-deformed algebra determined by the defining relations (52)-(54). The compact real form Uq(sOn) of Uq(so(n ' C)) is defined by the involution I*i , i - 1 m-Ii,i-1, i - - 2 , 3 . . . . . n. The noncompact real forms Uq(sOp,r), r = n - p, are distin* guished respectively by the formulas I*i , i - 1 = - I i , -i 1' i =/: p + 1 ' lp+l, p - - l p + l , p " In particular, for r -- 1 we obtain the q-analogue of the Lorentz algebras.

6.3. Representations of the algebra Uq (SO3,1) The irreducible representations of Uq(sO3,1) are given in the same way as in the case of the Lorentz group SO0(3, 1). These representations Tas are defined by a complex number a and by an integral or half-integral number s. To give these representations it is sufficient to have the operators Tas(li,i-l), i = 2, 3, 4. The representation T~s acts on the Hilbert space Vs with orthonormal basis I1, m), 1 = Isl, Isl + 1, Isl + 2 . . . . . m = - l , -1 + 1. . . . . 1. On the subspace V~s spanned by the basis elements I1, m) with fixed l the irreducible representation 7) of the subalgebra Uq(sO3) acts as given by formulas (47) and (48). The operator T~s(14), 14 -- I43, is ofthe form [11]

T~rs(14)ll, m) = [a + l + 1]AI+l ll + 1,m) -- [a -- I]Alll -- 1,m) +iClll, m), where

At = ([l + s][l - s][l + m][l - m ] ) 1/2 012i~ - 1][2l + 1]

,

CI =

[al[sl[m] i/lit + 1]

THEOREM. If q is not a root of unity, then the representation Tas of the algebra Uq(sO3,1) is irreducible if and only if 2a is not an integer of the same evenness as 2s or if lcrl 0 and 0 ~< p < 2zr/Ihl for s = 0 (the principal unitary series); (b) the representations T~s where s = 0 and 0 < a < 1 (the supplementary series); (c) the representations T~s where I m a = zr/h, R e a > 0 (the strange series); (d) the zero representation. If q = exp ih, h ~ R, then we have the following unitary representations: (a) the representations T~s, a = ip, 0 < p < c~ (the principal unitary series);


733

(b) the representations T,rs with Rear = rc/lhl (the strange series); (c) the zero representation.

6.4. Representations o f the algebra Uq (SOn, 1) The irreducible finite-dimensional representations Tm,, of the algebra Uq (SOn), which are of class 1 with respect to the subalgebra Uq (SOn- 1), are given by a nonnegative integer mn. As in the classical case, we choose Gel'fand-Tsetlin bases in the carrier spaces of these representations. They correspond to successive restrictions of a representation onto the subalgebras Vq(sOn) ~ Vq(sOn-1) ~ Vq(sOn-2) ~ ''" ~ Uq(so2).

The basis elements of these spaces are denoted by I mn, mn- 1 . . . . ,m3,m2), where mn-1 . . . . . m3, m2 are integers such that mn >/mn-1 ~ " " ~ m3 >/m2 >/O.

With respect to this basis the operator given by formula [ 11 ]:

Zmn(In,n-l)

of the representation Tm,, of Uq(sOn) is

Tmn (ln,n-1)lmn, m n-1, m n - 2 . . . . . m2) = ([mn + mn-1 + n - 2][mn - mn-1])1/2R(mn-1) • [mn, mn-1 + 1, m n - 2 . . . . . m2) -- ([mn + mn-1 + n -- 3][mn -- mn-1 + 1]) 1/2 x R(mn-1 - 1)lmn,mn-1 - 1,mn_2,...,m2),

(55)

where n >~ 3 and R ( m n _ l ) = ( [ m n - l -+-mn-2 + n - 3][mn-l - mn-2 + l ] ) 1/2 [2mn-1 + n - 1][2mn-1 + n - 3]

(56)

As it is easily seen, the relations just presented reduce for n -- 3 to the action formula (48) for T (132). The representations T,~ of the algebra Uq (SOn,1), which are of class 1 with respect to the subalgebra Uq (SOn), are given by a complex number cr. They act on the Hilbert space V with orthonormal basis Imn, mn-1 . . . . . m3, m2),

mn >/mn-1 > / " " >/m3 >/m2 >/O.

The representation operators T~ (Ii,i-1), i ~ is a prime ideal, since Z is an integral domain, and the intersection of all those kernels for subgroups H of G is zero. In particular, the ring B(G) is reduced. Since cG _ q~; if H and K are conjugate in G, it follows that the product map +-

FI

H z

HE[SG]

HE[so]

is injective. Moreover this map 9 is a map between free Z-modules having the same rank. Hence the cokernel of 4) is finite. The matrix m of 9 with respect to the basis {G/H}HE[sc] and to the canonical basis {UH}HE[sc] of I-IHE[sc] Z is the table of marks of the group G. Recall from Definition 2.3.4 that for H, K 6 [so]

I{x

m(H, K)=

C/KIH x c

The cardinality of the cokernel of q> is the determinant of m, hence it is equal to

ICoker(+>l: I1

IN

'HI.

He[sG]

This cokernel has been described by Dress ([23]):

S. Bouc

748

THEOREM 3.2.1 (Dress). Let G be a finite group. For H and K in [SG], set

n(K, H) = I{x E N G ( K ) / K I (x, K) =G

H}].

Then the element y = Y'~HS[sG] yHUH of I-InE[sG ] • is in the image of ~ if and only if for any K ~ [SG]

n(K, H)yH =--0 (ING(K)/KI). HE[SG]

PROOF. First let X be a finite G-set, and let y = + ( X ) . Then with the notation of the theorem, one has YH = IxH I for all H ~ [SG], thus for any K ~ [SG]

Z

Ix l I{x ~ _ N G ( K ) / K I ( x , K ) - - G H}I

n(K, H)yH -HE[SG]

HE[SG]

IX<X'K>I xENG(K)/K

I(xK) l. xENG(K)/K

Now for any finite group L acting on a finite set Z one has ILl • IL\ZI = I L l ~ ILzl z~Z ILl

=l{r

Applying this for L = N G ( K ) / K and Z

Z

n(K, H)yH =

,z) ~ t x Z I I . z = z } l

lz'l

=

16L

=

X K gives

[NG(K)/K I ING(K)\xKI = 0 (ING(K)/KI).

HE[SG]

By linearity, this proves the "only if" part of the theorem. Applying this for X = G / M , for some M ~ [s6 ], shows that there is a matrix t indexed by [s6 ] • [s6 ], with entries in Z, such that for K ~ [SG]

Z

n(K, H)m(H, M) = ING(K)/K]t(K, M).

HE[SG]

Now the matrix n is upper triangular, and its diagonal coefficients are equal to 1. Thus the matrix t is upper triangular, and

t(K, K) = m ( K , K ) / I N G ( K ) / K I = 1. In particular t is invertible (over Z).

Burnside rings

749

Now suppose that the element y 2HE[SG] yHUH E I-IHc[sG] Z satisfies all the congruences of the theorem. Since Coker(4)) is finite, there exist rational numbers rM, for M ~ [SG], such that -

Y-- Z

-

rM4)(G/M).

ME[SG] In other words for each H ~ [so]

YH = ~ )G/MHIrM 9 ME[SG] Thus for each K ~ [SG]

n(K, H)yH -- ~ HE[SG]

~

n(K, H)m(H, M)rM

HE[sG]ME[sG]

= INa(g)'g I Zt(K,M)rM. ME[SG] The left hand side is a multiple of INo(K) : KI by assumption, hence there exist integers ZK such that for all K E [SG]

Z

t(K, M)rM =ZK.

M~[SG] Since t is invertible, it follows that rM (7-Z for all M, and y 6 Im(4)).

3.3. Idempotents The map q) of the previous section is an injective map between free Z-modules having the same rank. Hence tensoring with Q gives a Q-algebra isomorphism

H~[SG] and in particular the algebra Q | B(G) is semi-simple. It will be denoted by QB(G). The component Q~G of Q4) will still be written X ~-~ IX H [, so in general [xHI will be a rational number for X ~ QB(G). More generally, all the notations defined for B(G) will be extended without change to QB(G). The inverse image by Q4) of the element indexed by H of the canonical Q-basis of HHE[SG] (~ is denoted by e G. If H t is conjugate to H in G, one also sets e G, -- e G. With this notation for any subgroups H and K of G, one has 1 [(eG)K[ __ 0

i f H = G K, otherwise.

750

S. Bouc

The set of elements e/~, for H E [sr], is the set of primitive idempotents of QB(G). Those idempotents have been computed explicitly by Gluck ([26]), and later independently by Yoshida ([53]). This can be done using the following lemma: LEMMA 3.3.1. Let G be a finite group. (1) Let H be a subgroup of G. Then for any X E QB(G)

X.e~i- lxnle~. Conversely, if Y ~ QB(G) is such that X . Y -- IX H IY for any X ~ 0 B ( G ) , then r E Q e G.

(2) Let H be a proper subgroup of G. Then ResGe G -- 0. Conversely, if Y ~ QB(G) is such that Res G Y -- Of o r any proper subgroup H of G, then Y 6 Qe G. (3) Let H be a subgroup of G, and let y ~ G. Then G G ReSHeH

--

ell'

1 indGe H, e G -__ ING(H)" H[

ye H

YH

-- ey H .

PROOF. (1) The set of elements e G, for H ~ [SG], is a Q-basis of QB(G), thus for any X 6 QB(G), there are rational numbers rH, for H ~ [SG], such that X--

y~

rile G H"

HC[SG1

Taking fixed points of both sides by a subgroup K ~ [SG] shows that rK = IX K I. It follows that for all K ~ [so]

X.e~c - lxg le~. Now let Y be an element of QB(G) verifying X . Y = IxHI Y for any X ~ QB(G). Then in C . y = 0 if K # c H, thus Y - - I Y H le~ is a rational multiple of e~. particular eK (2) Let H be a proper subgroup of G. Then for any subgroup of K of H

I(Res~e~)K I - I(e~)K I -- 0 since obviously [(ResGX)K [ -- IxKI for any G-set X, hence for any X in QB(G). It shows that the restriction of e G to any proper subgroup of G is zero. Conversely, if the restriction of an element Y to any proper subgroup H of G is zero, then in particular IY "1 = 0 for such a subgroup, and Y -- IY a leg. (3) If K is a subgroup of H, then [(Res~e~)K[--[(e/~)K[-This shows that Res GHeHG _ e n"

1 0

if K - - H, ifK#H.

Burnside rings

'/31

Consider next the element IndGeH H. If X is any element of QB(G), then by Frobenius identity

X.I n dnG eH -- IndG((ResGX).e H) --

IndG(ls H ].eH) --IX H IIndGeH M.

It follows that there is a rational number r G such that IndG

H -- r iGl e H. G

By the Mackey formula, the restriction of the left hand side to H is equal to G

G H

ResnlndneH --

Xe~

IndHn~HxResH~nH e l l =

Z xE[H\G/H]

xENG(H)/H

since the restriction of e g to H x n H is zero if H x # H. Moreover if y 6 G, then for any subgroup K of y H 1

[(YeH)KI--[(eH)KY[--

Thus y e g

--

{0

ifK--YH, otherwise.

ey H ' and finally y

G G H ResHindHeH

-

-

IUG(n). n l e ~ _

,t r icl e H.

Hence r G -- ING (H) " HI, and 1

eG = ING(H)" HI

indGe~

as was to be shown. THEOREM 3.3.2 (Gluck). Let G be a finite group. If H is a subgroup of G, then 1

eG = ING(H)I E

IKI/z(K, H ) G / K ,

KCH

where lz is the MObius function of the poser of subgroups of G, and G / K is the element 1 | G / K ~ QB(G). PROOF. One can write

en = Z KcH

r(K, H ) H / K ,

S. Bouc

752

y

where r(K, H) is a rational number. Since Y e H = ey H for y a G, one can suppose r ( y K, y H ) .= r(K, H) for y ~ G. Taking induction from H to G gives

1 ~ r(K, H ) G / K . eGH= ING(H)'HI KCH

(3.3.3)

Now the sum of the elements eGH, for H ~ [SG], is equal to 9 -- G/G. Summing over all subgroups H of G instead of H ~ [SG] gives

G/G= ~

ING(H)I

HC_G

1 ING(H)" HI KC_H Z_,

IGI

r(g,

H)G/K.

The coefficient of G / K in the right hand side is equal to the coefficient of G/K t, for any conjugate K t of K in G, and it is equal to IHI KC__HC_G IGI

r(K,H).

This must be equal to zero if K g: G, and equal to 1 if K = G. Setting r'(K, H ) Inl Igl r(K, H) for K c__H, this gives

KCHCG

r'(K, H) =

{IG'KI=I 0

i f K = G, otherwise.

This shows that r'(K, H) is equal to/z(K, H), where # is the M6bius function of the poset of subgroups of G. Thus r(K H) = Igl n,(K H) and Eq. (3.3.3) gives

1

~

eG = INa(H)I r c H as was to be shown.

IKI/z(K, H ) G / K

[3

The formulae for primitive idempotents in QB(G) lead to a natural question: when are these idempotents actually in B(G) ? More generally, if zr is a set of prime numbers, let Z(zr) denote the subring of Q of irreducible fractions with denominator prime to all the elements of zr. In other words Z(jr) is the localization of Z with respect to the set Z - Up,Jr pZ. One may ask when the idempotents of QB(G) are actually in Z(jr)B(G). The answer is as follows: THEOREM 3.3.4 (Dress). Let G be a finite group, and Jr be a set of primes. Let SF be a family of subgroups of G, closed under conjugation in G. Let [jc-] denote the set .~ M [SG]. Then the following conditions are equivalent: (1) The idempotent ~-~H~[~-]eG lies in Z(rr)B(G).

Burnside rings

753

(2) Let H and K be any subgroups of G such that H is a normal subgroup of K and

the quotient K / H is cyclic of prime order p ~ Jr. Then H ~ a~ if and only if K ~ ~. PROOF. Suppose first that (1) holds, i.e. that the idempotent e = Y ~ n ~ [ ~ e ~ lies in Z(zr) B(G). This is equivalent to the existence of an integer m coprime to all the elements of Jr, such that me ~ B(G). Now if H and K are subgroups of G such that H ~_K and K / H is cyclic of prime order p, then for any element X of B(G), one has [xH[ -- [xK[ (p). It follows that

m [en l =- m leK [ (p). But m leH[ is equal to m if H a )r, and it is equal to zero otherwise. Thus if p a Jr, it follows that assertion (2) holds, because m ~ 0 (p). Conversely, suppose that (2) holds. Let m be an integer such that me c B(G). By Dress's Theorem 3.2.1 this is equivalent to require that for each subgroup K of G

Z

n(K,

H)mleHI-m

HE[SG]

~

n(K, H)=--0 ( I N G ( K ) ' K [ ) .

HE[.T']

This can also be written as

m Z

l{ x ~ NG(K)/KI(x, K)=G H}I = 0 (ING(K)'KI),

H ~ [)t"] i.e.

ml{x~ N G ( K ) / K

I (x, K) ~ ~}1 ~ 0 (]NG(K) " KI).

There are two cases: if K 6 U, then if (2) holds, the condition (x, K) 6 .T" is equivalent to require that the prime factors of the order of x in N G ( K ) / K are all in Jr. Let (No(K)/K)rr denote the set of such elements x ~ N G ( K ) / K . The previous congruence is

mI(NG(K)/K) I

(ING(K)"KI).

(3.3.5)

Now if K r f , the condition (x, K) ~ )v is equivalent to require that there is a prime factor of the order of x which is not in Jr. In other words x ~ N G ( K ) / K - (No(K)/K)~r, and the congruence to check is the same. Thus assertion (1) holds if and only if there exists an integer m coprime to all the elements of Jr, such that congruence (3.3.5) holds for any subgroup K of G. Such an integer exist if and only if for any subgroup K of G, the cardinality of ( N o ( K ) / K ) j r is a multiple ofthe zr-part ING(K) : Kl~r of ING(K) : KI, i.e. the biggest divisor of ING(K) : KI having all its prime factors in zr. But for any finite group L, the set L~r it the set of elements of L of order dividing ILI~ (if 1 ~ Ljr, then the subgroup (1) generated by I is a direct product of cyclic p-groups (lp), for p ~ Jr, and each Ip has order dividing ]Glp). Thus IL~I is a multiple of ILI~, by a theorem of Frobenius (see Corollaire 1 of Throrrme 23 of [42]). Thus (1) holds. D

S. Bouc

754

COROLLARY 3.3.6. Let G be a finite group, and re be a set of primes. If J is a re-perfect subgroup of G, set

fG=

~

e G.

HE[SG] 0 re ( H ) = G J

Then the set of elements fG, for Jr-perfect elements J of [SG ], is the set of primitive idempotents of Zor)B(G ). In particular, the set of primitive idempotents of B(G) is in one to one correspondence with the set of conjugacy classes of perfect subgroups of G. The group G is solvable if and only if G~ G is a primitive idempotent of B(G). PROOF. Let J be a re-perfect subgroup of G, and set

,T'= {H c_ G IOTr(H)--G J}. Then clearly the family ~ is closed under conjugation in G, and satisfies condition (2) of Theorem 3.3.4. Thus fG lies in Z(zr)B(G). To prove that it is primitive, it suffices to show that the family .T" has no proper non-empty subfamily satisfying condition (2) of Theorem 3.3.4. But if 7 is such a non-empty subfamily of ~', and if H 6 .T", then OJr(H) ~ 7 since the composition factors of H / O r ( H ) are cyclic groups of prime order belonging to rr. Thus J ~ .Y" since .Y" is closed by conjugation. Now if H ' 6 .T" the group Orr(H ') is in 7 , and H' ~ 7 by the same argument. Thus .T"~= Or, and the idempotent f G is primitive. The last assertion of the corollary is the case where Jr is the set of all prime numbers. D

3.4. Prime spectrum The prime spectrum of B(G) has been determined by Dress ([24]): THEOREM 3.4.1 (Dress). Let G be a finite group, let p denote a prime number or zero, and H be a subgroup of G. Let

- Ix

8(o) l lx"l = o (p)}.

Then: (1) The set IH, p(G) is a prime ideal of B(G). (2) If I is a prime ideal of B(G), then there is a subgroup H of G and an integer p equal to zero or a prime number, such that I -- In, p(G). (3) If H and K are subgroups of G, and if p and q are prime numbers or zero, then IH, p(G) C__IK,q(G) if and only if one of the following holds: (a) One has p = q = O, and the subgroups H and K are conjugate in G. In this case moreover IH, p = IK,q.

Burnside rings

755

(b) One has p = 0 and q > O, and the groups Oq(H) and Oq(K) are conjugate in G. In this case moreover IH, p # IK,q. (C) One has p -- q > O, and the subgroups OP(H) and OP(K) are conjugate in G. In this case m o r e o v e r IH, p -- IK,q. PROOF. (1) Clearly IH, p is the kernel of the ring homomorphism from B(G) to Z / p Z mapping X to the class of IX H [. Assertion (1) follows, since Z / p Z is an integral domain. (2) Conversely, if I is a prime ideal of B(G), then the ring R = B ( G ) / I is an integral domain. Let Jr : B(G) --~ R be the canonical projection. Since R # {0}, there is a subgroup H of G minimal subject to the condition re(G/H) :# O. Taking the image of equation (3.1.2) by re and using the minimality of H gives

re(G/H)re(G/K)--

Z

re(G/H)

x~[G/K] HXcK

(since moreover H x K x K if H x c_ K). Since R is an integral domain, and since re(G/H) # O, it follows that

r e ( G / K ) - I{x ~ G / K I H x c

KII1R--I(G/K)HI1R.

It follows by linearity that re(X) = IX H [1R for any X E B(G). Let p denote the characteristic of R. Then p is equal to zero or a prime number. Clearly the kernel of Jr, equal to I by definition, is also equal to IH, p(G). (3) Suppose that H and K are conjugate in G. Then for any X ~ B(G), one has IxHI -IX K l, and in particular IH,o(G) -- IK,o(G). Now if p is a prime number, and if X is a finite G-set, since X H -- ( x O P ( H ) ) H / O P ( H )

and since H~ OP(H) is a p-group, it follows that

Ix'l Ix~

lr

for any X ~ B(G). In particular IH,0 _ IoP(H),p, and IH, p ( G ) -- IK,p(G) if O P ( H ) and OP(K) are conjugate in G. Thus IH,p(G) -- IOp(H),p(G) for any H ___G. Conversely, suppose that IH,p(G) c_ IK,q(G). There is a surjective ring homomorphism from B(G)/IH, p(G) to B(G)/IK,q(G). Since p is the characteristic of the ring B(G)/IH, p(G), there are three possible cases" (a) First p - - q --0. Then the inclusion IH,o(G) c_ IK,o(G) means that if X E B(G) is such that ] x H [ - - 0 , then [ x K [ - - 0 . Now X --]NG(K)Be G is in B(G) by Theorem 3.3.2, and ix K ] _ ING (K)[ # 0. Thus IX" [ # 0, hence H is conjugate to K in G. Clearly in this case I H , o ( G ) - Ir,o(G).

S. Bouc

756

(b) The next possible case is p = 0 and q > 0. In this case if X E B(G) is such that = 0, then IxKI = 0 (q). Consider the idempotent

IxHI

G f oq( g) --

Z

eG"

LE[SG] Oq(L)=Goq(g)

By Corollary 3.3.6, there is an integer m coprime to q such that X - - m f oq(K) G is in B(G). Now IxK I = m ~ 0 (q). Thus IxH I ~ 0, and it follows that Oq(H) =G Oq(K). The inclusion IH,o(G) ~ IK,q(G) is proper since the respective quotient rings have characteristic 0 and q. (c) The last case is p = q > 0. Since IH,o(G) c_ In, p(G), it follows that IH,o(G) C_ IK,p(G). Hence OP(H) =G OP(K) by the discussion of the previous case. And in this case IH, p(G)-- IK,p(G). D

3.5. Application to induction theorems NOTATION 3.5.1. Let G be a finite group. Denote by C(G) the set of cyclic subgroups of G. Let Rc(G) be the ring of complex characters of G, and set Q R c ( G ) = Q | Rc(G). THEOREM 3.5.2 (Artin). Let G be a finite group. Then QRc(G)=

~

IndGQRc(H).

H~C(G)

In other words, any complex character of G is a linear combination with rational coefficients of characters induced from cyclic subgroups of G. PROOF. There is a natural homomorphism from the Burnside ring B(G) of G to the ring Rc(G), which maps a G-set X to the associated CG-module CX. This extends to a map of vector spaces QB(G) ~ Q R c ( G ) . Now the value of the character of the permutation module C X at the element s of G is the trace of s on CX, which is equal to the number of fixed points IXSl o f s o n X . Let H be a subgroup of G. Since I(e~)Sl is equal to 0 if H is not conjugate in G to the subgroup generated by s, it follows that the image of e G in Q R c ( G ) is zero unless H is cyclic. And if H is cyclic, the image of e G is a linear combination with rational coefficients of permutations characters Ind~ 1, for subgroups K of H. Taking the image in QRc(G) of the decomposition

G/G-- Z HE[so]

eGH

Burnside rings

757

shows that the trivial character is a linear combination with rational coefficients of such characters IndGx1, which are induced from cyclic subgroups K of G. Then if X is any character of G xIndG 1 = IndG (ResGx) and the theorem follows.

D

NOTATION 3.5.3. Let p be a prime number, and (.9 be a complete local Noetherian commutative ring with maximal ideal p and residue field k of characteristic p. If G is a finite group, an OG-lattice is a finitely generated O-free OG-module. Also denote by O the trivial OG-lattice of O-rank 1. The Green ring Ao(G) is the Grothendieck group of the category of OG- lattices, for the relations given by direct sum decompositions. As an additive group, it is the quotient of the free Abelian group with basis the set of isomorphism classes of OG-lattices, by the subgroup generated by elements [M @ N] [M] - [N], for OG-lattices M and N, where [M] denotes the class of M. Since the KrullSchmidt theorem holds for OG-lattices, the group Ao(G) is free, with basis the set of indecomposable OG-lattices. The ring structure on Ao(G) is induced by tensor product (over O) of OG-lattices. There is a natural ring homomorphism zrO from B(G) to Ao(G), mapping the (class of the) finite G-set X to the (class of the) permutation lattice OX. It is natural to look at the kernel I0 (G) of this morphism. Since Q is flat over Z, the sequence of Abelian groups

0--+ QIo(G) ~ QB(G) (~rr~ QAo(G) is exact. Since QIo(G) is an ideal of the semi-simple algebra QB(G), there exists a set N o ( G ) of subgroups of G, closed under conjugation, such that

~Io(G ) :

~

Q eG.

HEjV'o(G)N[SG] Equivalently

to(G) - {X ~ B(G) I VH c G, H CA/'o(G) ==>[xH[ --0}. Clearly the morphism zrO commutes with induction and restriction. Now assertion (3) of Lemma 3.3.1 shows that e G 6 QIo(G) if and only if e n 6 QIo(H). It follows that there exists a family of finite groups NO such that

A/'o(G) = {H c__G IH E NO}. The main result of this section is a characterization of the family NO. First a definition:

S. Bouc

758

DEFINITION 3.5.4. Let p be a prime number. If H is a finite group, let Op(H) denote the largest normal p-subgroup of H. The group H is called p-hypoelementary, or cyclic modulo p, if the quotient group H~ O p(H) is cyclic. The family of such finite groups is denoted by ;Zp. The set of p-hypoelementary subgroups of a finite group G is denoted by

Zp(G). It turns out that the family NO depends only on p, and is equal to the complement of Zp, by the following theorem (see [17]): THEOREM 3.5.5 (Conlon). Let G be a finite group, and X, Y be finite G-sets. The following conditions are equivalent: (1) The OG-lattices O X and OY are isomorphic. (2) For any p-hypoelementary subgroup H of G, the sets X n and y n have the same cardinality. PROOF. Recall that if M is an OG-lattice, then a vertex of M is a subgroup P of G, minimal such that M is a direct summand of IndGpRes G M. The deep argument for Theorem 3.5.5 relies on the Green correspondence, which, for any p-subgroup P of G, is a bijection between the set of isomorphism classes of indecomposable OG-lattices with vertex P and the set of isomorphism classes of indecomposable ONG(P)-lattices with vertex P (see [1, Ch. 3.12]). In the case of permutation modules, or more generally of their direct summands (or ppermutation modules), there is a more elementary approach, due to Brou6 ([ 12]). It relies on the Brauer construction: if M is an OG-module, and P is a subgroup of G, then the Brauer quotient M[ P] of M at P is defined by + QcP

where the sum runs over proper subgroups Q of P, and T r ~ ' M Q ~ M P is the relative trace map or transfer map, defined by

Ym E M Q, T r y ( m ) - -

~

xm.

xrIP/Q]

If S is a Sylow p-subgroup of P, and if m 6 MP, then [P : SI is invertible in O, and m -- Try' (iP~l m). Thus M[P] - - 0 if P is nota p-subgroup of G. When P is a p-subgroup of G and M -- O X is the permutation lattice associated to a G-set X, the image of the set X P in M[P] is a k-basis of M[P]. In this case moreover, the value of the Brauer character of M at the element s of G is equal to the number of fixed points of s on X. Hence if s E NG (P), the value of the Brauer character of the kNG(P)/P-module M[P] at the element s P ~ N G ( P ) / P is equal to IX HP,s I, where Hp,s = P (s) is the subgroup of G generated by s and P. Note that Hp,s is cyclic modulo p, and that conversely, if H is a p-hypoelementary subgroup of G, there is a p-subgroup P of G and an s E NG(P) such that H = Hp,s.

Burnside rings

759

It follows that if O X and OY are isomorphic, then for any p-hypoelementary subgroup H of G, one has IxHI = IYH I. Conversely, if IxHI = IYH[ for any p-hypoelementary subgroup H of G, then for any p-subgroup P of G, the modules k X P ~ OX[P] and kY P "~ OY[P] have the same Brauer character. The next proposition shows that then O X and O Y are isomorphic, and this completes the proof of Theorem 3.5.5. [] PROPOSITION 3.5.6. Let G be a finite group, and let M and N be p-permutation OGlattices. Then the following are equivalent: (1) The OG-lattices M and N are isomorphic. (2) For any p-subgroup P of G, the kNG(P)/P-modules M[P] and N[P] have the same Brauer character. PROOF. It is clear that (1) implies (2). The proof of the converse is by induction on the cardinality of the set

S(M) -- { P c G IM[P] # 0 } . Note that if (2) holds, then S(M) = S(N). If S(M) = 0, then M I l l = M / p M = N / p N = 0, hence M = N = 0. If S(M) # 0, choose a maximal element P of S(M). Write M = Mp @ M' (resp. N -- Np @ N'), where all direct summands of Mp (resp. Np) have non-zero Brauer quotient at P, and where M'[P] = 0 (resp. N'[P] = 0). Theorem 3.5.7 below shows that M[P] = M p [ P ] and N[P] = Np[P] are projective kNG(P)/P-modules. By assumption, they have the same Brauer character, hence they are isomorphic, and then Theorem 3.5.7 shows that Mp and Np are isomorphic. Now (2) holds for M' and N', and moreover IS(M')I < IS(M)I, since S(M') c_ S(M) and P ~ S(M) - S(M'). Hence M' ~_ N' by induction hypothesis, and M ~_ N. [] THEOREM 3.5.7 (Brou6). Let G be a finite group, and P be a p-subgroup of G. (1) Let M be an indecomposable p-permutation OG-lattice with vertex P. Then for any subgroup Q of G, the module M[Q] is non-zero if and only if Q is conjugate to a subgroup of P. (2) The correspondence M w-> M[P] induces a bijection between the set of isomorphism classes of indecomposable p-permutation OG-lattices with vertex P and the set of isomorphism classes of indecomposable projective kNG ( P) / P-modules. PROOF. (1) Recall (Higman criterion) that if H is a subgroup of G and if M is an OGmodule, then M is a direct summand of IndHReSH G G M if and only if there exists an O H endomorphism r of M such that IOM = TrGH(r where TrGH(r -- ~ge[G/H] gCg-1. If S is a Sylow p-subgroup of H, then IH" SI is invertible in O, and IdM -- Tr G ( r Si). In particular, any vertex of M is a p-group. Recall also that if P is a p-group, and Q is a subgroup of P, then the permutation O P lattice Ind~O is indecomposable, since its reduction modulo p is isomorphic to Ind~k,

S. Bouc

760

which has simple socle k. Hence any p-permutation O P-lattice is a permutation O Plattice. Let M be an indecomposable p-permutation OG-lattice. Then M is a direct summand of a permutation lattice OX, for some finite G-set X. Let P be a p-subgroup of G such that M is a direct summand of Ind~ Then ResGpM is a direct summand of ORespGX, hence it is a permutation O P-lattice, and there is a set S of subgroups of P such that ResGM "~ ~ ) I n d ~ O .

Q~S Thus M is a direct summand of some lattice Ind~ O, for Q 6 S. Since Ind~ O is a direct summand of ResGM, and since O is a direct summand of Res~Ind~O, it follows that O is a direct summand of Res~M, and that Ind~O is a direct summand of Ind~Res~M. Now if P is a vertex of M, then Q = P 6 S. Hence M is a direct summand of Ind G O, and O is a direct summand of Res G M (in other words the lattice M has trivial source). It follows that M[Q] :/: 0 for any subgroup of Q. Conversely, if M[Q] :/: 0 for some subgroup Q of G, then (Ind~O)[Q] ~- 0, thus Q has a fixed point on the set G/P, i.e. Q c o P. Assertion (1) follows. It shows in particular that all the vertices of M are conjugate in G. (2) Since IndGO "~ IndGc(p)ONG(P)/P, and since the ONG(P)/P is a direct sum of indecomposable projective ONo(P)/P-lattices, it follows from (1) that if M is an indecomposable p-permutation OG-lattice with vertex P, then there is an indecomposable projective ONo (P)/P-lattice E such that M is a direct summand of IndGNc(p) E. It is easy to check by the Mackey formula that

@

(Ind~vc(p)E)[P ]

E[Pxp/e]=e/pe

xe[G/NG(P)] PXc_NG(P )

since E[Q/P] = 0 for any non-trivial subgroup Q / P of NG (P)/P" indeed E is a direct summand of the permutation lattice O NG (P) / P associated to the free NG (P) / P-set Y = NG(P)/P, and YQ/P = 0 if Q -7/:P. Now E/pE is an indecomposable projective kNG(P)/P-module, having M[P] as a non-zero direct summand. It follows that M[P] ~ E/pE is an indecomposable projective kNG (P)/P-module, and the correspondence of assertion (2) is well defined. Let E be an indecomposable projective ONo (P)/P-lattice. Write IndGG(p)E "~ L 9 L', where all the direct summands of L have vertex conjugate to P in G, and no direct summands of L t have vertex conjugate to P. Since L t is a direct summand of IndGO, all the indecomposable direct summands of L' have vertex strictly contained in P (up to Gconjugation). Hence L'[P] = 0, and L[P] ~_ E/pE is indecomposable. It follows that L is indecomposable, and that it is the only indecomposable direct summand of IndGNc(p)E with vertex P, up to isomorphism.

Burnside rings

761

Thus if M is an indecomposable p-permutation lattice with vertex P, and if E is the only indecomposable projective ONG(P)/P-lattice such that M[P] ~ E / p E , then M is isomorphic to the only indecomposable direct summand of Ind~ with vertex P. This shows that the correspondence M w->M[P] of assertion (2) is injective. Conversely, if E is an indecomposable projective kNG(P)/P-module, then there is a projective ONG(P)/P-lattice E such that E ~ E / p E . In particular E is indecomposable. Now IndGc(p)E has a unique indecomposable direct summand M with vertex P, and

M[P] ~ E. This shows that the correspondence M w-> M[P] of assertion (2) is surjective, and completes the proof of Theorem 3.5.7. D COROLLARY 3.5.8. Let G be a finite group. Then

QAo(G)=

Z

IndGHQAo(H)"

Two OG-lattices M and N are isomorphic if and only if for any p-hypoelementary subgroup H of G, the restrictions ResGM and ResGN are isomorphic. PROOF. The image by Qrro(e~) of the idempotent e G of QB(G) in the ring Q A o ( G ) is zero if H is not p-hypoelementary. Thus

O-Qrro(G/G)- ~

Qzro (eGH).

HeZpia) Now e G is a linear combination of elements G / K , for subgroups K of H. Since subgroups of p-hypoelementary groups are p-hypoelementary, it follows that there exists rational numbers rg such that (_9--

Z rKIndGO XeZp(G)

since moreover Qrco(G/K) is the (class of) the permutation lattice IndG O. Tensoring this identity with M over O, and using the Frobenius identity, it follows that M

rK IndGResGM.

__

KEZp(G) This proves both assertions of the corollary. REMARK 3.5.9. A different proof of Theorem 3.5.5 and Corollary 3.5.8 has been given by Dress ([25]). It is exposed in Curtis and Reiner ([ 18, Ch. 11.80D]). DEFINITION 3.5.10. Let p and q be (non-necessarily distinct) prime numbers. A finite group H is called a (p, q)-Dress group if the group Oq(H) is p-hypoelementary. A (p, q)Dress subgroup H of a finite group G is a subgroup of G which is a (p, q)-Dress group. The set of (p, q)-Dress subgroups of a finite group G is denoted by ~)p,q (G).

S. Bouc

762

THEOREM 3.5.11 (Dress). Let G be a finite group. Then

A o ( G ) --

~

IndGAo(H).

HE79p,q(G) any q

PROOF. This follows from the expression of the idempotents of the Burnside ring B(G)" if q is a prime and J is a q-perfect subgroup of G, then the idempotent fG of Corollary 3.3.6 is mapped to zero by Z(q)zro if J is not p-hypoelementary. And if J is p-hypoelementary, the idempotent fG is a linear combination with coeffiJ cients in Z(q) of elements G / K , where K runs through the (p, q)-Dress subgroups of G. This shows that there is an integer m q coprime to q and integers n K such that

mqO --

Z

nKIndG O

in Ao(G).

K E"Dp,q(G)

Setting A~(G) =

y~ IndGAo(H) HET)p,q(G) any q

it follows that the quotient Ao(G)/A~o(G) is a torsion group, with finite exponent coprime to q. Since this holds for any prime q, the groups A o ( G ) and A oi ( G ) are equal. D THEOREM 3.5.12 (Brauer). Let G be a finite group, and k be a field. Then Rk(G)=

Z Ind~Rk(H), HEEq(G) any q

where for a prime number q, the set Eq (G) is the set of q-hyperelementary subgroups of G, i.e. the set of subgroups H such that Oq(H) is cyclic. PROOF. By a similar argument, for any prime q, there is an integer mq coprime to q, such that mqfjG is in B(G) for any q-perfect subgroup J of G. The Brauer character of mq fG is zero, unless J is cyclic, and in this case, this character is a linear combination of characters IndGn 1, for H E ~q (G). E]

3.6. Further results and references The group of units of the Burnside ring has been studied by Matsuda ([35]), Matsuda and Miyata ([36]), and Yoshida ([54]). Examples of non-isomorphic groups having isomorphic Burnside tings have been given by Th6venaz ([46]).

Burnside rings

763

The Burnside ring of a compact Lie group has been defined and studied by tom Dieck ([ 19-21 ]) and Schw/anzl ([40,41 ]). General exposition of the properties of Burnside rings can be found in Benson ([1, Ch. 5.4]), Curtis and Reiner ([18, Ch. 11]), Karpilovsky ([28, Ch. 15]), tom Dieck ([21]).

4. Invariants The Burnside ring is an analogue for finite G-sets of the ring Z for finite sets (and Z is actually isomorphic to the Burnside ring of the trivial group). To each finite set is associated its cardinality. Similarly, one can attach various elements in the Bumside ring, called invariants, to structured G-sets, such as G-posets or G-simplicial complexes. This section is a self-contained algebraic exposition of the properties of those invariants. The original definitions and methods of Quillen ([38,39]) are used throughout, avoiding however the topological part of this material. Thus for example no use will be made of the geometric realization of a poset, and the accent will be put on acyclic posets rather than contractible ones. In other words, in order to define and state properties of the invariants attached to finite G-posets in the Burnside ring, one can forget about the fundamental group of those posets, and consider only homology groups.

4.1. Homology of posets Let (X, ~O

n>/O

Similarly, the reduced Euler-Poincar6 characteristic )~(X) is defined by )~ (X) = y ~ ( - 1)n rankx Cn (X, 7/~)= X (X) - 1. n/>--I

If K is a field, then setting kn = dimK Ker(K | dimK Hn(X, K) = dimK K |

dn) for any n 6 1~

Hn(X, Z) = kn - dimK Im(K | an+l)

= kn + kn+l - dimK K |

Cn+l (X, Z).

It follows that

x(X)

)--~(--1) n dimK Hn(X, K), n>>O

(x)

2 ( - 1)n dimK/ln (X, K). n~>-I

REMARK 4.1.1. In particular, if X is finite and acyclic, then )~(X) = 0. Similarly, if X and Y are finite posets, and if there is an homotopy equivalence f , from the complex C, (X, Z) to the complex C,(Y, Z), then x ( X ) = x(Y), since f induces a group isomorphism from Hn (X, Z) to Hn (Y, Z), for any n ~ N. If X and Y are posets, a map ofposets f : X ~ Y is a map from X to Y such that f ( x ) M(Gy), Gv i~x,y -- Cg-l,gGx o rgG~ " M ( G y )

---> M ( G x ) .

Those maps depend only on x and y, and do not depend on the chosen element g. Define moreover C~y,x --flAx,y = 0 for x 9 [G\X] and y 9 [G\Y] if f (x) q~ Gy. Then the map M . ( f ) is defined by the block matrix (Oty,x)ye[G\Y],x6[G\X], and themap / ~ * ( f ) is defined by the block matrix (~x,y)x~[G\Xl,ye[G\Y]. One can check that M is a Mackey functor for the second definition. Conversely, a Mackey functor M for the second definition yields a Mackey functor M for the first definition, by setting A

M(H)=M(G/H), r K --M*(zrKH),

,g = Cx,H = M , ( g x , H ) ,

where the morphism zr~4 is the canonical projection G / H -+ G / K for H _ K, and Yx,H is the isomorphism y H e+ y x - l X H from G / H to G~ x H, for x 9 G. EXAMPLE 5.2.2. One can show (see for instance [9, Ch. 2.4]) that the Mackey functor associated to the Burnside functor B (still denoted by B) can be described as follows: if X is a finite G-set, let G-setS x denote the category the objects of which are the finite G-sets over X, i.e. the pairs (Y, f ) , where Y is a finite G-set and f :Y -+ X is a map of G-sets. A morphism in G-setSx from (Y, f ) to (Z, g) is a map of G-sets h : Y --> Z such that g o h = f . The composition of morphisms is the composition of maps.

Burnside rings

777

Then B(X) is the Grothendieck group of the category G-setSx, for the relations given by decomposition into disjoint union. If r : X ~ X ~is a morphism of G-sets, then the map B.(r sends (Y, f ) to (Y, r o f ) , and the map M*(q~) sends (Z, g) to the G-set over X defined by the pull-back square

Y

> Z

X

> X~

5.3. Mackey functors as modules A third definition of Mackey functors is due to Th6venaz and Webb ([49]), who define the following algebra: DEFINITION 5.3.1 (Th6venaz and Webb). Let G be a finite group, and R be a commutative ring. The Mackey algebra IzR(G) is the (associative, unital) R-algebra with generators t g , rH x, and Cx,H, for subgroups H c__K of G, and x ~ G, subject to the following relations: 9 If H is a subgroup of G, and if h ~ H, then t H -- r~_/= ch,n. Moreover Y~nc_a tH = l uR(G), and if H ~ K are subgroups of G, then t H t~ = 0. L o t K=tLH a n d r K o r K L--rL. Ifx yEG, thent K then Cy,xH o Cx, H ~ Cyx, H . xK 9 If H ___K are subgroups of G and x 6 G, then Cx,K o t~ = tx n o Cx,n and Cx,n o r~ = 9 IfH___K_CLaresubgroupsofG,

xK rx H o C x , K .

9 If H _ K D L are subgroups of G, then

rg ot K =

tHNxL o Cx,HXAL o rLxAL . xe[H\K/L]

A Mackey functor for G over R is a just a/zR(G)-module, and a morphism of Mackey functors is a morphism of/ZR (G)-modules. If M is a Mackey functor over R for the first definition, set

ffl = ~

M(H).

HCG

This is endowed with an obvious structure of/zR(G)-module: for instance, the action of the generator t~ of/xR(G) is zero on the component M ( H f) o f / ~ , if H t 7~ H, and it is equal to the map t ~ ' M ( H ) ~ M ( K ) on thecomponent M ( H ) . Conversely, being given a/z R (G)-module M, one recovers a Mackey functor for the first definition by setting M ( H ) = t~ M. The transfer maps, restriction maps, and conjugation maps for M are obtained by multiplication by the generators of/xR(G) with the same name: for instance, the relations of the Mackey algebra show that t~ M ( H ) c M(K).

S. Bouc

778 5.4. Green functors

Roughly speaking, a Green functor for the finite group G over the commutative ring R is a "Mackey functor with a compatible ring structure". More precisely, there are two equivalent definitions of Green functors. The first one is due to Green ([27]): DEFINITION 5.4.1. A Green functor A for G over R is a Mackey functor for G over R, such that for any subgroup H of G, the R-module A (H) has the structure of an R-algebra (associative, with unit), with the following properties: (1) If K is a subgroup of G and x ~ G, then the map Cx,H is a morphism of tings (with unit) from A (K) to A (x K). (2) If H __cK are subgroups of G, then the map r g is a morphism of tings (with unit) from A ( K ) to A ( H ) . (3) (Frobenius identities) Under the same conditions, if a ~ A ( K ) and b ~ A ( H ) , then

tK(b).a--tK(b.rK(a)).

a.tK(b)--tK(rK(a).b),

If A and A t are Green functors for G over R, a morphism of Green functors f : A --+ A t is a morphism of Mackey functors such that for each subgroup H of G, the map f/-/:A (H) A t ( H ) is a ring homomorphism. The morphism is unitary if moreover all the maps f/-/are unitary, or equivalently, if fG is unitary. EXAMPLE 5.4.2. The Burnside Mackey functor R B is a Green functor, if the product on R B ( H ) for H c_C_G is defined by linearity from the direct product of H-sets. The Frobenius identities follow from Proposition 2.2.1. The second definition of Green functors is in terms of G-sets, and is detailed in [9, Ch. 2.2]" DEFINITION 5.4.3. A Green functor A for G over R is a Mackey functor for G over R, endowed for any G-sets X and Y with R-bilinear maps A (X) x A (Y) ~ A (X x Y) with the following properties: 9 (Bifunctoriality) If f : X ~ X t and g : Y ~ yt are morphisms of G-sets, then the squares

A (X) x A (Y)

x

1

A (X') x A (r') A(X) • A(Y)

A*(f)xA*(g)I A ( X ' ) • A(Y')

) A (X x Y)

) A (X' x r')

x

) A ( X • Y)

lA*(fxg) ) A ( X ' • Y')

Burnside rings

779

are commutative. 9 (Associativity) If X, Y and Z are G-sets, then the square IdA(x) x ( x )

A(X) • A(Y) x A(Z)

> A ( X ) x A ( Y x Z)

A ( X x Y) • A ( Z )

>

A ( X x Y x Z)

x

is commutative, up to identifications (X • Y) • Z ~_ X x Y x Z ~_ X x (Y x Z). 9 (Unitarity) If 9 denotes the trivial G-set G~ G, there exists an element eA C A (.), called the unit of A, such that for any G-set X and for any a ~ A (X) A,(px)(a

x 8A) =

a = A , ( q x ) ( e A • a)

denoting by p x (resp. q x ) the (bijective) projection from X x 9 (resp. from 9 x X) to X. If A and A t are Green functors for G over R, a morphism of Green functors f :A --~ A I is a morphism of Mackey functors such that for any G-sets X and Y, the square A(X) x A ( Y )

A' (X) x A'(Y)

x

> A(XxY)

> A' (X • Y)

is commutative. The morphism f is unitary if moreover f 9( S A )

-- 8A'.

EXAMPLE 5.4.4. If X and Y are finite G-sets, then the map B ( X ) x B ( Y ) -~ B ( X x Y) is defined by linearity from the map sending the finite G-set U over X and the finite G-set V over Y to the Cartesian product U x V, which is a G-set over X x Y. The element eB ~ B(o) is the image of the trivial G-set 9 = G~ G. REMARK 5.4.5. There is an obvious notion of module over a Green functor: a (left) module M over the Green functor A is a Mackey functor M endowed for any G-sets X and Y with bilinear maps A ( X ) x M ( Y ) --+ M ( X • Y) which are bifunctorial, associative, and unitary. With this definition, a Mackey functor for G over R is just a module over the Green functor RB. This can be viewed as a generalization of the identification of Abelian groups with Z-modules.

5.5. Induction, restriction, inflation The second definition of Mackey functors leads to a natural notion of induction, restriction, and inflation for Mackey functors:

780

S. Bouc

DEFINITION 5.5.1. Let G be a finite group, and R be a commutative ring. 9 If H is a subgroup of G, and M is a Mackey functor for G over R, then the restriction Res~ M is the Mackey functor for H over R obtained by composition of the functor M" G-set ~ R-Mod with the induction functor I n d , " H-set --+ G-set. If A is a Green functor for G over R, then Res~ A has a natural structure of Green functor for H over R. 9 If H is a subgroup of G, and N is a Mackey functor for H over R, then the induced Mackey functor Ind~ M is the Mackey functor for G over R obtained by composition of the functor M" H-set ~ R-Mod with the restriction functor Res G "G-set ~ H-set. If A is a Green functor for H over R, then IndGHA has a natural structure of Green functor for H over R. 9 If K is a normal subgroup of G, and N is a Mackey functor for G / K , then the inflated Mackey functor I n ~ / K N is the Mackey functor for G over R obtained by composition of the functor M : G / K - s e t ~ R-Mod with the fixed points functor G-set ~ G / K - s e t . If A is a Green functor for G / K over R, then I n ~ / K A has a natural structure of Green functor for G over R. REMARK 5.5.2. If M is a Mackey functor for G, and if K _ H are subgroups of G, then ( R e s G M ) ( K ) = (ResGHM)(H/K) - M(IndGHH/K) -- M ( G / K ) = M ( K ) so the above definition of Res G M coincides with the naive one. In particular, the restriction of the Burnside functor for G to the subgroup H is isomorphic to the Burnside functor for H. REMARK 5.5.3. The constructions of Definition 5.5.1 are examples of functors between categories of Mackey functors, obtained by composition with functors between the corresponding categories of G-sets. A uniform description of this kind of functors is given in [7], using the formalism of bisets. In [9, Ch. 8], it is shown that those constructions also apply to Green functors. Another fundamental example of this kind of functors is the following: DEFINITION 5.5.4 (Dress). If X is a finite G-set, and if M is is a Mackey functor for G over R, then the Mackey functor M x is the Mackey functor for G over R obtained by composition of the functor M : G-set -~ R-Mod with the endofunctor Y ~ Y • X of G-set. If A is a Green functor for G over R, then Ax has a natural structure of Green functor for G over R. The endofunctor M ~ M x on M a c k R ( G ) is denoted by Z x . REMARK 5.5.5. In the case of a transitive G-set X = G / H , the isomorphism G / H x Y "~ IndGResGy

of Proposition 2.2.1 leads to an isomorphism of Mackey functors MG/H ~ Ind'/ReSiN M.

Burnside rings

781

Induction and restriction are mutual left and right adjoint: PROPOSITION 5.5.6 (Th6venaz and Webb). Let G be a finite group, let H be a subgroup of G, and R be a commutative ring. (1) The functors Ind G "MackR(H) ~ MackR(G)

and

Res G "MackR(G) --+ M a c k R ( H )

are mutual left and right adjoint. (2) For any finite G-set X, the endofunctor Z x is self adjoint.

PROOF. For assertion (1), see [47, Proposition 4.2]. Assertion (2) follows trivially.

E3

5.6. The Burnside functor as projective Mackey functor The third definition of Mackey functors shows that the category MackR(G) is an Abelian category, with enough projective objects. A sequence of Mackey functors O--+ L--+ M - + N--+ O

is exact if and only if for each subgroup H of G, the sequence 0 ~ L ( H ) --+ M ( H ) --+ N ( H ) --+ 0

is an exact sequence of R-modules. The Burnside functor R B provides the first example of a projective Mackey functor: PROPOSITION 5.6.1. Let G be a finite group, and R be a commutative ring. Set 9 -- G~ G. (1) If M is a Mackey functor for G over R, then the map OM " f E HOmMadcR(G)(RB, M) ~ fo(o) E M(o) = M ( G ) is an isomorphism of R-modules. (2) The Burnside functor R B is a projective object in MackR(G). (3) The map ORB is an isomorphism of rings (with unit)

ORB "EndMackR(G)(RB) --~ R B ( G ) . PROOF. Let X be a finite G-set, let (Y, a) be a G-set over X, and denote also by (Y, a) its image in R B ( X ) = R | B ( X ) . Then clearly (Y,a) = R B , ( a ) ( Y , Idy). Denote by p r " Y ~ 9 be the unique morphism of G-sets. Then the square y

PY

>

9

Ido Y

> PY

9

S. Bouc

782 is Cartesian. Hence denoting by

SRB

the element (,,, Id~ of R B ( - ) , it follows that

(Y, a) -- R B . ( a ) R B * ( p y ) ( S R B ) . Now a morphism f " R B --+ M is entirely determined by the element u = f.(SRB) of M ( . ) -- M ( G ) , since the map f x must verify

f x ( ( Y , a ) ) -- M , ( a ) M * ( p y ) ( u ) . Conversely, if u 6 M(e) is given, this equality defines a map of R-modules f x from R B ( X ) to M ( X ) . If g ' X --+ X' is a morphism of G-sets, then obviously

M , ( g ) f x ( ( Y , a ) ) -- M , ( g a ) M * ( p y ) ( u ) -

f x ' ( ( Y , ga)) -- fx, R B , ( g ) ( ( Y , a ) ) .

Similarly, if the square Y

) y'

X

> Xt

is Cartesian, then

M*(g) f x , ( ( Y ' , a')) = M * ( g ) M , ( a ' ) M * ( p r , ) ( u ) = M , ( a ) M * ( h ) M * ( p y , ) ( u ) -- M , ( a ) M * ( p y ) ( u ) -- f x ( ( Y , a)) = f x RB* ((r', a')). This proves that f is a morphism of Mackey functors, and assertion (1) follows. Assertion (2) is now clear, since the evaluation functor M w+ M ( G ) from MackR(G) to R-Mod is exact. Now let f and g be two endomorphisms of RB, and suppose that fo(e) (resp. g~ is equal to (U, p u ) (resp. (V, p v ) ) for some G-set U (resp. V). Then (g o f)o(e)

--

g~

Pu)) -- RB,(pu)RB*(pu)((V, pv))

= R B . ( p u ) ( ( U x V, p,)) -- (U x V, Pu• where pj 9U • V --+ U is the first projection, since the square

)V

UxV

1

U

> 9 Pu

is Cartesian.

Burnside rings

783

By linearity, this shows that ORB is a ring homomorphism. Clearly ORB maps the identity endomorphism to the trivial G-set o, which is the unit of R B ( G ) . Assertion (3) follows. [] COROLLARY 5.6.2. Let G be a finite group and R be a commutative ring. (1) If H is a subgroup of G, then IndGRB is a projective Mackeyfunctor f o r G over R. (2) If X is a finite G-set, then R B x is a projective Mackeyfunctor f o r G over R. PROOF. The first assertion is a special case of the second one, since Ind G R B "~ IndGRes G B ~ RBG/H. Now if M is any Mackey functor for G over R, there are isomorphisms of R-modules HOmMackR(G)(RBx, M) "~ HOmMackR(G)(RB, M s ) "~ M x ( e ) '~ M ( X ) and the second assertion follows, since evaluation at X is an exact functor from MackR(G) to R-Mod. [3 The following proposition states a link between the Burnside ring and the Mackey algebra: PROPOSITION 5.6.3 (Th6venaz and Webb). Let G be a finite group, and R be a commutative ring. Set ~2G = [[HOG G / H . (1) There is an isomorphism of Mackey functors lzR(G) '~' RBS-gG ~ @ IndGResGRB. HcG (2) Any Mackey functor is a quotient of a direct sum of induced Burnside Mackey functOES. PROOF. By adjunction, there are isomorphisms of R-modules HOmMackR(G)(RBs-eG, M) ~ HOmMackR(G)(RB, MS-eG) "~ MS-2G(G) = M(S2G) and this can be explicitely described as follows. Let f ~ HOmMackR(G)(RBs2G, M). Then in particular fs2c ~ H o m R ( R B ( 1 2 2 ) , M ( ~ G ) ) . Let As2c denote the diagonal inclusion of I2G in ~22. Then ~ -- (~G, As2c) c RB(S22). Set OM(f) = fS2a ('~) E M(S-2G). If X is a finite G-set, then any element in RBs2c (X) = R B ( X x ~2G) is a linear combination of finite G-sets over X x 12G. If (Y, or) is such a G-set, and if c~1 (resp. or2) denotes

S. Bouc

784

the composition of ot with the projection from X • S2G to X (resp. to S2G), then clearly in

RBS-eG (X) (Y, or) -- (RBs2G),(Otl) o (RBs2G)* (ot2)(~). It follows that one must have

f x ( ( Y , ol)) -- M,(oll) o M*(ot2)(fFZG(8)). Thus f is determined by the element OM(f) of M ( ~ G ) . Conversely, if m e M(S2G) is given, then the formula

f x ( ( Y , u)) -- M , ( a l ) o M*(c~2)(m) defines a morphism from R B ( X x ff2G) to M ( X ) , that is easily seen to induce a morphism of Mackey functors. These maps between HOmMackR(G)(RBs2G, M) and M(F2G) are inverse to each other, and it follows that the map

OM : HOmMackR(G)(RBF2G, M) --~ M ( ~ G ) is an isomorphism of R-modules. Moreover if $ : M ---> N is a morphism of Mackey functors, then

ON(r

o

f ) ---- (r o f)s2v (6) = CS2G o fS-eG(6) = Cs-ev o O M ( f ) .

In other words, the functors M ~ HOmMackR(G)(RBFeG,M) and M w-> M ( ~ G ) from MackR(G) to R-Mod are isomorphic. But from the point of view of/zR(G)-modules, there is an isomorphism of R-modules

Hom~zR(G)(IzR(G), ~1)"~ ~'1 "~ M(I'2G) and this is also functorial in M. It follows that there is an isomorphism of functors from / z s ( G ) - M o d to R-Mod

Homug(G)(lzR(G),--) ~ Homlzg(G)(RBor By Yoneda's Lemma, this shows that there is an isomorphism of #R (G)-modules

This proves assertion (1), since RByeG ~ ~DHCG IndGResG RB. Now assertion (2)is clear, since the restriction of a Burnside functor is a Burnside functor. O The isomorphism RB(s 2) '~ lzg(G) can be detailed as follows" let M be the Mackey functor defined by M ( H ) = t~lXR(G) C_ I~R(G). Then by construction M(~2G) -- ~VI =

Burnside rings

785

IzR(G). The unit of lzR(G) is the element ~HtHH , and it corresponds by Yoneda's Lemma to the morphism from RB(S22) to M(S2G) mapping the G-set (Y, ct) over S'22 to M,(ul)M*(u2)(Y~H tn). Using the isomorphism of G-sets RB(F2 2 ) ~

~

RB(G/H • G/K)

(5.6.4)

H,KC_G

it follows that the map sending the G-set x E G and L c H MXK by

rrn,x,K(gL)- (gH, gX K)

(G/L, 7t'H,x,K) over G / H x G / K defined for

for g E G

to the element

M.((ZrH,x,K)I)M*((rCH,x,K)2)(~HtH) --tHCx,LxrKx of/zg(G), is an isomorphism of R-modules. Thus (see [49, Propositions (3.2) and (3.3)], or [49, Ch. 4.4])" PROPOSITION 5.6.5 (Th6venaz and Webb). Let G be a finite group and R be a commutative ring. Then the algebra lZR(G) is a finitely generated free R-module, with basis the set of elements tH cx,Lxrffx, for subgroups H and K of G, for x E [H\G/K], and a subgroup L of H M x K up to H f-I x K-conjugation. PROOF. Indeed the G-sets (G/L, rCH,x,K), for subgroups H and K of G, for x E [ H \ G / K ] , and L c_ H N XK up to H Cl x K-conjugation, form an R-basis of RB(I22), up to identifications induced by isomorphism (5.6.4). [2 REMARK 5.6.6. It follows in particular that the rank over R of/ZR (G) does not depend on R. In other words, the algebra/zg(G) is isomorphic to R | It is sometimes convenient to define/zg (G) -- R | for any ring R (not necessarily commutative). The case R = tzs(G) for a commutative ring S is of interest (see [9, Ch. 1.2]). Not that if R is not commutative, then/xg (G) is not strictly speaking an R-algebra. REMARK 5 . 6 . 7 . The previous remarks show that the R-linear map defined by

tHCx,LxrKx E IzR(G)~-+ (G/L, JrH,x,K) E RB(F2 2) is an isomorphism of R-modules. Of course, this is not an algebra isomorphism, since /zR(G) is not commutative in general. One can show (see [9, Ch. 4.5.1]) that the multiplication law it induces on RB(X22) is given by

V o~ c W - - B,

xyz xz

B*

xyz xyyz

(V x W),

S. Bouc

786 where

(xyz) xz

is the map (x ' y ' z) E 123G~ (x ' Z) ~ 1"22G' a n d

(xyz) xyyz

is the map (x ' y, z)

~23 ~-~ (x, y, y, z) ~ ~24, and V x W is the product for the Green functor structure, defined in Example 5.4.4. In the case where V and W are G-sets over ~2~, it is easy to see that V o~2c W is the G-set obtained by pullback

V os2G W

/ ~2G

V

W

~G

~2C

This has been used by Lindner ([31 ]) to give an alternative definition of Mackey functors. It is also the starting point of tom Dieck ([22, Ch. IV.8]) and Lewis ([29]) to define Mackey functors for compact Lie groups.

5.7. The Burnside functor as a universal Green functor The following proposition shows that the Burnside functor is an initial object in the category of Green functors: PROPOSITION 5.7.1. Let G be a finite group, and R be a commutative ring. If A is a Green functor for G over R, then there is a unique unitary morphism of Green functor fromRBtoA. PROOF. By Proposition 5.6.1, there is a unique morphism f of Mackey functors from RB to A such that fo (e) = eA. It is easy to check that f is a morphism of Green functors (see [9, Proposition 2.4.4] for details). D REMARK 5.7.2. For any Green functor A for G over R, there is a natural algebra structure on A(S22G), defined as in Remark 5.6.7 (see [9, Ch. 4]). Moreover (see [9, Ch. 12.2]), one can build a Green functor ~'a for G over R such that ~'a (o) -- Z(A(~('22)): the evaluation of ~'A at the finite G-set X is the set of natural transformations from the identity endofunctor 2- - 2-. of MackR(G) to the endofunctor I x . The previous proposition shows that for any Green functor A, there is a ring homomorphism from RB(G) to Z(A(S2~)). Hence there should exist a ring homomorphism from RB(G) to the center of the Mackey algebra. But the center of a ring S is isomorphic to the endomorphism algebra of the identity functor on S-Mod. Thus, for any Mackey functor M, there should be a morphism from RB(G) to the endomorphism algebra of M, with functorial properties in M.

Burnside rings

787

It can be defined as follows: if X is a finite G-set, then there is a natural transformation

ax :M --+ Mx defined for the finite G-set Z by ax, z - - M * ( z x z)

"M(Z)-+M(ZxX),

where (zx) denotes the projection map Z x X ~ Z. Similarly, there is a natural transformation bx : M x ~ M defined by

b x z ' Mx * () ' z

"M(ZxX)--+M(Z).

This defines an endomorphism z(X)M of M by z ( X ) M , Z = bx, z o ax, z. It is easy to check that for finite G-sets X and Y

z(X II Y)M = z ( X ) M -Jr-z ( Y ) M ,

z(X)M o z(Y)M = z(X x Y)M.

This leads by linearity to an R-algebra homomorphism

X E RB(G) ~ z(X)M E EndMackR(G)(M) for any Mackey functor M for G over R. Moreover, if f : M --+ N is a morphism of Mackey functors, then the square

M

N

z(X)M

z(X)N

>M

>N

is commutative. The ring homomorphism from RB(G) to Z(/zR(G)) can be described concretely as follows: if H is a subgroup of G, then the relations of the Mackey algebra show that there is a (non-unitary)ring homomorphism fin from R B ( H ) to lzR(G) defined by f i n ( H / K ) = tffr ft. With this notation PROPOSITION 5.7.3. Let G be a finite group, and R be a commutative ring. Then the map

z: RB(G) ~ lZR(G) defined by z(x) -

(Res

X)

HCG

is an injective unitary ring homomorphism from RB(G) to Z(IZR(G)).

S. Bouc

788

PROOF. By inspection, or see [49, Proposition 9.2].

E]

Taking the image by z of a set of primitive idempotents of RB(G) will give a decomposition of the unit of/XR (G) into a sum of orthogonal central idempotents. This in turn will give a decomposition of the category of Mackey functors as a direct sum of Abelian categories. NOTATION 5.7.4. If G is a finite group and R is a commutative ring, denote by zr -zrR(G) be the set of prime factors of IGI which are not invertible in R. If J is a zr-perfect subgroup of G, denote by MackR(G, J) the subcategory of MackR(G) on which the idempotent z ( f G) acts trivially. If M is a Mackey functor for G over R, denote by fjG • M the direct summand of M on which z ( f G) acts trivially. THEOREM 5.7.5 (Th6venaz and Webb). Let G be a finite group, and R be a commutative ring. Set zr = zrR(G). (1) If J is a Jr-perfect subgroup of G, then the direct summand f G • B of B has a natural structure of Green functor. Moreover, there are isomorphisms of Green functors

f Gj • B ~ IndGG (H) infGNz( H ) / H (fNG(H)/H RB~--

•

B),

~ f G x RB. Je[sG] J=Orr (J)

(2) The functor

-, ,.NG(J

M ~ IndGc;(g)InlNG(J))/jM

is an equivalence of categories from M a c k g ( N G ( J ) / J , lI) to the category MackR(G, J). PROOF. See [49, Section 10], (or [9, Proposition 2.1.11 ] for a generalization to arbitrary Green functors). D COROLLARY 5.7.6. Let G be a finite group, and zr be a set of prime numbers. If J is a Jr-perfect subgroup of G, then there is a ring isomorphism

fGz(jr)B(G ) ,~ f N G ( J ) / J z ( z r ) B ( N G ( J ) / j ) . PROOF. By evaluation at the trivial G-set of the first isomorphism of Green functors in Theorem 5.7.5, in the case R = Z(rr). Of course, there is also an elementary proof, using the ring homomorphism X w-~ X J from B(G) to B ( N G ( J ) / J ) . Fq

Burnside rings

789

REMARK 5.7.7. By definition, the category MackR(G, 1I) is the category of modules over the algebra/zR(G, II) = z(f~)tZlc(G). One can show that/zR (G, 11) is equal to the R-submodule of/zR(G) generated by the elements tncx,pxrXpx, where H and K are subgroups of G, where x 6 G, and P is a :r-solvable subgroup of H fq x K. One can also show (see [ 10, Lemme 2.2], for the case Izrl = 1) that this algebra is Moritaequivalent to its subalgebra/zR,~(G) generated by the elements t n c x , p x r ~ , where x 6 G and H and K are :r-solvable subgroups of G. The/zR, a(G)-modules can be viewed as "Mackey functors defined only on 7r-solvable subgroups". Recall (see [51, Section 3.2]) that a Mackey functor M is said to be projective relative to afinite G-set X if the morphism bx : M x --+ M is split surjective. If X' is a set of subgroups of G, the functor M is said to be projective relative to ,%' if it is projective relative to the G-set X = [ [r/~2' G / H . With these definitions, one can show that the Mackey functors in MackR(G, 1I) are exactly the Mackey functors which are projective relative to :r-solvable subgroups of G, for zr = 7rR (G). REMARK 5.7.8. If R is a field k of characteristic p, then the Krull-Schmidt theorem holds for finitely generated/zk (G)-modules. If M is an indecomposable projective Mackey functor in Mack(G, 1I), then the previous remarks show that there is a p-subgroup P such that M is a direct summand of IndGB. In particular, the kG-module M(ll) is a direct summand of (IndCpB)(lI), which is easily seen to be isomorphic to IndpCk. In particular, the module M (1I) is a p-permutation module. This argument can be refined, and leads to the following nice interpretation of the indecomposable projective objects in Mackk(G, 1I), in terms of p-permutation modules: THEOREM 5.7.9 (Th6venaz and Webb). Let G be a finite group, and k be afield of characteristic p > O. Then evaluation at the trivial subgroup M w-> M (II) induces a one to one correspondence between the set of isomorphism classes of indecomposable projective objects in Mackk(G, 11) and the set of isomorphism classes of indecomposable p-permutation kG-modules. PROOF. See [49, Theorem 12.7].

7q

6. The Burnside ring as a biset-functor

6.1. Bisets In the previous section, the Burnside functor was defined on the subgroups of a given finite group G. The three operations relating the Burnside rings of subgroups of G were induction, restriction, and conjugation. But there are other natural operations on the Burnside ring, which have not yet been considered: if N is a normal subgroup of the group G, then the inflation functor InfGGG/N'G/N-set --~ G-set introduced in Section 2.2 induces a ring homomorphism

S. Bouc

790

InfGGG/N " B ( G / N ) --+ B(G), and the deflation functor DefGGG/N" G-set --+ G / N - s e t induces a group homomorphism DefGGG/N 9B(G) --+ B ( G / N ) . The common point about all those operations is the following: in all cases, there are two finite groups G and H, and a functor F from G-set to H-set, preserving disjoint unions, i.e. such that F ( X u Y) ~_ F ( X ) u F(Y). I all cases moreover there exists a finite set U with a left H-action and a fight G-action, such that

F ( X ) ~_ U x o X, where U z 6 X is the quotient of U x X by the right action of G given for (u, x) c U • X and g 6 G by

( u , x ) g = (ug, g - l x ) . The set U x X is an H-set for the action defined by

h ( u , x ) - - ( h u , x) for (u, x) ~ U x X and h 6 H. If the actions of G and H on U commute, i.e. if (hu)g -h(ug) for all u 6 U, h 6 H, and g 6 G, then this action passes down to a well defined left action of H on U x 6 X. This leads to the following definition: DEFINITION 6.1.1. Let G and H be groups. An H-set-G, or a biset for short, is a set with a left (H • G~ i.e. a set U with a left H-action and a right G-action which commute. If K is another group, and V is a K-set-H, then the product V • H U is the quotient of the product V • U by the right action of H given by (v, u)h = (vh, h -l u) for v c V, u 6 U, and h 6 H. The class of (v, u) in V • H U is denoted by (v, H U). The set V • H U is a K-set-G for the action given by

k(V,HU)g=(kV,HUg) f o r k ~ K, g ~ G , u ~ U, and v 6 V. EXAMPLE 6.1.2. For the induction functor Ind~ from a subgroup H of G to G, the set U is the set G, with its natural left G-action and right H-action by multiplication. For the restriction functor Res/~, the set U is the set G, for its left H-action and right G-action. For the inflation functor I n ~ / m , the set U is the set G / N , for its left G-action given by projection and multiplication, and its right G/N-action given by multiplication. For the deflation functor D e ~ / N , the set U is the set G / N , for its left G/N-action and fight G-action. There is still another operation, involving the case of conjugation. It is associated to a group isomorphism f : G --+ H. Any G-set X can be viewed as an H-set on which h ~ H acts as f - 1 (h) E G. Here the set U is the set G, with fight G-action by multiplication,

Burnside rings

791

and left H-action of h 6 H by left multiplication by f - I (h). This operation is denoted by Iso~ (without reference to f , which is generally clear from the context). NOTATION 6.1.3. Let G and H be finite groups, and L be a subgroup of H • G. Set

Pl(L) = {h e H I 3g ~ G, (h, g) e L], p2(L) = {g ~ O l3h ~ H, (h, g) e L},

kl(L)={heHl(h,

1) e L } ,

k2(L)={geGl(1,g)c=_L}.

Then ki (L) is a normal subgroup of pi (L), for i = 1, 2. The quotient group is denoted by qi(L), for i = 1, 2. There is a canonical group isomorphism ql (L) --+ q2(L). The quotient set (H • G ) / L is viewed as an H-set-G by

h.(x, y)L.g - (hx, g - l y ) L

Yh, x c H, Vy, g e G.

This biset is transitive, i.e. it is a transitive (H x G~ Conversely, any transitive H set-G is isomorphic to a biset (H • G)/L, for some subgroup L of H • G. Any H-set-G is a disjoint union of transitive bisets. If G, H, and K are finite groups, if L is a subgroup of H • G and M is a subgroup of K • H, set M , L -- {(k,g) ~ K x G I3h r H, (k,h) E M and (h,g) c L}. It is a subgroup of K x G. PROPOSITION 6.1.4. (1) Let G and H be finite groups, and L be a subgroup of H • G.

Then there is an isomorphism of bisets (H • G ) / L '~ H •

ql(L)

Xql(L )

ql(L)

Xq2(L )

q2(L) •

G.

(2) Let G, H, and K be finite groups, let L be a subgroup of H x G and M be a subgroup of K x H. Then there is an isomorphism of K-sets-G

((K • H ) / M ) X H ((H x G)/L)

U

(K • G)/(M 9(x'l)L).

xe[p2(M)\H/pl (L)]

PROOF. See [8, Lemme 3 and Proposition 1]. REMARK 6.1.5. Assertion (1) shows that any transitive biset (H • G ) / L is a product of bisets associated to a restriction Resp2(L G ) , a deflation DefP2(L) q2(L), an isomorphism Is Oq2(L), "-ql(L) an inflation InIql~Pl(r),(L)and an induction IndpH1(L) . Assertion (2) can be viewed as a biset version of the Mackey formula (see Proposition 2.2.1).

S. Bouc

792 6.2. Bisets and functors

If G and H are finite groups, then any finite H-set-G U induces a functor Iu :G-set --+ H-set defined for a finite G-set X by I u ( X ) -- U x 6 X, and for a morphism of finite G-sets f :X ~ Y by

I u ( f ) ( ( u , c x)) = (u,c f (x)) " I u ( X ) ---+Iv(Y). If K is another finite group, if V is a K-set-H, and if X is a finite G-set, there is a natural isomorphism of K-sets V XH (U X G X)"-+ (V XH U) X G X

mapping ( v , . (u, c x)) to ( ( v , . u), c x). This induces an isomorphism of functors between Iv o Iu and Iv • u. The functor Iu preserves disjoint unions, hence it induces a morphism I~(U) from B(G) to B(H) (this morphism should not be confused with the value B(U) of the Burnside functor at the (H x G~ U!). If U' is an H-set-G, and if U' is isomorphic to U (as bisets), then the functors Iu and Iu, are clearly isomorphic. Hence ]3(U) = ~(U~). With the same notation, one has ~(V) o I~(U) = lt~(V x H U). Moreover, if the biset U is a disjoint union Ul u U2 of two H-sets-G U1 and U2, then the functor Iv is clearly isomorphic to the disjoint union of the functors Iut and Iu2. It follows that ]~(U) = I~(Ul) + ]~(U2). Those remarks show that there is a well defined morphism from the Burnside group B ( H x G ~ to the group H o m z ( B ( G ) , B(H)) of group homomorphisms from B(G) to

B(H). If G = H, then viewing G as a G-set-G by left and right multiplication, it is clear that the functor IG is isomorphic to the identity functor. Hence I~(G) is the identity map of B(G). The biset G will be called the identity biset for G. There are many other situations where similar transformations can be associated to bisets: for instance, a finite H-set-G U induces a morphism R ( U ) : R ~ ( G ) ~ RQ(H) between the corresponding Grothendieck groups of rational representations, defined for a finite dimensional QG-module M by

R ( U ) ( M ) = QU |

M,

where Q U is the permutation bimodule with basis U. If K is a finite group, and if V is a finite K-set-H, then R ( V ) o R(U) = R ( V x n U), since there is an isomorphism of bimodules QV ~)QH Q U ~' Q ( V x H U). More generally, if k is a field, one can define a morphism R ( U ) : R k ( G ) --> R~(H) by R ( U ) ( M ) = kU | M for a finitely generated kG-module M. However, this map is well defined only if tensoring with k U preserves exact sequences, i.e. if k U is projective as fight kG-module. If k has characteristic p, this is equivalent to requiring that for each u a U, the stabilizer in G of u is a pl-group. This shows that in some natural situations, not all the bisets are allowed, and leads to the following definition:

Burnside rings

793

DEFINITION 6.2.1. Let 79 and Q be non-empty classes of finite groups, closed under isomorphisms and taking sections and extensions. This means that if H isomorphic to an element of 79, then H is in 79, that if H is a subgroup or a quotient of an element of 79, then H is in 79, and conversely that if N is a normal subgroup of H such that N and H / N are in 79, then H 6 79. If G and H are finite groups, then an H-set-G U is said to be 79-free-Q if for any u 6 U, the stabilizer of u in H is in 79, and the stabilizer of u in G is in Q. One denotes by BI~,Q(H, G) the subgroup of B ( H x G ~ generated by the H-setsG which are 7~-free-Q. If R is a commutative ring, then as usual RBT~,Q(H, G) denotes R | BT~,Q(H, G). LEMMA 6.2.2. Let G, H, and K be finite groups. Let U be an H-set-G, and V be a K-set-H. If U and V are 79-free-Q, then so is V x n U. PROOF. See [8, Lemme 4].

D

It follows that if G, H, and K are finite groups, there is a bilinear product x n : BT~,Q(K, H) x Bp, Q(H, G) ~ Bp, Q(K, G) extending the product (X, Y) w-~ X • H Y. It should be noted moreover that since 79 and Q are non-empty and closed under taking quotients, they both contain the trivial group. Since the identity bisets are left and right free, they are always P-free- Q. DEFINITION 6.2.3. Denote by C~,,Q the category defined as follows: 9 The objects of C7~,Q are the finite groups. 9 If G and H are finite groups, then Horncp, Q (G, H) = Bp,Q(H, G). 9 The composition of morphisms in C/~, Q is defined for finite groups G, H, and K by

V O U = V X n U Vu f Bp, Q(H, G), V v f B p , Q ( K , H ) . The category C/~, Q is preadditive (see [33, Ch. 1.8]), i.e. the sets of morphisms in C7:,,Q are Abelian groups, and moreover the composition of morphisms is left and fight distributive with respect to addition of morphisms. More generally, if R is a commutative ring, then the category RCI~,Q is the category obtained from C/~, Q by tensoring with R: the objects are the finite groups, but HomRc~, Q (G, H) = R |

Homc~, Q (G, H).

Denote by Up, Q the category the objects of which are additive functors from CT,,Q to Z-Mod, morphisms are natural transformations of functors, and composition of morphisms is composition of natural transformations. More generally, denote by RUp, Q the category of R-linear functors from RCp, Q to R-Mod.

S. Bouc

794

The category RYp, Q is Abelian. A sequence

O--+ L--> M---> N--+O of objects and morphisms in RYT:,, Q is exact if and only if its evaluation at any finite group is exact. It is now clear that the correspondence sending a finite group G to its Burnside group B(G), and a finite P-free-Q H-set-G U, for finite groups G and H, to the map ~(U), extends to an additive functor from Cp, Q to Z-Mod. More generally, the correspondence sending a finite group G to RB(G) and a biset U to the map RI~(U):RB(G) --> RB(H) induced by ]~(U), defines an object of the category RYp, Q. It is called the Burnside bisetfunctor with coefficients in R. Similarly, the correspondence mapping a finite group G to R~(G) and a finite 7)-free- Q H-set-G U to the map R(U):RQ(G) --> RQ(H), extends to an object RQ of YT~,QFor any finite group G, the set HOmRCp,Q(1I, G) identifies with the R-submodule RBT~(G) of RB(G) generated by finite P-free G-sets, or, equivalently, by sets G/P, for P ~ 79. This correspondence G e-> R Bp(G) is clearly a subfunctor of the biset functor

RB. The analogue of Proposition 5.6.1 is the following: PROPOSITION 6.2.4. Let M be any object of RYT~,Q. Then the map

f E HOmRyp.Q (RBp, M) e-->f~(e) E M(II) is an isomorphism of R-modules. In particular, the functor R Bp is a projective object in RYTv Q, and EndRyp.Q (RBp) ~_ R. PROOF. This is essentially Yoneda's Lemma: let G be any finite group, and X be any finite P-free G-set. Then X is also a G-set-1I, for the fight (trivial!) action of the trivial group, and moreover the G-set X is isomorphic to X x ~ o, where 9 is the trivial set for the trivial group. Hence if f : R B p ~ M is a natural transformation, the map fG : R B p ( G ) --+ M(G) is the map of R-modules sending the G-set X to M ( X ) ( f ~ ( 9 Conversely, if m c M(lI) is given, one can define a map fG from R B p ( G ) to M(G) by setting

fG(X)--M(X)(m) for a finite P-flee G-set X, and extending f c by linearity. It is easy to check that this defines a natural transformation from R B$, to M. D When the ring R is a field, and 79 and Q are both equal to the family A/1 of all finite groups, one can say a little more (see [8, Lemme 1 and Proposition 8]):

Let K be a field. Then the functor K B is a projective object in KYAII,A1 l, with a unique maximal proper subfunctor J, defined for a finite group G by

THEOREM 6.2.5 (Bouc).

Burnside rings

795

If K has characteristic O, the quotient functor K B~ J is isomorphic to the functor K RQ. It is a simple object in K.~Atl,Al I. PROOF. If L is a subfunctor of KB, then L(lI) is a K-subspace of KB(lI) -- K. Thus either L (lI) -- K. In this case 9 E L (lI), thus for any finite group G and any finite G-set X, the G-set X -- X x II 9 - L(X)(.) is in L(G). Hence L -- K B in this case. The other case is L(1) - - 0 , and then for any finite group G, any X c L(G), and any morphism Y from G to lI in KQAlt,~t, the image L(Y)(X) has to be zero. But clearly HomKca,,A, (G, 1I) ~ KB(G), and with this identification, the element L(Y)(X) of B(lI) identifies with ]G\(Y x X)I. Thus L _c J, and moreover J is clearly a subfunctor of KB. This shows in particular that the dimension over K of K B ( G ) / J ( G ) is equal to the rank of the bilinear form on K B (G) with values in K defined by

(X, Y) e (KB(G)) 2 ~-> (X, Y> --IG\(Y x X)]. Now if K _ Q, the K-basis {eG}He[so] of KB(G) is orthogonal for this bilinear form, and moreover

(eGH'eGH) -

IG\e~

1 ING(H)] K~CHIKI/z(K, H) I

_

1

~I(H)

~ Z /z(K,H)-ING(H)I ' ING(H)I ~ m (x)C_Kc_e

where t~l (H) is the number of elements x c H such that (x) = H. This is non-zero if and only if H is cyclic. Hence the dimension of KB(G)/J(G) is equal to the number c(G) of conjugacy classes of cyclic subgroups of G. Now the natural morphism KB(G) --+ KRQ(G) mapping a G-set to its permutation module induces clearly a natural transformation of functors X" K B ~ KRQ

(6.2.6)

since for any finite group H and any H-set-G U, there is an isomorphism of QG-modules

Q ( u x 9 x) _~ Q u @Qo QX. Since X is non-zero, the kernel of X is contained in J. Hence the image of K B(G) in KRq(G) has dimension at least equal to c(G). But it is well known (see [42, Ch. 13, Th6or~me 29, Corollaire 1]) that the dimension of KR(}(G) is equal to c(G). The theorem follows. [~ REMARK 6.2.7 (see [8, Proposition 2]). The set of isomorphism classes of simple objects in R~-7~ Q is in one to one correspondence with the set of isomorphism classes of pairs (H, V), where H is a finite group, and V is a simple ROut(H)-module, where Out(H) is the group of outer automorphisms of H. The simple functor associated to such a pair (H, V) is denoted by SH, V.

S. Bouc

796

For example, when K is a field of characteristic zero, and 7-9 = Q = ,4/1, the functor K RQ of Proposition 6.2.5 is the functor SH,K. In this case, the subfunctors of K B are studied in [8]. In particular, the composition factors (i.e. the simple sections) of K B are simple functors SH, K associated to the trivial KOut(H)-module, for a class of finite group called b-groups ([8, Proposition 10]). REMARK 6.2.8. In the case where 79 and Q are reduced to the trivial group, the objects of R f p , Q are called global Mackeyfunctors. They have been studied by Webb ([52]). The reason for this denomination is that the operations associated to bisets which are both left and fight free only involve induction, restriction and group isomorphisms. In this paper, Webb also considers the inflation functors, which correspond to the case where Q is reduced to the trivial group, and 7~ is the class of all finite groups. REMARK 6.2.9. It is also of interest to consider subcategories of the above categories

RCT:,,Q. For example, let p be a prime number, and D p denote the full subcategory of QCAII,Att consisting of finite p-groups. Denote by QB and QRQ the restriction to Dp of the functors QB and QRQ on QCAII,AIt. It has been shown recently (Bouc and Th6venaz [ 11 ]) that the (restriction to Dp of the) kernel of the morphism X defined in (6.2.6) above is isomorphic to the torsion-free Dade functor QD, which value at a p-group is equal to Q | D(P), where D ( P ) is the Dade group of endo-permutation kP-modules, for a field k of characteristic p. This functor Q D is simple, isomorphic to (the restriction to ~)p of) SEe,K, where E2 is an elementary Abelian p-group of order p2.

6.3. Double Burnside rings The endomorphism ring of a finite group G in the category RC$,, Q is called the double Burnside ring of G with coefficients in R, for the classes 7-9 and Q. An essential tool to study those rings is the following lemma: LEMMA 6.3.1. Let G be a finite group. If X is a finite G-set, denote by f( the set G x X, with its G-set-G structure defined by

g(a, x)g' = (gag', gx)

Yg, a, gl ~ G and x ~ X.

Then the correspondence X ~ f( induces a morphism of rings (with unit)from B(G) to BT:,,Q ( G, G ). PROOF. See [8, Lemme 13].

E]

In particular, this lemma gives a way to carry the idempotents of the Burnside ring to the double Burnside ring, giving information on the projective and simple modules for those tings. This was used intensively in [8].

Burnside rings

797

REMARK 6.3.2. If K is a field of characteristic 0, then the Burnside algebra K B(G) is semi-simple for any finite group G. It is natural to ask if the double Burnside algebra KBT~,Q(G, G) is. The answer is no in general. One can show for instance that if 79 = Q = r is the class of all finite groups, then the algebra KBT~,Q(G, G) is semi-simple if and only if the group G is cyclic.

6.4. Stable maps between classifying spaces Double Burnside rings have been studied intensively in the case where T' = {1I} is reduced to the trivial group, and Q = r is the class of all finite groups, because they are an essential tool to describe the stable splitting of the classifying spaces of finite groups. The origin of this theory is the Segal conjecture, proved by Carlsson ([ 16]), which states an isomorphism between the stable cohomotopy groups of the classifying space B G of a finite group G and the completion of the Burnside ring at the augmentation ideal. Recall first some notation and definitions (see [2, Ch. 2.8]): NOTATION 6.4.1. If X is a pointed CW-complex, denote by S X its (reduced) suspension, and by S2X its loop space. If X and Y are pointed CW-complexes, denote by [X; Y] the set of homotopy classes of pointed continuous maps from X to Y. If m ~ N, there is a map

~-2msmx- [sm; smx] ~ [sm-k-1; sm+lx] - s'2m+lsm+l x defined by suspension, and one can set s ~ S~ X =

lim s

m Sm

X.

m----~ cx~

If X and Y are pointed C W-complexes, then the set {X; Y} of stable maps from X to Y is defined by

Ix; r j - [x. n+s

r].

It is an Abelian group. If X, Y, and Z are pointed C W-complexes, there is a bilinear map {Y; Z} x {X; Y} --+ {X; Z}. The stable cohomotopy groups rer (X) of a pointed CW-complex X are defined for by 7 rrs ( X ) =

X+,

-- [ X+, li___m f2ns n+r

r E Z

]

n ----~ (N2)

where X+ is the space X with a disjoint basepoint. Note that this last expression makes sense even for r < 0.

S. Bouc

798

The other definition required in the Segal conjecture is the notion of completion. Observe that another consequence of Lemma 6.3.1 is that if G and H are finite groups, then the natural structure of BT~,Q(H, H)-module-BT~,Q(G, G) on BTJ,Q(H, G) gives by restriction a structure of B(H)-module-B(G). It is easy to check (see [8, Lemme 15]) that if X is an H-set-G and Y is a G-set, then X • G Y identifies with the Cartesian product X • Y, for the double action given by

h(x, y)g = (hxg, g-I y)

u ~ H, Vg ~ G, Yx E X, Vy ~ Y.

NOTATION 6.4.2. Let G be a finite group. Denote by IG the prime ideal I~,0(G) of B(G) defined in Section 3.4. It is called the augmentation ideal. The completion of B(G) at the ideal IG is the inverse limit

B(G) ^ - lim B ( G ) / I ~ . nEN

More generally, if H and G are finite groups, the completion B{ HI,A/I(H, G) ^ of B{uJ,A/1 (H, G) is defined as the inverse limit

B{Hi,AII(H,G) ^= li___mB{ III,AH(H, G)/B{HI,Alt(H, G)I~, nEl~ n where B{u},,4/I(H, G)I G denotes B{ll},Ajl(H, G) •

n I G.

If Y is a pointed C W-complex, then the functors X ~ {X; S r Y} form a generalized cohomology theory (see [2, Ch. 2.5]). In particular, if H is a subgroup of a finite group G, there is a transfer map from {B H+; Y } to {B G+; Y }. Taking Y = B H+, the image of the identity of {B H+; B H+} is an element Tr G of {B G+; B H+}, also called transfer. This element can be composed with the stable map from B H+ to S O obtained by identifying B H to a point. This gives an element rH of {BG+, S ~ - zr~ The precise statement of Segal's conjecture is now the following: THEOREM 6.4.3 (Carlsson). Let G be a finite group. Then the map G / H ~ rH defined above induces a group isomorphism

e(G)^~~ Furthermore Jrsr (BG) -- Ofor r > O. This has been generalized by Lewis, May and McClure ([30]): suppose H and G are finite groups. If Q is a subgroup of G and qg: Q ~ H is a group homomorphism, then the stable map Tr~ ~ {B G+; B Q+ } can be composed with the element of {B Q+; B H+ } deduced from qg, to get an element rO,~ ~ {BG+; BH+}. This element depends only on the conjugacy class of the subgroup A~(Q) of H • G consisting of the elements (~b(l), 1), for 1 ~ Q. Moreover, the biset (H • G ) / A ~ ( Q ) is

Burnside rings

799

transitive, and free on the left. Conversely, any left-free transitive H-set-G is isomorphic to a biset (H x G ) / A r for some subgroup Q of G and some morphism r from Q to H. This construction gives all the stable maps from B G + to B H+. More precisely: THEOREM 6.4.4 (Lewis-May-McClure). Let G and H be finite groups. The above correspondence sending the left-free transitive H-set-G (H • G ) / A r to rQ,r E {B G+; B H+ } induces an isomorphism

B{H},AI1(H, G)"--. {BG+; BH+}. This theorem was at the origin of the study of stable splittings of the classifying spaces of finite groups. It provides indeed an algebraic translation from the stable endomorphisms of B G+ for a finite group G, in terms of the completion of the double Burnside ring B{II},All(G, G). For details see the survey paper of Benson ([3]), or the articles of Benson and Feschbach ([4]), Martino and Priddy ([34]), Priddy ([37]), Webb ([52]). Those two deep theorems on stable homotopy raise some natural questions on the algebraic side. For example, being given three finite groups G, H, and K, the composition of stable maps {BH+; BK+} x {BG+; BH+} --+ {BG+; BK+} shows that there is a map

B{ul,AII(K, H ) " x B{u},A11(H, G)"--~ B{1II,All(K, G)" induced by the product (X, Y) ~ X x H Y. Without Theorem 6.4.4, the existence of such a map is not obvious a priori, and seems to require the following lemma: LEMMA 6.4.5. Let G and H be finite groups. Then for any integer m ~ N, there exists an

integer n c N such that I~B{H},AjI(H, G) c_C_B{~},AH(H, G)I~, where I~IB{1I},All(H, G) denotes I~ x H B{II},All(H, G). PROOF. Let X be a finite H-set, and Y be a finite H-set-G. Then it is easy to see that the biset Z - X x H Y identifies with the Cartesian product X x Y, for the double action given by

h(x, y)g = (hx, hyg)

Vh ~ H, Vg 6 G, Yx ~ X, Vy ~ Y.

In particular for any subgroup L of H x G, the fixed points of L on Z, i.e. the set of z c Z such that az -- zb whenever (a, b) 6 L, identifies with Xpl (c) • yL. It follows that for any X c B (H) and any Y 6 B (H • G ~

Y) l = IxP'< )l lEVI 9

S. Bouc

800

In particular if X ~ I~, for an integer n ) 1, then X is a sum of terms X1 x - - . x Xn, with X1 . . . . . Xn ~ IG. Hence IXI -- O, and moreover Ix P I -- 0 (pn) for any prime p and any p-subgroup P of H, since Ix/PI -- IXil - 0 (p), for i = 1 . . . . . n. Thus

I~B{a},AIt(H, G) c_ Jn(H, G), where Jn(H, G) is the subset of B(H, G) = B{nI,AIt(H, G) defined by Jn (H, G) --

{Z I IZI = 0, Vp prime, 'v'L C H x G, p l ( L ) p - g r o u p

~

Iz l =

0(pn)}.

For each prime number p, set m p - IHip, IGIp,. Then for any p-perfect subgroup K of G, the idempotent

fpGK=

~ eG Me[SG] OP(M)=GK

of Q B ( G ) lies in Z(p)B(G), and m p f G E B(G). Moreover leVI = 0 unless M - lI. Thus

m p f ~K ~ IG unless K -

lI.

It follows that for any integer n, the element m np fpGK -- (rap fpGK)n is in I~ if K # 1I. Now if Z ~ B(H, G) mnp Z -

mpn z

n GK =--mpn z f G l,i (B(H, G)I~) mpZfp,

f G ,1I +

Ke[sol OP(K)--K Moreover, the integers mp, for p dividing IHIIGI, are relatively prime, and there exist integers ap,n, for p prime (equal to 0 for p not dividing IHIIGI), such that Y-~p ap,nmnp - 1. It follows that

Z =-- Z

(B(H, G)I~),

ap,nYp

p where Yp - m p Z f pG,~. Let L be a subgroup of H x G, and M be a subgroup of G. Then in B ( H x G)

e HxG

x

e~-

[(eG)Lje HxG --I(e~t)P2(L)lef xG = { eHxGO

Now for each prime p, the element Yp is equal to

re=

y o f Gp,H-__

Y~

Le[SH•

L xa IYpleI~

if p2(L) =G M, otherwise.

Burnside rings

801

and e nxG fGli = 0 unless p2(L) is a p-group. Thus

Yp --

E

mplZLle~ •176

Le[sH• OP ( p 2 ( L ) ) = I I

Moreover, for each subgroup L of H x G, one has ILl = Ikl (L)IIP2(L)I, and if kl (L) 7~ 1I, then IZLI = 0 since Z is a linear combination of left-free bisets. It follows that if JzL I 7~ 0, and if p2(L) is a p-group, then L is a p-group, equal to Ar for some p-subgroup Q of G, and some morphism r : Q ~ H. Hence Pl (L) = r is a p-group. Thus

Yp-~mplZL[e~ •176 L

where L runs through those p-subgroups Ar (Q), up to conjugation by H x G. Finally, for such a subgroup L = Ar (Q)

mplZLJe~ xc -Inlp, IGIp,lZLleI~• n-1

--]H]p,

n-m-1

]G]p,

IZLI

IH[pIG[~+l ( ]H]]G]eH

•

([G

]m

e~).

This is zero if Q = 1I and Z ~ Jn(H, G), because [Ztl = I Z I - 0 in this case. And if Q 7~ 1I, the element (IHIIGIe LHxG) (IGlme~) is in B(H, G)I G m , and if n is big enough, the quotient inlplGl,~+ 1 1 z t l is an integer for Z 6 Jn(H, G), s i n c e p l ( L ) - r completes the proof of the lemma.

This U]

PROPOSITION 6.4.6. Let G, H and K be finite groups. Then the product

(X, Y) ~ B{~},Au(K, H) x B{~},AH(H, G) e-->X x H Y c B{H},A11(K, G) induces a well defined product B{a},AH(K, H)^x B{H},A11(H, G) ^----> B{a},A11(K, G) ^. PROOF. This is clear, since by the previous lemma, the product (X, Y) E B{~},AH(K, H) x B{1I},AH(H, G) e--->X x H Y ~ B{~},All(K, G) is continuous for the In-adic and IG-adic topologies. PROPOSITION 6.4.7. Let G be a finite group. Then the correspondence mapping a subgroup H of G to B(H)^has a natural structure of Green functor.

S. Bouc

802

PROOF. Indeed, for any finite group H, there is an isomorphism

B(H) ^'~ B{H},eadl(1I, H) ~. Thus for two finite groups H and K, there are maps

B(H)^• B{uj,.AjI(H, K) --+ B(K) ~. Now if H _ K are subgroups of G, this gives a transfer map from B(H)^to B(K), using K as a left-free H-set-K, and a restriction map from B(K)^to B(H), using K as a left-free K-set-H. Similarly, for x 6 G, there is a conjugation map from B(H)^to B( x H), induced by the biset H with its obvious structure of H-set -x H. The axioms of Mackey functors follow from the properties of product of bisets. In other words, the problem to define a Mackey functor structure on B^is that the correspondence H ~ I~ is not clearly a sub-Mackey functor of B. However if H is a subgroup of G, and n a positive integer, let

Jn (H) -- {X ~ B(H) I IXI --O, Vp prime, VP _ H, P p-group,

Px l =0 (p")}. Then Jn (H) is an ideal of B(H), and one can show as in Lemma 6.4.5 that the topology defined by the ideals Jn (H) is equivalent to the topology defined by the ideals 174. It is easy to see moreover that the correspondence H ~ Jn (H) is a sub-Mackey functor of B. Hence the completion B(H)^is isomorphic to

B(H) ^~

li__m B ( H ) / J n ( H ) n-----~O0

and in this form, it has a natural structure of Green functor.

E]

REMARK 6.4.8. For further results on completion of Green functors, see Luca ([32]).

References [ 1] D. Benson, Representations and Cohomology L Cambridge Stud. Adv. Math., Vol. 30, Cambridge University Press (1991). [2] D. Benson, Representations and Cohomology II, Cambridge Stud. Adv. Math., Vol. 31, Cambridge University Press ( 1991). [3] D. Benson, Stably splitting BG, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 33 (1996), 189-198. [4] D. Benson and M. Feschbach, Stable splittings of classifying spaces offinite groups, Topology 31 (1992), 157-176. [5] S. Bouc, Projecteurs dans l'anneau de Burnside, projecteurs dans l'anneau de Green, et modules de Steinberg ggngralisgs, J. Algebra 139 (2) (1991), 395-445. [6] S. Bouc, Exponentielle et modules de Steinberg, J. Algebra 15t) (1) (1992), 118-157. [7] S. Bouc, Construction defoncteurs entre catggories de G-ensembles, J. Algebra 183 (0239) (1996), 737825.

Burnside rings

803

[8] S. Bouc, Foncteurs d'ensembles munis d'une double action, J. Algebra, 183 (0238) (1996), 664-736. [91 S. Bouc, Green-Functors and G-Sets, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 1671, Springer, Berlin (October 1997). [10] S. Bouc, R~solutions de foncteurs de Mackey, Group Representations: Cohomology, Group Actions and Topology, AMS Proc. Sympos. Pure Math., Vol. 63 (January 1998), 31-83. [11] S. Bouc and J. Thrvenaz, The group ofendo-permutation modules, Invent. Math. (1998), to appear. [12] M. Brour, On Scott modules and p-permutation modules: An approach through the Brauer morphism, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 93 (3) (1985), 401-408. [131 K. Brown, Euler characteristics of groups: The p-fractional part, Invent. Math. 29 (1975), 1-5. [14] K. Brown and J. Thrvenaz, A generalization of Sylow's third theorem, J. Algebra 115 (1988), 414-430. [151 W. Burnside, Theory of Groups of Finite Order, 2nd edn., Cambridge University Press (1911). [16] G. Carlsson, Equivariant stable homotopy and Segal's Burnside ring conjecture, Ann. of Math. 120 (1984), 189-224. [171 S.B. Conlon, Decompositions induced from the Burnside algebra, J. Algebra 10 (1968), 102-122. [18] C. Curtis and I. Reiner, Methods of Representation Theory with Applications to Finite Groups and Orders, Wiley Classics Library, Vol. II, Wiley (1990). [19] T. tom Dieck, The Burnside ring of a compact Lie group, Math. Ann. 215 (1975), 235-250. [20] T. tom Dieck, Idempotent elements in the Burnside ring, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 10 (1977), 239-247. [21] T. tom Dieck, Transformation Groups and Representation Theory, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 766, Springer, Berlin (1979). [221 T. tom Dieck, Transformation Groups, Studies in Math., Vol. 8, de Gruyter (1987). [23] A. Dress, A characterization of solvable groups, Math. Z. 110 (1969), 213-217. [24] A. Dress, Notes on the theory of representations of finite groups, Bielefeld Notes (1971). [25] A. Dress, Contributions to the Theory of Induced Representations, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 342, Springer, Berlin (1973), 183-240. [26] D. Gluck, Idempotent formula for the Burnside ring with applications to the p-subgroup simplicial complex, Illinois J. Math. 25 (1981), 63-67. [27] J. Green, Axiomatic representation theory for fnite groups, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 1 (1971), 41-77. [28] G. Karpilovsky, Group Representations 4, Math. Studies, Vol. 182, North-Holland (1995). [29] L.G. Lewis, The category of Mackey functors for a compact Lie group, Group representations: Cohomology, Group Actions and Topology, AMS Proc. Symposia in Pure Math., Vol. 63 (January 1998). [3O] L.G. Lewis, J.P. May and J.E. McClure, Classifying G-spaces and the Segal conjecture, Current Trends in Algebraic Topology, Vol. 2, CMS Conference Proc. (1982), 165-179. [31] H. Lindner, A remark on Mackey functors, Manuscripta Math. 18 (1976), 273-278. [321 F. Luca, The defect of completion of a Green functor, Group Representations: Cohomology, Group Actions and Topology, AMS Proc. Symposia in Pure Math., Vol. 63 (January 1998), 369-381. [33] S. Mac Lane, Categories for the Working Mathematician, Graduate Texts in Math., Vol. 5, Springer (1971). [34] J. Martino and S.B. Priddy, The complete stable splitting for the classifying space of a finite group, Topology 31 (1992), 143-156. [35] T. Matsuda, On the unit group of Burnside rings, Japan. J. Math. 8 (1) (1982), 71-93. [36] T. Matsuda and T. Miyata, On the unit groups of the Burnside rings of finite groups, J. Math. Soc. Japan 35 (1983), 345-354. [37] S.B. Priddy, On characterizing summands in the classifying space of a finite group I, Amer. J. Math. 112 (1990), 737-748. [38] D. Quillen, Higher algebraic K-theory, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 341, Springer, Berlin (1973), 85-147. [39] D. Quillen, Homotopy properties of the poset of non-trivial p-subgroups, Adv. in Math. 28 (2) (1978), 101-128. [40] R. Schw~inzl, Koeffiziente in Burnside rings, Arch. Math. 29 (1977), 621-622. [411 R. Schw~inzl, On the spectrum of the Burnside ring, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 15 (1979), 181-185. [42] J.-P. Serre, Representations Lin(aires des Groupes Finis, 2nd ed., Collection Mrthodes, Hermann (1971). [43] L. Solomon, The Burnside algebra ofafinite group, J. Combin. Theory 2 (1967), 603-615. [44] J. Thrvenaz, Idempotents de l' anneau de Burnside et caract~ristique d'Euler, Srminaire Claude Chevalley sur les groupes finis, Vol. 25, Tome 3, Publications mathrmatiques de l'Universit6 Paris 7 (1985), 207-217. [45] J. Thrvenaz, Permutation representation arising from simplicial complexes, J. Combin. Theory Ser. A 46 (1987), 122-155.

804

S. Bouc

[46] J. Th6venaz, Isomorphic Burnside rings, Comm. Algebra 16 (9) (1988), 1945-1947. [47] J. Th6venaz and P. Webb, Simple Mackeyfunctors, Proc. of the 2nd International Group Theory Conference Bressanone 1989, Rend. Circ. Mat. Palermo, Serie II, Vol. 23 (1990), 299-319. [48] J. Th6venaz and P. Webb, Homotopy equivalences ofposets with a group action, J. Combin. Theory 56 (2) (1991), 173-181. [49] J. Th6venaz and E Webb, The structure of Mackey functors, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 347 (6) (1995), 1865-1961. [50] E Webb, A local method in group cohomology, Comment. Math. Helv. 62 (1987), 135-167. [51] P. Webb, A split exact sequence for Mackey functors, Comment. Math. Helv. 66 (1991), 34-69. [52] E Webb, Two classification of simple Mackey functors with application to group cohomology and the decomposition of classifying spaces, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 88 (1993), 265-304. [53] T. Yoshida, Idempotents in Burnside rings and Dress induction theorem, J. Algebra 80 (1983), 90-105. [54] T. Yoshida, On the unit groups of Burnside rings, J. Math. Soc. Japan 42 (1) (1990), 31-64.

A Guide to Mackey Functors

Peter Webb School of Mathematics, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, MN 55455, USA E-mail: [email protected]

Contents 1. Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. The definitions of a Mackey functor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3. The computation of Mackey functors using relative projectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4. Complexes obtained from G-spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5. Mackey functors as representations of the Mackey algebra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. Induction theorems and the action of the Burnside ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7. Cohomological Mackey functors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8. Globally-defined Mackey functors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9. The computation of globally-defined Mackey functors using simple functors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10. Stable decompositions of BG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11. Some naturally-occurring globally-defined Mackey functors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

H A N D B O O K OF ALGEBRA, VOL. 2 Edited by M. Hazewinkel 9 2000 Elsevier Science B.V. All rights reserved 805

807 808 811 817 820 822 826 827 830 831 834 834


A guide to Mackeyfunctors

807

1. Introduction

A Mackey functor is an algebraic structure possessing operations which behave like the induction, restriction and conjugation mappings in group representation theory. Operations such as these appear in quite a variety of diverse contexts- for example group cohomology, the algebraic K-theory of group tings, and algebraic number t h e o r y - and it is their widespread occurrence which motivates the study of such operations in abstract. The axioms for a Mackey functor which we will use were first formulated by Dress [24], [25] and by Green [30]. They follow on from earlier ideas of Lam on Frobenius functors [36], described in [19]. Another structure which appeared early on is Bredon's notion of a coefficient system [ 15]. A major preoccupation in studying Mackey functors is to compute their values, be it in the context of specific examples such as computing the cohomology or character ring of a finite group, or in a more general setting. It is important to develop techniques to do this, and if some method of calculation can be formulated within the general context of Mackey functors then we have the possibility to apply it to every specific instance without developing it each time from scratch. One argument which generalizes to Mackey functors in this way is the method of stable elements which appears in the book of Cartan and Eilenberg [ 16], and which provides a way of computing the p-torsion subgroup of the cohomology of a finite group as a specifically identified subset of the cohomology of a Sylow p-subgroup. An ingredient in the general form of this calculation is the notion of relative projectivity of a Mackey functor, similar in spirit to the notion of relative projectivity of group representations. We will see in Section 3 how the method of stable elements can be formulated for all Mackey functors. Induction theorems are another kind of result which are among the most important methods of computation. They have a very well-developed and well-known theory, especially in the context of group representations. Such theorems may also be formulated in the general setting, and in Section 6 we present an important induction theorem due to Dress. Work of great refinement obtaining explicit forms of induction theorems has been done by Boltje [5-7], but this goes beyond what we can describe here. In order to present these applications we develop the technical machinery which they necessitate, and we do this in an order which to a large extent reflects chronology. As the theory of Mackey functors became more elaborate it became apparent that they are algebraic structures in their own right with a theory which fits into the framework of representations of algebras. They may, in fact, be identified with the representations of a certain algebra- called the Mackey a l g e b r a - and there are simple Mackey functors, projective and injective Mackey functors, resolutions of Mackey functors, and so on. We describe this theory in outline in Section 5. A new notion of Mackey functor began to appear, namely that of a globally-defined Mackey functor, an early instance of which appeared in the work of Symonds [52]. These are structures which have a definition on all finite groups (whereas the original Mackey functors are only defined on the subgroups of some fixed group) and we present in Section 8 the context for these structures envisaged by Bouc [10]. We describe three uses for these functors: a method of computing group cohomology in Section 9, an approach to the stable

P. Webb

808

decomposition of classifying spaces B G in Section 10, and a framework in which Dade's group of endopermutation modules plays a fundamental role in Section 11. There is no full account of Mackey functors in text book form, and with this in mind I have tried to be comprehensive in my treatment. In this I have failed, and on top of everything the proofs that are given are often sketchy or left to the reader who must either work them out as an exercise or consult the literature. This guide to Mackey functors is deliberately concise. The omissions which seem most regrettable are these: the definition of a Mackey functor on compact Lie groups and other more general classes of groups (see [38,21 ]); the theory of Green functors (see [59,12]); and the theory of Brauer quotients (see

[59]). Finally, I wish to thank Serge Bouc for his comments of this exposition.

2. The definitions of a Mackey functor There are several ways of giving the definition of a Mackey functor, but they all amount to the same thing. We present two definitions here, the first in terms of many axioms and the second in terms of bivariant functors on the category of finite G-sets. They may also be defined as functors on a specially-constructed category, an approach which is due to Lindner [40]. The most accessible definition of a Mackey functor for a finite group G is expressed in terms of axiomatic relations. We fix a commutative ring R with a 1 and let R-mod denote the category of R-modules. A Mackey functor for G over R is a function M : {subgroups of G } ~ R-mod with morphisms

IH: M ( K ) --->M(H), RH" M(H) -+ M(K), cg: M(H) --->M(gH) for all subgroups H and K of G with K ~< H and for all g in G, such that (0) I if, R H, Ch "M(H) ~ M(H) are the identity morphisms for all subgroups H and

h~H,

(1) R K R n

Rn

} for all subgroups J ~< K ~< H, (2) Iff l f = I~ (3) CgCh " - - Cgh for all g, h 6 G, p

(4) Rg K Cg -- CgR~ gH

(5) I~x c~ = Cg I ff

for all subgroups K M do> M x dl> M x 2 d2> ...

with do - 0 x. The next result implies that the complexes C and D are acyclic in case M is X-projective or, equivalently, X-injective. THEOREM 3.5. I f M is X-projective then both C and D are chain homotopic to the zero complex. PROOF. It is useful to say that a chain complex is contractible if it is chain homotopic to the zero complex. Summands of contractible complexes are contractible. Since M is a summand of M x it suffices to prove the result for the functor M x . The complex we obtain replacing M by M x evaluated at a G-set Y2 is M(Y2 x X r + l x X )

M(f2 X X r x X)

II "'"

dr+~

Mx(Y2 X

II X r+l)

dr >

M x ( I 2 X X r)

dr-1>

...

It is a routine check that the degree 1 mapping Sr " M ( f 2 x X r X X ) ~ M(Y2 x X r+l X X ) given by Sr = ( - 1)r- 1M , (1 x lr X A), where A" X --+ X x X is the diagonal, satisfies

P. Webb

816 Sr- 1dr + dr +1Sr =

to 0.

1, showing that the identity mapping on this complex is chain homotopic [3

To say that the complexes C and D are contractible is equivalent to saying that they are isomorphic to a direct sum of complexes of the form ... --+ 0 --+ A--~ A --+ 0 --+ .-where ot is an isomorphism. This means that the complexes are acyclic, and are everywhere split. The acyclicity implies that the values M(K) of the Mackey functor are given as the cokernel (if we use M , ) or the kernel (if we use M*) of the explicitly given map dl, and this description is compatible with inclusions of subgroups and conjugations in G. The cokernel of the map Mx2(G) --+ Mx(G) in the complex C may be described as a colimit, and the kernel of Mx(G) ~ Mx2(G) in complex D may be described as a limit, as we may see in an elementary fashion. We will see in the next section that the other homology groups of C and D can be interpreted as derived functors of colimit and limit functors. For these results we only really need to work with half of the Mackey functor, either the covariant half M, - which is known as a coefficient system - or the contravariant half M*. PROPOSITION 3.6. (i) In the complex C, Coker(Mx2(G) -~ M x ( G ) ) is the colimit of the diagram made up of all possible morphisms of R-modules n

M ( H g NK)I~'~n>KM(K)

and

M ( H g NK)t'n'~>'ZM(H),

where H, K E 2" and g E G. (ii) In the complex D, Ker(Mx(G) -~ Mx2(G)) is the limit of the diagram made up of all possible morphisms of R-modules H

M(K)R~'e~ KM ( H g n K)

and

M(H)

"g - I

R HA

>

gK

M ( H g n K),

where H, K ~ 2" and g ~ G. PROOF. In a similar way to Lemma 2.1 (note that X • X is the pullback of X --+ pt +-- X) we see in the covariant case that Mx2 --+ Mx is the direct sum of terms with component The cokernelofthis maps MG/HgNK --+ MG/H @ MC/K specified by (--lffn,~Kcg , I ngnx)" K is the stated colimit, and the contravariant case is similar. E] This observation provides the connection with one of the main examples which motivates this general development, namely the 'stable elements' formula of Cartan and Eilenberg [ 16]. If we take M to be the p-part of group cohomology and 2' to be all p-subgroups of G then the assertion that Hn(G, U)p is isomorphic to the stable elements in Hn(p, U), where P is a Sylow p-subgroup is exactly the assertion that it is isomorphic to the limit of the above-mentioned diagram. We thus see how to generalize this formula to arbitrary Mackey functors.

A guide to Mackey functors

817

COROLLARY 3.7. I f M is X-projective then M ( G ) ~- colimA, M, ~ limA, M* where these terms denote the colimit and limit described in the last result. In particular, if M is a Green functor and the sum of the induction maps from subgroups in 2( to M ( G ) is surjective, then these isomorphisms hold.

4. Complexes obtained from G-spaces A deficiency of the Amitsur complex considered by Dress is that it has infinite length, and it is often more useful to have a resolution of finite length. The Amitsur complex is in fact a particular case of a theory in which we obtain exact sequences of Mackey functors from the action of G on a suitable space and we now describe this. We first have to say with what kind of G-spaces we will work, and the most elegant formulation is to define a G-space to be a simplicial G-set, that is, a simplicial object in the category of G-sets. For the reader unfamiliar with these we may equally consider admissible G-CW complexes (or admissible G-simplicial complexes), namely CW complexes (simplicial complexes) equipped with a cellular (simplicial) action of G and satisfying the condition that for each cell (simplex) cr the stabilizer G~ fixes o- pointwise. If Z is a G-space we denote the set of (non-degenerate) simplices (or cells) in dimension i by Zi. For each i this is a G-set. Given a Mackey functor M we may construct a covariant functor FM:G-set MackR (G) defined by FM(X) = M x , using the covariant part of the functor M. to give the functorial dependence on X. We may also define a contravariant functor FM: G-set ~ --+ MackR (G) defined again by F M (X) = M x , but using the contravariant part of the functor M* to give the functorial dependence on X. Now given a G-space Z we may construct complexes of Mackey functors "'"---~

MZ1 ~ Mzo --> M--+ 0

and 9.- +-- Mz~ +-- Mz0 +-- M +--0 as follows. Regarding Z as a functor Z : A ~ --+G-set (where A is the category of sets of the form {0 . . . . . n } with monotone maps as morphisms) we obtain by composition a simplicial Mackey functor FM o Z. The first sequence is now the normalized chain complex of this simplicial object, augmented by the map Ozo : Mzo --+ M. The second sequence is obtained similarly from F M o Z ~ augmenting by the map 0 z0 : M --+ Mzo. For future reference, let us denote by M z the sequence ..- --+ Mzl --+ Mzo --+ 0 without augmentation, and by M z the sequence -.. +- Mz1 +-- Mz0 +-- 0 again without augmentation. As an example we indicate how the Amitsur complex which Dress considered may be constructed in this way. Given a G-set X, we construct a space Z as the nerve of the category in which the objects are the elements of X, and in which there is precisely one morphism (an isomorphism) between each ordered pair of objects. Thus the r-simplices (including the degenerate ones) are in bijection with X r+l. Dress's complex is the (unnormalized) chain complex of FM o Z, augmented by 0z0. The augmented normalized complex is a quotient of this by a contractible subcomplex, and has the same homology.

818

P. Webb

The following is the theorem which ties all this together. THEOREM 4.1 [65,9,27]. Let G be a finite group, M a Mackey f u n c t o r f o r G, X and 3: sets of subgroups of G which are closed under taking subgroups and conjugation, and Z a G-space. Suppose that (i) M is projective relative to 2(. (ii) For every Y ~ 3:, M ( Y ) = O. (iii) For every subgroup H ~ X - 3), the fixed points Z n are contractible. Then the complexes of Mackeyfunctors 9. . - - ~ M z l - - + M z 0 ~ M ~ 0

and

...+--Mz~ +--Mz0+--M+--0

are contractible; that is, they are acyclic and everywhere split.

In the case of the Amitsur complex we take X = IIH~X G / H and 3: = 0. Then for every H 6 X the space Z previously constructed satisfies the condition that zH is contractible, since it is the nerve of the category whose objects are the elements of x H and where there is a single morphism between each pair of objects. This category is equivalent to a category with only one object and morphism, and its nerve is contractible. When we evaluate the sequences of the theorem at G we get sequences which express M (G) in terms of the values of M on the stabilizer groups of the simplices in Z. Thus the covariant sequence may be written

@

@

a ~[G\ZI]

~r ~ [ G \ Z o ]

M(G~r) --+ M ( G ) --+ O.

This is particularly useful when the G-space Z has finite dimension, in which case the sequences have finite length and the acyclicity and splitting mean that the isomorphism type of M (G) is determined by the isomorphism types of the remaining terms. This approach has been used quite extensively to assist in the computation of group cohomology, and a description of these applications is given in [ 1] (in a more rudimentary version phrased only in terms of group cohomology, and without the force of the exact sequence). For this we fix a prime p and let M ( G ) = Hn(G, U)p be the Sylow p-subgroup of the group cohomology in degree n of G with coefficients in the ZG-module U, for some n > 0 and U. For Z we may take various spaces, for example the order complex (i.e. the nerve) of the poset S p ( G ) = {H M. We define X to act on M as the composite OxO x. It is hard to see at first what this composite is doing. In the particular case when X = G / K for some subgroup K, the effect on M ( G / H ) is a composite of maps M ( G / H ) --+ M ( G / H • G / K ) ---> M ( G / H ) where we have an identification

M(G/H x G/K)~

~ M ( G / H OgK). g6IH\G/K]

From this we may see that if x ~ M ( G / H ) then

G/Kx=

E

go.,Rgo KU .

g6[H\G/K] Yet another way to specify the action of the Burnside ring is to observe that there is an R-algebra homomorphism B(G) --+ #R(G) specified on basis elements by H

H K is an isomorphism, then (c~-1), =c~* and ( u - l ) * =c~,. The automorphisms of each group G act on M ( G ) , and because the inner automorphisms act trivially each M ( G ) has the structure of an R[Out G]-module. The main reason for having the classes 2' and Y as part of the definition is that a globally-defined Mackey functor need not possess all operations c~, and c~* when ot is a surjective group homomorphism, and with each example we discuss the possibilities for X and Y. It is always possible to take 2' and y to consist only of the identity group, which is the same as saying that c~, and c~* are only defined when c~ is injective. Sometimes it is possible to take ,V and Y to be larger classes of groups. Some of the examples of ordinary Mackey functors we have previously discussed also give examples of globally-defined Mackey functors; and some do not. The following are examples of globally-defined Mackey functors. 9 G o ( k G ) and B(G): in both these examples we may take A" and y to be all finite groups. Whenever c~:G ~ H is a group homomorphism we may restrict both representations of H and H-sets along or. Also we may form R H | U and H x 6 12 whenever U is an R G-module and S2 a G-set, and this allows us to form or,.


829

9 H n (G, R), Hn (G, R), t l n (G, R)" the cohomology, homology and Tate cohomology of G in some dimension n with trivial coefficients (arbitrary coefficient modules are not possible since they must be modules for every finite group). For cohomology we may take X to be all finite groups and 3; to be the identity group. If or" G --+ H is a surjective group h o m o m o r p h i s m then c~* is inflation. However, provided we allow such inflations it is not possible to define or, (except on isomorphisms) so as to satisfy the axioms. To see this, consider the fixed point functor M(G) -- H~ R) for each finite group G, and also the homomorphisms 1 --~ G ~ 1. We know that t, -- [G[. id and t* -- id. Since fit - id we h a v e / 3 , t , - id and t*/5* -- id. From this we deduce that/5" -- id and /~, - - I G 1 - 1 9id. At this point if IG1-1 does not exist in R we see that 13, cannot be defined. Even when [G[ -1 does exist in R, consider axiom (4) applied to the square 1

>

1

G

>

1

This allows us to deduce that/3,/3* = id, that is IG[ -1 = 1, which cannot hold for all finite groups G. 9 Kn (ZG), the algebraic K-theory of Z G . Here we may take 3; = all finite groups but put X = 1 (see [49]), the point being that if ot : G --+ H is a group h o m o m o r p h i s m and P is a projective Z G - m o d u l e then Z H | P is a projective Z H - m o d u l e , but the restriction of a projective module along a h o m o m o r p h i s m c~ is only projective when ot is injective. 9 Q @ D(G) when G is a p-group and D(G) is the Dade group of endopermutation kGmodules, where k is a field of characteristic p (see [14]). Here we have to consider a modified version of the theory where we consider functors defined only on p-groups. We may take X and y to be all p-groups. As is the case with ordinary Mackey functors, there is another definition of globallydefined Mackey functors [ 10] which is less immediately transparent, but which is usually easier to work with. Given a pair of groups G and H we consider the finite (G, H)-bisets. These are finite sets/2 with a left action of G and a right action of H so that the two actions commute: g(coh) -- (gco)h for all g 6 G, h 6 H and co 6 / 2 . By analogy with the Burnside ring, let A x , y (G, H ) be the Grothendieck group with respect to disjoint unions of all finite (G, H ) - b i s e t s / 2 with the property that StabG(co) 6 A" and Stab/-/ (co) E 32 for all co E / 2 . This is the free Abelian group with the isomorphism classes of transitive such bisets as a basis - we s a y / 2 is transitive if given co 6 / 2 , every element o f / 2 may be written gcoh for some g ~ G and h ~ H . We now define AXR'Y(G, H) -- R @~ A x , Y ( G , H). Given a third group K there is a product

AXR 'y (G, H) • AXR 'y (H, K) --->A X R ' y (G K) defined on basis elements as (/2, P ) w-~/2 • H I// where the latter amalgamated product is the set of equivalence classes under the relation (coh, p ) ~ (co, h p ) whenever co c / 2 , 7t 6 P and h E H . This product is associative, and provides in particular a ring structure

P Webb

830 X~

on A R Y(G, G). When 2, consists of all finite groups and y consists of the identity group, this ring is known as the double Burnside ring of G, see [3] or [43]. (We have chosen the opposite convention to many authors, who take 2, = 1 and y = all finite groups.) x,y With all this we associate a category CR whose objects are all finite groups and where HomcRx,y (H, G) -- Axn 'y (G, H). The composition of morphisms is the product we have defined, and because we have (apparently perversely!) reversed the order of G and H this composition is correct for applying mappings from the left. Finally, a globally-defined x,y Mackeyfunctor (with respect to 2" and Y) is an R-linear functor M ' C R ~ R-mod. The key to understanding why this definition is equivalent to the first one is to consider for each group homomorphism a : G ~ K the bisets K KG and GK K where in the first case K acts on K from the left by left multiplication and G acts on K from the right via a and fight multiplication, and in the second case the reverse happens. Given a functor M as just defined we define c~, = M(KKG) and or* = M(GKK). It is the case that these bisets satisfy relations which imply the axioms we have given. Conversely, every transitive biset is a composite of bisets of this special form, and the axioms are sufficient to imply that x,y a Mackey functor defined in the first way gives rise to an R-linear functor M "C R R-mod.

9. The computation of globally-defined Mackey functors using simple functors We describe the first of two applications of globally-defined Mackey functors together with further properties which seem to suggest their importance. The applications depend on a description of the simple globally-defined Mackey functors and we start with this. This material is developed in [66] and [10]. As with ordinary Mackey functors, we can speak of subfunctors of globally-defined Mackey functors, kernels and so forth. We thus have the notion of a simple functor, namely one which has no proper non-zero subfunctors. THEOREM 9.1 [10,66]. The simple globally-defined Mackey functors are in bijection with pairs (H, U) where H is a finite group and U is a simple R[Out H]-module (both taken up to isomorphism). The corresponding simple functor SH, U has the property that SH, u ( H ) ~U as R[OutH]-modules, and that if G is a group for which SH, u(G) ~ 0 then H is a section of G. Provided R is afield or a complete discrete valuation ring each simple functor SH, U has a projective cover PH,U, and these form a complete list of the indecomposable projective functo rs.

It is a feature of this classification that it is independent of the choice of 2' and y , although the particular structure of the simple functors changes as we vary ,1t"and y . In the special case when 2, = y = 1 an explicit description (stated below) of the values SH, u(G) was given in [66], as well as a less transparent description in the case when 2, is all finite groups and y -- 1. In this latter case it is shown that the dimension of the SI-I,u(G) is related to the stable decomposition of the classifying space B G (as will be explained later) and existing computations of these decompositions are really equivalent to computing this

A guide to Mackey functors

831

dimension. When 2" and 32 consist of all finite groups it appears to be rather difficult to describe the simple functors explicitly, in general, but we will return to this question in the last section of this article. THEOREM 9.2 [66]. When 2" = 3; = 1 the simple globally-defined Mackey functors are given explicitly by

SH, u (G) --

~

trLNC(L) (c~U)

ot:H~--L~G up to G-conjugacy

where H ranges over finite groups and U ranges over simple R[Out(H)]-modules. Here the direct sum is taken over G-orbits of isomorphisms ot from H to subgroups L of G, and c~U means U with the action transported to N c ( L ) / L via or. The symbol tr means the relative trace, i.e. multiplication by the sum of coset representatives of L in NG (L). This straightforward description of the simple functors when 2' = y -- 1 gives rise to a method of computing the values of globally-defined Mackey functors which has been applied in the case of group cohomology in [66] and [18]. We work with the p-torsion subgroup M(G) -- Hn(G, R)p for a fixed prime p. Although M can be defined with inflation operations or* when c~ is a surjective group homomorphism we choose to forget these and regard M as a globally-defined Mackey functor with 2" = y = 1. In the category of such functors we consider a 'composition series' of M, namely a filtration .9. C M i - 1 C M i C M i + l C . . . C

M

such that ~ Mi = O, U Mi = M and Mi+l/Mi is always a simple functor. It is shown that such a series exists, and the multiplicity of each simple functor as a factor is determined independently of the choice of the series. Furthermore, the fact t h a t - as an ordinary Mackey functor- cohomology is projective relative to p-subgroups implies that the only simple functors which arise as composition factors in the global situation are SH, U where H is a p-group; and furthermore the multiplicities as composition factors are determined by knowledge of the cohomology of p-groups. Putting all this together, we get a formula for the size of M(G) knowing the composition factor multiplicities and the values SH, u(G), and it is expressed in terms of the cohomology of the p-subgroups of G and conjugacy of p-elements. Given explicit information about the cohomology of the p-subgroups, the formula for the cohomology of G gives completely explicit numerical results. A remarkable feature of this approach is that we obtain a uniform formula which applies at once to all finite groups G with a given Sylow p-subgroup.

10. Stable decompositions of B G For surveys of the background material to this section see [3] and [43]. We denote by (B G+)p the p-completion of the suspension spectrum obtained from the classifying space

832

P. Webb

B G after first adjoining a disjoint base point to give a space B G+. The problem of decomposing (B G + ) pA stably as a wedge of indecomposable spectra is a fundamental question which - thanks to Carlsson's proof of the Segal conjecture - comes down to an analysis of the double Burnside ring A all'l Zp (G, G) defined in an earlier section. By studying the representations of this ring it was proved by Benson and Feshbach [4] and also by Martino and Priddy [44] that the indecomposable p-complete spectra which can appear as a summand of some ( B G + ) p (allowing G to vary over all finite groups) are parametrized by pairs (H, U) where H is a p-group and U is a simple Zp[Out(H)]-module. They also gave a method for determining the multiplicity with which each spectrum in the parametrization occurs as a summand of a given B G+. We describe in this section how a proof of their theorem may be given entirely within the context of globally-defined Mackey functors (assuming Carlsson's theorem). The complete description can be found in [66]. We work with globally-defined Mackey functors where we take ,V to be all finite groups and 32 to be the isomorphism class of the identity group, and we will see that there is an equivalence of categories between the full subcateA and the gory of the category of spectra whose objects are the summands of the (B G+)p, full subcategory of Mack~iY whose objects are the projective covers PH, U of the simple functors SH, U where H is a p-group. The advantage of this approach is that we work with the projective objects in a category- and such a situation is often felt to be well-understood rather than a more mysterious subcategory of the category of spectra. For each group K there is a representable functor F K = HomCx,y ( K , - ) which is a

-

Zp

projective object in Mack~iY by Yoneda's lemma. This decomposes as a sum of indecomposable projectives, and the particular form of the decomposition will be of use to us in what follows. 9

.

LEMMA 10 1 The representable functor F K decomposes as F K

,-~

pnH,U

~ --H,U where

nH, U = d i m S n , u ( K ) / dimEndzplOutH1U. Thus PH, U is only a summand o f F x if H is a section o f K, and PK,U does occur as a summand o f F K with multiplicity dim U~ dimEndzp[OutH1U.

The dimensions are taken over Z / p Z here. This is possible since the values of a simple functor over Zp are actually Z/pZ-vector spaces. PROOF 9 From the properties of a projective cover we have Hom(PH, u , Sj, v)

If we write F K

_ | End(Sn, v ) I0

if (H, U)"~ (J, V), otherwise.

pnH,U for some integers nH, U to be determined, we have ~[~ --H,U

d i m H o m ( F K, SH, U) -- nH, U " dimEnd(SH, u).


833

Now

Hom(FK, SH, U) ~" SH, u(K) by Yoneda's lemma, and also

End(Sn, u) ~ Endzp[Outn](U) from [66] or [ 10]. Rearranging these equations gives the claimed expression for nH, U. We obtain the remaining statements from Theorem 9.1. [3 Again by Yoneda's lemma, H o m ( F G F H) ~- Hom(H, G) -- A x~p ' Y ( G H) and composition of morphisms on the left corresponds to the product on the right. It is a consequence of Carlsson's theorem that when P is a p-group we have [ (B P+) p, (B G +) p ]

A Zp X ' y (G, P) where the left hand side denotes the homotopy classes of maps of spectra. We have reversed the expected order of G and P on the right hand side so that composition of maps written on the left corresponds to the product of bisets. We immediately have the first part of the next result. THEOREM 10.2. Let p be a prime. (i) The assignment (BP+)p --+ F P gives an equivalence of categories between the full subcategory of the category of spectra whose objects are the (BP+)p where P is a

p-group, and the full subcategory of Mackfp y whose objects are the representable functors F P. (ii) The equivalence in (i) extends to an equivalence between the full subcategory of the category of spectra whose objects are stable summands of the classifying spaces (Ba+)p as a ranges over finite groups, and the full subcategory of Mack~p y whose objects are the indecomposable projectives PH, U with H a p-group. PROOF. To prove the second part we first observe that the equivalence in part (i) can be extended to summands of the objects, since these correspond to idempotents in the endomorphisms tings of objects, and corresponding objects have isomorphic endomorphism rings. We see from Lemma 10.1 that the indecomposable summands of the F P with P a p-group are precisely the PH, U with H a p-group. Also it is well known that (B G+)p is stably a summand of (B P+)p where P is a Sylow p-subgroup of G, and so the summands A This completes the of all the (BG+)pA are the same as the summands of all the (B P+)p. proof. D We now deduce that the stable summands of the (BG+)p are parametrized the same way as the PH, U with H a p-group, and the multiplicities of these summands are given by 10.1. The properties given in 10.1 are exactly the properties of the summands of the (BG+)p given in [4] and [44]. By analyzing the structure of SH, u(G) we are also able to obtain their general formula for these multiplicities.

P Webb

834

11. Some naturally-occurring globally-defined Mackey functors We conclude by pointing out that some very important naturally-occurring Mackey functors are in fact simple in some cases and projective in another. It is remarkable that this highly technical theory encapsulates natural examples in this way. We state results only over Q but in fact they hold over any field of characteristic 0. THEOREM 1 1.1 (Bouc [10], Bouc and Th6venaz [14]). Let ,V and 3; be allfinite groups. (i) The Burnside ring Mackeyfunctor Q | B is the indecomposable projective P1,Q. (ii) The functor M(G) = ~ | Go(| which assigns the representation ring of| modules, tensored with Q, is the simple functor S1,Q. (iii) Let p be a prime. The kernel of the projective cover map P1,Q --+ S1,Q, regarded as

a functor only on p-groups, is the functor (~ @ D, where D(P) is the Dade group of endopermutation modules of the p-group P. This functor is simple: Q | D

SCp• The first statement in this theorem is straightforward. For each group G we have a representable functor F G and in case G = 1 we may see from the definitions that F 1 __ Q @2 B. We also know the decomposition of this functor as a direct sum of indecomposable projectives, as given in Lemma 10.1, and from this we see it is P1,Q. The second statement is less obvious and appears in [ 10]. We know from Artin's induction theorem that the natural map Q| B ---> Q | G0(QG) is surjective. It requires some further argument to show that the target is simple. Statement (iii) is not obvious at all. Dade's group is described in [59] and [14], and we will not discuss it here. By regarding a functor as defined only on p groups, we mean that we are considering the restriction of the functor to the full subcategory of Cff~ 'y'" whose objects are the p-groups, and this restriction is asserted to be simple in the category of functors on this subcategory. The kernel of the projective cover map P1,Q ~ S1,Q is not simple as a functor defined on all finite groups, although it is not a straightforward matter to determine its composition factors. We have the following: THEOREM 1 1.2 (Bouc [10]). Let X and y be all finite groups. The composition factors of the Burnside functor Q | B all have the form SH,Q for various groups H. Each such simple functor appears with multiplicity at most 1. Bouc also characterizes in [10] those groups H for which the simple functor St-I,| does appear as a composition factor of Q | B by means of a certain combinatorial condition (he calls such groups 'b-groups'). There is also information in [14] about the composition factors of k @2 B when k is a field of prime characteristic.

References [1] A. Adem and R.J. Milgram, Cohomology of Finite Groups, Grundlehren Math. Wiss., B. 309, Springer, Berlin (1994).


835

[2] A.-M. Aubert, Systkmes de Mackey, Preprint (1993). [3] D.J. Benson, Stably splitting BG, Bull. Amer. Math. Soc. 33 (1996), 189-198. [4] D.J. Benson and M. Feshbach, Stable splitting of classifying spaces offinite groups, Topology 31 (1992), 157-176. [5] R. Boltje, A canonical Brauer induction formula, Ast6risque 181-182 (1990), 31-59. [6] R. Boltje, Identities in representaton theory via chain complexes, J. Algebra 167 (1994), 417-447. [71 R. Boltje, A general theory of canonical induction formulae, J. Algebra 206 (1998), 293-343. [8] R. Boltje, Class group relations from Burnside ring idempotents, J. Number Theory 66 (1997), 291-305. [9] S. Bouc, R~solutions defoncteurs de Mackey, Proc. Symp. Pure Math. 63 (1998), 31-84. [10] S. Bouc, Foncteurs d'ensembles munis d'une double action, J. Algebra 183 (1996), 664-736. [11] S. Bouc, Construction de foncturs entre catdgories de G-ensembles, J. Algebra 183 (1996), 737-825. [12] S. Bouc, Green Functors and G-sets, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 1671, Springer, Berlin (1997). [13] S. Bouc, Non-additive exact functors and tensor induction for Mackey functors, Preprint (1997). [14] S. Bouc and J. Th6venaz, The group of endopermutation modules, Preprint (June 1998). [15] G.E. Bredon, Equivariant Cohomology Theories, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 34, Springer, Berlin (1967). [16] H. Caftan and S. Eilenberg, Homological Algebra, Princeton University Press (1956). [17] A. Chin, The cohomology rings offinite groups with semi-dihedral Sylow 2-subgroups, Bull. Austral. Math. Soc. 51 (1995), 421-432. [18] A. Chin, Some rings of invariants at the prime two, Intemat. J. Algebra Comput. [191 C.W. Curtis and I. Reiner, Methods of Representation Theory II, Wiley (1987). [20] T. tom Dieck, Transformation Groups and Representation Theory, Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 766, Springer, Berlin (1979). [21] T. tom Dieck, Transformation Groups, Walter de Gruyter, Berlin (1987). [22] R. Dipper and J. Du, Harish-Chandra vertices, J. Reine Angew. Math. 437 (1993), 101-130. [23] A.W.M. Dress, A characterization ofsolvable groups, Math. Z. 110 (1969), 213-217. [24] A.W.M. Dress, Notes on the theory of representations of finite groups, Duplicated notes, Bielefeld (1971). [25] A.W.M. Dress, Contributions to the theory of induced representations, Algebraic K-Theory II, H. Bass, ed., Lecture Notes in Math., Vol. 342, Springer, Berlin (1973), 183-240. [26] A.W.M. Dress, Modules with trivial source, modular monomial representations and a modular version of Brauer's induction theorem, Abh. Math. Sem. Univ. Hamburg 44 (1975), 101-109. [27] W.G. Dwyer, Sharp homology decompositions for classifying spaces of finite groups, Proc. Symp. Pure Math. 63 (1998), 197-220. [281 P. Gabriel and M. Zisman, Calculus of Fractions and Homotopy Theory, Ergeb. Math. Grenzgeb., B. 35, Springer, Berlin (1967). [29] D. Gluck, Idempotent formula for the Burnside algebra with applications to the p-subgroup simplicial complex, Illinois J. Math. 25 (1981), 63-67. [30] J.A. Green, Axiomatic representation theory for finite groups, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 1 (1971), 41-77. [31] J.P.C. Greenlees, Some remarks on projective Mackey functors, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 81 (1992), 17-38. [32] J.P.C. Greenlees and J.P. May, Some remarks on the structure ofMackey functors, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 115 (1992), 237-243. [33] I. Hambleton, L.R. Taylor and B. Williams, Induction theory, MSRI Report (1990). [34] I. Hambleton, L.R. Taylor and B. Williams, Detection theorems for K-theory and L-theory, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 63 (1990), 247-299. [35] K. Kato, A generalization of local class field theory using K-groups, J. Fac. Sci. Univ. Tokyo 27, 603-683. [36] T.-Y. Lam, Induction theorems for Grothendieck groups and Whitehead groups of finite groups, Ann. l~cole Norm. Sup. 1 (1968), 91-148. [37] L.G. Lewis, Jr., The theory of Green functors, Unpublished notes (1980). [38] L.G. Lewis, Jr., The category of Mackey functors for a compact Lie group, Proc. Symp. Pure Math. 63 (1998), 301-354. [39] L.G. Lewis, Jr., J.E May and J.E. McClure, Classifying G-spaces and the Segal conjecture, Current Trends in Algebraic Topology, R.M. Kane et al., eds, CMS Conference Proc., Vol. 2 (1982), 165-179. [40] H. Lindner, A remark on Mackey functors, Manuscripta Math. 18 (1976), 273-278. [41] E Luca, The algebra of Green and Mackey functors, PhD thesis, University of Alaska, Fairbanks (1996).

836

P. Webb

[42] E Luca, The defect of the completion ofa Greenfunctor, Proc. Syrup. Pure Math. 63 (1998), 369-382. [43] J. Martino, Classifying spaces and their maps, Homotopy Theory and its Applications, Adem, Milgram and Ravenal, eds, Contemp. Math., Vol. 188 (1995), 153-190. [44] J. Martino and S. Priddy, The complete stable splitting for the classifying space of a finite group, Topology 31 (1992), 143-156. [45] J. Martino and S. Priddy, Classification of B G for groups with dihedral or quaternion Sylow 2-subgroups, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 73 (1991), 13-21. [46] J.E May, Stable maps between classifying spaces, Conference on Algebraic Topology in honour of E Hilton, R. Piccinini and D. Sjerve, eds., Contemp. Math., Vol. 37, Amer. Math. Soc. (1985), 121-129. [471 N. Minami, Hecke algebras and cohomotopical Mackey functors, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 351 (1999), 4481-4513. [481 E Oda, On defect groups of the Mackey algebras for finite groups, Proc. Symp. Pure Math. 63 (1998), 453-460. [491 R. Oliver, Whitehead Groups of Finite Groups, LMS Lecture Notes, Vol. 132, Cambridge University Press (1988). [50] K.W. Roggenkamp and L.L. Scott, Hecke actions on Picard groups, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 26 (1982), 85100. [51] H. Sasaki, Green correspondence and transfer theorems of Wielandt type for G-functors, J. Algebra 79 (1982), 98-120. [52] P. Symonds, A splitting principle for group representations, Comment. Math. Helv. 66 (1991), 169-184. [53] P. Symonds, Functors for a block of a group algebra, J. Algebra 164 (1994), 576-585. [54] D. Tambara, Homological properties of the endomorphism ring of certain permutation modules, Osaka J. Math. 26 (1989), 807-828. [55] D. Tambara, On multiplicative transfer, Comm. Algebra 21 (1993), 1393-1420. [56] J. Th6venaz, Some remarks on G-functors and the Brauer morphism, J. Reine Angew. Math. 384 (1988), 24-56. [57] J. Th6venaz, A visit to the kingdom of the Mackey functors, Bayreuth. Math. Schr. 33 (1990), 215-241. [58] J. ThEvenaz, Defect theory for maximal ideals and simple functors, J. Algebra 140 (1991), 426-483. [591 J. Th6venaz, G-Algebras and Modular Representation Theory, Oxford University Press (1995). [60] J. Th6venaz and P.J. Webb, Simple Mackey Functors, Proc. of 2nd International Group Theory Conference, Bressanone (1989), Rend. Circ. Mat. Palermo Suppl. 23 (1990), 299-319. [611 J. Th6venaz and P.J. Webb, A Mackeyfunctor version of a conjecture ofAlperin, Ast6risque 181-182 (1990), 263-272. [62] J. Th6venaz and P.J. Webb, The structure ofMackey functors, Trans. Amer. Math. Soc. 347 (1995), 18651961. [63] P.J. Webb, A local method in group cohomology, Comment. Math. Helv. 62 (1987), 135-167. [64] P.J. Webb, Subgroup complexes, The Arcata Conference on Representations of Finite Groups, P. Fong, ed., AMS Proc. of Symposia in Pure Mathematics, Vol. 47 (1987). [65] P.J. Webb, A split exact sequence of Mackey functors, Comment. Math. Helv. 66 (1991 ), 34-69. [66] EJ. Webb, Two classifications of simple Mackey functors with applications to group cohomology and the decomposition of classifying spaces, J. Pure Appl. Algebra 88 (1993), 265-304. [67] A. Wiedemann, Elementary construction of the quiver of the Mackey algebra for groups with cyclic normal p-Sylow subgroup, J. Algebra 150 (1992), 296-307. [68] T. Yoshida, Idempotents of Burnside rings and Dress induction theorem, J. Algebra 80 (1983), 90-105. [69] T. Yoshida, On G-functors (II): Hecke operators and G-functors, J. Math. Soc. Japan 35 (1983), 179-190. [70] T. Yoshida, Idempotents and transfer theorems of Burnside rings, character rings and span rings, Algebraic and Topological Theories (to the memory of T. Miyata) (1985), 589-615.

Subject Index

A-bimodule of bounded bilinear functionals, 171 A-definable set, 279 A-group, 676 A-invariant family of partial types, 309 A-reflexive, 691 A, T-group, 685 A - Z-bimodule, 220 Aenv, 155, 158 a X ' y (G, H), 829 A~ 158 A+, 155 A(D), 156 acl (A), 279, 286 inda B, 283 ATM D, 97 A m , 193 ap(G), 770 (A, P)-group, 685 (A, p, r)-group, 685 as-regular monomial, 591 AW*-algebra, 254 Aut G, 689 Azg (R), 474 A-rood, 158 A-mod-A, 158 Abelian algebra, 555 Abelian category, 158 Abelian group, 669 Abelian regular, 408 Abelian regular ring, 401,402 Abelian structure, 306 Abelian superalgebra, 587 Abramsky, S., 36, 58, 64-66 absolute direct summand, 672 absolutely free s 85 absolutely hereditary radical, 376 abstract class of algebras, 547 abstract computing machine, 51 abstract datatype, 15 abstract DB, 105 abstract functorial calculus, 40 abstract homological algebra, 154

(BG+)~, 831 (F" G), 401 G/H, 741 [G/H],741 H\G/K, 741 [H\G/K],742 FB/A, 342 gH, 741 2qbl, 721 aExtn (X, Y), 209 (p, q)-Dress group, 761 | 155 N-algebra, 155 N-module, 157

8,

155

algebra of functions, 156 ~-algebra, 155 ~-module, 157 A-definable minimal normal non-Abelian subgroup, 287 A-definable subgroup, 287 2-BiCART, 17 2-BiCARTst, 17 2-CARTst, 9 1-projective, 827 2-Abelian, 641 2-Abelian filiform Lie algebra, 641 2-category, 9, 17 2-coboundaries, 513 2-cocycle, 471,513, 527, 582 2-generated core, 304 2-rank of a group, 304 bl1-free, 672 lq1-free group, 672 c~-congruence, 30, 32 or-conversion, 12 ot-indecomposable type-definable subset, 299 ,-automaton, 104 ,-autonomous category, 45, 52 ,-autonomous functor, 47 837

838 abstract model theory, 279 abstract monoid, 25 abstract normal form function, 30 abstract operator space, 230 abstract theory of computations, 132 abstract theory of functions, 10 abstract torsion theory, 481 ACC, 369, 387 ACC for S-ideals, 390 Ackermann function, 18 active database, 104, 105 active DB, 98, 105 acyclic, 815 acyclic poset, 763 adapted basis of a filiform Lie algebra, 527, 627 addition theorem, 709 additive category, 158 additive connective, 49 additivity formula, 154, 247 additivity principle, 386 adjoint associativity, 165 adjoint derivation, 583 adjoint functor, 132 adjunction, 133 admissible G-CW complexes, 817 admissible G-simplicial complexes, 817 admissible epimorphism, 166 admissible extension of X by Z, 179 admissible logical relation, 28 admissible morphism, 166 Ado-Iwasawa theorem, 601 Adyan, S., 560, 570 affine algebra, 555 affine algebraic variety, 512 affine map, 555 affine PI-ring, 386 AI, 48 Akemann, C.A., 177 Albrecht, U., 679, 688 Alev, J., 386 Alexander polynomial, 709 algebra in a theory, 93 algebra of O-terms, 96 algebra of a group, 362 algebra of calculus, 138 algebra of files, 82 algebra of formulas, 102 algebra of Hilbert-Schmidt operators, 253 algebra of nuclear operators, 190 algebra of queries, 83, 97, 122 algebra of relations, 81 algebra of replies, 81, 83 algebra of test functions, 202 algebra with equalities, 92

Subject index algebraic closure, 279 algebraic geometry, 279, 468, 709 algebraic group, 280 algebraic homology theory, 166 algebraic independence, 279 algebraic independence of automorphisms, 373 algebraic K-theory, 702, 809 algebraic K-theory of ZG, 823, 829 algebraic K-theory of group rings, 807 algebraic kernel, 375 algebraic Lie algebra, 518, 627 algebraic logic, 81, 83, 86, 93 algebraic model of databases, 81 algebraic number theory, 323, 807 algebraic spaces, 323 algebraic splitting, 222 algebraic theory, 14, 93, 94, 128 algebraically closed field, 279, 312 algebraically compact group, 673, 690, 693, 695 algebraically cyclic vector, 237 algebraization of @-logic, 88 algebraization of first-order logic, 93 algebras of analysis, 153, 221,249 algebras of formulas, 125 algebras with equalities, 119 algebras, amenable as von Neumann algebras, 187 Algol-like language, 7, 36, 43 Alimohamed, M., 56 Almkvist, G., 394, 395 almost completely decomposable, 679 almost completely decomposable group, 686 almost everywhere, 677 almost special group, 389 almost strongly minimal, 280 alternative algebra, 558, 568 alternative algebraic PI-algebra, 568 Amadio, R., 66 amalgamated product, 829 amalgamated subalgebra, 592 amenability, 228 amenable, 154 amenable algebra, 182, 184 amenable Banach algebra, 153 amenable compact group, 227 amenable group, 173, 185 amenable infinite group, 245 amenable radical Banach algebra, 187 Amitsur complex, 475, 815, 817, 818 Amitsur, S., 372, 564 analytic n-disc, 251 analytic disk, 154, 168, 174 analytically parametrized, 216 Andrr-Quillen homology, 323

Subject index annihilator bimodule, 224 annihilator class, 701 annihilator extension, 223 annotation of a proof tree, 13 AP, 324 applicative context, 35 applicative typed structure, 28 approximate diagonal, 185 approximately finite-dimensional C*-algebra, 186 approximation property, 154, 169, 190, 192, 227, 253 Arbib, M., 61, 62 Arens multiplication, 172 Arens-Michael algebra, 155, 183, 244 Aristov, O.Yu., 192, 245, 258 arithmetical module, 419 arithmetical ring, 432 Armendariz, E.E, 377 Armstrong, J.W., 688 Arnold duality, 691 Arnold theorem, 687 Arnold, D., 678, 687, 689-691,699 array, 15 Artin approximation property, 324 Artin approximation theory, 323 Artin induction theorem, 814, 834 Artin, E., 741,756 Artin, M., 324, 327, 332, 337, 472 Artin-Schreier extension, 298 Artinian ring, 451 Artinian semidistributive left serial ring, 419 ascending central series, 288, 618, 624 ascending chain condition, 369 Asperti, A., 53 associated graded algebra, 584 associativity coherence, 44 atomic, 154 atomic formula, 281 atomic type, 10 atomic von Neumann algebra, 170 attribute, 87 augmentation ideal, 798 augmented Koszul complex, 202, 250, 251 augmenting L 1(G)_module, 160 augmenting ideal, 159, 160 Auslander, M., 244, 463,469, 479 automatic continuity, 175 automorphism group, 686, 689 automorphism groups of operator algebras, 153 averaging principle, 229 axiom of choice, 31,677 axiom on pullbacks, 810 axiomatic definition of quantifiers, 87 axiomatic domain theory, 25

axiomatic rank, 560 axiomatizable class, 85 axioms of equality, 87 Azumaya algebra, 463, 465 Azumaya algebra split by an extension, 469 Azumaya, G., 463, 470 r-rule, 9, 12, 26, 29 fl(R), 477 fl 0 equations, 21 first order-, 21 second order-, 21 130-conversion, 30 fl 0-equality, 32 (G, H)-biset, 829 (R, C)-bimodule, 464 (R, C)-bimodule morphism, 464 B-group, 678 Bl-group, 678, 695 B2-group, 678 BG, 797, 808 BI(A,X), 176 B~ (A, M), 470 B i (G, X), 471

Bn(A,X),218 B(G), 362 /3(E), 156, 159 B(E, F), 156 BCI(R), 477 Br (n) (R), 477 Banl, 263 Ban, 157

(Ban), 157 Ban, 194 Ban, 194 b-group, 796, 834

bp(G),770 Bext (G, T), 678

Boole, 17, 22, 23 B-conjecture, 304 b.a.i., 155, 172, 184, 187 bad decomposition, 680 bad field, 280, 302 bad group, 280, 303 Bade, W.G., 192, 223 Baer group, 694 Baer radical, 372, 375 Baer-Kaplansky theorem, 687 Bahturin, Yu., 559, 566, 567, 602 Bainbridge, E.S., 41 Baker, K.A., 559 balanced, 695 Baldwin, J.T., 312

839

840 ball algebra, 251 Banach A-module, 157 Banach Z-algebra, 220 Banach algebra, 153 Banach algebra associated to a category, 263 Banach algebra of compact operators, 156 Banach algebra of continuous operators, 156 Banach algebra of nuclear operators, 156 Banach cohomology groups, 225 Banach function algebra, 249 Banach geometry, 245 Banach homology, 247 Banach open mapping theorem, 193 Banach space geometry, 185, 248 Banach space interpretation of LL, 54 Banach space of bounded operators, 156 Banach space of Haar integrable functions, 156 Banach structure, 154 Banach theorem, 221 Banach version of projectivity, 153 Banach-Alaoglu theorem, 161 Bancillhon, E, 113 bar-resolution, 196 Barbaumov, V.E., 372 Barr, M., 45, 46, 53 basic formula, 87 basic hypergeometric function, 709, 712, 721 basic information, 114 basic rank, 560, 606 basic subgroup, 675,686 basis for free Lie algebras, 589 Bass exact sequence graded version of-, 474 Bass-Quillen conjecture, 323 Baudisch, A., 291,300, 312 Baur, W., 292 Beaumont, R.A., 686, 687, 689, 691 Becker, J., 340 behaviour of programs, 54 Beidar, K.I., 375, 376, 378, 381,383 Beki~ lemma, 59 Bekker, I.Kh., 690 Bellantoni, 67 Beniaminov, E., 113, 128 Benoist, Y., 644 Benson, D., 763, 799, 832 Berger, U., 29 Berger-Schwichtenberg analysis, 29 Bergman, G., 361,363 Bergman-Isaacs theorem, 362, 366, 370, 380 Berman, I., 573 Berry order, 8 Beurling algebra, 192 Beyl, ER., 691,694

Subject index Bezout module, 402, 423, 449 BHK interpretation of intuitionistic logic, 13 bi-Cartesian closed, 16 bi-interpretable, 279 biadjoint, 66 Bican, L., 678, 679 biccc, 16 bidual algebra, 172 biflat Banach algebra, 191 bifunctoriality, 778 bijection, 84 bilinear maps, 48 bimodule, 157, 464 bimodule Torn functor, 213 bimodule morphism, 464 bimodule of separately ultraweakly continuous bilinear functionals, 187 bimodule of ultraweakly continuous bilinear functionals, 171 binary logical relation, 28 binary octahedral group, 486 binary sequent, 57 binding group, 279, 280, 310 binding group theorem, 310 biprojective Banach algebra, 189 biprojective Banach function algebra, 247 biregular ring, 367 Birkhoff theorem, 85, 547, 602 Birkhoff, G., 547, 549, 556 biserial ring, 419 biset, 780, 790, 830, 833 biset version of the Mackey formula, 791 bisimulation, 25, 67 bivariant functor, 775 Bj6rk, J.-E., 372 Blackwell-Kelly-Power theorem, 17 Blagoveshchenskaya, E.A., 679, 680 Blecher, D.P., 239 block of a Mackey functor, 821 block structure, 36 Block, W., 559 Bloom, S.L., 63 Bludov, V., 291 Blute, R., 40, 45, 48, 51 Boltje, R., 807 Bool, 93 Boolean algebra, 53, 87, 129 Boolean automaton, 129 Boolean product, 548 Borel subalgebra, 516, 645 Borel subgroup, 303 Borovik, A.V., 280, 303 Bott periodicity, 262

Subject index Bouc, S., 771,794, 796, 807, 834 bound type variable, 21 bound variable, 11 boundary operator, 220 bounded approximate identity, 154, 155, 172, 223 bounded approximation property, 246 bounded Engel, 290 bounded group, 671 bounded trace, 221 Bourbaki method of bilinear maps, 48 Bourbaki, N., 48 Bousfield-Kan spectral sequence, 819 Bowling, S., 179 braided category, 58 braided fragment of LL, 51 braided linear logic, 51 braided structure, 58 Brauer character, 758, 809 Brauer class group, 475, 477 Brauer construction, 758 Brauer group, 463, 468, 470 Brauer group functor, 468 Brauer group of a number field, 483 Brauer group of a scheme, 468 Brauer quotient, 758, 808 Brauer tree algebra, 821 Brauer, R., 485, 741,762 Brauer-Witt theorem, 485 Braun, 565 Bredon, G.E., 807 Brour, M., 758, 759 Brouwer-Heyting-Kolmogorov interpretation of intuitionistic logic, 13 Brown, K., 773 Bryant, R.M., 289, 291 Bunce, J.W., 186 Burnside biset-functor, 794 Burnside functor, 773 Burnside Mackey functor, 741,774 Burnside problem, 567 Burnside problem on periodic groups, 570 Burnside ring, 741,809, 822 Burnside ring Mackey functor, 814, 834 Burnside theorem, 744 Butler group of infinite rank, 678 Butler groups, 678 Butler, M.C., 678 C-monoid, 26 C(A), 234

cCn(A),259 CCn(A),259 CW-complex, 797 Cinda B, 283

841

C*-algebra, 54, 455,245 C ~ ( M ) , 156 C n (A), 256 C,(X, Z), 763 CA (B), 468 Cn(A), 257 n (A , X), 231 Ccb C n (A, Xw), 228 C(f2), 156 Co (~2), 155 C[0, 1]-module, 160 C(A), 257 CR(A), 260 C ~ , 159 Cb(X), 286 N

Cff 'y, 830 C2, Q, 793 C(A, X, r ) , 208 C(A), 256 CC(A),259 CR(A), 260 Ccbw (A, Xw), 231 c, 156, 249 co, 156 c0-sum of a family of complete matrix algebras, 190 coo, 226, 244 (co0) + , 247 Cb, 156, 244 % ( 0 , 160 C M, 156 Caug, 160 CCR-algebra, 245 CARTst, 9

co-end, 41 Caenepeel, S., 484 calculus, 87 calculus of constructions, 22 calculus of multivariant functors, 39 calculus with functional symbols, 86 call-by-value language, 54 CAML, 26 cancellable set of groups, 683 cancellation property, 473 cancellative monoid, 409 canonical base, 286 canonical projection, 167 canonical trace, 59 Cantor normal form, 285 Cantor space, 26 Capelli element, 565 Carboni, A., 24

842 cardinality, 279 Carlsson proof of the Segal conjecture, 832 Carlsson theorem, 832, 833 Carlsson, G., 797, 798 Cartan criterion for solvability, 624 Cartan matrix, 821 Cartan subalgebra, 233,645 Cartan, E., 617 Caftan, H., 166, 235, 807 Cartan-Eilenberg stable elements method, 811 Carter subgroup, 305 Cartesian category, 5 Cartesian closed category, 5, 6 Cartesian closed preorder, 22 Cartesian product of algebras, 85 Cartesian square, 776 Cartesian sum, 671 cascade connection, 104 categorial grammar, 51 categorical Banach space, 264 categorical coherence, 30 categorical combinator, 26 categorical computer science, 66 categorical data types, 14 categorical description of first-order logic, 128 categorical development of datatypes, 15 categorical logic, 5, 14, 67, 96 categorical logic and computer science, 67 categorical methods in computing, 5 categorical model of CLL, 52 categorical model of LL, 53 categorical modelling of programs, 13 categorical program semantics, 36 categorical proof theory, 29 categorical rewriting, 29 categorical semantics, 128 categorical semantics of LL, 52 categorical set of formulas, 121 categorical theory of logical relations, 29 categorical theory of sketches, 15 categoricity of a set of formulas, 121 categories of group representations, 46 categories of relations, 47 category Per(N), 8 category co-CPO_l_, 17 category co-CPO, 8 category of P-sets, 8 category of G-sets, 7, 810 category of M-sets, 7 category of R-modules, 808 category of T-algebras, 43, 142 category of active databases, 108 category of active DBs, 110 category of Banach spaces, 157

Subject index category of Banach spaces and contracting operators, 263 category of Boolean algebras, 93 category of Cartesian closed categories, 9 category of coherent spaces and linear maps, 53 category of complete seminormed spaces, 157 category of concrete DBs, 110 category of DBs, 100 category of deductive DBs, 125, 126 category of directed multi-graphs, 14 category of finite-dimensional vector spaces, 45 category of Frdchet spaces, 157 category of games, 36, 53 category of graded R-Azumaya algebras, 474 category of HAs, 135 category of Heyting algebras, 96 category of Kripke models, 7 category of left Z-sets, 28 category of linear spaces, 157 category of linear topological vector spaces, 46 category of locally finite HAs, 135, 138 category of logical relations, 56 category of Mackey functors, 774 category of models of computations, 134 category of partially additive monoids, 61 category of presheaves, 7 category of reflexive topological vector spaces, 40 category of relational algebras, 95, 129, 135 category of relational DBs, 135 category of sequences of k-terms, 32 category of sets, 7 category of sets and injective partial functions, 64 category of sets of elementary formulas, 138 category of spectra, 832 category of stochastic relations, 64 category of topological vector spaces, 157 category of typed lambda calculi, 14 category STAB, 8 category theory, 81 category with datatypes, 15 Cayley-Dickson ring, 568 cb-norm, 230 CCC,5 CCClanguage, 55 ccc with finite coproducts, 16 central continuous functional, 188 central element in M (n), 570 central idempotent, 405,426 central polynomial, 565 central simple algebra, 463 centre, 442 CEP, 557 chain complex of a simplicial object, 817

Subject index chain condition on centralizers, 286 chain conditions, 286 chain homotopic, 815 Chang, C.C., 312 change of ring results, 467 character group, 690 character map, 394 character series, 394 characteristic of a in G, 695 characteristic of an element of an Abelian torsionfree group of rank 1,677 characteristic sequence, 625 characteristic subgroup, 289 characteristically nilpotent, 626, 629 characteristically nilpotent Lie algebra, 511, 524, 636 characterization of amenable algebras, 236 characterization of contractible algebras, 236 Charles, B., 700 Chase radical, 701 Chase-Rosenberg exact sequence graded version of the-, 475 Cherlin conjecture, 280 Cherlin, G., 292 Chevalley cohomology, 513, 527, 627, 637 Chevalley decomposition, 632 Chevalley group, 741 Chevalley theorem, 391 Childs, L., 486 Christensen problem, 232 Christensen, E., 176, 178, 229-233, 246, 258 Christopher Strachey, 19, 25 Chu space, 58 Chuang, C.L., 371 Church numeral, 22, 39 Church typing, 26 Church's lambda calculus, 5 Church, A., 25 Church-Rosser, 29 Church-Rosser result, 29 Claborn, L., 481 Clark, D., 561 class group, 809 class of algebras, 547 classical Brauer group, 468 classical involution in a group, 304 classical Lie superalgebra, 582 classical linear group, 690 classical linear logic, 52 classical logic, 48 classical noncommutative invariant theory, 395 classical ring of quotients, 369, 424, 477 classical spectrum, 205 classical subgroup, 304

843

classically separable, 466 classification of identities, 562 classification of ordinary finite-dimensional Lie superalgebras, 586 classification of the models of a complete firstorder theory, 279 classification theory, 279 classifying space, 797, 830, 833 classifying space of a finite group, 741 clean ring, 448 Clifford algebra, 484 Clifford representation, 484 Clifford system, 482 CLL, 50, 52 clone, 551 clone of term operations, 551 closed p-group, 675 closed category, 5 closed set of identities, 85 closed submodule, 158 closed term, 11 closure operator, 87 CM-trivial group, 308 CM-trivial stable structure, 307 co-commutative bialgebra, 600 co-commutative comonoid, 52 co-commutative Hopf algebra, 46 co-product, 599 co-split map, 464 coadjoint representation, 626 coalgebra, 52 coalgebraic lattice, 557 coatom, 573 coboundary, 471 continuous -, 218 cochain, 217 Cockett, J.R.B., 48 cocycle, 471 continuous -, 218 cocyclic Banach space, 265 Codd algebra, 81 Codd relational algebra, 81, 83 coefficient system, 816 coend formula, 41 coevaluation map, 44 cofree coresolution, 195 cofree module, 171 cofree resolution, 195 cofunctor, 775 Cohen algebra, 342 Cohen theorem, 330 Cohen, M., 363, 369, 377, 378 coherence, 29

844 coherence diagram, 47 coherence equations, 44 coherence isomorphism, 44 coherence theorem, 41, 47, 48, 51 coherent space, 8 Cohn, P.M., 569 cohomological Mackey algebra, 826 cohomological Mackey functor, 826 cohomology group, 471 cohomology group of a topological algebra, 177 cohomology groups of Banach algebras, 153 cohomology of p-groups, 831 cohomology of groups, 829 cohomology of operator algebras, 228 cohomotopy groups, 797 colimit functor, 816, 819 colour p-Lie-superalgebra, 586 colour commutator, 583 colour Hopf algebra, 600 colour Jacobi identity, 582 colour Lie p-superalgebra, 585 colour Lie superalgebra, 582 column of rank one operators, 169 combinatorial pre-geometry, 279 combinatory algebra partial-, 8 combinatory logic, 24, 26 commutant, 221 commutant of A, 234 commutative algebra, 323 commutative amenable Banach algebra, 225 commutative Arens-Michael algebra, 183 commutative Banach A-bimodule, 225 commutative bimodule, 225 commutative coefficients, 225 commutative Dedekind ring, 401 commutative subspace lattice algebra, 156 commutative sum of two ordinals, 285 commutativity index, 640 commutator, 587 commutator condition, 289 commutator module, 466 commutator of two congruences, 555 commutator subgroup, 466 commutator theorems, 468 comonad, 10, 53, 82, 83, 131, 133 comonad in DB(C), 136 comonad in the category of databases, 137 comonoid, 52 compact .-autonomous category, 47 compact category, 45, 47, 59 compact closed category, 65 compact group, 173 compact real form, 723

Subject index compact structures in topology, 283 compactness theorem, 282 comparable maps of posets, 764 comparison theorem, 196, 205 compatible sum axiom, 62 complementable as a subalgebra, 245 complementable subspace, 157 complete ,-autonomous category, 46 complete n-type, 283 complete contraction, 230 complete direct product, 373 complete direct sum, 671 complete first-order theory, 279 complete Heyting algebra, 22 complete injective topological tensor product, 155 complete isometry, 230 complete projective topological tensor product, 155 complete set of invariants, 684, 686 complete standard subalgebra, 649 complete system of relations, 595 complete theory, 281 completely bounded A-bimodule, 231 completely bounded cochain, 231 completely bounded cohomology, 230 completely bounded linear operator, 230 completely bounded polylinear operator, 231 completely cyclic module, 402, 427 completely decomposable, 678 completely decomposable Abelian group, 682 completely decomposable group, 678 completely decomposable torsion-flee group, 686 completely finite-dimensional Bezout module, 423 completely invariant, 548 completely isometric, 230 completely prime, 406 completely prime ideal, 421 completely segregated algebra, 225,244 completeness of typed lambda calculus, 54 completeness theorem, 24, 53, 54 completeness with respect to provability, 55 completion of B(G), 798 complex, 157 complex numbers, 281 complex over X, 195 complex under X, 195 complexity class, 51 complexity theory, 67 composition lemma, 594, 595 composition method for Lie algebras, 589 composition of relations, 59 composition series, 330, 427 compositional dinatural semantics, 40

Subject index compositional semantics, 40 compression of a query algebra, 83 computability predicate, 28, 29 computable realization, 131 computation, 10 computation as oriented rewriting, 10 computational adequacy theorem, 35 computational monad, 67 computational problems, 82 computations in a DB, 128 computations over computations, 132 comultiplication, 189 concrete DB, 105 concrete operator space, 230 concurrency, 25, 50 concurrency theory, 7, 67 concurrent constraint programming, 53, 67 conditional expectation, 232 conductor ideal, 480 cone, 170 cone of an operator algebra, 234 congruence, 84, 548 congruence extension property, 557 congruence lattice, 553 congruence permutable variety, 553 congruence relation, 11 congruence-distributive, 553 congruence-modular, 553 conjugation, 774 conjugation functor, 742 conjugation homomorphism, 746 conjugation mapping, 807 Conlon induction theorem, 825 Conlon theorem, 824, 825 Conlon, S.B., 741,758 connected component, 288 connected component of an algebraic group, 288 connected formation, 305 connected subgroup, 288 connecting homomorphisms, 693 connecting operators, 194 Connes algebra, 237 Connes amenable algebra, 238 Connes amenable operator C*-algebra, 187 Connes injective, 188, 239 Connes injectivity, 174 Connes, A., 186, 188, 252, 255, 259, 263, 709 Connes-Tzygan exact sequence, 260, 261,266 constraint programming, 53, 67 construction of proofs, 48 constructions calculus of-, 22 constructive algebra, 131 constructive DB, 131

845

constructive logic, 13 constructive set-theory, 24 context, 11 context-free grammar, 51 continuous G-module, 46 continuous cohomology group, 218 continuous functions, 156 continuous homology, 220 continuous lifting, 228 continuous module, 447 continuous representation, 158 continuous simplicial cohomology, 256 continuous simplicial homology, 257 continuous trace, 256 contractible algebra, 182 contractible chain complex, 815 contracting operator, 263 contraction, 516 contraction of a Lie algebra law, 516 contraction structural rule, 49 contravariant morphism functor, 163 convergence behaviour, 35 convergent power series ring, 324 convolution product, 156 Cook, S.A., 67 copairing operator, 16 coproduct, 15, 62 coproduct type, 16 Coquand-Huet calculus of constructions, 22 coreduced Abelian groups, 685 coresolution, 195 corestriction, 814 coretraction, 171 Comer theorem, 688 Comer, A.L., 701 Comer, L.S., 684 correct map, 100 Corredor, L.J., 303 cosimplicial Banach space, 265 coslender group, 679 cotensor, 45, 49 cotorsion group, 674 cotorsion hull, 693 cotorsion theory, 694 cotorsion-free, 674 countable coproduct, 62 countable direct sums of torsion complete pgroups, 683 countably injective, 408 countably injective module, 402 covariant, 395 covariant morphism functor, 163 covering subgroup (w.r.t. a formation), 305

846 cpo, 7 crossed homomorphism, 153 crossed isomorphism of DBs, 116 crossed product, 470 crossed product algebra, 485 crossed product theorem, 471,475 CSL-algebra, 156, 178, 233 Cuntz, J., 263 Curien, P.-L., 26, 66 Curry typing, 26 Curry, H.B., 25, 26 Curry-Howard isomorphism, 5, 13, 51, 54 Curry-Howard viewpoint, 20, 37 Curry-Howard-style analysis, 49 currying, 34, 44 currying of a morphism, 6 Curtis, C., 192, 193, 223,761,763 cut-elimination, 29, 41, 51, 65 cut-elimination algorithm, 48 cut-elimination theorem, 40, 47, 54 cut-free form, 48 Cutler, D.O., 677, 687, 697 cutting down prime ideals, 383 CW complex, 817 cyclic Banach space, 265 cyclic category standard-, 264 cyclic chain complex, 259 cyclic cochain complex, 259 cyclic cohomology, 255 cyclic cohomology functor, 259 cyclic Fr6chet module, 159 cyclic group, 670 cyclic homology, 255 cyclic homology functor, 259 cyclic linear logic, 51 cyclic linear space, 263 cyclic module, 165, 166 cyclic modulo p, 758 cyclic simplicial cochain, 259 cyclic vector, 173 cyclotomic algebra, 485 cylinder algebra, 174 cylindric algebra, 92 cylindric Tarski algebra, 81, 87 (~ubri6, D., 17, 55 (~ech cochains, 216 D, 284 D-categorical set of formulas, 121 D-categoricity of a set of formulas, 121 DM(~), 285 Def~ ~ / ,, r t ' 742 Der g, 625

Subject index dbA, 243 dcl (A), 286 dg A, 242 D(A), 159

79p,q(G), 761 dG, 672 dgl A, 242 dgr A, 242 Dade functor, 796 Dade group, 796 Dade group of endopermutation k G-modules, 829 Dade group of endopermutation modules, 834 Dade, E., 471,808 Dales, H.G., 175, 192 data algebra, 82, 84, 97, 99, 120 data refinement, 29 data set, 84 data type, 82, 88, 96, 128 data-flow model of GoI, 66 database, 110 database equivalence, 114 database scheme, 129 datatype, 15 Day, A., 554 DB, 81 DB equivalence, 100, 114 DB with fuzzy information, 131 DB(C), 135 DBMS, 82 DCC, 387 de la Harpe, P., 188 de Meyer, F., 466, 470 de Morgan duality, 45, 52 decidability, 33 decomposable Lie algebra, 519, 523, 631 decomposition basis, 682 decomposition map, 821 decomposition matrix, 683, 821 Dedekind domain, 483 Dedekind ring, 401 deductive approach to DB's, 82 deductive database, 124 deductive point of view, 123 defect base, 814 defect set, 814 defect set of a Mackey functor, 814 deficiency subspace, 717 definable, 283 definable arrow, 23 definable closure, 286 definable functor, 21, 43 definable group, 280 definable object, 23, 55

Subject index definable principal congruences, 556 definable relative to H, 287 definable subgroup, 286 definable subset, 279, 281 defining relations, 122 definition-by-cases operator, 16, 22 deflation functor, 742, 790 deformation, 153, 226 deformation of a Lie algebra law, 513 deformation theory, 511 degeneracy morphism, 264 degenerate geometry, 309 degenerate group, 304~ degenerate pregeometry, 279 degenerate series, 726 degenerate type, 309 degeneration, 516 denotational equality, 35 denotational semantics, 8, 25, 39, 46, 66 denotational semantics for PCF, 33 dense image, 166 dense left ideals, 378 dense linear order, 281 dependent type theory, 22, 67 dependent types, 67 depth of a prime, 384 derivability in first-order logic, 121 derivability in HAs, 121 derivable sequent, 48 derivation, 153, 175,470 derivation algebra, 583 derived functor, 155,205, 816 derived functor of a given contravariant additive functor, 206 derived length, 289 derived series, 289, 587, 617, 624 derived series of congruences, 555 derived series of subgroups, 300 Derry, D., 683 descending central series, 289, 300, 617, 624 description of a state, 121 desingularization lemma, 350 Despic, M., 192 DF-space, 212 diadditive dinatural transformation, 57 diagonal ideal, 159 diagonal reduction, 402 diagrammatic reasoning, 14 Dicks, W., 390, 394, 395 difference field, 280 differentially closed field, 280, 308, 312 dihedral (co)homology, 267 dihedral Banach space, 267 dihedral category, 267

847

dihedral cohomology, 263 dimension theory, 279 dinatural fixed point combinator, 39 dinatural transformation, 37, 57 dinaturality, 37 Diop, R., 381 Dirac distribution, 64 direct product, 671 direct sum, 670 direct sum of valuated groups, 699 direct summand, 167, 670 directly finite ring, 448 directly indecomposable, 557 discrete primitive spectrum, 154, 190 discrete series, 715 diserial Artinian ring, 419, 428 diserial non-Artinian ring, 419 disjoint union, 16 disjunction, 16 disk-algebra, 156, 223 distance between two subspaces, 230 distinguished datatype, 12 distribution algebra on a compact Lie group, 154 distribution theory, 202 distributive p f-ring, 406 distributive category, 15 distributive module, 401, 419, 449 distributive ring, 401 distributive uniform domain, 407 distributively generated, 419 distributively generated module, 449 divergent, 34 dividing formula, 283 divisibility of types, 677 divisible Abelian group, 672 divisible by pn, 672 divisible hull, 672, 689 divisible part, 672 division ring, 279, 297, 441 Dixmier invariant, 626 Dixmier topology, 162 Dixmier, J., 637 Dixon, M.R., 690 doctrine, 96 domain equation, 46, 53, 66 domain of holomorphy, 215 domain theory, 8, 25, 37, 59, 66, 67 domain-theoretic model, 24 domain-theoretic model of LL, 53 dominant weight, 712 double Burnside ring, 741,796, 830, 832 double centralizer algebra, 159 double coset, 809

848

Subject index

DPC, 556 Drensky, V., 560 Dress-Amitsur complex, 819 Dress complex, 817 Dress induction theorem, 824 Dress subgroup, 741,761 Dress theorem, 753 Dress, A., 741,747, 752, 754, 761,762, 775,780, 807, 814, 817, 823, 825 Drinfel'd, V.G., 731 Drinfel'd-Jimbo method, 710 dual basis lemma, 169 dual Jacobi conditions, 635 dual module, 161 dual pair of Banach spaces, 190 dual product map, 156 dual product morphism, 191 dual slender group, 679 duality, 45 duality theory for locally compact Abelian groups, 702 duality theory for machines in categories, 41 dualizing functor, 45 dualizing object, 45, 46 Dugas, M., 692, 701 Duncan, J., 179 Dunford theory of spectral operators, 153 dynamic evaluation, 34 dynamical DB, 131 dynamics of cut-elimination, 54 dynamics of information flow, 65 (e)-colour Lie superalgebra, 582 (e)-commutator, 581 e-purity, 699 0-purity, 700 0-rule, 12 E(G), 687 b~-exchange property, 44 1 End G, 688 End(M), 419, 442 Ext (B, A), 692 Ext(X, Z), 180 &ale algebra, 335 6tale cohomology, 468, 478 6tale map, 323 6tale morphism of tings, 335 6tale neighbourhood, 336 l~sik, Z., 63 Eda, K., 701 Effros, E., 188, 232, 239, 246 Effros, G., 231 Eilenberg, S., 166, 235, 807 Eklof, P.C., 694

elementarily equivalent, 281 elementary p-group, 671 elementary divisor ring, 402 elementary matrix, 424 elementary particles, 709 elementary substructure, 281 elementary superstructure, 281 elementary theory, 124 elementary theory of models, 108 elementary transformation, 596 Elgot dagger, 62 Elgot iteration, 62 Elgot iterator, 63 Elgot-style iteration, 61 Elkik, R., 344 Elliott, G.A., 177 embedding of valuated groups, 698 embedding-projection pairs, 37 empty type, 12 end, 41 Endo, S., 469 endofunctor, 131 endomorphism, 419 endomorphism algebra, 786 endomorphism group, 685, 688 endomorphism ring, 402, 426, 687 endopermutation module, 808 Engel, F., 290 Engel element, 290 Engel identity, 290 Engel lemma, 620 Engel theorem, 620 enriched categorical structure, 15 enriched category theory, 31 enriched functor, 31 enrichment of DB structure, 83, 141 entry problem, 596 entwining resolution, 201 enveloping | 155 enveloping ~-algebra, 155 enveloping algebra, 158 enveloping associative algebra, 583 epimorphism, 166 equalities in Halmos algebras, 91 equality, 87 equality of proof trees, 21 equalizer, 23 equation in context, 11 equational theory of System .T', 43 equationally compact algebra, 556 equationally complete variety, 557 equivalence of concrete databases, 118 equivalence of databases, 113

Subject index equivalence of two DBs, 82 equivalence problem of databases, 81 equivalent deformations, 514 equivalent extension of algebras, 222 equivalent extensions of groups, 692 equivalent groups, 686 eqmvariant homeomorphism, 819 equivariant map, 7 Ershov invariant, 312 Ershov, Yu., 131,674 Eschmeier, J., 153, 217 essential generalized identity, 374 essential ideal, 364 essential left ideal, 369 essential version of the Maschke theorem, 381 essentially 6tale, 335 essentially dtale algebra, 335 essentially dtale morphism of rings, 335 essentially finitely presented, 335 essentially smooth morphism of rings, 335 Euler-Poincar6 characteristic, 741,764 Euler-Poincard characteristic of a poset, 764 evaluation, 38 evaluation map, 7, 44 evaluations in DBs, 139 Evans, M.J., 690 even element, 582 even type conjecture, 304 even type group, 303 everywhere split, 818 exact complex, 157 exact functor, 208, 465, 812 exact on the left, 207 exact sequence, 157, 674, 693 exactly solvable integrable system, 709 excellent Dedekind ring, 324 excellent local ring, 327 exchange property, 441 exchange ring, 402, 405,408, 426, 441,454 excision theorem, 262 execution formula, 54 existence theorem, 675 existential quantifier, 41, 87, 94 existentially closed difference field, 280, 312 existentially closed field, 308 exponential connective, 50 exponential type, 12 Ext exact sequence, 693 Ext group, 821 Ext-computing complex, 209 Ext-space, 155 extended centroid, 369 extension, 153, 692 extension of A by I, 221

849

extensions in operator theory, 153 exterior algebra, 584 exterior semisimple derivation, 518 external model, 24 extremal basic root, 647 F-acyclic, 208 F (G), 289 J-covering subgroup, 305 ~jr-covering subgroup, 305 .~--n, 525 .TT:,' Q, 793

FPg(R),473 FP(R), 472 FPg (R), 473 Fr, 157 face morphism, 264 factor, 156 factor algebra, 85 factorial, 334 Faddeev, L.D., 709 Faith, C., 361,369, 381 faithful database, 106 faithful distributive module, 401 faithful module, 170 faithful semidirect sum, 631 Farkas, D., 363, 370, 371 Favre, G., 639, 649 Fay, T.H., 701 feasible higher-order computation, 67 feasible state, 83, 99 feedback, 58 feedback circuit, 60 Feldman, C., 225 Feschbach, M., 799, 832 fibration, 67 fibred category, 24 fibred category models, 67 field extension, 463 field of finite Morley rank, 302 Files, S.T., 688 filiform, 624 filiform algebra, 511 filiform Lie algebra, 524, 525, 617, 626 filiform nilradical, 523 filter, 90, 121,328 filter of all cofinite subsets, 328 filtered inductive limit, 336 final T-coalgebra, 15 fine spectrum of a variety, 560 finite-dimensional irreducible representation of

Uq (g), 710 finite exchange property, 441

850

Subject index

finite generation, 389 finite generation of intersections theorem, 598 finite list object, 18 finite lists, 18 finite Morley rank, 280, 302 finite representation type property, 466 finite separability, 598 finite support, 88 finite Ulm type, 694 finite width, 157, 174 finitely based algebra, 559 finitely based subvariety, 559 finitely Butler groups, 678 finitely generated group, 670 finitely presented, 335 finiteness condition, 588, 607 first invariant of a direct sum of dorsion complete p-group, 683 first order fl r/equations, 21 first order calculus, 89 first order language, 556 first Prufer theorem, 674 first-order (O-logic, 86, 97 first-order logic, 81, 83 first-order theory, 279 Fisher, J., 369, 377, 387, 391 Fitting subgroup, 289 fixed element, 361 fixed point, 26 fixed points functor, 742 fixed points homomorphism, 746 fixed ring, 361 fixed ring theory, 369 fixed-point combinator, 26, 34 fixed-point identity, 62 flag, 618 flat, 409 flat algebra, 335 flat Banach module, 172 flat bidimension, 154 flat module, 166 flat morphism, 331 flat pointed natural numbers, 18 flat preresolution, 195,200 flowchart scheme, 62 Fock space, 54 Fomin duality, 691 Fomin, A.A., 684, 685,689, 691,695,696 forbidden value for dg, 246 forbidden values, 154 foreign type (to a family), 309 forgetful functor, 465 forking geometry, 307, 309 forking realization, 307

forking type, 283 formal deformation, 513 formal fiber, 327 formal Jacobi identity, 513 formal logics of parametricity, 43 formally smooth algebra, 341 Formanek central polynomial, 570 Formanek, E., 390, 391,394, 395,565 formation, 305 formulas-as-types, 5, 13 Fossum, R., 481 founding fathers of homological algebra, 166 Fr6chet A-module, 157 Fr6chet algebra, 155, 212 Fr6chet algebra of holomorphic functions, 156 Fr6chet algebra of infinitely smooth functions, 156 Fr6chet space, 193 Fraiss6's universal-homogeneous model, 312 Frattini subgroup, 305,770 free, b~l-, 672 free .-autonomous category, 57 free T'-ccc, 33 free | 159 free | 159 free C-monoid, 26 free G-graded associative algebra, 589 free G-graded nonassociative algebra, 589 free K-algebra over (base) X, 548 free p-algebra, 595 free Abelian group, 671 free algebra, 26, 85 free algebra in (0, 94, 122 free algebra of a variety, 602 free alternative algebras, 568 free Banach left A-module, 164 free Banach module, 159 free Cartesian closed category, 29 free category, 5, 55 free ccc, 9, 14, 32, 55 free ccc generated by a directed multigraph, 9 free colour Lie p-superalgebra, 591 free colour Lie superalgebra, 588 free compact closure, 66 free coresolution, 195 free Fr6chet module, 159 free functor, 55 free group, 671 free group, b~l-, 672 free group on two generators, 233 free group with two generators, 227 free Lie algebra, 588, 595 free Lie ring, 595 free Lie superalgebra, 586, 588 A

Subject index free Mal'cev algebra, 570 free metabelian colour Lie superalgebra, 592 free product, 123 free product of colour Lie p-superalgebras with amalgamated homogeneous subalgebra, 593 free product with amalgamated of colour Lie subalgebras, 592 free resolution, 195 free set of generators, 671 free simply typed lambda calculus, 29 free spectrum of a variety, 561 free term model of system U, 42 free type variable, 21 free valuated group, 699 free variable, 11 freely generated simply typed lambda calculus, 12 freely generated types, 7 freeness of subalgebras of free algebras theorem, 595 Freese, R., 554 freezing isomorphism, 165 Freyd adjoint functor theorem, 23 Freyd, P., 22-25, 68 Friedman, H., 54 Frobenius axiom, 809 Frobenius functor, 807 Frobelaius identity, 743, 747 Frobenius, G., 669, 753 Fuchs problem, 34, 87, 89, 688, 689, 691 Fuchs, L., 675,678, 683, 687, 696 fulfillment of a formula, 85 full abstraction, 66 full abstraction problem, 36 full completeness, 7, 51 full completeness for binary sequents, 57 full completeness for MLL + Mix, 56 full completeness problem, 36 full completeness theorem, 46, 55, 57 full faithful functor, 464 full type hierarchy, 7, 54, 56 fully abstract model, 35 fully abstract order-extensional model of PCF, 36 fully characteristic congruence, 85 fully complete model category, 55 fully faithful embedding, 54 fully faithful representation theorem, 57 fully integral, 364 fully invariant Abelian group, 701 fully invariant submodule, 419 fully transitive Abelian group, 701 fully transitive group, 701 function space, 6 functional abstraction, 10 functional analytic model of LL, 54

functional completeness, 9, 12, 26 functional completeness theorem, 9 functional dependency, 82 functional language, 12, 26 higher-order-, 12 functor category, 7 functor category model, 37 functorial interpretation, 56 functorial subgroup, 700 functorial type constructor, 15 fundamental covariant, 395 fundamental system of solutions, 310 fuzzy O-algebras, 96 fuzzy information, 131 fuzzy set, 95 G-CW complex, 817 G-Galois extension, 369 G-acyclic, 766 G-graded associative algebra, 581 G-graded ring, 471 G-graded set, 588, 589 G-graded tensor product, 585 G-graded vector space, 581 G-homogeneous basis, 585 G-poset, 765, 766 G-set, 7, 46, 741,810 G-simplicial complex, 817 G-space, 817 GCR C*-algebra, 186 Gin], 669 Gp, 671 Gx, 741 g(R), 473 gr U(L), 584 (e - G)-graded tensor product, 585 Graph, 14 Grbel, R., 672, 676, 694 Grdel incompleteness theorem, 19 Gabber, O., 472 Gabriel filter, 481 Gabriel topology, 378 Gabrielov, A.M., 340 Galois closure, 112 Galois cohomology, 470 Galois correspondence, 112 Galois correspondence theorem, 390 Galois extension, 382, 470 Galois extension of rings, 470 Galois group, 826 Galois theory, 112, 119, 361,463 Galois theory for a universal database, 113 Galois theory of DBs, 81

851

852

Subject index

Galois theory of extensions of commutative rings, 463 Galois theory of prime and semiprime rings, 364 Galois theory of semiprime rings, 368 Galois-Kummer extension, 483 game semantics, 54, 56, 65 games model of LL, 53 games semantics for programming languages, 36 gamma function, 722 Gardner, B.J., 700 Gauss decomposition, 711 Gauss, C.F., 669 GCH, 677, 688, 694 GCR-algebra, 245 Gel'fand spectrum, 156, 168 Gel'fand theorem, 205 Gel'fand theory, 249 Gel' fand topology, 156, 251 Gel'fand transform, 156 Gel'fand-Kirillov dimension, 386 Gel'fand-Tseflin basis, 710, 723,727 Gel' fand-Tseflin formulas, 710 Gel'fand-Tsetlin pattern, 724, 727 Gel' fand-Tsetlin type formula, 712 Gell-Mann-Okubo mass formulas, 709 general continuum hypothesis, 688 general Ntron desingularization, 323, 327, 346 general topology, 249 generalised p-height, 673 generalization rule, 86 generalized Clifford algebra, 484 generalized Clifford representation, 484 generalized Clifford system, 482 generalized cohomology theory, 798 generalized continuum hypothesis, 677 generalized crossed product, 470, 471,476 generalized evaluation, 38 generalized isomorphism of databases, 106 generalized polynomial identities, 374 generalized primary group, 681 generalized quaternion algebra, 407 generalized quaternion algebra over A, 426 generalized Yanking, 60 generator in a category, 7 generators of a group, 670 generic, 295 generic element, 293 generic formula, 294 generic type, 20, 280, 293 generically closed subset, 481 generically given group, 280 Gentzen cut-elimination theorem, 48 Gentzen intuitionistic sequent, 49 Gentzen natural deduction calculus, 48

Gentzen normalization algorithm, 13 Gentzen proof theory, 47, 51 Gentzen proof tree, 51 Gentzen sequent, 48 Gentzen sequent proof, 51 Gentzen structural rules, 49 geometric Brauer group, 472 geometrically essential module, 264 geometrically normal domain, 334 geometrically reduced, 327 geometrically reduced fibre, 327 geometrically regular, 327, 335 geometrically regular fibre, 327 geometry of a type, 309 geometry of interaction, 54 geometry of interaction construction, 65 germ of a definable function, 308 Ghahramani, E, 192, 255 Gilfeather, E, 178, 234 Girard execution formula, 63, 66 Girard geometry of interaction program, 64 Girard GoI program, 58 Girard phase semantics, 53 Girard proof-net, 57 Girard second-order lambda calculus, 21 Girard system 3r, 20 Girard, J.-Y., 20, 22, 24, 29, 37, 48, 50-52, 54, 65 Giry, M., 64 Givant, S., 561 Gleason topology, 174 Gleason, A., 216 Glenny identity, 569 global defined Mackey functors, 796 global dimension, 154, 242 global dimension theorem, 226, 244 global sections functor, 463 global Warfield invariant, 682 globally-defined Mackey functor, 827, 830 Gluck, D., 750, 751,773 GoI category, 65 GoI model of LL, 54 GoI program, 54 going down for prime ideals, 383 going up for prime ideals, 383 Goldie dimension, 370, 387, 388, 429 Goldie ring, 369 Goldie ring right annihilator, 431 Goldie theorem, 369 Goldie theory, 369 Goldman, O., 469, 479 Golod, E., 564 Golovin, Yu.O., 154, 174, 253 Goncharov, S., 131

Subject index good in its II 1 summand, 232 Goodearl, K.R., 702 Gordon-Power-Street coherence theorem, 48 Goursaud, J.M., 364, 368, 373, 377, 381 Goursaud, M., 379 GPI, 374 GPI with automorphisms, 375 gr-Azumaya algebra, 473 gr-field of fractions, 478 Griibe, P.J., 694 Gr6bner-Shirshov basis, 595 GrCnbaeck, N., 166, 192 graded K-theory, 473 graded R-Azumaya algebra, 474 graded Brauer group, 463 graded cancellation property, 473 graded Galois extension, 475 graded global dimension, 479 graded Krull domain, 476 graded ring of fractions, 479 graded structure sheaf, 479 graded version of the Jacobson radical, 473 graph of a classical subgroup, 304 graph rewriting, 51 graphical language of computation, 52 Grassmann algebra, 54, 584, 606 Grauert, H., 340 Green correspondence, 758, 821 Green functor, 741,773,778, 808, 809, 814, 822 Green module, 814 Green ring, 757, 814, 824 Green ring functor, 775 Green, J., 774, 807, 814 Greenberg, M., 332 Griffith, 694 Grinshpon, S.Ya., 688 Grosse, P., 691 Grothendieck category of graded R-modules, 481 Grothendieck construction, 819 Grothendieck group, 809, 829 Grothendieck identification, 204 Grothendieck isomorphism, 169 Grothendieck ring, 394 Grothendieck, A., 169, 212, 335, 341,472 group, 547 group, (A, P)-, 685 group, (A, P, z)-, 685 group, (T, m)-, 685 group algebra, 709 group algebra of Z, 244 group cohomology, 807, 818, 826, 831 group configuration, 280 group configuration theorem, 279, 308 group determined by its socle, 677

group graded ring, 465 group of p-fractions, 670 group of automorphisms, 86 group of characters, 809 group of extensions of A by B, 692 group of finite Morley rank, 302 group of homomorphisms, 690 group of invertible elements, 442 group of outer automorphisms, 795 group representation theory, 807 group ring, 463 group-theoretic amenability, 154 groups with one r-adic relation, 685 Gruenberg, K.W., 290 Grzeszczuk, P., 387 Grzeszczuk-Puczytowski theorem, 388 Guichardet, A., 218, 220 Gumerov, R.N., 254 Guralnick, R.M., 392 Gurevich, G.B., 645, 650 h p (a), 672 H-set-G, 790 H-unital Banach algebra, 261 H =G K, 742 H ~G K, 742 H1c(A, M), 470 Hg, 741 H i (G, X), 471 HAo, 90 HAo-algebra, 89 7-~7-~n(A, X), 218 7"LT-~n(A), 257 7-(7-(n(A, X), 220 7-r b (a, X), 231 n w (A,X),231 7-~7"~cb HP(G), 289

7-(Cn (A)7-~Cn(A), 259 ~1 (a, X), 177 7-~n (A), 234 h-pure projective, 681 hp(g), 673 Hom(A, B), 690 Haagerup, U., 186, 188, 192 Hacque, M., 378 Haghverdi, E., 64 Hahn-Banach extension theorem, 188 Hahn-Banach theorem, 193 Hall basis, 589 Hall, M., 589 Hall, P., 589 Halmos algebra, 81, 87, 96-98, 119, 125 Halmos, D.B., 130

853

854 Handelman, D., 368, 381 Hanna, A., 691,694 Hardin, T., 26 Harish-Chandra g-modules, 711 Harish-Chandra module, 724 Harish-Chandra theorem, 711 harmonic analysis, 173 Harnik, V., 55 Hartshorne, R., 480 Hasegawa, R., 42, 63 Hasse invariant, 483 Head q-purity, 700 Head, T.J., 696, 700 heart of a ring, 386 Hecke algebra, 826 height matrix, 681, 701 height of a prime, 384 height of an element of a Pi algebra, 567 Heisenberg algebra, 619 Heisenberg Lie superalgebra, 599 Heisenberg superalgebra, 608 Henkin model, 7, 27, 28, 56 Hensel lemma, 323 Henselian local ring, 323 Henselian ring, 323 Henselization, 336 Henselization of a local ring, 324 Herden, G., 692 hereditarily finitely based, 559 hereditary module, 402, 420 hereditary permutation, 28, 29 hereditary prime ring, 425 hereditary ring, 401 Hermitian ring, 402 heterogeneous algebra, 84 Heyting algebra, 22, 53, 87, 96 hiding, 67 higher-dimensional category theory, 51 higher-order functional language, 12 higher-order logic, 20 highest weight, 712 Higman, 564 Higman criterion, 759, 813 Higman lemma, 390 Higman theorem, 466 Hilbert module, 170 Hilbert proof theory, 48 Hilbert series, 389, 392, 603 Hilbert series of M(X), 592 Hilbert theorem, 90, 471 Hilbert-Samuel function, 331 Hill condition, 676 Hill, P., 676, 679, 691,697, 698, 700 Hirano, Y., 701

Subject index Hirsch-Plotkin radical, 289 history-free winning strategy, 56 Hochschild cohomology, 228, 235, 257 Hochschild cohomology module, 470 Hochschild homology, 257 Hochschild, G., 218, 224, 225, 235 Hochschild-Kamowitz complex, 218 hocolim, 819 Hodges, W., 312 Hofmann, M., 67 Holland, 312 holomorphic calculus, 153, 205, 214 holomorphic calculus theorem, 215 holomorphic on the fiber, 174 home sort, 285 homogeneous identity, 602 homogeneous mapping of degree g, 581 homogeneous torsion-free group, 678 homological algebra, 166, 463 homological bidimension, 243 homological dimension, 155, 253 homological invariant, 154 homological property, 192 homologically best, 166, 172 homologically best algebra, 154, 184 homologically best functor, 207 homologically good, 175 homologically trivial algebra, 180 homologically unital Banach algebra, 261 homology groups, 219 homology of groups, 829 homology of posets, 763 homology of proof nets, 51 homology theory of topological algebras, 153 homomorphism of .-automata, 104 homomorphism of algebras with varying semigroup, 126 homomorphism of databases, 110 homomorphism of Halmos algebras, 90, 99 homomorphism of locally finite HAs, 101 homomorphism of models, 99 homomorphism of the first kind, 104 homomorphism of the second kind, 105 homomorphism of valuated groups, 698 homomorphisms of many sorted algebra, 84 homomorphisms of the second kind, 135 homotopic morphisms of complexes, 196 homotopy classes of maps of spectra, 833 homotopy colimit, 819 Hopenwasser, D.A., 179 Hopf algebra, 46, 57, 710 Hopf algebra structure on U (L), 599 Hopf property, 607

Subject index Hopf-algebra, 40 Hopf-algebraic model, 51 Hrushovski amalgamation constructions, 308 Hrushovski, E., 279, 280, 296, 308, 311, 312 Hunter, R., 681,682, 699 Hyland, M., 24, 36, 56 hyperbolic plane, 484 hypercentral, 291 hypercentral group, 291 hyperfinite, 154, 239 hyperfinite type II1 factor, 232 hyperfinite van Neumann algebra, 174, 186, 230 hyperfiniteness, 188 hypergeometric function, 721 hyperimaginary element, 311 hypocontinuity, 158 hypoelementary group, 758 hypoelementary subgroup, 741,762 /0-ring, 442 Ind G, 746 IndGM, 780 Ind G Z, 742 Inf~G/H' 746

Inf~G/KN, 780 i.dhX, 241

IT(G),678 A'-injective, 812 icc, 287 ideal lattice, 430 idempotent filter, 378 idempotent radical, 700 identical relation, 602 identity, 549, 602 identity biset, 792 identity extension lemma, 42 II'tyakov, A., 568 imaginary sort, 285 immediate predecessor, 174 Implicit function theorem, 227, 323 lmpredicativity, 21, 22 lmpredicativity problem, 21 incidence algebra, 401 Incomparability of prime ideals, 383 indecomposability theorem, 312 indecomposable, 299 indecomposable CSL-algebra, 156, 174 indecomposable group, 670 indecomposable injective fight A-modules, 420 indecomposable module, 444 lndecomposable projective functor, 830 lndecomposable projective Mackey functor, 821 lndecomposable Young tableaux, 395

independence, 279 independence of automorphisms, 373 independent, 283 independent set in L(X), 596 independent set of element in a lattice, 388 indexed category, 24 indexed category model, 67 indicator, 701 indiscernible sequence, 283 indiscernible set, 283 induction, 774 induction functor, 465, 742 induction homomorphism, 746 Induction of G-sets, 811 induction of Mackey functors, 811 induction operation, 807 inductive co-purity, 700 inductive limit, 185 inessential expansion, 281 infinite p-height, 672 infinite commutant, 170 infinite-dimensional representations of real semisimple Lie algebras, 711 infinite factor, 170 infinite von Neumann algebra of type I, 170 infinitesimal complex, 227 infinitesimal deformation, 514 inflated Mackey functor, 780 inflation, 829 inflation functor, 742, 789 inflation homomorphism, 746 inflation operation, 831 informational equivalence of DBs, 113 Ingraham, E., 466 Ingraham, E, 470 inheritably finitely based, 559 initial T-algebra, 15, 23, 43 initial diagram, 17 initial state, 138 initial variety, 85 injection, 84 lnjective, 674 lnjective Banach module, 171 lnjective coresolution, 195, 200 lnjective derived functor, 208 lnjective homological dimension, 241 lnjective hull, 421,423, 428 lnjective Mackey functor, 807 mjective module, 166 mjective non-Banach modules, 171 mjective relative to A', 812 injective tensor product, 158, 247 injectively exact, 208 inner automorphism, 176, 374

855

856

Subject index

inner derivation, 176, 470, 583 inner type, 678 Inonu, 517 Inonu-Wigner contraction, 517 input-output, 104 instantiation polymorphic -, 21 integer r-adic number, 685 integrable infinitesimal deformation, 514 integral transform, 712 integral weight, 712 integrally closed, 406 Intensional semantics, 53 interaction net, 52 internal language, 14, 38 Internal language of a ccc, 12, 38 interpretation of a variety, 552 intertwining operator, 158, 714 intrinsic symmetries, 175 lntuitionistic logic, 7, 13, 48, 96 lntuitionistic proof, 30 lntuitionistic proof theory, 5 lntuitionistic propositional calculus second order-, 20 intuitionistic second order propositional calculus, 20 intuitionistic sequents, 49 lnvanant element, 27, 55, 56 lnvarlant ideal, 361 lnvarlant integral, 720 lnvarlant module, 402 invanant ring, 406 mvanant sheaf, 373 invarlant theory, 388 reverse limit, 548 invertible module, 469 involutive negation, 45 irreducible characters of a finite group, 463 Isaacs, I., 361,363 isometric isomorphism, 158 isomorphism, 84 isomorphism of databases, 106 isomorphism of models, 100 lsotype subgroup, 676 iteration, 58 iteration theory, 63 lterator, 17 Ivanov, A.V., 682, 683, 688, 700, 701 Ivanov, S., 570 IW-contraction, 517 Iwasawa decomposition, 711 J (A)-adic completion, 425 J(M), 419

Jp, 669 dip, 669 Jacobi criterion, 598 Jacobi identity, 513,587 Jacobi theta function, 722 Jacobi-Zariski sequence, 343 Jacobian matrix, 323 Jacobson radical, 176, 375,402, 419, 421,442, 599 Jacobson radical of U(L), 599 Jacobson, N., 636 Jagadeesan, R., 36 Jakovlev, N.V., 223 Jay, B., 47 Jevlakov, K., 568 Jimbo formulas, 725 Jimbo, M., 710, 731 Jimbo-Drinfel'd approach, 732 Johnson amenability, 154 Johnson amenable, 184, 236 Johnson theorem, 369, 370 Johnson, B.E., 153, 161, 178, 186, 225, 226, 228, 229, 233 Johnson-Kadison-Ringrose theorem, 232 join of operator algebras, 234 joint spectrum, 153 joint Taylor spectrum, 205 jointly continuous, 158 Jonhson, R.E, 369 Jonsson, B., 553,686 Jordan bloc, 625 Jordan decomposition, 632, 634 Jordan isomorphism, 377 Jordan PI-algebra, 569 Joyal, A., 58, 67 Joyal-Gordon-Power-Street techniques, 29 Joyal-Street coherence theorem, 48 Jung, A., 56 just-non-Cross variety, 567, 571 K-group, 303 K-theory, 473 KT-module, 681 K*-group, 303 K0(R), 454 Kn (ZG), 829 /C-categorical (co)homology, 266 /C-categorical Banach space, 263 /C-cohomology, 264 /C-homology, 264 /C-space, 263 /C~ Banach space, 264 x-categorical theory, 281 x-saturated, 283

Subject index

xcc, 287 Kp, 669 KS(E), 155, 156, 159 k-Abelian, 640 K-theory, 256 Kar, G.I., 709 KaY, V.G., 586 Kadison, L., 219 Kadison, R.V., 153, 161,177, 186, 229-231 Kakashkin, V.A., 680 Kamowitz, H., 153, 218, 225 Kaplansky test problems, 682, 684 Kaplansky, I., 243, 564, 675, 681,684 Karpilovsky, G., 763 Karyaev, A.M., 223 Kastler, D., 230, 259 Katis, E, 60 Kdim(AA), 432 Keef, P., 677, 697, 698 Kegel, O.H., 292 Keisler, J.H., 312 Kelly-Mac Lane coherence theory, 47 Kemer theorem, 560 Kemer, A., 560, 565 Kepka, T., 699 kernel equivalence, 84 kernel of a homomorphism, 84 Killing, 617 Killing-Caftan form, 648 Kishimoto, A., 246 Kitamura, I., 381 Kleiman, Yu., 561,571,572 Kleinfeld, 568 Kleisli category, 10, 52, 53 Kleisli, H., 134 Kleshchov, A.S., 249 Koethe radical, 375 Kolettis, G., 676 Kolotov, A.T., 392 Komarov, S.I., 699 Korjukin, A.N., 389 Kostrikin, A., 571 Koszul complex, 202, 215, 216, 251 Koszul resolution, 202 Koyama, T., 681 Kozhukhov, S.E, 678, 679, 685, 686, 690 Krasil'nikov, A., 568 Krasner, M.I., 113 Krauss, P.H., 235, 561 Kravchenko, A.A., 678, 681 Krichevets, A.N., 248, 250 Kripke logical relations, 7 Kripke models category of-, 7

857

Kripke relation, 56 Kronecker-Weber theorem, 483 Krull dimension, 386, 387, 409, 426, 476 Krull relations, 383 Krull-Schmidt theorem, 757, 789 Krull-Schmidt-Remak theorem, 61 Krylov, P.A., 688, 689, 691,701 Kukin theorem, 595 Kukin, G.P., 596 Kulikov decomposability criterion, 674 Kulikov, L.Ya., 674, 675, 681,693 Kummer extension, 298, 483 Kurke, H., 340 Kurmakaeva, E.Sh., 247 Kuro~, A.G., 61 Kuro~-style presentation, 64 Kurosh theorem on subgroups of free products, 561 Kurosh, A.G., 561,683, 684 Kurosh-Derry-Maltsev description, 696 Kushnir, M.I., 678, 684 Kuz'minov, V.I., 700 Z elementary K T-module, 681 Z-Calc, 14 Z-calculus, 10, 30 Z-stable, 283 Z-term, 30, 32 Z-theory, 33 E-term, 281 s 281 L ~ W , 86 L-module, 583 L-orthogonal, 694 LF(r), 691 L1 (G), 156 L 1(G)_module, 160 LP(X),591 Ln, 525, 626 Lin, 157 Lin, 193 /2-structure, 281 /2n, 512 lfHA o , 138 Lat A, 156 Lat(M), 401,442 /-homogeneous, 591 12,253 l~-direct sum, 235 lacunization, 245 Lady, E.L., 680 Lafont, Y., 52 Lam, T.-Y., 807 lambda abstraction, 12, 28

858 lambda calculus, 5, 10, 12, 14, 24, 33, 65 typed-, 5, 12 lambda calculus signature, 7 lambda calculus without product types, 15 lambda definability, 56 lambda definable, 56 lambda term, 10, 11, 14, 30 Lambek grammar, 51 Lambek, J., 5, 19, 26, 29, 47, 48, 51, 67 Lance, E.C., 233 Lane, D.L., 392 language of queries, 122 Lanski, C., 388 Larson, D.R., 179 Lascar inequality, 294, 297 Lascar rank, 284, 297 Latishev-Bjork question, 372 Latishev, V.N., 372 lattice, 387 lattice of subspaces, 156 lattice of varieties, 557 lattice of verbal congruences, 557 Latyshev, V., 566, 602 Log, J., 679 L'vov, 559 L~iuchli theorem, 29 L~iuchli, H., 55 Latichli semantics, 7, 56 Laurent series ring, 408, 427, 442 skew-, 427 Lausch, H., 696 Lawvere, E, 5, 24, 49, 64, 83, 87, 93, 552 leading part, 591 leading term, 591 least fixed point operator, 34 least fixed-point, 39 least nilpotent Lie algebra, 626 least-fixed-point combinator, 59 Lee, P.H., 371 Lefschetz invariant, 765 Lefschetz, S., 40, 45, 46 left Z-set, 28 left adjoint functor, 811 left adjoint of the forgetful functor, 465 left annihilator, 425 left bounded approximate identity, 165 left Engel, 290 left finite, 366 left generic, 293 left global homological dimension, 242 left Goldie ring, 369 left invariant ring, 420 left Krull dimension, 425 left locally finite, 366

Subject index left Martindale ring of quotients, 374 left Noetherian, 371 left nonsingular, 432 left normalized commutator condition, 289 left Shirshov finite, 366 left skew Laurent series ring, 408, 427 left skew power series ring, 408, 427 left stabilizer, 294 left-normed commutator, 609 left-symmetric algebra, 644 Leibnitz identity, 175 length, 673 Leptin, H., 675,689 Levi decomposition, 631 Levi subalgebra, 519, 631 Levi, E, 571 Levitzki locally-nilpotent radical, 375 Levitzki, J., 378, 564 Lewis, L.G., 786, 799 Lie algebra, 176 Lie algebra law, 511 Lie algebra of derivations, 625 Lie algebra of the automorphism group, 176 Lie ideal, 176 Lie theorem, 621 Lie type, 280 Liebert, W., 688, 689 lies over, 383 lies under, 383 lifting, 228 lifting lemma, 350 limit axiom, 61 limit functor, 816, 819 LIN, 53 Lincoln, R, 51 Lindel, H., 323 Lindenbaum-Tarski algebra, 89, 96 Lindner, H., 786, 808 linear concurrent constraint programming, 53 linear deformation, 515 linear L~iuchli semantics, 56 linear lambda term, 49 linear logic, 8, 24, 40, 44, 45, 47, 49, 51, 53, 58, 66, 67 linear logic proof, 50 linear topology, 45 linearly compact module, 428 linearly distributive category, 52 linearly integrable deformation, 515 Lipschitz algebra, 192 list, 15 list object finite-, 18

Subject index Lister, W.G., 637 LL, 48, 50, 53, 67 local database, 115 local exactness, 227 local flatness criterion, 335 local idempotent, 419 local isomorphism, 115 local module, 452 local orthogonal idempotents, 422 local property of a variety, 609 local ring of A at a, 454 local-global behaviour, 467 local-global procedure, 483 localizable ring, 404 localization, 203,463,467, 695 locally convex algebra, 155 locally exact, 227 locally finite, 550 locally finite Halmos algebra, 88 locally finite part of a Halmos algebra, 88 locally finite variety, 550 locally flat connection, 643 locally flat Lie group, 644 locally Hopf variety, 609 locally modular, 279 locally modular type, 307 locally nilpotent algebra, 599 locally nilpotent radical, 588 locally nilpotent subgroup, 289 locally Noetherian variety, 609 locally representable, 610 locally residually finite, 610 locally soluble variety, 609 locally-finite radical, 375 logic categorical-, 5 logic of queries, 144 logic of resources, 48 logic programming, 27, 48 logic with equalities, 87 logical calculus, 96 logical connective, 49 logical predicate, 28 logical programming, 132 logical relation, 27, 37 logical rules, 49 long/3r/normal form, 33 long exact homology sequence, 194 loop space, 797 Lorentz group, 732 Lorenz, M., 377, 383, 384, 386 Los theorem, 282 L6wenheim-Skolem theorem, 281 lower central series, 523, 587

859

lower central series of congruences, 555 lowest weight, 730 Luca, E, 802 Lusztig, G., 709 lying over diagram, 383 lying over of prime ideals, 383 Lykova, Z.A., 221,245, 254

lzR(G), 777, 820 lZR(G, 11),789 M-S-theorem, 484 M-group, 367, 378 M-group of automorphisms, 370, 381 M-minimal, 300 M-set, 7 M(G), 187 M(X), 592 M/X, 57 MLL, 57 MLL formula, 56 MackR(G), 774 MackR(G, J), 788 (M), 670 (M),, 669 m-adic topology, 333 re(G), 304 mod-A, 158 ~)~c-group, 286 MA, 694 Ma, Q.,42 Macintyre, A., 292 Mackey algebra, 741,777, 807, 820 Mackey axiom, 774, 828 Mackey decomposition formula, 809 Mackey formula, 743, 747 Mackey functor, 741,773, 774, 807, 808, 810 cohomological-, 826 Mackey functors for compact Lie groups, 786, 808 Mackey, G.W., 675, 681 Mac Lane coherence theorem, 58 Mac Lane pentagon, 44 Mac Lane, S., 166, 235 Mader, A., 679, 687, 692 Magnus, W., 589 main lemma of homological algebra, 194, 206 main resolvability lemma, 348 Makkai, M., 55 Mal'cev algebra, 570 Mal'cev class, 553 Mal'cev correspondence, 292 Mal'cev non-associative algebra, 560 Mal' cev operator, 19 Mal'cev product, 559, 571

860

Subject index

Mal'cev type characterization, 554 Mal'cev, A.I., 131,548, 552, 553, 559, 563, 683 Mal'cev-type characterization, 556 Malacaria, P., 36, 56 Malcev theorem, 631 Malliavin ideal, 185 Manes, E., 61, 62 Manin-Mumford conjecture, 280, 308 Manovcev, A.A., 700 many-sorted algebra, 84 many-sorted equivalence, 84 many-sorted set, 84 many-sorted symmetric group, 119 map of posets, 764 Martin-L6f, 29 Martin-L6f dependent type theory, 22 Martindale quotient ring, 374 Martindale ring of quotients, 368, 380 Martindale, W.S., 377 Martino, J., 799, 832 Martirosyan, V., 558 Marty, R., 700, 701 Maschke theorem, 381 Matlis, E., 441 matrix ideal, 451 matrix representability, 607 matrix-local ring, 423 Matsuda, T., 762 Matsumito theorem, 484 max(M), 419 maximal commutative C-subalgebra, 469 maximal compact subgroup, 711 maximal filter, 125, 127 maximal ideals space, 226 maximal left ring of quotients, 379 maximal order, 463 maximal submodule, 402 maximal torus of derivations, 625 maximally central algebra, 463 maximum condition on left annihilators, 407, 424, 431 maximum condition on right annihilators, 407, 424, 431 May, J.P., 688, 799 McClure, J.E., 799 McKenzie, R., 559 measure algebra, 187 median algebra, 554 Medvedev, Yu., 569 Megibben, Ch., 676, 681,682, 695, 696, 700, 701 Mehler-Fock transform, 722 Mekler, A.H., 694 Mel'nikov, S.S., 267 Merkurjev-Suslin condition, 483

Merkurjev-Suslin theorem, 484 metabelian colour Lie superalgebra, 592 metabelian Lie superalgebra, 587 metabelian variety, 603 metatheorem, 368 Metelli, C., 678 method of stable elements, 807 metrizable ~-algebra, 155 Michaelis, W., 610 Milne, J.S., 478 Milner rr-calculus, 67 Milner action calculus, 67 Milner, R., 35, 36 mlmmal algebraically compact group, 674 minimal divisible subgroup, 672 minimal normal non-Abelian subgroup, 287 minimal parabolic subgroup, 711 minimal projection, 170 mlmmal variety, 557 minimum condition on principal left ideals, 446 Mints, G., 47 Mishina, A.P., 679 Misyakov, V.M., 682, 701 Mitchell, J., 28, 29, 54, 66 MIX, 53 mixed Abelian group, 672 Miyashita, Y., 369 Miyata, T., 762 ML, 27 MLL + Mix, 56 M6bius function, 590, 751 M6bius function of a poset, 741 M6bius invariant, 766, 768 modal logic, 96 model, 281 model category, 23 model of a stable theory, 283 model of a theory, 281 model of untyped lambda calculus, 25 model theory, 81, 82, 97, 279, 280 model theory of modules, 312 model-theoretic approach to DB's, 82 model-theoretic stability, 280, 283 modeling of semantics, 82 modelling proofs, 13 models of r-calculus, 7 models of computation, 58 models of intuitionistic higher-order logic, 24 models of iteration, 58 modest sets, 24 modular lattice, 387 modular maximal ideal, 156 module extension, 175

Subject index module of distributions, 202 module of quotients, 404, 423 module over a G-graded algebra, 583 module over a Hopf algebra, 46 module-finite, 409 module-finite algebra, 452 modus ponens, 86 Mogami, I., 701 Moggi, E., 67 Molien theorem, 393 Molien theorem for relatively free algebras, 395 Molien-Weyl theorem, 394 monad, 82, 83, 131,133 monoid of endomaps, 7 monoidal category, 44, 58 monoidal comonad, 52 monomorphism, 166 monster model, 283 Montgomery equivalent, 384 Montgomery, S., 363, 365, 369, 370, 372, 373, 376-378, 383, 384, 386, 391 Moran, W., 250 Mordell-Lang conjecture, 280, 308 Morita context, 381,385 Morita duality, 428 Morita-equivalence, 166 Morita-equivalent, 385, 789 Morita-theorems, 466 Morley degree, 285 Morley rank, 280, 284, 302 Morley sequence, 284 Morley theorem, 281 Morosov, V.V., 617 morphism functor, 163, 165 morphism of complexes, 157 morphism of DBs, 100 morphism of Green functors, 778, 779 morphism of Mackey functors, 774 morphism of many sorted algebras, 84 morphism of passive databases, 100 morphism of theories, 95 morphism of topological A-modules, 157 morphism of the second kind, 135 morphism of the third kind, 139 Moskalenko, A.I., 694 motion group, 709 Muller, E., 686 multi-operator functional calculus, 214 multi-operator spectral theory, 153 multicategory, 51 multihomogeneous, 591 multihomogeneous identity, 562, 602 multilinear identity, 602 multiplication module, 401

861

multiplicative connective, 49 multiplicative linear logic, 56, 57 multiplicative semigroup of endomorphisms, 689 multiplicatively-convex ~-algebra, 155 multiplier algebra, 245 multisorted universal algebra, 6 Mumford, D., 472 Murley, C.E., 690 Murre, J., 472 Murskii, V., 559 mutual commutator, 587 mutually outer automorphisms, 374 Mutzbauer, O., 686 N-projective, 445

NG(H),741 NcA, 568 gt-covering group, 305 aft, 33 Af(E), 156, 159 A/n, 512 .Aft, 512 n.db A, 243 n Henkin model, 28 n-Engel, 290 n-amenable algebra, 243 n-ar-y logical relation, 28 n-ary term operation, 549 n-dimensional chain, 220 n-dimensional coboundaries, 218 n-dimensional cochain, 217 n-dimensional cocycle, 218 n-dimensional cohomology functor, 194 n-dimensional completely bounded cohomology group, 231 n-dirnensional cyclic cohomology group, 259 n-dimensional cyclic homology group, 259 n-dimensional homology functor, 194 n-disk algebra, 156 n-element, 289 n-integrally closed, 406 n-th Engel identity, 290 n-th projective derived functor, 206 n-triangular element, 244 n(G), 304 Nat, 21, 22 nf function, 30 N6ron, A., 346 N~st~sescu, C., 471 Nagarajan, K., 372 Nagata, 564 Nagata local ring, 327 Nagata-Hilbert theorem, 389, 390

862 Nakayama lemma, 344 Nation, J.B., 554 natural A-module, 160 natural deduction rules for strong sums, 16 natural homomorphism, 404, 423 natural numbers, 15 flat pointed-, 18 natural numbers object, 17 natural transformation, 37, 128 natural transformation for monoidal functors, 47 natural transformation of Mackey functors, 809 naturality conditions, 37 near isomorphic Abelian groups, 687 nearly isomorphic groups, 686 neatness, 699 negation rule, 52 negative root of a semisimple Lie algebra, 645 Nelis, P., 483 Neroslavskii, O.M., 387 nerve, 817, 818 nerve of a category, 817 Nesin, A., 280, 303 nest, 156 nest algebra, 156, 174, 178, 233 nested subrings, 340 Neumann, P., 572 nice subgroup, 676, 682 Nielsen, J.P., 233 Nielsen, M., 67 Nielsen-Schreier theorem, 561,572 nil-ideal, 428, 442 nilindex, 619, 620, 624 nilpotency class, 289, 523,587, 619 nilpotent p-map, 601 nilpotent algebra, 555 nilpotent Banach algebras, 254 nilpotent colour Lie superalgebra, 587 nilpotent Lie algebra, 619 nilpotent of class at most n, 555 nilpotent radical, 587 nilpotent standard subalgebra, 647 nilpotent subgroup, 289 nilpotent-by-finite, 280 nilpotenfly invariant, 432 nilradical, 516, 519, 619, 631 Noether theorem, 389 Noether, E., 389 Noether-Skolem theorem, 470 Noetherian, 607 Noetherian colour Lie superalgebra, 607 Noetherian ring, 371, 419 non-analycity of Gel'fand transforms, 245 non-commutative algebra, 468 non-commutative differential calculus, 709

Subject index non-commutative differential geometry, 709 non-commutative Galois theory, 361 non-commutative geometry, 709 non-commutative Molien-Weyl theorem, 394 non-degenerate part, 165 non-forking extension, 309 non-forking realization, 307 non-forking relation, 311 non-halting computations, 26 non-interference, 36 non-measurable cardinal, 679 non-normalized bar-resolution, 198 non-normalized bimodule bar-resolution, 199 non-normalized standard resolution, 198 non-normed topological algebra, 244 non-selfadjoint algebra, 174 non-splittable radical extension, 226 non-termination, 24, 34 non-trivial partial trace function, 363 non-trivial radical, 701 noncommutative cyclic linear logic, 40 noncommutative fragment of LL, 51 noncommutative invariant theory, 388 noncommutative Nagata-Hilbert theorem, 390 noncompact quantum algebra, 710 noncompact real form, 723 noncomplemented subspace, 193 nondeterminism, 25 nongenerated cocycle, 531 Nongxa, L.G., 678, 696 nonprincipal ultrafilter, 328 nonsingular ring, 369 left-, 381 nonsingularly prime ideal, 429 nonsingularly semiprime ideal, 429 norm closed *-subalgebra of/3(H), 162 normal, 188 normal 2-rank, 304 normal A-module, 162 normal n-dimensional cohomology group, 229 normal amenability, 187 normal cochain, 228 normal cohomology complex, 229 normal form, 26, 33, 82 normal form function, 30 normal form theorem, 9 normal functional, 162 normal Hilbert module, 170 normal homological bidimension, 243 normal operator, 162 normal part, 162 normal ring, 402, 445, 448 normal subgroup, 555

Subject index normalization, 29 normalization algorithm, 29 normalization of lambda terms, 48 normalization of proofs, 52 normalized bar-resolution, 197 normalized bimodule bar-resolution, 199 normalized chain complex of a simplicial object, 817 normalized commutator condition, 289 normalized standard resolution, 197 normalizer, 288, 741 normalizer condition, 291 nuclear, 154 nuclear C*-algebra, 186 nuclear in the sense of Grothendieck, 212 nuclear norm, 156 Nunke, R.J., 676, 697, 698, 700 S2-algebra, 84 Y2B/A, 342 Og-CPO, 7, 39, 54 Og-CPOL, 33, 39 og-CPO-enriched, 34 Og-CPO, 18, 25 Og-CPO• 8 og-CPO-enriched, 7 og-categorical supersimple theory, 312 og-categorical superstable theory, 312 og-divisible, 700 og-fiat, 700 og-injective, 700 og-order intuitionist type theory, 22 og-projective, 700 og-purity, 699 og-saturated 9Jtc-group, 290 o9acc 0, 287 o9dcc, 287 o) dcc 0, 287 o) Ext(B, A), 700 Og-CPO• 59 Ore (G), 742

OP(G),742 Op(H),758 o ( c n ) , 160 O(H), 156 OG-lattice, 757 OT(G), 678 osp(1, 2), 606 o-minimal field, 286 o-minimal ordered structure, 312 o-minimal structure, 312 O'Campbell, M.N., 684 O'Hearn, P., 36, 43 Oates, 559

863

object of computations, 131 object of finite lists, 18 object of queries, 135 object of replies, 135 observable behaviour, 35 observational equivalence, 35 observationally equivalent, 35 obstruction to lifting, 211 odd element, 582 odd type group, 303 Ogneva, O.S., 171,252 Ol'shanskii, A., 254, 280, 559, 560, 561,567, 571, 572 Oles, F.J., 36, 43 one-based group, 280 one-based model, 305 one-dimensional coboundaries, 176 one-dimensional cocycle, 175 one-dimensional cohomology, 155, 177 one-dimensional cohomology group, 177 one-dimensional Ext-spaces, 155 one-parameter group of automorphisms, 175 Ong, L., 36, 56 open formula, 89 open map, 166 open term, 11 operational semantics, 29, 35, 48, 51, 66 operational semantics for PCF, 33 operational semantics of )~-calculi, 29 operational semantics of typed lambda calculus, 10 operator C*-algebra, 162 operator algebra, 153 operator norm, 156 operator space, 230 opposite algebra, 155 optimal reduction, 54 order, 425 order complex, 818 order property, 283 order topology, 250 order-extensional model, 34 ordered structure, 312 ordinary Lie superalgebra, 582 Ore domain, 361,369 Ore, O., 561 oriented rewriting, 10 ort, 168 orthogonal algebra, 731 orthogonal group, 710 orthogonal idempotents, 443 orthogonal polynomials, 709 orthogonally finite ring, 444 Osterburg, J., 362, 369, 373, 377, 381,386, 387

864 outer derivation, 176 outer direct sum, 671 outer type, 678 overnilpotent radical, 376 rr-calculus, 7 models of-, 7 n'-perfect, 742 zr-perfect group, 742 zr-regular ring, 441 zr*-group, 305 ~0-stabilizer, 294 qg(Y, ~)-definable, 283 P-exchange property, 446 PS(R), 482 Pn, 526 q~W, 86 Pic(R), 473 Pic g (R), 473 Picg (R), 473 P-Cartesian category, 33 P-exponential, 32 79-functor, 32 P-product, 32 79-Yoneda functor, 32 P-category theory, 31 79-ccc functor, 32 P-isomorphism, 32 P-natural isomorphism, 32 T'-presheaf category, 32 79Set, 8 79Set C~ , 32 Pinj, 64 79-Yoneda lemma, 32 P-free-Q, 793 ,Y-projective, 812 Per(N), 8, 41

Pic(C), 469 p-Lie-colour-superalgebra, 585 p-Lie-superalgebra, 585 p-adic integers ring 669 p-adic numbers field 669 p-adic topology, 677 p-closure, 307 p-complete spectrum, 832 p-completion, 831 p-component, 671 p-endogeny, 307 p-group, 671 p-height, 672 p-hypoelementary group, 758 p-local Abelian group, 681 p-local valuated group, 699 p-perfect subgroup, 800, 823

Subject index

p-permutation module, 758, 789 p-primary, 671 p-rank, 669 p-reduced group, 695 p-socle, 669 p-special regular monomial, 594 p-valuation, 698 pl-element, 742 p/~ G, 673 p~OG, 673 p f-ring, 402, 405,450 ps-regular monomial, 591 ps-special monomial, 594 P(R), 472 Pg (R), 473 Pie(R), 473 Picg (R), 473 PiCg (R), 473 Puig (R), 473 Pext(B, A), 694 PAMon, 61 PAMon-category, 62 Pfn, 63 PBAB, 218 PTAB, 218 pac, 62, 64 pac-like trace, 66 Page, A., 377, 381 Palyutin, E., 561 Panangaden, P., 64 Par6-Schelter theorem, 365 parabolic subalgebra, 516, 644 parabolic subgroup, 711 paracompact spectrum, 168 paracompactness, 153 parallel computation, 52 parametric Per model, 43 parametric modelling of system .T', 41 parametric polymorphism, 19 parametric universal quantifier, 40 parametricity in polymorphism, 36 parametrized iteration, 18 parametrized trace, 59 parametrized trace operator, 60 Parrot, S.K., 178 partial n-type, 283 partial combinatory algebra, 8 partial equivalence relation, 8, 31 partial functions, 24 partial recursive function, 8 partial trace function, 363 partially additive category, 61, 62 partially additive monoid, 61

Subject index partially ordered Abelian group, 702 partially ordered set, 763 partially-defined functor, 60 partition, 61 partition-associativity axiom, 61 Pascaud, J.-L., 364, 368, 370, 371,373, 376, 377, 378, 379, 381 passive database, 96, 99 passive DB, 98 Passman, D., 363, 365, 377, 383, 384, 386, 566, 567, 602 Pastijn, E., 573 Paterson, A.L.T., 188 Patil, K., 570 Paulsen, V.I., 239 PBW-theorem for colour Lie superalgebras, 584 PCF, 33, 53, 56 PCF expression, 35 PCF program, 35 PCF term, 35 Pchelincev, S., 568 peak point, 167 Pedersen, G.K., 177 Pentus, M., 51 per, 8, 31, 32 per model, 8, 42 per morphism, 40 per-based model, 54 perfect, 742 perfect group, 742 periodic cyclic (co)homology, 263 Perkins, 559 permanent part of a DB, 96 permutation bimodule, 792 permutation lattice, 758 permutation module, 826, 827 permutation representation, 741 permutation sort, 286 permutation structural rule, 49 perturbation, 153, 226 Petri net, 50 Petrich, M., 573 Petrogradsky, V.M., 567, 602 Pfaffian function, 312 Pfister, G., 340 Philippov element, 570 Philippov, A., 568 Philippov, V., 560, 570 Phillips, J., 221 PI, 372 PI degree, 373 PI-algebra, 563, 567, 602 PI-ring, 365, 372, 386, 446 piecewise domain, 429

piecewise integral ideal, 429 Pierce ideal, 405, 426, 449 Pierce stalk, 405, 426, 449 Pierce, R.S., 483, 686, 687, 689, 691 Pigozzi, D., 559 Pillay, A., 308 Pitts, A., 15, 24, 43 Pixley, A., 554 Plancherel measure, 712, 722 Plotkin, G., 5, 23, 25, 28, 33, 36, 54, 56, 82 Plotkin-Abadi logic, 43 Poincar6 series, 392 Poincar6-Birkhoff-Witt theorem, 584 point module, 160 pointwise convergence, 156 Poizat, B., 280, 303, 311,312 Polak, L., 573 Polin, S.V., 554, 559 polyadic algebra, 83 polyadic Halmos algebra, 81, 87 polydisk algebra, 156, 250 polydomain, 203 polydomain algebra, 250 polylinear operator, 208 polylinear operator norm, 208 polymorphic identity, 38 polymorphic instantiation, 21 polymorphic lambda calculus, 20 polymorphic type expression, 37 polymorphism, 19 polynomial algebra, 26, 584 polynomial Cartesian closed category, 9 polynomial identity, 372, 601,606 polynormed module, 166 polynormed structure, 154 Pontryagin, L.S., 702 Pop, E, 233 Popa, S., 178, 179, 235 poset, 7, 763 posetal model, 53 positive root of a semisimple Lie algebra, 645 postliminal algebra, 245 potent ring, 442 Powell, 559 Prtifer domain, 402 Prtifer group, 672 Prtifer rank, 291 Prtifer theorems, 674 Prtifer, 673 Pratt, V., 53 pre-variety, 547 pre-variety generated by M, 548 preadmissible morphism, 166

865

866 precocyclic Banach space, 265 precosimplicial Banach space, 265 precyclic Banach space, 265 precyclic category standard-, 265 predual bimodule, 238 predual module, 161 predual product morphism, 188 pregeometry, degenerate, 279 Prelle, R., 694 prenormed space, 194 preradical, 700 preresolution, 195 presentation, 588 presentation of a variety, 552 presheaf category, 29 presheave, 216 presheaves category of-, 7 presimplicial Banach space, 265 presimplicial category standard-, 264 Priddy, S., 832 Priddy, S.B., 799 primal algebra, 561 primary group, 671 prime dimension, 372, 382 prime length, 384 prime Morita context, 385 prime radical, 420, 430 prime ring, 426, 431 prime spectrum, 382 primitive cyclic A-modules, 420 primitive element, 600 primitive idempotent, 421,754 primitive idempotents in B(G), 823 primitive recursion with parameters, 18 primitive recursive function, 18 primitive recursor, 18 primitive ring, 378 principal congruence, 556 principal degenerate series, 726 principal degenerate unitary series, 729 principal generic type, 295 principal ideal ring, 401 principal nonunitary series, 711 principal series, 713 principal trace form, 364 principal unitary series, 715,726 problem of equivalence, 119 problem of forbidden values, 246 problem of recognition, 121 Prochfizka, L., 684, 687, 694 product formula, 709

Subject index product map, 156 product morphism, 182 product of classes of algebras, 559 product of passive databases, 104 product of varieties, 611 product theorems, 467 program context, 35 programming language semantics, 5, 29 programming language theory, 10 programs as natural transformations, 36 programs as relation transformers, 43 projection elements in a clone, 551 projective, 674 projective A-bimodule, 167 projective Banach module, 166 projective cohomological Mackey functor, 827 projectwe cover, 821,830, 832 projective cover map, 834 projective derived functor, 208 projective hull, 421 projective Mackey functor, 807 projective relative to X', 812 projective relative to a finite G-set, 789 projective resolution, 195 projective scheme, 463 projective Schur algebra, 482 projective Schur subgroup, 482 projective tensor product, 155, 163 projective with respect to N, 445 projectively exact functor, 208 PROLOG, 48 proof net, 51, 58, 65 proof search, 48 proof search paradigm, 48 proof theory, 5, 27, 28, 40 intuitionistic-, 5 proof tree, 14 proper subgroup, 670 propositional calculus, 13 propositional logic connective, 17 pseudo-algebraically closed, 311 pseudofinite field, 282, 312 pseudofinite group, 282 pseudoidentity, 122 pseudoreflection, 392 pseudovariety, 122 Puczylowski, E., 377, 387 Pugach, L.I., 173, 251 pullback square, 776 pullback diagram of G-sets, 8 l0 pure HA, 113 pure hull, 669 pure relational algebra, 113

Subject index pure subgroup, 669, 673 pure submodule, 422 pure-correct group, 683 pure-exact sequence, 696 pure-free group, 685 pure-injective module, 422, 447 pure-projective module, 422 purely equivalent, 686 purity, 699 purity o9, 699 Putinar, M., 153, 217, 252

QD, 691 Qp, 669 Qmax (R), 379 Qn, 525 (~B(G), 749 (~p, 669 q-Serre relations, 723 q-analogue of the Gel'fand-Tsetlin basis, 710, 723 q-analogue of the orthogonal group, 710 q-analogue of the quantum harmonic oscillator, 709 q-deformation, 709 q-deformed algebra, 729 q-gamma function, 722 q-hypoelementary subgroup, 762 q-number, 710, 728 q-orthogonal polynomials, 709, 717 q-quantum mechanics, 709 q-spherical transform, 722 quantifier, 87 quantifier algebra, 126 quantifiers as adjoint functions, 24 quantization, 709 quantum algebra, 709, 713, 723 quantum field theory, 709 quantum groups, 709 quantum harmonic oscillator, 709 quantum Heisenberg group, 709 quantum hyperboloid, 709 quantum orthogonal group, 710 quantum plane, 709 quantum sphere, 709 quasi projections, 62 quasi-rtale morphism of tings, 335 quasi-continuous module, 447 quasi-cyclic Abelian p-group, 401,419 quasi-endomorphism, 689 quasi-endomorphism ring, 685 quasi-excellent local ring, 327 quasi-Frobenius algebra, 367 quasi-homomorphism, 685 quasi-identity, 573

quasl-lnjective, 700 quasHnjective module, 423, 447 quasHnvariant module, 402 quasHnvariant right Bezout ring, 408 quasHnvariant ring, 449 quasi-isomorphic, 686 quasi-isomorphism, 678 quasi-projective, 700 quasi-projective module, 445 quasi-regular element, 375 quasi-simple object, 464 quasi-simple subnormal subgroup, 304 quasi-smooth morphism of tings, 335 quasi-summand, 686 quaslcyclic, 670 quaslregular radical, 568 quasistrongly graded, 476 quaternion algebra, 401,484 quaternion skew field, 485 Quillen, D.G., 763,765,770 Quinn theorem, 365 Quinn, D., 365 quotient algebra of an amenable algebra, 185 quotient divisible, 684 quotienting, 89 R-S-bimodule, 464 R-S-bimodule morphism, 464 R-bimodule, 464 R-bimodule morphisms, 464 R-matrix, 709 R-mod, 808 R-Mod, 774 R-orthogonal, 694 R-radical, 700 R-semisimple, 700 R-torsion R-modules, 481 RM, 284 RM(rc), 285 R [OutG]-module, 828 RC~, Q, 793 R~7~ ' Q, 793 Rn, 525 ResGH, 746 ResGHM, 780 ResGHX, 742 Rel+, 63 Relx, 47, 59 7"4n, 512 rank L(X), 591 r(B), 419 rp(A), 669 Racine, M., 570

867

868 radical, 176, 618, 631,700 radical algebra, 221,376 radical Banach algebra, 254 radical extension, 221 radical weight, 255 Radulescu, F., 235 Raeburn, I., 221,226, 228, 230 Rangaswamy, K.M., 679, 682, 693, 694 rank, 279, 677 rank of a free algebra, 388 rank of a free colour Lie p-superalgebra, 592 rank of a free colour Lie superalgebra, 591 rank of a Lie algebra, 625 rank of a type, 56 rank of an element, 56 rational equivalence of varieties, 551 Razmyslov, Yu., 564, 565, 568, 571,572 Read, T.T., 251 real closed field, 312 real form, 713 real rank zero, 455 realizability topos, 24 realizable dinatural transformation, 40 realizable functor, 40 realization of a type, 283 recursion with parameters primitive -, 18 recursive domain, 25 recursive domain equations, 25 recursive types, 25 recursively enumerable subset, 26 reduced Abelian group, 672 reduced algebraically compact group, 690 reduced chain complex, 763 reduced database, 107 reduced Euler-Poincar6 characteristic, 764 reduced homology group, 763 reduced Lefschetz invariant, 766 reduced module, 189 reduced Richman type, 685 reduced ring, 325, 402, 429, 450 reduced set in L(X), 596 reduced simplicial cochain complex, 260 reduced symplicial chain complex, 260 reduction free normalization, 8, 15, 29 reductive group, 389 reductive Lie algebra, 631 refinement, 671 reflexive Abelian group, 691 reflexive algebra, 178 reflexive Azumaya algebra, 477 reflexive Brauer group, 477 reflexive graded Azumaya algebra, 479 reflexive object, 45

Subject index reflexive operator algebra, 156 regular direct sum, 671 regular element, 369, 424, 522 regular graded ring, 476 regular group, 307 regular in codimension n, 476 regular map, 327 regular module, 446 regular morphism, 335 regular representation of Uq(su 1,1 ), 717 regular ring, 381,402, 408, 441,446, 600 regular subgroup, 695 regular type, 307 regular vector, 522 regular word, 590 Reiner, I., 761,763 relational algebra, 81, 93, 94, 129 relational algebra in intuitionistic logic, 96 relational algebra of first-order calculus, 94 relational composition, 47 relational database, 97 relational DB, 81, 82, 97, 130 relational model of LL, 53 relational parametricity, 43 relational semantics of dataflow languages, 41 relative cochain, 219 relative cohomology, 219, 229 relative freeness, 389 relative homology, 166 relative projectivity, 807, 811 relative trace, 831 relative trace map, 758 relatively definable, 287 relatively free, 550 relatively free algebra, 392, 550, 602 Renault, G., 368, 381 replica complete, 548 reply to a query, 123 representable numerical total function, 18 representation, 142 representation of a G-graded algebra, 583 representation theorem, 54, 55 representation theorems for proofs, 54 representation theory, 158 representation theory of finite groups, 463 residual finiteness, 609 residually finite, 607 residually nilpotent, 587 residually nilpotent Lie superalgebra, 587 residually small variety, 556 residually small variety of semigroups, 573 residuated category, 47 resolution, 195

Subject index resolution of a Mackey functor, 807 resolvable, 347 resource allocation, 49 resource sensitivity, 50 restricted colour Lie superalgebra, 585 restricted enveloping algebra, 586 restricted Lie algebra, 586 restricted Lie superalgebra, 585 restricted PBW-theorem, 586 restricted representation, 586 restriction, 774 restriction functor, 742 restriction homomorphism, 746 restriction of G-sets, 811 restriction of Mackey functors, 811 restriction of scalars functor, 465 restriction operation, 807 retract, 167 retract of a free Banach A-module, 167 retraction, 166 reversed algebra, 155 rewriting rules, 34 rewriting theory of lambda calculi, 29 Reynolds parametricity, 42, 43 Reynolds, J., 23, 36, 37, 42, 43 Richardson, R.W., 517 Richman type, 685 Richman, F., 682, 699 Rickartian module, 402 Rieffel, M., 172 right P-exchange property, 446 right adjoint functor, 811 right alternative algebra, 558 right annihilator, 402, 419, 425 right b.a.i., 184 right Bezout ring, 406 right biserial ring, 419 right bounded approximate identity, 167 right denominator set, 404, 423 nght diserial ring, 419 right Engel, 290 right exact functor, 465,466 right generic, 293 right Hermitian ring, 402 nght identity, 184 right invariant ring, 420, 448 right Krull dimension, 425 right localizable ring, 404, 423 right nonsingular, 432 right quasi-invariant, 406 right quasi-invariant ring, 448 right ring of quotients, 404, 420, 423 right semiuniform ring, 420 right stabilizer, 294

869

right T-nilpotent, 446 ngid, 226 ngid algebra, 226 ngid Lie algebra, 655 rigid Lie algebra law, 517 ring algebraic over its centre, 402 ring integral over its centre, 402 nng language, 281 nng of r-adic numbers, 684 nng of algebraic integers, 401 nng of bounded index, 446 ring of index at most n, 446 ring of integers, 463 nng of quasi-endomorphisms, 689 nng of quotients, 379, 404, 405,424 ring of quotients, two-sided, 408 nng of universal integers, 684 nng of universal numbers, 684, 696 nng with the right P-exchange property, 446 Ringrose, J.R., 153, 161, 186, 228, 229, 231 Robinson, E., 24 Rochberg, R., 227 Rokhlina, V.S., 699, 701 Romanovsky, N., 572 root, 645 root of a semisimple Lie algebra, 645 Rosolini, P., 24 Rosso, M., 709 rotational spectra of nuclei, 709 Rotman, J., 682 Rotthaus, C., 335 Rowen approach, 374 Rowen, L., 374, 375 Ruan, Z.-J., 230, 239 Runde, V., 192 Z-internal partial type, 309 Z-pure-injective module, 422 ~r-additive set function, 64 o--algebra, 64 (H x G~ 790 S(A), 234 (r 1. . . . . rm)-space, 685 S-algebra, 390, 395 S-relative n-dimensional cohomology group, 219 S-relative cochain, 219 S(A), 283 S(R), 482

Sn(A),283 Sdn (X), 763 St~(G),771 Stp(G), 769 [SG], 741

870 SLq (2, C), 709, 717 SO0(3, 1), 732 SOq (n), 710 SU(2), 7O9 Sp 7-, 216 Spec A, 326 SU-rank, 311 sp.d A, 253 s-comparability, 448 s-identity, 569 s-regular word, 590 s-special monomial, 593 SG , 741 sp(G), 769 Sets, 24 Set, 17 Set z, 28 Stab, 8 Sabadini, N., 60 Sakai characterisation of von Neumann algebras, 162 9 Sakai, S., 177 Salce, L., 678, 694 Saletan, E., 517 Sanov, I., 571 Santharoubane, L., 649 SAP, 331 SAP function, 332 S~siada, E., 689 saturated, 283 saturated relation, 42 saturated structure, 283 satured formation, 305 Scedrov, A., 24, 68 Schrnfinkel, 25 Schatten-von Neumann duality, 161 Schelter integral, 364 scheme, 88 Scheunert, M., 582 Schoeman, M.J., 693, 695 Schofield, A.H., 391 Schreier formula, 597 Schultz, P., 688, 692 Schur algebra, 482, 485 Schur group conjecture, 485 Schur subgroup, 463, 482 Schur theorem, 394 Schwanzl, R., 763 Schwichtenberg, H., 29 Scott, D., 5, 24-26, 33, 46, 82, 134 Scott, P.J., 67 Scott-Strachey approach, 25 Sebel'din, A.M., 689, 691

Subject index

second invariant of a direct sum of forsion complete p-group, 683 second order 130 equations, 21 second order polymorphic lambda calculus, 20 second Prtifer theorem, 674 second-order logic, 43 section of a group, 827 Seely, R., 24, 48, 52 Segal conjecture, 741,797, 832 self-application, 26 self-injective algebra, 600, 821 self-injective ring, 368 self-normalizing nilpotent subgroup, 305 selfinjective tings of endomorphisms, 688 selfsmall, 690 selfsmall torsion group, 690 Selivanov, Yu.V., 154, 169, 183, 191, 192, 246249, 253, 255 semantics modeling problems, 82 semantics of local variable, 36 semantics of programming languages, 7, 23, 25 semantics of typed lambda calculus, 27 seml-invariant ring, 422 semi-T-nilpotent, 444 semidirect products, 587 semidistributive module, 419, 449 semidistributive ring, 419 semlgroup, 86 semlgroup of endomorphisms, 86 semihereditary module, 402, 420 semilattice, 408 semilocal ring, 450 semlperfect right Noetherian ring, 420 semlperfect ring, 419 semlprime ring, 361,420, 425, 442 semlprimitive ring, 442 semlregular ring, 402, 441 semlsimple Lie superalgebra, 588 sentence, 281 separability, 463 separability idempotent, 465 separability over a commutative ring, 465 separable p-group, 674 separable Abelian group, 682 separable algebra, 463 separable algebra over its centre, 463 separable functor, 463 separable torsion-free group, 679 separably closed field, 280, 308, 312 separately continuous, 158 sequence algebra, 249 sequences of types, 15 sequent, 48 sequent calculus, 47

Subject index sequent calculus proof, 48 sequential computation, 52 sequentiality, 66 serial Artinian ring, 419, 420 serial module, 419 serial non-Artinian ring, 419 serial right Noetherian ring, 401,420 serial ring, 420 serial semiprime ring, 420 Serre global sections theorem, 481 Serre quotient category, 463 Serre relations, 723 Serre subcategory, 481 set, 7 set of defining relations, 672 set of generators, 670 set theory, 24, 249 Shack, D., 235 sheaf theory, 216 sheaves category of-, 7 Sheinberg theorem, 254 Sheinberg, M.V., 186, 254 Shelah rank, 284 Shelah, S., 279, 672, 676, 677, 679, 694, 701 Shephard-Todd theorem, 391 Shestakov, I., 560, 568, 569 shift operator, 26 Shilov boundary, 168, 245 Shirshov finite, 366 Shirshov finiteness, 366, 370, 383 Shirshov finiteness theorem, 376 Shirshov theorem on heights, 567 Shirshov, A., 366, 567, 569, 589, 594, 595 short exact sequence, 157, 674 shuffle Hopf algebra, 58 Sieber, K., 28 sill algebra of 9, 630 sill algebra of first kind, 630 sill algebra of second kind, 630 similar active databases, 117 similar databases, 107 similar passive databases, 111, 117 similarity of active DBs, 114 similarity of models, 100 similarity of passive DBs, 100 similitude invariants, 625 simple Artinian ring, 452 simple cohomological Mackey functor, 827 simple globally-defined Mackey functor, 830 simple group of finite Morley rank, 302 simple group of Lie type, 280 simple Lie superalgebra, 586 simple Mackey functor, 807, 821

871

simple root, 645 simple root of a semisimple Lie algebra, 645 simple theory, 311 slmplicial G-set, 817 slmplicial n-chain, 257 slmplicial n-cochain, 256 slmplicial Banach space, 265 slmplicial category standard-, 264 slmplicial chain complex for A, 257 slmplicial cochain complex, 256 slmplicial cohomology, 256 slmplicial cohomology functor, 257 slmplicial cohomology group, 256 slmplicial complex, 817 slmplicial homology, 256, 257 slmplicial homology functor, 258 slmplicial Mackey functor, 817 slmplicial object in the category of G-sets, 817 slmplicial resolution, 198 slmplicially amenable, 258 simply presented group, 672, 682 simply typed lambda calculus, 10, 12, 22, 40 simulation, 51 Sinclair, A.M., 231 Sinclair, M., 229, 232, 233,246, 258 Sing(AA), 431 Singer, I.M., 176 singular extension of X by Z, 179 singular extension of algebras, 223 singular submodule, 423 sketches categorical theory of-, 15 skew field, 361 skew group ring, 368, 378 skew group tings method, 383, 386 skew Laurent series ring, 408, 427 skew power series ring, 408, 442 skew series ring, 408 skewfield, 463 Sklyarenko, E.G., 700 slender torsion free group, 679 Slin'ko, A., 569 Small commutators, 177 Small theory, 292 Small, L., 365, 386, 391 smash product of Hopf algebras, 486 smcc, 44, 47 Smith, R.R., 233, 234, 247 smooth algebra, 335 smooth manifold, 156 smooth morphism of tings, 335 Smyth, M.B., 25

872

Subject index

Smyth-Plotkin construction, 25 Snider, R., 363, 370, 371 socle, 700 Solomon, L., 745 Soloviev, S., 47 soluble algebra, 555 soluble group, 290 soluble Lie algebra, 618 soluble Lie superalgebra, 586 soluble of class at most n, 555 solvability length, 587 solvable colour Lie superalgebra, 587 solvable Lie algebra, 618 solvable maximal subalgebra, 645 solvable radical, 587 soundness theorem, 27, 28, 42, 53 soundness theorem for diagrammatic reasoning, 14 soundness theorem for logical relations, 56 source basic information, 124 source of a Mackey functor, 821 space of bounded traces, 221 space of continuous functions vanishing at ~ , 156 space of proofs, 57 spatial cohomology group, 237 spatial injective homological dimension, 252 spatial projective homological dimension, 252 spatial weak homological dimension, 252 spatially flat, 173, 174 spatially injective, 174 spatially projective, 169, 174 Spec R, 382 special functions, 709 special Lie algebra, 606 special regular monomial, 593 special superalgebra, 601 special variety of Jordan algebras, 569 special variety of Lie algebra, 568, 606 specification, 13 spectral sequence, 819 spectral theory, 153 spectrum, 156, 226, 382 spectrum of a Fr6chet module, 217 spectrum of a variety, 560 spherical transform, 722 Spivakovsky, M., 335 split epimorphism, 812 split extension of X by Z, 179 split extension of algebras, 222 split map, 464 split monomorphism, 812 splitting extension for an Azumaya algebra, 469 splitting homomorphism, 222 splitting operator, 223 splitting radical, 701

splitting ring, 469 square-zero element, 406 stability theorem, 473 stability theory, 279 stabilizer, 294, 741 stable, 226, 283 stable G-homogeneous set, 595 stable algebra, 226 stable cohomotopy groups, 797 stable decomposition, 830 stable decomposition of B G, 831 stable decomposition of classifying spaces, 808 stable division ring, 295 stable elements formula of Caftan and Eilenberg, 816 stable endomorphisms of BG+, 799 stable homotopy theory, 741 stable map, 8 stable map between CW-complexes, 797 stable module, 211 stable morphism, 227 stable property, 228 stable range cx~,447 stable range 1,447, 453 stable range at most n, 447 stable splitting, 741,797 stable splittings of classifying spaces, 799 stable structure, 279 stable summand, 833 stable under small perturbations, 226 standard Ext-computing complex, 209 standard Tor-computing complex, 212 standard algebra, 646 standard cofree resolution, 198 standard cohomology complex, 218 standard cyclic category, 264 standard element with respect to a presentation, 344 standard homological complex, 220 standard identity, 564 standard injective resolution, 198 standard Lie bracket, 176 standard model of PCF, 33 standard nilpotent subalgebra, 647 standard normal cohomology complex, 229 standard polynomial, 389 standard precyclic category, 265 standard presimplicial category, 264 standard representation of free algebras, 550 standard resolution, 196 standard simplicial category, 264 standard subalgebra, 645 Stanton, R.O., 682, 699

Subject index star functor, 164, 193 star module, 170 state description, 124 state of a database, 97, 127 statistical physics, 709 Statman, R., 26, 28, 29, 56 Stein manifold, 156, 217, 252 Steinberg character, 769 Steinberg invariant, 769, 771 Steinberg invariants of the symmetric groups, 773 Steinberg module, 741 Steinberg symbol, 484 Stickelberger, 669 stochastic relation, 64 Stone theorem, 573 Strachey parametricity, 43 Strachey, C., 36, 42 strange series, 715, 726, 729 strange series of representations, 712 stratification map, 86 stratified formula, 293 Street, R., 58 strict closed monoidal functor, 47 strict continuity, 158 strict functor, 6 strict homological theory of Banach algebras, 247 strict monoidal functor, 60 strict structure, 6, 16 strictly monotone mapping of lattices, 387 strictly projective module, 166 strictly standard element with respect to a presentation, 344 string-pulling argument, 60 strong approximation property, 328 strong Artin approximation property, 331 strong closed monoidal functor, 47 strong data types, 43 strong datatype, 19 strong Mal'cev class, 553 strong Mal' cev condition, 553 strong monad, 15 strong monoidal functor, 60 strong normalization theorem, 10 strong semilattice, 408 strong symmetric monoidal functor, 47 strong Wedderburn decomposition, 223 strongly re-regular ring, 441 strongly amenable C*-algebra, 186 strongly graded ring, 470, 471 strongly indecomposable, 685, 686 strongly minimal set, 279, 312 strongly minimal structure, 279 strongly-graded, 471 structural rules, 49

structure for a language, 281 structured monoidal category, 51 sub-adjacent, 644 subalgebra, 85 subdirect product, 451,548 subdirectly indecomposable, 386 subfunctor of the identity, 700 subfunctor of the identity functor, 700 subprobability measure, 64 subpurity, 700 substitution of constants, 9 sum, 41 sum of subgroups, 670 summable family, 61 summable family of functions, 64 SundstrOm, T., 386 super-associative law, 551 superfluous element, 286 superfluous sort, 285 superfluous submodule, 423 supersimple division ring, 311 supersimple field, 311 supersimple group, 311 supersimple theory, 311 superstable, 283 superstable field, 280 superstable group, 280 superstable simple group, 297 superstable structure, 279 supplementary degenerate series, 729 supplementary series, 715,726 support, 88 support space, 389 supra-amenable algebra, 182 surjection, 84 suspension, 797 suspension of an operator algebra, 234 suspension spectrum, 831 Swan conjecture, 323 Swan, R.G., 323 Sylow p-group, 466 Sylow p-subgroup, 807, 814 Sylow theorems, 305 Sylow theory, 292 symmetric algebra, 345, 584 symmetric function, 394 symmetric Martindale ring of quotients, 368 symmetric monoidal category, 44, 49, 58 symmetric monoidal closed category, 44, 52 symmetric monoidal functor, 47, 52 Symonds, E, 807 symplectic pairing, 484 syntactical copy, 123

873

874

Subject index

syntax of typed lambda calculus, 28 syntax-free fully abstract model of PCF, 53 synthetic domain theory, 25 system .T', 22, 43 system of matrix units, 451 O-logic, 86 O-logic with equalities, 92 (A, T)-type, 685 T-algebra, 23, 142 T-ideal, 389, 563 T0-space, 403 (T, m)-group, 685 Tn, 526 TorA(X, Y), 213 "TVs 46 Th(gY0,281 r(R), 677

tp(m/A), 282 TVS, 157 TVS, 194 t-product, 677 tG, 669 tor-idempotent, 697 T-monomial, 364 table of a relation, 97 table of marks, 745, 747 Tait, W., 29 Tambour, T., 390, 395 tame C*-algebra, 186 tame group, 303 Tarski algebra, 81 Tarski semantics, 53 Tate cohomology, 809 Tate cohomology of groups, 829 Taylor localization, 203 Taylor multi-operator spectral theory, 204, 214 Taylor spectrum, 202, 204, 215, 217 Taylor theorem on holomorphic calculus, 205 Taylor theory, 214 Taylor theory of multioperator holomorphic calculus, 161 Taylor, J.L., 153, 183,204, 212, 216, 226, 228,230, 251 Tennent, R.D., 36, 43 tensor algebra, 190, 388 tensor algebra generated by a duality, 190 tensor multiplication, 165 tensor multiplication by cyclic modules, 165 tensor product, 49, 163,585,695 tensor product functor, 164 tensor product of complexes, 199 tensor product of spaces, 164 tensored .-category, 60

tensored .-category of Hilbert spaces, 60 Teranishi, Y., 395 term, 281 term of type A, 10 term operation, 549 terminal object, 7 terms as natural transformations, 36 terms as relation transformers, 43 Th6venaz, J., 762, 770, 773, 777, 781,783, 785, 788, 789, 796, 834 theory, 281 theory of Abelian groups, 669 theory of computation, 82 theory of finite Lascar rank, 307 theory of finite models, 82 theory of fixed rings, 361 theory of formations, 305 theory of maximal orders, 463 theory of PI-rings, 366 theory of separable algebras, 463 theory of varieties of groups, 570 theory of vertices and sources, 821 theta function, 712 third axiom of countability, 682 third axiom of countability with respect to nice subgroups, 676 Thomas, M.P., 176 Thompson, J.G., 483 Tiuryn, J., 56 tmc, 58 tom Dieck, T., 763, 786 Tominaga, H., 369 Tomiyama, J., 177 topological Abelian group, 702 topological algebra, 153, 155, 159 topological chain, 220 topological homology, 153 topological isomorphism, 158 topological left A-module, 157 topological module, 155 topological fight A-module, 157 topological splitting, 223 topological square, 156, 191 topological tensor product, 155 topological two-sided A-module, 157 topologically cyclic vector, 178 topology of pointwise convergence, 46 topology of proofs, 51 topology of surfaces in R 3 , 709 topos, 24, 95 Tor-computing complex, 212 torsion class cogenerated by 3~, 692 torsion class of groups, 691

Subject index torsion complete p-group, 675 torsion group, 671 torsion part, 671 torsion part of a group, 669 torsion product, 697 torsion theory, 692 torsion theory cogenerated by a class 3C, 692 torsion theory generated by a class 3~, 692 torsion-free, 671 torsion-free class generated by X, 692 torsion-free class of groups, 691 torsion-free Dade functor, 796 torsion-free group of rank 1,677 torsion-free rank, 680 tortile category, 58 torus of derivations, 523 totally categorical theory, 281 totally projective group, 676 Toubassi, E., 688, 696 trace family of functions, 58 trace form, 364 trace function, 361 trace-as-feedback, 63 traced Cartesian category, 59 traced ideal, 60 traced monoidal category, 63, 65 traced strong monoidal functor, 60 traced symmetric monoidal category, 58, 66 transcendence degree, 279 transfer, 774, 798 transfer map, 758, 798 transfinite line, 250 transition probability, 64 transitive (G, H)-biset, 829 transitive Abelian group, 701 transitive biset, 791,830 translation, 14 transvectant, 395 triangular elementary transformation, 596 trichotomy conjecture, 279 trichotomy theorem, 312 trivial deformation, 514 trivial source, 760 trivial type, 309 true in 9Jr, 281 tuple sort, 286 Turing computable function, 42 Turing machine, 40 Turing-machine computable function, 18 Turing-machine computable partial functions, 8 twisted group ring, 484 two step nilpotent, 634 two-sided ring of quotients, 408 two-sorted structure, 281

875

two-step nilpotent, 624 type, 84, 677 type constructor, 39 type erasure function, 27 type I factor, 170 type inference algorithm, 27, 48 type inference rules, 26 type of ~ over A, 282 type of a universal integer, 684 type of an Abelian torsion-free group of rank 1,677 type of an element, 677 type theory dependent-, 22 type-definable, 282 type-definable group, 280 type-definable set, 283 type-definable subgroup, 286 type-forming operation, 10 typed lambda calculus, 5, 10, 12, 14, 19, 30, 33, 55 types as functors, 36 typing rules, 27 Tzygan, B.L., 255 U, 284 U(L), 583 U (s12), 709 Uq(s12), 713 Uq(Sin), 723 Uq(so(3, C)), 729 Uq(so(n, C)), 732 Uq(SOn), 710, 732 Uq(so2,1), 730 Uq(so3,1), 732 Uq(SOn,1), 733 Uq(SOp,r), 732 Uq(su2), 709 Uq(SUn), 723 Uq (SUl,1), 710 Uq(sup,n-p), 723 Uq(SUr,s), 723 Uq(Un), 709 u(L), 586 Ullery, W., 676 Ulm factor, 673 Ulm invariant, 675, 698, 699 Ulm sequence, 673 Ulm subgroup, 673 Ulm theorem, 675, 699 Ulm type, 673 Ulm-Kaplansky invariant, 675 Ulm-Kaplansky theorem, 675 ultrafilter, 282, 328 ultrapower, 282, 328

876

Subject index

ultraproduct, 282 ultraweak amenability, 187 ultraweak homological bidimension, 243 ultraweak topology, 162 ultraweakly closed *-subalgebra of 13(H) with 1, 162 ultraweakly closed algebra, 178 ultraweakly closed operator algebra, 233 Umirbaev, U., 598 Umlauf, K.A., 617 unary sum axiom, 61 undecidable under ZFC, 677 unification problem, 26, 27 uniform algebra, 167 uniform algorithm, 39 uniform chain condition on intersections of uniformly definable subgroups, 287 uniform convergence, 156 uniform distributive module, 404 uniform right A-modules, 420 uniform right ideal, 431 uniformly definable, 287 uniformly given algorithm at all types, 19 uniformly locally nilpotent group, 290 uniformly radical commutative Banach algebra, 254 unimodular Hermitean form, 485 unimodular row, 447 uniserial Artinian ring, 407 umserial module, 401, 419, 449 umserial ring, 405 unit coherence, 44 unit-regular ring, 421,448 unitary group, 188 unitization algebra, 155, 198 unwersal R-matrix, 709, 723 universal active database, 97 unwersal active DB, 97 unwersal algebra, 12, 81 multisorted-, 6 universal algebra of queries, 83, 97 unwersal algebra of replies, 97 universal automaton, 129 umversal database, 125 universal DB, 105, 120 universal enveloping algebra, 583, 709 universal mapping property, 13 universal property, 18, 30, 163, 822 universal property of coproducts, 17, 44 universal property of lists, 18 universal property of polynomial algebras, 9 universal property of products, 44 universal property of the Burnside ring Mackey functor, 822

universal relational database, 130 universal truth, 48 universal type, 37 universally catenary ring, 327 universally Japanese local ring, 327 untying axiom, 62 untyped aspect of computation, 24 untyped expression, 22 untyped lambda calculus, 8, 25, 26 model of the-, 25 untyped lambda calculus with pairing operators, 26 upper central series, 523 upper nil-radical, 375 Urquhart, A., 67 var R, 602 Vecfd, 45 Valette, J., 364, 368, 373, 377, 379, 381 valuated p-group, 698 valuated group, 698 valuated subgroup, 698 valuation ring, 402, 463 valuation theory, 463 van der Kallen, W., 483 van der Waerden, B., 571 Van Oystaeyen, F., 471 vanishing, 58 vanishing for traces, 58 variable assignment, 27 variant type, 16 varieties of algebras, 85, 132, 562 varieties of Lie algebras, 567 variety, 83, 128, 602 variety generated by a class of algebras, 549 variety of Boolean algebra, 134, 552 variety of Boolean rings, 552 variety of cylindric algebras, 83 variety of groups, 570 variety of HAs, 134 variety of inverse semigroups, 572 variety of Lie algebra laws, 511 variety of nilpotent Lie algebra laws, 512, 631 variety of right alternative algebras, 558 variety of solvable Lie algebra laws, 512 Varopoulos algebra, 199, 245,255 varying part of a DB, 96 varying semigroup, 127 Vaughan-Lee, M., 560 vector space dimension, 279 Veis, A., 569 verbal congruence, 90, 548 verbal ideal, 563 Verity, D., 58

Subject index Verma module, 711 versal deformation, 323 vertex, 821 vertex of a Mackey functor, 821 vertex of an OG lattice, 758 vertices and sources theory of-, 821 Viljoen, G., 694 Villamayor, O.E., 466 Vinsonhaler, C., 678, 687, 689, 691,692 virtual diagonal, 185, 188 Vlasova, L.I., 686, 691 Voiculescu, D., 233 Volkov, M., 559 Volterra algebra, 187, 255 von Neumann algebra, 154, 156, 162, 229 von Neumann algebra of type II, 170 von Neumann algebra of type III, 170 von Neumann regular ring, 441,600 Vonessen, N., 390

Wn, 525 w.db A, 243 w.dg A, 242 w.dh X, 241 Walker, C., 692, 695, 699 Walker, E., 681,687, 689, 699 Waiters, R.EC., 60 Warfield duality, 691 Warfield group, 682 Warfield, R.B., Jr., 676, 681,691,693 Watanabe, Y., 469 weak T-algebras, 21 weak bidimension, 154 weak datatype, 19 weak global dimension, 242, 401 weak homological bidimension, 243 weak homological dimension, 241 weak Mal'cev class, 553 weak natural numbers object, 14, 17 weak operator topology, 156 weak* topology, 161 weakening structural rule, 49 weakly amenable, 187 weakly amenable algebra, 225 weakly amenable Banach algebra, 192 weakly amenable radical Banach algebra, 193 weakly complementable subspace, 157 weakly embedded subgroup, 303 weakly full functor, 55 weakly full representation, 55 weakly initial T-algebra, 23 weakly initial data types, 43 weakly reducible ring, 451

877

Webb, P., 770, 772, 777, 781,783, 785, 788, 789, 796, 799 Wedderburn decomposition, 223 Wedderburn theorem, 222 Weierstrass preparation theorem, 328 weight of Der g, 638 weighted convolution algebra, 186, 254 Weil, A., 296 Wermer, J., 176 Weyl algebra, 384, 442 White, 251 Whitehead group, 694, 809 Whitney, H., 695 Wickless, W., 691,692 Wiegold, J., 572 Wiener algebra, 185,254 Wigner, E., 517 Wille, R., 554 Wilson, J., 291,363 winning strategy, 56 Winskel, G., 67 Witt formula, 590 Witt, E., 485, 589 Wodzicki excision theorem, 262 Wodzicki, M., 256, 261,262 Wolk, B., 573 word problem for free biccc's, 16 word problem for typed ~.-calculi, 33 wreath products of DBs, 104 X-outer automorphism, 374 X-outer group, 369 X 9f Y, 767 Yakovlev, A.V., 678-680, 684 Yang-Baxter equation, 709 Yanking, 58 generalized-, 60 Yanking for traces, 58 Yetter cyclic linear logic, 56 Yetter, D., 40, 51 Yoneda, 40 Yoneda embedding, 24, 30, 54, 56 Yoneda extension, 210 Yoneda functor, 54 Yoneda isomorphism, 31 Yoneda lemma, 7, 29, 30, 784, 832, 833 Yoneda methods, 48 Yoshida theorem, 826 Yoshida, T., 750, 762, 773 Young tableaux, 395 Yuan, S., 477

Z(n), 670

878

Z(pC~), 426 Z ] (A, A), 176 Z ] (a, X), 175 Z~ (a, M), 470 Z i (G, X), 471

Zn(A,X),218 Zp, 758 Zp(G), 758 ZFC + V = L, 694 Zalesskii, A.I., 387 Zariski geometry, 280 Zariski open set, 476 Zariski tangent space, 516 Zariski topology, 280, 479

Subject index Zel'manov, E., 567, 569, 571 Zelinsky, D., 466 Zermelo-Frenkel axioms, 677 zero-dimensional ring, 452 ZFC, 677 Zil'ber conjecture, 279 Zil'ber indecomposability theorem, 280 Zil'ber, B., 279, 280 Zippin existence theorem, 675 Zippin theorem, 675 zonal spherical functions, 722 Zorn ring, 442 Zmud, E.M., 484

Handbook of Algebra : Volume 2

Handbook of Algebra : Volume 2

Handbook of Algebra, Volume 5

Handbook of Algebra, Volume 4

Handbook of Algebra, Volume 6

Handbook of Algebra : Volume 1

Handbook of Algebra, Volume 5 (Handbook of Algebra)

Handbook of Algebra, Volume 3 (Handbook of Algebra)

Handbook of Neurotoxicology, Volume 2

Handbook of Econometrics, Volume 2

Algebra Volume 2, 2nd Edition

Relative homological algebra Volume 2